Hyundai

JMA-9133-SA
JMA-9132-SA
JMA-9123-7XA/9XA
JMA-9122-6XA/9XA/6XAH
JMA-911 0-6XA/6XAH
JMA-7133-SA
JMA-7132-SA
JMA-7123-7XA/9XA
JMA-7122-6XA/9XA/6XAH
JMA-7110-6XA/6XAH
MARINE RADAR
EQUIPMENT
SIMPLIFIED MANUAL
1 INTRODUCTION ......... ................................................................................. ..... 1

1.1 READ ME .................................... ............................................................. 1
2 BASIC OPERATION ... ...................................................................................... 2
2.1 POWER ON AND START THE SYSTEM ................................................. 2
2.2 END THE OPERATION AND POWER OFF ............................... .............. 3
2.3 ADJUST MONITOR BRILLIANCE [BRILL] .. ........................................... 3
2.4 CHANGE OBSERVATION RANGE [RANGE +I - ] ................................. 4
2.5 ADJUST GAIN [GAIN] ................ ............................................................. 4
2.6 SUPPRESS SEA CLUTTER [SEA] .................................... ..................... 4
2.7 SUPPRESS RAIN I SNOW CLUTTER [RAIN] ........................................ 6
2.8 USING ELECTRONIC BEARING LINE (EBL 11 EBL2) ............. .............. 7
2.9 USING VARIABLE RANGE MARKER (VRM1 I VRM2) .......................... 9
IMO NO. : 9683415

DEPT NO. DEP"T NAME SHIP TYPE
5660 ELECTRIC DESIGN DEP'T 50K DWT CLASS PRODUCT I CHEMICAL TANKER
TEL. NO. SHIP NO. SHIP NAME
3980 2419 SILVER LINDA

NAME OF DRAWING
APPROVED : P.W . LEE

,...
0
tti CHECKED : H .C. WOO RADAR (1/4)
0
w tti
1- ..... DRAWN S.S. KIM
<
0
0
N
SCALE DRAWING NO. REV.NO
~
HYUNDAI NON E 51810E003 FINAL
MIPO DOCKYARD CO., LTD.
CO NSOLIDATED E-33
ULSAN KOREA
I
-----------------------
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Read Me
Abou t th is manu al
See the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for details.
Maintain this SIMPLIFIED MANUAL so that operators can refer to it at anytime.
About r ad a r equipm ent

Use the radar only as a navigation aid . The final navigation decision must always be made by the
operator him/herself. Making the fmal navigation decis ion based only on the radar display may cause
accidents such as collisions or running aground.
A bo ut sea clutter uppression

When using the sea clutter suppression function, never set the suppression level too high canceling out
all image noises from the sea surface at close range.
Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will
become inhibited.
When using the sea clutter suppression function function , make sure to choose the most appropriate
image noise suppression level.
About rain/snow clutter suppression

When using the rain/snow clutter suppression function function, never set the suppression level too
high canceling out all image noises from the rain or snow at close range.
Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but also targets such as other ships or dangerous
objects w ill become inhibited.
When using the rain/snow clutter suppression function function, make sure to choose the most
appropriate image noise suppression level.
About ta rget tra cking (TT) function

Use target tracking function only as a navigation aid. The fina l navigation decision must always be
made by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision based only on tracking target
information may cause accidents.
Tracked target information such as vector, target numerical data, and alarms may contain some errors.
Also, targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be acquired or tracked.
Making the fina l navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as
collisions or running aground.
-----------------------
2 BASIC OPERATION
2.1 Power ON and Start the System
Procedures
1 Check that the ship's mains are turned on.
2 Press the [POWER] key.
• 0
oo0000
0 0
8~
0 0 00 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
3 Wait until the preheating time is over.
When the preheating time is over, the preheating time screen disappears, and I Preheat Iupper left of
the display changes to I Standby I.
4 Press the [TX I STBY] key.
0 0
• o00008~
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
The radar will start transmission and the antenna will start rotating.
I Standby I upper left of the display changes to I Transmit I.
2
-----------------------
2.2 End the Operation and Power Off
l:tftl
o c I I
•0 cooooB@
c 0 coo 0 0
0 0
0
coo
coo
0
• 0
oo0000 8 @
0 0 0 coo c 0
0 o ceo
0 coo
0
The system w ill be turned off.
2.3 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL]
Procedures
1 Obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance by turning the

[BRILL] dial at the lower right of the LCD monitor unit.
0
r--
r--
r--
~
•
ln consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust LCD monitor brilliance that is high enough to easily
observe the radar display but does not g lare .
3
-----------------------
2.4 Change Observation Range [RANGE +I -]
Procedures
1 When increasing the observation range, press the [RANGE+] key.
0 0
oo0 OOOO
0
~®
0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
Increasing the observation range will enable a wider range to be observed.
2 When decreasing the observation range, press the [RANGE-] key.
o o I I
oo0 OOOO ~®
0
0
0 000 0 0
0
0
000
000
0
Decreasing the observation range will enable a narrower range to be observed.
2.5 Adjust Gain [GAIN]
rocedures
1 Turning the [GAIN] dial.
o o I I
ooOooeB®
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
By increasing receiving gain, the range to observe radar video is widened.
2.6 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA]
Using the manual sea clutter suppression mode
rocedures
1 Turning the [SEA] dial.
0 0
ooooeoB®
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
The sea clutter suppression function suppresses sea clutter returns by decreasing the receiving gain on
a short range.
4
-----------------------
Using the automatic sea clutter suppression mode
Procedures
1 Press the [SEA] dial.
0 0
oo oo e o 8 @
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 coo 0 0
0
000
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, and I AUTO I is displayed in sea clutter
suppression (Sea) mode switching.
2 Make adjustments by turning the [SEA] dial.
o o I I
o cOO e o 8 @
0
0
0 0
0
0
000
0 0 0
00 0
0
0 0
Even when the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the [SEAl dial can make
fine adjustments manually.
Cancellation
0 0
oo oo e o 8 @
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0
0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and I MAN I is displayed in the sea clutter
suppression (Sea) mode field.
5
-----------------------
2.7 Suppress Rain I Snow Clutter [RAIN]
Using the manual rain I snow clutter suppression mode
rocedures
1 Turning the [RAIN] dial.
0 0
ooo e oo B@
0 0 0 00 0 0 0
0 0
0
000
0 00
0
The rain I snow clutter suppression function suppress rain I snow clutter returns by decreasing the
receiving gain.
Since the rain I snow clutter suppression function also has the effect of suppressing sea clutter, the
suppression efficiency improves when the [RAIN I dial is used with the [SEAl dial.
Using the automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode
rocedures
1 Press the [RAIN] dial.
0 0
ooo e oo B@
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
0 00
0
I I
The automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is selected, and AUTO is displayed in the sea
clutter suppression (Sea) mode switching and the rain I snow clutter suppression (Rain) mode
switching.
2 Make adjustments by turning the [RAIN] dial and the [SEA] dial.
0 0
ooo ee oB@
0
0
0 0
0
0
000
000
000
0
0 0
Even when the automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the [RAlNJ dial and
the fSEAJ dial can make fine adj ustments manually.
6
-----------------------
Cancellation
o o I I
aao e ooB@
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
coo
0
The a utomatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and I AUTO I is changed to
I MAN I in the sea clutter suppression (Sea) mode field a nd the rain I snow clutter suppression (Rain)
mode fie ld.
2.8 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL 1 I EBL2)
[I] Operating EBL {EBL)
Procedures
1 Press the [EBL 1] or [EBL2] key.
o o I I
oo00008@
° 0
•
0
• 0
0
0
000
000
000
0
The EBL adjustment will be highlighted, and the selected EBL becomes operable.
2 Turn the [EBL] dial.
0 0
ooOOooB@
0 0 0 000 0 0
•
0
0
000
000
0
To tum the [EBL[ dial to the right, tum the EBL dial clockwise, to tum the [EBLJ dial to the left, tum
the EBL dial counterclockwise.
7
-----------------------
Cancellation
1 Press the [EBL 1] or [EBL2] key again.
0 0
oo00008@
0
°
•
0
• 0
0
0
000
000
000
0
The selected EBL display will disappear.
[111 Moving the Starting Point of EBL
The system provides three types of EBL starting points. Select one of them in accordance with
ose.
:The EBL starting point is defined as the own ship's position.
:The EBL starting point is moved and fixed on the radar display.
:The EBL starting point is moved and fixed at the latitude and longitude.
To move the starting point of EBL
Procedures
1 Make EBL 1 or EBL2 operable.
2 Press the [EBL] dial to set [ ] ] or [ [ ] for the EBL 1 I EBL2 starting
point mode switching.
0 0
oo00008@
0 0 0 000 0 0
•
0
0
000
000
0
The selected EBL starting point mode is switched as shown below each time the dial is pressed.
: !T . 045.0
-~~~-~ -·-
°
VRMl NM '
EBL2R""i35-:o-- 0 ro
VRM2.•.· •··.· .•.
. .NM ~--
3 Put t he cursor on the EBL starting point is to be moved, and left-click.
0 0
oo00008~
00 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
The selected EBL starting point will be determ ined.
8
-----------------------
To return the EBL starting point to own ship's position
Procedures
1 Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable.
2 Press the [EBL] dial to set D for the EBL 1 I EBL2 starting point mode
switching.
0 0
o o 00008@
0 0 0 coo 0 0
•
0 coo
0 coo
0
The selected EBL starting point wi ll be set as the own ship's position .
2.9 Using Variable Range Marker (VRM1 I VRM2)
To operate VRM
Procedures
1 Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key.
0 0
o0 o0 0 0 0 0 8 @
0 coo ••
0 0 coo
0 000
0
The VRM adjustment will be highlighted, and the selected VRM becomes operable.
EBLl iT ~
_ _ 3.00_____,NM
EBL2 iT ----fJQ:
VRM2 6.00 · NM ~
2 Turn the [VRM] dial.
o o I I
oo00008@
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0 coo •
0 000
To tum the IVRMJ dial to the right, the VRM control wide, to tum the (VRMI dial to the left, the
VRM control narrow.
9
-----------------------
ancellation
1 Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key again.
0 0
oo00008@
0 0
0
0 000 • •
0
0
000
000
0
The selected VRM di splay will djsappea r.
2.10 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN]
rocedures
1 Press the [GAIN] dial.
0 0
ooOOo
0 0
e B@
0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
0 00
0
The selected pulse length will be displayed in the pulse length indication .
2.11 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI Mode)
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the azimuth display mode switching, and left-click.
o o I I
oo00008
00 0 000 0 0
~
0 0
0
000
000
0
The azimuth display modes are switched.
10
-----------------------
2.12 Switch True I Relative Motion Display Mode (TM I RM)
Switching Motion Display Mode
rocedures
1 Put the cursor on the motion mode true I TM II relative I RM I

switching, and left-click.
c c I I
cc00008~
C C
0
C CDC C C
C
C
CDC
CDC
0
RM(T)
The motion display mode are switched.
Resetting Own Ship to its Initial Position in True Motion (TM) Mode
rocedures
1 Hold down the motion mode true I relative switching I TM I for

2 seconds.
c c
cc0000 8c~
C
0
C C
C
C
CCC
DCC
CCC
00
Own ship wi ll be reset to its initial position as established when the relative motion mode is changed to
the true motion mode. The ship starts moving from that position.
II
-----------------------
2.13 Display Radar Trails (TRAILS)
Changing the length of the trail
rocedures
1 Put the cursor on the radar trails display time switching, and left-click.
Values of the length of the radar trai I are switched.
Erasing Trails Data
rocedures
1 Hold down the radar trails display time switching for 5 seconds.
0 0 . _ 1- - - - - - '
000
All the saved trails data will be erased. The system starts plotting trails in initial state.
If radar trai ls display time switching button is pushed for 2 seconds, a RADAR Trails Setting menu
wi ll be displayed. Furthermore, data will be erased if it continues pressing.
Changing Motion Mode of Trails (Trails mode)
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on radar trails display true [ [ ] I relative [[] switching,
and left-click.
0 0
oo OOoo
0 0 0 00 0
B~
0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
The trails motion modes are switched.

If true motion (TM) mode is selected in azimuth display mode, only the true motion trails mode is
available.
12
-----------------------
3 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
3.1 Acquiring Target (ACQ MANUAL]
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the target to be acquired, and press the

[ACQ MANUAL] key.
o o I I
oo00008@
o o 0 o•o o o
0 0 DOD
0 coo
0
The target will be acquired and the initial acquisition symbol will be displayed. The vector will be
displayed within one minute.
(:\
\::__)
3.2 Display Tracked Target Data [TGT DATA]
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the tracked target for which numeric data is to be
displayed, and press the [TGT DATA] key.
0 0
oo00008@
o o 0 • oo o o
0 0
0
D O D
DOD
0
The data of the selected target wi ll be displayed.
0 .J
13
-----------------------
3.3 Canceling Tracked Targets [ACQ CNCL]
Canceling targets one by one [ACQ CNCL)
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the tracked target to the desired for cancel ing target,
and press the [ACQ CNCL] key.
0 0
o o00008@
o o 0 co • o o
0 0
0
000
0 0 0
0
The vectors and symbols of the tracked targets will disappear, and only the radar video remain.
Canceling all targets collectively [ACQ CNCL]
Procedures
1 Press the [ACQ CNCL] key for 5 seconds.
0 0
oo00008@
o o 0 co • o o
0 0 coo
0 000
0
The vectors and symbols of all the targets will disappear, and only the radar video remain.
14
-----------------------
4 AIS OPERATION
4.1 Setting AIS Display Function [AIS ITT]
Procedures
1 Press the [AIS I TT] key.
o o I I
oo00008@
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 o0 •00o o0 O
The received AI S infonnation will be shown on the radar display.
4.2 Activate AIS Targets (ACT AIS)
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the sleeping AIS target to be activated, and right-click.
0 0
oo00008
00 0 000 0 0
~
0 0
0
000
000
0
The setting items for cursor modes w ill be displayed.
15
-----------------------
2 Left-click I 2. ACT AIS I.
0 0
oo0 0000
0
8~
0 co o 0 0
0 0
0
c oo
co o
0
The selected AIS target will be activated.
4.3 Display Activated AIS Target Data [TGT DATA]
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the AIS target of which data is to be displayed, and
press the [TGT DATA] key.
0 0
oo00008@
o o 0 • co o o
0 0
0
CDC
DOC
0
The data of the selected AIS target will be displayed.
16
-----------------------
4.4 Deactivate AIS Targets (DEACT AIS)
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the activated AIS target to be deactivated, and

right-click.
o o I I
oo0 0000
0 0 00 0
8~
0 0
0 0
0
0 0 0
00 0
0
The setting items for cursor modes wi ll be displayed.
2 Left-click I 5. DEACT AIS 1.

0 0
o o00008
0 0 0 0 00 0 0
~
0 0
0
000
000
0
The selected AIS target wi ll be deactivated.
o:
17
-----------------------
5 I
TARGET TRACKING AIS COMMON
OPERATION
5.1 Setting Vectors (Vector)
Setting vector mode IT I R I VECTI
Procedures
1 Press the [T I R I VECT] key.
0 0
o0 o0 0• 0 00 8 ®
000 0 0
0 0
0
000
00 0
0
The current vector mode [[) (true vector) or [[] (relative vector) will be displayed in the target
vector d isplay true I relative switching.
Setting vector time on the display (Vector Time)
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the target vector time setting, and left-click.
o o I I
oooooo8~
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
The Vector Time value input screen will appear.
2 Enter the value to be set as vector time.
0 0
ooooooB~
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input menu, see Section 6.2.
18
-----------------------
5.2 Setting Collision Decision Criteria (CPA I TCPA Limit)
Input of CPA Limit
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the CPA limit setting, and left-click.
D 0
DoooooB~
D0 D 000 0 D
0 D
D
000
000
0
The C PA Limit va lue input screen will appear.
2 Enter the value to be set as a CPA limit.
D 0
Do00008~
D0 D 000 0 D
0 D
D
000
0 0 0
0
Input of TCPA Limit
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the TCPA limit setting, and left-click.
D o I I
ooooooB~
D 0 D 000 0 D
0 D 000
D DOD
0
Limit 1.5 NM 10
The TCPA Limit va lue input screen will appear.
2 Enter the value to be set as a TCPA limit.
0 0
ooooooB~
0 0 D DOD D D
0 D DOO
D DOD
0
For how to input nwneric data on the numeric va lue input me nu, see Section 6.2.
19
-----------------------
6 OTHER CONTENTS
6.1 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK]
Procedures
1 Press the [ALARM ACK] key.
0 0
o0 0. oooo
0 0 0 0
B@
0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
The alann will stop buzzing.
6.2 Operation on Numeric Value Input menu
Entered value
Numeric button
Enter button
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the numeric button to the desired value, and left-click.
0 0
ooooooB~
0
0
0 0 000 0 0
0
0
000
000
0
2 Make sure that the entered value is correct, put the cursor on th e enter
button I ENT I, and left-click.
o o I I
oo00008~
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
The set value is reflected to the operating state.
20
{
For further information,contact:
7 .7.~.7. Hii:~JI1 L- -r:toiJ *-t!A- I~Rcl aapanRadio Co.,.lid.

Not use the asbestos Since 1915
URL htto:f/ www.jrc.co.ip

Marine Service Department
Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile: +81-3-3779-1420
e-mail : [email protected]
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31 - 20-658-0755
SEATILE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
CODE No.7ZPR00711 OI ETII ISO 9001, ISO 14001 Certified
©JUN. 2008 Edition 1 JRC Printed 1n Japan
1/ 5
Messrs.
~~PX:-
INSPECTION DATA
f.J'J~s v ----5~ ---- ~ fi
MARINE RADAR EQUIPMENT
JMA-9122-GXA
~;ij::~~
Approved type RDLS4NM9-25KPON-1
~%
Approval NO. R08016
~AI3
Approval date 1 OCT 2008
Serial No. LC 53710
Date of Inspection 2 JUL 2014
~ ~
Approved by
~:l!ti!t
Inspected by
~1!1:¥-!. ~ $ ~~ mJ::Ajr.f£W1¥:liiE$ Mi:?'!~r.f£W1~HiE7''!--7'

Section Navigation Group, Quality Assurance Department I Marine Electronics
('-'RC) 3apanRadioCo.,.lld.
2DJ-8886
2/ 5
J.!ii[{lf.q.
Serial No. LC 53710
t~~~.g. .'j!IJ :iE:
1. Verification to specification Judgment Good
tl $ ~ ~ ~ m:liilili%
u n i t M 0 d e I Serial No.
~rp~
Scanner Unit NKE-11 25PM LC 1 4 6 7 6
ti$0)MPl m:iF~
Components Display Unit NCD - 4990T LC 53 7 1 0
.
/{7;;t-"Y/.A.:C.:::.?'
NJU-85 MX B 2079
Performance Monitor
. it.tl~·
Accessories
tl~t~St.t~
2. Specifications of sensor signal
•
N a m e
s ;1. -
Manufacturer
"h- ~ it
Mo d e I
f± ~
S ecification
G y R 0
1 8 0 X STE P
L 0 G
200P / NM
tlf·~· <~H.lt& V:f.li) .'j!IJ :iE:

3. Structural inspection (Appearance & Constructio n) Judgment Good
tt~~· .'j!IJ :iE:

4. Performance inspection Judgment Good
f:t~IIJfF!itD
4.1 Overall operation test
!itDIJi§
I t e m S ecification Result
.:Y.~U.fll!l 3 71 00 t.P
1.
Pre-heat time min s
2. :.<E tMt!ifff-'flUE AC 100/11 0/115V, 50/60Hz,1¢
AC 220 V 50 Hz 1 ¢
- Rated power supply voltage AC220/230/240V, 50/60Hz 1¢
trtifff-tt![E~liJ :.<E~1Ullit-f!tB: ± 10%
3. Good
Power supply voltage variation Rated value ± 10%
W1~f!t)J 0.8 kVA l;J. T
4. 0 . 440 k VA
Power consumption 0.8 kVA or less
5. Iii* lie~t~Uo~n 96l!l!v/~

Good
Maximum detectable range 95 NM range
QtH:e~tJUo~n 40m l;J. T
6. Good
Minimum detectable range 40m or less
ffaiii&~~it;tj (STC) Wl*n~~aoc:,n,.;,.:.c
7. Good
Anti-Clutter sea (STC) Should be effective
8.
iff ·Wi~~it;tj (FTC) WI* n>!8ao c:,n,.;,.:. c Good
Anti-Clutter rain (FTC) Should be effective
9
A'JtUi~~ (SH\11) mo.s grJ;J. T Good
Ship's heading marker (SHM) Marker width ; within OS
3/ 5
~~ti-f}
Ser ial No. LC 53710
ttOr.AEI
I t e m Specification Result
l
10
i!I!~!JJJW s IIi¥ rdl.~;~. J:. Good
Continuous operation More than 8 hours
~l¥l~~tt!it0
4.2 Electrical characteristic test
~Jl ~ {f:.l;
tttDr.AEI
I t e m Specification Result *
7k¥t:'-.b.~L.i
1. 1.2° ± 20% Good
Horizontal beam width
~[]1t:'- .b.~L.i
2. 20° +10% I - 0% Good
Vertical beam width
~-7'lf'IJttn::JJ 650VA .l;l.r 50 VA
3.
Scanner motor power 650VA or less
4.
?~;:t-.1-o:--m~ ·I=% M1568BS No. 072788
Magnetron type and serial No.
5.
ll!:f;JmIBt ~ 9410 ± 30MHz 9 4 1 8 MHz
Transmitter Frequency
6.
)lS:f-g ~MJ 1:±1 h 25kW± 50% 2 6. 5 kW
Transmitting peak power
tl~tr.J~~ttt.tD
4.3 Mechanical characteristic test
1.
sg cp tJiH!!J «Gfi 20 @J.l;I.J:./:$1
2 4. 0
@J/ :$1
Scanner revolution 20rpm or more rpm
v-7'-IIJR-~0)1'JWJOO:~ 320mm i l l
2. Good
PPI effective diameter 320mm or more
I \- 13 ~lHli ;F iil
4.4 Check meter indicated valus
TUNE 48NM 5~9 9

m;r-~
1.
Display Unit
MAG·I 48NM 4 ~ 10 6
~lfl *llt1J7l<~it J¥11 ~

5. SCANNER Water-Proof test Judgment Good
4/ 5
!li'Ji1I.ffi' f.:·
Serial No. LC 53710
tfi~.Yitnttft~:i:
6. Performance inspection (TI)
~.g-ltJfF~~
6.1 Overall operation
f,t~!A§ m f! I ~ i4 *6 *
I t e m Specification/Condition Result
f3~tmt!E.&tfi@IE: §11~ ftj;:: 100 §#l
"jj )! ElltJ/~ItJ
1. Good
Acquisition and Tracking Automatic and Manual
Up to 100 targets
--<~1-;v~:lf- "E--t: lt/ff!~i!ll.-{? 1- )!,.
.-{? I-JL,..ftO)i1)~
2. Good
Vector display Mode True/Relative
Vector length
Mi.ilf.~if- 10 #.\~lf-
3. Good
Past position 10 dots
~rr~t.,} ~ltJI:: J: ~illlSti3
4. Good
Trial simulation Speed anj cx:use charge by manual
ii!~llll1? I §~-3l.I;J:'i:§tJF<iJ~
5. Good
Tracking cancel One by one and all
6.
trfl tiE~ 91- f.JVl~ ( otJJ JIIHJE a;J) Good
Suppression area
7.
l'k flOC~ 7f- Good
Numerical display
tf-'r')'/~ ft j;:: 32 J!.
8. Good
Guard ring Max 32NM
9. 'Ul~:lf- Good
Warning alarm
"./7-7 A7.:r.-1'7-tUfl
10. Good
System failure alarm
5/5
m'J i1Hif ~
Serial No. LC 53710
List of Measurement Equ ipment
2. JUL. 2014
~:ff!; ~-1J~ g!l~

~!!-~ li~JJMI!i
Name Manufacture Model Management code Ca l Due Date
;t~DA.:::J- :1
Tektronix 4658 67-1 -368 MAR 2015
OSCILLOSCOPE
1~')-j.-J;. Ag i Ient
4358 05-2-905 APR 2015
POWER METER Technologies
/~'J-1:! ~~- Ag i lent
8481A 10-Q0041 JAN 2015
POWER SENSOR Technologies
A.~? ~-;1.L... 77-:J-f-+f Ag i lent
8563EC 04-Q2293 FEB 2015
SPECTRUM ANALYZER Technologies
JliHit l!r :t.J ? ~ IJ. Ag i lent APR 2015
5382A 11-1-383
FREQUENCY COUNTER Technologies
7 '/T.:f'--1]. Agi Ient
X382A 1990-0097 JAN 2015
ATTENUATOR Technologies
A. ~ ''.J j'r);t ''.J 7-
SE IKO S032-4000 01-02206 SEP 2014
STOP WATCH
MARINE RADAR
EQUIPMENT
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
IMO NO. : 9683415

DEP'TNO. DEP'T NAM E SHIP TYPE

NAM E OF DRAWI NG
APPROVED : P.W . LEE

,._.
0
It) CHECKED : H.C. WOO RADAR (2/4)
0
w It)
1-
<t: ....
0
DRAWN : S.S. KIM
Cl N
SCALE DRAWING NO. REV.NO
~
HYUNDA I NONE 5181 0E003 FINAL
MIPO DOCKYARD CO. , LTD.
ULSAN KOREA CONSOLIDATED
I E-33
+++ PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION +++
• Cautions for high voltage
High voltages from hundreds volts to tens of thousands volts are to be applied to
the electronic equipment such radio and radar devices. You do not face any
danger during normal operation, but sufficient cares are required for maintenance,
inspection and adjustment of their internal components. (Maintenance, check-up
and adjustment of the inside of the equipment are prohibited except by
maintenance specialists.)
High voltages of tens of thousands volts are so dangerous as to bring an

instantaneous death from e lectric shock, but even voltages of hundred volts may
sometimes lead to a death from electric shock. To prevent such an accident, make
it a rule to turn off the power switch, discharge capacitors with a wire surely
earthed on an end make sure that internal parts are no longer charged before you
touch any parts inside these devices. At the time, wearing dry cotton gloves
ensures you further to prevent such danger. It is also a necessary caution to put
o ne of your hands in the pocket and not to use your both hands at the sam e time.
It is also important to select a stable foothold always to prevent additional injuries

o nce you were shocked by electricity. lf you were injured from electric shock,
disinfect the burn sufficiently and get it taken care of promptly.
• What to do in case of electric shock

When finding a victim of electric shock, turn off the power source and earth the
circuit immediately.
lf it is impossible to turn off the circuit, move the victim away promptly using
insulators such as dry wood plate and c loth wi thout touching the victim directly.
In case of electric shock, breathing may stop sudden ly if current flows to the
respirati on center in the brain. If the shock is not so strong, artificial respiration
may recover breathing. When shocked by electricity, the victim will come to look
very bad with weak pulse or without beating, resul ting in unconsciousness and
rigidity. ln this case, it is necessary to perform an emergency measure
immediately.
7ZPRD0685
+++ FIRST-AID TREATMENTS +++
* First-aid treatments
As far as the victim of electric shock is not in dangerous condition, do not move
him and practice artificial respiration on him immediately. Once started, it should
be continued rhythmically.
(I) Do not touch the victim confusedly as a result of the accident, but the
rescuer may also get an electric shock.
(2) Turn off the power source calmly and move the victim away quietly from
the electric line.
(3) Call a physician or ambulance immediately or ask someone to call a doctor.
(4) Lay the victim on this back and loosen his necktie, clothes, belt, etc.
(5)
a. Examine the victim's pulse.
b. Examine his heartbeat bringing your ear close to his heart.
c. Examine his breathing bringing the back of your hand or your face
close to his face.
d. Check the size of the pupils of his eyes.
(6) Open the victim's mouth and take out artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing
gum if any. Keep his mouth open, stretch his tongue and insert a towel or
the like in his mouth to prevent the tongue from suffocating. (If it is hard to
open his mouth due to set teeth, open it with a screwdriver and insert a towel
in this mouth.)
(7) Then, wipe his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside.
ii
* When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped
(Mouth-to-mouth respiration) Fig 1.
(I) Tilt the victim's head back as far as this face looks back. (A pillow may be
inserted his neck.)
(2) Push his jaw upward to open his throat wide (to spread his airway).
(3) Pinch the victim's nostrils and take a deep breath, block his mouth
completely with yours and blow into his mouth strongly. Take a deep breath
again and blow into his mouth. Continue this I 0 to 15 times a minutes
(blocking his nostrils).
(4) Carefully watch that he has recovered his natural breathing and atop
practicing artificial respiration.
(5) If it is difficult to open the victim's mouth, insert a rubber or vinyl tube into
one of hi s nostril s and blow into it blocking the other nostril and his mouth
completely.
(6) When the victim recovers consciousness, he may try to stand up suddenly,
but let him lie calm ly and serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep
him warm and quiet. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.)
Method of mouth-to-mouth respiration by raising hea

(1 )Raise the victim's head. Support
his forehead with one of your hand
and his neck with the other hand. CD
When you tilt his head backward, the

victim , in most cases, opens his
mouth to the air. This makes mouth-
to mouth respiration easy.
(2)Cover his mouth as widely as

possible with yours and press your
cheek against his nose 0
or, pinch his nostrils with your fingers

to prevent air from leaking. @
(3)Biow into his lungs. Continue

blowing into his mouth until his breast
swells. Blow into his mouth as quickly
as possible for the first 10 times.
Fig 1. Mouth-to mouth respiration
iii
*When both pulse and breathing have stopped
Perform the (Cardiac massage) Fig 2. and (Mouth-to-mouth respiration) Fig 1.
When no pulse has come not to be felt, his pupils are open and no heartbeat is
heard, cardiac arrest is supposed to have occurred and artificial respiration must
be performed.
(I) Place your both hands, one hand on the other, on the lower one third area of
his breastbone and compress his breast with your elbows applying your
weight on his breast so that it is dented about 2cm (Repeat compressing his
breast 50 times or so a minutes). (Cardiac massage)
(2) In case of one rescuer,
Repeat cardiac massages about 15 times and blow into his mouth 2 times
quickly, and repeat this combination.
Jn case of two rescuers,
One person repeats cardiac massages 15 times while the other person blow
into his mouth twice, and they shall repeat this combination. (Perform the
cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth respiration)
(3 ) Examine his pupils and his pulse sometimes. When the both have returned
to normal, stop the artificial respiration, serve him with a cup of hot coffee
or tea and keep him warm and calm while watching him carefully. Commit
the victim to a medical specialist depending on hi s condition. (Never give
him alcoholic drinks.) To let him recover from the menta l shock , it is
necessary for persons concerned to understand hi s situations and the
necessary treatment.
:)
Fig 2 . Cardiac massage
iv
PREFACE
Thank you very much for purchasing the JRC marine radar equipment, JMA-9 100
sen es.
This equipment is a marine radar equipment designed to obtain safe operati on of

marine ships.
This equipment consists of a radar signal transmitter-receiver unit, a LCD display

uni t and a scanner unit as its main units.
• Before operating the equipment, be sure to read this instruction manual

carefu lly for correct operation.
• Maintain this instruction manual so that operators can refer to it at anytime.
Refer to this manual when any inconvenience or defect occurs.
v
e Before Operation e
Pictorial Indication
Various pictorial indications are included in this manual and are shown on these
equipment so that you can operate them safety and correctly and prevent any
danger to you and/or to other persons and any damage to your property during
operation. Such indications and the ir meanings are as follows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:
This indication is shown where incorrect

& oANGER equipment operation due to negligence may
cause death or serious injuries.
This indication is shown where any person is

& wARNING supposed to be in danger of being killed or
seriously injured if this indication is neglected
and these equipment are not operated correctly.
& cAUTION supposed to be injured or any property damage
is supposed to occur if this indication is
neglected and these equipment are not
operated correctly.
Examples of Pictorial Indication
The 6. mark represents CAUTION (including DANGER and

WARNING).Detailed contents of CAUTIO ("Electric
Shock" in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark.
Electric Shock
The 0 mark represents prohibition. Detailed contents of the

prohibited action ("Disassembling Prohibited" in the example
on the left.) is shown in the mark.
Disassembling Prohibited
Prohibited
The e mark represents instruction.
Discon nect the

0
Instruction
Detailed contents of the instruction ( " Disconnect the power
plug " in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark.
power plug
Warning Label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipm ent.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.
vi
e PRECAUTIONS e
&oANGER
Never conduct inspection or repair work of equipment
components.
Inspection or repair work by uncertified personnel may
result in fire hazard or electrocution.
For inspection and repair work of equipment
components, consult with our branch office, branch
shop, sales office, or our distributor in your district.
When conducting maintenance, make sure to turn the
8 main power off.Failure to comply may result in

electrocution.
Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment.
8 Especially when a rectifier is used, make sure to turn it

off since voltage is still outputted from the rectifier even
after the indicator and the radar are turned off. Failure to
comply may result in equipment failure, or death or
serious injury due to electric shock.
When conducting maintenance work on the scanner,
8 make sure to turn its main power off.Failure to comply

may result in electrocution or injuries.
vii
&oANGER
Make sure to turn off the scanner safety switch. Failure to
8 comply may result in injuries caused by physical contact

with the rotating scanner.
&wARNING
Never directly touch the internal components of the
scanner or indicator. Direct contact with these high-
voltage components may cause electrocution. For
maintenance, inspection, or adjustment of equipment
To contact our sales department, branch offices, branch
shops, and sales offices:
Please refer to the "Office List" at the end of the
document.
Do not get close to the radiant section of the scanner. It
is a rotating part, and it may cause injuries if it suddenly
starts rotating and consequently hits the body. It is
recommended that the radiant section be installed at a
high place such as on the roof of the wheelhouse, on the
flying bridge, on the trestle, or on the radar mast so that
no one can get close to it. When any work must be done
on the scanner, make sure to turn the safety switch off.
viii
& wARNING
Microwave radiation level:
Keep away from a scanner when it is transmitting.
The high level of microwave is radiated from the front
face of the scanner specified below. The microwave
exposure at close range could result in injuries
(especially of the eyes).
NKE-1125/1129/2254 Scm 81cm 162cm
NKE-1130/1139 11cm 76cm 181cm
Make sure to install the scanner at a place higher than
0 human height.
Direct exposure to electromagnetic waves at close range
will have adverse effects on the human body.
0 will have adverse effects on the human body. When it is

necessary to get close to the scanner for maintenance or
inspection purposes, make sure to turn the indicator
power switch to " OFF" or "STBY."
When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn
0 off the power so that the power supply to t he equipment

is completely cut off.
Some equipment components can carry electrical current
even after the power switch is turned off, and conducting
maintenance work without unplugging the power
connector may result in electrocution, equipment failure,
or accidents.
ix
&wARNING
When cleaning the display screen, do not wipe it too
strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or
thinner to clean the screen. Failure to comply will result
in damage to the screen surface.
Do not change MBS Level/Area unless absolutely
8 necessary.
Incorrect adjustment will result in deletion of nearby
target images and thus collisions may occur resulting in
death or serious injuries.
When disposing of used lithium batteries, be sure to
8 insulate the batteries by attaching a piece of adhesive

tape on the + and - terminals. Failure to comply may
cause heat generation, explosion, or fire when the
batteries get shorted out.
& cAUTION
Use the radar only as a navigation aid. The final
8 navigation decision must always be made by the

operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision
based only on the radar display may cause accidents
such as collisions or running aground.
X
& cAUTION
Use Target Tracking (TT) function only as a navigation
8 aid. The final navigation decision must always be made

by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation
decision based only on tracking target information may
cause accidents.
Tracking target information such as vector, target
numerical data, and alarms may contain some errors.
Also, targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be
acquired or tracked.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the
radar display may cause accidents such as collisions or
running aground.
A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is
8 instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar.

In this case, the power should be turned on again.
When using the [AUTO SEA] function , never set the

suppression level too high canceling out all image noises
from the sea surface at close range .
Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets
such as other ships or dangerous objects will become
inhibited.
When using the [AUTO SEA] function , make sure to
choose the most appropriate image noise suppression
level.
When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, never set the
from the rain or snow at close range.
Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but
also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects
will become inhibited.
When using the [AUTO RAIN] function , make sure to
level.
xi
& cAUTION
When setting a guard zone, make sure to properly adjust
8 gain, sea-surface reflection suppression level, and rain/

snow reflection suppression level so that the optimal
target images are always on the radar screen. The guard
zone alarm will not be activated for targets undetected by
the radar, and it may result in accidents such as
collisions.
The simulation function is used exclusively for deciding
8 whether or not target tracking is properly operating.

Therefore, never use this function unless you wish to
check target tracking operations.
Note especially that, if this function is used during actual
navigation, simulated targets are displayed and may
become confused with other actual targets. Therefore,
never use this function during actual navigation.
Optimal values have been set for VD LEVEL and
CONSTANT; therefore, never change their values unless
absolutely necessary. Failure to comply may result in
accidents that would lower target tracking performance.
Make sure to shut off the main power before replacing
parts. Failure to comply may result in electrocution or
equipment failure.
When replacing magnetrons, make sure to shut off the
8 main power and let the equipment stand for more than 5
m inutes to discharge the high-voltage circuit. Failure to
comply may result in electrocution.
xii
&cAUTION
Make sure to take off your watch when your hand must
8 get close to the magnetron.

Failure to comply may result in damage to the watch
since the magnetron is a strong magnet.
Make sure that two or more staff member work together
8 when replacing the LCD. If only one person attempts to

replace the LCD, he/she may drop it and become injured.
Do not directly touch the inverter circuit of the LCD

display with a bare hand since high voltage temporarily
remains in the circuit even after the main power is shut
off.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution.
Any adjustments must be made by specialized service
personnel.
Incorrect settings may result in unstable operation.
Do not make any adjustments during navigation. Failure

to comply may result in adverse effects on the radar
function which may lead to accidents or equipment
failure.
personnel.
Failure to comply may result in accidents or equipment
failure.
failure .
xiii
&cAUTION
Do not change the quantization level settings unless
absolutely necessary. If set at an inappropriate value, the
target acquisition or target tracking function deteriorates,
and this may lead to accidents.
xiv
The Mounting Point of the Warning Label
OEJ 0
h ~ 14
0 0
I I
Ill
0 0
~~ DD ~
Warning Label / ~ ~
- D
0000000000000000 0000000000000000
0 0
NCD-4990 Display Unit
Warning Label
• . /
/ .
·~
. ~
.
c::::::J
-===:I
-==-·
. 7
-==-
-==-
-==-
l!== = = == = = ::!J @
. .. . . .
.
• • • • • •
Front face Back face
NWZ-170 Monitor Unit
XV
ooD o
Warning Label
N DC-1399-9 Radar Process Unit

(Desktop Type)
Warning Label
o;
NBA-5135 AC/DC Converter

(Desktop Type)
xvi
0 0 0 0
Warning
Label
0 0 0 0
NQE-3141-4A/8A lnterswitch Unit
0
0
D
Warning
Label
0 0 0
0
NQE-3167 Power Control Unit
xvii
Warning Label
NKE-21 03-6/6HS Scanner Unit
Warning Label
NKE-1129-7/9 Scanner Unit

NKE-1125-6/9 Scanner Unit
NKE-2254-6HS Scanner Unit
xviii
0 0 0 0 0 0
Warn ing Label
N KE-1139/1130 Scanner Unit
0
0
D
Warning Label
0 0
NTG-3230/3225 Transmitter Receiver Unit
xix
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE
Scanner Unit Type NKE-1130 ( 12 feet)
Scanner Unit Type NKE-1139 ( 12 feet)
Transmitter Receiver Unit Type NTG-3230(30kW)
XX
I..JRCj
Scanner Unit Type NK.E- 11 29-7 (7 feet)
IJRCI
Scanner Unit Type N KE-1 129-9 (9 feet)
Transmitter Receiver Unit Type NTG-3225(25kW)
xxi
I -
Scanner Unit Type NKE- ll 25-6 (6 feet)
I.JRC I
- - ..
Scanner Unit Type NKE- 11 25-9 (9 feet)
Scanner Unit Type NKE-2254-6HS (6 feet)
xxii
r. •
......... . .
--
Scanner Unit Type NKE-2103-6 (6 feet)
• "'9-
--
Scanner Unit Type NKE-21 03-6HS (6 feet)
Power Control Unit Type NQE-3 167
xxiii
Display Unit Type NCD-4990 (Stand alone type)
lnterswitch Unit Type NQE-3141-4A
xxiv
Monitor Unit Type NWZ-170 (Desktop type)
Operation Unit Type NCE-5163 (Desktop type)
Radar Process Unit Type NDC-1399-9 (Desktop type)

DISPLAY UNIT TYPE NCD-4990T (DESKTOP TYPE)
XXV
GLOSSARY
This section describes the main terms used for thjs equjpment and general related
maritime terms.
A
AZ Acquisition/Activation zone
A zone set up by the operator in which the system should
automatically acquire radar targets and activate reported AIS targets
when entering the zone.
Activated target A target representing the automatic or manual activation of a
sleeping target for the display of additional information.
AIS Automatic Identification System
A system which enables ships and shore stations to obtain
identifying and navigation information about other srups at sea,
using an automated transponder.
Anti-clutter rain Rain/snow clutter suppression.
Anti-clutter sea Sea clutter suppression.
Associated target A target simultaneously representing a tracked target and a reported
AIS target having similar parameters (position, course, speed)
which comply with an association algorithm.
AZI AZimuth stabi lization mode
B
BCRIBCT Bow Crossing Range/Bow Crossing Time
c
Cup Course up
Own ship's course is pointed to the top center of the radar display.
CCRP Consistent Common Reference Point
A location on own ship, to wh ich all horizontal measurements such
as target range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, CPA or
TCPA are referenced, typically the conning position of the bridge.
Clutter Unwanted reflections on a radar screen, from sea surface, rain or
snow.
COG Course Over Ground
The direction of the ship's movement relative to the earth, measured
on board the srup, expressed in angular units from true north
CORREL CORRELation
xxvi
CPAITCPA The distance to the Closest Point of Approachffime to the Closest
Point of Approach.
Limits are set by the operator and are related to own ship.
CTW Course Through Water

The direction of the ship's movement through the water
D
DRIFT The current velocity for manual correction or the current speed on
the horizontal axis of the 2-axis log is displayed.
E
EBL Electronic Bearing Line
An electronic bearing line originated from own ship's position.
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival
G
Ground A display mode in which speed and course information are referred
stabilization to the ground, using ground track input data.
H
HOG Heading
The horizontal direction that the bow of a ship is pointing at any
instant, expressed in angular units from a reference direction.
HL Heading line
A graphic line on a radar presentation drawn from the consistent
common reference point to the bearing scale to indicate the heading
of the ship .
HSC High Speed Craft
Vessels which comply with the defmition in SOLAS for high speed
craft
H up Head up
Own ship's head ing line is always pointed to the top center of the
radar display.
IMO International Maritime Organisation

IR RADAR Interference Rejector
ISW A device to switch over two or more radar display units and two or
more scanners.
xxvii
Lost AIS target A target symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS target
before the reception of its data was lost, or its last dead-reckoned
position.
Lost tracked One for which target information is no longer available due to poor,
target lost or obscured signals.
LP Long Pulse
M
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
MOB Man OverBoard

MON Performance monitor
MP Medium Pulse
N
NM lnm= l852m
N up North up
p
PI Parallel Index line
Past positions Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked or AIS target
and own ship.
POSN POSitioN
PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency
The number of radar pulses transmitted each second.
PROC PROCess
Radar signa l processing function
R
Radar beacon A navigation aid which responds to the radar transmt sston by
generating a radar signal to identify its position and identity
Radar cross- Radar cross-section of a target determines the power density
section returned to the radar for a particular power density incident on the
target
Range Rings A set of concentric circles labeled by distance from CCRP.
Reference target A symbol indicating that the associated tracked stationary target ts
used as a speed reference for the ground stabilisation
Relative speed The speed of a target relative to own ship's speed data
Relative vector A predicted movement of a target relative to own ship's motion
xxviii
RM Relative Motion
A display on which the position of own ship remains fixed, and all
targets move relative to own ship.
RM(R) Relative Motion. Relative Trails.
RM(T) Relative Motion. True Trails.
ROT Rate OfTurn
Change of heading per time unit.
Route A set of waypoints.
RR Range Rings
s
SART Search And Rescue Transponder
Radar transponder capable of operating in the 90Hz band
Sea stabilization A display mode in which speed and course information are referred
to the sea.
Sea state Status of the sea condition due to the weather environment,
expressed as a sea state 0 for flat conditions with minimal wind, to
sea state 8 for very rough sea conditions.
SET The current direction for manual correction or the current speed on
Sleeping AIS A target indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel
target equipped with AIS in a certain location.
SOG Speed Over the Ground

The speed of the ship relative to the earth, measured on board of the
ship.
SP Short Pulse
STAB STABilization
STW Speed Through Water
The speed of the ship relative to the water surface.
T
TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach to own ship
Test target Radar target of known characteristics used for test requirement
TM True Motion
A display across which own ship moves with its own true motion.
Trails Tracks displayed by the radar echoes of targets in the form of an
afterglow.
xxix
Trial manoeuvre A graphical simulation facility used to assist the operator to
perform a proposed maneuver for navigation and collision
avoidance purposes.
True course The direction of motion relative to ground or to sea, of a target
expressed as an angular displacement from north
True speed The speed of a target relative to ground, or to sea
True vector A vector representing the predicted true motion of a target, showing
course and speed with reference to the ground or sea
TT Target Tracking.
A computer process of observing the sequential changes in the
position of a radar target in order to establish its motion. Such a
target is a Tracked Target.
TTG Time To Go.
Time to next waypoint.
TXRX Transmitter Receiver Unit
u
UTC Universal Time Coordinated.
The international standard of time, kept by atomic clocks around
the world.
v
VRM Variable Range Marker
An adjustable range ring used to measure the distance to a target.
w
Waypoint A geographical location on a route indicating a event.
XXX
----------------------------------
Index
+++ PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION +++ ...... ..... .... ..... ......... ..... .. ........ .. i
+++FIRST-AID TREATMENTS+++ .............. ......... .... ..... .. .. ..... .... ... .... ... ..... ... .. . ii
PREFACE ...... .. ..... ... .... ... .. ...... ........ ....... ... ........................ ... ... .... .... ..... ...... .... ... .......... v
The Mounting Point of the Warning Label .......... ................... ..... ................. .............. xv
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE .. .... ........... ....... ..... .... .... .. ... ... ... ... .... ......... ........ .... .. .. ... xx
GLOSSARY .. .. ...... ...... .... ............. .. ......................... ....... .. ..... ..... ............................. xxvi
SECTION 1
GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION
1.1 FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Function of This System ................................................................. 1-1
1.2 FEATURES ...................................................... ....................................... 1-2
1.3 CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 1-4
1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS ......................................................................... 1-6
1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS ........................................................ 1-25
SECTION 2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY ............................................................................. 2-1
2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS ..................2-11
2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ........................................... 2-16
SECTION 3
BASIC OPERATION
3.1 OPERATION FLOW ............................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System ....................................... ............. 3-2
3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video .............................................................. 3-4
3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data ............................................................. 3-4
3.1.4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP ............................ 3-4
3.1.5 End the Operation and Stop the System ....................................... 3-5
3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO .......................................................... 3-6
3.2.1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL] .................................................. 3-6
3.2.2 Change Observation Range [RANGE+/-] ...................................... 3-6
3.2.3 Tune .................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN] ............. ............................................................ 3-8
3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA] .......................................................... 3-9
[.JRC I aapan. Radio Co., .ltd.

3.2.6 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN] .. ......................................... 3-11
3.2.7 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] ............................................. 3-12
3.2.8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed ... 3-13
3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES .............................................................. 3-14
3.3.1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball ........................................ 3-14
3.3.2 Operate Software Buttons ........................................................... 3-15
3.3.3 Basic Menu Operation .................................................................. 3-16
3.3.4 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character
Input menu ..................................................................................... 3-17
3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure .........................................................3-22
3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION ........................................................ 3-23
3.4.1 Interference Rejection (IR) ............................................................ 3-23
3.4.2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN] .................................... 3-24
3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH) .................................................................. 3-25
3.4.4 Use Video Processing (PROC) ..................................................... 3-26
3.4.5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI MODE) ................................ 3-27
3.4.6 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode (TM/RM) ................. 3-28
3.4.7 Move Own Ship's Display Position (Off Center) ......................... 3-29
3.4.8 Display Radar Trails (Trails) ············~········································ ····3-30
3.4.9 Zoom (x2) ....................................................................................... 3-33
3.4.10 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF] ........................................... 3-34
3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF] ....... 3-34
3.4.12 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT] ......................................... 3-35
3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL] ................................ 3-35
3.4.14 Set True Bearing ............................................................................ 3-36
3.4.15 Set Own Ship Speed ..................................................................... 3-36
3.4.16 Magnet Compass Correction (MAG Compass Setting) ............. 3-37
3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK ................................................................... 3-39
3.5.1 Display Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track) ......................... 3-39
3.5.2 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track Color) .3-40
3.5.3 Save Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ............................ 3-41
3.5.4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory) ........ 3-41
3.5.5 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track) ................................3-42
3.5.6 Use Expanded Own Ship's Track (Own Track Type) ................. 3-42
3.5. 7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track) .............................. 3-44
[.JRC I aapan Radio Co.,.ltd.

----------------------------------
3.5.8 Use Water Temperature Track (Water TEMP Track) .................. 3-45
3.5.9 Use Tidal Current Track (Current Vector Track) ......................... 3-46
3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP ........................................................................... 3-47
3.6.1 Create User Map (Mark/Line) ........................................................ 3-47
3.6.2 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting) ............................. 3-50
3.6.3 Edit User Map (Edit User Map) ..................................................... 3-52
3.6.4 Correct Position on User Map (Shift User Map) ......................... 3-60
3.6.5 Save User Map ............................................................................... 3-61
3.6.6 Set and Display Geodetic System (Geodetic) ............................. 3-65
3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION ...................................................................... 3-67
3.7.1 Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route) ......................... 3-67
3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence) ...................................... .......... 3-68
3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint Input) .3-75
3.7.4 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm) ......... 3-79
3.7.5 Method of Using Route .................................................................3-81
3.7.6 Detailed Route Settings ................................................................ 3-82
3.7.7 Clear Waypoint/Route Data (Clear WPT/Route Data) ................. 3-86
3.7.8 Operate Route Data File ................................................................ 3-87
3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS ......................................................................3-91
3.8.1 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting) ......................... 3-91
3.8.2 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting) ..................................... 3-95
3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting) ................................................. 3-97
3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) .......................................................... 3-98
3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) ............................................ 3-99
3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) .................................... 3-102
3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2] .......................................... 3-103
3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting) ............... 3-1 05
3.8.9 AUTO Backup .............................................................................. 3-11 0
3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER] ...........................................................3-111
3.9.1 Operation Procedures ................................................................. 3-111
3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items ..................................................... 3-112
3.9.3 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting) ..... 3-113
3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data ................................. 3-117
3.10 USE USER SETTING ......................................................................... 3-118
3.1 0.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting) ................................ 3-118
['-'RC] gopanRadioCo.,.lJd.
3.1 0.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting) ................................ 3-119
3.1 0.3 Delete Operating State (Delete User Setting) ........................... 3-119
3.11 USING CARD ..................................................................................... 3-120
3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager) ................................... 3-120
3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING ................................................................. 3-127
3.12.1 Receive Port Setting (RX Port) ................................................... 3-127
SECTION 4
MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS .............................................................. 4-1
4.1.1 Using Cursor (Cursor) .................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings) ................................................4-2
4.1.3 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL 1/EBL2) ................................4-3
4.1.4 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu) .............................................4-8
4.1.5 Operating EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver Setting) .... 4-14
4.1 .6 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor ................................... 4-16
4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING .................................... 4-19
4.2.1 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor) .............................. 4-20
4.2.2 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable Range
Marker [EBL] [VRM] .....................................................................4-20
4.2.3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points .....................................4-21
SECTION 5
OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS
5.1 PREPARATION ...................................................................................... 5·1
5.1.1 Collision Avoidance ........................................................................ 5·2
5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols ................................................................... 5·5
5.1.3 Radar Display .................................................................................. 5·9
5.1.4 Cursor Modes (Cursor) ................................................................. 5-11
5.1.5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria .............................................. 5-13
5.1.6 Setting Vectors (Vector Time) ...................................................... 5-14
5.1.7 Setting the GPS antenna location ................................................ 5-14
5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION ..................................................... 5-15
5.2.1 Acquiring Target [ACQ] ................................................................ 5-15
5.2.2 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets [ACQ CANCEL] ............. 5-17
5.2.3 Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA] .................................. 5-18
[ ~RC] 8opan RadicJ Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
5.2.4 Displaying Target ID No.(Target Number Display) ..................... 5-19
5.2.5 Adding Tracked Target ID Name (Name) ..................................... 5-20
5.2.6 Reference Target (Reference) ......................................................5-21
5.2.7 Operation Test (TT Test Menu) ................................................... 5-22
5.3 AIS OPERATION .................................................................................. 5-27
5.3.1 Restrictions ................ .................................................................... 5-27
5.3.2 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function) .............................. 5-27
5.3.3 Activate AIS Targets (Activate AIS) .............................................5-28
5.3.4 Deactivate AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS) .....................................5-28
5.3.5 Displaying AIS Information [TGT DATA] ..................................... 5-29
5.3.6 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display) .................... 5-32
5.3.7 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting) ........................................... 5-33
5.3.8 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost .......................... 5-36
5.3.9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting) ............... 5-37
5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL (Association) ................... 5-38
5.4.1 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical (Association) 5-38
5.4.2 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets as
Identical (Association Setting) .....................................................5-38
5.4.3 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set ...................................... 5-39
5.5 ALARM DISPLAY ................................................................................. 5-40
5.5.1 CPA I TCPA Alarm .................. ....................................................... 5-41
5.5.2 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone
(New Target) ................................................................................... 5-42
5.5.3 Lost Target Alarm (Lost) ............................................................... 5-42
5.5.4 Gyro Set Alarm ..............................................................................5-43
5.6 TRACK FUNCTION ..............................................................................5-44
5.6.1 Past Position (Past POSN) ........................................................... 5-44
5.6.2 Target Ship's Tracks (Target Track) ............................................ 5-45
5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) .......................... 5-54
5.7.1 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode ................................ 5-55
5.7.2 Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode .......................... 5-56
5.7.3 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function ................................... 5-57
SECTION 6
TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY
6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON ...................................................6-1
[~RC] 8opon Radio Co.,.lid.

6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE TARGET ........................... 6-3
6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER .............................. 6-5
6.4 FALSE ECHOES .................................................................................... 6-9
6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART) ................................6-12
6.6 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART ....................................................................... 6-14
6.6.1 Display ...........................................................................................6-14
6.6.2 Numeric Display ............................................................................ 6-15
SECTION 7
SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION
7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION ............................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 How to Open the Serviceman Menu (Service Man Menu) ......... 7-1
7.1.2 GYRO 1/F Setting .............................................................................7-2
7.1 .3 Tuning ............................................................................................. 7-5
7.1.4 Bearing Adjustment ........................................................................ 7-7
7.1.5 Range Adjustment ........................................................................... 7-7
7.1.6 Navigator Setting (Device) .............................................................7-8
7.1 .7 Setting of True Bearing Value ........................................................ 7-9
7 .1.8 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height) .....................................7-9
7.1.9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting) .................................................. 7-10
7.2 SETTINGS ............................................................................................ 7-12
7.2.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting) ....................... 7-12
7.2.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank) ............................................ 7-16
7.2.3 TNI Blank Setting (TNI Blank) ...................................................... 7-17
7.2.4 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit (Output Pulse) ... 7-18
7.2.5 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave) .............................................. 7-19
7.2.6 Language Setting (Language) ...................................................... 7-20
7.2.7 Date Time Setting .......................................................................... 7-20
7 .2.8 Input Installation Information ....................................................... 7-21
7 .2.9 Setting the Alarm System ............................................................. 7-22
7.2.10 Network Setting (Network) ........................................................... 7-26
7.2.11 LAN Port Setting) ..........................................................................7-29
7.3 ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................................... 7-32
7.3.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level) ........................................ 7-32
7.3.2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function (TT) ............................ 7-33
7.3.3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS) ..................... 7-35
[.JRC) 8opan.Radio Co.,.l'Jd.

----------------------------------
7.3.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor ...........................................7-37
7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU ........................................................................ 7-39
7.4.1 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch) ....................................... 7-39
7.4.2 Initialization of Memory Area(Area Initial) ................................... 7-40
7.4.3 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card1/2) ..................................... 7-41
7.4.4 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time (TXRX Time) ...... 7-42
7.4.5 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update) ............. 7-44
SECTION 8
COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND ADJUSTMENT
8.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE .................................................................... 8-1
8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT ...........................................................8-2
8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1125/1129/1130/1139/2103/2254 ....................8-2
8.2.2 Flexible wave guide (JMA-9123-7XA/9XA) .................................... 8-4
8.2.3 Coaxial Cable (JMA-9133-SA) ........................................................8-4
8.2.4 Transmitter Receiver Unit (NTG-3225/3230) ................................ 8-5
8.2.5 Display Unit (NCD-4990) ................................................................ 8-5
8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK ......................................................................8-6
8.3.1 Check Performance on Test Menu ............................................... 8-7
8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS .................................................. 8-13
8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement ........................ .......... 8-14
8.4.2 Replacement of magnetron ..........................................................8-14
8.4.3 Replacement of Motor ... ................................................................ 8-29
8.4.4 Replacement of 23inch LCD CML-799 .........................................8-34
8.4.5 Replacement of Backup Battery .................................................. 8-37
SECTION 9
TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE
9.1 FAULT FINDING ..................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 List of Alarms and other Indications ............................................. 9-1
9.1 .2 Operation Checking ........................................................................ 9-6
9.1.3 Fuse Checking .......... ....................................................................... 9-6
9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING ........................................................................... 9-7
9.2.1 Special Parts .................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.2 Circuit Block to be Repaired ..........................................................9-9
9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE .................................................................... 9-15
[.JRc j 8apan.Radio Co.,.J.'id.

9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts ......................................... 9-15
9.3.2 When you Request for Repair ...................................................... 9-15
9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance ........................................................9-15
SECTION 10
DISPOSAL
10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT .................................................................... 10-1
10.2 DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES ..................................................... 10-1
10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON .................................................. 10-2
10.4 DISPOSAL OF TR-TUBE .....................................................................10-2
10.5 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS ................................................................. 10-3
SECTION 11
SPECIFICATION
11.1 JMA-9133-SA TYPE RADAR ............................................................... 11-1
11.2 JMA-9132-SA TYPE RADAR ............................................................... 11-2
11.3 JMA-9123-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR .................................................... 11-3
11.5 JMA-9122-6XAH TYPE RADAR ......................................................... 11-5
11.6 JMA-911 0-6XA TYPE RADAR ............................................................ 11-6
11 .7 JMA-9110-6XAH TYPE RADAR ......................................................... 11-7
11.8 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1139) ............................................................... 11-8
11.9 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1130) ............................................................... 11-9
11.10 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1129-7/9) ...................................................... 11-10
11.11 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1125-6/9) ....................................................... 11-11
11 .12 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2254-6HS) ..................................................... 11-12
11 .13 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-6) .......................................................... 11-13
11.14 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-6HS) ..................................................... 11-14
11.15 TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3230) ................................. 11-15
11.17 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990) ............................................................... 11-17
11.18 Target Tracking Function .................................................................11-20
11.19 AIS FUNCTION ...................................................................................11-21
11.20 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-84) .............................................. 11-22
11.22 AC/DC CONVERTER (NBA-5135) ..................................................... 11-22
[ ~RC ] f)apan Rad«J Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
Appendix A
NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit
A.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................ A-1
A.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................... A-1
A.1 .2 lnterswitch Setup ........................................................................... A-1
A .2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION ................................................................ A-3
A.2.1 Operation Flow ............................................................................... A-3
A.2.2 Inter Switch Menu ........................................................................... A-4
A .2.3 Change of Connection Pattern (with 2 Display Units) ................ A-6
A.2.4 Change of Connection Pattern (with 3 or More Display Units) .. A-7
A .2.5 Operating Connection Pattern Files (File Operations) ............... A-8
A.2.6 Names of Display Units and Scanner Units ................................. A-9
A .3 REFERENCE ....................................................................................... A-1 0
A.3.1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern ................... A-1 0
A.3.2 Notes on Changing Connection Pattern .................................... A-1 0
A.3.3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit ................................... A-10
A.3.4 Setting at Installation ................................................................... A-11
Appendix B
DRAWINGS
8.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... B-1
8.1 .1 NCD-4990 ........................................................................................ B-2
8.1 .2 NCD-4990 w/NBA-5135 ................................................................... B-3
8. ~.3 NCD-4990T ...................................................................................... B-4
8.1 .4 NCD-4990T w/NBA-5135 ................................................................ B-5
8.1.5 NWZ-170-R ...................................................................................... B-6
8.1 .6 NWZ-170-RT .................................................................................... B-7
8 .1.7 NCE-5163-R ..................................................................................... B-8
8.1.8 NCE-5163-RT ................................................................................... B-9
8.1.9 NBA-5135 ...................................................................................... B-1 0
8 .2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... B-11
8 .3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit ................................................ B-12
8 .4 Primary Power System Diagram ....................................................... B-13
8 .5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit ........................................................ B-14
8.5.1 NKE-21 03 ...................................................................................... B-15
8.5.2 NKE-2254 ...................................................................................... B-16
[.JRC) gopan Radio Co.,.lid.

B.5.3 NKE-1125/NKE-1130 ..................................................................... B-17
B.5.4 NKE-1129, NTG-3225 I NKE-1139, NTG-3230 ............................. B-18
B.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit ....................................... B-19
B.6.1 NKE-21 03 ...................................................................................... B-20
B.6.2 NKE-2254 ...................................................................................... B-21
B.6.3 NKE-1125 (AC11 OV) ...................................................................... B-22
B.6.4 NKE-1125 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-23
B.6.5 NKE-1129 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-24
B.6.6 NKE-1129 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-25
B.6.7 NTG-3225 ....... ............................................................................... B-26
B.6.8 NKE-1130 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-27
B.6.9 NKE-1130 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-28
B.6.1 0 NKE-1139 (AC11 OV) ...................................................................... B-29
B.6.11 NKE-1139 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-30
B.6.12 NTG-3230 ...................................................................................... B-31
B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ............................................... B-32
B.7.1 JMA-911 0-6XAIJMA-911 0-6XAH .................................................. B-33
B.7.2 JMA-9110-6XAIJMA-9110-6XAH (desktop) ................................. B-34
B.7.3 JMA-9122-6XAH ............................................................................ B-35
B.7.4 JMA-9122-6XAH (desktop) ........................................................... B-36
B.7.5 JMA-9122-6XA/9XA ...................................................................... B-37
B.7.6 JMA-9123-7XA/9XA ...................................................................... B-38
B.7.7 JMA-9132-SA ................................................................................ B-39
B.7.8 JMA-9133-SA ................................................................................ B-40
B.7.9 NCD-4990T .................................................................................... B-41
B.8 GYRO 1/F ............................................................................................. B-42
B.9 Inter Switch Unit ................................................................................. B-44
B.9.1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ......................................... B-44
B.9.2 Interconnection Diagram ............................................................. B-46
Appendix C
Menu Index
C.1 Main ....................................................................................................... C-1
C.2 PI ............................................................................................................ C-5
C.3 TT ........................................................................................................... C-7
C.4 AIS ......................................................................................................... C-8
[.JRC I aopan Radit:J Co., J'Jd.

----------------------------------
C.5 AZ. .........................•...........•.................................................................... C-9
C.6 Track .................................................................................................... C-1 0
C.7 Route ................................................................................................... C-11
C.8 U.Map .................................................................................................. C-12
C.9 Serviceman Menu ............................................................................... C-14
["'RC] 8opan RadkJ Co.,.lid.

1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION
2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL

KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS
3 BASIC OPERATION
4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS
6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY
7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION
8 COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND

ADJUSTMENT u
1!1
9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES
SERVICE
10 DISPOSAL
11 SPECIFICATIONS
Appendix
SECTION 1
1
11 11111 • •II 111111
Ill
1.1 FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 FEATURES ............................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 1-4
1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS ........................................................1-26
[~RC ] Jr;pan Radk:J Co., J.'ld.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1 1 FUNCTIONS
----------------------------------
1._1 -- FUNCTIONS
This equipment is a high-perfonnance radar equipment consisting of a scanner

unit, a transmitter-recei ver unit and a hi gh resolution color LCD di splay unit.
Thi s equipment complies with the performance standard of IMO.
1.1.1 Function of This System
The JMA-9 100 series is a color radar system designed to comply with the
internati onal standards o f the TMO.The ma in functions include:
• sensitivity adjustment
• sea clutter and rain/snow clutter suppression
• interference rejection
• bearing and range measurement using a cursor, fi xed/variable range markers,
and electronic bearing line
• colored own track di splay(? colors)
• NAY line and marker displays
• TM (True Motion) presentation
• self-diagnostic fac iliti es
• radar performance monitoring (Performance Monitor)
• Target Tracking functions (manual/automatic, target acquisition and tracking,
vector and trail displays, Trial maneuver and alann di splays)
• 8-unit switchover (lnterswitch) function (option)
1-1 [.JRC] 8apon. RadkJ Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1 2 FEATURES
----------------------------------
-~
- --
- --
-
- - -
- --
-
--- ---
--- FEATURES
Realization of Large, Easy-to-see Screen with High Resolution
T he 23. 1-inch co lor LCD 1 with high resolution can di sp lay radar images of 320
mm or more in diameter. Even short-range targets can also be displayed as high-
resolution images.
Target Detection by Latest Signal Processing Technology
The system employs the latest digital signal processing technology to eliminate
undesired clutter from the radar video signals that are obtained from the receiver
with a wide dynamic range, thus improving the target detection.
Target Tracking (TT) Function based on Advanced Technology
The target acqui sition and tracking performance is enhanced by the use of the
fastest DSP and tracking algorithm. So stable operation in target tracking under
clutter is ensured.
• Acquisition and tracking of 100 targets.

• Hazardous conditions are represented by shapes and colors of symbols as well
as sounds.
• Trial maneuvering functions provided.
• Tracks of up to 20 target ships can be stored with a maxi mum of 1,500 points
for each of them, and di splayed distingui shed by using seven different colors.
Overlay of Radar Images, Coastlines, and Own Ship's Track
As well as operator-created NAY lines and own ship's tracks/ARPA tracks, which
is stored on the memory card can be superimpose-displayed with radar images and
radar trai ls in all display modes including the head-up mode.
Easy Operation with GUI
All the radar functions can be easi ly controlled by simply using the trackba ll and
two swi tches to operate the buttons shown on the radar di splay.
1.The displayed resolution corresponds to SXGA(1280x1 024 ).
[JRC ] 8apan Rudie Co., Lid. 1- 2

JMA-9100 lns!ructlon Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1 2 FEATURES
----------------------------------
Improved Day/Night Mode
Five types of background colors are available in Day/Dusk/Night mode (tota l 5

background colors). Each background color can be reproduced to be suited for the
user's operating environment by simple key operation. The radar echoes and a
variety of graphics can also be represented in different colors, ensuring easy-to-
see displays.
Compact Design and Low Power Consumption
Since an LCD has been implemented as the display device, the weight of the
display is greatly reduced and the power consumption is lowered in comparison
with the conventional radar equipment.
Self-diagnostic Program Incorporated
The Self-diagnostic program always monitors all the functions of the system. If
any function deteriorates, an alarm message wi ll appear on the radar display and
an alarm sounds at the same time. Even when the system is operating, the
functionality test can be carried out. (except on some functions)
Performance Monitor
The radar performance (transmitted output power and receiving sensitivity) can
appear on the radar di splay.
Easy lnterswitch Operation (Option)
If an interswitch unit (option) is connected, up to eight JMA-91 00 radars can be

switched over by performing simple operation.
Up to 2 radars: NQE-3141-2A is needed in Display Unit.
Up to 4 radars: NQE-3141-4A is needed separately.
Up to 8 radars: NQE-3141-SA is needed separately.
Various Functions
• RADAR Trai ls (Other ship's track display)

• TM (True Motion) display
• Head-up orth-up/Course-up disp lay
• Own ship's track display
• Auto-acquisition Zone function
1- 3 [~Rc ] 8opan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1 3 CONFIGURATION
----------------------------------
CONFIGURATION
Table1-1 :Specified of scanner, and categories of ship/craft for SO LAS V
Type of Radar Antenna type Transmitted Band Rate of Category

Output Power rotation
JMA-9133-SA 12ft Slotted Antenna 30kW s 24rpm CAT 1
JMA-9132-SA 12ft Slotted Antenna 30kW s 24rpm CAT 1
JMA-9123-?XA 7ft Slotted Antenna 25kW X 24rpm CAT 1
JMA-9123-9XA 9ft Slotted Antenna 25kW X 24rpm CAT 1
JMA-9122-6XAH 6ft Slotted Antenna 25kW X 48rpm CAT 1H
JMA-911 0-6XA 6ft Slotted Antenna 10kW X 27rpm CAT 1
JMA-911 0-6XAH 6ft Slotted Antenna 10kW X 48rpm CAT 1H
* The class of emission: PON (All scanner types)
Table1-2:Radar Configuration and Ship's Mains
Type of Radar Scanner Unit P erfonnance Transmitter D is pl a y Ship' s Main

Receiver Unit
Monitor Unit
JMA-9133-SA NKE-1139 NJU-84 NTG-3230 NCD-4990 AC100 to 115V, or

AC220 to 240V 50/60Hz
1q>
JMA-9132-SA NKE-1130 NJU-84 -- NCD-4990
JMA-9123-?XA NKE-1129-7 NJU-85 NTG-3225 NCD-4990
J MA-9123-9XA NKE-1129-9 NJU-85 NTG-3225 NCD-4990
JMA-9122-6XA NKE-1125-6 NJU-85 -- NCD-4990
JMA-9122-9XA NKE-1125-9 NJU-85 -- NCD-4990
JMA-9122-6XAH NKE-2254-6HS NJU-85 -- NCD-4990 A C100 to 115V, or

A C220 to 240V 50/60Hz
1q>
JMA-9110-6XA NKE-2103-6 NJU-85 - - NCD-4990
J MA-911 0-6XAH NKE-21 03-6HS NJU-85 -- NCD-4990
[ ~ RC ] Japan Radit:J Co., .lid. 1-4

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COM POSITION> 1.3 CONFIGURATION
----------------------------------
Notes:
1) The drive motor for the scanner unit is available in AC100-115V

or AC220-240V type for NKE-1139/1130/1125/1129 series. Please
specify the motor type when ordering.
2) The motor of NKE-2254/2103 can operate under both AC100-115V

and AC220-240V, then need not to specify the motor type.
3) When using NKE-2254/2103, they need AC/OC Converter NBA-

5135 (Option) in display unit.
4) The scanner unit except NKE-21 03 series can be equipped with a

deicing heater as an option, and '-0' shall be suffixed to the type
name. (e.g. NKE-1139-D, NKE-1125-60).
5) When using the ship's mains of AC440V as the radar power

source, a step-down transformer shall be used.
6) The desktop option is available for display NC0-4990. It has a

separate structure consisting of the following:
Monitor Unit NWZ-170
Radar Process Unit NOC-1399-9
Operation Unit NCE-5163
7) In JMA-9123, the following type name of JRC is used for the

flexible wave guide between the scanner unit and the transmitter
receiver unit.
Type of Radar Waveguide Length(m) Type name of JRC

JMA-9123-7XA/9XA FR-9 20MT H-7AWR00003
JMA-9123-7XA/9XA FR-9 30MT H-7AWR00004
8) In JMA-9133, the following type name of JRC is used for the

coaxial cable between the scanner unit and the transmitter
receiver unit.
Type of Radar COAX cable Length(m) Type name of JRC
JMA-91 33-SA HF-200 30MT HF-200 (30MT)
1-5 [.JRC ] dOfXi"- Radic Co.,..tid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION> 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
Fig 1-1: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1139
Fig 1-2: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1130
Fig 1-3: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1129-7
Fig 1-7: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-2254-6!-IS
Fig 1-8: Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-21 03-6/6HS
Fig 1-9: Outline Drawing of Transmitter Receiver Unit, Type NTG-3230
Fig 1-11 : Outline Drawing of Display Unit, Type NCD-4990
Fig 1-1 2: Outline Drawing of Monitor Unit, Type NWZ-170 (Desktop type option)
Fig 1-13: NDOutline Drawing of Radar Process Unit, Type NDC-1399-9 (Desktop type option)
Fig 1-14: Outline Drawing of Operation Unit, Type NCE-5163 (Desktop type option)
Fig 1-1 5: Outline Drawing of AC/DC Converter, Type NBA-5135 (Desktop type option)
Fig 1-16: Outline Drawingoflnterswitch Unit, TypeNQE-3l41-4A (Option)
Fig 1-17: Outline Drawing of lnterswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-8A (Option)
Fig 1-1 8: Outl ine Drawing of Power Control Unit, Type NQE-3167 (Option)
[..JRC ] 8apan Radle Co., .lid. 1-6

3916 (S'MNG CIRCLE 14000)
11
cO.
--"
I
IIJTUE I'ENliiSSIU om.tSSil.E
--" QJTUE >0./ITIS
DtEH9QlS
OIEH9CNAL <MI<lOW.
llflMTQlS IBMTD6
0 MR TO
t:: 3 6 .0.5
~
(!)
6
30
30
120
•1
•1.5
.0.5
120 400 •2.5 •1

0 ~00 1000 ~ ·2
QJ 1000 2000 .0 Gl
~ 2000 4000 <3 m
•8
s·
CQ
z
m
HEATER•CPTIQ'.I APffiOX. 1kg
~
-" .....
0 .!-,?to-'. ;j-7';-3:.- I'J1kg r
)>
(/) ?1-~ti'li ?!-~'tit UM't'tt z
(") 11-!U 11-li~ 0
"'-.1 Q) f'EfF(R>1N~CE MONITffi H~i HU m
::::! 117~-7 >' ;1.'!;.=, 3 6 .0.5 0
::::! 6 30 ·1 t0.5 c
...,
(!)
30 120 •15 'U
s:
120 400 •2.5 •1 m
§=
-.
_..... 400
1000
1000
2000
~
o6
·2
t3
z
-1
(")
2000 4000 .a 0
~
\j
s:
-o
(!) 0
(/)
<
~
MASS APPROX. 185 ~ (WrTHOliT OPTION) ~
)\ 0
Ill 11fT IMI z
_..
I
_.. COVER IS lJlENED
v
'/}J'(-
COLOR ANTENNA WtiTE :..
w
J
(l:J COLOR PEDESTAL WHITE m
~
m
7-7,~7:.-1'
(.f-,7t-7J!l) ••
.i2
ltJ
IMI
145 k&
;u
0
;u
0
J.
~
NOTE Dbmeler of cme
Wt-71vf7> F!IUH(! ! U.
gard s rol atie lo ctonge. ~
~
•at•
-<-T~~JJ,
8
8 zG>~
(/)
SCNKE5313-2 SCANNER UNIT OUTLINE DRAWING

~
NKE-1139
~
I <....
~
'!::
I ~
I 0
0
5"
I
J
Ill
2
I g,
0
:::1
I .,
'!::
~
:::1
I c:
~
,
<0"
39"16 (S'MNG Cl RCLEI 4000l
( ;u :..- :1-+t ""' ~400Dl
I v
~
(;)
I m
~ --"
I
lliTL.tf ~ PEfMSSB.E
I
z
m
~ N
r rrm l 0Kl09(JIS WTU£ ~-llt.D
~
~
DlloEI!!la<AL IHilSO"'-
DE'MTOIS 1£\lAll)lS
I r
Jl Jl
17181 TO
0 - ·- •0.5
)>
t:: 3 5 z
~ 5 30 •1 .05 I 0
s· ,_ ~ 30 120 •1.5 m
(!)
""'\~; p ~ 120 400 •2.5 •1 I D
c
CJ 400 1000 ..: ·2 I 'U
ii1 1000 2000 <6 ,)
'!::
m
~ 2000 4000 .a I z
s· -l
("")
tQ
I 0
--" ...,
0 HEATER •CPTI()-~ AFmOX. 1hg
~ ') :? 1::- ' Jt/ln :, mkg *-Jt:>-.m ~lt:>'tit Uf<!'tif I
'!::
""0
(IJ 0
(") 11-H 11-.'i~ Ul
CD Q)
St>FETY S'MTCH
fi;;q, t- PERFrnM.AJ~CE MCl~ITOR
H~i t-.i!.t I ::::;
::J 3 6 .0.5 0
::J ' - -
t7;t -,.:,-;~.t-1
6 30 •1 .05 I z
(!)
.... J 30 120 •15 v
I
... I ... ..__, ~
~
120 400 •2.5 •1
c: Q ~
-::J
........
r-11=
400
1000
2000
1000
2000
4000
..:
.ti
.a
>2
·3
I m
X
-l
~ ~~ I m
""0
~
"
.n "
0 l ;o
0
"" I
(!)
N~ l""" l=t
1-' I, ;o
<:
w APPROX. 180 k& (WITHOUT OPTION)
~
i;i ~
~
" I~
MASS
mm
I
I
0
;o
~
~
I
30b CA!l:L RET 660 I\ covER IS CPENEO COLOR ANTENNA WHITE z
~
w 30b 7-71•'/5 :..- F (1020) lt..••-AIIn....'i. I Gl

Ul
0 COLOR PEDESTAL WHITE
25o CABLE INLET I
!for HEATERl
25o >r -7 JV17:..- F
(.?-,?t-1!!l) •• til 180 k&
mm
I
I
NOTE .Domeier of cttte gard 5 rol ctie Ia ch:!rge. I
i£)o -7"'1''-' fftUOI:ll!:(t I~A.
I
SCANNER UNIT OUTLINE DRAWING I
SC~JKE5312-2 NKE-1130
I
I
I
RECOMNEtJOED EARTH
I
TER>1li'IAL POSITOl Il l I
H!l.OitJG In T Ml2
I
I
I
c....
I !:
,
ca·
1'
I ~0
0
......
I
I :;
c.v tllTLt.E I'ElMSSO.E PmoiSSil£
I 2
7fl • 225((SWJNG CIRCLEn2701 lltEN!lO.S QJTU£
OOEI!!l(tiAL _,m.._
OO..tlltll
ll
0 MR TO OEVIATKI.S I£\IATKIIS I 0:J
c::
I .,:J
3 6 .0.5 !:
~ 6 30 .05
:::3 •1
C1l 30 120 •15 c
C) 120 400 •2.5 •I I !!!.v
QJ 400 1)00 o.( ,z I (;)~
:E 1000 2000 o6
o3 m
:s·
(Q
2000 4000 _olj_
I mz
0
.....
I S!
,....
......
(/)
C)
H£ATER •CJ'Ti(Jl AFmlX. 1hg 91-~Wi *~'fit: {if1'Tit I z)>
Q) It~ It~ 0
<0 :::3
;t.,n.-' ::t7~'" l'l1kg HU PH I m
:::3 3 6 .0.5 0
C1l 6 30 ·1 .05 I c'0
""'§= 30
120
120
400
115
12.5 •1 I !:
m
400 1000 o.( o2 z
...:::.: -i
I ()
1000 20QQ. o6 o3
~
"tj
2000 4000 •8 0
I !:-o
C1l
I 0 (/)
~ MASS APPROX. 5 1~ (WIHOUT OPTION) =l

I 0
[ru I
.......
.......
UNIT
COLOR
"'"
ANTENNA I'MTE
I v
z
N I b.
i
(0
I
'-J
290 .I COLOR PEDESTAL WHm m
I X-i
m
JOb CAIEL t.a..ET
456
16561 COVER IS CJ'ENED ••.f2 ttl 51 !!I I ;o
0
I 0;o
D.
25o 'T-711-17'-'F 30b 'T-7,.'/7 :-F
~
1/1<-Ail~
(;!.,? t - 7.11l)
"'"
NOTE •OICITe!ef of ootle ~ os not ct1e lo clmge.
~
~ .-(-f}.i!JI,
8
8
I
i
I G)z
~
(/)
it) 'T-711-?'7 '-' F/lllHt" H1tA .
~ SCNKE5309-2 NKE-1129-7
I
~ I
I <-
~
350 I 1>
RECOMMENDED EARTH ~
TEFfv11NAL POSITIO'J 300
HQDINO BQ T M12 I 70
I 0
0
5"
lf!l!.i'IH!l'ltl!i11 M12 I ~
c:
I g,
0
MCUJTING DIMENSlCJjS :0
!To:> VIEWJ I ~
Q)
..Xi11itl:!l :0
(..l:ilittl I c:
!!!.
11 SAFETY S'MTCH I v
<0" ~A{>'f
(;)
ROTATJCJj CENTER
39
I m
@)fii<l'·li z
lliTl.tf PEJMS91l.E ~
I m
911 • 281015WitJG CIRCLEn8251 ~
IJK!<J(JIS WTU£ >OJITt~
!JO£Jt'D<AI. IMII!DIO..
MR TO OE'MTIJIS IE\IAlttiS
I r
)>
3 6 •0.5 z
6 30 •1 1{).5 I 0
JO 120 •15 m
120 1.00 •2.5 •1 I 0
c
400 1000 z4 ·2 'ii
1000 2000 <6 I ~
·3 m
2000 4000 ·8 I z
-i
I ()
0
9}-Ji>t)l; *li>'ti! ... ii'ti! I ,
~
0
ft-~¥ .,.~~ (fl
....... U.:l l:.fl' I
0 =l
3 6 t0.5 6
6 30 •1 •0.5 I z
30 120 •1.5 v
120 1.00 •2.5 •1 I :...
400 1000 z4 ·2
1000 2000 z6 I m
X
>3
2000 4000 .a I
-i
m
:xJ
I 6
:xJ
MASS APPROX. 53 !!( (WITHOUT OP"T10N)
I 0
UNT
COLOR
"""
ANTENNA WHITE
I ~
z
I Cl
(fl
COLOR PEDESTAL WHITE
I
FORWARD
c:::>
lit
16581 COVER IS !FEIJED
llt<-!Wtif
••
•tt
t!l
"""
53 kl I
I
NOTE ,DICireler of cable gtrd is nol ciXe lo ctmge.

~
~
••
~TA,Jl-
8
8
I
I
)1) 7-7 1•:17 :.-I' liiiHt" ~: ·ltfi...
SCNKE5308-2 NKE-1129-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
MIUHMl OIMENSIO'<S
lT!P VEWl
'-
i:
, 1'
~
ci5" *A{ ".IT 0
0
...... ROT ATIO'< CENTER 5"
II>
I
c.n @Jf':'!'(J ""-*-k-
llJntE POMSrlll.E Pmo'IISSB.f
10./m.s 2
IHJeCIIS QJI\JIE
OOEJI9CJW. IMJISD"'- g.
O£'MIOIS IE\1ATUlS 0
::>
.0.5 i:
Q>
·1 1{)5 ::>
·15 c
!!!.
•2.5 •1 v
...: ·2
-6 .:l
G)
.a m
z
m
~
r
......
......
I-£ATER !J>TI(l~ Al'fmX.
~>?t-,
141
T7';., :.- l'l1kg ..
nH't>t
~
)>
z
0
m
0
.05 c
~
i:
•1 m
·2
z
-i
()
,J
0
i:
"
0
(/)
MASS APPROX. 55 ~(WITHOUT OPTION) ::!

0
UNrT ,.,.., z
v
COLOR ANTENNA wtrn J>.
COLOR PEDESTAL WHITE m
X
-i
m
•• ttl 55 k&
:lJ
6
:lJ
·~
mrn 0
t<ClTE Ootrele- d CXJ!Je ga,d IS nol oae lo ctalga

~
~
•
-<-T~iJ JI,
a
a i
z
G)
;£) t -7~~o?'' :.- FtitlHt"! ~ 1!11.. (/)
SCN~"E5310-2
SCANNER UNIT OU TLI NE DRAWING NKE-1125-6
I <...
[ru
l:
I ~
~
I IHO..DttJG I 8
In T M10
..
5'
l,.
11!1f .. ~M10 I
~
I g
g
I
I
..
l:
:J
,
<0'
SN'ETY S'MTCH I
c
!!!.
v
*A~~t
~
(;)
I
~
-" ROTATI()J CENTER m
I z
0> ~'l'-G·
.: Ml.tf PEMm.E ~
I m
~
9ft • 26YJ!SVI'NG CR:LH26251 Ol€li:JaOS OJTll£ OOJHt.ll
~
OKJ\!ICJJIL IMI60A.
0 MR TO DE'IlA'OOOS IB1A'OOIS
I
c:
:::t 3 6 .0.5 ~
:s·
(I)
5 30
120
·1 .05 I 0
m
30 •15
CJ 120 400 •2.5 ·1 I 0
c
Ql 400 1)()() ..: ·2 I :0
1000 2000 a6 l:
~ ,J m
:s·
<Q
200( (()( o8 I z
-i
(')
.....
0 I 0
l:
(/)
(')
f£ATER·CPTO'J I>PPf"!Jl. 'lg tf~"tifi t}~'f>i: .-tf1'tlt I 'l)
0
-" Q) ;I.J?t:-, a :t7' !.- o:t tllkg ~i'~ fti~ en
:::s HU !:J I =i
N .a~
:::s 3 0 0
..,
(I) 5
30
30
120
·1
·15
.05 I z
v
§= I
--.
120 LOO 12.5 •1
~
:...
400 1lOO ..: ·2
1000 200 t6 I m
~ 2000 4000 ·8
a3 ~
1:; I ::0
m
(I)
I 0::0
~
rn
MASS APPROX. eo (WITHOUT OPTION)
I 0
I
......
......
1\,)
UNT
COLOR
"'"'
ANTENNA YHTE
I
z
i
01 I G)
en
I COLOR PEDESTAL WHITE
<o I
•• ttl80k1 I
I
·~
IIIII
t.j()TE .Doreter « co!ie ocm os no1 ~ 1o ctmga

~
~
•
4'(-T;J.~JI,
a
a
I
I
..
ru~-7 ~,~~mu ~~•t• A.
I
SCANNER UNIT OUTLINE DRAWING
SCNI<'E5311-2 NKE-1125-9
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
M()JNTt.Q [»1ftW6
IHP VEWI I
c...
.,
c.O.
I 1'l!:
SAFETY SWITCH I 0~
..... ii:A{>'f- 0
I :;
......,
I
fmATIO'l CEtiTE
0
c:
.....
IID~'l'.U
6f1 1880 (SWJ.Q CR:LE • 19101
MR
CIJTU,£
IHII!D<S
10
K!MSSII..£
QJlU.£
IHimut.
lrMTDIS
1'£1HSSIU
NQIITJO
Otes:JoAL
lrMT04S
I
I "0
!.
s:
ct>
3
6
6
30
.05
11 .0.5 I
l!:
Q)
0 30 120 •1.5 "

c
120 LOO 125 ·1
I 9!.
v
QJ LOC mo I
~
:s· 1000 2000 ".a
_.Q
·2
<3
Cl
m
z
<Q 2000 LOOO I m
......
....
0
I ~
r-
(/)
(")
Q) M-~-.fti M-~'lil nt:!'l~ I )>
z
..... :::s lf8A ~8~ a
w :::s HU Ill' I m
ct>
..... l'f.7 ., -7'/A~ = 1
3
6
6
30
,,
.05
.0.5 I
0
c
:ul!:
c: : ~7'!- ,:..- 1'11kg 120
-.
:::s
_.....
30
120
tOO 00
tOO
•1.5
·25
•4
·1
I
I
I
m
z
-i
~ m 2000 .a •3
()
0
"tj 2000 lOOO .a I l!:
ct>
<: I "0
(/)
~ APPROX. 55 (WITHOUT OPTION)
::::j
rn MASS I 6
00 z
I
1\.) UNIT mm
1\.) I v
01 COLOR AHTE.NNA WHITE
~
~ I :...
~
I
0) COLOR PEDESTAL WHITE m
:::r: I ~
(/) m
••
•~t
II 55 ka I 6;lJ
I ;lJ
a
~
mm
• • a I
~
I Clz
NOTE .[Joameter ol coos ~ os rot tiE lo ~
~~
a! T-7 "-?"' :.- FU:Il !l:J!·O ;l; ItA.
I
(/)
SCNKE5302-L
SCANNER UNIT OUTLINE DRAWING NKE -2254-6HS I
~ I
00 4..at2 Ma.mr~G aa.
lifill' -"~ MlO
r MKJ
SAFETY SWITCH
i .,
i-~:H ~+
f.
~
~
<0"
......
co
0
I
PEIHJ~ANCE MO'Ilffi
1<7-t-7~.:0.f:~
ROT AliON CENTER
0 lf'I'•CJ
~C().1MEtUO EARTH
TEIM'IAL POSITIO'l fM12 8CL T1
HQDINO 8CL T M12
G)
m
z
m
c:
~
M<lJNWO OMHISIIlJS ITO" VlEWl
~
...... 6FT • 1880 rSW'l~G CIRCLE 019101 lif*-m~ ! liHl>
~
CD ~
0
a m
Ql 0
c
~ 'li
:;· 3:
!.Q m
z
0 -i
...... ()
...... (/)
C)
0
Q)
3:
"tl
::J 0
...... ::J (/)
~ ..,CD ::j
5
c:
::J 346 z
v
...~
OJTtttE' ~ISS!l.£ F'E"'<S51l.E :,.
-<
"t:j
CD
OI~EMiiCI'IS
OVER TO
OJT\.ttE
DIEUSla 4N...
lE\1ATlaiS
WOJIITV.r:J
OJMEJ-ISO.W...
OEVIATO.IS
8
3 6 .0.5 m
::c
<
:::);;
6
30
30
120
•I
•1.5
o05
5
rn ::c
I 120 400 •2.5 •1 0
0 0 0 0 0 (00 MASS APPROX. 37 kr
~
1\) 1000 tl. :2
~
0
w • • • • • 1000
200)
2000
(lXX)
•6
.a .:3 lHT mm
z
I
COLOR ANTENNA wtfTC G)
~
Oj MCUHtJG HQES fi-b 'til *~1it lllrtiit
(/)
COLOR PEDESTAL WKITE

::r:
(I) HU !"1'
~~a; It~~
3 (j
6
30
120
30
120
400
.0.5
•1
•1.5
,,
•2.5
•05
•1
••
••
IJ
mm
37
(00
tlOO
1000
2000 o6
:2 ! a
,J
2000 (000 .a ! -<-T'-~11- a
SCtlKE5303-3 SCANNER UNIT OUTLINE DRAWING NKE-2103-6/NKE-2103-6HS
'"Tl
ce·
......
~
I
r
·:- / / /
.
-
, '-
il:
~
~
8
:1
0
£
~
CD
D
til
_ MN250 __
250 IU
615 __ MN250.
250 lU
OIBI
3
6
c:utU£
DloEKII:H5
TO
6
30
-
""IOCSSIU
tlJTU£
!FI'I.TINS
:illS
±1
±15
PEa!ISSB.E
IICI.NTNl
ll6oiE>61l<Al
~ro.s
:105
~
g·
.,"il:
"c:
~ 30 120 2!.
;j· 120 400 ±2.5 ±1 v
(() 400 1000 :t4 ±2
0 615 1000 2000 :i6 Cl
..... 2000 4000 ±B
t) m
z
;i
585 ~,d m
.. ~ii!
~
Q) 549 •
...... ::3
Cl) 1 1
3 • • N~'Hl ti-M 'Tit .fot'f'li: ?Z
..... ::: -Hu. ~n
lfifE •nn 0
m
(Jl ...,
CD 3 6 :!0.5 0
c
6 30 11 :!0.5
@l 30 120 ±1.5
'0
il:
(")
'Ill~ 400 11 m
~ 120 ±2.5
-·
CD
...,Cii
co ...
400
'()00
2000
1000
2000
4000
±4
:i6
±8
±2
±3
~
(")
0
il:
§= Ol
~
-·
_...... • ~
Ill
=i
~
~ 6
z
~1:
-o MASS APPROX. 33 kg v
CD
~
<: ::l<N UNIT mm :,.

CAIH N..ET
~
l
m
'l'" -7'•~" ;\.D
w
I
1\.)
w
••
*.&
ll 33
mm
kg ~
m
::0
6
0 ::0
0
f.
~
~ TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT OUTLINE DRAWING NTG-3230
~
z
Cl
Ill
.;ctHD5176
~
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
L{)
N
... _
-~~~ "' ~':'I ':1
"'lj(i
I'" I:(>
"'
<j
_,... ':1
N
Q fi1o
~ra~w .:: (T)
t
f- ·- r- ~ (')
I-
z
i~~~
tl!i~ij ;.(
..
'fl";; ..... ~ .....
~~ ~Cfl~
..
""! l'"i:CJ ""! 0
... ~lfi~ ~,.. 'il~ g: ~
~~~~
~ ~ ~
~i
a3
S'.., l"l~
~ .... "'~
o'g
§~ ~~
1'1 ...
~~~
...
~
f-."' l"l~
;:
"' ~~n "'lil og ~~~

1-
~~ ~~
~ ...
en
en
~ ~ .- ..
~
_J~ UJ
<.>
'
I
(')
z
3:
<l:
0::
0
w
~
_J
I-
::J
0
t:
z
::J
0::
w
;,:::
w
u
w
0::
0::
w
o) I-
t:
~
Vl
z
<l:
0::
I-
[.JRC) 8opanRadi.oCo.,.fid. 1 - 16
I 11M MIT IR: 3.1'A..II
&~~5
IQ.Ot;O ln. IS 1117
W£\~~~
•-c-1 !:N.t,..~u!Ml11tlU~: ~
·]lo.HKUl
~~HR.ATE
ilt141•• M12 / , , , AWtl 't<U I
/
l(./ ENllH lUTE IR: 3.1'A..YI
J•411toE
Jll[lf,,'~
MCJ,,Mr..Q
a.
0
Dt.E""SOIAI.. OKhSOII..,._ :>
0 O'~[lt TO :tvAfO.S 0EV!o'T06
~
c::
::::
s· FIOO II t
3
6
6
30
lll.5
t1 t()5 "'c:>
lJ 120 <15 !!!.
(!)
t.lOJHNGDII.ENsnlS v
120 •oo !2.5 tl
0 llfol-.tifillll ,_7,. ~ ~Nt"'nRt01; tw:.:~ ~ ~~"'~•AL'\0.1: 1l:URI
400 QJO 14 t2 (;)
Ql !t..:.t
tliiO 20110 t6 m
!3 z
~ 1327.&1 2l0 ~ ~-tL
s· eoe
m
...... CQ l6
·~ ~
f'r~r&u~
r-
0
..... "' t:r.,- 1& ~ N4"')'"41Nl.21 Ull:nl 11-.U~ii 1!-.U~>l. 11111~-t
)>
z
...... 0 ~If§ IHII! a
......., .@. •• 4 ~Jl' m
~ ~·~~"'
l
• lll.S 0
c
~ lr.'.lRtJ.~l~AU • lO I ~ !3 ()
~
1:l
(!)
. ~
• '
0000 t6 0
s::
"0
f~~Uh~PTw
(/)
<:: ::;
!!:I I I V'' ~ V l t· ... ttti'J !. ~·rC- H htt fU:f.R) 0
[ru ()
0I
.::.. tii !lrfm~~ IEXIIJ(
MASS
UNIT
APPROX. 130 k&
mm
z
v
...•&
-
(() :...
'"~ '""~"~
J
(()
0 m
¥J 130 kl ~
m
'-------"-- ! • '
mm ::0
0
7110
~ I t~~~~ I ::0
~
335 b I S'!5 ..
a
~'m.~ass TEXT\R:
l~.tre-110,) ! •NC"\I'!o.fNQ.2
650 .
~z
G'l
~ DISPLAY UNIT OUTLINE DRAWING NCD-4990/JM A-9100 (/)
SCI--JC05242
~
~
t..
~
00 ~
8
• • :;
J ::!!
(Q
--"
I
--" 465
• _.1
~
~
~
fl.
0
:I
~
Q)
.
f.
:I
!'? c:
!!!.
0 ~ v
~ (;)
m
~ :;:,
(!)
............ .............. z
. '[J]D .D~D]L
~ o.m_h£ m
~
OK..,.,.. QJ'fU'£ MQMHJ
CJ
~ Ql
~
"'I~ .,.... TO
Dt.E:N~AL
QEVIAfDiiS
OHfP.,SIJijAL.
DlV~l O.S ,...
~ .... J J 6 .105 }>
~-
:;:, • • • • 6 30 ±I ±05
z
0
<Q U" 16081 30 120 :t~5 m
400 11 0
g, \ 120 -'25
c
CAllE \ ··~· 400 1lOO iA 12
'ij
~
1lOO 2000 <5
39t5
~ ~ 2000 4000 t6
!.3 ~
m
z
:;:,
--"
a:..., ••••·-val t.OJNT~
ROO t.
Ot.ENSrNS
-i
(')
0
e,-rrm ~~S.fr-'1£,. ~
c:
:;:, • Mtil!!l atJifoo.~~&llll l!'!lt'A·~~~WMt
11-B'!! 11-M~-L
llli'f
afot'!it
II !If "0
_:::.: 1t~ 1 - t ~·,.nf'\0.11 1UU"'f l t~t~-lt t t\CN-,.4fC21 U:ll~lll t-.l!!l IJT 0
(/)
--" J I .10.5
00 =i
~
I 30 tl t 0.5 0
"tj
(!)
"' = ... 30
120
om
120
om
11110
i'\5
..
-'2.5 ±1
•2
z
v
~
~ OlD 1000 t6
:,..
~
tl
10011 11100 t6 m
I
....... ~;o
'I
0
-,~
~ -,
0;o
CJ MASS APPROX. 25 I 0
.,
(!) ;o
@) mm
~
(/) UNIT
a: .. .. /1/~' .i~ H II z
'0
~
"tj 1--- - - - - - - · · · · · - - --
.... .,J ••*!It 13 25 k
mm
G'l
(/)
~I
~4
(!)
.g 1:
tl4
.. 400
g: 606
' tl :
463
-2.
SCNC0524 3-?.13 23.1 INCH MONITOR UNIT OUTLINE DRAWING NWZ - 170/JMA-9100
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
- -- - --- - 0
~!~~
~g~~
"''il -;;';1 ':1
'I!•
.-GO
i"' 'il -
"' .. '::
0
....--
(J)
I
<(
- f-
0
"' 2-.
~~~~ "' . ~- ><
"'
ll'~i~
'iio;; ~"'
~ ':'i~
e"' j;lg ~e ~~
lllflC>
4< ... "'
~~
,... R 8 § II u
~~ ~<fl':l
0
<>:
""~ ~ ..
g
~
(J)
I
(J)
(J)
(T)
....--
;!
Q
:!! I
0 ~._, "'j;l g6 §~
=
~
;;~ ., R
... 8§ u ~ ~ •... •tl! u
0
z
- ~I"'- )'{I 1161

r;zrz
J
I
l
J;f
. (9
t--· ~ z
3<(
n::
~=-
u.. ~
0"-' G e 0 e G e o 0
w
~
-;e)(;
"' ..,.., _j
f-
::)
0
•
11 •
•
• • •
f-
z
.____ • ::)
.. . • -!
(/)
(/)
w
u
0
n::
Q_
1690 NOIIH'OIId 'l'IO'll-'1
['If n::
---w <(
0
<(
e e n::
e e
(T)
0 0 0
(T)
I
(T)
N
....
lO
0
u
z
~
Fig 1-13: NDOutline Drawing of Radar Process Unit, Type NDC- 1399-9 (Desktop type option)
1 - 19 [.JRC ] Japan RadkJ Co.,bd.

----------------------------------
" ..
0
::!i~g
.....,..
0
..-
lil~
~ t· < "'
'il -
~ ~-
H ::1
~ ~~~
~Ito
"'
':1 - "'
H ~ ':1 (J')
lr ol!l I
<{
-· - cri
~
.. .:11
'
J.~
~~ ><
m!:l!~~ ~I-;; ~~ -:I '!I'll ._&o :a. ~:;) ':l'l!'ll 0
g: "' (T)
~~i~ cri
-, ~ a ii ~
tO
..-
I.[)
~§
~., ~g
~~ ~~ ..'"r-
1'-• j;l
I~
g §U u
"' !-
w
0
I
a~ e\'"' "'I'!
6 t:l~ ~~
c. ~~ •R
... g§ u ~ ~ - ~
•• z
li
C)
z
3<{
~
0
w
6
-'
f-
:)
0
!:::
z
:)
z
0
f-
<{
~
w
I~
Q_
0
I
("')
~
C'J
l[)
0
0
/
fA
Fig 1-14: Outline Drawing of Operation Unit, Type NCE-51 63 (Desktop type option)
[ ~Rc ] dt:;panRadioCo.,.lid. 1 -20

----------------------------------
l.()
Ii~~~
t~~~
~ -"' ':)
"'""1'0
i"'
*
"' - .... ....
"' ....,
(T)
..--
l.()
I
<(
co
~~;~ ..,<;l-;; .... >< ....,
z
~ ~>
aol!l
..
~~
~§
~ 'fi~
~· 114>
~*'
-
.... 1111 u
~-;; ~~ ~'i? ~
0
<>:
c.
~ 9 .9
~~ g
.
~ >~e A
~
~i ,..
~
I .. ... - u
rn 1-
·-
I
~~ ~ ~ ~
0 e'""
il
"'!il ~n~
§~
I
~ g~
••
C)
z
?:
<(
0::
0
w
6_j
1-
::J
0
!=:
z
::J
0::
w
1-
0::
w
>
z
0
0
u
0
I
0
<(
Fig 1-15: Outline Drawing of ACIDC Converter, Type NBA-5135 (Desktop type option)
1 -21 [.JRC) 8apanRadicJ Co., ..lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
<!
i~~~
f!!oo -<t
"'
~ - .....
~ ':l '""
il'"
~
~ - ... !;) I
.-
~~~; ..:: -<t
.-
-
.
<0 (Y)
"' ,.., ..... >< w
I
~:t~~
~
'il::< "'"'
"' ~ 0
~. ':l -:I'll':! 'a-;; !'1"'
•• ':1 "3'8~ 0
~~~ g: z
aQ~ "" ~ a ""
a
- - .... 1-
it
e"' ~~ ~~ ~~
..,.. R8 liD n
~§
a~ e~
6
"'j;l ~~ ~~
Ill
" -~
...
::1
Djil
G§ 8 ~
Ul
Ul!:::
z
~ ::J
.. • ~
(!)
z
3:
<!
0::
r
0
w
6
_J
f-
:::>
0
~_J
OOl'll'l
t::
z
:::>
~ :r:
-+~
llJ
(6 i(l ~
u
<;!
f-
. 2
II<
g
3:
(/)
0::
8 w
f-
z
~ ~
•I
....
-~
... p
~"''"
;r;
•ljj• riZ
~' ~~
~"!.
!2, ..
.,.,.
<0
0
li1
w
q
~
Fig 1-16: Outline Drawing of lnterswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-4A (Option)
I.JRC ] Japan.RadkJ Co.,bd. 1 - 22

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual> 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION> 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
r-
,
<(
i2~g ......... ...... ..
co
m!
~
,..,
0
::':: ':: p ....
':1 ......I
.... ..q
~
......
..
M~
~~
"' ..
'#'I< ~"'
....
l · flC>
..,
'a •. ~"' ~
(T)
w
I
~ai~
~ -:l'f!'!!
::• ~':I ::l'f!'ll a.:
"- ~ 0
z
~ a il a
~§
e"' f;lfJ ~~ ~~ ..
I
1'-G
Q
R!J §6 u ell
..... ~ •• •
UJ
a~
0
6
"'!;j
~H~ ~~
l ;M
... •R ~~~ u ~
~
C)
z
3
<(
0:::
0
w
~
_j
f-
.I ::J
0
1---
z
::J
I
-----;c~tu~- .,
0
I 1---
--~ 3
(f)
0:::
mm w
I-
~
mm.
\ 0
1.0
co
0
...,..,
w
0
z
~
Fig 1-17: Outline Drawing of lnterswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-BA (Option)
1 -23 ['-'RC] 8opanRadit:J Co.,.fld.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
.;;: ;: .. -=
!:!
"(;;
<D
w
I
0
z
if L
I
'~
~-:::-r•
... •uau
f!
: .-. • • 881 ~ ~
(!)
6
3:
<(
0::
0
w
T1105< 6;
O'il ... I'll _J
1-
a
r ~t
t::
z
:::>
l ,ii! g
1-
0 "'l 6
~~
(.)
& 6l
0::
~
~ ~ ~ ~
.
6l
l ~ ;I
f~ I'll
C>
"'
u
f1
w
12 ~
~
Fig 1-18: Outline Drawing of Power Control Unit, Type NQE-3167 (Option)
[JRC] 8apanRadio Co.,l'id. 1-24

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual> 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1 5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
Fig 1-20: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9132-SA
Fig 1-2 1: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9 123-7XA
Fig 1-22: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9 123-9XA
Fig 1-23: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9122-6XA
Fig 1-25: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9122-6XAH
Fig 1-26: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-91 10-6XA
Fig 1-27: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-911 0-6XAH
1 - 25 j.JRC] gapan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION> 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
NKE-1139
SCANNERUNrr
NJU-84
CIRCUIT BREAKER I l PERFORMANCE

MONrrOR
•Ci ------------------,
ISHP YARD SUI'PlY)
PTION I I I
I
I ACIOOV.601lz
11/1 'DJW I (SA) I / :~ (WITH UNi l)
! . ,},-
I PM
I
I 0 0/lkV·OPYCYS-1 5 -,1
I I
I
I
NBL- 175 I SHIP'S MAIN
I
I
I
COAXIAL CABLE
HF -2 00 {J RC SUPPLY)
I SliPDOWN lor tEArER

ACZIDV .Sl/60Hl I • I NTG-3230
I !RAMfOQ..U TRANSMmER RECEIVER UNrr
1600VA I
I
'-
------------------' 1-
14 CORES CO MPO SITE CABLE
H-2695 110056 ~
MAX 23<1> (JRC SUPPLY)
--
] -,},-
14 CORES COMPOSITE CABLE

H-2 69511 0056
MAX 23</> (JRC SUPPLY)
--
D NCD-4990
DISPI.A Y UNrr
J
GYRO
250V -MPYCYS-7
250V-TTYCS - 1
l 0 6/1 kV- DPYCY - 6 sHIP'S MAIN
AC ZIDV 60Hr .11/l.IIXIVA
LOG-AOIII;)
DGPS
250V -TTYCS - 1 0 6/1 kV - DPYCYS - 1 5 sHIP' S MAIN
lor POWER fAl AlARM
3C-2V x5 (MAX 30m) DC 24V(SAmRY).IW
VDR
H-2 6951 11153
MAX 18.0<1> IJ RC SUPPLY!
RADARitNl(RSWIOj
250V -TTYCS - 4
ECD·-·~{ H-2695110006 CJRC SUPPLY)

H-7ZCN A0483 (JRC SUPPLY)
ALERM MONrrORtNG SYSTEM

INEAI!ESI AI'I'OOI.Oj 250V -MPYC -4
(f'IOYE"RFAI\1
250V-TTYCS-4
CONNING DISPI.AYI"''"'oKI)NJ
250V-TTYCS-4
AIS

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communi cati ons and nav igation
due to operation of the radar. Al l cables or the radar are to be run away rrom the cables of radio
equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction finder, etc. )
Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and display unit of the radar should not be
run parallel with the cables or radio equipment.
[ ~RC ] gapanRadicJ Co.,.ltd. 1 -26

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual> 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
NKE-1130
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-84
CIRC UIT BREAKER I I PERFORMAN CE

MONITOR
------------------,
r"O PTIO N J
jSHP YARD SUPPLY]
I I
I I
~H PM UNil)
I
I
I
ACIOOV,60Hz I (5A) I I r{
I 14\:nlW ~ / I
I
I
0 Bl1 kV-OPY CYS· 1 5 : -Jr
I I
~
I
I NBL-175 I
I SH IP' S MAIN I
I lort£AIER I
STe'DOWN AC2lOV.50/60Hz 14\
I IRANSfORMER I
I 1600VA I
'-
------------------'
D
14 CO RES CO MP OS I TE CABLE
H-2695 1100 56
MAX 23IfA O I ~
250V -TT YCS- 1 0 . 6/ 1kV- DPYCYS - 1.5 SH IP' S MAIN
D GPS Ia POWER FAIL ALARM
3C-2V x5 (MAX 30m ) DC24VjBAJ1ERY).IW
V DR
18 CORE S COMP OS ITE CA BLE
H-269 51 111 53
MAX 1..!!,0~1JR.C SU P PLY}
RA D ARIINTUSW1~
250V-TTYCS-4
ECDIS.·-~ {
H-2695110006 ( J RC SUPPLY )
H-266 85100 19(J RC SU PPL Y) SPARE
ALERM M ONITORING SYSTEM

INEARESlAPI'RO.O.~
250V - MPYC -4
II'O"E• FAil)
250V - TT YCS- 4
CONNING DISPLAY !JAN 701-(X)Nf
250V - TTYCS-4
A IS

Eliminating the interference on freque ncies used for marine communicati ons and navig ation
due to operation o f the radar. All cables o f the radar a re to be run away from the cables of rad io
equ ipme nt.(Ex. Radiotele phone. Comm unications receiver and direction fi nder, etc. )
Especially inter-wiring cables between scanner unit and d isplay unit of the radar should not be
run parallel with the cables of radio equipment.
1-27 [..J RC ] 8opan Radio Co.,1'/d.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERA L SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
NKE-1129-7
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-85
CIRCUIT BREAKER I I PERFORMANC E
MONITOR
----- ~~~~~~~ -----,
(oP"TION I I
I I I
I (SA) I
I
I ACI OOV.IOHEATER I
Slti'DOWN NTG-3225
I !RANSFOR'-'fR ACZllV.50/IOH<.I ( JRC SUPPLY)
-Jr
J
14 CORE S COMPOSITE CA B LE
H - 2695110056
MAX 2 3d> (J R C SUPPLY)
CJ NC D-4990
DISPlAY UNIT
~
J
GYRO
250V-M PYCYS -7
250V- TTYC S- 1
l 0 6/1 kV -OPYCY - 6 SHIP' S MAIN
ACZllV .IOH<.I<IKOV"
LOG ~N~o£AOI~
250V- TTYCS- 1 0 . 6/ 1 kV-OPYCYS - 1. 5 SH IP' S MAIN
DGPS Ia POWERMilA~RM
3C-2 V x5 (MAX 30m) DC24V( BMTERYI IW
VDR
H -2 695111153
MAX18. 0 dJ RC S PPLYI
R ADAR PNTfRSWl~
250V- TTYCS - 4
ECDIS~··~ { H- 2695110006 (JRC SU PPLY)

H · 7ZC NA0483 ( JRC SUPPLY)
ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM

~I!ESI APPIIOA~
250V- MPYC - 4
IPOI'oEtFAIQ
250V- TTYC S-4
C ONNING DISPLAYJJA>'101<XlNJ
250V-TTYCS-4
AIS
Fig 1-21 : General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA-9123-lXA

Eliminating the interferen ce on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation
due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio
[ ~RC ] Japan Radio Co., .ltd. 1-28

JMA-91 00 Instruction Manual > 1.GEN ERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
CIRCUIT BREAKER
(SHPYAROSUPPlY[
IL-------..---,---------_-_-_--'___..==-- ----
(opT-;-ON ---- ~ ----- ~ ----~
:1 ACI<DV.IOHz
1•.1row ~
(5A) I / I I
r-1.._...._ __,..-- --' (WITH PM UNfl)
: 0 811kV-OPYCYS-1 5 : .Jr
FLEXIBLE WA VE GUIDE
: NBL-175 1 I : FR·9 IJRC SUPPLY)
I I SHIP'S MAIN I
I STEPOOWN fort£ATBI I NTG-3225
1 lRANSFOI!MER Acmv..'Dt60Hz.lo I TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT
I ~~ I
~------------------'
14 COR ES CO MP OS ITE CABLE
H - 2695110056
M AX 23~ (J RC SUPPLY)
14 CO RE S CO M POSITE CABLE
H -2695 11 0056
MAX 23. (J R C SUP PL Y)
D NCD-4990
DISPI.AY UNIT
GYRo -~2~
s~ov
~-~
M~P~
Y~c~
LOGjN/VEAOIB:l _ _;2:..;:5~
vs
~-~
1________~
0..;.
V_; - T...;T_;Y..;;
C..;:;
S_- 1
; .__ _ _ __
l 0 6/ 1kV -DPYC Y -6 SHIP'S MAIN
Acmv 60Hz .lo .&:nVA
DGPs --~2~
s~ov
_-_
r_r_
vc
~s~--
1 ___________, 0. 6/1kV-DPYCYS -1. 5 SHIP'S MAIN
for POWER FAIL ALARM
VOR -~3:..;:C~·;:.
2V .;....;.;c
x ;:.
5 _,.(M
_;AX
c...:..;_~3;:.
0m "'-'-
) -----/ OC2•VJ8AI1BYI. IW
18 CORES COMPOS ITE CABLE
H-2695111153
RADARP"""""''<>i _...~M~Al-'X'-ILso
lWu'dl:....l.l!.!l
R.l<.
c ..::ls'-lO
U.:;.
P~PL
!...Yu.....
l _ _____,
250V- TT YCS-4
ECDISll',..,_,,,_. H- 2695 110006 (J RC SUPPLY)

{ H-7ZCNA0483 (JRC SUPPLY)
ALERMMONITORINGSYSTEM 25 0V-MPYC - 4
~~~~ -_;2:..;:5~0~
V~- T~T~Y_;C~S~
-4---------'
CONN~GDISPI.AY~,..~~ -...;:..;:~;__~~;__---------'
AIS --..;;2~
5;:.
0V_;·..;.
T~ TY
_;C
;:.S
_;·~
4 ________________- /

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used fo r marine communications and navigation
0 due to operation of the radar. A ll cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio
1-29 [~RC ) dOfJOn Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-91 00 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
NKE-1125-6
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-85
CIRCUIT BREAKER I T I
I PERFORMANC E
MONITOR
----- ~~~~~~~
,c; PTION I ------,
I
~H
I I
I
I
ACIOOV.60Hz
l<b.IOOW ~
I ( 5A) I /
I
I r-i PM UNi l)
I
I 0 6/II<V-OP YCYS-1 5 :
-:;,-
I
I I I
I NBL-1751 I
I SHIP'S MAIN I
I STe'DOWN fa !EATER I
TRANSFORMER AC220V .sl/60Hz.l <b I
I 1600VA
I I
'-
------------------'
D
14 CORES COMPOS IT E CA BLE
H-2695 11 0056
MAX 23/b (JRC SUPPLY)
NC D-4990
DISPlAY UNIT
GYRO
250V-MPYCYS -7
250V -TTYCS-1
J l 0 . 6/1 kV-DPYCY- 6 SHIP'S MAIN
AC220V .60Hz. I <b HXl VA
LOG(NMCAOIIQ
250V -TTYCS-1 0 . 6/1 kV- DPYCYS -1 . 5 SHIP'S MA IN
DGPS fa POWER FAIL ALARM
3C-2V x5 ( MAX 30m) OC24V(8ATTERY).IW
VDR
18 CO RES COMPOSITE CABLE
H-2695111153
MAX 18 0 i
250V -TTYCS -4
ECOIS~·~{ H -2695110006 ( JR C SUPPLY)

H-7ZCNA0483 ( JRC SUPPLY)

INEA l<fSl Af>f>IICMC>i 250V-MPYC -4
(~RFAIU
250V -TTYCS-4
CONNING DISPLAYp,..,.roi<X)N)
250V -TTYCS-4
AIS

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communicati ons and navigation
equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and directio n finder, etc. )
["'Rc] 8opanRadicJ Co.,.ltd. 1-30

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1 5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
NKE-1125-9
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-85
CIRC UIT BREAKER I J

PERFORMANC E
MONITOR
-----------------,
OP liON I
(SHP YARD SUPPLY)
I I
~H
1
ACIOOV.60Hz I (SA} j I
r-t
lfbiOOW / : PM UNil)
0 811 kV·DPY CYS·I 5
-,},-
I
I I
I
NBL-175: SHIP'S MAIN I
lorHEAtB! I
STEPDOWN ACZiDV.50/60Hl.l.
TRANSFORNER I
1600VA I
------------------'
1~ CORE S CO MP OS ITE CABLE

H- 26951 10056
MAX 23 d> ( JR C SUPPL Y)
CJ NC CH990
DISPLAY UNIT
G YRO
250V-MPYCYS -7
250V-TTYCS - 1
J l 0 6/ 1kV-DPYCY - 6 SHIP' S MAIN
ACZ!DV 60HE I. IIXlVA
LO GII'MAOI~
250V-TTYC S- 1 0 6/ 1kV-DPYCYS - 1. 5 SH IP'S MA IN
DGPS lor POWER FAIL ALARM
3C -2V x5 (MAX 30m ) DC2•V(BATIERY(. IW
VDR
18 CO RES CO MP OSITE CABL E
H-269 511 1153
MAX 180 <1> fJRCSUPf'LYl
RADAR pNI[RSWI~
250V-TTYCS -4
ECDIS-·~{ H-2695110006 (JR C SUPPLY )

H-7ZCNA OH 3 (JRC SUP PL Y)

~·I'I'IIOA~
250V- MPYC -4
jrQV\(1 fAIIJ
250V-TTYCS-4
CONNING DISPLAY !JAN 10t<X>N!
250V-TTYCS-4
AIS
Fig 1-24: General System Diagram of Radar, Type JMA -9122-9XA

Eliminating the interference on frequencies used for marine communications and navigation
0 due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio
equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and direction fmder, etc. )
1-31
JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 1 GENERAL A ND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION> 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
NKE-225~HS
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-85
CIRCUIT BREAKER I I PERFORMANCE
MONITOR
-----------------,
lopTIO N I l
(SHP Y"ROSUPPLY)
I
I I
~H
I
I
I ...CI00\1.60Hz I (5A) I I
ri.,},-
I I • .IOOW / : PM UNil)
I
I 0 8/lkV-OPYCYS-1 5 I
I I
I I
I
NBL-175: SHIP'S MAIN I
I Ia I-EATER
I
STEPOOWN I
... cmv
I
I
'--
TR"NSfORMER
-- ~:: ____________ , .!il/60Hz.l •
I

CFQ-6912-'' 65m MA X
MAX 1• 5 . (J RC SUPPLY)
CJ
-
NC [).4990
DISPLAY UNIT
GYRO
250V- MPYCYS -7
250V-TTYCS- 1
J l 0 . 6/1kV-DPYCY-6 SHIP' S MAIN
... cmV.60Hz IQI .!Dl\1.._
LOG (NM'A OI~
250V-TTYCS-1 0 6/1kV-DPYCYS -1 5 SHIP'S MA IN
DGPS fcrPOWEJHA AlA~M
3C-2V x5 (MAX 30m ) OC2•V(BAI"IERY(.IW
VDR
18 CORES COMPOSITE C ABLE
H -2695 111153
MAX 18 0<'> t.IRC S IPPL Yl
RADARp.... USWIQi
250V-TTYCS - 4
Eco•-·~ { H -2695110006 ( J RC SU PPLY)

H -7ZCNA0.83 (JRC SUP PL Y)

INEAI1ES1 Af'f>IIOAQi 250V-M PYC - 4
II'OVoER fAiij
250V-TTYCS - 4
CONNING DISPLAY'""" 101<00<1
250V-TTYCS - 4
A IS

Eliminating the interference on rrcquencies used for marine communications and navigation
0 due to operatio n or the radar. A ll cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables or radio
equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communications receiver and di rection finder, etc. )
Especially inter-wiri ng cables between scanner un it and display unit or the radar should not be
run parallel wi th the cables of radio equipment.
[.J RC ] 8apan. Radio Co.,.l'Jd. 1-32

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION> 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
NKE-2103-6
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-85
PERFORMANC E
I J MONITOR
-,},-
~
'------..
19 CORES CO MPOSIT E CABLE

CFQ-6912· ·· 65m MAX
MAX 14 54> ( JRC SUP PLY)
- --
D NC [).4990
DISPLAY UNIT
250V-MPYCYS -7
_) J l 0 6/1 kV-DPYCY - 6 SHIP'S MAIN
GYRO
250V- TTYC S-1 AC2DV.;(Hz. l • .tn!VA
LOG,.....,.o,q
250V-TTYCS - 1 0 . 6/1 kV-DPYCYS -1 5 SHIP'S MAIN
DGPS lor POWER FAIL ALARM
3C- 2V x5 (MAX 30m) DC24 VIBAITERY).IW
VDR
18 CORES CO MP OSITE CABLE
H -2895111153
MAX 18 . 0~ {JRC SUPP L.Yl
RADARpm••sw•01
250V-TTYCS-4
ECms--~{ H -269511 0006 (JRC SUPPLY)

H -7 ZCNA0483 (JRC SUPPLY)
ALERM MONITORING SYSTEM 250V-MPYC -4

i>'(A01ESI API'I!OAQ1
I""""•FAIU
250V-TTYCS-4
CONNING DISPLAY IJAN-701-<:0NI
250V-TTYCS-4
AIS
0 due to operation of the radar. All cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio
Especially inter-wiring cables between scanne r unit and display unit of the radar should not be
run parallel wi th the cables of radio eq ui pment.
1 -33 ['-'RC] 8apan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 1 .GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1 5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
NK&2103-0HS
SCANNER UNIT
NJU-85
I j
I PERFORMANCE
MONITOR
~
.,},-
...____.,
19 CORES COMPOSIT E CABLE

CFQ-6912·' ' 65m MAX
MAX 1• 5 <b ( JR C S UP PLY)
-
CJ NCD-4990
DISPLAY UNIT
GYRO
250V-MPYCYS -7
250V-TTYCS-1
JJ
l 0 6 / 1 kV-DPYCY- 6 SHIP' S MA IN
AC2lDV ~Hz • IJ:JJVA
LOGIPM:AOI~l
250V- TTYCS-1 0 . 6/1 kV-DPYCYS -1 . 5 SHIP'S MAIN
DGPS 101 POWER FAIL ALAR M
3C-2V x5 (MAX 30m) OC2<V(8ATTERY). IW
VDR
H-2 69511115 3
MAX 1 8 O<b {JRC SUPPL Y)
RADARfNTUSWIOi
250V- TTYCS - 4
ECOIS,.·•~ { H-2695110006 (JRC SUPPLY)

H- 7ZCNA0483 (JRC SUPPLY)
A LERM MONITORING SYSTEM

jNEAII£51 AI'I'IIOAOi 250V-MPYC - 4
~lfAtiJ
250V-TTYCS - 4
C ONNING DISPLAYIJAM-70KONI
250V- TTYCS - 4
AIS

0 due to operation of the radar. A ll cables of the radar are to be run away from the cables of radio
Especially inter-wiring cables between scarmer unit and display unit of the radar should not be
[..JRC ] (Japan. Radio Co., .lid. 1-34

SECTION 2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL
PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
'Ill
I
I I
II 11111 11
111
I •11 111111
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS
2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY ............................................................................. 2-1
2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS .................. 2-11
2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ...........................................2-16
[ ~Rc ] 8opanRadicJCo.,Ltd.
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
NAMES OF DISPLAY
Example of screen display
In this example, the screen is divided into a number of areas and the names in
each area are indicated.
Upper left Upper right

of the display PPI of the display
Own ship's
information
/,_.. ~
-------=}
..,,.,---
- -,
I , / ....-- -.,
/
Target
I / /;::--- tracking (TT) I
I //(; ((7)) I //
I
AIS information
\ (_]: ~ -- / Digital information

' '\ __ \ \'
\ .\ ' '
~--
-.;_
0- ...
',
.•
'
Menu
Bri lliance /
Display information
Alarm
Lower left Lower right

of the display ofthe display
2-1 [.JRC] (Japan RadicJ Co., ..lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
PPI
Automatic acquisition I
activation zone Association target Own ship's symbol
Ship's heading
marker
Past position
Ship's
heading line
A IS target number
Cursor mark
Tracked target AIS target symbol

vector
Tracked target
number AIS target vector
Tracked target Radar trails

symbol
Parallel index lines

VRM2
Other ship's track

EBL2
VRM1 EBL1 CPA ring
[JRC ] gapan Radicl Co.,.ltd. 2- 2

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Upper left of the display
Range scale Tuning indication
Range rings display On I Off

Range rings interval Transmission pulse length
Stability mode
Azimuth display mode

Transmission I standby
X IS band
lnterswitch connection status
About ground and sea stabilization
Speed sensor source is MAN , LOG , 2AXW
If SeUDrift Setting menu is on : GND (Ground stabilization)
If SeUDrift Setting menu is off : Sea (Sea stabilization)
Speed sensor source is GPS , 2AXG : GND (Ground stabilization)
Lower left of the display

Double zoom On I Off
Interference rejection (IR) mode
Radar video processing (PROC) Target enhance (ENH) mode

mode
Sea clutter suppression (Sea)

Function (FUNC) mode mode
Gain dial position Rain I snow clutter suppression
(Rain) mode
Sea clutter uppression (Sea)
dial position Tune mode
Rain I snow clutter

suppression (Rain)
dial position
2-3 [ JRC I 8apan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 lnslruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Upper right of the display
Cursor bearing Cursor bearing Cursor mode
numeric value indication Cursor latitude
true I relative
Cursor range Cursor longitude
EB L1
starting point mode
EBL2
EBL 1 bearing
starting point mode
VRM1 range Parallel index line

starting point mode
EBL2 numeric value indication Consistent Common

true I relative Reference Point (CCRP)
EBL2 bearing VRM2 range
Lower right of the display
Own ship's track interval
Mark color
Own ship's track interval unit

Own ship's track color
Map display Map position correction

On I Off indication
Graphic display CPA ring display

On I Off On/Off
Ship's heading line
On / Off
Own ship's information

Operation status
Ship's heading bearing

Heading device
Own ship's speed
Speed sensor
Own ship's
course over ground
Time display mode
Own ship's
speed over ground
Positioning system
(example: GPS, DGPS)
Date and time
Geodetic positioning system

CCRP latitude CCRP longitude
j.JRC] 8apan Radio Co., .ltd. 2-4

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS> 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Target tracking (TT} I AIS information
Target tracking (TT) I
EPA/ AIS
Past position display

TCPAiimit interval
CPA limit
interval unit
AIS On I Off Association On I Off
AIS filter mode

Tracked target symbol
display On I Off
Radar trails remaining time
AIS target symbol display
On I Off
Radar trails true I relative Radar trails d isplay time
Numeric information: AIS target information

AIS target number
Ship's name
Unread message
MMSI
Course
CPA
Speed
Bearing Ship's heading bearing
Range
Latitude
Latitude / longitude error Longitude
Navigation status Destination
2- 5 [.JRC] f)opan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual> 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS > 2 .1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
About time display mode
UTC : Universal Time Coordinate
UTC(S) : UTC (System Time)
LMT : Local Mean Time
LMT (S) : LMT (System Time)
Numeric information: Tracked target information

Tracked target number
Bearing
True course Range
True speed
CPA
BCR
TCPA
BCT
No information is displayed
if digital information value is
not displayed
Numeric information: Enhancement of cursor position numeric value indication
Cursor bearing numeric

Cursor bearing value indication
true I relative
Cursor range
Cursor latitude
Cursor longitude
I..JRCI 8apan Radio Co., .ltd. 2-6

JMA-91 00 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Numeric information: Enhancement of EBL I VRM numeric value display
EBL bearing
EBLbearing '4 ------il -- numeric value indication
true I relative
VRM range
Numeric information: Navigation information

Depth
Wind direction I speed Wind speed

numeric value indication
true I relative
Destination bearing Destination distance
Remaining time before

arriving destination
Graph information : Depth indication
Depth
Depth range
Depth graph
Time range
2-7 [.JRC ] (Japan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual> 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Graph information: Water temperature indication
Water temperature
Water temperature range
Water temperature graph
Time range
Graph information : Wind direction I speed
Wind direction I speed

true I relative
Wind speed
Graph information: Course bar
Rate ofturn
[.JRC] 8opan.Radi.o Co.,..fid. 2-8

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Numeric information: Marker
Marker bearing Marker latitude
Marker range ----...to~.. Marker longitude
Arrival time ~
Menu
Main menu
Digital information Parallel index line menu
Target Tracking (TT) menu activation zone (AZ) menu
User map menu
A IS menu Route menu
Brilliance
Main menu
Digital information Parallel index linemenu
activation zone (AZ) menu
Own Track menu User map menu
AIS menu Route menu
Display information
Day I night mode
Radar video brilliance Tracked target I AIS target

symbol brilliance
2- 9 [.JRC] (japan. Radio Co.,J.'Jd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONT ROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Alarm
Alarm indication
(The system alarm indicated in red .
Other information indicated in blue or yellow .)
[~RC I aopon RadkJ Co., .lid. 2 - 10

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
----------------------------------
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
·~0 ~@
~==,d/
e@~ @@ ®ffi
e[Wl e@ID ®ffi
The name of each button is described from the following page. See below.
2-11 [.JRC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
----------------------------------
CD [POWER] (Power supply} switch
The lamp is lit and the equipment is acti vated.
If this switch is pressed while the equipment is runn ing, the power of the equipment is
shut down.
-+ 3.1. 1 on page 3-2
@ [PWR ACK] (Power alarm acknowledgement} key

Use this function to acknowledge the alarm when power supply abnormality occurs.
To enable this key, an external battery (separate power from normal AC) is required.
Q) [TX/STBY] (Transmission/Standby} key

When the [POWER] switch is pressed, the "STANDBY" message is displayed in the
top-left comer of the screen in about 3 minutes. If th is key is pressed, transmission
starts. If this key is pressed during transmission, the equipment is set to a standby state.
-+ 3.1. 1 on page 3-2
® [ALARM ACK] (Alarm acknowledgement} key

Use this function to acknowledge alarms such as failure alarm, approaching target alarm,
and collision a larm.
By pressing this key at the occurrence of an a lann, the alarm sound can be stopped.
If multiple alarms occur, press this key same time as the a larms.
-+ 3.2. 7 on page 3- 12
@ [TUNE] (Tuning} dial

Use his function to tune a transmitter.
The mode is switched to manual/automatic whenever this dial is pressed.
-+ 3 .2.3 on page 3-7
® [RAIN] (Rain I snow clutter suppression} dial

This function suppresses rain I snow clutters.
To increase the effect of suppression, turn the dia l c lockwise.
The mode can be switched to manual or automatic by pressing the dial.
-+ 3.2.6 on page 3-11
0 [SEA] (Sea clutter suppression} dial

This function suppresses sea clutter.
To increase the effect of suppression, tum the dial clockwise.
-+ 3 .2.5 on page 3-9
[.JRC ] gopan RadicJ Co., .ltd. 2-12

CONTROL PANEL KEYS
----------------------------------
® [GAIN] (Gain/pulse length) dial
This function adjusts the reception sensitivity of the radar.
To increase the sensitivity, tum the dia l clockwise.
The transmission pulse w idth can be switched by pressing the dia l.
gain ~ 3.2.4 on page 3-8
pulse width ~3 .4.2 on page 3-24
® [RANGE + /-] (Range switching) key

This function switches the range.
Press [+] to increase the observation range.
Press [-] to reduce the observation range.
--+3.2.2 on page 3-6
@ [EBL 1] (Electronic Bearing Line 1) key

Use this function to display and select EBL I.
ff the key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, the menu for setting EBLI is displayed.
~ 4. 1.3 on page 4-3
@ (EBL2] (Electronic Bearing Line 2) key

Use this function to display and select EBL2.
If the key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, the menu for setting EBL2 is displayed.
~ 4.1.3 on page 4-3
@ [EBL] (Electronic Bearing Line) dial

This function rotates the azimuth of the EBL that is selected in EBL 1/2.
By pressing the dia l, the selected EB L can be sw itched to Center fixing~ Floating~
Center fixing.
~ 4.1.3 on page 4-3
@> (VRM1] (Variable Range Marker 1) key

This function selects VRM I. The On/Off and dial use right are switched.
~on page 4-6
®; [VRM2] (Variable Range Marker 2) key

This function selects VRM2. The On/Off and dial use right are switched.
~on page 4-6
2-13 [ ~RC ] 8opan. Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
----------------------------------
@ [VRM] (Variable Range Marker) dial
This function changes the range of the VRM that is selected by VRM I/2.
By pressing the dial, the parallel line cursor function can be switched to Operation --+
Fixed --+ Off --+ Operation.
--+ on page 4-6
@ [T /R VECT] (True vector display I Relative vector display) key

This function switches the display mode (true/relative) of the tracked target and A IS
target vector.
--+ 5. 1.6 on page 5-14
@ [TGT DATA] (Target data display) key

This function displays the digital data of the tracked target or AIS target at the cursor
position.
the tracked target -+ 5.2.3 on page 5- 18
the AIS target -+ 5.3.5 on page 5-29
® [ACQ MANUAL] (Manual acquisition) key

This function enables manual acquisition of the target at the cursor position.
--+ 5.2. 1 on page 5- 15
@ [ACQ CANCEL] (Tracked target cancellation) key

This function cancels the symbol and vector of the target that is be ing tracked and stops
the tracking of the target.
If this key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, all the targets that are being tracked are
cance lled.
--+ 5.2.2 on page 5- 17
@ [DAY / NIGHT] (Day/night mode) key

This function switches the color and brightness of the screen that was preset.
--+ 3.4.1 2 on page 3-35
@ [AISITT] (AIS On/Off) key

This function switches the A IS function to ON/OFF when the A IS function is enabled.
--+ 5.3.2 on page 5-27
@ [HL OFF] (Ship's heading line Off) key

HL (ship's heading highlight line) can be set to Off only while this key is pressed.
--+ 3.4. 10 on page 3-34
[ .JRC J 8opon Radio Co., .ltd. 2 - 14

CONTROL PANEL KEYS
----------------------------------
@ [DATA OFF] (DATA Off) key
This function sets the graphics other than HL, range ring, EBL, and VRM to OFF
temporarily whi le this key is pressed.
~3 .4. 11 on page 3-34
@) [PANEL] (Operator panel brilliance) key
This function adjusts the lighting bri lliance of various switches and dial positions on the
operator panel. The brightness changes cyclically whenever this key is pressed.
~3 .4. 1 3 on page 3-35
@ [USER] key
By pressing this key, the signal processing setting that is preset can be called.
The setting changes to FUNC OFF => FUNCl => FUNC2 = > FUNC3 = >
FUNC4 whenever this key is pressed.
If this key pressed for 2 seconds or more, the function setting menu is displayed.
~ 3.9 on page 3-111
@ [OPTION1] key
By pressing this key, the pre-registered menu position can be directly disp layed.
At factory shipment, the cal ling of [Main Menu] is assigned.
~3.8 .7 on page 3- 103
@ [OPTION2] key
By pressing tllis key, the pre-registered menu position can be directly displayed.
At factory shipment, the calling of [Sub Menu] is assigned.
~ 3.8.7 on page 3-103
@ Track ball
T his function moves the cursor mark to any position. Use this function for setting in
each mode.
Use this function to specify a center position of floating EBL and an off-center position.
~ 3.3 .1 on page 3-14
@ [Track ball left button]
Use this function to confirm menu selection and numeric value input.
@ [Track ball right button]
Use this function to reset menu selection and numeric value input.
® [BRILL] (Brilliance dial)
This dial is provided at the right of the monitor. Use thi s function to adjust the brilliance
of the monitor.
~ 3.2.1 on page 3-6
2-15 [ JRC l aopan Radio Co.,l'td.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTIONS
----------------------------------
FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
In this radar, the frequently used functions can be directly set from the screen
without opening the menu by using the software buttons on the screen for quick
handling. The screen is divided into a number of areas and each area is named.

Own ship's
information
-..:;- -........_
~-..J
/
-- --- . ......
L!'.J
Target
tracking (TT) I
AIS information
\ \i
. --/\
~
I) Digital information
..............:
--- .....__.. ',
Menu
Brilliance/
Display information
Alarm
of the display of the display
The name of each button is described from the next page. The function can be
used by left-clicking while setting the arrow cursor on the button position.
I.JRC] gapan Radio Co.,.ltd. 2-16

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
----------------------------------
CD Range scale switching
~ Range rings displ ay (f) T ransmission pulse length

On /Off switching
® Motion mode true I relative
@ Transmission I Standby
switching ® Azimuth display mode
switching
® lnterswitch connection
change

To increase the observation range scale (max im um 96NM), click + and to reduce
the range (mi nimum 0. 125N M), c lick
@ Range rings display On I Off
The display of range ri ngs are set to On I Off whenever this button is cl icked.
When the display is set to On, the interval of the fixed range marker is di splayed.
Q) Motion mode true I relative switching

The screen motion mode is switched whenever the button is c licked.
TM (true motion) ::::} RM (re lative motion) ::::} TM
RM(R) indicates that the rada r trai ls is a re lati ve trail.
RM(T) indicates that the radar trails is a true trail.
® Off center switching

If this button is c licked, the cursor is moved, and left-clicked, the sh ip's pos ition can be
moved to the cursor position. The movi ng range is within 66% of the rad ius.
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the off-center is set to Off and the ship's position is
returned to the center of the screen.
® Transmission I standby switching

At expiration of the pre-heat time after the power is turned on, Preheat changes to
Standb
Standby :Indicates a standby state. If this button is clicked in this state, the
equipment is set to a transmission state.
:Indicates a transmission state. If this button is clicked in this state,

the equipment is set to a standby state.
2 - 17 [.JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.l'Jd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
----------------------------------
® lnterswitch connection change
This button is displayed when the interswitch is connected. This button indicates the
connection status of the scanner unit that is connected to the indicator.
If the button is clicked in the transmission standby state, the menu for changing the
connection state between the scanner unit and the indicator is displayed. The connection
state of the scanner unit and indicator cannot be changed unless the master indicator is in
a standby state.
Refer to the Appendix A NQE-3141 /nterswilch Unit lnterswitch (Optional) Instruction
Manual that is attached for the setting method. This button is not displayed if the
interswitch is not connected.
0 Transmission pulse length switching

The transmission pulse length is switched whenever this button is clicked. Three types
of pulses are available, short pulse (SP), middle pulse (M P), and long pulse (LP). The
pulse length and repetition frequency vary even for the sam e s hort pulse, according to
the range that is used and it is displayed as SP1 , SP2 .
® Azimuth display mode switching

The azimuth display is switched whenever this button is clicked.
H Up (Head Up) =? N Up (North Up) =? C Up (Course Up) ::::} H Up
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the GYTO Setting menu is dis played.
<D Double zoom switching

@ Radar video processing (PROC) ® Interference rejection (IR)
mode switching mode switching
@ Function (FUN C) @ Target enhance (ENH)

@ Gain adjustment ® Sea clutter s uppression (Sea)

mode switching
(J) Sea clutter suppression (Sea)

@ Rain and snow clutter
adjustment
suppression (Rain)
mode switching
@ Rain I snow clutter
su ppression (Rain) @ Tune mode switching
adjustment @ Tune adjustment
CD Double zoom switching

Use this function to enlarge to double the size the display screen of the position s peci fied
by the cursor. l f this button is clicked, the zoom mode is set. When the c ursor is m oved
to the radar screen and left-clicked, the screen is enlarged to doubl e the size so that the
middle of the cursor and the own s hip's pos ition is set to the center of the screen. This
function cannot be used when the range is 0.125NM.
I ~RC ] gapan Radio Co.,.lid. 2-18

BUTTONS
----------------------------------
@ Interference rejection (IR) mode switching
The interference rejection mode is switched whenever thi s button is clicked.
IR Off IR Low ::::} IR Meddle ==? IR High IR Off
@ Target enhance (ENH) mode switching
The target enhance mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.

ENH Off ==? ENH Levell ::::} ENH Level2 ==? ENH Level3 ==? ENH Off
® Radar video processing (PROC) mode switching

The radar video processing mode is switched whenever this button is c licked.
PROC Off ==? 3Scan CORREL ==? 4Scan CORREL ==? SScan CORREL
Remain Peak Hold
...;.;.;;.;...._... PROC Off
® Function (FUNC) mode switching

The function mode is switched whenever this butto n is c licked.
FUNC Off
Storm
---Coast Dee Sea Fishnet
FUNC Off
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the function registration menu (User Function
Setting) is opened.
® , (!) , ® and ® Gain, Sea clutter suppression(Sea), Rain I snow

clutter suppression (Rain), Tune adjustment (Tune)
Adjust the gain, sea clutter suppression, ra in I snow clutter suppressio n and tune using
the track ball.
If the button is clicked on, the adjustment value is shown at the upper-right of the cursor.
Make adj ustments by mov ing the track ball to the left and right. Determine the
adjustment by left-clicking.
@ , @ and @ Sea clutter suppression (Sea) mode, Rain and snow clutter
suppression (Rain) mode, and Tune mode switching
Use these functions to switch to the manual or automatic mode of sea clutter
s uppression, rain and snow clutter suppression, and tune. The bar o n the left side
indicates the position of the dial.
The mode is switched to MAN (manual) I AUTO (automatic) whenever the
button is clicked. If rain and s now c lutter s uppression is switched to an automatic mode,
sea c lutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode a lso.
2-19 [ ~Rc ] 8apan Radio Co., .ltd.

BUTTONS
----------------------------------
Upper Right of the display
® EBL1 numeric value indication ® Mark font /line pattern
true I relative switching switching
<D Cursor mode switching

switching
@ Cursor bearing
@ EBL1 starting point
numeric value display
mode switching
true I relative switching
mode switching
@ EBL1 adjustment
@ Parallel index line
® VRM1 adjustment
setting
(J) EBL2 adjustment
@ VRM2 adjustment
®> EBL2 numeric value indication ® Parallel index line
true I relative switching starting point mode
switching
CD Cursor mode switching

The mode of the function that uses the cursor is switched whenever this button is
pressed.
I AUTO I => IACQ TT I => I ACT AIS I => I TGT Data I => I CNCL TT I =>
IDEACT AIS I => ICNCL Data I : : } 0 => Property
I AUTO I
0 Mark font I line pattern switching

This function switches a mark font I line pattern. If this button i s clicked w hile the cursor
mode i s 0 (mark) or - -- ---- ( line), the mark font I line pattern is
changed.
Q) Mark color I line color switching

This function switches a mark color I line color. If this button is clicked while the cursor
mode is 0 (mark) or -- ----- ( line), the mark color I line color is
changed.
® Cursor bearing numeric value display true I relative switching

The bearing numeric value display T J (true bearing) I R (relative bearing) of the
cursor is swi tched whenever this button is clicked.
['-'RC] 8opan. Radio Co., .lid. 2 - 20

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTIONS
----------------------------------
@,® , CV and ® EBL 1 I 2 and VRM1 I 2 adjustment
These functions set the EBL I , VRM I , EBL2 , and VRM2 displays to On I Off and
acquire the operation right.
If the button is clicked on, the operation rig ht is acquired. Make adj ustments by moving
the track ball to the left and right Determ ine the adjustment by left-clicking.
® and ® EBL 1, EBL2 numeric value true I relative switching

The EBL I I 2 bearing numeric value display T (true bearing) I R (relative
bearing) is switched whenever the button is clicked.
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the EBL I Cursor Setting menu is displayed.
@ and @ EBL 1 I EBL2 starting point mode switching

The EBL starting point is set to CCRP or any pos ition on the radar screen whenever this
button is clicked.
=> C => D =>
: Center The starting point is fixed to the CCRP position .
C : Screen Fix The starting point is set to the cursor pos ition. If left-
clicked subsequently, the starting position is fixed to
the cursor position.
D : LIL Fixi The starting point is set to the cu rsor position. If

left-clicked subsequently, the starting position is
fixed to the latitude I longitude of the cursor.
(Connection of a navigator is necessary.) If the
starting point is moved outside of the screen , the
operation is reset automatically and the starting
point returns to the CCRP position .
i. D is enabled only when a navigator is connected.
@ Parallel index line setting

This function sets the paralle l index line disp lay to On I Off and acquires the operation
rig ht.
If this button is clicked, the operation rig ht is acquired and the m enu is opened. After
setting, determine the setting by left-clicking.
<0l Parallel index line starting point mode switching

The parallel index line starting point is set to CCRP or any position on the radar screen
whenever this button is c licked.
In the same way as for the EBL starting point, three options are available, :Center,
C : Screen Fix, and D : LIL Fix.
2 - 21 [.JRC ] 8opan. Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTIONS
----------------------------------
@ Own ship's track interval
switching
<D Mark color switching @ Own ship's track interval unit
switching
® Own ship's track color
switching
® CPA ring display

On I Off
(f) Ship's heading line Off
CD Mark color switching

The color of the mark is switched whenever this button is c licked.
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the Mark Setting menu is opened.
@ Own ship's track color switching
The own ship's track color is switched whenever th is button is clicked.
@ Own ship's track interval switching
The own ship's track interval is switched whenever this button is clicked.
® Own ship's track interval unit switching

The unit of the own ship's track interval is switched whenever this button is c licked.
sec => min => NM => sec
® Map display On I Off

T he own track, target track and route dis play are set to On I Off whenever this button is
c licked. lf the button is c licked for 2 seconds, the Map Setting men u is opened.
® Graphic display Off

While the button is clicked, the graphic display other than VRM , EBL, HL, a cursor, and
range rings on the radar screen is cleared temporarily.
0 Ship's heading line Off

The ship's heading line (HL) display is set to Off while this button is clicked.
Since the shi p's heading line is cleared while the button is c licked, the target in the ship's
heading beari ng can be c learly seen.
[.JRC] 3opan. RadkJ Co., .ltd. 2 - 22

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS> 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTIONS
----------------------------------
® CPA ring display On I Off
The C PA ring display is sw itched to On I Off whenever the button is cl icked.
When the target vector display mode is T (true vector), the C PA ring cannot be set to
On .
@ Manual own ship's speed

setting
CD Heading device switching

The heading device is switched whenever this button is c licked.
GYRO ~ CMPS (Electronic compass) ~ GYRO
When the selected heading device is not connected to the equipment, an alarm is issued .
0 Speed sensor switching

The s peed sensor is switched whenever the button is clicked.
MAN (M anual) ~ LOG ( ing le-axis water log) ~ 2AXW ( Dual-axis water
log) ~ 2AXG ( Dual-axis g round log) ~ GPS ~ MAN
When the selected speed device is not connected to the equipment, an ala rm is issued.
Q) Time display mode switching

The time display mode urc (uni versal time c lock) I (loca l mean time) is
switc hed whenever this button is clicked.
® Manual own ship's speed setting

When selection of the speed sensor is set to MAN , enter the own ship's speed
manually.
lf this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting a value,
determine the entry by clicking ENT
2-23 (JRC ] 8opan.RadioCo.,..lid.

BUTIONS
----------------------------------
Target tracking (TT) I AIS information
<D Target vector display ® Target vector length setting @ TCPA limit setting
® Past position display

@ CPA limit setting
interval switching
@ Past position display

true I relative switching (j) Past position display
interval unit switching
@ AIS
On I Off ® Association
On I Off
® Tracked target symbol
display On I Off
@ AIS filter mode switching
® AIS target symbol display
On I Off
@ Radar trails display Radar trails display time
Q) Target vector display true I relative switching

The tracked target I A IS ta rget vector display is switched to T (true vector) I R
(relative vector) whenever this button is clicked.
This setting is switc hed together with the past position display true I relative switching.
@ Target vector length setting
Set a vector length of the tracked target I AlS target.

If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the
length, determine the setting by clicking ENT
Q) CPA limit setting

Set a C PA limit.
If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the limit,
determine the setting by clicking ENT
® TCPA limit setting

Set a TCPA limit.
If this button is c licked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the limit,
determ ine the setting by c licking ENT
@ Past position display true I relative switching

The tracked target I A IS target past position display is switched to T (true past
positio n) I R (relative past position) whenever the button is clicked.
T his setting is switched together with the target vector display true I relative switching.
[ ~ Rc ] 8opan.Radio Co.,J.'Jd. 2-24

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PAN EL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
----------------------------------
® Past position display interval switching
The past position display interval is switched whenever the button is clicked.
(J) Past position display interval unit switching

The past position display interva l unit is switched whenever the button is c licked.
min => NM => min
® AIS On I Off
The AIS display is switched to On I Off whenever the button is clicked.
® Tracked target symbol display On I Off

The tracked target symbol display is switched to On I Off whenever the button is
c licked. Use this function to avoid confusion w ith the A IS symbol.
® AIS target symbol display On I Off

The AIS target symbol di splay is switched to On I Off whenever the button is c licked.
Use this function to avoid confus ion wi th the tracked target symbol.
@ Association On I Off
The tracked target I AlS target association is switched to On I Off whenever the button is
c licked.
The AIS filter is switched whenever the button is c licked.

Range => Sector => Zone => Range
@ Radar trails display true I relative switching

Radar trails are switched to T (true motion trail) I R (re lative motion trail)
whenever this button is clicked.
This setting is restricted by the radar display motion mode.
In re lative motion display mode (RM), switching to I.J I R is possible.
In true motion display mode (TM), only T can be set.
<0l Radar trails display time switching

The radar trails display time is switched whenever the button is c licked.
If the time does not reach the radar trails time that was set, the remaining time is
displayed on the right-hand side.
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the RADA R Trails Setting menu is opened.
2-25 [.JRC ] 8opan. Radio Co., .lid.

BUTIONS
----------------------------------
si
CD : Detail / simple
display switching
: Unread message
display
<D Detail I simple display switching

This function switches the display mode to detail I s imple display when AIS target
information is displayed.
@ Unread message display
When there is an unread message from the AIS target that is displayed, the message is
displayed. If this button is clicked, the message is displayed.
[ ~RC ] 3opan Radio Co.,.lid. 2 - 26

BUTTONS
----------------------------------
CD Tracked target
scroll
CD Tracked target numeric value indication scroll

This function scroll s the target numbers that are indicated in the tracked target
information.
CD Wind direction I speed

CD Wind direction I speed numeric value indication true I relative

switching
The wind direction I speed numeri c value indication is switched to T (true) I R
(rel ative) whenever this button is clicked.
2-27 [ .JRC I aopan Radio Co., .ltd.

BUTTONS
----------------------------------
Graph information: Wind direction I speed
CD Wind direction I speed


switching
The wi nd direction I speed numeric value indication is switched to T (true) I R
(relative) whenever this button is clicked.
Menu
@ Main menu
CD Digital information display (J) Parallel index line menu
@ Automatic acquisition I
@ User map menu
@ AISmenu @ Route menu
CD Digital information display

If this button is cl icked while the menu screen is open, the menu is closed and control
returns to the di gital informati o n display.
This function switches between the tracked target I AIS target disp lay and navigation
information or the course bar, and so on.
@ Target Tracking (TT) menu
If this button is clicked, the TT Menu is opened.
Q) Own track menu

If this button is c licked, the Own Track Menu is opened.
C!l Main menu

If this button is clicked, the Main Menu is opened.
[~RC ] 8opan. Radit:J Co., .ltd. 2-28

BUTTONS
----------------------------------
® AIS menu
If the button is clicked, the AIS Menu is opened.
® Route menu
If this button is clicked, the Route Menu is opened.
(!) Parallel index line menu
If this button is clicked, the PI Menu is opened.
® Automatic acquisition I activation zone menu

If this button is clicked, the AZ Menu is opened.
® User map menu

If the button is c licked, the User Map Menu is opened.
Brilliance
CD Display item switching
® Panel lighting brilliance
switching @ Day I night mode
switching
@ Radar video brill iance @ Tracked target I AIS target symbol

switching brill iance switching
Display information
<D Display item switching
@ User map load
([) User setting load
2-29 [ ~RC ] gopan Radio Co., .lid.

BUTTONS
----------------------------------
The brilliance adj ustment screen and display information setting screen interchange
whenever th is button is c licked.
@ Panel lighting brilliance switching
T his function enables the setting of the brilliance of the lighting of the control panel.
The bri lliance changes whenever this button is clicked. Five levels of settings are
avai lable.
Q) Radar video brilliance switching

Adjust the brightness of the radar video (echo).
The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked. Four levels of settings are
available.
® Tracked target I AIS target symbol brilliance switching

Use this function to adjust the brilliance of the tracked target I AIS target symbol.
The brill iance changes whenever this button is c licked. Five levels of settings are
available.
~ Day I night mode switching

The day I night mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.
Dayl -> Day2 -> Day3 -> Dusk ~
L
Day2 - Day3 - Dusk - Night
® User map load

If th is button is clicked, the user created map read menu is opened.
(() User setting load

ffthis button is clicked, the user setting read menu is opened.
[ .JRC I 8opan. Radio Co., .ltd. 2-30

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual> 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
----------------------------------
Alarm
<D A larm acknowridgement
® Error log display
CD Alarm acknowledgment
If this button is clicked, the buzzer sound o f the a larm that is currently issued is stopped
and the alarm lamp stops blinking. If multi ple a larms are issued, the next a larm to be
acknowledged is displayed.
If the button is clicked, the alarm displayed on the top is acknowledged.
T he a larms that are currently issued are displayed at the bottom one by one.
@ Alarm log display
If this button is c licked, the a larm log is display.
2-31 [..JRC I aopon RadkJ Co.,.lid.

BUTIONS
----------------------------------
[~RC I 3apan Radic Co.,.ltd. 2 -32

SECTION 3
BASIC OPERATION
II
I I
11
1111111 ' ' 111111
BASIC OPERATION
3.1 OPERATION FLOW ............................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System .................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video ..............................................................3-4
3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data .............................................................3-4
3.1 .4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP ............................ 3-4
3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO ..........................................................3-6
3.2.3 Tune .................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN] ......................................................................... 3-8
3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA] ..........................................................3-9
3.2.6 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN] ........................................... 3-11
3.2. 7 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK] ............................................. 3-12
(.JRC] (Japan Radio Co., .ltd.

3.3.4 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input menu .••. •. . 3-17
3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure ......................................................... 3-22
3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH) ............................................... ................... 3-25
3.4.7 Move Own Ship's Display Position (Off Center) ......................... 3-29
3.4.8 Display Radar Trails (Trails) ......................................................... 3-30
3.4.9 Zoom (x2) ................ ....................................................................... 3-33
3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL] ........................ ........ 3-35
3.4.14 Set True Bearing ............................................................................ 3-36
3.5.2 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track Color) .. 3-40
3.5.5 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track) ................................ 3-42
3.5.7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track) .............................. 3-44
3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP ........................................................................... 3-47
3.6.1 Create User Map (Mark/Line) ........................................................3-47
3.6.2 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting} .............................3-50
3.6.5 Save User Map ...............................................................................3-61
3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION ...................................................................... 3-67
3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence) ................................................ 3-68
3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint Input) ....... 3-75
3.7.5 Method of Using Route ................................................................. 3-81
. . . . - - - - - - -- - - - --
3. 7.6 Detailed Route Settings ................................................................ 3-82

3.7.7 Clear Waypoint/Route Data {Clear WPT/Route Data) ................. 3-86
3. 7.8 Operate Route Data File ................................................................3-87
3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS ......................................................................3-91
3.8.2 Set Radar Trails {RADAR Trails Setting) .....................................3-95
3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit {TXRX Setting) .................................................3-97
3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) ..........................................................3-98
3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) ............................................ 3-99
3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) ......................... ........... 3-102
3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2] .......................................... 3-103
3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display {Multi Window Setting) ............... 3-105
3.8.9 AUTO Backup .............................................................................. 3-110
3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY (USER] ........................................................... 3-111
3.9.1 Operation Procedures .............................................................. ... 3-111
3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items ..................................................... 3-112
3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data ................................. 3-117
3.10 USE USER SETTING ......................................................................... 3-118
3.10.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting) ................................ 3-118
3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting) ................................ 3-119
3.10.3 Delete Operating State (Delete User Setting) ........................... 3-119
3.11 USING CARD .....................................................................................3-120
3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager) ...................................3-120
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 1 OPERATION FLOW
----------------------------------
OPERATION FLOW
. . - - - - - -- - Attention - - - - - - - - - - - ,
• Do not put anything on the operation panel.

If you put anything hot on it, it may be deformed.
• Do not give any impact to the operation panel,
trackball, or controls.
Otherwise, any failure or damage may result.
POWERONAND
START THE SYSTEM
OBSERVE AND
1
ADJUST VIDEO
ACQUIRE AND
1
MEASURE DATA
END THE OPERATION

1
AND STOP THE SYSTEM
Each operation is described in detail below.
3-1 [.JRC) 8opan Radio Co.,l'fd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 1 OPERATION FLOW
----------------------------------
3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System
&cAUTION
• A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is
8 instantaneously interrupted during operation of the

radar. In this case, the power should be turned on
again.
~----------- Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - . ,
• Wait for about 2 seconds before turning on the power again.

• Immediately after the radar is installed, at start of the system
after it has not been used for a long time, or after the
magnetron is replaced, preheat the equipment in the standby
state for 20 to 30 minutes before setting it into the transmit
state.
• If the preheating time is short, the magnetron causes sparks,
resulting in its unstable oscillation.
Start transmission on a short-pulse range and change the
range to the longer pulse ranges in turn. If the transmission is
unstable in the meantime, immediately place the system back
into the standby state and maintain it in the standby state for 5
to 10 minutes before restarting the operation.
Repeat these steps until the operation is stabilized.
IJRC] 8opan RadicJ Co., .lid. 3-2

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 1 OPERATION FLOW
----------------------------------
Procedures
I ) Check that the ship' s mains are turned on.
2) Press [POWER] key.
The system is turned on, and the preheating time is displayed.
Preheat is indicated at the upper left of the radar display.
3) Wait until the preheating time is over.
When the preheating time is over, the preheating time screen disappears, and Preheat
at the upper left of the radar display changes to Standby
4) Press [TXISTBY] key.
The radar will start transmission and the antenna wi ll start rotating.
Standby at the upper left of the radar display changes to Transmit
The radar does not start transmission if you press [TX/STBY]

NOTE: Preheat
key while is indicated.
3-3 [ .JRC ] gopan. Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 1 OPERATION FLOW
----------------------------------
3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video
Procedures
1) Press [RANGE+] key or [RANGE-] key to set the range to the
scale required for target observation.
2) (GAIN] [SEA] and [RAIN) to obtain the clearest targets.
Refer to
[GAIN] dial-Section 3.2.4 "Adjust Gain [GAIN]"
(SEA] dial-+ Section 3.2.5 "Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA]"
[RAIN] dial -+ Section 3 .2.6 "Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter

[RAIN]"
for how to use each dial.
For how to adjust video, see Section 3.2 "OBSERVE AND ADJUST V ID EO"
3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data
For details on how to acquire data and measure, see the SECTION
4"MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING".
3.1.4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP

The radar video, range, bearing, Target Tracking and AIS data display etc... are
disp layed with reference to CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point).
ff scanner is switched, these data are measured from CCRP.
If some kind of functions (for example off center, true motion mode, etc.) set
scanner position to 75% outs ide of the PPI range, these data except Target
Tracking and AIS data are displayed with reference to scanner position.
For how to setting CCRP, see the Section 7.1.9 "Setting of CC RP (CCRP
Setting)".
[ .JRC ] 8apan Radio Co.,.lid. 3-4

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 1 OPERATION FLOW
----------------------------------
3.1.5 End the Operation and Stop the System
Exit
1) Press [TX/STBY] key.
The radar wi ll stop transmission and the antenna will stop rotating.
Trans mit at the upper left: of the radar display changes to Standby
Maintain the standby state if radar observation is restarted in a

~ relatively short time.On ly pressing the [TX/STBY] key starts
'-!I
observation.
The system will be turned off.
& wARNING
• When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn
8 off the power and make the main breaker OFF so that the
power supply to the equipment is completely cut off.
• Some equipment components can carry electrical
'turrent even after the power switch is turned off, and
conducting maintenance work without unplugging the
power connector may result in electrocution, equipment
failure, or accidents.
3-5 [.JRC] 8opan Radit:J Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 2 O BSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
----------------------------------
OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
3.2.1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL]
Procedures
I) Obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance by turning
the [BRILL] dial at the lower right of the monitor unit.
Turning the [BRJLL] dial clockwise increases the brilliance of the entire display.
Conversely, turning the [BRILL] dial counterclockwise decreases the brill iance of the entire
display.
In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust display brilliance that is high enough to
easily observe the radar display but does not g lare.
3.2.2 Change Observation Range [RANGE+/-]
Procedures
1) Pressing the [RANGE+] key will increase the observation range,
enabling the wider area to be observed.
Increasing the observation range wi ll enable a wider range to be observed.
However, a vi deo image is small and the ability to detect targets near own ship decreases.
Therefore, when observing the vicinity of own ship, use the smaller observation range.
2) Pressing the [RANGE-) key will decrease the observation range,

reducing the area that can be observed.
Decreasing the observation range will enable the vicinity of own ship to be enlarged.
However, caution must be taken because video images of the area beyond the observation
range cannot be displayed.
[.JRc l gopan. Radio Co., .lid. 3- 6

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
----------------------------------
3.2.3 Tune
& cAUTION
Normally, use the automatic tune mode.
Use the manual tune mode only when best tuning is
not possible in the automatic tune mode due to
deterioration of magnetron.
Th is radar system provides the automati c tune mode and the manual tune mode.
The automatic tune mode automati cally adjusts the tuning of the transmitting
frequency and the receiving frequency, and the manual tune mode enabl es tuning
to be adjusted by using the dial located on the operation panel. Normally use the
automatic tune mode. Only when the best tuning is not possible by the automatic
tune mode due to the deterioration of magnetron, use the manual tune mode.
The currently used tune mode is displayed in the area at the lower left of the
display.
3.2.3.1 When using the automatic tune mode
Procedures
l) Press the [TUNE] dial to set the automatic tune mode.
Tune adjustment is automatically conducted in the automatic tune mode. Tune is adjusted at
the start of transmission, a t the change of lhe range or pulse width . Tune adjustment is
completed with in several seconds.
3.2.3.2 When using the manual tune mode
Procedures
1) Press the [TUNE] dial to set the manual tune mode.
2) Turn the [TUNE] dial to make adjustments so that the tuning bar
is maximized. The tuning bar is displayed in the area at the upper
left of the display.
3- 7 [ .JRC I aapan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
----------------------------------
3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN]
&cAUTION
If the gain is too high, unnecessary signals including
receiver noise and false images increase resulting in
reduction of visibility of targets.
On the contrary, if the gain is too low, targets including
ships and dangerous objects may not be clearly
indicated.
Be sure to always adjust for the best gain.
See also the Section 3.2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed".
Procedures
l ) Adjust noise on the radar display by turning the [GAIN] dial until
targets can be easily observed.
Turning [GAIN] dial clockwise increases gain.
Turning [GAIN] di al counterclockwise decreases gain.
Turning the [GAIN] dial clockwise will increase the receiving gain , and the
range to observe radar video is widened. However, if the gain is too high,
unnecessary signals including receiver noise and false images increase
resulting in reduction of targets' visibility.
To observe densely crowded targets or short-range targets, turning the

[GAIN] dial counterclockwise will decrease the receiving gain, which
enables targets to be easily observed. However, caution must be taken so
as not to overlook a small and important target.
It is recommended to restore the setting to

Current Level
the factory default, if you lost the appropriate
settings.The factory default level is shown on ~
the bar chart as a green line.
··-···!
The factory default level is assigned by Factory Default
every function mode. See the Section 3.9
"USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]"
[JRC ] gapan Radio Co., l'td. 3-8

----------------------------------
3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA]
& cAUTION
When using the sea clutter suppression function,
never set the suppression level too high canceling out
all image noises from the sea surface at close range.
Detection of not only echoes from waves but also
targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will
become inhibited.
When using the [AUTO SEA] function, make sure to
level.
See also the Section 3. 2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed".
3.2.5.1 Using the manual sea clutter suppression mode
Procedures
1) Adjust the sea clutter returns on the radar display by turni ng the
[SEA] dial until targets can be easily observed.
Turning [SEA] dial clockwise suppresses sea clutter returns.
Turning [SEA] dial counterclockwise intensifies sea clutter returns.
The sea clutter suppression function suppresses sea clutter returns by

decreasing the receiving gain on a short rang e.
Turning the [SEA] dial clockwise heightens the effect of sea clutter
suppression . However, be careful that excessive suppression causes
low signal-strength targets such as buoys and boats to disappear from
the radar display.

Current Level
settings.The factory default level is shown on
~
~
the bar chart as a green line. ~ ••••.J...III
The factory default level is assigned by I

Factory Default
3-9 ( ~Rc ] f)opanRadio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
3.2.5.2 Using the automatic sea clutter suppression mode
The sea clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of sea clutter is
possib le. Use this mode when the sea clutter's intensity differs according to
directional orientation.
Procedures
l ) Press the [SEA] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Sea MAN
button located at the lower left of the display.
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, and Sea AUTO is displayed in the
lower left of the radar display.
2) Make adjustments by turning the (SEA] dial.
Even when the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the [SEA] dial can
make fine adjustments manually.
When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected,

NOTE : the automatic rain/snow suppression mode is switched to the
manual mode.
To select both the sea clutter suppression function and the rain/
snow suppression function in the automatic mode, use the
automatic rain/snow suppression mode.
Cancel
1) ress the [SEA] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Sea AUTO
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and Sea MAN is displayed in the
l.J RC ] dCifXV'- Radio Co.,.li d. 3 - 10

JMA-9100 lnstruct1on Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE A ND ADJUST VIDEO
----------------------------------
3.2.6 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN]
& cAUTION
When using the rain clutter suppression function ,
all image noises from the rain or snow at the close
range .
When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, make sure to
level.
See also the Section 3. 2.8 "To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed".
3.2.6.1 Using the manual rain I snow clutter suppression mode
Procedures
l) Adjust the rain I snow clutter returns of the display by turning the
[AUTO-RAIN] dial until targets can be easily observed.
Tuming [RAIN] dial clockwise suppresses rain I snow clutter returns.
Turning [RA IN] dial counterclockwise intensifies rain I snow clutter retums.
When the [RAIN] dial is turned clockwise, the rain I snow clutter
suppression function suppresses rain I snow clutter returns and gets
targets hidden by rain I snow clutter returns to appear of the display.
However, be careful that excessive suppression may cause small
targets to be overlooked. Since the rain I snow clutter suppression
function also has the effect of suppressing sea clutter, the suppression
efficiency improves when the [RAIN] dial is used with the [SEA] dial. In
general, turn the [RAIN] dial fully to the left.


"USE FUNCTION KEY [USER)"
3 - 11 (.JRC ] 8opan. Radio Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
3.2.6.2 Using the automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode
The rain I snow clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of rain I snow
clutter is possible. Use this mode when the rain I snow clutter's intensity differs
according to directional orientation.
Procedures
1) Press the [RAIN] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Rain MAN
The automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is selected, and Sea AUTO, Rain
AUTO is displayed in the lower left of the radar display.
2) Make adjustments by turning the [RAIN] dial and the [SEA] dial.
Even when the autom atic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the
[RAIN] dial and the [SEA] di al can make fine adjustments manually.
When the automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is

NOTE: selected , the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is also
activated.
It is not possible to set only the rain I snow clutter suppression
function to the automatic mode.
Cancel
1) Press the [RAIN] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Rain AUTO
The automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and Sea AUTO, Rain
AUTO is changed to Sea MAN ,Rain MAN in the lower left of the radar display.
3.2.7 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK]

When an audible alarm is issued, use ALARM ACK to acknowledge the alarm
information, stop the alarm buzzing, and stop the alarm lamp flashing. (If more
than one alarm has occurred, press the switch for each alarm indication.) The
alarm stops buzzing, but the alarm indication does not disappear.
Procedures
1) Press [ALARM ACK] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Ala rm
Acknowridge button located at the lower right of the display.
The alarm will stop buzzing.
!.JRC] flopanRadicJ Co., .lid. 3-12

----------------------------------
3.2.8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed
To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed which requires an
understanding for RADAR signa l processing features and an adjustment for the
sea state. All of the parameter can be set indivis ually and manually, but it may by
difficult for even expert person.
The sets of signal processing parameters for the general using condition are stored
in FUNC as factory default settings. In most cases, to select the FUNC mode
which fit in the current sea state is lead to get the appropriate image easily and
quickly. So It is recommended to enable the FUNC mode.
Procedures
1) Press [USER] key I Press
FUNC mode switch button
and select the mode which fit
Function
in the current sea state. (FUNC) mode
The four preset modes is assigned on the
FUNC mode. For details, refer to the
Section 3.9 "USE FUNCT ION KEY
[USER]".
: Use this mode to monitor a relatively short range, for exa mple,
Coast
bays and coasts where many boats and ships are
running. {lmportance is attached to resolution.)
: Use this mode to monitor a relatively long range, for example,
Deep Sea
the open sea . (Importance is attached to long-range gain.)
: Use this mode when many rain I snow clutter returns or sea
Storm
clutter returns are detected in stormy weather. (Importa nce is
attached to rain I snow clutter and sea clutter suppression , and
gain slightly lowers.)
: Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain I snow
Rain
clutter is strong. (Importance is attached to rain I snow clutter
suppression, and gain slightly lowers.)
2) Make adjustments by turning the [GAIN] dial, the [SEA] dial and
the [RAIN] dial when it is necessary.
In most cases, it may be get the appropriate image.
It is recommended to restore the setting to Current Level

the bar chart as a green line. ~
The factory default level is assigned for Factory Default
I
3 -13 [ .JRC I 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual> 3.BASIC OPERATION> 33 OPERATION PROCEDURES
----------------------------------
OPERATION PROCEDURES
3.3.1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball
The cross cursor mark + is used for position designation and other purposes in
various operating procedures. The cross cursor mark + moves in coupling with
the trackball. If the trackball is rotated up and down or right and left, the cross
cursor mark follows the move of the trackball.
Operators must be familiar with trackball operation before running the system .
3.3.1 .1 Operation inside Radar Video PPI

The cross cursor mark as shown at right is displayed inside the radar video
PPI.
• The distance, bearing, and latitude/longitude are digitally indicated in the

cursor bearing, distance, latitude, and longitude fields (located at the upper
right of the radar display.)
• When moving the current center position, use the cross cursor mark to
designate a new center position.
• Use the cross cursor mark to create marks and lines.
• Use the cross cursor mark to manually acquire a target in the target tracking I
AIS display functions.
3.3.1 .2 Operati on outside Radar Video PPI
As shown at right, the cursor mark changes into the cursor outside the radar ~
video PPI. ~
• Use the cursor to operate software buttons.

• Use the cursor to select menu items.
The EBL I VRM dial is available for operating the cursor mark.
Pressing the EBL dial for 2 seconds can perform switching to
the trackball operation. For details, refer to Section 3.8.4 "Set
Cursor (Cursor Setting)".
[.J RC I gopan. Radio Co., .J.'id. 3-14

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
------- --- ------------------------

3.3.2 Operate Software Buttons
Software buttons are provided on the radar display so as to eas ily switch function s
without operating menu items.
For software buttons that can be operated and their locations, see Section 2.3
"FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE B UTTONS".
Procedures
1) Put the pointer on the software button on the radar display.
The software button indicated by the cursor wi ll be shown in reverse video, which indicates
that the button is specified.
2) Press the left button of the trackball.
The operating state c hanges according to the function of the software button .
In th is instruction manual, this manual operation is described as "left-clicking."
• On/Off settings
Each time the left button is pressed, the operating state switches as follows:
On ---? Off ---? On ---? Off
• Multiple settings
For example, each time the left button is pressed, the operating state switches as
fo llows:
IR Off IR Low ~ IR Meddle ---? IR High IR Off
3-15 [.JRC] 8aponRadioCo.,.lid.

----------------------------------
3.3.3 Basic Menu Operation
3.3.3.1 To open the menu

By left-clicking the Main button located at the lower right of the radar
display, the main menu will open
By left-clicking the buttons, TT AIS , and AZ , adjacent to

Main , each function's exclusive menu wi ll open.
For the arrangement of software buttons, see Section 2.3 "FUNCTIONS OF

SOFTWARE BUTTONS".
3.3.3.2 To close the menu

By left-cl icking the Target button, the menu will close and the target data
display screen will appear.
Alternatively, left-click O.Exit located at the bottom of the menu until the
menu wi ll close.
3.3.3.3 To move to a lower level of the menu

• The menu is in hierarchical structure. By left-clicking the software button for a
desired menu item, it is possible to move to the lower level of the menu.
Alternatively, Click items corresponding to the desired menu item number, and the
> mark will appear at the right end of a menu item having a lower level.
3.3.3.4 To move to a higher level of the menu

By left-clicking O.Exit at the bottom of the menu whi le the menu is open, it is
possible to return to the upper leve l of the menu.
3.3.3.5 To determine an item

By left-clicking the software button for a menu item for which settings are to be
changed, the selected item will be displayed.
3.3.3.6 To determine the selected item

Left-click the software button for an item you want to set, and then the selected
item will be determined.
If you do not change the setting, right-click the button. The selected item will
close without changing the setting.
3-16
JMA-91 00 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
----------------------------------
3.3.3.7 Menu Operation with the Trackball
Item
Selected item
Press numeric keys
corresponding to the desired
item number to display the
Present state
selected item.
Press numeric keys

corresponding to the
desired item number to
Cursor
select a set value.
When the [ > ] mark appears

at the right end of a menu
item , press numeric keys
Press the [0] key to
move to the higher level . corresponding to the selected
item number to move to a
lower level
3.3.4 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and

Character Input menu
When a numeric value must be entered while operating this radar system, the
numeric value input screen will appear. In that case, enter a numeric value
according to the following operation method.
3-17 [.JRC] Japan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
----------------------------------
3.3.4.1 Numeric value input screen
GYRO Setting
Entered value
Numeric button
-button +button
Clear button Enter button
3.3.4.2 Directly entering a numeric value
Procedures
I ) On the numeric value input screen, sequentially left-click the
software number keys located on the radar screen, and enter a
desired numeric value.
For example, when entering 1 2 • 3 ---> 4 for a bearing value, sequentially left-
click the software number keys as shown below.
2) Make sure that the entered value is correct, and left-click the
ENT button.
The set value is rcnected Lo the operating stale.
3) To stop entering a value, right-click the [ENT] button.

Alternatively, left-click the CLR button.
The numeric value input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating
state.
[JRC] 8opan.RadicJ Co.,.lid. 3-18

----------------------------------
3.3.4.3 Increasing or decreasing a numeric value
Procedures
1) On the numeric value input screen, sequentially left-click the
software button + or located on the radar screen, and
enter a desired numeric value.
For example, when adjusting 123.0° to 123.4° for a bearing value, sequentially left-click the
software number keys as shown below.
+ -+ + -+ + -+ +
ENT button.
The set va lue is reflected to the operating state.
3) To stop entering a value, right-click the ENT button.

The numeric value input screen will close without re flecting the set va lue to the operating
state.
3.3.4.4 Latitude/longitude input screen
Entered latitude I
longitude
Numeric button
- button (south Jatitude/ + button (north latitude /

west longitude) east longitude )
CLR button ENT button
3 - 19 I ~Rc ] 8apan. Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
3.3.4.5 Entering latitude/longitude
Procedures
1) On the latitude/longitude input screen, sequentially click numeric
buttons to enter latitude (XXo XX. XXX').
For example, to enter 12° 34.567', sequentially click numeric buttons as follows.
1 ...... 2 - 3 ...... 4 --) 5 ...... 6 ...... 7
2) To make change between north latitude and south latitude, use

+ and
North latitude: Left-click the + button.
South latitude:Left-click the - button.
3) Left-click the ENT button.
The manuaJiy entered latitude value is determined. Then, enter the longitude value.
4) Sequentially click numeric buttons to enter longitude (XXXo XX.

XXX').
5) To make change between east longitude and west longitude, use

+ and
East longitude: Lefi-cl ick the + button.
West longitude: Left-click the - button.
T he manually entered long itude value is determined.
7) To cancel input, put the cursor on CLR and then left-click the
button.
The latitude/long itude input screen will close without reflecting the set value to the operating
state.
[.JRC] (Japan. Radio Co.. .fid. 3-20

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERAT ION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
----------------------------------
3.3.4.6 Character input screen
Character/Number button Entered character
Enter button
Delete button
Back Space button

Exit button
3.3.4.7 Entering a character
Procedures
1) On the character input screen, use trackball to select alphabet
from A to Z, numbers from 0 to 9, or symbols (only comments for
mark/ line), and then left-click the ENT button to enter one
character of the name to be inputted.
For example, JRC for a name, click button as follows:
J ---+ R ---+ C
2) Make sure that the entered character is correct, left-click the

ENT button.
The character has been entered.
3) To cancel input, left-click the Exit button.
The character input screen wi ll be closed wi thout entering the character.
3- 21 [JRC] 8apan. Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
----------------------------------
3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure
The menu structure of this radar system consists of eight frequently used function
menus, one main menu, and one service man menu used for the installation
settings.
Software buttons for opening those menus are displayed in the menu area located
at the bottom ten of the display.
For each menu item and structure, see the menu list in the appendix.
To prevent incorrect use, enter the special code to open the service man menu. For
operating the service man menu, see Section 7.1.1 "How to Open the Serviceman
Menu (Service Man Menu) "
Frequently used functions

TT Used for operating and setting the target tracking function .
Track Used for operating and setting the other ship trails function.
AIS Used for operating and setting the AIS display function .
Route Used for operating and setting the route function.
PI Used for operating and setting the parallel-index-line function.
AZ. Used for operating and setting the automatic acquisition I
activate function .
U.MAP Used for operating and setting the user map function.
Main menu
Main Used for operating and setting the functions.
Serviceman menu
This menu is used for operation and settings when a system is
installed.
It is not used during normal operation.The special code must be

entered to open the service man menu.
[.JRC] gopanRadicJ Co.,.I'Jd. 3 - 22

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATIO N
----------------------------------
GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
3.4.1 Interference Rejection (IR)

Interference by other radars is rejected .
. - - - - - - - - - Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
• When viewing a radar beacon or SART signal, select

IR Off I (Interference Rejector OFF) because IR
processing suppresses the video.
Procedures
1) Left-click the IR button located at the lower left of the radar
display.
The interference rejection modes are switched.
IR Off IR Low ~ IR Meddle ~ IR High IR Off
Rejection levels of the interference rejector
IR Off : Interference rejector off
IR Low : Interference rejection level- low
IR Middle : Interference rejection level - moderate
IR High : Interference rejection level - high
When a high interference rejection level is selected, the radar ' s ability of
detecting small targets such as buoys and smal l boats lowers.
In general, IR Low should be selected.
3-23 [.JRC ] (Japan Radio Co.,Ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN]
Procedures
1) Press [GAIN] dial
Values of the transmitter pul se width are switched.
MPl - MP2 - LPl - LP2
Effects of transmitter pulse width
With ._I_S_P__.I selected: The transmitter pulse becomes shorter, and the
range resolution improves. The effect of
suppressing sea clutter returns and rain/snow
cl utter returns heightens.
Recommended condition for selection: In bays/harbors where targets are densely

crowded. Rough sea state due to torrential rain or
stormy weather.
With I MP I selected: The normal transmitter pulse length is set. Both

range resolution and gain are appropriately set.
Recommended condition for selection: General navigation
With !,__ L_P __,1selected: The transmitter pulse becomes longer, and gain
improves. Small targets are zoomed and are easy
to observe. When the sea state is bad, detection
performance decreases.
Recommended condition for selection: Detection of small targets in good weather

conditions.
Usable transmitter pulse width differs according to the type of antenna being used
and the observation range being used. For usable pulse width, see Section 11.8
"SCANNER UNIT (NKE- 11 39)" '"'"' Section 11.14 "SCANNER UNIT (NKE-
2103-6HS)".
[ JRC I !Japan Radio Co.,.ltd. 3 - 24

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH)
The dimension of video display is enlarged to enhance a target
Procedures
1) Left-click the ENH button located at the lower left of the radar
display.
The target enlargement levels are switched.
ENH Off ==} ENH Levell => ENH Level2 ==} ENH Level3 ==} ENH Off
Effect of target enlargement
ENH Off :Expansion off Select this mode particularly when

resolution is required.
ENH Levell :Expansion small Select this mode in general. Radar echoes
are expanded by 1 scale in all directions.
ENH Level2 :Expansion medium Select this mode to easily view the radar
video. Radar echoes are expanded by 2
scales in all directions on the display.
ENH Level3 Expansion large Select this mode to detect small targets
such as buoys . The expansion near a
screen center is added to ENH Level2.
When ENH Level3 is selected, sea clutter returns and rain/

NOTE: snow clutter returns are apt to be expanded. When using th is
expansion mode, operate [SEA] dial and [RAIN] dial to
suppress sea clutter returns and rain/snow clutter returns.
In general, ENH Levell or ENH Leve12 should be selected.
3-25 ['-'RC I aopan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.4 Use Video Processing (PROC)
This function reduces unnecessary noise to hjghlight targets_
Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
• When viewing a radar beacon, SART signal, or fast

movin~ taraet on the radar display, select
PROC Off (video process off).
• If v ideo processing mode is set to CORREL , it may
be difficult to detect high speed target.
Procedures
1) Left-click the PROC button located at the lower left of the
display.
The video processing modes arc switched.
PROC Off ~ 3Scan CORREL ~ 4Scan CORREL
L Peak Hold Remain ~ SScan CORREL
Video process modes
PROC Off : Select this mode in general.
3Scan CORREL : Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected .
4Scan CORREL : Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter
returns.
SScan CORREL : Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter
returns.
Remain : Select this mode when own ship yaws wildly.
Peak Hold : Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection
probability is low.
[.JRC I aopan Radio Co., .lid_ 3 -26

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual> 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI MODE)
Select the bearing for the radar video to be displayed on the radar display.
Procedures
1) Left-click the AZI Mode button located at the lower left of the
display.
The bearing display modes are switched.
H Up ~ N Up ~ C Up
True Bearing Mode [North Up]
The video is disp layed so that the zenith of the PPl (0° on range rings) points to the due
north. Fixed targets do not tlicker and are easily identified on the chart, and the true bearing
of a target can easily be read out.
Relative Bearing Mode [Head Up]
The video is displayed so that the ship' s heading line points to the zenith of the PPI COo on
range rings). Since targets are displayed in their directions relative to the ship ' s heading
line, the operator can view the video in the same field of view as in operating the ship at sea.
This mode is suitable for watching over other ships.
Course-up Bearing Mode [Course Up]
By sening the course-up mode, own ship's course is fixed so that it is located on the zenith of
U1e radar display COo on ra nge rings). In the same way as in the North-up mode, fixed targets
do not tlicker, and are stabili zed even if the ship is yawing. The bearing of the heading line
varies by the same shi ft of own ship ' s course. To change the course, press the [AZl
MODE] key several times again to select the course-up mode so as to set a new course.
North HL HL
North-up mode Head-up mode Course-up mode
3-27 [~RC ] f)opan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.6 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode (TM/RM)
3.4.6.1 Switching Relative Motion (RM) Mode to True Motion (TM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button located at the upper left of the
radar display.
RM(T) TM
The true motion mode will be selected. In the true motion mode, the own ship 's position on
the radar display moves depending upon its speed and course and the influence of the
current. Land and other fixed target~ are fixed on the radar display and only actually movi ng
targets move on the radar display. When the true motion mode is selected, the own ship ' s
position is set to about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course
allowing for the influence of the c urrent. Own ship starts moving depending upon its speed
and course and the influence of the current. Subsequently, when own ship arrives at the
position of about 66% of the display radius, it is automatically reset to its initial position at
about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the
influence of the current.
Fixed on the radar display
Moving depending on
own ship's speed
True Motion Display
3.4.6.2 Resetting Own Ship to its Initial Position in True Motion (TM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button for 2 seconds.
Own ship will be reset to its initial position as established when the relative motion mode is
changed to the true motion mode. The ship starts moving from that position.
3.4.6.3 Switching True Motion (TM) Mode to Relative Motion (RM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button.
RM(T) TM
The relative motion mode will be selected. Own ship returns to the center of the radar
display.
[ JRC I 8opan. Radio Co_,.f/d. 3 - 28

----------------------------------
3.4.7 Move Own Ship's Display Position (Off Center)
The own ship ' s position can be moved from the display center to any position
within 66% of the display radius. This function is convenient for observing a wide
coverage in any direction.
If Off Center functions set to scanner position is outside of the PPI range, when
function switching di splay with reference to scanner position.
CD This function is not available on the 96 NM range.
Procedures
l ) Left-click the Off Center button located at the upper left of the
display.
The cross cursor mark wi ll appear at the own ship ' s position on the radar display.
2) Move the cross cursor mark (own ship' s display position) to a

desired position by using the trackball.
While the cross cursor mark is moving, the own ship ' s d isplay position moves fol lowing
the cross cursor mark.
When it moves to a pos ition outside 66% of the display radi us, the center position is limited
to a position within 66% o f the display radius.
3) Press the trackball button on the left key.
The own sh ip's display position will be fixed to the cross cursor mark.
HL
HL
Press the [ENl] key

Move the cursor mark to
The own ship's display
a desired position
oosition will be fixed
3.4.7.1 Returning Own Ship's Position to the Center
Procedures
1) Left-click the Off Center button for 2 seconds.
The own ship position is returned to the center of the display.
3-29 [JRC ] 8opan. Radio Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
3.4.8 Display Radar Trails (Trails)
Other ship's movements and speeds can be monitored from the lengths and
directions of their trails, serving for collision avoidance. The trail length varies
according to setting.
3.4.8.1 Changing the length of the trail
Procedures
1) Left-click the Radar trails display time button located at the
upper left of the display.
RADAR trails display time
Values of the length of the radar trails are switched.
Trails length setting: Short mode
Off lSsec - 30sec - lmin
L lSmin 3min
- lOmin - 6min
Short 15sec, 30sec, 1min, 3min , 6min, 10min and 15min
Middle 30sec, 1min, 3m in, 6min, 1Om in, 15min and 30m in
Long 1min , 3m in, 6min , 1Omin, 15min, 30m in and 60min
Saved trails cannot be erased even when the trai l lengths are changed by us ing Trails button.
Even after the trails display is turned off, the past trai ls can be displayed traced back by
setting a desired time.
The radar system is start transmission, trails is start plot.
The system is plotting trails even while the trails display is off.
lfthe transmit time is short, the indicated trails duration may not have achieved the speci fied
time. The radar trails remaining time is indicated at the right of the trails length setting.
3.4.8.2 Erasing Trails Data
Procedures
1) Hold down the Trails button for five seconds located at the
upper right of the display.
All the saved trails data wi ll be erased. The system starts plotting trai ls in initial state. When
Trails button is clicked for 2 seconds, a RADAR Trails Setting menu wi ll be displayed.
Furthermore, data will be erased if it continues pushing.
[.JRC] 3apan Radio Co., .lid. 3-30

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR O PERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.8.3 Trails Motion Mode
There are two types of trails: relative motion trails and true motion trails.
Relative motion The system plots the trails of a target at a position relative to
trails: the own ship. The operator can easily judge whether the target
is approaching the own ship. While the own ship is moving, the
system also plots the trails of land and other fixed targets.
True motion The system plots the absolute motion trails of a target,
trails: irrespective of the own ship' s position . The operator can easily
judge the course and speed of the target. The system does not
plot the trails of land and other fixed targets.
HL
True Motion Trails Ship Relative Motion Trails
Trails modes provided w ith this system vary depending on the motion mode.
With true motion (TM) Only the true motion trails mode is available.
mode:
With relative motion The relative motion trails mode or true motion trails
(RM) mode: mode isselectable.
RM(R) is indicated while the relative motion
trails mode is active.
RM{T) is indicated while the true motion trails

mode is active.
While the true motion trails mode is active, this system enables the continuous use of true
motion trails even if any of the following operations is performed:
• Motion display mode change (TMIRM)
• TM reset
• Bearing display mode change
• Center move (Off Center)
• MAP display on/off (Map)
Accurate true bearing signals and speed signals are necessary

for using the true motion trails mode.
3 - 31 (JRC] 8opon.Radio Co.,..ltd.

----------------------------------
3.4.8.4 Changing Motion Mode of Trails (Trails Mode)
Procedures
1) Click the Trails Mode located at the upper right of the radar
display.
RADAR trails true/relative
T ~ R
[.JRC ] 8apon.l<aditJ Co., .lid. 3-32

----------------------------------
3.4.9 Zoom (x2)
This function doubles the size of radar video near a specified position.
NOTE: If the range is 0.125 NM , this function is not available.
Procedures
I) Left-click the x2 button located at the lower left of the display.
The zoom mode is selected.
2) Subsequently, put the cross cursor mark on a location you want

to zoom into, and press the left key of the trackball.
The zoom is set.
Using the cross cursor mark as reference, the zoom function doubles the size of a radar video
with the midpoint between the cursor mark and own ship ' s position being set to the center
of radar display.
HL
HL
Cursor mark
Own ship's Center of

position radar display
Own Ship's Position before Own Ship's Position after

Zooming position Zooming position
Cancel
I) Left-click the x2 button located at the lower left of the
display.
The zoom mode is cancelled.
3-33 [..JRC] 8apan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.10 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF]
Procedures
HL
t) Press the [HL OFF] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Off
button located at the lower right of the display.
The ship's heading line (HL) is hidden whi le the (HL OFF] key is held down.
The ship's heading line that indicates the course of own shi p is always shown on the radar
display. The heading line is hidden while the [HL OFF] key is held down, so the targets on
the heading line can be easily observed.
3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF]
Various graphics information such as target tracking TT/AIS symbols, NAV lines,
and MAP information is shown on the radar display of this radar system, and may
make it difficult to view the radar video. In that case, use this function to
temporarily hide unnecessary graphics information.
Procedures
Data
I) Press the [DATA OFF] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Off
While the key is pressed, graphics data other than VRM, EBL, HL, cross cursor mark, and
range rings on the radar disp lay is temporarily hidden.
[JRC ] 8apan Radit:J Co., .l'id. 3-34

----------------------------------
3.4.12 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT]
Several combinations of the display co lor and bri lliance according to the ambient
lighting conditions are provided. The display co lor setting is easily changed.
Procedures
1) Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key. Alternatively, left-click the Day/Night
button located at the lower right of the radar display.
The OA YIN IGHT modes are switched.
Dayl -7 Day2 -7 Day3 -7 Dusk ~
L Day2 ~ Day3 ~ Dusk ~ Night
The current mode is displayed at the lower right of the radar display.
For how to set the display color and brilliance for each mode, see Section 3.8.5 "Set Radar
Display (Display Setting)"
3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL]
Adjust brilliance of the operation panel according to the ambient lighting

conditions.
Procedures Panel
l ) Press the [PANEL] key. Alternatively, left-click the 0
ln consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust panel brilliance that is high enough to read
the characters on the operation panel but does not glare.
The [PANEL) key lamp lights up irrespective of panel brilliance adjustment.
3-35 [.JRC] 8opan Radio Co.,.J.'id.

----------------------------------
3.4.14 Set True Bearing
When the GYRO IfF is used to enter a gyro signal, there is a rare case in which a
true bearing value indicated by the master gyro does not match the true bearing
value indicated by this radar system.
In that case, adjust the true bearing va lue of thi s system so that it matches the
value indicated by the master gyro.
Procedures
I) Open the numeric value input screen to enter a true bearing
value by performing the menu operation below.
Main
--? 6.NAV Equipment Setting
--7 1. Gyro Setting
2) Enter a value indicated by the master gyro on the numeric value

input screen.
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section
3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input
menu" .
3.4.15 Set Own Ship Speed
3.4.15.1 Switch the own ship speed device
Procedures
l) Left-click the own ship speed device button in the Own Ship
Information area located at the upper right of the display.
The speed sensor is switched whenever the button is clicked.
MAN (Manual) --+ LOG (Single-axis water log) --> 2AXW (Dual-axis water log) ~
L GPS (GPS) ~ 2AXG (Dual-axis ground log)
[ .JRC I gopan RadiJJ Co.,J'ld. 3-36

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
NOTE: •If the single axis water log display can present the speed of
the ship in other than the forward direction, the direction of
movement should be indicated unambiguously. Therefore
single axis water logs cannot detect the effect of leeway.
•If you selected the 2AXW, the value of forward-backward
direction is indicated.
•If ships in shallow water, when the accuracy of the dual-axis
log may be decreased. If ships in deep sea area, when the
accuracy of the dual-axis log error may be occurred.
•The accuracy of GPS's COG is ± 3o when own ships speed
no fewer than 1kn, no more than 17kn . The accuracy of
GPS's COG is ± 1o when own ships speed over 17kn.
3.4.15.2 Input the own ship speed (Manual Speed)

If the ship-speed system, such as LOG, etc., connected to this radar system
malfunctions, it is possible to manua lly enter own ship speed by the method
described below to use the target tracking (TT) and true motion display functions.
Procedures
1) Left-click the own ship speed device button in the Own Ship
Information area located at the upper right of the display, and
select the manual mode MAN •
2) Left-click the value of the speed.
T he numeric value input screen wi ll open to enter the own ship speed.
3) Enter the value for the own ship speed on the numeric value
input screen.
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeri c Value, Latitude I Longitude a nd Cha racter Input menu".
3.4.16 Magnet Compass Correction (MAG Compass Setting)

Set the correction value, when the radar receive HDM sentence from magnet
compass or the variation ofl·IDG is NULL.
Procedures
1) Open the MAG Compass Setting menu by performing the
following menu operation.
Main
---+ 6.NAV Equipment Setting
- 2. MAG Compass Setting
3 - 37 [.JRC] 8apan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
2) Set whether to make corrections or not.
1. Heading Correction
Off On
3) Input the correction value.
Press the + or button to select south and north fo r latitude or the cast and west
for longitude.
For how to input num eric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on umeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character lnput menu" .
3.4.16.1 Set Drift Correction

T he direction and speed of the drift are set.
Th is fun ction can be used only when MAN or LOG is selected for ship-speed
data.
Procedures
1) Open the SetJDrift Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 6.NAV Equipment Setting
--+ 3. Set / Drift Setting

1. Correction
Off On
For menu operation, see Section 3.3.3 "Basic Menu Operation".
3) Enter the correction value for tidal current.
2.Set : Direction o f tidal current (true bearing)
3.Drift : Speed of tidal current
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen , see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input menu".
[.JRC ] 8apan Radio Co.,.lid. 3 - 38

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
The own ship's track function saves and displays own ship's track.
If navigation equipment is connected, th is radar system records latitude/longitude

data sent from the navigation equipment and displays own ship's track.
NOTE: Even when own ship's track storage interval is turned

Off , own ship's track can be displayed . However, in this
case, if rewrite operation such as changing of the display
range is perform ed for the radar display, own ship's track
display is erased and the track will not be plotted again.
If the own ship track display is turned off when own ship
track is in storage, own ship's tracks are not shown on the
radar display, but own ship's track is still saved.
The own ship's track function is available between latitudes

of 85° N and 85° S.
3.5.1 Display Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track)
Procedures
1) Left-click the Own Track Color Track button located at the
lower right of the display.
Own Track Interval
Own Track Interval Unit
Own Track Color
Map On/ Off
T he color of the own shi p's track are switched.
Off White ---t Gray
L Red f- Pink Yellow Green
2) Left-click the button located at the lower right of the

display.
The map display functi on is turned on Map or off
When Color is selected, the own ship's track is displayed.
3-39 [.JRC] f)apan,Radio Co.,.ftd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.2 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track
Color)
Own ship's track can be saved in seven different colors.
Own ship's track can be displayed or not di splayed individually by co lor.
Procedures
I ) Open the Display Own Track Setting menu by performing the
menu operation
Track
-----+ 1. DISP Own Track Color
The Display Own Track Setting menu will open.
Operations differ according to the following set modes. 0
When I 1. All I is set to On All of own ship's tracks are displayed.
When I 1. All I is set to Off All of own ship's tracks are not displayed.
When I 1. All I is set to Individual Settings are made by color by performing the
operation below.
2) Left-click the color button for the desired display setting which is
to be changed.
Display of each item is switched between On and Off
On : Own ship's track plotted by the color is displayed.
Off : Own ship's track plotted by the color is not displayed.
[ ~RC ] aopan.Radio Co...lid. 3-40

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC O PERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHI P'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.3 Save Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory)
To save own ship's track, storage at a specifi ed ti me interval and at a specifi ed

range interval can be se lected.
The track storage interval can be selected from 10 preset time intervals and 8
preset range interva ls.
Storage intervals that can be selected

Time: 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 5 min, 10 min, 30 min, and 60 min
Range: 0.1 NM, 0.2 NM, 0.3 NM, 0.5 NM, 1 NM, 3 NM, 5 NM, and 10 NM
Procedures
1) Left-click the Own Track Interval unit button located at the lower
right of the display.
Every time the button is clicked, the units of measure for the storage are switched.
Own Track Interval

Own Track Color
Map On/Off
2) Left-click the Own Track Interval button located at the lower right
of the display.
Every time the button is clicked, storage intervals are switched.
When Off is selected, the storage function is turned off.
3.5.4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory)

Storage of own ship's track can be turned off.
Cancel
of the display.
Every time the button is c licked, interval for track storage are switched.
3- 41 [JRC ] dt:ifXi/1. Radio Co., .i'Jd.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.5 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track)
This function cancels the storing of own ship's track.
Procedures
I ) Open the Clear Own Track Color menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Track
---t 2. Clear Own Track Color
The Clear Own Track Color menu will appear.
2) Left-click the button for the color to be deleted.
All : All tracks are deleted
White I Gray I Blue I Red I Pink I Yellow I Green

O nly track of specified color is deleted.
After the item has been selected, Clear Own Track Confinnation Window will appear.
3) Left-click the Yes button.
Own ship's track indicated by the specified color wi ll be deleted.
3.5.6 Use Expanded Own Ship's Track (Own Track Type)
The following expanded track functions can be used for this radar system.
Water temperature track : The water temperature value at the latitude/longitude is

recorded.
Water depth track : The water depth value at the latitude/longitude is recorded.
Tidal current track : The tidal current vector at the latitude/longitude is recorded.
Only one type of expanded own ship's track can be used at a time. Multiple types
of expanded tracks cannot be used at the same time.
Specify the type of the expanded own ship's tracks to be used by performing the
operation below.
[.JRC ] f)apan RadicJ Co.,.ltd. 3 - 42

JMA-9100 lnstruct1on Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATIO N > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
Procedures
I) Left-click the Track button located at the lower right of the
display.
Track menu
The Own Track Menu will appear.
2) Left-click the item button of 3. Track Type
The numeric value o f the navigation data can be shown by the color of own sh ip's track.
Normal : The expanded own ship's track function is not used.
Depth : The color of the tracks is changed according to the water

depth value
Temperature :The color of the tracks is changed according to the water

temperature value.
3) Select the function to be used.
4) Left-click the item button of 4. Num Vector Display
urn e ric value or vector o f navigation data can be added to own ship's track.
Off : Numeric value and vector are not added .
Depth : Water depth value is added.
Temperature : Water temperature value is added.
Current :current vector is added .

NOTE: To use the expanded own ship's track function, the track
must be entered from the special navigation equipment
into this radar system.
3-43 [ ~RC ] Japan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track)
Set the correspondi ng conditions for the water depth va lue and the color of own
ship's track by performing the operation below.
Procedures
1) Open the Water Depth Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Track
---+ 6 . Water Depth Setting
The Water Depth Setting menu wi ll appear.
Enter a value of the boundary water depth for each item according to the table below to set
up the corresponding conditions for the water depth value and the color of own ship's track.
Water depth Color of track

value
White
1. xxxx m Min
Gray
2. xxxx m
Blue
3. xxxx m
Green
4. xxxx m
Yellow
5. xxxx m
Pink
6. xxxx m Max
Red
For example, if I Om is entered for I . , 30m is entered for 2. , and 50m is entered for 3. , the
area with a water depth of less than I 0 meters is indicated by white tracks, the area with a
water depth of 10 to 30 meters is indicated by gray tracks, and the area with a water depth of
30 to 50 meters is indicated by blue tracks.
[.JRC ] 8opon Radio Co.. .J'Jd. 3-44

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.8 Use Water Temperature Track (Water TEMP Track)
Set the corresponding conditions for the water temperature va lue and the color of
own ship's track by performing the operation below.
Procedures
1) Open the Water TEMP. Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below
Track
~ 7. Water TEMP. Setting
The Water TEMP. Setting menu will appear.
Enter a value of the boundary water temperature for each item according to the table below
to set up the corresponding conditions fo r the water tempe rature va lue and the color of own
ship's track.
Water temperature Color of track

value
White
1. xx.x °C Min
Gray
2. xx.x °C
Blue
3. xx.x °C
Green
4 . xx.x °C
Yellow
5. xx.x °C
Pink
6. xx.x °C Max
Red
For example, if I0.0°C is entered fo r 1. , 13.0 C is entered for 2. , and 15.0"C is entered for
3. , the area with a water temperature of less than 1O.O"C is indicated by white tracks, the
area with a water depth of 10.0 C to 13.0 "C is indicated by gray tracks, and the area with a
water depth of 13.0 °C to 15.0 oc
is indicated by blue tracks.
3-45 I"'RC) gopan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.9 Use Tidal Current Track (Current Vector Track)
Set the conditions for adding tidal current vectors to own ship's track by
performing the operation below.
Procedures
l ) Open the Current Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Track
~ 8. Current Setting
The Current Setting menu will appear.
Set the tidal current vector display conditions.
[1]Length of the tidal current vector (Current Size)

• Set the length of the tidal current vector.
• The unit of measure is kn/cm .
• If 1.0kn/cm is set, a tidal current of 1.0kn is shown as a one-centimeter line
on the radar display.
[2]Color of the vector for tidal current layer A (Layer A)

• Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer A.
• Choose one of the following colors
White, Gray, Blue, Green, Yellow, Pink, Red
[3]Color of the vector for tidal current layer B (Layer B)

• Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer B.
[4]Color of the vector for tidal current layer C (Layer C)

• Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer C.
[.JRC ] 8opan. Radio Co.,.ltd. 3-46

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
DISPLAY USER MAP
Up to 20,000 items ofNAV lines, coastlines, depth contours, and NAY marks can
be created, displayed, loaded, and saved. (Th i.s funct ion is avai lable on ly when
navigation equipment is connected to this radar system.)
Marks that can be used : 29 types
Lines that can be used : 3 types (solid , broken, and dashed-dotted line)
Color of mark and lines : 7 colors

that can be used
If radar video is poor visibility caused by user map fu nction,

press the (DATA O FF] key to map displays temporarily off.
NOTE: The user map function is available between latitudes of ss· Nand ss· S.
3.6.1 Create User Map (Mark/Line)

In this system, when the radar is in the transmission state, the user map is
displayed all the time. However, valid latitude/longitude data and true bearing
data must be entered into the system.
The user map can be created and edited by performing the following operation.
3.6.1.1 Plotting a mark
Procedures
I ) Left-click the ICursor button located at the upper ri ght
of the display to set the Mark mode.
Mark font I line pattern Mark color I line color
Cursor mode switching r witching switching
The mark font to be used is displayed to the right of the C::...;u_rs::...;o_r_ _ _ __jl button.
Ll
3 - 47 [JRC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.ltd.

----------------------------------
2) Left-click the mark font 0 button to select a font for the
mark.
The mark fonts are switched.
3) Left-click the c button located to the right of the mark font to

select a color for the mark.
change.
I
The color for lhe mark font located to the right of the Cursor
' - - -- - - - - - - '
I
button will
4) Left-click at a desired location on the radar display.
The specified mark wi ll be displayed in the specified color.
To create another mark, repeat the above procedures.
3.6.1.2 Plotting a line
Procedures
I) Left-click the ICursor I button located at the upper right
of the display to select the line mode.
The line pattern to be used is displayed to the right of the ._Ic_u_rs_o_r_ _ _ _.....JI button.
2) Left-click the ------- button located at the upper right of the

display to select the line pattern.
The line pattern to be used is displayed to the right of the ._IC_u_rs_o_r_ _ _ _--'1 button.
3) Left-click the c button located to the right of the line pattern to

select a color for the line.
The color for the line pattern located to the right of the ._Ic_u_rs_o_r_ _ _ __JI button will
change.
Line colors are switched.
[.JRC ] (japan Radio Co., .ltd. 3 - 48

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
5) Move the cursor to a desired location on the radar display and
left-click.
A line is plotted between the previous point and the end point. Repeat this procedure so th at
sequent ial lines can be plotted.
6) When you want to finish plotting the line, left-click at the

previous point.
Line plotting will be terminated. To plot another line, repeat procedures 3.
3.6.1.3 Plotting a mark /line make with latitude and longitude
Procedures
l ) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
~ 2. Edit User Map
~ 2. Make with L/L
2) Left-click the 9. New Mark Input button.
The Mark Input menu and the Line Input menu are switched.
3) Left-click the item button of L Type to select the type of

mark font or line pattern to be created.
The desired mark font or line pattern is selected.
To add a line, select midpoint -0-- .
4) Left-click the item button of 2. Color to select the color of

mark or line to be created.
The desired mark or line color is selected.
3-49 [ ~RC I aopan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
5) Left-click the 3. L./L button to input the latitude I
longitude.
For the input method on the latitude I longitude input screen, see Section 3.3.4.5 "Entering
latitude/longitude"
6) Left-click the 4. Comment button to input the comment.
For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character"
The window will not be open when the system is in the transmission state.
7) Left-click the 5. Enter button.
Mark I Line plotting will be tellllinated.
To create another mark or line, repeat procedures 4 to 7.
3.6.2 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting)
The user map can be individually displayed (On) or hidden (Oft).
Setting by type: Setting can be made by mark font and line pattern.
Setting by color: Setting can be made by color of mark or line.
The mark font display size can be selected.
Normal: The mark is displayed in normal size.
Small : The mark is displayed in a size smaller than usual.
3.6.2.1 Setting display by type
Procedures
1) Open the Display Mark Type menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.Map
~ 5. Mark Display Setting
~ 1. Display Mark Type
I ~Rc ] f)apon.Radio Co.,.f.ld. 3-50

----------------------------------
The Display Mark Type menu will open.
2) Specify whether to turn on or off the display for each type of

mark and line.
When 1. All I is selected, the setting will reflect to all types of marks and lines.
Off : All types are not displayed.
Individual : All types are displayed.
On : Setting by type is activated.
3.6.2.2 Setting display by color
Procedures
1) Open the Display Mark Color Type menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.MaR
~ 2. Display Mark Color
The Display Mark Color Type menu will open.
2) Specify whether to turn on or off the display for each color type
of mark and line.
When 1. All I is selected, the setting will reflect to all color types of marks and
lines.
Off : All color types are not displayed .
Individual : Setting by color type is activated.
On : All color types are displayed.
3.6.2.3 Setting the mark font size
Procedures
I ) Open the Mark Size menu by performing the menu operation
below.
U.Map
~ 3. Select Mark Size
The M ark Size menu wi ll appear.
3-51 [ ~RC l aopan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
2) Specify the mark font size.
Normal : The mark is displayed in normal size.
3.6.2.4 Setting the character size for comments
Procedures
1) Open the Comment Font Size menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.Map
~ 4. Comment Font Size
The Comment Font Size menu will appear.
2) Specify the comment font size.
Normal : The characters for comments are displayed in normal size.
Small : The characters for comments are displayed in a size smaller

than usual.
3.6.3 Edit User Map (Edit User Map)
3.6.3.1 Manually entering the own ship position (Own Ship Position)
Use this function when editing navigation data for a location different from the own ship
position.
Procedures
I ) Open the Own Ship Position menu by perform ing the menu
operation below.
U.Map
~ 1. O.Vn Ship Position
The number key screen for entering the latitude/longitude of the Own Ship Position will
appear.
[.JRC I 8apan Radio Co., .lid. 3-52

----------------------------------
2) Use the number buttons o to 9 to enter a value of latitude
0
(XX XXx.xxx').
3) To make changes between north latitude and south latitude, use

the + and buttons.
North latitude : Left-click the + button .
South latitude : Left-click the button.
The manually entered latitude will be determined. Then, enter the va lue of longitude_
5) Use the number buttons o to 9 to enter a value of longitude

0
(XX XXx.xxx').
6) To make changes between east longitude and west longitude,

use the + and buttons.
East longitude: Left-click the + button.
West longitude: Left-click the button.
7) Left-click the ENT I button.
The manually entered longitude will be determined.
NOTE: The own ship's position manually entered by using the

function above is va lid only in the navigation data setting
menu . After exiting from the menu, the manually entered
position data is invalidated.
3.6.3.2 Moving a mark or line (Move)

With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is moved individually.
Procedures
1) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
~ 2. Edit User Map
The Edit User Map menu wil l appear.
2) Left-click the 3. Move button.
3-53 l.JRC] 8apan Radio Co.,J.'id.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 D ISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
The user map move mode is selected.
I Move Map I is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display.
3) Put the cursor on a mark or line, and left-click.
When a mark or line to be moved is selected, the + c ursor mark will appear.
4) Move the + cursor mark to the destination, and left-click.
The selected mark or line is moved to th e destination.
To move another mark or line, repeat procedures 3 and 4.
5) When finished with the correction of all items, left-click the

o.Exit button.
The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map move
mode.
(Example)
I,
I '
/ ',~
II '
I '
I '
I ',
I '
I '
' '.
3 - 54
JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
3.6.3.3 Deleting a mark or line (Delete)
With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is deleted individually.
Procedures
I) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
---+ 2. Edit User Map
The Edit User Map menu wi ll appear.
2) Left-click the 4. Delete button.
The user map delete mode is selected.
Delete I is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display.
The entire selected mark or line is deleted.
To delete another mark or line, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

O.Exit I button.
The cursor mode changes to the normal operati on mode, terminating the user map delete
mode.
3-55 [.JRC I aopan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPlAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
3.6.3.4 Inserting a vertex into a line (Insert/Move Vertex)
With regard to the created user map, a vertex is inserted into a line.
Procedures
operation.
U.Map
The Edit User Map menu will appear.
2) Left-click the 5. Insert/Move Vertex button.
The user map insert/correction mode is selected.
I Insert/Move I is displayed in the cursor mode located the upper right of the display.
3) Put the cursor to a side line into which a vertex will be inserted,
and left-click.
A vertex is inserted into the selected line, and the + cursor mark will be displayed.
4) Move the
click.
+ cursor mark to the newly inserted vertex, and left-
To insert another vertex, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

O.Exit button.
The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map insertion/
correction mode.
[.JRC] 8opanRadkJ Co., .ltd. 3-56

----------------------------------
(Example)
The side line into wh ich
a vertex is inserted
Inserted vertex
3.6.3.5 Correcting the mark or vertex of a line (Insert/Move Vertex)

With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is corrected.
Procedures
operation.
~ 2. Edit User Map
2) Left-click the 5. Insert/Move Vertex button.
The user map insertion/correction mode is selected.
IInsert/ Move I is djsplayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display.
3) Put the cursor on the mark or vertex of a line, and left-click.
When the mark or vertex of a line to be corrected is selected, the

appear.
+ cursor mark will
The selected mark or vertex of the line is moved to the destination.
To correct another mark or vertex of a line, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

O.Exit button.
3-57 [..JRC ) 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map
insertion/correction mode.
(Example)
Original vertex
New vertex
3.6.3.6 Deleting a mark or vertex from a line (Delete Vertex)

With regard to the created user map, a vertex is deleted individually from a mark or line.
Procedures
operation.
U.Map
--+ 2. Edit User Map
2) Left-click the 6. Delete Vertex button.
Delete I is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the radar display.
3) Put the cursor on the vertex of a mark or line, and left-click.
The selected mark or vertex of the line is deleted.
All of the lines drawn by joining two points are deleted.
To delete another mark or vertex of a line, repeat procedure 3.

o.Exit button.
[~RC I 8apan Radio Co.,.ltd. 3-58

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
T he cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map delete
mode.
(Example)
The vertex to be deleted
3.6.3.7 Batch clearing marks or lines (Clear)

With regard to the created user map, marks or lines are batch cleared by type or by color_
Procedures
I ) Open the Edit User Map menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
~ 2. Edit User Map
2)- 1 Left-click the item button of I 7. Delete by Type
Select the type of marks or lines to be deleted.
To select all types, select All
For example, to delete "red 0 " marks, select 0
2)-2 Left-click the item button of I 7. Delete
Select the color of marks or Iines to be deleted.
To select all colors, select All
For example, to clear "red 0 " marks, select Red
After the items have been selected, Confirmation Window will appear.
3 - 59 [.JRC] 8apanRadio Co.,.l'Jd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
3) Left-click the 1. Yes button.
The selected mark will be deleted.
NOTE: If data is not copied on the flash memory card (option), the data
is not be reloaded.
3.6.4 Correct Position on User Map (Shift User Map)
3.6.4.1 Correcting the display position on the user map (Shift)

If the display position on the user map is different from an actual position, it can be changed
to the correct pos ition in manual mode.
Procedures
l) Open the [Shift] menu by performing the menu operation below.
U.Map
3. Shift
Shift is displayed for the Cursor mode, indicating that the user map shift mode is
selected.
2) Put the pointer on a mark or end of a line, coastline, or depth

contour line, and left-click.
3) Move the cross cursor mark to the location to be corrected, and

left-click.
Positions of all marks and lines currently di splayed will be corrected.
At this time, Map Shift is displayed in the map position correction (lower right of the
display), indicating that the position is being corrected.
Map Shift Heading correction is conducted
Heading correction is not conducted
3-60
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
3.6.4.2 Restoring the corrected user map to its original state (Shift Clear)
Procedures
l) Open the Mark Operations menu by performing the following
menu operation.
U.Map
4. Shift Clear
Only the most recently corrected data (for a si ngle input) will be cleared, and the data wi ll be
displayed at its original position.
At this time, Map Shift. is not displayed in the map position correcti on (lower right of the
display).
3.6.5 Save User Map
3.6.5.1 Loading navigation data (Load User Map)
Procedures
I) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (option) is necessary.
2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the following

menu operation.
U.Map
-7 7. File Operation
3) Left-click the item button of 11. Select Card Slot and select the
card slot.
Slot I and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.
4) Left-click the item button of 2. Load Mode and select

Add Ill Overwrite 1.
Add Iand I Overwrite Iof the Load Mode items are switched.
When [Add] is selected, new data is added to the savedd data. When [Overwrite] is selected,
the saved data is overwritten.
3 - 61 [JRC] gapan. Radio Co.,.Dd.

----------------------------------
5) Left-click the 3. Load button.
The list of navigation data saved in the system wi ll be displayed.
6) Left-click the button for the file to be loaded.
Confi rmation Window will appear.
The selected navigation data wi ll be loaded and displayed on the radar display.
3.6.5.2 Discarding navigation data (Unload User Map)
Procedures
menu operation.
U.Map
~ 7. File Operation
2) Left-click the 4. Unload ____, button.

Unload Confirmation Window wi ll appear.
The saved navigation data wi ll be discarded.
3.6.5.3 Storing navigation data (Save User Map)

Navigation data can be saved when navigation equipment is connected, or the own ship
position on the user map is entered in the manual mode.
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
[JRC] 8opon Radit:J Co.,.ltd. 3 - 62

----------------------------------
menu operation.
U.Map
----7 7. File Operation
3) Left-click the item button of !1. Select Card Slot I and select the
card slot.
4) Left-click the 5. Save button.
The Input File Name screen will appear.
5) Enter the file name to be saved.
Up to I 0 characters can be entered. For the input method on the character input screen, sec
Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".
Aller the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear.
Navigation data currently being displayed is saved.
3.6.5.4 Clearing the saved navigation data (Erase User Map)
Procedures
I ) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.

menu operation. o
U.Map
----7 7. File Operation
3) Left-click the item button of 11. Select Card Slot I and select the
card slot.
3-63 [JRC] 8opan. Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
4) Left-click the 6. Erase button.
The Erace screen will appear.
The list of navigation data saved in the card will be displayed.
5) Click numeric buttons corresponding to the number for the file to

be deleted.
Confirmation Window wil l appear.
The selected navigation data is deleted and the name of the tile is deleted from the list.
3.6.5.5 Displaying saved navigation data (Card Mark Display)
Procedures

menu operation.
U.Map
-t 7. File Operation
3) Left-click the item button of !1. Select Card Slot land select the
card slot.
Slot I and Slot2 of the elect Card Slot items are switched.
4) Left-click the 7. Card Mark Display button.
The Card Mark Display screen will appear.
5) Left-click the button corresponding to the number for the file to

be d isplayed.
Confirmation Window will appear.
The selected navigation data will be displayed.
[~Rc ] f)apan.RadicJ Co.,.fid. 3-64

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
3.6.6 Set and Display Geodetic System (Geodetic)
To create navigation information, set the geodetic system that is used with the
connected navigation equipment. When navigation information is loaded, the
geodetic system used when the navigation information was saved, is displayed.
Make sure that the displayed geodetic system is identical to the one used with the
navigation equipment. If the two geodetic systems are different, the positions of
navigation information on the radar display wi ll be shifted. Therefore, it is
important to set the geodetic system of the navigation equipment.
[1] Setting the geodetic system for navigation data to be saved (Geodetic)
Procedures
I) Open the Geodetic menu by performing the following menu
operation .
U.Map
6. Geodetic
The numeric value input screen for Geodetic will appear.
2) Enter the desired geodetic system number.
The geodetic system is detennined.
For how to input numeric datas on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4
[2] Displaying the geodetic system of the navigation data being displayed (Geodetic)
Procedures
I) Load navigation data by referring to Section 3.6.5.1 "Loading
navigation data (Load User Map)".
2) Open the Mark Operations menu by performing the following

menu operation.
U.Map
The geodetic system wil l be displayed in the 6. Geodetic field.
3-65 [.JRC) 8apan.Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
-------------------------- --------
Table3-1 : Geodetic System List
#NAME
0 WGS-84
1 WGS-72
2 Japan
3 North American 1927(U.S)
4 North American 1927(Canada & Alaska)
5 European 1950 (Europe)
6 Australian geodetic 1966 (Australia)
7 Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (England)
8 NAD-83
9 -(No Use)
10 -(NoUse)
11 ADINDAN (Ethiopia & Sudan)
12 ARC 1950 (Botswana)
13 AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 (Australia)
14 BERMUDA 1957 (Bermuda islands)
15 BOGOTA OBSERVATORY (Colombia)
16 CAMPO INCHAUSPE (Argentine)
17 CHATHAM 1971 (Chatham Islands)
18 CHUA ASTRO (Paraguay)
19 CORREGO ALEGRE (Brazil)
20 DJAKARTA (VATAVIA) {Sumatra)
21 EUROPEAN 1979 {Europe)
22 GEODETIC DATUM 1949 {New Zealand)
23 GUAM 1963 {Guam)
24 HAYFORD 1910 {Finland)
25 HJORSEY 1955 {Iceland)
26 INDIAN {India & Nepal)
27 IRELAND1965 {Ireland)
28 KERTAU 1948 (West Malaysia)
29 L.C.5 ASTRO {Cayman Brae Island)
30 LIBERIA 1964 {Liberia)
31 LUZON {Philippines)
32 MERCHICH {Morocco)
33 MINNA {Nigeria)
34 NAHRWAN {Oman)
35 NAPARIMA, BWI {Trinidad & Tobago)
36 OLD EGYPTIAN {Egypt)
37 OLD HAWAIIAN {Hawaii)
38 PICO DE LAS NIEVES {Canary Islands)
39 PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 (South America )
40 PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 {South Chile)
41 PUERTO RICO (Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands)
42 QORNOQ {South Greenland)
43 RT90 {Sweden)
44 SANTA BRAZ {San Miguel island & Santa Maria islands)
45 SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 {South America)
46 SOUTHWEST BASE (Fa1al & Sao Jorge & Pico & Graclosa & Terce1ra 1sland)
47 TIMBALAI 1948 {Brunei & East Malaysia)
48 - {No Use)
49 -{No Use)
("'RCI aopan Radio Co.,.ltd. 3-66

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
--- --- ----------------------------

USE ROUTE FUNCTION
In this radar system, a destination mark set by navigation equipment can be

displayed, and a simple route can be created, displayed, loaded and saved. (To use
this function, navigation equipment must be connected to this system)
17\ If radar video is poor visibility caused by route function, click the
\..!/ Map button to turn off the Map function. Otherwise, press the
[DATA OFF] key to map displays temporarily off.
NOTE: The user map function is available between latitudes of 85° Nand 85° S.
3.7.1 Display Route/Destination Mark {Select Route)

[n this radar system, the following route and destination marks can be displayed.
Route Route created in the radar system, ECDIS and GPS are displayed.
Destination mark Destination marks sent from outside navigation equipment are
displayed.
Procedures
I ) Left-click the Route button located at the lower right of t he
rada r display.
The Route Menu will appear.
2) Set the !1. Select Route item.
The following route/destination mark display modes can be selected.
Off Route and destination marks are not displayed .
Internal Route saved in the system are displayed.
NMEA Destination marks are displayed by using WPT data

sent from outside navigation equipment. i
ECDIS /GPS Route created in the ECDIS and GPS are displayed.ii
i. I I
To display the OWP mark on the radar display, NMEA select. The
destination mark is displayed only when the Waypoint data is received from
outside by using the NMEA sentence (RMB,BWC,BWR).
ii. When the system display Route which are created in the ECDIS, following items
are not displayed.
• XTL
• Arrival Rad ius
• ROT
• Turn Radius
• Time Zone
• Sail
3-67 [ JRC l aopan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
3.7.1.1 Displaying route created by the radar system (Internal)
In this radar system, route created by the radar system are displayed as shown below.
Planned Course
I
,.. Route alarm line
Wa
0~
-.MI!f' 2.5Gin
\.:TABCOE
Planned Speed
Route
Route alarm lone
The following rout data is displayed.
Waypoint : Up to 512 points (number: 000 to 511), comments can be entered.
To Waypoint : Next Waypoint is displayed in a light blue circle.
Route : A route line that connects Waypoints.
Planned Courese : Scheduled route between Waypoints (automatically calculated).
Planned Speed : Scheduled sailing speed between Waypoints (entered by user).
Waypoint alarm circle : The circle that shows the distance to judge arrival in Waypoint.
Route alarm line : The line that shows the distance width to judge route alarm .
Waypoint bearing vector : A vector line that shows next destination from own ship's CCRP.
3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence)
In this radar system, it is possible to easily create and correct route by performing
operation on the radar display.
3.7.2.1 Initializing route data (New Monitor Route)

Route data saved in the radar system is initialized.
Once route data is initialized, route data saved in the

NOTE: radar system's storage section is deleted. If there is
necessary route data, save the route data on the flash
memory card before initializing it.
[.JRC ] popan Radio Co., .lid. 3 - 68

----------------------------------
Procedures
1) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
~ 2. WPT/Route Setting
~ 3 . Set Route Sequence
2) Left-click the 7. New Monitor Route button.
The saved route data will be deleted.
3.7.2.2 Adding a Waypoint (Add Waypoint)

New Waypoint data is added to the route data saved in the radar system.
Procedures
operation below.
Route
~ 2. WPT/Route Setting j
2) Left-click the 2. Add button.
The Waypoint adding mode is selected.
The rubber band from the last Waypoint to the cursor position will be displayed on the radar
display.
3) Left-click the location at which you want to add a Waypoint.
A Waypoint wi ll be added.
When a Waypoint is added, the value of the Planned Speed in the section up to the menu is
used for the Planned Speed value up to the added Waypoint.
3-69 (JRC ] 8opon Radio Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
4) To add another Waypoint, repeat procedure 3.
5) To finish adding a Waypoint, left-click twice at the last Waypoint.

The Waypoint adding mode is cancelled.
(Example)
--.........
~23
\ oszr
12.0kn \
Rubber band
3.7.2.3 Correcting coordinates of a Waypoint (Correct Position)

The coordinates of a Way point in the route data saved in the radar system are corrected.
Procedures
l ) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
~ 2. WPT/ Route Setting
~ 3. Set Route Sequence
2) Left-click the 3. Correct Position button.
The Waypoint correcting mode is selected.
3) On the radar display, put the cursor on the Waypoint that is to

have its coordinates corrected, and left-click.
The Waypoint to be corrected is specified.
The cursor display becomes a + cursor mark, and a rubber band is displayed.
(.JRC I (japan Radio Co., ..l'Jd. 3 - 70

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.8ASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
4) Move the cursor to new coordinates, and left-click.
The coordinates of the Waypoint are corrected, and then the Waypoint correcting mode is
cancelled.
(Example)
064T /
~oo'klOST
'n'-- 8 064T /
..G ~
SOO~
108T
/ 12 Okn - - o o26 / 120kn kn 026

~024 I
Waypoint that is to twl ve its
Slbon corrected
Cross cursor marl!:
r \ 025 Planned Course

OG 4 .;1CI .......... I 08T
T/ 8 oo'k'n'--
1
/ 120kn 026 026
C"\ n24 060""". /
0"' .......... 106T "'
1201<n.......... ~ 800kn
T 25 I
3.7.2.4 Correcting Planned Speed (Correct Planned Speed)

Planned Speed of the route data saved in the radar system is corrected.
Procedures
l) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2) Left-click the 4. Correct Planned Speed button.
The Planned Speed correcting mode is selected.
3) Left-click the 1. Planned Speed button.

The Planned Speed input screen wi ll appear.
Enter a numeric value of new Planned Speed.
3 - 71 [ ~RC I gopan Radio Co.,l'Jd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
4) On the radar display, put the cursor on the line extending
between Waypoints that is to have its Planned Speed corrected.
The section that is to have its Planned Speed corrected is specified, and the new Planned
Speed is applied to the section.
5) To correct the Planned Speed of another section, repeat

procedures 3 and 4.
6) To finish correcting Planned Speed, left-click the

4. Correct Planned Speed button.
The Planned Speed correcting mode will be cancelled.
(Example)
Planned spee~ 10.00k~
Q..g_oo ±~o. f to4

.......... 113T 064T ' 113T 064T ........... 11 3T
8 OC»<n .......... 90 10 Okn " - ./'11 Okn 120kn ~
"'efo 1 €fo'o, U oos
Secllon that is to have its Planned Speed corrected
3.7.2.5 Deleting a Waypoint (Delete Waypoint)

The specified Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system is deleted.
Procedures
I) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
The Waypoint deleting mode is selected.
[JRC ] 8opan RadicJ Co.,.ltd. 3-72

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
3) On the radar display, put the cursor on a Waypoint to be deleted,
and left-click.
The specified Waypoint is deleted, and the previous and following Waypoints are then
connected by a line.
4) To delete another Waypoint, repeat procedure 3.
5) To finish deleting a Waypoint, left-click the 5. Delete

button.
T he Waypoint deleting mode wi ll be cancelled.
(Exa mple)
oint to be deleted
Q.g_oo 02 ~ 004
""'- 113T 064T / ......._ 11JT 064T ~ ......._
'- /, -..... 113T
800kn ""'- / g O~n 100kn ""'- 11 Okn ........._._
~01 e'o'o3 12 Okn u oos
left-dick Planned speed
Q.g_oo
' 113T
800kn ""'-
+
Calculated again Waypomts are re-numbered
3.7.2.6 Inserting a Waypoint (Insert Waypoint)

A Waypoint is inserted at a specific location of the route data saved in the radar system.
Procedures
operation below.
Route
--7 2. WPT/Route Setting
--? 3. Set: Route Sequence
3 - 73 [.JRC] gapan Radio Co.,.ftd.

----------------------------------
2) Left-click the 6. Insert button.
The Waypoint inserting mode is selected.
3) On the radar display, put the cursor on the section line into
which a Waypoint is to be inserted, and left-click.
The section is specified, the cursor becomes a cross cursor mark, and the cross cursor mark is
connected to the previous and following Waypoints by a rubber band.
4) On the radar display, put the cursor on the location at which a

Waypoint is to be inserted, and left-click.
The coordinates of the new Waypoint are specified, and the new Waypoint is connected to
the previous and following Waypoints by a line.
5) To insert another Waypoint, repeat procedures 3 and 4.
6) To finish inserting a Waypoint, left-click the 6. Insert
button.
The Waypoint inserting mode will be cancelled.
(Example)
Rubber band
1-
+ 090T
- -
10 Okn
Waypoint is inserted into this section Waypoint Is 1nserted into this section
[ ~RC ] (japan RodkJ Co., .lid. 3-74

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint
Input)
In this radar system, it is possible to create and correct route by performing
ope ration on the Waipoint [nput menu .
Waypoint
Waypoint Number Waypoint Scroll Lat~ud e/ Lon~ude P lanned Speed Waypoint Comment
Waypoint Scroll Exit Waypoint Waypoint Waypoint Input Character

Insert Add~ion Delete
3.7.3.1 Open the Waipoint Input Menu

Procedures
1) Open the Way point Input menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
~ 6. Waypoint Input
When transmitting, it can not be open.
3- 75 [~Rc ] 8opon.Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
3.7.3.2 Adding a Waypoint (Add)
ew Waypoint data is added to the route data saved in the radar system.
Procedures
l ) Open the Waipoint Input menu.
2) Left-click the ADD button.
The new latitude of waypoint is reversed.
3) Enter a latitude /longitude and a planned speed.
A Waypoint will be added.
For the input method on the latitude I longitude and numeric value input screen, see Section
3.3.4.5 "Entering latitude/longitude" and Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".
3.7.3.3 Adding a Comment (Comment)

Procedures
l ) Open the Waipoint Input menu.
2) Left-click the Waypoint Scroll button.
Left-click to show the desi red comment.
3) Left-click the Comment button to be added.
T he comment of waypoint is reversed.
4) Enter a comment.
A comment wi ll be added.
For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a
character".
3-76
----------------------------------
3.7.3.4 Correcting latitude /longitude of a Waypoint (LAT/LON)
The latitude I longitude of a Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system are
corrected.
Procedures
1) Open the Waipoint Input menu.
Left-click to show the desired latitude I longitude.
3) Left-click the Latitude I Longitude button to be corrected.

The latitude of waypoint is reversed.
4) Enter a latitude /longitude.
A Waypoint wi ll be corrected.
latitude/longitude".
3.7.3.5 Correcting Planned Speed (Planned Speed)

Procedures
Left-click to show the desired planned speed.
3) Left-click the Planned Speed button to be corrected.
The planned speed of waypoint is reversed.
4) Enter a planned speed.
A Planned Speed will be corrected.
For the input method on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4 "Operation on
Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Lnput menu" .
3- 77 [JRC l aopan Radio Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
3.7.3.6 Deleting a Waypoint (DEL)
Procedures
Left-click to show the desired waypoint.
3) Left-click the -~:=J button to be corrected.

Confirmation Window wi ll appear.
4) Left-click the 1. Yes I button.

The specified Waypoint is de leted, and the previous and following Waypoints are then
3.7.3.7 Inserting a Waypoint (INS)

Procedures
3) Left-click the INS button to be corrected.
4) Enter a latitude / longitude and a planned speed.
A Waypoint will be inserted.
3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input menu".
[ ~RC ] 8opan. Radic Co., .ltd. 3-78

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3. BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
3.7.4 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm)
This radar system can monitor the movement of own ship with regard to its route
and activate a variety of alarms.
Destination alarm When own ship arrives at next Waypoint, an alarm will
(Waypoint Alarm): be activated.
Route alarm: When own ship deviates from the specified route, an
alarm will be activated.
3.7.4.1 Destination alarm (Waypoint Alarm)

The desti nation alann is activated when own ship has reached next Waypoint or own ship
has deviated from the scheduled route.
A Waypoint alarm circle with a specified radius distance is di splayed.

Wa oint alarm circle
ToWaypoint
Waypo int Alarm has the following two types of alarms:
Arrival: An alarm is activated when own ship has entered the circle from outside.
Break Off: An alarm is activated when own ship has left the circle to the outside.
Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2) Left-click the set value of the

11. WaypointAiarm I item , and select 11. Waypoint Alarm
Arrival O.OOnm
an operation mode.
/
Radius of the
Operation mode
Waypoint alarm
circle
3- 79 [.JRC ) (japan Radio Co.,.ltd.

----------------------------------
Arrival Break Off : Set the operation mode.
O.OOnm : Set the radius of the Waypoint alarm circle. If

O.OOnm is set, alarm operation will be turned off.
3.7.4.2 Route Alarm

The route alarm is acti vated when own ship deviates from the specified width of the route.
The route alarm lines are displayed with a specified width provided.
Route alarm line
~--
Break 011 alarm is activated

' when own ship is outsode the
~
specifiedrange
____, . ToWaypoont
"'
,· '
"' "'
Own shop
~o n
qr /~ '
Route alarm line
Route A Iann has the following two types of ope rations:
Approach : An alarm is activated when own ship enters the route range from
outside.
XTE(Cross An alarm is activated when own ship leaves the route range.
Track Error) :
Procedures
operation below.
Route
---? 2. WPT/ Route Setting

12. Route Alarm I item, and select an I2. Route Alarm
Approach O.OOnm
operation mode.
/ /
Width of the route
Operation mode (one side)
Approach I XTE : Set the operation mode.
O.OOnm : Set the width of the route (one side). If

O.OOnm is set, an alarm operation will be
turned off.
jJRC] 8apanRadicJ Co.. .fld. 3-80

----------------------------------
3.7.5 Method of Using Route
The method ofusing the route will be described.
Displaying the route The internal route is displayed according to the procedures in
(Route Alarm Color): Section 3.7.1 "Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route)".
Selecting the forward or Whether to use Waypoints forward or backward is selected .

backward of the route
(Route Sequence):
Skipping of route The Waypoint which is after next Waypoint is set as the next
(Waypoint Skip): Waypoint.
Skipping back of the route The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.
(Waypoint Back Skip):
3.7.5.1 Selecting the forward or backward of the route (Route Sequence)

Select whether Waypoints in route data are used in the forward direction or
backward direction.
r"\
~--
no7 - - - ....._
- -+ : Forward --- _ '-..
--- -.t::\ 00
- - • : Backward ~, '-..
'~' ........ '.........

r'\1 '
', "
',0
'"
oos '>
'- ', A Q93 .,.,""" / /
'- '~ nn ............ ~ --- .,., /
' \::1""-'L_____
' _ --- -----e(fo2 ___
..,.,.. ~~ -
.,-- *"""""-..... ......_
-
----
-~o4
........... ~ ..........
~
...,.,
_,~ / .,..,
/
Procedures
1) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
----7 3. WPT/Route Operations
2 Left-click the set value of the j1. Route Sequence item, and select an
operation mode.
Forward :Waypoints are used in the forward direction (ascending order).
:Waypoints are used in the reverse direction (descending order).
3 - 81 ['-'RC I f)opan Radio Co.,.tid.

----------------------------------
3.7.5.2 Skipping/Back-skipping of the route (Waypoint Skip/ Waypoint Back
Skip)
ext Waypoint of the route can be changed by user manually .
. Forward
Q?oo - -,.. · Backward
..... ... ...

...... ......
...... ......
...... ......
. . . ,"E)-oat.________
-- _ _
e -
-- lfo2 .,.., 9-.9 ..,- ~
..,.,..'(fP'.!'~ *'
----.....,""""""..........
Skipping of route The Waypoint which is after the next Waypoint is set as the
(Waypoint Skip): next Waypoint.
Skipping back the route The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.
Procedures
operation below.
Route
~ 3. WPT/Route Operations
2) To execute Waypoint Skip, left-click the 3. Waypoint Skip
button.
The Waypoint which is after the next Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.
3) To execute Waypoint Back Skip, left-click the

4. Waypoint Back Skip Skip button.
The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.
3.7.6 Detailed Route Settings

Make detailed settings of the route.
Color for the route alarm line Set the display color for the route alarm line.
(SEL NUM/Comment Size)
(.JRC] 8apan Radio Co., .J.'Jd. 3-82

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
Display character size :Specify the size of the numeric value and character displayed on
(SEL NUM/Comment Size) the radar display.
Waypoint bearing vector :Set the method to display line between next Waypoint and own
(Waypoint Vector) ship.
Display of bearing distance to the :Select the start point to be used for the bearing/distance display in
destination(Status of Origin/DEST) the Waypoint data display area.
ON/OFF of Waypoint number display :Set whether or not to display Waypoint number next to the
(WPT Number Display) Waypoint mark.
Waypoint update :Set how to update Waypoint number when one Waypoint has been
(Waypoint Switch Mode) reached.
3.7.6.1 Color for the route alarm line (Off-Track Limit Line)
Route a larm lines are d isplayed on both sides of the center line of the route.
For this item, set which color is used to display each line.
Route alarm line Route alarm line
' TnM!h d r«:tat

' -~ J'
Route Alarm Color Area A Route Alarm Color. Area B
'
Area A (IALA-A) : The port-side is red and the bow-side is green
along the traveling direction.
Area 8 (IALA-8) : The port-side is green and the bow-side is red

Procedures
operation below.
Route
-4 2. WPT/Route Setting
2) Left-click the set value of the Is. Off-Track Limit Line item, and
select an operation mode.
IALA-A : Area A
IALA-B : Area 8
3 -83 [.JRC] 8opanRadio Co.,J.'Jd.

----------------------------------
3.7.6.2 Display character size (SEL NUM/Comment Size)
Specify the size of the numeric value and character displayed on the radar display.
Procedures
1) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route
---7 2. WPT/Route Setting
---7 9. Next
2) Left-click the set value of the 11. SEL NUM/Comment Size item, and
Normal :Numbers and characters are displayed in normal size.
Small :Numbers and characters are displayed in a size smaller than

usual.
3.7.6.3 Waypoint bearing vector (Waypoint Vector)

Set how to display a line between next Waypoint and own ship.
Procedures
Route
---7 2. WPT/Route Setting
---7 9 . Next
2) Left-click the set value of the 12. Way point Vector item, and select
an operation mode.
Off : The Waypoint bearing vector is not displayed.
From Origin : A line is displayed from the previous Waypoint to next Waypoint.
_ _ S..-...._-...._ <J /tbeanngvedor
-............
~-- ....... --
From CURR : A line is displayed from own ship to next Waypoint.

__ S ....._ ~ ~tbeanngvector
...... ...... ' /
...... ......'~ '~
ToWayPOint
' .
..... _--
[.JRC] 8apan.Radio Co.,.i'Jd. 3 - 84

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3. BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
--------------------------------- -
3.7.6.4 Displaying bearing distance to the Waypoint (Status of Origin/DEST)
Select a start point used to display bearing/distance in the Way point data display area.
Procedures
Route
~ 9. Next
2) Left-click the set value of the j3. Status of Origin/DEST item , and
From CURR POSN :The bearing distance from the own ship position
to next Waypoint is displayed.
Fix :The bearing distance from the previous Waypoint

3.7.6.5 ON/OFF of Waypoint number display (WPT Number Display)

Set whether to display a Waypoint number next to the Waypoint mark.
Procedures
l) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route
~ 2 . WPT/ Route Setting
~ 9 . Next
2) Left-click the set value of the j4. WPT Number Display item , and
Off : The Waypoint number is not displayed.
On : The Waypoint number is displayed.
3-85 I'-'RC) (japan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
3.7.6.6 Updating Waypoint data (Waypoint Switch Mode}
Set how to update the Waypoint number when one Waypoint has been reached.
Procedures
I ) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2) Left-click the set value of the j2. Waypoint Switch Mode item, and
Manual : When next Waypoint has been reached , user updates the
following Waypoint.
AUTO : When next Waypoint has been reached , the following
Waypoint is automatically updated.
3.7.7 Clear Waypoint/Route Data (Clear WPT/Route Data)

This function clears waypoint/route data from memory.
Procedures
operation below.
Route
2) Left-click the j6. Clear WPT/Route Data button.
A route data will be cleared.
If data is not copied on the flash memory card (option),

NOTE: the data is not be reloaded.
[~Rc ] 8opon.RadicJ Co., .lid. 3-86

----------------------------------
3.7.8 Operate Route Data File
Route data saved in the radar system can be saved onto a flash memory card, and
data can be loaded from a flash memory card into the radar system.
With regard to this item, only route data can be saved and loaded. To save or load
own ship's track, target track data, and mark/line data, see Section 3.11 "USING
CARD".
Selecting a card slot Specify the card slot to be used for operating a
(Select Card Slot): route data fi le.
Saving route data (Save): Route data saved in the radar system is saved
onto a flash memory card.
Loading route data (Load): Route data saved on a flash memory card is
loaded into the radar system.
Erasing route data file A route data file saved in a flash memory card
(Erase): is erased.
3.7.8.1 Selecting a card slot (Select Card Slot)

Specify the card slot to be used for accessing a route data fi le
Procedures
2) Open the File Operations menu by performing the menu

operation below.
Route
~ 4. Rle Operation
3) Left-click the set value of the !1. Select Card Slot item, and
select a card slot.
3.7.8.2 Saving route data (Save)

Route data saved in the radar system is saved onto a flash memory card.
3-87 [~RC ] gapan Radit:J Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
Procedures
l) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.

operation below.
Route
---+ 4. File Operation
The file name input screen will appear.
character".
4) After having entered a file name, left-click the ENT button.
The entry of the file name will be finished.
The route data will be saved with the specified file name.
3.7.8.3 Loading route data (Load)

Route data is loaded into the radar system from a flash memory card.
Once route data has been loaded into the radar system from a
NOTE: flash memory card, the route data that has been saved in the
radar system is overwritten and erased . Route data that has
been erased cannot be resaved. Note that important route data
should be saved in a flash memory card.
[.JRC ] f)opan Radio Co., .l'Jd. 3 - 88

JMA-9 100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
Procedures

operation below.
Route
Contents of the specified memory card (file li st) wi ll be displayed.
4) Left-click the button for the desired file name.
C onfirmation Window will appear.
The route data with the specified file name will be loaded.
3.7.8.4 Erasing route data (Erase)

An unnecessary route da ta file saved on a flash memory card is erased.
Once route data files that have been saved on a flash

NOTE: memory card is erased , the erased data cannot be
resaved. Note that important files shou ld not be erased .
Procedures

operation below.
Route
~ 4. File Operation
3- 89 [ ~RC ] 8apan. Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 lnstruellon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
Contents of the specified memory card (file list) will be displayed.
Confirmation Window will appear .
5) Leff-click the 1. Yes button.
A route data file with the specified file name wi ll be erased.
[ ~RC ] f)apan Radio Co., .lid. 3-90

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
APPLIED OPERATIONS
3.8.1 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail information about radar signal
processm g.
Procedures
1) Open the Process Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
---? 3. RADAR Menu
---? 1. Process Setting
The Process Setting menu will appear.
Detail information about radar signal processing can be set by changing the settings o f the
menu items.
After the settings for radar signal processing are

NOTE: changed, small targets may not be displayed or
unwanted waves may not be suppressed. Thus, do not
make a significant change in the settings.
3.8.1.1 Video Latitude

• Select the dy namic range in which receiving signals are to be shown on the
radar displ ay.
• Select Normal in standard, and Wide in rainy weather.
• Narrow 1 clearly displays short-range v ideos when STC i s used in manual
mode.
Narrow : Narrows the dynamic rang e at short range.
Normal : Standard setting

The dynamic range varies depending on the actual range:
Short distance: wide Long distance: narrow
Wide : Use this mode when rainy weather intensifies unwanted

waves.The dynamic range is about twice as wide as when
Normal is selected.
Super Wide : Use this mode when rain cloud remain at Wide mode.
3 - 91 [ JRC I gapan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 8 APPUED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
3.8.1.2 Video Noise Rejection
• This function rejects signals that assumed as noise and clutter in radar videos.
• Select Off to di splay radar videos like analog signals.
• Select Levell or Level2 to suppress noise and c lutter.
Off Turns off the noise rejection function, and displays all
signals. Targets are popped up from noise and displayed
like analog signals.
Levell Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and

clutter). When detection of targets or unwanted waves is not
definite, the signals are displayed.
Level2 Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and

clu tter). When detection of targets or unwanted waves is not
definite, the signals are rejected. Only when detection of
targets is definite, the signals are displayed.
3.8.1.3 Auto Dynamic Range

• When the automatic sea c lutter suppression mode and the automatic rain/snow
clutter suppression mode are in use, the dynamic range is automatically
controlled.
• When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is in use, this function
improves gai n by widening the dynamic range of only areas where sea clutter
is strong and narrowing the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter is not
detected.
• When the automatic rai n/snow clutter suppression mode is in use, thi s function
improves gain by widening the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter and
rain/snow clutter are strong and narrowing the dynamic range of the other
areas.
• Land videos become obscure when the automatic ra in/snow c lutter suppression
mode is in use.
Off Does not control the dynamic range automatically.

(Standard setting) The dynamic range is set in the same
manner as when the manual sea clutter suppression mode
or the manual rain/snow clutter suppression mode is in use.
On Automatically controls the dynamic range.
3 - 92
JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
------------------------------- ---
3.8.1 .4 Process Switch
• This function sets a specific area and switches the video process mode between
the inside and outside of the area.
• In Section 3.8.1.5 "2nd Process Mode" 2nd Process Mode, set the second video
process mode for the area outside the boundary.
• [n [2] PROCESS of Main Menu , set the first video process mode for the area
inside the boundary.
• Gain at a distance can be improved by suppressing near sea clutter through the
correlative process.
• There are two methods for setting an area:
Off Disables the Process Switching function. (Standard

setting)
Range Fix Sets a boundary at a constant range from the center. Set
the boundary range in Section 3.8.1 .6 "Process Switch
Range". The specific area turns out to be a circle with the
own ship' s position as the center.
AUTO Automatically sets a specific area. The area subject to

many clutter returns is inside the boundary, and the area
less subject to clutter returns is outside the boundary.
3.8.1.5 2nd Process Mode

• Set the second video process mode for the outside of a speci fie area.
• This function is enabled when Range Fix or AUTO is se lected in Section
3.8.1.4 "Process Switch".
Video process modes

3Scan CORREL : Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected.
4Scan CORREL : Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter returns.
SScan CORREL : Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns.
Peak Hold : Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection probability is low.
3.8.1.6 Process Switch Range

• Set the boundary range of a specific area.
• This function is enabled when Range Fix is selected in Section 3.8.1.4
"Process Switch".
• The specific area turns out to be a circle with the own ship ' s position as the
center.
• The boundary range can be set in units of 0.1 nm, ranging 0.1 to 25.5 nm.
3-93 [.JRC] 8apan Radio Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
3.8.1.7 Fast Target Detection
• This function displays fast moving targets that are suppressed in scan-
correlative process mode.
• This function is enabled when 3Scan CORREL , 4Scan CORREL , or
SScan CORREL is selected as the video process mode.
• If unwanted waves remain on the radar display, suppress them by using the
[SEA], [RAIN], or [GAIN] dial, or adjusting the interference rejection mode.
Off : Disables the Fast Target Detection function.
On : Enables the Fast Target Detection function.
[~Rc ] f)opan Radio Co., .ltd. 3 - 94

JMA-9100 lnstruciJon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
3.8.2 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting)
This function enables the setting of detail information about radar trails
process mg.
Procedures
1) Open the RADAR Trails Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
- 3. RADAR Menu
- 2. RADAR Trails Setting
The RADAR Trails Setting menu will appear.
Detail data about radar trails processing can be set by changing the settings of each menu
item.
After the settings for radar trails processing are changed,

NOTE: targets' trails may not be displayed or trails may be plotted with
unwanted waves. Thus, do not make a significant change in the
settings.
3.8.2.1 Trails Mode

• Set the radar trail display mode.
• For details on the trail mode, see Section 3.4.8 "Display Radar Trails (Trails)"
3.8.2.2 Trails Reference Level

• Select a radar video level required for plotting radar trails.
• The radar video threshold level increases in order of Levell - Level2
- Level3 - Level4 .
• To plot radar trails with unwanted waves, change to a higher level.
• To thin radar trails, change to a higher level.
• If radar trails are plotted in snatches, change to a lower level.
3-95 (~RC ] gapan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
3.8.2.3 Trails Reduction
• Make a setting for thinning radar trails.
• The effect of thinning increases in order of Levell --+ Level2 --+
Level3 .
• Radar videos do not become obscure because of the thinning of radar trails.
Off : Disables the Trails Reduction function.

Levell : Enables the Trails Reduction function. (Effect: Low)
Level2 : Enables the Trails Reduction function. (Effect: Modest)
Level3 : Enables the Trails Reduction function . (Effect: High)
3.8.2.4 Trails Process

• Determine whether to use the video process with radar signals for plotting
radar trails.
• When Trails Process is On , radar trails are never plotted with unwanted
waves, but the radar trails of moving targets may not be pl otted.
• When Trails Process is Off , radar trails may be plotted with unwanted
waves, but the radar trail s of moving targets are always plotted.
Off : Disables the Trails Process function.
On : Enables the Trails Process function .
3.8.2.5 MAX Interval

• Select the maximum time for displaying radar trail s.
• Select Short when short radar trails are often used in bays and the likes.
• Select Long when long radar trai ls are necessary for ocean navigation.
Short : Sets 15 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.
Middle : Sets 30 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.
Long : Sets 60 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.
["'RC] (Japan Radio Co.,.ltd. 3 - 96

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)
Thi s function enables the setting of detail information about an antenna.
Procedures
1) Open the TXRX Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.
Main
~ 3. RADAR Menu
~ 3. TXRX Setting
The TXRX Setting menu will appear.
Detail information about antenna operation can be set by changing the settings of the menu
items.
3.8.3.1 PRF Fine Tuning

• Fine-tune the transmitting repetiti on frequency of the transmitter in the range
90 to 100%.
• If radar ' s interference patterns are concentrically di splayed, increment or
decrement the set va lue by 3 to 4 in order to heighten the effect of interference
rej ection.
• One of 32 levels 0-31 can be set.
3.8.3.2 Stagger Trigger

• T he interference reduction function is activated by using the transmission
re petition frequency control of the trans mitter.
• This function is effective when radar interference does not go away.
Off : Stagger Trigger is not used.

On : Stagger Trigger is used.
3.8.3.3 PRF
• Select the operation mode the transmitting repetition frequency of the
transmitter.
Normal :Standard mode Both appropriate gain and magnetron's life

expectancy are maintained.
Economy :Power saving mode Gain slightly lowers, but the service life of
magnetron is prolonged when short pulses
are used.
High Power :High gain mode Gain improves when long pulses are used,
but the service life of magnetron is slightly
shortened.
3-97 [.JRC] (japan Radio Co.,.tid.

----------------------------------
3.8.3.4 Ice Class Standby Mode
• In this mode, the antenna is rotated when transmission is in the standby state.
• This mode is effective to prevent the antenna's rotating shaft from freezing.
Off :The ice class standby mode is not used. When transm ission is
in the standby state, the antenna also stops rotating.
On :The ice class standby mode is used. When transmission is in

the standby state, the antenna rotates.
3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting)
This function enables the setting of detail information about cursor operation and
display.
Procedures
1) Open the Cursor Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
----7 9. EBL/Cursor Setting
----7 3. Cursor Setting
The Cursor Setting menu will appear.
Detail infonnation about c ursor operation and display can be set by chang ing the settings of
the menu items.
3.8.4.1 EBLNRM Control Cursor

• The EBLNRM Control Cursor is switched between Valid and Invalid.
• The trackball is provided as a standard device. If the trackball malfunctions, the
cursor can be moved by using the [EBL] dial and [VRM] dial.
• The cursor moves horizontally when [EBL) is operated, and moves vertically
when [VRM] is operated.
• To switch between EBLNRM operation and cursor operation while ON is
selected, hold down the [EBL] dial for 2 seconds.
On : Cursor is operated using a [EBL] [VRM] dial.
Off : Cursor is operated using a trackball.
[ ~Rc ] f)apan.RadicJ Co.,.ltd. 3-98

------------------------------- ---
3.8.4.2 Cursor Length
• Set the length of the cross cursor mark on the radar disp lay.
Short Cuts the cross cursor mark in length.
Long : Makes the cross cursor mark twice as long as when

Short is selected.
3.8.4.3 Cursor Pattern

• The type of the cross cursor mark displayed of the display is selected.
: Type 1 is selected for the cross cursor mark 1 displayed in the radar display.
3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting)
This system can save combinations of display color and brill iance in accordance
with ambient lighting conditions and the radar display can be eas ily switched.
Follow the procedures be low to set display color and brilliance to be saved before
hand.
3.8.5.1 Setting display color (Display Color Setting)
Procedures
1) Open the Color Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.
Main
----+ 7. Sub Menu
----+ 1. Display Color Setting
Display Color Setting menu will appear.
3-99 [ ~RC ] ()upon Radio Co.,.f.td.

----------------------------------
3.8.5.2 Day/Night
• Specify the mode to be changed.
• The following modes are available:
Dayl : Day mode 1 : Used under bright lighting conditions.
Day2 : Day mode 2 : Used under bright lighting conditions.
Dusk : Dusk mode : Used under dim lighting conditions.
Night : Night mode : Used under dark lighting conditions.
Setting color of each element
• Specify the color for the element.

• The color for the fo llowing elements can be specified.
IOuter PPI : The color of the background outside radar video PPI is
selected .
IInner PPI : The color of the background inside radar video PPI is
selected .
Character : The color of the character and bearing scale is selected.
RADAR Video : The color of the radar video is selected.

RADAR Trails(Time) : The color of the time radar trails is selected.
RADAR Trails(AII) : The color of the time radar trails is selected.
Target Symbol : The color of the target symbol is selected.
Cursor : The color of the cursor is selected .
Range Rings : The color of the range rings is selected.
EBL/VRM/ PI : The color of the EBL I VRM I PI is selected.
IOwn Symboi/HL/Vector : The color of the own ship symbol , heading line, own
ship vector is selected.
(!) Those selected color can be saved for each Day/ Night mode.
3.8.5.3 Setting display brilliance (Brilliance Setting)

For each Day/Night mode, background color outside the bearing scale,
background color inside the bearing scale, and color for characters, radar echo and
radar trails can be selected.
[JRC) 8apanRadicJ Co.,.ltd. 3-100

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
Procedures
1) Open the Brilliance Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
~ 2. Bri lliance Setting
Display Brilliance Setting menu will appear.
Setting brilliance of each element
• Specify the brilliance for the ele ment.

• Level4 indicates maxi mum brilliance a nd Levell indicates m ini mum brilliance.
• The brilliance for the following elements can be specified.
RADAR Video : The brilliance of the radar video is selected .

RADAR Trails : The brilliance of the radar trails is selected.
Target Symbol : The brilliance of the target symbol is selected.i

Range Rings : The brilliance of the range rings is selected.
EBL/VRM/ PI : The brilliance of the EBL I VRM I PI is selected .
Character : The brilliance of the character and bearing scale is

selected.
IOwn Symboi / HL/Vector I : The brilliance of the own ship symbol, heading line, and
own ship vector is selected.
IKeyboard : The brilliance of the operation panel is selected.i
i. Minimum level is LeveiO.(it means OFF)
(!) Those selected brilliance can be saved for each Day/Night mode.
3.8.5.4 Setting radar video brilliance (VIO)

The brilliance of the video on the radar display is adjusted.
Procedures VID
I) Left-click the 0 button located at the lower right of the
radar display, and adjust the brilliance of the radar video so as to
get the best view of the video display.
The brilliance of the radar video can be adjusted on four stages without opening the
Brilliance Setting menu.
Adjust the radar display to obtain the best-to-view video.
3-101
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
3.8.5.5 Setting target symbol brilliance (TT)
The brilliance of the target symbol on the radar display is adjusted.
Procedures TT
l ) Left-click the 0 button located at the lower right of the
radar display, and adjust the brilliance of the target symbol so as
to get the best view of the video display.
The brilliance of the target symbol can be adjusted on four stages without opening the
3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume)

When an alarm is activated, the operation panel issues an alarm audible to inform
user of the change of the condition.
The alarm sound can be adj usted by performing the fo llowing procedures.
Procedures
I ) Open the Buzzer Volume menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
--t 7. Sub Menu
--t 2. Brilliance Setting
Display Buzzer Volume menu will appear.
The volume of the alarm sound can be specified for each cause for alarm.
Level4 indicates maximum volume and Off indicates minimum volume.
IKey ACK : The operation key acknowledgement is set.
OPE Miss : The incorrect operation alarm is set.
CPA/TCPA Alarm : The dangerous ship alarm is set.
New Target Alarm : The automatic acquisition target alarm is set.
Lost Alarm : The target lost alarm is set.
Navigation Alarm : The navigation data abnormality alarm is set.
System Alarm : The system abnormality alarm is set.
Inter Switch : The inter switch switching alarm is set.
[.JRC ] 8opan RadicJ Co.. .lid. 3 - 102

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIO NS
----------------------------------
3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2]
Users can freely make settings wi th [OPT ION 1] key and [OPTION 2] key.
By using the keys, users can open a frequently used menu by onl y single
operation, or assign special functions, to the user key switches.
3.8.7.1 Initial Setting (Option Key Setting)

Set functions that can be performed with the option key switches.
Procedures
1) Open the Option Key Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main 1
7. Sub Menu
=-~-_.J
4. Option Key Setting
The Option Key Setting menu will appear.
T his system provides two user keys: [OPTION I] and [OPTION 2]. Different functions can
be allocated to each key.
Functions that can be allocated to each key are as follo ws:
Menu : A specific menu is directly displayed.
Zoom : The zoom display function is switched between on and off.
DEST : SeUCancel Waypoint menu key
-> 0 : Start-point, Pass-point key in simple route operating
0-> : End-point key in sim ple route operating
capture Screen : Screen capture key (This function is enabled only when the
card (optional) is connected .)
3 - 103 [ .JRC ] gapan Radio Co.,J'Jd.

----------------------------------
3.8.7.2 Using Option Keys (Directly displaying a specified Menu )
Preset the Menu that is to be displayed with the option key switch.
Procedures
1) Perform the general menu open procedure to open the menu that
is to be directly displayed with Option Key.
2) While the menu is open, hold down [OPTION 11 key or [OPTION 21

key for 2 seconds.
The menu currently being displayed is saved for the pressed option key.
("";\ The menu set for the pressed option key will open.
'-!I Subsequently, general menu operation can be performed.
3.8.7.3 How to use the Optin key ( Zoom Display)

Preset whether to execute the Zoom display by operating the user key.
Procedures
l) Press either [OPTION 11 key or [OPTION 21 key for which
Zoom has been set.
The zoom mode is acti vated.
2) Put the cursor on a location that is to be zoomed, and left-click.
Zoom is set.
Cancel
1) Press either [OPTION 11 key or [OPTION 21 key for which
Zoom has been set.
The zoom mode is cancelled and a normal display will appear.
['-'RC] (Japan Radio Co.,.lid. 3 - 104

JMA-9100 lnstruc!Jon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting)
By performing the following operation, it is possible to display navigation data of

the wind direction I velocity, water depth and the like, as a graph on the radar
display.
Procedures
1) Open the Multi Window Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
--? 4. Multi Window Setting
The Multi Window Setting menu will appear.
Detailed settings of the display are possible by changing the settings of each item.
3.8.8.1 DIR/DIST EXP Display

• Determine whether to expand the value display of cursor, EBL, and VRM.
• The value display is expanded in digital information area 2.
• When the cursor mark moves on the PPI, the display of cursor information is
expanded.
• When an EBL or VRM is operated, the va lue display of each marker is
expanded.
• While the menu is open, any display is not expanded.
Off : Does not expand any display.
On : Expands the display in digital information area 2. The

expanded display remains for 5 seconds after the
operation of each marker, and then it will disappear.
Always On : Expands the display in digital information area 2.
3.8.8.2 Numeric NAV INFO

• Determine whether to display the numeric values of received navigation
information.
• One of two digital information areas is used to display data.
• When navigation data is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/ AIS
numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
3 - 105 [.JRC) 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA· 9100 lnstruct1on Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
• Navigation information of the water depth, water temperature, tidal current,
wind direction/velocity, and destination is displayed with numeric values.
• Left-click the Target button located at thelower righit of the display. The
navigation data display function is switched between On and Off.
Off : Does not display the numeric values of navigation information.

Areal : Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 1.
Area2 : Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 2 .
3.8 .8.3 Depth Graph Setting

• The Depth Graph Setting menu will appear.
[1] Depth Graph Display
• Determine whether to display received water depth information with a graph.

• When the water-depth graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/
AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
water-depth graph display function is switched between On and Off.
Off : Does not display a water depth graph.

Areal : Displays the water depth graph in digital information area 1.
Area2 : Displays the water depth graph in digital information area 2.
[2] Depth Range
• Select the depth range on the water depth graph.
SOm : Sets 50 m as the depth range.

lOOm : Sets 100 m as the depth range.
250m : Sets 250 m as the depth range.
AUTO : Uses the depth range in the OPT sentence included in
received data .
[3] Time Range
• Select the time range on the water depth graph.
[.JRc j f)opanRadio Co.,.ltd. 3-106

----------------------------------
10min : Sets 10 minutes as the time range.
12hour : Sets 12 hours as the time range.
[4] Depth Unit
• Set the unit of water depth for the water-depth graph.
Feet : The foot is used as the unit of water depth.
Fathom : The fathom is used as the unit of water depth.
Meters : The meter is used as the unit of water depth.
3.8.8.4 Wind Graph Setting

• The Wind Graph Setting menu wi ll appear.
[1] Wind Graph Display
• Determine whether to display received wind direction/velocity information

with a graph.
• When the wind direction I speed graph is displayed, the sizes of the target
tracking (TT) I AIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
• Left-click the Target button located at the! ower righit of the display. The
wind direction I speed graph display function is switched between On and Off.
Off : Does not display the wind direction I speed graph.
Areal : Displays the wind direction I speed graph in digital information area 1.
Area2 : Displays the wind direction I speed graph in digital information area 2.
[2] Wind Speed Unit
• Set the unit of wind velocity for the wind direction I speed graph.
mls : Meters per second are used as the unit of wind speed .
knv'h : Kirometers per hour are used as the unit of wind speed.
kn : Knots are used as the unit of wind speed.
3-107 [ .JRC ] gopan RadicJ Co.,.tid.

----------------------------------
3.8.8.5 TEMP Graph Setting
• The TEMP Graph Setting menu will appear.
[1] TEMP Graph Display
• Determine whether to display the graph of the water-temperature data that has
been received on the radar di splay.
• When the water-temperature graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking
(TT)/AIS numeric data di splay areas are exclusively decreased.
• Left-cl ick the Target button located at thelower righit of the display. The
water-temperature graph display function is switched between On and Off.
Off : The water-temperature graph is not displayed.
Areal : The water-temperature graph is displayed in digital information area 1.
Area2 : The water-temperature graph is displayed in digital information area 2.
[2] TEMP Graph Color
• Set the color for the water-temperature graph.

• T here are eight selection items:
White Gray Blue Green Yellow Pink Red
[3] TEMP Range
• When Color is selected for the display color for the water-temperature graph,
set the temperature range of each color.
[4] Time Range
• Set the time range for the water-temperature graph.
10min : The time range is set at 10 minutes.
lSmin : The time range is set at 15 minutes.
12hour : The time range is set at 12 hours.
[ ~Re i f)opanRadio Co.,.ltd. 3- 108

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
3.8.8.6 Course Bar Setting
• The Course Bar Setting menu wi ll appear.
[1] Course Bar Display
• Determine whether to display the bar graph for the course data that has been
received on the radar di splay.
• One of two clig1tal information areas is used to display data.
• When the course-bar graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/
• Left-click the Target button located at the lower righit of the display. The
course bar di splay function is switched between On and Off.
Off : The course bar graph is not displayed.
Areal : The course bar graph is displayed in digital information area 1.
Area2 : The course bar graph is displayed in digital information area 2.
[2] Autopilot Course
• Determine which field of the APB sentence that has been received is used to
display AP course.
Course to Steer : Heading to Steer to Destination
From Origin : Bearing Origin to Destination
From CURR POSN : Bearing , Present Postion to Destination
[3] ROT Scale
• Set the maximum scale for the TURN Rate graph.
3Q-0-30 : The scale is set at ±30°/min.
Go-o-60 : The scale is set at ±60°/min.
12o-o-120 : The scale is set at ±120°/min.
lSQ-0-150 : The scale is set at ±150°/min.
3 - 109 [..JRC ] f)opan Radio Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
3.8.9 AUTO Backup
Data can be automatically backed up when the power supply is turned on.
Procedures
2) Open the Plot Setting menu by performing the following menu

operation.
Main
~ 8. Plot Setting
3) Left-click the item button of s. AUTO Backup Backup button.
The AUTO Backup menu will appear.
4) Select the number for the card slot to back up data.
Off : The automatic backup function is turned off.
Slotl : Data is automatically backed up on the compact flash

memory card inserted into slot 1.
Slot2 : Data is automatically backed up on the compact flash

Data that can be backed up includes own ship's track (Own Track), other ships' trails data
(Target Track), mark/line data (Mark/Line), destination data (WPT), and route data (Route).
The file name to be saved is either 9998 or 9999. Every time the power supply is turned on,
those numbers are alternately displayed.
I ~Rc ] 8apanRadio Co.,.ltd. 3-110

JMA-9100 lnsti\Jction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
----------------------------------
USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
"Radar Function Setting" is provided for easil y obtaining the best radar video by
storing complex radar signal processing settings in the optimum status by use, and
calli.ng the setti ng in accordance with the conditions for using the function.
Functions are factory-set for general use, and the settings can be fine adjusted by
operating the menu.
Four function modes are ava ilable, and they are factory-set as follows:
Function 1: Coast Useful for observing short-range videos.
Function 2 : Deep Sea Suitable for general ocean navigation .
Function 3: Storm Useful for observing videos in stormy weather.
Function 4: Rain Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but
rain I snow clutter is strong .
3.9.1 Operation Procedures
3.9.1.1 Calling a Function
Procedures
1) Press the [USER] key.
Each time the [USER] key is pressed, the selection changes cyclically as fo llows:
Function Off-t Function I -t Function2 -t Function3 -t Function4 -t Function Off
The name of the current function

mode is displayed at the lower left
of the display.
Function
Alternatively, left-clicking the (FU NC) mode
function button located at the
lower ten of the radar display will
enable the same operation.
3.9.1.2 Changing Function Setting (temporary change)

When radar signal processing setting is changed by using the menu or button on the radar
display whi le function I to 4 is called, the change is temporarily reflected to the operating
state.
Since this method does not change the memory contents, the new setting is discarded as soon
as another Function is called.
When the previous function is called again, operation is performed according to the memory
contents.
3 - 111 [.JRC I gopan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY (USER]
----------------------------------
3.9.1.3 Changing Function Setting (memory contents change)
To change the memory contents of functions I to 4, use the function setting menu.
For how to operate the function setting menu, see ection 3.9.3 "Overview of Function
Operations (User Function Setting)".
3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items

The fu nction setting menu has the items below.
page 1 Option
1. Mode Name of the mode to be used CoasVDeepsea/ .. ..
2. 1R Radar interference rejection Off/Low/Middle/High
3. Process Video process PROC Off/3Scan CORREU....
4. Target Enhance Target expansion Off/Levei1/Levei2/Level3
5. AUTO Sea/Rain Automatic clutter suppression Off I AUTO Sea I AUTO Sea/Rain
6. Save Present State Saving the present stale
page 2 Option
1. Pulse Length 0.75NM Standard pulse length for 0.75nm range SP1/MP1
2. Pulse Length 1.5NM Standard pulse length for 1.5nm range SP1/MP1/MP2/MP3
3. Pulse Length 3/4NM Standard pulse length for 3nm range MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1
4. Pulse Length 6/8NM Standard pulse length for 6nm range MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
5. Pulse Length 12NM Standard pulse length for 12nm range MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
6. Pulse Length 16NM Standard pulse length for 16nm range MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1 /LP2
page 3 Option
1. Video Latitude Dynamic range of radar video Narrow/ Normal /Wide/Super Wide
2. Video Noise Rejection Radar video noise rejection Off/Levei1/Level2
3. AUTO Dynamic Range Automatic dynamic range control Off/On
4. Process Switch Radar video process switching Off/Range FIX/AUTO
5. 2nd Process Mode 2nd video process mode PROC Off/3Scan CORREU....
6. Process Switch Range Video process switching range
7. Fast Target Detection Off/On
page 4 Option
1. Trails Interval Radar tra1ls length Off/15sec/....
2. Trails Mode True/Relative
3. Trails Reference Level Radar trails plotting threshold Level1-4
4. Trails Reduction Thinning of radar trails Off/Level1-3
6. Trails Process Superimpose-display of time radar trails and Off/On
continuous radar trails.
7 . Max Interval Maximum time for radar trails display ShorVMiddle/Long
page 5 Option
1. Gain Offset Gain correction
2. PRF Transmitting repetition frequency Normal/Economy/High Power
3. Small Buoy Detection Small target detection mode Off/On
4. Fishnet Detection Fishnet detection mode Off/On
5. Antenna Height Defaulti-Sm/5-1 Om/10-20m/20m
8. Set Mode Default
9. Initialize
l.JRC] 8opan RadioCo.,.fid. 3-112

JMA-91 00 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY (USER]
----------------------------------
3.9.3 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting)
The following outlines the operation of each function selected from the function
setting menu:
Procedures
I) Open the Process Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
- 3. RADAR Menu
- 1. Process Setting
- 8. User Function Settingj
The User Function Setting menu will appear.
Speci fy the number for the function for which the settings are to be changed.
The following are the operation overviews of each function setting item.
page 1-[1] Mode

• Selects the function name to be indicated at the lower left of the radar di splay
when the function is selected.
• When the setting is changed back to the factory setting, the initial value of the
selected mode is called.
• The following 11 modes are provided:
Coast : Use this mode to monitor a relatively short range, for example, bays
and coasts where many boats and ships are running. (Importance is
attached to resolution.)
Deep Sea : Use this mode to monitor a relatively long range, for example, the open
sea. (Importance is attached to long-range gain.)
Fish Net : Use this mode to detect small targets such as fishnets of round haul
netters hidden by sea clutter returns. (Importance is attached to sea
clutter suppression, and gain to moving targets lowers.)
storm : Use this mode when many rain I snow clutter returns or sea clutter
returns are detected in stormy weather. (Importance is attached to rain I
snow clutter and sea clutter suppression, and gain slightly lowers.)
calm : Use this mode when only a few rain I snow clutter returns or sea clutter
returns are detected.
Rain : Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain I snow clutter is
strong. (Importance is attached to rain I snow clutter suppression, and
Bird : Use this mode to detect flocks of sea birds.
Long : Use this mode to monitor utmost distances in the broad ocean.
Buoy : Use this mode to detect small targets like radio buoys in areas outside
the sea clutter area. (This mode displays targets of which detection
probability is low.)
Userl : General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable.
User2 : General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable.
3-113 ['-'RC] f)opan Radio Co.,..ltd.

JMA·9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
----------------------------------
page 1-[2] IR (Radar interference rejection)
• .Same function as £R Setting described in Section 3.4.1 "Interference Rejection
(IR)".
page 1-[3] Process (Video process)

• Same function as PROCESS Setting described in Section 3.4.4 "Use Video
Processing (PROC)"
page 1-[4] Target Enhance

• Same function as TARGET ENHANCE Setting described in Section 3.4.3
"Target Enhance (ENH)".
page 1-[5] Auto STC/FTC (Auto Sea/Rain)

• Detects unwanted waves such as rain/snow clutter and sea clutter and
automatically suppresses them.
• When the sea state or weather changes, this function automatically performs
suppression processing in accordance with the situation.
• Suppression processing is not full automatic, and requires the operator to adjust
the afterimages ofunwanted waves.
• To adjust the afterimage of sea clutter, use the [SEA] dial.
• To adjust the afterimage of rain/snow clutter, use the [RAIN] dial.
• In areas where the density of unwanted waves is low, unwanted waves may
remain being judged as targets. Thus, use the automatic clutter suppression
mode together with the video process mode.
• Characteristics of the automatic clutter suppression function:
Off : Disables the automatic clutter suppression function. Select off
when rain I snow clutter and sea clutter are not strong or when the
ship is in a bay.
AUTO Sea : Automatically detects the strength of sea clutter, and performs the
most suitable sea clutter suppression processing.
Even when the strength of sea clutter varies depending on the wind
direction, AUTO Sea performs the most suitable suppression
processing. Land like islands can be displayed naturally.
Since rain clouds outside sea clutter areas are recognized as land,
there is no effect of suppressing rain I snow clutter.
AUTO Sea/Rain : Along with AUTO Sea, AUTO Rain automatically detects the
strength of rain I snow clutter, and performs the most suitable rain I
snow clutter suppression processing.
When rain clouds are scattered about, AUTO Rain performs rain I
snow clutter suppression processing for only the rain-cloud areas.
Since land is recognized as rain clouds, land videos become

obscure.
[.JRC] gapanRadio Co.,.ftd. 3-114

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
----------------------------------
page 2-[1]-[7] PL (Pulse Length)
• Sets the standard transmitter pulse length in each range.
• When the range is called, the pulse range is used.
page 3-[1]-[7] Video setting menu (Process Setting)

• Operation is the same as that of the Process Setting menu described in Section
3.8. 1 "Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting)".
page 4-[1 ]-[7] Radar trails settings (Trails Setting)

• Same functions as in the Trails Setting of the RADAR Menu described in
Section 3.8.2 "Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting)".
page 5-[1] Gain Offset

• Corrects gain while the function mode is caUed.
• Since the displayed noise level varies depending on the combination of the
video process mode and the interference rejection level, gain needs "fine
adjustment for always obtaining the highest level.
• The gain correction function saves the correction value set by the gain adjust in
each function mode, so it can obtain the hlghest gain without the gain adjust
being operated when the function mode is changed.
• To set high gain, set a value on the "+" side.
• To set low gain, set a va lue on the "-" side.
• When the radar interference rejection level is increased, the noi se level is
lowered. Thus, set a gain correction value to the "+" side.
• When the video process mode 3Scan CORREL 4Scan CORREL , or
SScan CORREL is used, the noise level is lowered. Thus, set a gain correction
value to the "+" side.
• When the video process mode Remain or Peak Hold is used,
noise is hard to disappear. Thus, set a gain correction value to the "-" side.
page 5-[2] PRF

• Same function as in the TXRX Setting described in Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner
Unit (TXRX Setting)".
3-115 [JRC I aopan RadirJ Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER)
----------------------------------
page 5-[3] Small Buoy Detection
• Reduces the loss of signal processing during detection of small targets.
Off :Activates the general signal processing mode.
On :Activates the small buoy detection mode that reduces the loss
of signal processing .
page 5-[4] FishNet Detection

• Use this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns.
• This function becomes more effective when the AUTO RAIN clutter
suppression function is used together.
On :Activates the fishnet detection mode.
page 5-[5] Antenna Height

• Set the height of radar antenna above sea level.
• The STC/FTC curve is changed.
Default : Set default
"'Sm : Set the antenna height under Sm.
Sm"' 10m : Set the antenna height Sm to 1Om.
10m.-v20m : Set the antenna height 10m to 20m.
20m"' : Set the antenna height over 20m.
[..JRC] 8opan Radio Co., .lid. 3 - 11 6

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER)
----------------------------------
3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data
The overview of saved function setting data is as follows:
Factory-set data: : Saved data that general operation cannot change
Default data: : Standard data of each function mode that users can change
Data that can be : Saved data that can be called by pressing the [USER] key
called:
Procedures
1) Open the User Function Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 3. RADAR Menu
~ 1. Process Setting
~ 8. User Function Setting
FUNffiON SETTING FUNffiON SITTING FUNffiON SETTING

Factory-set data De fault data Data that ca n be called Curre nt data
5-[9 1-[1 FUNCl

Coast Coast [ USER]
Deepsea Deepsea
FUNC2 Present
~
FUNC3
Fishnet Rshnet
FUNC4
Storm Storm
Calm Calm
Rain Rain
-[8
Bird Bird
Long Long
Buoy Buoy
Userl Userl
User2 User2
page 1-[1] Mode

• Calls the default value of the mode, and saves it for the function number.
page 1-[6] Save Present State
• The currently operating state can be saved for the function number.
• Use this function to save the state of good setting that will be frequently used.
page 5-[8] Set Mode Default
• Saves the setting of the current function number, as the default setting of the
mode.
page 5-[9] Initialize
• Changes the memory contents of the mode, which is used with the current
function number, back to the factory setting.
3-117 [.JRC ) 8opan RacikJ Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.10 USE USER SETTING
----------------------------------
USE USER SETTING
The operation status of the radar is recorded. If the system is operated by more
than one operator, the operators can register operation status as suitable for them
and call the status. Operation status for up to five operations can be registered, and
a name can be assigned to each status. (Up to 10 alphanumeric characters)
Data saved by the user setting
Display Color Setting
Buzzer Volume
Option Key Setting
Date Display Style
EBLN RM Control CURS
Cursor Length
3.1 0.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting)

The system's current operating state can be saved in the system by performing the
operation below.
Procedures
1) Open the Save User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
~ 3. User Setting
~ 2. Save User Setting
The Save User Setting menu will appear .
2) Left-click the button for the file to be saved.
The file name input screen wi ll appear.
3) Enter a file name to be saved.
The Input File Name menu wi ll appear.
On the numeri c va lue inp ut screen, enter a fi le name.
After the file name has been entered, the operating conditions will be saved.
(.JRC I 8opan Radic Co., .lid. 3-118

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.10 USE USER SETIING
----------------------------------
3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting}
The operating state saved in the system can be loaded by performing the operation
below.
When the operating state is loaded, the previous operating state data is discarded.
Therefore, if you do not want to discard the operating state data, save the
operating state by performing the operation described in Section 3.1 0.1 "Save
Operating State (Save User Setting)".
Procedures
1) Open the Load User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
~ 3 . User Setting
~ 1. Load User Setting
The Load User Setting men u wi ll appear.
To load the fi le, left-click the 1. Yes button.
3.10.3 Delete Operating State (Delete User Setting}

The operating state saved in the system can be deleted by perfom1ing the
operati on below.
Use this function to delete unnecessary operating state data.
Procedures
1) Open the Delete User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
~ 3. User Setting
T he Delete User Setting menu wi ll appear.
2) Left-click the button for the file to be deleted.
Confirmation Window w ill appear.
To delete the file, left-click the 1. Ye s button.
3 - 119 [..JRC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > J.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
----------------------------------
USING CARD
This radar has two card slots. Inserting a fl ash memory ca rd (op tion) into a card
slot, you can save the following contents, saved in the processor, in the card or can
load data from the card to the processor.
Trails of own ship: 7000 points maximum
Track of other ship: 20 target X 500 points
Mark/Line: 20000 points maximum
WPT: 512 points maximum
Route: 1 route maximum
These pi eces of infonn ation can be saved in a flash memory card as a file. The
internal capacity is as large as o nly a file. An internally created fi le can be saved
until the flash memory card is fu ll.
3.11 .1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager)
Procedures
2) Set the radar in the standby state.
Whi le the radar is in the transmission stale, the File Manager screen cannot be opened.
3) Open the File Manager window by performing the menu

operation below.
Main
2. Rle Manager
(~RC J 8opan Radio Co., .i'Jd. 3-120

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 11 USING CARD
----------------------------------
The Fi le Manager window will appear.
Copy file from

Device 1 selected device 1 to device 2 Device 2 format Device 2
Type of file selected
displayed
Device 1 Device2
device type device type
Device 1 format
Device 2 file list
Device 1 saved scroll
information
Device 1
Device 1 saved
select and
information
cancel all files
Device 1 erase Device 2 erase

selected file selected file
Processor saved Device2

select and
information
cancel all files
Exit Device 1 fi le li st Copy file from Message
scroll device 2 to device 1
Information saved in the processor is displayed in the Memory Content.
Own Track : Number of data points for own ship's track (7000 points maximum)
Remain : Number of remaining data points of own ship's track that can be saved
Target Track : The number of other ships' trails (up to 20 targets)
Remain : The remaining number of other ships' trails to be saved
Mark/Line : Number of mark and line points made with user map (up to 20000 items)
Remain : Number of remaining data points of marks and lines that can be saved
WPT : Number of data points of created waypoints (512 points maximum)
Remain : Remaining waypoints that can be saved
Route : Number of data points of created routes (1 route maximum)
Remain : Remaining routes that can be saved
Internal Total : Total number of data points
• The file name and data saved in the selected device will be displayed.
• Pressing the arrows located at the upper right and lower right of the file name
list will scroll the list.
3-121 [.JRC ] 8apan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 11 USING CARD
----------------------------------
3.11.1.1 Copy Internal Information to Card (Copy Internal -> Card)
Procedures
1) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1
selection button.
Selected items for Device I wi ll be displayed.
2) Left-click the 1. Internal button among the selection items.
Internal is selected.
3) Left-click the device 2 selection button.
Selected items for Device2 wi ll be displayed.
4) Left-click button corresponding to the device to which data is to

be copied.
The list of files saved in the selected devi ce will be displayed.
5) Put the cursor on the data to be copied, and Left-click button.
6)
.
Left-click button one more time will cancel the selection .
Left-click the COPY button.
The character input screen for the Input File Name menu will appear.
Up to 10 characters can be entered.For the input method on the character input screen, see
After the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear.
The entered name is written into the selected device as a file name.
Up to the maximum number of items, described on the previous page, can be saved in the
device. With regard to the capacity for saving data, data can be saved on a flash memory card
as a file, and those files can be saved until the fl ash memory card is full.
I.JRC] gapanRadioCo.,J'Jd. 3-122

----------------------------- ---------------------~
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 1 USING CARD
----------------------------------
3.11.1.2 Load Information from Card to Internal Portion (Copy Card ->
Internal)
Procedures
selection button.
Selected items for Device I wi 11 be di splayed.
2) Left-click the 1. Int~ button among the selection items.
Selected items for Device2 will be di splayed.
4) Left-click button corresponding to the device in which data to be

loaded is saved.
The list of fi les saved in the se lected device will be displayed.
5) Select the desired data.
6) Left-click the .....

COPY button.
7) Left-click the 1. OveJWrite I button to overwrite data, or Left-click

the 2 . Add button to add new data.
When Overwrite is selected, interna lly saved data is de leted and new data is loaded. When
Add is selected, new data is added to the saved data.
8) Left-click the button.
The selected file is loaded into the system from the card.
When adding data saved on the card to the data saved in the system, data can be copied from
mu ltiple files. However, when the maximum number of units of data is reached, additiona l
data cannot be loaded . Even in the ADD mode, WPT data and Route data are overwritten.
3 - 123 [..JRC l ac;pan Radic Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
----------------------------------
3.11.1.3 Copy Information (Copy)
Procedures
selection button.
Selected items for Device! will be displayed.
2) Left-click the button corresponding to the device from which data

is to be copied.
The list of files saved in the selected device will be displayed.
Selected items for Device2 will be displayed.
4) Left-click button corresponding to the device to wh ich data is to

be copied.
6) Left-click the COPY

..... button.
The character input screen for the Input File Name menu will appear. lf there is a file having
the same name, the tile selection window will appear.
7) When deleting saved data and copying new data, left-click

1. Overwrite_j to select Overwrite. When adding data to a
destination f ile, left-click 2. Add to select Add. Even in the Add
mode, WPT data and Route data are overwritten. When selection
has been made, Confirmation Window will appear.
Up to lO characters can be entered. For the input method on the character input screen, see
Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character"
The entered name is written into the selected device as a tile name.
[.J RC ] dOf'0/1- Radio Co., Ltd. 3- 124

----------------------------------
3.11 .1.4 Erase File (Erase)
Procedures
l) While the File Manager window is open, left-click the device 1
selection button.
Selected items for Device I will be displayed.

erased is saved.
The list of files saved in the selected device wi ll be displayed.
3) Select data to be erased.
Left-click button one more time wi ll cancel the selection.
4) Left-click Erase button.
The selected file wi ll be erased.
3.11.1.5 Initializing a card (Format)
Procedures
selection button or the device 2 selection button.
Selection items for Device I or Device2 will appear.
2) Left-click the button which corresponds to the system (device)

where data to be displayed is saved.
The File Manager window will appear.
3) Put the cursor on Format for the device to be initialized, and

Left-click button.
Confm:nation Window wi ll appear.
Initializati on will be executed.
3-125 [~RC I 3opan Radio Co.,.ltd.

----------------------------------
3.11.1 .6 Showing data saved on the card (Show Card)
Procedures
selection button.
Selected items for Device I or Device2 will be displayed.

displayed is saved.
Exit
1) Left-click the 1. Exit button.
The File Manager menu will close.
(JRC I 3opan Radio Co.,..tid. 3-126

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETIING
----------------------------------
RECEIVE PORT SETTING
The system can receive data from other system via the JRC-LAN. The purpose of
JRC-LAN is interoperation with other JRC systems. The JRC systems are
synchronized with datum in JRC-LAN network.
NOTE: If the connection is not suggested from JRC office, don't connect PC or other
maker's system to JRC-LAN.
•connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower radar system performance.
•connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower t hat performance.
3.12.1 Receive Port Setting (RX Port)

Select ports for receiving signals from sensors.
There are two methods for receiving signals: specifying a port for each sensor, or using
the automatic recognition function without specifying ports.
Procedures
I ) Open the RX Port Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 6. NAV Equipment Setting
~ 6. RX Port
2) Set a port for each sensor.
Settable sensor signals

Heading , Speed, A IS, GPS, DLOG, Alarm, Depth, Temperature, Wind, Current, ROT, RSA, Time
Zone, Datemme
Selectable ports
When the automatic recognition AUTO
function is used:
When ports are specified: Ow~ LAN LAN (GPS) LAN (Ship's aock) J
Behavior pattern of selectable ports
AUTO J: Data from JRC-LAN is prior
ONn The system use data from sensor connected to the system directly.
LAN The system uses data from JRC-LAN.
LAN (GPS) The system uses GPS data from GPS (JRC-LAN connected).
LAN (Ship's Oock) The system uses ship's clock data from ship's clock (JRC-LAN
connected)
Setting of Section 7.2.11 .2 "Reception Port Setting (RX Port)" is prior. If you want to set this
menu, Section 7.2.11.2 "Reception Port Setting (RX Port)" menu set to User Setting .
3-127 I~RC I aopan Radio Co.,.i'id.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING
----------------------------------
[ ~RC l aopan Radio Co.,.ltd. 3- 128

SECTION 4
MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND
BEARING
II

4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS ..............................................................4-1
4.1.1 Using Cursor (Cursor) ....................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings) ................................................ 4-2
4.1.3 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL 1/EBL2) ................................ 4-3
4.1.4 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu) ............................................. 4-8
4.1.5 Operating EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver Setting) ....4-14
4.1.6 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor ...................................4-16
4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING .................................... 4-19
4.2.1 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor) ..............................4-19
Marker [EBL] [VRM] ..................................................................... 4-20
4.2.3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points ..................................... 4-21
[.JRC] 3apan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
The system is equipped with the navigation tools below.
Cursor: Specifies an arbitrary point, and measures the range and bearing
from the own ship.
Range Rings: Displays concentric circles with own ship's position as the center at
specified intervals, and the rings are used as rough guides for range
measurement.
Electronic Bearing Line Displays a straight line for specifying an arbitrary bearing, and
(EBL1/2): measures the bearing from the own ship.The process unit is
equipped with two electronic bearing lines.
Variable Range Marker Displays a circle for specifying an arbitrary range , and measures the
(VRM1/2) : range from the own ship.The process unit is equipped with two
variable range markers.
Parallel Index Line (PI): Displays straight lines at even intervals, and the lines are used as
rough guides for complex measurement or ship courses.
EBL Maneuver: Displays the course by steering the own ship, and it is used as a
rough guide for ship maneuvering.
Marker: Stores the latitude and longitude where the own ship was at the
point of storing the markers, and shows an anchor symbol on the
radar display. When the own ship has moved , the system displays
the range and bearing to the position.
EBL/VRM/PI Operation with Operates EBL, VRM , or PI on the radar display by using the cursor.
Cursor (Cursor AUTO):
Cursor bearing Cursor mode Cursor latitude

true I relative
Cursor range
EBL1 starting point mode
VRM1 range
VRM1 On I Off EBL2 starting point mode
EBL2 On I Off VRM2 range
VRM2 On I Off
Parallel index line
starting point mode
EBL2
numeric value indication Consistent Common
4- 1 [ ~RC ] gopan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
4.1.1 Using Cursor (Cursor)
Procedures
l) Move the cursor onto the PPI display by moving the trackball.
When the cursor is moved onto the PPI display, the arrow c ursor turns into a cross cursor.
4.1.2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings)
Procedures
1) Left-click the Ri ngs button on upper left area on the display.
Range rings display On I Off Range rings interval
The range ring display switches disappear and appear between display and non-display each
time the Rlngs button is clicked. The range ring interval is shown in the Rlngs
button.
The range between the target and own ship can be determined by visually measuring the
target's position that lies between two range rings.
For change of the brilliance of range rings, refer to Section 3.8.5 "Set Radar Display (Display
Setting)".
[JRC] 8opan Radio Co.,.l'ld. 4-2

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual> 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING> 4 .1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
4.1.3 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL 1/EBL2)
Electronic bearing lines (EBL) are indispensable to the measurement of bearings.
Operators must be familiar with the operation of EBL beforehand.
The system is equipped with two EBL. The bearing and starting point of an EBL
can be operated separately from the other EBL.
An intersection marker is displayed at the intersection point of the EBL and VRM
of the same number.
Intersection markers shown on EBL:
0: EBL 1, V RM 1
e : EBL2, VRM2
EBL2
VRM2
EBL1
VRM1
EBL Bearing Display
The bearing value of the current EBll J or EBL2 J on the PPI display is shown in the
The currently operable ~J or ....5!!!:lJ is highlighted in the upper right of the display.
Starting Point of EBL
The starting point of the currently operating EB L can be switched from the center of the
radar display to any offset position . The offset position of the EBL starting point can be
fixed on the radar display or at the latitude and longitude. (The setting of the navigator is
necessary for fixing the offset position at the latitude and longitude.)
4-3 [JRC] gopan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual> 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING> 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
4.1.3.1 Operating EBL (EBL)
Procedures
1) Press the [EBL 1] or [EBL2] key.
The EBL button (located at the upper right of the display) will be highlighted, and the
selected EBL becomes operable.
2) Turn the [EBL] dial.
To tum the [EBL] dial to the right, tum the EBL control clockwise; to tum the [EBL] dial to
the left, tum the EBL control counterclockwise.
Cancel
1) Press the [EBL 1] or [EBL2] key again.
4.1.3.2 Moving the Starting Point of EBL
The system provides three types of EBL starting points. Select one of them in
accordance with purpose.
: The EBL starting point is defined as the own ship's position.
c : The EBL starting point is moved and fixed on the radar display.
o : The EBL starting point is moved and fixed at the latitude and
longitude. (The navigator needs to be connected.)
[1] To move the starting point of EBL
Procedures
1) Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable.
2) Press the [EBL] dial to set cJ or _QJ for t he EBL 1 I EBL2

starting point mode switching located at the upper right of the
display.
The selected EBL starting point mode is switched as shown below each time the dial is
pressed.
=? cJ ==? o =?
3) Put t he cursor o n t he EBL starting point is to be moved, and left-

clic k.
The selected EBL starting point will be determined.
[~Rc ] 8opan.Radio Co.,J'id. 4-4

----------------------------------
[2] To return the EBL starting point to own ship's position
Procedures
1) Make EBL 1 or EBL2 operable.
2) Press the [EBL] dial to set _j for the EBL1 I EBL2 starting point
mode switching located at the upper right of the display.
The selected EBL starting point will be set as the own ship's position.
4.1 .3.3 Setting EBL Operation Mode

-------------------------------- -
[1] To set the numeric value display mode of EBL (EBL Bearing REF)
Determine whether to display EBL in true bearing mode or relative bearing mode.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the EBL1/2 numeric value indication true I
relative switching (located at the upper right of the display), and
left-click.
The selected mode is switched as shown below each time the left button is c licked.
Tj => R => ..!.J

_rj :EBL bearing is displayed in true bearing mode.
Rj :EBL bearing is displayed in relative bearing mode.
[2] To set a mode for fixing EBL display (EBL Bearing Fix)
When this function is set to Angle , an EBL is fixed to the preset bearing. For
example, if a true bearing of 020° is preset, the EBL is fixed to the true bearing
020° even when the own ship turns.
When the function is set to Screen , the EBL is fixed on the radar display. In this
case, the EBL is always fixed to the same bearing on the display when the own
ship turns.
4- 5 ["'RC l aapan Radio Co.,.i'id.

JMA·9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
Procedures
1) Open the EBL/Cursor Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
~ 9. EBL/Cursor Setting
2) Left-click at the item button

of 1. EBLl Bearing FIX or 2. EBL2 Bearing FIX
Angle :EBL bearing is fixed to the preset value.
Screen :EBL bearing is fixed on the radar display.
f7'\ Course data is necessary for turning on this

\.!) function.
Variable range markers (VRM) are indispensable to the measurement of ranges.

Operators must be familiar with the operation of VRM beforehand.
The system is equipped with two VRM. The VRM can be operated separatel y
from each other.
An intersection marker is di splayed at the intersection point of the VRM and EBL
of the same number.
When the starting point of an EBL is offset, the center of the VRM is defined as
the offset EBL starting point.
Intersection markers shown on VRM :
0 : EBL1 , VRM1
e : EBL2, VRM2
[.JRC ] 3opan Radio Co., .lid. 4-6

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4 .1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
... --"t ..........
'' '' EBL2
\ '
--- -- VRM2
EBL1 ,.._...···~·······..
: :
\ :
VRM1 ''---~··;;;.<.~......··
VRM Operation
The range value of the current VRMl or VRM2 on the PPI display is shown in the
VRM 1/2 range located at the upper right of the display. The currently operable VRM I or
VRM2 is highlighted in the VRMl VRM2 button located at the upper right of the
disp lay.
4.1.3.4 To operate VRM (VRM)
rocedures
1) Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key.
The VRMl and VRM2 buttons (located at the upper right of the display) will be
highlighted, and the selected VRM becomes operable.
2) Turn the [VRM] dial.
To tum the [VRM] dial to the right, the VRM control wide, to tum the (VRM] dial to the
left, the VRM control narrow.
fHtg§l
1) Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key again.
T he selected EBL display will disappear.
4-7 [..JRC ] 8opan. Radio Co.,.J.'td.

----------------------------------
4.1.4 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu)
Parallel index lines can be displayed.
4.1 .4.1 Operating Parallel Index Lines (PI)

- - - - ----- - -- - - -- - ---- - -- ---------
Procedures
1) Press the [VRM] dial.
Parallel index lines and the PI Menu will appear.
To change the bearing of parallel index lines, tum the [EBL] di al, to c hange the line interval,
tum the [VRM] dial.
The bearing and interval of parallel index lines are displayed in the PI Menu.
2) Press the [VRM] dial again.
The parallel index lines wi ll be fixed.
Parallel index lines are operable only while the PI Menu is

displayed. When the menu is closed, the parallel index line
display remains, but the settings of the bearing and interval
cannot be adjusted any more. To adjust the bearing and
interval after closing the menu, press the [VRM] dial twice to
open the PI Menu.
Cancel
The parallel index line display will disappear.
4.1 .4.2 Operation of Parallel Index Lines
• Parallel index lines rotate in the same direction as you turn the [EBL] dial. (CD,
@)
• The intervals of parallel index lines narrow when you turn the [VRM] dial
counterclockwise(®), and widen when you turn the [VRM] dial clockwise
(®).
• When the [VRM] dial is pressed, the PI Menu closes and the parallel index
lines are fixed.
[.JRC] 8apan.Radio Co.,.lt d. 4-8

JMA-91 00 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
---------- -------- ----------------

HL
During the operation of parallel index lines, pressing the [EBL l] or [EBL2] key
disables operation for rotation directions. Pressing the [VRM 1] or [VRM2] key
disables operation for parallel index line intervals.
4.1 .4.3 Settings in PI Menu (PI Menu)
The operation of parallel index lines can be set in the PI Menu.
Procedures
1) Left-click the PI button to open the PI menu.
[1] Display for All Lines
Sets the parallel index line display to on or off.
On :Parallel index lines are displayed.
Off :Parallel index lines are not displayed.
4-9 [ .JRC I 8opan Radio Co.,.lt d.

----------------------------------
[2] Operation Mode
Sets an operation mode for parallel index lines.
All Individual
Track Equiangular
All :All the parallel lines are operated at the same time.
Individual :The bearing of each line is operated individually.

Track :Equally spaced lateral lines are displayed on both sides.
Equiangular :Two lines intersecting at the center of a circle are displayed.
a. Operation if Individual is selected

• A line perpendjcular to the own srup and the intersection marker "----o " are
displayed on an operable line.
• Turning the [EBL] dial changes the direction.
• Pressing the [VRM] dial changes the range, end point I, or end point 2 to be
operated.
• An operable point is displayed with "• "and can be operated by turning the
[VRM] djal.
• If Sequential is selected for [3] Control, the parallel index lines of the next
number can be displayed by pressing the [EBL] dial.
• To close the menu, left click O.Exit software button.
b. Operation if Equiangular is selected

• Select a group of lines to be operated according to the setting of [3] Control.
• Pressing the [EBL] dial switches between the direction change mode and
elevation-angle change mode. Turning the [EBL] dial changes the direction or
elevation angle.
4-10
----------------------------------
(3] Control
Determines whether to operate all the lines at the same time. The setting items are
determined by the setting of Section [2] "Operation Mode".
a. If All I is selected
The setting cannot be changed.
All :All the lines are operated at the same time.
b. If Individual is selected
Determine whether to set consecutive lines or individual lines.
Sequential :Lines are operated sequentially.
Index Linel to Line8 :A specified line is operated.
c. If Trackj or Equiangular is selected
Select a group of lines to be operated.
Groupl to Group4 :A specified group is operated.
(4] Floating
Moves the center point of parallel index lines.
Off J :The starting point of parallel index lines is defined as

the own ship's position .
Screen Fix :The center of parallel index lines is moved and fixed on
the radar display.
L/L Fix :The center of parallel index lines is moved and fixed at
the latitude and longitude. (The navigator needs to be
connected.}
(5] Heading Link
Determines whether to operate parallel index lines following the heading bearing.
On :Parallel index lines are operated following the heading

bearing .
Off :Parallel index lines are not operated following the

heading bearing .
4-11 [ .JRC I dOfXi'J Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
(6] Next
Moves to the next page.
[7] Range Scale Link
Determines the operation of parallel index line intervals when the range is
changed.
On :The intervals are fixed with the actual range (nm). The
appearance of parallel index line intervals changes
when the range is changed.
Off :The intervals are fixed with the display range. The
parallel index line intervals (nm) change when the
range is changed.
[8] Reference Bearing
Sets a reference bearing for the numeric data display of parallel index lines. The
setting items are determined by the setting of Section [2] "Operation Mode"
a. If All is selected
True :Displayed with true bearing (with North as reference).
HL :Displayed with the heading line as reference.
True :Displayed with true bearing (with North as

reference).
Index Unel to Une8 :Displayed with a specified line as reference.
I.JRC] 8opan Radic Co.,.ltd. 4 - 12

----------------------------------
c. If Track is selected
True : Displayed with true bearing (with North as

referen ce).
HL : Displayed with the heading line as reference.
Index Linel to LineS : Displayed with a specified line as reference.
Line1 , Line3, Line5 and ¢:>

Linel Groupl
Line? correspond to
Line3 ¢:> Group2
Group1 , Group2, Group3
and Group4, respectively. LineS ¢:> Group3
Line7 ¢:>
d . If Equiangular is selected
[9] Operation Area
If All is selected for Section [2] "Operation Mode" , this function sets an area for
displaying parallel index lines.
One Side :Parallel index lines are displayed only on one side.
Both Side :Parallel index lines are displayed on both sides.
[1 O]Display for Individual Line
Determines whether to tum on I off the parallel index line display of a selected
number.
On :The line of the selected number is displayed.
Off :The line of the selected number is not displayed .
If All is selected for Section [2] "Operation Mode", the

line near the own ship is Index unel .
If Track or Equiangular is selected ¢:>

Linel Groupl
for Section [2] "Operation Mode",
Line3 ¢:> Group2
Line1 , Line3 , Line5 and Line?
LineS ¢:> Group3
correspond to Group1 , Group2 ,
Line7 ¢:> Group4
Group3 and Group4, respectively.
4-13 [.JRC ] f)apan Radio Co.,.ltd.

----------------------------------
4.1.5 Operating EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver Setting)
Procedures
l) Open the EBL Maneuver Setting menu by performing the
Main
~ 1. EBL Maneuver Setting
2) Set the following parameters.
Reach :Set the range from when the rudder is steered to when
the ship beings to turn.
ITum Mode I :Select a turn mode.

Radius :Turning radius (NM)
Rate :Rate of turn (deg/min)
ITum Set :Select the setting for turning.
If Radius is selected :Turning radius (NM)
lf Rate is selected :Rate of turn (deg/min)
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value,
Latitude I Longitude and Character Input menu".
A wrong initial setting affects the maneuver curve function

explained below.
[ J RC ) 8opan Radio Co., .lid. 4-14

----------------------------------
4.1.5.2 Creation of Maneuver Curve (EBL Maneuver)
- - -- -- - - - -- -- -- -- - - ---- - ------ ---
Procedures
1) Left-click the item button of 1. EBL Maneuver while the EBL
Maneuver Setting menu is open.
The EBL maneuver function w ill be set to on or off.
A auxi liary line for mane uver c urve creat ion, a maneuver curve, and a WOL will appear on
the radar display.
2) Put the cursor on the starting point of the auxiliary line, and set
the bearing of the auxiliary line by operating the [EBL] dial.
T he beari ng of the auxili ary line is the fi nal beari ng in whi ch the own ship is to move.
T he WOL posit ion varies depending on the bearing of the aux iliary line.
If th e WOL is behind the CCRP, the line color of WOL w ill change.
3) Left-click.
The setting will be detem1ined. However, if the WOL is behind the CCRP position at th is
poi nt, left-c licking is rejected, and the setti ng is no t determ ined.
Auxiliary line
WOL Steering point

Reach Range from when the rudder
Own ship' s position is steered to when the ship
begins to tum
Radius Tuming radius
4 - 15 I"RC I f)opan Radio Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
4.1.6 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor
When the cursor mode is set to AUTO (located at the upper right of the
display), EBL, VRM, and PI can be operated simply by using the trackball.
4.1.6.1 Operating Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)

---------------------------------
Procedures
I) Put the cursor on EBL 1 or EBL2, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved to it, [EBLi-1 or [E:Eli2-I is shown at the upper right of the
cursor. The EBL becomes operable when left-clicking.
2) Move the cursor to the bearing to be set.
The EBL will move as the cursor moves.
3) Left-click.
The EB L will be fiKed.
4.1.6.2 Operating Variable Range Marker (VRM)

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ·- - - - - - - - -- - - - -
Procedures
I) Put the cursor on VRM1 or VRM2, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved to it, ~· VRM1"] or i-VR.M2J is shown at the upper right of
the cursor. The VRM becomes operable when lett-clicking.
2) Move the cursor to the range to be set.
The VRM will move as the cursor moves.
3) Left-click.
The VRM will be fixed.
j.JRC) f}apanRadioCo .. .lfd. 4-16

----------------------------------
Procedures
I) Put the cursor on the intersection marker ( o or • ), and left-
click.
When the cursor is moved to it, CEBCC] !'iiRMtJ or \EBC2:] i'iiRM2-J is
shown at the upper right of the cursor. The EBL and VRM become operable when left-
clicking.
2) Move the cursor to the bearing I range to be set
The EBL and VRM will move as the cursor moves.
3) Left-click.
The EBL and VRM will be fixed.
4.1.6.4 Operating Parallel Index Lines (PI)

---------------------------------
[1] To change the direction of parallel index lines
Procedures
I) Put the cursor on near the center of line, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved there, it will tum into©- and II'T-] will be displayed at
the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when left-clicking.
2) Move the cursor to the direction to be set
The parallel index lines will change the direction as the cursor moves.
3) Left-click.
The parallel index lines will be fixed.
4-17
----------------------------------
[2] To change parallel index line intervals
Procedures
I) Put the cursor on near the end of line, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved there, it will tum into - and ~--PI -] will be displayed at
2) Move the cursor to the interval to be set.
The parallel index lines interval will change as the cursor moves.
If Individual is selected for Operation Mode, the parallel index lines move.
3) Left-click.
[3] To change the end points of parallel index lines
If Individual is selected for Operation Mode, the length of parallel index lines can
be changed.
Procedures
I) Put the cursor on the end point of parallel index lines, and left-
click.
When the cursor is moved there, it will tum into - and CPC.. J will be displayed at
the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when letl-clicking.
2) Move the cursor to the position to be set.
The position of the end point will change as the cursor moves.
3) Left-click.
[.JRC) f)apan.Rr.idkJ Co., .lid. 4-18

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
----------------------------------
BEARING
Target position on the RADAR screen
RADAR antenna transmits pulses of radio waves. The object returns the wave
(radar echo) to the antenna. So on the RADAR screen the leading edge of echo is
the actual target position. The length of echo is dependent on the transmitted pulse
length.
Point the cursor to the leading edge of echo to measure the target range or to make
a mark on the target.
Pulse of radio wave
RADAR echo
-]
Fig 4-1 : Transmitting-Receiving of RADAR
C:>
Pulse length
Target range
270~------------------~----~---------------L 90
Own ship's position
Fig 4-2: Relation of echo, target range and pulse length
4-19 i..JRcl f}oponRadi.o Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
4.2.1 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor)
Procedures
I) Make sure of the target echoes on the radar display.
2) Move the cursor to the target.
The bearing and range of the target will be shown in the Cursor bearing I range located at the
upper right of the display. The range is a distance from the own ship's position.
Cursor
Target
270
Own ship's position

Bearing and range from the
own ship's position to target in this figure:
True bearing 45.0 •
Range 6.00 NM
180
4.2.1.1 To set a cursor bearing numeric value mode
Determine whether to display a cursor bearing in true or relative bearing mode.
Procedures
I) Put the cursor on the Cursor bearing numeric value indication
true I relative switching (located at the upper right of the display),
and left-click.
The selected mode is switched as shown below each time left-clicking.

IT.J=>~=>ill
ill :Cursor bearing is displayed in true bearing mode.
ffiJ :Cursor bearing is displayed in relative bearing mode.
4.2.2 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable

Range Marker [EBL] [VRM]
\.JRC) f)apan.Radio Co., .lid. 4-20

JMA·9100 Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
----------------------------------
Procedures
1) Press the [EBL 1] key.
EBLl numeric value indication
The CEBLT] (located at the upper true I relative switching EBLl ~djustmer1t
right of the display) will be

highlighted, and EBL 1 will be
shown with a dotted line on the PPI
display.
2) Move the EBL 1 to the

target by turning the [EBL]
dial. VRMl adjustment EBLl starting point
mode switching
The EBLl bearing will be shown in
the EBLI bearing (located at the
upper right of the display). The EBLI bearing is the bearing of the target.
3) Press the [VRM1] key.
The [VRM(] (located at the upper right of the display) will be highlighted, and VRMl
will be shown with a dotted line on the PPl display.
4) Move the VRM1 to the target by turning the [VRM] dial.
The range ofVRMl from the own ship's position will be shown in the VRMl range located
at the upper right of the display.
0
EBL 1
I
,,'
I
I
I
270 I 90
I
I
\ f.--f---VRM1
\ ONn ship's position 1
'' ,
' ........... _... ,""',
----- Bearing and range from the
own ship' s position to target in this figure:
True bearing 45.0 o
Range 5.00 NM
180
4.2.3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points

Procedures
I) Press the [EBL2] key.
4-21 jJRcl 8opanl«uuiD Co.,J'Id.

----------------------------------
The EBL2 (located at the upper right of the display) wi ll be highlighted, and EBL2
will be shown on the PPI display.
2) Press the [EBL] dial to select C for the EBL2 starting point mode
switching located at the upper right of the display.
3) Put the cursor on the point A of the two points between which
measurement is made, and left-click.
Refer to the figure below.
4) Move the EBL2 to the other point B by turning the [EBL] dial.
When VRM2 is selected, • (intersection marker) will appear on the dotted line of EBL2.
6) Move the intersection marker on the dotted line to point B by

turning the [VRM] dial.
The range and bearing between the two points will be shown in the VRM2 range and EBL2
bearing (located at the upper right of display).
EBL2
270 90
Bearing and range between points

A and 8 in this figure:
Range 6.00 NM
180
Similarly, EBLl can also be used for measuring the bearing and range between
two points. In this case, perform the above procedure reading EBL2 as EBL 1 and
VRM2 as VRMl .
4 - 22
SECTION 5
OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING
AND AIS
11
1'11 11 ' 1111 111
I I
I I

5.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................5·1
5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols ................................................................... 5-5
5.1.3 Radar Display ..................................................................................5·9
5.1 .4 Cursor Modes (Cursor} ................................................................. 5-11
5.1.6 Setting Vectors (Vector Time} ......................................................5-14
5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION ..................... ................................ 5-15
5.2.6 Reference Target (Reference) ...................................................... 5-21
5.3 AIS OPERATION .................................................................................. 5-27
[.JRC l aopan Radio Co.,.lid.

5.3.1 Restrictions .................. .................................................................. 5-27
5.3.3 Activate AIS Targets (Activate AIS) ............................................. 5-28
5.3.4 Deactivate AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS) ..................................... 5-28
5.3.9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm {AIS Alarm Setting) ............... 5-37
5.4.1 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical (Association) 5-
38
Identical (Association Setting) 5-38
5.5 ALARM DISPLAY ................................................................................. 5-40
5.5.1 CPA I TCPA Alarm ......................................................................... 5-41
(New Target) 5-42
5.5.3 Lost Target Alarm (Lost) ............................................... ................ 5-42
5.5.4 Gyro Set Alarm .............................................................................. 5-43
5.6 TRACK FUNCTION ................................................................. ............. 5-44
5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING {Trial Maneuver) .......................... 5-54
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 51 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
PREPARATION
. - - - - - -- -- - Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ---,
• There are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and target
tracking functions.
(I] Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic target
tracking
Depending on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between adjacent
targets during automatic target tracking usually ranges somewhere between 0.03 to
0.05 NM. If multiple targets approach each other, resolution will become about 0.05 NM
and this may cause the system to regard them as one target and thus to swap them or
lose part of them. Such swapping or less of targets may also occur if the picture of the
target being tracked is affected by rain/snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns or
moves very close to land.
(II] Intensity of echoes and the target tracking function
The intensity of echoes and the tracking function have a correlationship, and thus the
target will be lost if no echoes are detected during six scans in succession . If a lost
target exists, therefore, radar gain must be increased to support detection of the target.
If, however, radar gain is increased too significantly, sea clutter returns or other noise
may be erroneously detected and tracked as a target, and resultingly, a fa lse alarm
may be issued.
(III)Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking
To execute accurate tracking, it becomes necessary first to appropriately

adjust the [GAIN], [SEA] and [RAIN] dials of the radar so that the target
to be acquired and tracked id clearly displayed on the radar display.
Inappropriate settings of these adjustments reduce the reliability I
accuracy of automatic tracking .
This section explains the features of the target tracking and AIS functions, and the
initia l setting for using each function .
Target Tracking Function
The target tracking function calculates the course and speed of a target by
automatically tracking the target's move.
The target tracking function enables the automatic acquisition of targets by using
the automatic acquisition zone function.
The target tracking function also enables the simulation of the ship mane uvering
method to avoid collisions by using the trial maneuver function.
5-1 [..JRC] 8apan. Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
If the mode is ground stabilization, SOG/COG used for own ship's information in
target tracking. If the mode is sea stabilization , SPD (speed through the water) I
HOG (heading) used for own shjp's information in target tracking.
AIS (Automatic Identification System) function
The AIS function shows the target ' s information on the radar display, using
other ship's infom1ation sent out from the AIS unit.
5.1.1 Collision Avoidance
5.1 .1.1 Problems of Collision Avoidance in Navigation

Marine collision avoidance is one of the problems that have been recognized from
of old. Now, it will be described briefly who the collision avoi dance is positioned
among the navigational aid problems.
The navigation pattern of all mobile craft constitutes a system with some closed
loops regardless of the media through which the mobile craft travels, whether air,
water, the boundary between air and water, or space. Thi s pattern consists of two
closed loops in principle, one of which is a collision with another mobile craft and
the other is a loop of finding a right and safe way to reach a predeterrninate
destination. Fig. 5- 1 shows the conceptual diagram of navigation pattern by MR.
E.W. Anderson. The closed loop of co ll ision avoidance is shown on the left side
and the closed loop of finding a right course on the right side.
Collision avoidance Destination Decision of cource

Fixing by radio wave ,
+ visual and celestial
observation
T raffle rule Course Guide loop
Vessel ' s Spacing loop
Caluculati
Dead
on
+ reckoning I
Visual and radio Cource and Compass
watch speed and log
Cllision
avoidance loop
+ lnsrument or
__., Maneuver
Judgement 1--
judgement
Control
t +
loop
Ship traveling in controlled condition
Fig 5-1 : Navigation Pattern
[.JRC] 8opan Radio Co.,.lid. 5- 2

----------------------------------
----------------------------------
5.1.1.2 Marine Accidents and Collisions
Among marine accidents, collision accidents have been highlighted as the
tonnages and speeds of ships become higher along with the increase in traffic at
sea. If a tanker carrying dangerous articles such as crude oil collides with any
other vessel, then not onl y the vessels involved with the accident but other vessels
in the vicinity, port facilities, inhabitants in the coastal area as well as marine
resources may also suffer immeasurable damages and troubles. Collision
accidents have a high percentage of the marine accidents that have occurred in
recent years. To cope with these problems, any effective measures are needed and
some equipment to achieve collision avoidance requirements have been developed
at rapid strides.
5.1.1.3 Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance

There are two aspects in collision avoidance: collision prediction and avoidance.
Collision prediction is to predict that two or more vessels will happen to occupy
the same point at the same time, while collision avoidance is to maneuver vessels
not to occupy the same point at the same time.
In practical operation of vessels, a spot of collision has to be deemed to be a single

point but a closed zone. This closed zone is conceptually defined as a CPA
(C losest Point of Approach). In col li sion prediction, the time to be taken until a
ship reaches the CPA is defined as a TCPA (Time to CPA).
Fig. 5-2 shows a diagram caked "Collision Triangle".

Target Vessel True Vector
Target vessel
Relative Vector
I
I
\ I
\ I
CPA ring
'' ' /
I
' ............ .... __ __, , ... "

.1'
/
Fig 5-2: Collision Triangle
5- 3 I~RC ] dopan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
5.1.1 .4 Relative Vector and True Vector
From two points of view, collision prediction and avoidance, it is necessary to
obtain the relative vector of other ship for prediction and the true vector of other
ship for collision avoidance in order to grasp other ship ' s aspect. The
relationship between the relative vector and true vector is shown in Fig. 5-3.
Both rough CPA and TCPA can be obtained easi ly from the relative speed vector
of other ship. This method has an advantage that the risks of colli sion with all
other ships within the radar range can be seen at a glance. On the other hand, the
course and speed of other ship can easily be obtained from its true speed vector,
enabling other ship ' s aspect to be seen at a glance. Thus, the aspects of other
ships (transverse, outsail, parallel run, reverse run, etc. ) as described in the act of
prevention of collision at sea can be readily grasped. If there is a ri sk of co llision
with other ship, the operator can determine which rule to be applied and how to
operate own ship.
N
Target ship true vector

V0 : Own ship's speed
N 0 0 : Own ship's course
Vr : Other ship's true speed
Or: Target ship's true course
VR: Target ship's relative speed
OR: Target ship's relative course
OA: Aspect
Relative vector
Fig 5-3: Relative Vector and True vector
5.1.1.5 Radar and Collision Avoidance

Radar is still playing an important roll for collision prevention and positioning.
A plotter is used to further enhance the radar functionality. The plotter is capable
of plotting other positions of other ships in 3 to 6 minute intervals to monitor their
movement. The plots of other ships represent their tracks relative to own ship, and
it is shown whether there is a risk of collision, namely CPA and TCPA can be
obta ined. This method using a plotter is fairly effective, but the number of target
ship, which is manually plotted, is limited and it takes several minutes to measure
those.
[.JRC] 8apan.Radi.o Co., .fld. 5- 4

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5 1 PREPARATIO N
----------------------------------
5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols
5.1.2.1 Types and Definitions of Target Tracking Symbols
Vector/ Definition Remarks

Symbol
Initial acquisition This symbol is displayed until the vector is
target displayed after target acquisition.
.... , Target acquired in The alarm sounds .

I I automatic
- 12 acquisition zone The alarm message (New Target) turns red and
blinks.The symbol is red colored.
G---
12
Tracked target
Dangerous target The alarm sounds.

G--- 12 The alarm message (CPNTCPA) turns red and
blinks.T he symbol turns red and enlarges.
r , Numeric When the numeric data is displayed , the target

G--- displayed target symbol is enclosed in a square.
L ..J 12
Lost target The alarm sounds.
The alarm message (Lost) turns red and

blinks.The symbol turns red, and indicates with
X mark.
, Past position The past positions of an AIS target are displayed
I
0 12 as well as the target tracking symbol.
•
• • •
, Target track The track of another ship as an AIS target is
I
0 12 displayed as well as the target tracking symbol.
____...··
5- 5 [.JRC ] 8opon RadicJ Co., .ltd.

JMA-91 00 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
5.1 .2.2 Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols

Symbol
Sleeping target This symbol is displayed when received data is
<1 valid.The direction of the triangle's vertex
indicates the target's bow or course.
Activated target The heading direction is displayed with a solid
line, and the course vector is displayed with a
dotted line. The line perpendicular to the
heading direction indicates the direction to
which the course is to be changed. This line
may not be displayed.
Target acquired in The alarm sounds.
automatic
acquisition zone The alarm message (New Target) turns red
and blinks.
Outline display The outlines of ships are displayed scaled
~12
down.
Numeric displayed When the numeric data is displayed , the target
r<f:'
L .J AIS12
target
Dangerous target
symbol is enclosed in a square.
The alarm sounds.
~2 Lost target
The alarm message (CPNTCPA) turns red
and blinks.The symbol turns red and enlarges.
The alarm sounds.
i:., The symbol turns red , and indicates with X

mark.
Sleeping AIS-SART The AIS-SART symbol is colored as well as
® target AIS target symbol
Activated The target number displayed beside the

® AIS12 AIS-SART target
symbol.
Numeric displayed When the numeric data is displayed , the target

fA?\1 AIS-SART target symbol is enclosed in a square.
~ AIS12
Lost AIS-SART When the data of an AIS-SART target cannot

~ AIS12
target be received for 6 minutes, the lost target is
displayed.
NOTE: For details about AIS-SART, refer to Section 6.6 "DISPLAY OF AIS-
SART".
AIS-SART function is available in the display software ver. 01 .01 .

As for method of confirming software version , refer to Section 8.3.1.6
"System Information".
(.JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.l'ld. 5-6

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 51 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
• Up to 300 targets can be displayed in total of activated and sleeping AIS
targets. Up to 100 activated AIS targets can be included in the total.
• lf there are more AIS targets than the allowable maximum, they are displayed
in the following priority order:
1. Numeric displayed target

2. Target of which CPA I TCPA is lower than the set
value(Target as a dangerous ship for which an alarm
has occurred)
3. Target in automatic activation zone
4. Activated AIS target
5. Target inside AIS filter
6. Target outside AIS filter
• If the number of targets at the same priority level exceeds the allowable
maximum, they are displayed in the following priority order:
1. Association target
3. Sleeping AIS target
The vector of an AJS target is to be displayed with a vector over ground or over
water, depending on the speed sensor setting and current offset setting. The type
of the currently displayed vector can be confi rmed by viewing the setting of the
stable mode.
When GND is displayed for Vector over ground

the stability mode (Upper left of
the display on page 2-3):
When Sea is displayed for Vector over water

When the vector of an AIS target is displayed with a vector over water, the system
has converted the AIS target's vector over ground to the vector over water
according to the data received from the AJS and the own ship's information.
When the AIS target's symbol is activated but the vector is not
NOTE: displayed, the following are probable causes of the trouble:
• COG/SOG is not yet input from the GPS.

• The selected speed sensor is malfunctioning.
5-7 [.JRC I aopan. Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 51 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
5.1 .2.3 Types and Definitions of Association Target Symbols
When a tracked target and an AIS target are decided as identical, it is displayed
with either of the fo llowing symbols:

Symbol
Priority for tracked target

@
Association target
Priority for AIS target

@ Association target
a. Setting of Tracked Target Symbol Display
This functi on switches the tracking target symbol display between on and
off.Even if the tracking target symbol display is turned off, the data is retained.
Procedures
I) Left-click the 0 button in the Target Information located at the
T he tracking target symbol display will be set to on or off.
b. Setting of AIS Target Symbol Display
This function switches the A fS target symbol display between on and off.
Procedures
I) Left-click the q' button in the Target Information located at the
T he A IS target symbol display wi ll be set to on or off.
[.J RC ] gapan. Radio Co.,.lid. 5-8

JMA-9100 lnstrvction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 51 PREPARATION
----- -----------------------------
5.1 .3 Radar Display
5.1.3.1 Vector Display

A vector to represent a target ' s predicted position can be presented in the True
vector or Relative vector mode. In each mode, a vector length can be free ly
changed for a time interval of 1 to 60 minutes.
To switch between the true vector mode and relative vector mode, press the [TIR
VECT] key.
5.1.3.2 Vector Mode Selection

[1] True Vector Mode
ln the true vector mode, the direction of a target vector indicates the true course of
the target and its vector length is proportional to its speed.
In this mode, own ship's vector is displayed as shown Fig 5-4.
In this mode, the movements of other ships aroWld own ship can be accurately and
easily monitored.
However, CPA Ring cannot appear in this mode.
Own ship' s position
True vector
The relative vector is

not displayed
Fig 5-4: True Vector
[2] Relative Vector Mode
The re lative vector does not represent the true motion of the target, but its relative
relation with own ship. This means that a target with its relative vector directed to
own ship (passing through the CPA Limit ring) wi ll be a dangerous target. In the
Relative Vector mode, it can be seen at a glance where the CPA Limit of the
dangerous target is.
5-9 ["'Rc] 8opan.Radio Co.,.ltd.

----------------------------------
Therefore, the True I Relative mode shall optionally be used for the purpose of
observation: the True vector mode for grasping the true aspect of a target, and the
Relative vector mode for grasping a target' s closest point of approach (CPA).
The true vector is

not displayed
CPA ring
Relative vector
Fig 5-5: Relative Vector
5.1.3.3 Vector Length (Vector Time)

The vector length of a target is proportional to its speed, and the vector time can
be switched in a range of I to 60 minutes.
The diagram below illustrates a vector length of a target for 6 minutes, and the tip
of the vector represents the target's position expected to reach 6 minutes later.
Future predicted position

(6 min later in this example)
Current position
Fig 5-6: Vector Length
Refer to Section 5.1.6 "Setting Vectors (Vector Time)".
5 - 10
- - - - - · - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND A IS > 5.1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
5.1.4 Cursor Modes (Cursor)
5.1.4.1 Types and Functions of Cursor Modes
The types of cursor modes are listed in the table below. To use the function of a
cursor mode, move the cursor onto the PPI object and left-click.
Mode Function
ACQ TT Enables the target tracking function to acquire a target in manual

mode.
ACT AIS Activates AIS targets, and sets a point filter.
TGT Data Displays the numeric data of a tracking target or AIS target.
CNCL TT Cancels a tracking target.
DEACT AIS Deactivates AIS target.
Data CNCL Hides the displayed numeric data of a tracked target or AIS target.
Mark Puts a temporary mark.
Property Displays the information of tracked targets, AIS targets, and marks.
AUTO Changes operation in accordance with the object at the cursor

position.
5.1 .4.2 Change of Cursor Mode
Procedures
I) Left-click the Cursor button located at the upper right of the
display. Alternatively, on the PPI, right-click and select a desired
cursor mode from the list.
The selected cursor mode will be shown at the cursor mode (Upper right of the display on
page 2-4).
("';'\ If the function of a selected cursor mode is not used for one
\!I minute or more, the cursor mode is automatically changed to
AUTO .
5-11 [ .JRC I aapan Radio Co., J'ld.

----------------------------------
5.1 .4.3 Operation of AUTO Mode
As shown below, the AUTO mode performs operation in accordance with the
object at the cursor position when left-clicked.
The AUTO mode permits to access that you want by intuitive operation.
Object at Cursor Position Operation
None Acquires a target.
EBL EBL operation.
VRM V RM operation.
Intersection point of EBL Performs EBL operation and VRM operation at

and VRM the same time.
Parallel index line Operates the parallel index line.
Tracked target Displays the numeric data of the tracked target.
Tracked target with Hides the numeric data.

numeric data displayed
Sleeping AIS target Activates the AIS target.
Activated AIS target Displays the AIS target information.
AIS target with numeric Hides the AIS target information.

data displayed
Automatic acquisition I Operates the automatic acquisition I activation

activation zone zone.
AIS filter Operates the AIS filter zone.
[.JRC] gopan Radio Co., .lid. 5 - 12

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
--------------------------------- -
5.1.5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria
.---- - Attention - - - - -- - - -- -- - - ---,
• Set the optimum values of collision decision

conditions, depending upon vessel type, water area,
weather and oceanographic conditions. (For the
relations between those conditions and alarms, refer
to Section 5.5 "ALARM DISPLAY". )
5.1.5.1 Input of CPA Limit
Procedures
1) Left-click the CPA limit setting button in the Target Informat ion
located at the upper right of the display.
The C PA Limit value input screen will appear.
2) Enter the value to be set as a CPA limit.
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operatio n on N umeric Va lue,
5.1.5.2 Input of TCPA Limit
rocedures
1) Left-click the TCPA limit setting button in t he Target Information
The TC PA Limit value input screen will appear.
2) Enter the value to be set as a TCPA limit.
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operati on on Nu me ric Value,
Latitude I Longitude and Character lnput menu".
5.1.5.3 Setting CPA Ring (CPA Ring)

While the distance of the specified CPA Limit va lue is used as the radius, the CPA
ring is displayed with a red circle.
rocedures
1) Left-click the CPA Ring button located at the lower right of the
display.
The C PA ring wi ll be displayed.
The CPA ring is not displayed when the true vector mode is
NOTE: selected.
5-13 [.JRC) 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5 1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
5.1.6 Setting Vectors (Vector Time)
Vector time can be set in minutes in the range 1 to 60 min.
A true vector mode or relative vector mode can be selected.
5.1 .6.1 Setting vector time on the display (Vector)
Procedures
I) left-click the target vector time setting button in the Target
Information located at the lower right of the display.
The Vector Time val ue input screen will appear.
2) Enter the value to be set as vector time.
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on umeric Value,
5.1 .6.2 Setting vector mode (T/R VECT]
Procedures
I) Press the (T/R VECT] key.
The current vector mode T (true vector) or R (relative vector) will be displayed in the
target vector display true I relative switching in Target lnfonnation located at the upper right
of the display.
5.1.7 Setting the GPS antenna location

Set the GPS antenna location. Set offset ranges in longitudinal direction and
latitudinal direction from the own ship's reference position.
For the setting procedure, refer to Section 7. 1.9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP
Setting)".
Attention - - - - - - - - - -- - -----,
• If offset ranges are not set correctly, AIS symbols

and radar echoes may be displayed shifted.
• When offset ranges are set, latitude and longitude
data received from the GPS is offset, and the offset
data is displayed as the latitude and longitude of
own ship' s position.
(JRC] 8apan RadicJ Co., .ltd. 5-14

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
---------------- ---- --------------

TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
This section explains how to use the target tracki~g function.
The target tracking function automatically tracks a target, and displays the target's
course and speed as vectors. The target tracking function calculates CPA and
TCPA, and issues an alarm as needed.
The tracking data is erased from memory when the power is turned off or during
transmission standby.
5.2.1 Acquiring Target [ACQ]

Target acquisition can be performed on two modes, Automatic and Manual, and
both modes can be used at the same time.
5.2.1 .1 Automatic acquisition

If the number of targets being tracked has reached the
NOTE: allowable maximum and other targets (not being tracked) go
into the acquisition/activation zone, automatically acquired
targets are canceled in ascending order of danger.
The position of the scanner shall be at the centre of the azimuth

or range in the acquisition/activation zone.
[1] Turning On I Off the automatic acquisition and AIS activation (AZ Menu)
Procedures
1) Open the AZ menu by following menu operations.
AZ
The AZ Menu will appear.
2) Left-click the item button of 1. AZl or 2. AZ2
The acquisition I activation zone I (AZ I) or acqu isition I activation zone 2 (AZ2) wil l be set
to on or off.
:The acquisition I activation zone is turned on. The mark

On
0 " and target ID number are put to an acquired target and
move with the target. The vectors are displayed within 1
minute. AIS targets are activated.
:The acquisition/activation zone is turned off. The

Off
acquisition/activation zone will disappear from the radar
display, but the system continues to track the acquired
target. The activated AIS targets remain activate.
5 - 15 ['-'RC) 8 opan.Radio Co.,.fid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.0 PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 52 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
[2] Creating the automatic acquisition and AIS activation Zone (Make AZ)
Procedures
AZ
The AZ Menu wi ll appear.
2) Left-click the item button of 3 · Make All or 4. Make AZ2
The range setting of the acq uisition I activat ion zone I {AZ I) or acquisition I activati on zone
2 (AZ2) wi ll be started.
3) Set the starting azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
[VRM] dial, and left-click.
4) Set the ending azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
The acquisition I acti vation zone wi ll be dete rmined.
5.2.1 .2 Manual Acquisition [ACQ MANUAL]

If more targets are acquired manually in the condition that the
NOTE: maximum number of targets are under tracking , the targets
cannot acquired.
Procedures
l ) Move the cursor onto the target to be acquired , and press the
[ACQ MANUAL] key.
The target wi ll be acq uired and the initial acq uisition symbol will be displayed.
The vector will be di splayed within one minute.

() .._____ _ Target manually acquired
The initial acquis1tron symbol IS displayed
K
G- - - •4- -
Target that has passed for 1 min
The acquisition symbol and vector are displayed
To perform operation only in the manual acquisition mode without autom atic acquisition/
acti vation, tum off the automatic acquisition/activation function .
[.JRcl dopon Radio Co.,..li d. 5 - 16

----------------------------------
[1] Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes
Use the manual acquisition mode while the automatic acquisition mode is on.
Manually acquire the target to which particular attention shou ld be paid, and get
the other targets automatically acquired. If a new target appears exceeding the
maximum number of targets, the manually acqu ired target is displayed even in the
background until it gets out of the display. However, automatically acquired
targets are canceled starting far distance from own ship.
5.2.2 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets [ACQ CANCEL]

Unwanted tracked targets can be canceled one by one in the following cases:
• Tracking is no longer necessary for targets with which vectors/symbols are

displayed after being acquired and tracked.
• The number of vectors on the radar di splay needs to be reduced for easy
observation.
When targets are to be re-acquired from the beginning, all the current vectors can
also be canceled.
5.2.2.1 Canceling targets one by one [ACQ CANCEL]
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target to the desired for canceling
target, and press the [ACQ CANCEL] key.
The vectors and symbols of the tracked targets will disappear, and only the radar video
remain.
5.2.2.2 Canceling all targets collectively [ACQ CANCEL]
Procedures
1) Press the [ACQ CANCEL] key for 5 seconds.
The vectors and symbols of all the targets wi ll disappear, and only the radar videos remain.
When all the targets have been canceled , the system stops
NOTE: tracking them. Thus, you need to re-acquire targets in manual
or automatic acquisition mode. Do not cancel all the targets
unless otherwise required .
5 - 17 [JRC) f)apan.Radio Co.,J'td.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET T RACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.2.3 Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA]
.------ Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
When a target or own ship changes its course, or

when a new target is acquired, its vector may not
reach a given level of accuracy until 3 minutes or
more has passed after such course change or target
acquisition.
Even if 3 minutes or more has passed, the vector
may include an error depending upon the tracking
conditions.
5.2.3.1 Type of Data Display (Target Information)
Target Data
Target identification (TT 10) ID number of the target
True bearing(BRG ) 0.1o unit
Range 0.01 NM unit
Cource 0.1o unit
Speed 0.1knot unit
Closest point of approach 0.01 NM unit
(CPA)
Time to CPA (TCPA) 0.1 min unit
Bow crossing range (BCR) 0 .01NM unit
Bow crossing time (BCT) 0.1min unit
The target for whjcb its numeric data is displayed is marked with a symbo l ~G},,-
to distingui sh from other targets.
If a target's data is displayed, but without the symbol G ;; -- , such a target exists
outside the currently displayed radar displ ay.
5.2.3.2 Method of Displaying Numeric Data [TGT DATA]
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target for which numeric data is to
be displayed, and press the [TGT DATA] key.
T hen, the data of the designated target will appear , it will be marked with a symbol ~G},,- - .
T he target data will remain on the radar display until the target is lost and its vector
d isappears, o r until another target is designated.
If a target with the mark 0 " is designated, only its true bea ring and range will appear until
its vector appears.
[.JRC ) (japan Radio Co.,.I.'Jd. 5 - 18

- - - - - - - -- -- - - -- -
----------------------------------
5.2.3.3 Cancellation of Numeric Data Display (CNCL Data)
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target with which numeric data is
displayed, and right-click.
The cursor mode list will appear.
2) Left-click 6. CNCL Data button.
The numeric value wi ll disappear.
5.2.4 Displaying Target ID No.(Target Number Display)

A target lD number is a value displayed beside the acquisition symbol when a
target is acquired.
A target ID number I to 100 is ass igned to each target in acquisition order. Once a
target ID number is assigned, it identifies the target until the target is lost or the
target acquisition is canceled.
Procedures
1) Open the TT Menu by following menu operation.
TT
2) Left-click the item button of 4· Target Number Display
Target Number Display will appear .
3) Press the [numeric] key corresponding to the display method to

be set.
On : Displays target ID numbers.
Off : Hides target ID numbers.
Target Track : Displays target ID number with target track.
I f there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confusing, set Target Number
Display to off to view the radar display easily.
17\ An ID number is always displayed for only targets with which

\.!.J numeric data is displayed .
5 - 19 [.JRC] 8apan.Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
5.2.5 Adding Tracked Target 10 Name (Name)
The system can enter a name for each of tracking targets that have been acquired.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target, and right-click.
The cursor mode list wi ll appear.
2) Left-click s. Property
The Property will appear.
3) Left-click the item button of 1. Name .
The setting items for ship name (Name) will be displayed.
4) Select the input method.
Data Base :Selection of one of previously input ship

names.When this method is selected , a list of ship
names that have been input by selecting Input
will be displayed.
Input :Input of a new ship name. When this method is

selected , the ship name (Name) input window will
open.
5.2.5.1 Entering a new ship name (Input)
5) Input a new ship name.
Up to 8 characters can be input as a ship namc.For the input method on the character input
screen, see Section 3.3.4. 7 "Entering a character".
The input name by selecting Input is saved in Data Base .
5.2.5.2 Selecting one of previously input ship names (Data Base)
5) Press the [numeric] key corresponding to the ship name to be

selected.
The selected ship name will be entered.
Data Base can contain 30 ship names.
[~RC ] aopan.Radi.o Co.,.!Jd. 5 - 20

----------------------------------
5.2.6 Reference Target (Reference)
The system can display the own ship's speed. To do so, it sets a reference target by
tracking a target for which ground fixed .
. - - - - - - - - - Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
• The reference target function is to be used if the own ship's

speed cannot be displayed normally due to trouble such as a
speed sensor malfunction. Do not use the reference target
function except in emergencies.
• If the speed or course of the own ship is changed or a new
reference target is set, the displayed speed may take 3 minutes or
more to reach the specified speed after the speed I course
change or the setting.
• Even after 3 minutes or more has passed, the speed may d iffer
from the specified speed depending on the tracking condition.
• If a large radar echo such as a land target is set as a reference
target, the vectors of the speed and other tracking targets will not
be displayed correctly and may cause an accident.
• If a sailing ship is set as a reference target, the vectors of the
speed and other tracking targets will not be displayed correctly
and may cause an accident.
• If the REF. is selected for the speed sensor, the AIS function
cannot be turned on.
• If the reference target is lost or the target tracking f unction is
stopped, the speed sensor is placed in manual mode MAN •
• The loss of a reference target may have a major impact on the
accuracy of the results for true speed and true course of t he
target and that own speed will be degraded.
• The reference targets are only used for the calculation of true
speed.
Procedures
I ) Tracking a target for which ground fixed.
5 - 21 [.JRC I (Japan Radio Co., .lid.

L _
JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 52 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
4) Left-click the item button of 3. Reference
The reference target function will be set to on or off.
On :A reference target is set.
Off :The reference target is canceled.
5) Left-click the speed sensor switching button in the Own Ship

Information located at the upper right of the display, and select
REF . •
The speed of own ship calculated from the reference target will be displayed.
When a reference target is set, the symbol display is changed to CR.

Only one target can be set as a reference target. When a new reference target is set, the
previously set reference target is canceled.
5.2.7 Operation Test (TT Test Menu)
& cAUTION
This function is provided to test if the target tracking
function is operating normally. Thus, do not use the
function except when you test the target tracking
function.
In particular, if the operation test mode is used during
navigation, pseudo targets appear on the radar display
and they are confused with actual targets.
Do not use the mode during navigation. Otherwise, an
accident may result.
T he fo llowing functions are available for testing the target tracking function:
Test Video Makes an operation check on the target detection circuit.
TT Simulator Generates pseudo targets on the radar display in order to test

if the target tracking function is operating normally.
Status Displays the status of the target tracking function.
Gate Display Displays the gate size for acquiring I tracking a target.
[ JRC l aopan Radio Co., .J.'id. 5 - 22

-- - ·· - - - - - - - -
------------------------ ----------
5.2.7.1 Test Video (Test Video)
Test Video is used to check whether the video signals under target acqujsition and
tracking are inputted to and processed in the target detection circuit normally.
However, it is sufficient to check that VDH in Test Video is di splayed.

Test Video may not be displayed for a target which is not yet
NOTE: acquired or tracked. Test Video may not be displayed either if
the [GAIN] dial or [SEA] dial is not properly adjusted.
Procedures
1) Open the TT test menu by following menu operation.
TT
-4 9. TT Test Menu
2) Left-click the item button of 1. Test Video
The setting items for Test Video will be displayed.
3) Select the test video to be displayed.
In general, VDH is sufficient for target display checks in test video mode.
If any target displayed clearly in the radar display is not

displayed in the Test Video mode, the target detection circuit of
the Target Tracking unit may have a trouble.
Cancel
1) Left-click the item button of 1. Test Video while the TT Test Menu is
displayed.
2) Left-click Off button.
The test video display will be turned off.
5 - 23 [ ~RC ] 8opan. Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA·9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.2.7.2 Target Tracking Simulator (Target Tracking Simulator)
Pseudo targets can be generated in certain known positions to check whether the
target tracking units are operating normally. Since the pseudo targets move
depending on known parameters, the values for these pseudo targets can be
compared with the known va lue if the pseudo targets are acquired and tracked,
and displayed. Thus, it can be checked if the system is operating normally.
Procedures
1) Press the [TX/STBY] key to stop the transmitting.
The equipment will enter the transmission standby state.
2) Open the TT Test Menu by performing the following menu

operation.
TT
~ 9. TT Test Menu
3) Left-click the item button of 2. TT Simulator
The setting items for TT Simula tor will be displayed.
4) Select the scenario to be set.
The TT Simulator display will be turned on.
5) Press the [TX/STBY] key to transmit.
When the TT simulator is active, the character II X 11

will display a t the bottom o f the radar
display.
Target tracking simulator I scenario
Scenario Target start point Target end point Pseudo-target

speed
Distance Bearing Distance Bearing
3.2NM 20° 1NM goo 20kn
2 6NM oo ONM oo 10kn
3 6NM 18° every 1NM 18° every 10kn
4 6NM 45° 1NM 45° 105kn
5 6NM 45° 6NM 150° 20kn
6 6NM 45° 6NM 150° 20kn
When the simulator is operating, set oo as the heading bearing,

(!) and 0 kn as the speed of own ship.When the range between
own ship and the pseudo target is 0. the target will disappear.
[ .JRC I 8opan Radio Co., .ltd. 5 - 24

----------------------------------
Exit
2) Left-click the item button of 2. TT Simulator while the TT Test

Menu is displayed.
The setting items for TT Simulator will be displayed.
3) Left-click Off
The TT Simulator display wi ll be turned off.
5.2.7.3 Status display (Status)

The current Target Tracking status will appear.
Procedures
operation.
~ 9. TT Test Menu
2) Left-click the item button of 3. status
The setting items for Status wi ll be di splayed.
I*Constant : Vector response
I* VID Level TD : Threshold value used for automatic acquisition
I *VID Level HIGH : Threshold value used for tracking
I *VID Level LOW : Unused
I *Gate Size : Size of gate used for tracking
I*Tracking : Number of targets currently acquired
5-25 [.JRC] gapan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 52 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.2.7.4 Gate Display
The gate displays an area monitoring a target using the Target Tracking function.
This radar equipment allows the gate size to change automatically according to
target range and size. User can check the gate size using the following function .
Procedures
operation.
TT
---+ 9. TT Test Menu
2) Left-click the item button of 4. Gate Display •
The gate display mode is switched.
on : Gate is displayed
Off : Gate is not displayed
3) Display the numeric value of a target according to Section 5.2.3

"Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA]" .
The numeric value of the target will be displayed, and the tracked target symbol will be
enclosed in a green gate.
The Target Tracking can display the gate of two targets

simultaneously.
Tracked Target symbol Vector
Ec ho Gate (displayed in green
(~RC ] aopan.RadicJ Co.,.fid. 5 -26

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
AIS OPERATION
5.3.1 Restrictions
The fo llowing restrictions are placed on use of the AlS function.
The AIS function is unavai lable in the fo llowing cases:

• MAN or REF. is selected for the speed sensor.
• The current offset (Set/Drift Setting) is set while LOG or 2AXW is selected
for the speed sensor.
• The GPS geodetic system is used except WGS-84.
LOG or 2AXW cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case:
• The AlS function is turned on and the current offset (Set/Drift Setting) is
selected.
MAN cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case:
• The A IS function is On.
Current offset (Set/Drift Setting) cannot be turned On in the following case:

• LOG or 2AXW I is selected for the speed sensor while the AIS function is on.
5.3.2 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function)
.--- - - Attention - - - - -- - -- -- -------,
• When the AIS function is set to Off, the AIS display

function is turned off and AIS symbols are no longer
displayed.
• Once the AIS display function is set to Off, it is not
automatically switched to On even if a dangerous
target exists.
Procedures
I) Press the [AISITT] key. Alternatively, left-click the AIS button
in the Target Information located at the u pper right of the display.
The received AIS information will be shown on the radar display.
5 - 27 [~RC I (Japan Radio Co.,.tid.

JMA·9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 53 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.3.3 Activate AIS Targets (Activate AIS)
Activate an AlS target, and display the target ' s vector and make a collision
decision.
5.3.3.1 Manual activation (ACT AIS)

Activate an AIS target in manual mode to display the vector and heading line.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the AIS symbol to be activated, and right-click.
The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.
2) Left-click 2. ACT AIS
5.3.3.2 Automatic activation

Activate an AIS target in automatic mode to display the vector and heading line.
When the automatic acti vation function is used, AIS targets are automatically activated when
they go into the automatic activation zone. The automatic activation zone is identical to the
automatic acquisition zone (AZ) used for target tracking. For the zone setting, refer to
Section 5.2.1 "Acquiring Target [ACQ]"
The position of the scanner shall be at the centre of the azimuth o r range in the acquisition/
activation zone.
If there are more AIS targets than the allowable maximum, they are deactivated in the low-
priority (See the Section 5.1.2 "Definitions of Symbols").
1'7\ If an AIS target is activated but the vector is not displayed, refer
\!) to Section 5.3.6 "Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number
Display)".
5.3.4 Deactivate AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS)

Deactivate an AIS target and clear the display of the vector and heading line.
Procedures
l ) Put the cursor on the AIS ta rget to be deactivated, and right-click.
2) Left-click 5. DEACT AIS
The selected AIS target will be deacti vated.
This operation is available only for an activated AIS target.
[ .JRC I 8apan Radio Co.,.lid. 5-28

------------------------------------- - ---------------------------------------------------------------
-------- -- ------------------------
5.3.5 Displaying AIS Information [TGT DATA]
5.3.5.1 Types of information displayed

There are two modes (simple and detail) to display AIS target information. The
display items are determined by the selected mode.
Display ltemi Detail mode Simple mode

NAME {ship name) U p to 20 characters
Call Sign Up to 7 characters
MMS I Up to 9 characters
COG (course over ground) or CTW (course through water) 0.1° unit
SOG (speed over ground) or STW (speed through water) 0.1 kn unit
CPA (closest point of approach)ii 0.01NM unit
TCPA (time to CPA) 0.1 min unit
BRG (true bearing) 0.1° unit Not
displayed
Range 0.01NM unit
HOG (heading bearing) 0.1° unit
ROT (rate of turn)iii 0.01° /min
POSN (latitude I longitude) 0.0001' unit
Destination (waypoint) Up to 20
characters
NAV Status Status (number)
i. The detail mode displays the numeric data of only a single ship, the simple mode can display the
numeric data of up to two ships.
ii. If the numeric information of SOG or STW is 102.2kn, the target ship's speed is 102.2kn or over.
Then the system cannot calculate CPA and TCPA. Therefore, missing is indicated in the CPA and
TCPA information.
iii. If the numeric information of ROT is blank, the radar is receiving the AIS data which is cannot dis-
played. In this case, you can only trust the turning direction which is indicated by the turn indicator.
The turn indicator is displayed on the AIS symbol as the line perpendicular to the heading direc-
tion. (See the Section 5.1.2.2 "Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols")
The detail mode displays the numeric data of only a single ship, the simple mode can display
the numeric data of up to two ships .
For NAY Status, one of the following statuses is displayed in accordance with
Navigation Status:
No. Status
0 Under Way Using Engine
1 at Anchor
2 Not Under Command
3 Restricted Manoeuvrability
4 Constrained by Her Draft
5 Moored
6 Aground
7 Engaged in Fishing
8 Under Way Sailing
5 - 29 [.JRC l aapan. Radio Co.,.tid.

----------------------------------
9 Reserved
10 Reserved
11-14 Reserved
15 Not Defined
5.3.5.2 Displaying AIS Target Information [TGT DATA]
Procedures
l ) Put the cursor on the AIS target of which information is to be
displayed , and press the [TGT DATA] key.
The in fonnation of the selected A IS target will be displayed.
When the numeric data of a target is displayed but the mark

rJ:
L.. .J AISU
is not on the radar display, the target is outside the
display.
5.3.5.3 Canceling AIS Target Information Display (CNCL Data)
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the activated AIS target of which information
display is to be cancelled, and right-click.
2) Left-click 6. CNCL Data •
The infonnation display of the selected AIS target will be cleared.
5.3.5.4 Selecting Detail/ Simple Mode for AIS Target Information Display
Procedures
1) Left-click the o or _ button in the Digital Information located
at the center right of the display.
The detail or simple mode display for AIS target infonnation will be selected.
5.3.5.5 Message
Received AIS messages can be displayed.
Up to I 0 messages of addressed message and up to I 0 messages of broadcast message can be

displayed.
If the number of messages exceeds 10, the oldest received messages are sequentially deleted.
[1] Displaying Message Selected from List (Message)
(~RC ] f}opan Radio Co., .lid. 5 - 30

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 53 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
Procedures
I ) Open the Message menu by performing the following menu
operation.
AIS
- 9. TT Test Menu
2) Left-click Addressed Message or Broadcast Message
Addressed messages list or broadcast messages list are displayed.
Each list shows ship names and message-received time.
For an unread message, ~ is displayed to the left of the item number.
3) Left-click the item button to display the message.
The message will appear.
[2] Displaying Specified Target's Message
rocedures
l) Display AIS target information.
If there are messages from the target, a message mark will be displayed in the Digital
In formation located at the center right of the display.
2) Left-click the unread message display button in the Digital

Information located at the center right of the display.
[3] Deleting Message (Delete)
rocedures
1) Left-click 1. Delete while the message is displayed.
The Confirmation Window will appear.
2) Left-click 1. Yes to delete the message.
The message will be deleted, and the ship name and message-received time will disappear
from the list.
5-31 I~RC l aopan Radicl Co., .l.'id.

JMA-9100 lnstruct1on Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.3.5.6 Displaying Data of Lost AIS Target (Display Lost TGT Data)
The data of the last-lost AIS target can be di splayed.
The data of only one target that has been lost most recently can be displayed.
Procedures
I ) Open the Display Lost Target Data menu by performing the
AIS
~ 8. Display Lost Target Data
The data of the last-lost A IS target will be displayed.
5.3.5.7 Displaying Own Ship's AIS Data (Own Ship's AIS Data)
T he AfS data of own ship can be displayed.
Procedures
1) Open the Own Ship's AIS Data menu by performing the following
menu operation.
AIS
~ 9. ONn Ship's AIS Data
The own ship's A I S data will be displayed.
5.3.6 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display)

When an AIS target is activated, a target ID number is displayed next to the AIS
target symbol.
A target ID number 1 to 100 is assigned to each target in activation order. Once a

target ID number is assigned, it identifies the target until the target is lost or
deactivated.
Procedures
1) Open the Target Number Display menu by performing the
I.JRC I f)apan Radro Co., .lid. 5 - 32

- - - - - - - -- - - - - -- - - -- - - - - -
----------------------------------
AIS
~ 4. AIS Filter Setting
2) Left-click the item button corresponding to the display method to

be set.
Target Track : Displays target ID number with AIS track.
Ship's Name : Displays the ship's name.
lfthere are many tracking targets and their symbol display is confus ing, set Target Number
Display to o ff to view the radar di splay easily.
An ID number or ship's name is always displayed for only

targets with which numeric value is displayed.
5.3.7 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting)
5.3.7.1 About an AIS filter

By setting an AIS filter, an AIS target in the area can be displayed by priority or
only the targets in the area can be displayed. An AIS filter is initially set in a circ le
having a radius of 20 [nm] from the CCRP. If 30 I or more AIS targets exist in the
filter range, they are displayed in the priority order explained in Section 5. 1.2
"Definiti ons of Symbols".
5.3.7.2 Types of AIS Filters (Filter Type)

There are the following 3 types of AIS filters:
Range : A filter is set in a circle with a set range as the radius.
Sector : A filter is set in a sector formed by two bearings with the

bow as reference.
zone : A filter is set in a zone formed by two bearings and two

ranges with the bow as reference.
5-33 [ .JRC I gopan Radio Co., .fld.

----------------------------------
Procedures
1) Left-click the AIS filter mode switching in Target Information
located at the upper right of the display, and select the filter to be
set.
The AJS filter wi ll be selected.
5.3.7.3 Creation of AIS Filter (Make AIS Filter)
Procedures
1) Open the AIS Filter Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
AIS
~ 4 . AIS Riter Setting
2) Left-click 2. Make AIS Riter
The mode to make an AIS filter wi ll be activated.
[1] Setting Range Filter
3) Set a filter range by turning the [VRM] dial, and left-click.
[2] Setting Sector Filter
3) Set a starting bearing by turning the [EBL] dial, and left-click.
4) Set an ending bearing by turning the [EBL] dial, and left-click.
[3] Setting Zone Filter
3) Set a starting bearing and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
I.JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.ltd. 5-34

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERAT ION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
4) Set an ending bearing and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
When the automatic activation function is enabled, the filter

range is automatically changed for covering the automatic
activation zone. Thus, the automatic activation zone is always
with in the filter range.
5.3.7.4 AIS Filter Display On/Off (Filter Display)
Procedures
menu operation.
AIS
2) Left-click the item button of 3. Filter Display •
Filter Display will be set to on or off.
5.3.7.5 Display of Targets outside AIS Filter (Filter Mode)
Procedures
I) Open the Filter Mode menu by performing the following menu
operation.
AIS
~ 4 . AIS Filter Setting
2) Left-click the item button of 6. Filter Mode
Display : Displays only AIS targets in the AIS filter.
Priority : Displays AIS targets in the AIS fi lter by priority, and also
displays targets outside the AIS filter.
Activated AIS targets can be displayed even when they are

outside the A IS filter.
5-35 [JRC ) 8opanRadioCo.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 53 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.3.7.6 Point Filter
AIS targets which are not displayed because they are outside the AIS filter or at
low priority levels can be activated by giving a higher priority to them.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the position where a point filter is to be set,
and right-click to select the filter to be set.
2. ACT A1S
2) The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.Left-click
A point filter will be set at the cursor position.

If an AIS target is in the point filter, it will be activated.
When an AIS target is activated or an AIS target is not found within one minute, the point
filter will be cleared.
The point filter's range is 1 nm, and cannot be changed.
5.3.8 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost

About a lost target
When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target
is decided to be lost and the target data is deleted. As s hown in the table below,
the time until target data is deleted varies depending on the class of recei ve data
and the target status.
Deciding AIS Target to be Lost

Target status Time until data deletion
SOLAS ship (Class A) SOLAS ship (Class B)
Vessel below 3 knots (Class A) or 2 knots 18 min 18 min

(Class B) and it is now at anchor or on the berth
Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at 60 sec 18 min
anchor or on the berth
Vessel of 0 to 14 knots (Class B: 0 to 14 knots) 60 sec 180 sec
Vessel of 14 to 23 knots 36 sec 180 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more 30 sec 180 sec
SAR (Search and Rescue) 60 sec 60 sec
ATON (Aid to Navigation) 18 min 18 min
Base Station 60 sec 60 sec
17\ When a dangerous target ship is lost, a lost alarm is issued and the symbol
\!,I changes to a lost symbol. The lost symbol will display continuously on the
last-received position.
If the [ALARM A CK] key is pressed, the symbol is cleared.
I.JRC] 3apan.Radio Co.,.ltd. 5-36

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION O F TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.3.9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting)
Conditions for issuing a Lost alarm and CPAffCPA alarm for AIS targets can be
set.
5.3.9.1 Setting of Condition for Lost Alarm
Procedures
I ) Open the AIS Alarm Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
AIS
~ 6 . A1S Alarm Setting
2) Left-click the item button of 1. Lost Alarm
The setting items for Lost Alarm will be displayed.
3) Left-click the item button corresponding to the condition to be

set.
Off : A lost alarm is not issued.i
Danger : A lost alarm is issued only for AIS targets for which a dangerous
target alarm has been issued.
ACT&Danger : A lost alarm is issued on ly for activated AIS targets and AIS
targets for which a dangerous target alarm has been issued.
ACT&Danger&Select : A lost alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets, data
indicated A IS targets and AIS targets for which a dangerous target
alarm has been issued.
i. A lost alarm is not issued for sleeping AIS targets.
5.3.9.2 Setting of Condition for CPA/TCPA Alarm
Procedures
1) Open the AIS Ala rm Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
AIS
~ 6. AIS Alarm Setting
2) Left-click the item button of ICPA/TCPA Alarm I·

The setting items for CPAffCPA Alarm is switched.
Off : A CPA/TCPA alarm is not issued.i

ACT : A CPA/TCPA alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets.
ACT&Sieep : A CPA/TCPA alarm is issued for all AIS targets on the radar
display.
i. When the Lost Alarm menu set to Off, the CPA ring color changes to dark color.
5-37 [.JRC I aapan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 54 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL
~~------------------------------
DECISION OF TARGETS AS
IDENTICAL (Association)
5.4.1 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical

(Association)
When an AIS target and a tracking target are decided to be identical, an
association symbol is displayed for the targets regarded as identical. In this case,
the AIS target symbol is automatically activated .
....---- Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
• Turn off Association in order not to make a decision

on if targets are identical, or in order to display
symbols that have disappeared.
Procedures
I) Left-click the Association in Target Information located at the upper
Association will be set to on or off.
5.4.2 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets

as Identical (Association Setting)
Procedures
I) Open the Association Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
AIS
~ 1. Association Setting
The Association etting menu will appear.
2) Select and enter the item to be set.
Conditions for deciding targets as identical wi ll be set. When the differences of all item
between A IS and tracked target are under the set conditions ..
[~RC ] 8opan Radio Co., .lid. 5-38

....------------- --- -
-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - -
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AJS > 5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -'f\S.&QCiiW>rw.. - -
Once regard as identical, when one of the di ffe rences exceed 125% of the set condition, they
are regarded as dissidence.
The setting for this function is common to Association Setting in

the AIS Menu.
5.4.3 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set

Decision conditions
1. Association On I Off (Function to decide targets as

identical)
2. Priority AIS I TT (Symbol to be displayed)
3. Bearing 0 .0-9.9°
4. Range 0-999m
5. Cource 0-99°
6. Speed 0-99kn
?.Applicable AIS Target ACT or ACT&Sieep (activated AIS target or
all AIS target)
& c A UTION
If a great value is set as a condition for deciding
targets as identical, a tracking target near an AIS target
is regarded as identical to the AIS target and it may not
be displayed any more.
For example, when a pilot boat (which is a small target
not being tracked) equipped with an AIS f unction
approaches a cargo ship as a tracking target not
equipped with an AIS function, the tracking target
symbol of the cargo ship may not be displayed any
more.
5-39 [.JRC] f)apan.Rodio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 55 ALARM DISPLAY
----------------------------------
-~
- - -~
----- ALARM DISPLAY
===-- •- _-=
Critical alarm messages for Target Tracking (TI) and AIS functions:
Error message Description

CPAITCPA There is a dangerous target. See also Section 5.5.1.
Alarm messages for Target Tracking (TT) and AlS functions:

CPAITCPA There is a dangerous target.
New Target A new target is acquired in the automatic acquisition zone.
Lost There is a lost target.
REF Target The accuracy of the reference target may be decreased.
95% Capacity The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking
function has reached 95% of the maximum.
MAX Target The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking
function has reached the maximum.
AIS 95% Capacity The number of displayed A IS target symbols has reached 95%
of the maximum.
AIS MAX Target The number of received data items exceeds the maximum
number of AIS target symbols that can be displayed.
AIS ACT 95% Capacity The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has
reached 95% of the maximum.
AISACTMAX The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has
reached the maximum.
AIS Alarm "** Alarm information issued with the ALR sentence by the AIS .
*"'" is a 3-digit number which is Local Alarm No in the ALR
sentence. See below.
AIS Alarm 001 Tx malfunction
AIS Alarm 002 Antenna VSWR exceeds limit
AIS Alarm 003 Rx channel 1 malfunction
AIS Alarm 006 general failure
AIS Alarm 008 MKD connection lost
AIS Alarm 025 external EPFS lost
AIS Alarm 026 no sensor position in use
AIS Alarm 029 no valid SOG information
AIS Alarm 030 no valid COG information
AIS Alarm 032 Heading losVinvalid
AIS Alarm 035 no valid ROT information
Error message and alarm are displayed in the lower right of the di splay.
See also Section 9. l. l "List of Alarms and other Indications".
I~Rc ] gopan.Radio Co.,l'Jd. 5 - 40

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 55 ALARM DISPLAY
----------------------------------
5.5.1 CPA I TCPA Alarm
& cAUTION
Since these alarms may include some errors
depending on the target tracking conditions, the
0 navigation officer himself should make the final

decision for ship operations such as collision
avoidance.
alarm may cause accidents such as collisions.
In the system, targets are categori zed into two types: tracked I activate AIS targets
and dangerous targets.
The grade of danger can easily be recognized on the display at a glance. So the
officer can easi ly decide which target he should pay attention to.
It is not possible to switch off the tracked target visual alarm, unless tracking is
ceased, or the alarm condition no longer applies.
The types of target and alarm are shown below.
CPA I TCPA Alarm
Status Symbol on A I a r m Ala rm Conditions

display cha racters sound
Tracked target
G--
12
(Off) (Off) · CPA>CPA LIMIT
· O>TCPA
Activated AIS • TCPA>TCPA LIMIT

target
<1:2
The symbol is displayed
when one of the above
conditions is met.
Dangerous
target G--- 12
CPAITCPA Beep
sound
(pee-poh)
· CPA ;:;:; CPA LIMIT
• 0 ~ TCPA ,S TCPA LIMIT
An alarm is issued when all

Red blinking Alarm the conditions are met.
acknowle
~2
dgeable The AIS targets that issues
alarm refer to Section 5.3.9
Red blinking
CPA Limit and TCPA Limit: The Setting Values
5-41 [.JRC] 8 apan.Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 55 AlARM DISPLAY
----------------------------------
5.5.2 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition
Zone (New Target)
& cAUTION
In setting an automatic acquisition zone, it is
necessary to adjust the gain, sea clutter suppression
and rain I snow clutter suppression to ensure that
target echoes are displayed in the optimum conditions.
No automatic acquisition zone alarms will be issued
for targets undetected
The automatic acquisition function sets a zone in a range and issues an alarm
when a new target (which is not yet acquired) goes into this zone.
For the setting of an automatic acquisition zone, refer to " Acquiring Target " in
Section 5.2.1.1 "Automatic acquisition".
Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone
Status Symbol on Ala r m Alarm sound Conditions

display characters
New target in -, New Target Beep sound The alarm is issued

(pipi-pipi)
'
automatic when a new target is
I acquired in
acquisition the
- 12 Alarm
zone automatic acquisition
Red Blinking acknowledge zone.
able
When an already acquired target goes into automatic

acquisition zone, the alarm message is not displayed and the
buzzer does not sound either.
5.5.3 Lost Target Alarm (Lost)
Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
• If the gain, sea clutter suppression, rain/snow clutter

suppression are not adjusted adequately, the lost
target alarm may be easily generated. So such
adjustments should be mad carefully.
j..JRC] (japan Radio Co., .lid. 5-42

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND A IS > 55 ALARM DISPLAY
------- ---------------------------
When it is imposs ibl e to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target, or the
data of A IS target cannot received for a specified tim e, the Lost Alarm I I
wi ll be generated_ The typical causes for alarm generation are shown below, but
not limited to the following:
• The target echo is very weak

• T he target is shadowed by a shore or a large ship and its echo is not rece ived.
• T he target echo is blurred by sea c lutter returns.
If a target under tracking goes o ut of a range of 32 run and can no longer be

tracked, it is canceled without a lost target alarm.
Lost Target Alarm

Status Symbol on Alarm Alarm Conditions
display characters sound
Lost Target Lost Beep sound The alarm will sound
)(:2-- (pee)
Alarm
once when a lost
ta rget symbol is
acknowledge displayed.
Red Blinking
able
~12
Red Blinking
5.5.4 Gyro Set Alarm

The GYRO IfF in this system receives signals from a gyro. Even if the power is
turned off, the system wi ll fo ll ow up the gyro. However, the system stops the
follow- up operation w he n the power of the master gyro is turned off or when any
trouble occurs to the line. When the power of the master gyro is recovered, the
ISet Gyro I
alarm will be generated.
If this a larm occurs, set the gyro.
Gyro Set Alarm

A I a r m Alarm sound Conditions
characters
Set Gyro Beep sound (pipi-pipi) The signals from the gyro are stopped, but the
gyro is recovered .
5-43 ['-'RC ) 8 opan Radio Co.,..ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 56 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
TRACK FUNCTION
5.6.1 Past Position (Past POSN)

Procedures
I) Left-click the past position display interval unit switching button
in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display,
and set a desired unit.
The past position display interval unit will be set to min or NM
2) Left-click the past position display interval switching button in

the Target Information located at the upper right of the display,
and set a desired track display interval.
The past position will be set.
Off : Tracks are not displayed.
Numeric : Tracks are displayed at intervals of a specified value.
The past position function

Past position Past position
display interval unit can display up to ten past
true I relati
positions of a target under
tracking. The past position
display interval can be set to
specified time intervals of
0.5, I, 2, or 4 minutes, or
specified range intervals of
0.1, 0.2, 0.5, or I nm.
The specified interval is displayed in the past position display interval switching
in Target Information located at the upper right of the display. When Off is
displayed, the track display function is turned off.
The track mode operates in conjunction with the vector mode, and a true or
relative track is displayed. [n relative vector mode, the relative tracks of the target
are displayed. ln true vector mode, true tracks that are calculated from the relative
bearing, range, own ship's course, and speed are displayed .
The target is acquisition, past position of traced target is start plot. The AJS target
is displayed, past position of AIS target is start plot.
If the past position plotted time is short, the indicated past position duration may
not have achieved the specified time or range.
[.JRCJ dopan.Radio Co.. .lid. 5-44

- - - - - - -- - --
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
5.6.2 Target Ship's Tracks (Target Track)
This function makes settings for the tracks of tracked targets and AIS targets.
The system can display the tracks of up to 20 target ships.
The target track function is available between latitudes of 85° N and 85° S.
5.6.2.1 Track Color Setting (Target Track Color)
Procedures
l ) Put the cursor on the tracked target or activated AIS target, and
right-click.
T he setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.
2) Left-click Property •
3) Left-click the item button of 2. Track Color .
The setting items fo r Track Color will be di splayed.
4) Left-click the button corresponding to the track color to be set.
Colors set by performing the procedure in Section 5.6.2.3 "Setting of Target Ship's Track
Colors (Target Track Color)" can be selected.
Indi vi dual colors can be set for up to I 0 ships. The same color is set for II to 20 ships.
5.6.2.2 Target Ship's Track Function On/Off (Target Track Function)
Procedures
l ) Open the T.TRK menu by performing the following menu
operation.
TT
~ 2. Target Track Setting
2) Left-click the item button of 1. Target Track Function
The Target Track Function wi ll be set to on or off.
On : Target Track Function is turned on .
Off : Target Track Function is turned off.
Note that when this function is turned off, all the other ship's
track functions are turned off. In this case, the track data of
other ships is not saved, so they cannot be traced later.
5-45 I ~Rc ] 8opan.Radio Co.,J.'td.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 56 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
5.6.2.3 Setting of Target Ship's Track Colors (Target Track Color)
You can set either one track color for all targets under tracking, or individual
colors for the ships of track numbers I to I 0. The tracks of ships II to 20 are
displayed in the same color.
1'7\ If the other ship's track function (Target Track Function) is
\..!) turned off, the track data of other ships is not saved.
Procedures
1) Open the Target Track Color menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
~ 2. Target Track Color
~ 1. All
The setting items for All wi ll be displayed.
2) Left-click the button corresponding to the track display to be set.
IndiVidual : Track color is set individually for ships.

color name : One color is set for all ships.
Individual setting
3) Left-click the button corresponding to the track number to be set.
The setting items for the selected track number wi ll be displayed.
The track color of the selected track number will be set.
When IndiVidual is selected, the track numbers ITarget Track No.1 I to INo.lO I and
the individual setting for IOOler I are valid. Select a color for each target.
The color list is displayed by left-clicking the button corresponding to the item
number to be set. elect a desired color. There are 8 color choices : Off
White Gray Blue Green Yellow , Pink , and Red
ITarget Track No.1 """ INo.lO I : Setting for 1 to 10 ships

IOther I : Setting for 11 to 20 ships
Note that the individual setting is not enabled unless Individual
is selected .
[.JRC] 8opan.Radio Co., .ltd. 5-46

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
5.6.2.4 Setting of Target Ship's Track Display (Target Track Display)
The target track display function can be turned on I off. Choices for track display
are displaying I hid ing the tracks of all ships and Individual (disp laying the tracks
of individua l ships).
Procedures
I ) Open the Target Track Display menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
~ 3. Target Track Display
~ 1. All
The setting items for All will be displayed .
Individual : Track display is set for individual ships.

Off : The tracks of all ships are hidden.
on : The tracks of all ships are displayed.
Even when Target Track Display is turned off, the track data of
other ships is saved if Track Memory Interval is set.
Individual setting
The selected track number display will be set to on or off.
on :The track number display is turned on .
Off :The track number display is turned off.
When Individual I
is sel ected, the track numbers Target Track No.1 I to INo.10 I and
the individual setting for Other I I are valid. Select on I off for each target.
ITarget Track No.1 "-' INo.10 I : Setting for 1 to 10 ships
is selected .
5-47 [~Rc ] (japan-Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 56 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
5.6.2.5 Setting of Target Ship's Track Saving Interval (Track Memory Interval)
An interval for saving target ship's track data can be set.
This function is not available when the Target Track Function is

turned off.
Procedures
1) Open the Track Memory Interval menu by performing the
--. 2. Target Track Setting
--. 4. Track Memory Interval
2) Left-click the button corresponding to the interval to be set.
Select an interval rrom the rollowing:
Off/
3sec/Ssec/1 Osec/30sec/
1 min/3min/Smin/1 Omin/30min/60min/
1NM/3NM/SNM/1ONM
5.6.2.6 Clear of Target Ship's Track (Clear Track)

The target ship's track can be cleared by setting a color or a track number.
If Card T.TRK Display is used , target ship's tracks displayed
through the card cannot be cleared.
[1] Clear of Tracks by Setting Color (Clear Track Color)
Procedures
I) Open the Clear Track Color menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
--. 2. Target Track Setting
__. 5. Clear Track Color
The setting items ror Clear Track Color will be displayed.
[.JRC) 8opan.RadkJ Co.,.ltd. 5-48

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AJS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
2) Left-click the button corresponding to the color of the target
tracks to be cleared.
3) Left-click 1. Yes to clear the track line.
All the tracks of the selected color wil l be cleared.

[2] Clear of Tracks by Setting Track Number (Clear Track Number)
Procedures
l) Open the T.TRK menu by performing the following menu
operation.
TT
~ 6. Clear Track Number
The setting items for C lear Track Number wi ll be displayed.
2) Left-click the button corresponding to the number of t he tracks

to be cleared.
The tracks o f the selected number will be cleared.
5.6.2.7 Operation of Target Ship's Track Data Saved on Card (File

Operations)
Target ship's track data can be saved on a fl ash memory card and read from the
card.
Data can be saved to a flash memory card until the card
becomes full, but the number of files that can be read and
displayed is limited to 64 in alphanumeric order. When the
number of files has reached 64, delete unnecessary files.
5 - 49 I.JRcl 8apan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
[1] Loading File (Load)
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot

menu operation.
TT
~ 7. Ale Operations
3) Left-click the item button of 11. Select Card Slot to select a card slot.
The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slotl and Slot2.
4) Left-click the item button of 2. Load Mode to select Add or

Overwrite.
The setting item for Load Mode is switched between L l_ _ A_d..::..

d_ _JI and
I Overwrite 1.
When I Add is selected, new data is added to the current data on the
card. When I Overwrite I is selected, new data is saved over the current data
on the card.
5) Left-click 3. Load
C urrently saved target ship's track data w ill be listed.
6) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be loaded.
The Confirmation Window wi ll appear.
7) Left-click 1. Yes to load the file.
The selected target track data will be loaded and shown on the radar display.
[ JRC I 8apan RadkJ Co.,.ltd. 5-50

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
[2] Saving File (Save)
Procedures

menu operation.
TT
~ 7. File Operations
3) Left-click the item button of !1. Select Card Slot to select a card
slot.
The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slot I and Slot2.
4) Left-click 4. Save •
The Input File Name menu wi ll appear.
5) Input the file name to be saved.
Up to ten characters can be input as a file name.
For inputs to the characters input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character". After
the input, the Confirmation Window wi ll appear.
6) Left-click 1. Yes to save the file.
The currently displayed target track data will be saved.
5-51 [JRC] 8opan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 lnstructton Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
[3] Erasing File (Erase)
Procedures
1) Insert the flash memory card into the card slot.

menu operation.
TT
----) 2. Target Track Setting
----) 7. File Operations
3) Left-click the item button of 11. Select Card Slot to select a card
slot.
The setting item for Select Card Slot is switched between Slot! and Slot2.
4) Left-click s. Erase •
The Erase menu will appear.
Currently saved target ship's track data on the card will be listed.
5) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be erased.
6) Left-click 1. Yes to erase the file.

The selected target track data wi ll be erased and the file name will disappear from the list.
[JRC ) [japan. Radio Co.,.ltd. 5-52

----------------------------------
[4] Display ing File (Ca rd Target Track Display)
Procedures
I ) Insert the flash memory card into the card slot.

menu operation.
TT
~ 7. Rle Operatio ns
3) Left-click the item button of 11. Select Card Slot I to select a card
slot.
The setting item fo r Select Card S lot is switched between loti and Slot2.
4) Left-click 6. card T.TRK Display •
The Card T.TR.K Display menu will appear.
5) Left-click the button corresponding to the f ile to be displayed.
6) Left-click 1. Yes to display the T.TRK line.
The selected file will be highligh ted, and the currently saved target track data wil l be
displayed.
Cancel
1) Open the Card T.TRK Display window.
The d isplayed file is highlighted.
2) Left-click the button corresponding to the displayed file.
The file wi ll be deselected and returned to normal display.
5-53 !.JRC I aopan Radio Co., J:id.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 57 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
----------------------------------
TRIAL MANEUVERING
(Trial Maneuver)
..------ Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
• Trial maneuvering is to simulate own ship' s course

and speed in the conditions that the course and
speed of a target ship are unchanged as they are.
As the situation is different from any actual ship
maneuvering, set values with large margins to CPA
Limit and TCPA Limit.
The trial maneuvering is the function of sim ulating own ship' s course and speed
for col li sion avoidance when a dangerous target appears. When the own ship's
course and speed are entered in manual mode, the trial maneuvering function
checks if pre-acquired or pre-activated targets are dangerous.
The ranges of course and speed to be entered manually:
Course: 360° (in 0.1 o intervals) ............................................... [EBL] dial
Speed: 0 to 1OOkn (in 0.1kn step) .................... .................... [VRM] dial
[~RC ] gopan. RadicJ Co.,.ltd. 5-54

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRAC KING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
----------------------------------
5.7.1 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode
In the True Vector mode, calculations are performed according to the values set by
Trial Speed, Trial Course and other features, and the result is displayed as a bold-
line that represents the change of own ship's vector as shown in the Fig 5-7 below
(an example of the course changed to the right).
rn this Fig 5-7, the dangerous target forward left becomes safe as a result of
simulation.
The tracked target information indicates the current CPA and TCPA values
regardless of the result of simulation .
NORMAL
Own ship' s vector
Dangerous target
TRIAL
Route
Change of symbol
as a result of
trial maneuver
Fig 5-7: True Vector Mode
5-55 [JRC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.l'id.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 57 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
----------------------------------
5.7.2 Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode
The result ofTrial maneuvering in the Relative Vector mode is shown by a change
in target vector. In the Fig 5-8 below (in the same conditions as in the True Vector
mode in the previous page), it is seen that the acquired target is a dangerous one
because its vector is crossing the CPA RING
NORMAL
Dangerous target
CPA Ring
TRIAL
Change of symbol
as a result of
trial maneuver
CPA Ring
Fig 5-8: Relative Vector Mode

The above Fig 5-8 shows that the relative vector of the target has changed as
shown in the figure as a result of simulation (course and speed), so that the
symbol color is changed into "White" , a safe target.
Irrespective of the simulation results, the current CPA and TCPA values are shown
in the tracked target information just like when the true vector mode is active.
The course change of own ship is displayed as a dotted-line.
Better information is provided by using relative motion and sea stabilization.
[-JRC] f)opan.Radio Co.,J'id. 5 - 56

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.0 PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
----------------------------------
5.7.3 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function
Procedures
1) Open the Trial Maneuver menu by performing the following menu
operation.
TT
~ 3. Trial Maneuver
2) Left-click the item button of 1. Trial Function
The Trial Function will be set to on or off.
On : The t rial maneuvering function is turned on.
Off : The trial maneuvering function is turned off.
When the Trial Function is active, the character " T " wi 11 display at the bottom of the radar
display.
3) Set values for Course by turning the [EBL] dial, and for Speed by
4) Set other characteristics.
Vector Time : Vector time (1 to 60 min)
Time to Maneuver : Time until trial maneuvering is started (0 to 30 min)
Ch-m Ship Dynamic Trait : Dynamic trait of the own ship
- Reach : Range from when steered to when the ship

beings to turn (0 to 2000 m)
- Tum Radius : Turning radius (0.10 to 2.00 nm)
- Acceleration : Acceleration (0.0 to 100 knots/min )
- Decceleration : Deceleration (0.0 to 100 knots/min)
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.2 "Directly entering a numeric
value".
Dangerous target symbols are displayed in red and sa fe target symbols in white.
Vector Time is valid only when Trial Function is set to on. If it is off, the vector time
before trial maneuvering is displayed .
Time until the start of trial maneuvering is counted down immediately after the input.
The acceleration and deceleration are influenced depending on the relationship
between the current speed and the input speed for trial maneuvering.
If 0.0 kn/min is set for Acceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is faster
than the current speed, or for Deceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is
slower than the current speed, the system performs simulation on the assumption
that the speed is changed immediately after the time set for Time to Maneuver .
5 -57 [.JRC] (Japan Radio Co.,J'id.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
----------------------------------
Cancel
1) Open the Trial Maneuver menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
~ 3. Trial Maneuver
Off The Trial Function will be set to off.
I~RC I (Japan Radio Co., .i'id. 5-58

SECTION 6
II
llll lllt• ' 111 11 1
II

6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON ................................................... 6-1
6.4 FALSE ECHOES .................................................................................... 6-9
6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART) ................................6-12
6.6 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART .......................................................................6-14
6.6.1 Display ............................................................................. ..............6-14
6.6.2 Numeric Display ... ......................................................................... 6-15
[.JRC ] 8apan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > S.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON
----------------------------------
The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide hi s best
aid in maneuvering the ship. For this purpose, the operator has to observe the
radar displays after fully understanding the advantages and disadvantages that the
radar has. For better interpretation of radar display, it is important to gain more
experiences by operating the radar equipment in fair weathers and comparing the
target ships watched with the naked eyes and their echoes on the radar display.
The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in
open seas, to check buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port, to
measure own ship ' s position in the coastal waters relative to the bearings and
ranges of the shore or islands using a chart, and to monitor the position and
movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar di splay.
Various types of radar display will be explained below.
RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON
Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved
surface of the earth. The propagation varies with the property of the air layer
through which the radar beam propagates. In the normal propagation, the distance
(D) of the radar wave to the horizon is approximately 10% longer than the
distance to the optical horizon. The distance (D) is given by the following
formu la:
D = 2. 23( j7/; +A>[NM]

h1 : Height (m) of radar scanner above sea level
h2 : Height (rn) of a target above sea level
Fig 6-2 is a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that
is limited by the curve of the earth surface in the normal propagation.
Earth
Radar Targets
Fig 6-1 : RADAR wave with the horizon
6-1 [~RC ] dOfXi"' Radk:J Co.,.fid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON
----------------------------------
h 2(ml
700
660
/
/
/ 600
/
/
/
/
/ 500
/
/
/
,. /
400
/
/
h l (ml O[NM] /
/
/
/ 300
/
70;"'
/
/
/
/
60 200
/
/
/
/
/
/ 50
/ 100
/
/
/
/ 40
/
/
/ 50
/
/ 30
/
/
30 / 25
/
/
20 /
20
/
10 10
5 10
0 0
0
Height of Target
Height of RAOAA Scanner Detectl\.1! Range
Fig 6-2: Maximum detection range of a target
When the height of own ship ' s scanner is 10 m for instance,
i. A target that can be detected at the radar range of 64 nm on the radar display
is required to have a height of 660 m or more.
ii. If the height of a target is 10 m, the radar range has to be approx. 15 nm.
However, the maximum radar range at which a target can be detected on the
radar display depends upon the size of the target and the weather conditions,
that is, the radar range may increase or decrease depending upon those
conditions.
(.JRC J 8apan Radio Co., .lid. 6- 2

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6 2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE
• - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~~E. . - •
STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM

THE TARGET
The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size
of the target but also on its material and shape. The echo intensity from a higher
and larger target is not always higher in general.
In particular, the echo from a coast line is affected by the geographic conditions of
the coa t. If the coast has a very gentle slop, the echo from a mountain of the
inland appears on the radar display.(Fig 6-3) Therefore, the distance to the coast
line should be measured carefully.
Mountain displayed
on the radar display HL
Sea shore line not displayed
Fig 6-3: Sea shore line which is not displayed
Table 6-1 shows the graph indicating the relation between the target detection
distance and the radar reflection cross-sectional area (RCS) with regard to the type
and the height of the target in a situation in which the weather is good, the sea
state is calm and the radio wave propagation is normal. As revealed by this table,
even on the same sea shore line, detection distance greatly differs depending on
the height of the target from the surface of the sea. Furthermore, because the
target detection distance is greatly influenced by the shape and material of the
target and environmental conditions, such as the sea state, weather, and radio
wave propagation, caution should be taken when detecting distance of target.
6-3 [ ~Rc ] f}apanRodio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6 .TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM THE
~~~ -------------------------------
Table 6-1 : Relation between type and height of target and detection distance and RCS
Type of target Height from Detection distance RCS [ m2 ]
sea surface (NM)
(m)
X band S band X band S band
Sea shore line 60 20 20 50,000 50,000
Sea shore line 6 8 8 5000 5000
SOLAS target ship (>5000GT) 10 11 11 50 ,000 30,000

SOLAS target ship (>500GT) 5 8 8 1800 1000
Small boat with IMO standard 4 5.0 3.7 7,5 0,5

com patible radar reflector
Marine buoy with corner 3,5 4.9 3.6 10 1

reflector
Standard marine buoy 3,5 4.6 3.0 5 0,5
10-meter small boat without 2 3.4 3.0 2,5 1,4

radar reflector
Waterway location beacon 1 2.0 1.0 0,1
Detection distance shown in the above table may greatly

CD decrease depending on the shape of the target, sea state,
weather and radio wave propagation conditions .
[JRC] (Japan. Radio Co.,.lid. 6-4

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
• - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~U. .E~ - •
SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW

CLUTTER
In addition to the echo required for observing ships and land, radar video image
also includes unnecessary echo, such as reflection from waves on the sea surface
and reflection from rain and snow. Reflection from the sea surface is called "sea
clutter," and reflection from rain and snow is called "rain and snow clutter," and
those spurious waves must be eliminated by the clutter rejection function.
a . Sea clutter
Sea clutter appears as an image radiating outwardly from the center of the radar
display and changing depending on the size and the shape of waves. Generally, as
waves become larger, image level of the sea clutter is intensified and the clutter
far away is also displayed. When waves are large and the sea clutter level is high,
it is difficult to di stinguish sea clutter from a small boat whose reflection intensity
is weak. Accordingly, it is necessary to properl y adjust the sea clutter rejection
function. Table 6-2 shows the relation between the sea state (SS) showing the size
of waves generated by wind and the radar's detection probability.
Table 6-2 : Sea state and probability of target detection

S band radar (probability to detect a target at a distance of 0.4 NM)
RCS SS1 ~2 SS2~3 SS3~4 SS4~5
0.1m2 vt
0.5 m2 V v V-M M-NV
1m2 V v v V-M
X band radar (probability to detect a target at a distance of 0.7 NM)
RCS SS1-2 SS2~3 SS3~4 SS4~5
1m2 V-M M-NV
5m2 V V-M M-NV
10m2 V v v V-M
i. V: Detection probability of 80%
ii. M: Detection probability of 50%
iii. NV: Detection probability of less than 50%
6-5 [.JRC] 8opan RaditJ Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
~~~ -------------------------------
As shown in Table 6-2, the number of SS increases as the wind speed becomes
high and the waves become large. Table 6.2 reveals that detection probability
decreases from V (80 %) to NV (less than 50%) as the number of SS increases.
Therefore, even if the sea state is calm and a target clearly appears on the radar
display, when the sea state becomes rough, target detection probability decreases
resulting in difficulty of target detection by the radar.
Table 6-3 : Relation between Douglas sea state and average wind speed and significant
wave height
Sea state Average wind Significant. wave

speed (kn) height (m)'
0 <4 <0,2
1 5-7 0,6
2 7- 11 0,9
3 12-16 1,2
4 17-19 2,0
5 20-25 3,0
6 26-33 4,0
i. Significant wave height: an average of top N/3 higher waves when

the number of waves detected within a constant time duration is N
For example, in the case of a standard marine buoy, RCS of X band radar is 5m2
as shown in Table 6-1. When observing such a target in the sea state (SS3) in
which significant wave height exceeds 1.2 meters, detection probabili ty is M-NV,
as shown in Table 6-2, which indicates 50 % or less.
b. Rain and snow clutter

Rain and snow clutter is a video image that appears in a location where rain or
snow is falling. The image changes according to the amount of rain (or the
amount of snowfall). As precipitation increases, the image of rain and snow
clutter becomes intensi tied on the radar display, and in the case of localized heavy
rain, an image similar to the image indicating land is displayed in some cases.
Furthermore, because radio waves tend to attenuate due to rain and snow, the
ability to detect a target in the rain and snow clutter or a target beyond the rain and
snow clutter may decrease. The amount of attenuation depends on the
transmission frequency, antenna beam width, and the pulse length. Fig 6-4 and
Fig 6-5 show examples in which detection distance is reduced due to the influence
of precipitation. Because of this, a target, which clearl y appeared up to l 0 NM by
an X band radar (pulse width of0.8~s) when it was not raining, may become
dimly visible up to 5 NM when the amount of rain becomes 4 millimeters per
hour. Furthermore, when comparing the X band radar with the S band radar,
target detection distance decreases less when an S band radar is used, which
means it is influenced less by precipitation.
I.JRC] (Japan. Radio Co.,..lid. 6-6

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6 .3 SEA CLUTIER AND RAIN AND SNOW
----------------------------- ~~~--
IG
......... ,...~.""
; -+- ~_,,
~
~
~
14
12
- --e-- ~.,.. tl4 _ , . l'\ltlll' w...OO*
- -+- ,..,.••oro out """'"' ,......."li\OM
a-~- -4 -,."*" ·..,. ... ; - '
/
/
0>
.S
c
-~
10
~
/
I
-~ /
/
I
""
.!II I
I
:c 8
s:
v./
I
QJ
II I
I
u I I
§ I
I
l
.Ill I
1/
"0 I
I I
c I I
.Q I
g 11
/
I
I
~
~v _, /
/
/
I
.4'---
I
/
/
- ... -- - -
• ___.....-- ---
/
~ __........ . .
8 10 12 IG
Detection distance while it is not rainnin!iNM]
Fig 6-4: Decreased target detection distance by S band radar due to

precipitation
·-~-fllll-tfff....., ...... ""'

•r- _...._,._....tl)llef~ -/111 ......1IUII . .
- · - "~"IOIIotlt-IIW"*t •ijtftOtlft
2
a- ~nt~~ot• -tN ~ •idtN ...
/
/ ,.·I
.Q
0
/ /
/ If
____.
/ /"'"
v /"'"
/ / ~
v
/ /
v
/
.,B
I
___ ..
/ I
I
.... ...........
.. --- ---.. --
R'
-
~/
__ .a-- ___
0
!t.-- ---·--- _........ ---
0 8 10 12 14 16
Detection distance while it Is not rainnln!iNM]
Fig 6-5 : Decreased target detection distance by X band radar due to

precipitation
6-7 ("'RC] 8opan RadicJ Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
~LU*"f~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - •
c. Coping with sea cl utter and rain and snow clutter
When the weather is bad and the ocean is rough, the use of an S band radar is
effective because the radar is not influenced by sea clutter so much and
attenuation due to rain drops is small. When an X band radar is used, reducing the
pulse width will reduce the influence by spurious waves, and also the spurious
wave rejection function effectively works; therefore, the use of short pulse is
effective when the weather is bad. By using image processing functions PROCl 1
to 3, it is expected that spurious waves are further suppressed. Since optimal
settings for those items can be automatically made by using the function mode, it
is recommended that STORM or RAIN be used by selecting the function mode
when the weather is bad. For details of the function mode, see Section 3.9 "USE
FUNCTION KEY [USER]".
However, these functions may make some targets invisible, particularly targets
with higher speeds.
[.JRC ] f)apon Radio Co.,.lid. 6-8

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES
----------------------------------
FALSE ECHOES
The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist
actually. These false echoes appear by the following causes that are well known:
a. Shadow
Wben the radar scanner is installed near a funnel or mast, the echo of a target that
exists in the direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display
because the radar beam is reflected on the funnel or mast. Whether there are some
false echoes due to shadows can be checked monitoring the sea clutter returns, in
which there may be a part of weak or no returns.
Such shadows appear always in the same directions, which the operator should
have in mind in radar operation.
b. Side Lobe Effect

A broken-line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the
radar beam on the radar display. This type of false echo can easily be
discriminated when a target echo appears isolated. (see Fig 6-6)
HL
Fig 6-6: False echo
6-9 [.JRC I 8opan. Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 lnstruct1on Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES
----------------------------------
c. False Echo by Secondary Reflection
When a target exists near own ship, two echoes from the single target may appear
One of those echoes is the direct echo return from the target and the other is the
secondary reflection return from a mast or funnel that stands in the same direction
as shown in Fig 6-7.
Direct microwave
HL
Actual target
/
/ "
/
/
/
Radar /
/
scanner /
/
/~
Secondary reflection
Funnel of microwave
False echo from funnel
Fig 6-7: False echo by secondary reflection

d. False Echo by Multiple Reflection
When there is a large structure or ship with a high vertical surface near own shi p
as shown in Fig 6-8, multiple refection returns may appear on the radar display.
These echoes appear in the same intervals, of which the nearest echo is the true
echo of the target.
HL
•••••
Fig 6-8: False echo by multiple reflection
e. Second Time Echoes

The maximum radar detection range depends upon the height of the scanner and
11
the height of a target as described in the Section 6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE
HORIZON... If a so-called "duct" occurs on the sea surface due to a certain
weather condition, however, the radar beam may propagate to a abnorma lly long
distance, at which a target may be detected by the radar.
6-10
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE EC HOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES
-------------------------- ------- -
For instance, assuming that the pulse length is MP3 (on the repetition frequency
of 1400 Hz), the flrst pul se is reflected from a target at about 58 NM or more and
received during the next pulse repetition time. In this case, a false echo (second
time echo) appears at a position that is about 58 NM shorter than the actual
distance. If the fa lse echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display, the true distance
of the target is 5+58=63 NM. On the pulse length is SPl (on the repetition
frequency of 2250Hz), a false echo may appear at a position that is about 36 NM
shorter than the actual distance.
This type of false echo can be discriminated by changing over the range scale (the
repetition frequency), because the distance of the target changes accordingly.
If second time echo is appeared, the use of Economy mode in PRF menu is
effective. Otherwise, Stagger Trigger menu set to on. (See Section 3.8.3 "Set
Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)").
f. Radar Interference
When another radar equipment using the same frequency band as that on own ship
is near own ship, a radar interference pattern may appear on the radar display.
This interference pattern consists of a number of spots wh ich appear in various
forms. In many cases, these spots do not always appear at the same places, so that
they can be discriminated from the target echoes. (See Fig 6-9)
HL HL
Fig 6-9: Radar interference
If radar equipment causing an interference pattern and this radar are of the same
model, their transmitting repetition frequency is nearly the same. As a result,
interference patterns may be displayed concentrically.
In this case, the interference patterns cannot be eliminated by using only the
interference reflector function, so ine-tune the transmitting repetition
frequency.(See Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)")
An interference suppress ing effect can be heightened by applying a different

transmitting repetition frequency to the interference pattern source radar and this
radar.
6 - 11 [ .JRC I 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART)
----------------------------------
DISPLAY OF RADAR
TRANSPONDER(SART)
The SART (Search and rescue Radar Transponder) is a survival device authorized
by the GMDSS (Global Maritime Distress and Safety System), which is used for
locating survivors in case that a distress accident occurs at sea. The SART is
designed to operate in the 9 GHz frequency band.
When receiving the 9 GHz radar signal (interrogating signal) transmitted from the
radar equipment on a rescue ship or search aircraft, the SART transmit a series of
response signals to inform the distress position to the rescue and search party.
This radar provides a shortcut item to make settings for SART
signal reception . Execution of this item automatically switches
to the setting for SART reception.lt also functions for detect the
beacon or target enhancer.
Procedures
l) Press [RANGE+] or (RANGE -1 key to set the radar range to 6 NM
or 12 NM.
2) Set the SART display mode according to the procedures below.
Main
~ 3. RADAR Menu
~ 9. SART
On SARTON
Off SARTOFF
With the SART display mode set to ON, settings as shown below ar e made automatically.
Sea clutter control Minimum (Most counterclockwise)

AUTO SEA function OFF
Rain and Snow Clutter Control (RAIN) Minimum
Auto Rain and Snow Clutter function OFF
(AUTO RAIN)
TUNE control No tuning (to weaken clutter
echoes)
Interference rejection (IR) OFF
PROCESS OFF
[.JRC) 8 apan. Radio Co.,.lid. 6 - 12

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF RADAR TRANSPONDER (SART)
----------------------------------
[Exa mple of Display]
Land
SART code
Other Ships
Position of
SART
. - - - - - - - - - - Attention - -- - - -- - - - -- - - - - - - - - ,
• When the SART function is set to ON, small targets around own
ship will disappear from the radar display. So it is necessary to
exercise full surveillance over the conditions around own ship by
visual watch in order to avoid any collision or stranding.
If two or more sets of radar equipment are installed on own ship,
use one set of 9 GHz band radar for detection of the SART signal
and operate others as normal radars for avoiding collision,
monitoring targets around own ship, and checking on own ship'
s posit ion and avoidance of stranding.
After end of detecting the START signal, turn the START display
off. Then the radar returns normally to the nautical mode.
6 - 13 (JRC ] gopan Rac/i.o Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FAlSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.6 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART
----------------------------------
6.6 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART
AAJS-SART is an equipment to di splay the position of distress ship on the AIS

indicator in ship station or coast station when the distress occurs.
It is usable as an alternate equipment of SART(Search And Rescue Transponder).
When connecting AlS indicator to RADAR, it is possible to display AIS-SART

symbol on the RADAR screen.
6.6.1 Display
When receiving AIS-SART signal, AIS-SART symbol is displayed on the
RADAR screen.
AIS..SART
Symbol
l--
"'-~_~ - ·~·::--
Fig 6-10: Example of AIS-SART Symbol display
For details of AIS-SART Symbol, refer to Section 5. 1.2.2 "Types and Definitions
of AlS Target Symbols".
[ ~Rc ] 8apanRadio Co.,.lid. 6 - 14

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6 TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.6 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART
----------------------------------
6.6.2 Numeric Display
When the sleeping AIS-SART symbol is clicked once, the symbol changes into
activated AIS-SART symbol. And then activated AIS-SART symbo l is clicked
once more, the symbol changes into numeric displayed AIS-SART symbol and
their information is displayed.
Fig 6-11 : Example of numeric information display of AIS-SART
Depending on operation condition, NAY Status is displayed as follows.
Normal operation: SART ACTIVE(14)
Test operation: SART TEST{15)
Notice: AIS-SART function is available in the display software ver. 01 .01 .
As for method of confirming software version, refer to Section 8.3.1.6

6-15 [~Rc ] 8apan.Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.6 DISPLAY OF AIS.SART
----------------------------------
!.JRC) (Japan Radio Co., .lid. 6 - 16

SECTION 7
lllll l l • I 111 11 1
II
II

7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION ............................................................. 7-1
7 .1.2 GYRO 1/F Setting .............................................................................7-2
7.1.3 Tuning .............................................................................................7-5
7.1.5 Range Adjustment ...........................................................................7-7
7.1.6 Navigator Setting (Device) .............................................................7-8
7.1.7 Setting of True Bearing Value ........................................................ 7-9
7 .1.8 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height) ..................................... 7-9
7.1.9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting) .................................................. 7-10
7.2 SETTINGS ............................................................................................7-12
7.2.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting) ....................... 7-12
7.2.3 TNt Blank Setting (TNt Blank) ...................................................... 7-17
[.JRC ] f)apan. Radio Co.,J'Jd.

7 .2. 7 Date Time Setting ..........................................................................7-20
7 .2.8 Input Installation Information ....................................................... 7-21
7.2.9 Setting the Alarm System ............................................................. 7-22
7 .2.1 0 Network Setting (Network) ........................................................... 7-26
7 .2.11 LAN Port Setting) .......................................................................... 7-29
7.3 ADJUSTMENT ....................................................................... ............... 7-32
7 .3.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level) ........................................ 7-32
7 .3.2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function (TT) ............................ 7-33
7 .3.3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS) ..................... 7-35
7 .3.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor ........................................... 7-37
7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU ........................................................................7-39
7 .4.1 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch) ....................................... 7-39
7 .4.2 Initialization of Memory Area( Area Initial) ................................... 7-40
7.4.5 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update) ............. 7-44
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
This section describes the electrica l adjustment procedures to be performed by

service engineers during system installation.
The bearing adjustment value is saved to non-volatile memory in the scanner.

Other settings are saviedto non-volati le memory in the radar process unit.
& cAUTION
• Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment
except authorized service persons. If wrong setting is
carried out, this may cause unstable operation.
• Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation.
Otherwise, the radar performance may be affected,
resulting in an accident or trouble.
7.1.1 How to Open the Serviceman Menu (Service Man Menu)

Procedures
I ) Hold down the Main button at the
lower right of the display together
with the left key.
The Code Input menu wi ll appear.
2) Left-click the o button.
The Serviceman Menu will appear.
Fig 7-1 : Code Input
7- 1 [JRC] 8 apanRadi.oCo.,Ltd.
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SEITINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SEITI NGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
7.1.2 GYRO 1/F Setting
a. Gyro Settings (STEP or SYNC)

The GYRO IfF circuit of the system is designed to be compatible with most types
of gyro compasses by si mply setting the switches.
Step motor type: DC24V to DC1 00V
Synchro-motor type: Primary excitation voltage 50 to 115 VAC
Before power-on operation can be performed, the switches S l, S2, S5, S6, S7 and
jumper TB l 05 on the gyro interface circuit (PC420 l ) must be set in accordance
with the type of your gyro compass by performing the procedure below.
The switches are factory-set for a gyration ratio of 180X and the step motor type.
Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own ship before
starting the procedure below.
Procedures
J) Set 55 to "OFF".
The gyro com pass and GYRO 1/ F are cut off.
2) Set 56 and 57 in accordance with the type of your gyro compass.
There are two types of gy ro compasses: one type outputs a step signal, and the other type
outputs a synchro signal. Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own
ship before setting the switches S6 and S7.
Synchro signal: Set the switches to [SYNC] .
Step sig nal: Set the switches to (STEP].
3) Set the DIP switch 51 in accordance with the type of the

compass.
The items to be set are listed below. For the settings, refer to Table 7-1 : Gyro and Log
Select Switches (S I DIP Switch).
S1 -1: Type of gyro signal (step/synchro)
S 1-2/3: Gyration ratio of gyro compass
S1-4: Gyration direction of gyro compass
S1 -5: Type of log signal (pulse/synchro)
S1 -7/8: Ratio of log signal
[JRC ] 8apan.Radio Co.,.l.'id. 7-2

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 1 SETIINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
4) Set the DIP switch 52.
The items to be set are listed below. For the setting, refer to Table 7-2 : Gyro and Log Select
Switches (S2 DIP Switch).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
5) Confirm the settings of the DIP switch 510.
The OJ P switch must be set as shown below. Do not change any of the settings.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
6) Set the jumper TB1 05.
The TB I 05 is set for using a low-voltage step signal.
1-2 connected: Setting for normal use
2-3 connected: Setting for a step signal of 22 V or less
7) Connect the gyro signal and log signal cables to the terminal
block.
8) Set 55 to "ON".
The gyro compass and GY RO 1/ F are connected.
9) After power-on operation, make sure of the radar video and the
operation with the true bearing value.
See the Section 7. 1. 7 "Setting ofTrue Bearing Value".
10) If the true bearing value of the radar equipment is reversed,

change the setting of the switch 51-4.
7- 3 [ ~RC ] 8apan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
Table 7-1 : Gyro and Log Select Switches (S1 DIP Switch)
STEP ON
SYNC OFF
360X OFF OFF
<.9
Ci5 180X ON OFF
0
0:: 90X OFF ON
>-
<.9 36X ON ON
DIRECTION REV ON
NOR OFF
TYPE SYNC ON
PULSE OFF
<.9 PULSE / Don't care OFF

(j) NM
100P / 30X ON ON
<.9
0_I
200P / 90X OFF ON
400P / 180X ON OFF
BOOP / 360X OFF OFF
52 SETTING TABLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LOG ALARM ON
OFF
GYRO SIMULATOR ON
OFF
LOG SIMULATOR ON
<.9 OFF
z
~
w
N.A. Don't care any
(j) GYRO ALARM TIME Ss ON
0::
w 0.2s OFF
I
1-
0 HEADING SENSOR SOURCE NMEA(HDT/THS) ON
GYRO SIGNAL OFF
NMEA BAUDRATE SETTING 4800 OFF OFF
9600 ON OFF
19200 OFF ON
38400 ON ON
[.JRC) 8apanRadio Co.,..ltd. 7-4

----------------------------------
7.1.3 Tuning
Adjust the tuning control for the transmitter and receiver.
The turning control should be adjusted when the system is installed or when the
magnetron is replaced.
7.1.3.1 Tune Adjustment
Procedures
I) Set a 48 NM range or more.
2) Open the Serviceman Menu.
3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Tune

Adjustment menu.
1. Adjust Menu
~ 1. Tune Adjustment
4) Adjust the tune adjustment value so that the tune indicator bar at
the upper left of the display is maximized.
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 " Increasing or decreasing a
numeric val ue".
5) Move the cursor onto the ENT button, and left-click .
7.1.3.2 Tune Indicator Adjustment)

Set the scale mark when the tune indicator bar reaches the max imum point.
Procedures
I ) Set a 48 NM range or more.
3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Tune

Indicator Adjust menu.
1. Adjust Menu
~ 4. TXRX Adjustment
~ 3. Tune Indicator Adjust
4) Adjust the tune indicator adjustment value by operating the

+ I button so that the tune indicator bar at the upper
left of the display reaches a point of 80 to 90% of the maximum.
For inputs to the va lue input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a
numeric value".
5) Move the cursor onto the ENT button, and left-click .
7-5 [ ~RC I 8opan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
• With the JMA-9110-6XA or JMA-9110-6XAH
Adjusted this menu in factory.
Don't touch this adjustment menu in normal case.
When tune indicator and echo peak are mismatch, adjust this menu.
7.1 .3.3 Tune Peak Adjustment

Adjust the tune indicator and echo peak.
Procedures
1) Adjust tuning by referring to Section 7 .1.3.1 "Tune Adjustment"
2) Adjust tune indicator by referring to Section 7.1.3.2 "Tune

Indicator Adjustment)"
3) Set the 48NM range or more.
5) Open the Tune Peak Adjustment menu by performing the

1. Adjust Menu
---7 4. TXRX Adjustment
---7 2. Tune Peak Adjustment
6) Adjust the tune peak adjustment to get maximum echoes on a

display when the tune indicator is maximum.
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a
numeric value".
7) Move the cursor onto the ENT button, and left-click.
(.JRC] gapan.RadioCo., .lid. 7 -6

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
7.1.4 Bearing Adjustment
Make adjustment so that the bearing of the target measured with the ship ' s
compass matches the bearing of the target echo on the radar display.
Procedures
I ) Select H Up for the bearing presentation. Set video processing
(PROC) to PROC Off
2) Measure the bearing of an adequate target (e.g., a ship at anchor,

a breakwater, or a buoy) relative to own ship's heading.
4) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Bearing

Adjustment menu.
1. Adjust Menu
-7 2. Bearing Adjustment
For inputs to the va lue input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increas ing or decreasi ng a
numeric value".
Make adjustment by the 0. 1•.
5) Adjust the bearing adjustment value by operating the I +

button so that the target measured in step 2) is adjusted to
the correct bearing.
6) Left-click the ENT button to determine the value.
7.1.5 Range Adjustment

Make adjustment so that the range of a target on the radar display is shown
correctly.
Procedures
I) Search the radar display for a target of which range is already
known.
7-7 [ .JRC I aapan RadicJ Co.,.I.'Jd.

JMA-9100 lnstrud!on Manual > 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Range
Adjustment menu.
1. Adjust Menu
~ 3. Range Adjustment
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 " Increasing or decreasing a
numeric value".
4) Adjust the range adjustment value by operating the I +

button so that the target measured in step 1) falls in the correct
range.
7.1.6 Navigator Setting (Device)

Determine whether to connect navigators to the radar equipment.
Only the navigators set to ON here can be used.
Procedures
l) Open the Serviceman Menu.
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Device

Installation menu.
2. Installation Menu
~ 9. Next
~ 3. Device Installation
3) Select On for navigators connected to the radar equipment,

and Off for navigators not connected.
Gyro : Gyro (via GYRO 1/F)
Compass : Compass (Compliant with IEC61162)
GPS Compass : GPS Compass (JRC)
LOG : Log (via GYRO 1/F)

2.AXW : 2-axis log (Speed over water: Compliant with IEC61162)
2AX.G : 2-axis log (Speed over ground: Compliant with IEC61162)
GPS : GPS (Compliant with IEC61162)
(JRC] gapan. Radio Co.. .lid. 7-8

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
7.1 .7 Setting of True Bearing Value
If GYRO IfF is used to input a gyro signal, the true bearing value indicated by the
master gyro does not match the value indicated by the radar equipment only in a
rare case. In this case, perform the fol lowing procedure to adjust the true bearing
value of the radar equipment to the va lue of the master gyro.
Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the true
bearing value setting menu.
Main
- 6. NAV EquiJ:>ment Setting
- 1. Gyro Setting
2) Input the master gyro value to the value input screen.
For inputs to the va lue input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a
nume ric value".
7.1.8 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height)

Set the height of radar antenna above sea level. Do not change thi s setting
carelessly.
Procedures
1) Measure the height of radar antenna above sea level in advance.
3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Antenna

Height setting menu.
1. Adjust Menu
- 4. TXRX Adj ustment
- 1. Anten na Heig ht
The Antenna Heig ht menu will open.
4) Select the setting that matches the antenna height measured in

step 1).
7-9 [.JRC] !Japan Radit:J Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYST EM O PERATION > 7.1 SETIINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
7.1.9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting)
Set the own ship's CCRP location, radar antenna installation location, and GPS
installation location.
CCRP : Up to four locations can be input. (One location selected when used)
Radar antenna: Up to eight radar antennas can be input. (Automatically selected in

response to ISW operation)
GPS : Up to four locations can be input. (One location selected when used)
Procedures
1) Measure the CCRP location, radar antenna location, and GPS
antenna location in advance.
3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the CCRP

Setting menu.
~ 4. CCRP Setting
4) Specify the ship length for Length at the upper right of the CCRP
Setting Menu, and the ship width for Beam.
5) Move the cursor onto the CCRPl X, Y value, and left-click to

input the CCRP1 location.
When X > 0, the CCRP is on the starboard s ide of the ship.
When X < 0, it is on the port side.
6) To input the second CCRP, click the CCRP2 button to display the
CCRP2 X,Y value, and input the value in the same manner for
step 5).
S imila rly, input the th ird a nd subsequent CCRPs.
7) Repeat the above steps to input the GPS location(s) and radar
antenna location(s).
8) If multiple CCRP locations and GPS locations are input, select

the CCRP location and GPS location to be used by pressing the
buttons at the upper left of the menu.
9) Click the o.Exit to close the CCRP Setting menu.
(JRC] 8opan. Radio Co.,.i'Jd. 7 - 10

----------------------------------
Sm
Example : I
~
I
RADAR Antenna2
X 5m , Y 250m
Length 300m
GPS1
250 m X -10m , Y 30m CCRP1
--1--
---~~~------ ------
RADAR Antenna1
X Om, Y 15m
Beam 30m
7-11 [ JRC ) 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 InstructiOn Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM O PERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
-
--
-~~--=
-- -
- --
- SETTINGS

&cAUTION
7.2.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting)

External sensor signals are input to the radar equipment through a communication
port. The radar equipment has ten communication ports. For signals to be input
from sensors or to be output to the sensors, communication ports need to be set in
accordance with the sensors.
7.2.1.1 Baud Rate Setting (Baud Rate)

Set the baud rate of the signal to be input to the COM port.
Procedures
I ) Open the Serviceman Menu.
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Baud

Rate setting menu.
~ 5. COM Port Setting
1. Baud Rate
[..JRC] 8apan.Radi.o Co., .ltd. 7 - 12

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > ?.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
3) Set the baud rate of the port to be set.
1. COMPASSi : 4800(NMEA)/9600(NSK)/38400(fast NMEA)ii bps
2. MAl NTENANCE/LOG : 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps
3. NAV1 : 1200/4800/9600/ 38400 bps
4. NAV2 : 1200/4800/9600/ 38400 bps
5. ALARM : 1200/4800/9600/ 38400 bps
6. JARPAiii : 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps
7. A IS : 1200/4800/9600/ 38400 bps
8. A RPAiv : 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps
9. COMV: 1200/4800/9600/38400/ 115200 bps
i. The compass port is a receive-only port that is dedicated to COMPASS signals.

ii. The bold values are factory-set.
iii. The JARPA port is a transmit-only port that is dedicated to JRC ARPA signals.
iv. The ARPA port is a transmit-<1nly port.
v. The COM port connector is 0-sub 9pin.
7.2.1.2 Reception Port Setting(RX Port)

Set the numbers of ports for receiving signals from sensors.
There are two methods for receiving signals: specifying a port for each sensor, or
using the automatic recogn ition function without specify ing ports.
Procedures
I) Open the Serviceman Menu.
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the RX Port

setting menu.
2. RX Port
Settable sensor GPS, DLOG , Aiarm , Depth, Temperature , Wind , Current,

signals ROT, RSA
Selectable ports When the automatic recognition AUTO

function is used:
When ports are specified: L 0 G , N A V 1 , N A V 2,

ALARM, COM
7 - 13 [.JRC] 8 opan. Radi.o Co.,.l.td.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION> 7.2 SETIINGS
----------------------------------
7.2.1 .3 Reception Sentence Setting (RX Sentence)
Set signal sentences to be received from sensors.
The system is factory-set for using all sentences. To receive only specified
sentences, select No Use for sentences which are not necessary.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the RX

Sentence setting menu.
--7 5. COM Port Setting
--7 3. RX Sentence
3) Select the sentences to be used by the sensors to be set.
Selection value: Use or No Use can be set for each sentence.
1. GPS(LLICOG/SOG) : GGNRMC/RMNGNS/GLLNTG
2 . GPS(WPT/Time) : GGNRMC/RMB/BWC/BWRIZDA
3. Depth : DPT/DBK/DBT/DBS
4. Wind : MWV/MWD
5. Current :
~Data Set Number : 0-9. Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data
Set Number. (Initial value 0)
~ Layer A : Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer A

by Layer Number. (Initial value 3)
-+Layer 8 : Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer B

-+ Layer C : Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer C

6. Autopilot : APB
[~RC ] 8apan Radio Co., .ltd. 7 - 14

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 7 SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 2 SETIINGS
------------ -- --------------------
7.2.1.4 Transmission Port Setting (TX Port)
For each sentence, set a communication port through which signals are
transmitted to sensors.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TX Port

setting menu
--4 5. COM Port Setting
4. TX Port
3) Select the communication port through which the sentence to be

set is output.
Settable sentences TTM(TT), TLL(TT), TTD(TT), TLB(TT), OSD, RSD, ALR,

ACK, TTM(AIS), TL L (AIS), TTD (AIS), TLB(AIS),
RemoteMaintenance, JRC-ARPA, APB, BOD, GGA, GLL_
RMC, RMB , VTG, XTE, BWC, HOT, THS
Selectable ports MAINTENANCE, NAV1, NAV2, ALARM, JARPA, ARPA,
COM
4) Select the output format, talker, and transmission interval.
Signals for which the above items can be set:
Item Name Option

NMEA0183 APB, BOD, GGA, V1.5
Output Format GLL, RMC, RMB,
V2.0
VTG, XTE, BWC,
HOT V2.3i
NMEA0183 APB, BOD,RMB, STANDARD : The talker is RA .
Talke~i XTE, BWC, HOT, GP : The talker is GP.
THS
NMEA0183 TX APB, BOD, GGA, Set an interval in the range 1 to 9 seconds.
Interval GLL, RMC, RMB,
VTG, XTE, BWC,
HOT, THS
i. The bold values are factory-set.
ii. For TTM, TLL, OSD, RSD, and ALR, the talker is always RA .
For GGA, GLL, RMC, and VTG, the talker is always GP.
7 - 15 [~ Rc ] 8apan.Radic Co.,.fid.
----------------------------------
7.2.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank)
In order not to display radar echoes, set a sector range and stop transmission in the
bearing range. Three types of sectors can be created.
The sector blank function operates in the relative bearing with the bow as the
benchmark.
Notice
•Displays the Magnetron Current bar instability indicating in sector blank area, but it
is normal operating.
•For how to magnetron current to check, see Section 8.3.1 .7 "Magnetron Current".
7.2.2.1 Sector Blank Function On/Off (Sector1 ,2 and 3)
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Sector

Blank setting menu.
~ 3. Sector Blank
3) Set the sector blank number Sectorl , Sector2 , or Sector3 with

which the sector blank function operates.
The system a llows th e use of up to three sector blank areas.
Set each secto r blank area to on or off.
On The sector blank function of the number is operated.
Off The sector blank function of the number is stopped.
7.2.2.2 Sector Blank Area Creation (Make Sector 1,2,3)
Procedures

Blank setting menu.
~ 3. Sector Blank
3) Select the sector blank number ( Make Sector 1 to Make Sector 3 ) for
sector creation, and click the Make Sector button in the menu.
The selected sector blank wi ll be made.
(.JRC) 8opan.Radio Co.,.i'Jd. 7 - 16

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETIINGS
----------------------------------
4) Set the starting azimuth of the sector blank by operating the
[EBL] dial, and left-click the ENT button.
The start angle of the sector blank will be set.
5) Set the ending azimuth of the sector blank by operating the [EBL]
dial, and left-click the ENT button.
The end angle of the sector blank will be set.
7.2.3 TNI Blank Setting (TNI Blank)

Set a sector range and stop tuning operation in the bearing range.
If a structure such as the mast is close to the radar antenna, automatic tuning
operation may become unstable. In this case, set a TNI blank in the djrection of
the structure in order to stabilize the tuning operation.
Only one type of a sector can be created. The TNI blank function operates in the
relative bearing with the bow as the benchmark.
7.2.3.1 TNI Blank Function On/Off (Sector)
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TNI

Blank setting menu.
--7 9. Next
--7 2. TNI Blank
3) Select the item lt. TNI Blank in the menu, and turn on or off the TNI
blank function.
On The TNI blank function is operated.
Off The TNI blank function is stopped .
7.2.3.2 TNI Blank Area Creation (Make Sector)

Procedures
7 - 17 [ JRC I 8opan RaclicJ Co., .lid.

JMA·9100 Instruction Manual > ?.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
Blank setting menu .
---7 9. Next
---7 2. TNI Blank
3) Left-click the 2. Make Sector button in the menu.
The selected sector blank will be made.
4) Set the starting azimuth of the TNI blank by operating the [EBL]
dial, and left-click the ENT 1 button.
The start angle of the TN! blank will be set.
5) Set the ending azimuth of the TNI blank by operating the [EBL]
The end angle of the TN! blank will be set.
7.2.4 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit (Output Pulse)

Set the output va lue of bearing pulses from the scanner unit. The system can set
2048 pulses or 4096 pulses. This setting is enabled only when the scanner unit of
25 or 30 kW is used.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Output

Pulse setting menu.
1. Adjust Menu
---7 6. Output Pulse
3) Set the number of pulses to be output by the scanner unit.
2048 :2048 pulses per antenna rotation (Recommended value)
4096 :4096 pulses per antenna rotation
i. If a 10 kW antenna is used, 2048 is always set.
(.JRC ) (japan Radio Co., .ltd. 7 - 18

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 .2 SETIINGS
--------- -- --- --- -----------------

7.2.5 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave)
Place the system in the Slave mode when it is to be operated as the sub-display
that displays radar echoes by using radar signals from other radar equjpment.
The input value of externally input bearing pulses can be set. The system can set
2048 pulses or 4096 pulses.
7.2.5.1 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave)
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the

installation setting menu.
3) Select Slave for the item 12. Master Slave in the menu.
Master :The system operates as radar equipment while the own

antenna is connected .
Slave :The system operates as a sub-display while the signal

cable of other radar equipment is connected.
7.2.5.2 Setting of Input Bearing Pulse (Input BP Pulse)
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the second

page of the installation setting menu.
~ 9. Next
3) Set the number of pulses for the item !1. Input BP Count in the
menu.
2048 2048 pulses per antenna rotation

7-19 [..JRC ] f)apan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
7.2.6 Language Setting (Language)
The system is designed to switch between display languages, Japanese and
English.
Procedures

language setting menu.
~ 8. Language
3) Select the language to be used.
1. English
2. Japanese
3. Other
i. Other is an option to display character strings created by our overseas agents.

Ask the overseas agent or our sales department if your language is supported. To
determine the selected language, tum the power off, and then tum it on.
7.2.7 Date Time Setting

To display time, the local time, local date, and time-zone difference must be set.
However, if the "ZDA" sentence ofNMEA0183 is received, time can be

automatically displayed.
Procedures
I ) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Date
Time setting menu.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
6. Date Time Setting
~
The Date Time Setting menu wi ll open.
2) Set information about date and time

2)-1 . UTC/LMT (Time display system)
vrc : Universal Time Coordinate
vrc cSJ : UTC (System Time)
LMT CSJ : LMT (System Time)
[.JRC] 8apan.Radio Co.,.J'Jd. 7-20

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
2)-2. LMT Date
Input the date in local time.

2)-3. LMT Time

2)-4. Time Zone
Input the time-zone difference between the tmi versal time and local time.
2)-5. Display Style
Set one of the following date display formats.
YYY'fMM-oo ex) 2007-12-31
Mr+loo,YYYY ex) DEC 31 , 2007
oo Mr+l , YYYY ex) 31 DEC, 2007
2)-6. Synchronize with GPS
A ZDA sentence sent by the GPS is used, thereby displaying time

synchronized with the GPS time.
on li : Time synchronized with the G PS time

Off Time not synchronized with the GPS time
i. If On is selected for this item but a ZDA sentence is not input, the system
internal clock function is used to display the date and time.
7.2.8 Input Installation Information

The system can input installation information.
Procedures

Installation Information setting menu.
Main
~ 1. Installation Information
3) Input the installation information.
For the input method on the numeric value and character input screens, see Section 3.3.4
Date Input the date of installed system.
Name Input the name of installation personel.
Company Input the name of radar installer.
7 -21 [.JRC) gopan. Radit:J Co.,.fid.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 7 SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
7.2.9 Setting the Alarm System
7.2.9.1 Setting the reset interval (Reset Interval)

This function enables the control of WMRST terminal (on the terminal board
circuit). The reset signal is turned on when operation in a set period of time.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Reset

Interval menu.
--+ 6. Alarm System
--+ 1. Watch Alarm
--+ 1. Reset Interval
3) Input the value to be set.
For how to input nume ric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3 .4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Cha racter Input menu".
7.2.9.2 Setting the Trackball Threshold

This function enables the control of WMRST termina l (on the terminal board
circuit).
The reset signal is turned off when trackball is moved, that caused by vibration.ff
trackball move distance go over the threshold (dot unit) w hen reset signal is
turned on.
Procedures

Trackball Threshold menu.
--+ 6. Alarm System
--+ 1. Watch Alarm
--+ 2. Trackball Threshold
For how to input nume ric data on the nume ric value input screen, sec Section 3.3.4
"Operation on N umeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input menu".
[.JRC) gapan.Radio Co.,.J.'Jd. 7 - 22

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
--------------- ---- ---------------

7.2.9.3 Setting the relay output (Relay Output)
This function enables the control of ARPAALM terminal (on the terminal board
circuit).
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Relay

Output menu.
~ 6. Alann System
--t 2. Relay Output
3) Left-click the 1. Relay Output Mode button in the menu.
The Relay Output mode is switched.
Continuous : The output is continuously controlled.
Intennittent : The output is intermittenly controlled.
4) Click the item button correspond ing to the item to be changed.
The item can be turned on I off.
On : The relay output is turned on when alarm have issued.
Off : The relay output is not turned on when alarm have issued .
2. TT CPA/TCPA : There is a dangero us target. (tracked target)
3. AJS CPA/TCPA : There is a dangerous target. (AIS target)
4. New Target : A new target is acquired in the a utomatic acquisition zone.
s. Lost : There is a lost target. (Target Tracking I AIS).
7.2.9.4 Setting the ALR output (ALR Output)

This function enables the control of ALR port (See Section 7 .2. 1 "Communication
Port Setting (COM Port Setting)").
Procedures
l ) Open the Serviceman Menu.
7-23 [..JRC] 8apan.Radio Co.,.J.'id.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 2 SETIINGS
----------------------------------
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the ALR
Output menu.
~ 6. Alarm System
~ 2. Relay Output
3) Click the item button corresponding to the item to be changed.
The item is turned on I ofT.
On : The ALR sentence is output when alarm have issued.
Off : The ALR sentence is not output when alarm have issued.
1. System Alarm : The internal alarm.
2. TT/AJS Alarm : Target Tracking Alarms and AIS Function Alarms.
7.2.9.5 Setting the External Acknowledgement (External ACK Setting)

This function enables the contro l of system when ACK sentence have received.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the External

ACK Setting menu.
~ 6. Alarm System
~ 5. External ACK Setting
3) Click the item button corresponding to the menu to be changed.
Critical Alarm : CPAffCPA alarm.
Normal Alarm : Exept Critical Alarm.
[JRC] aopan.Radio Co.,.l'id. 7-24

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 S ETTINGS
----------------------------------
The item is switched.
IAudio : Setting of alarm sound .
- On : The alarm sound is not stopped

acknowridgement have received.
when
- Off The alarm sound is stopped

when
IIndication I :Setting of alarm indication .

- Ughtning : The alarm indication brinking is stopped when
-+ Brinking : The alarm indication brinking is not stopped
when acknowridgement have received.o
IAcknowledge State I :Setting of ALR sentence.
- A;ACK
V;UNACK
: Add acknowridgement to ALR sentence.
: Add no acknowridgement (unrecognized) to ALR

sentence.
7.2.9.6 Setting the Alarm Buzzer (Sound Output Mode)

Th is function enables the control of alarm buzzer.
Procedures

ACK Setting menu.
---7 6. Alarm System
---7 4. Sound Output Mode
On Offl and Off2
Setting and Arann Function
Alarm Setting Operation Operation CPA/ New Lost NAV System ISW
Miss TCPA Target
On G)
Offl G) ®
Off2 G) ® G) ® G)
G): Followed by Buzzer Volume menu setting.

®: Alarm Buzzer is turned off.
@: If Relay Output menu is turned on when Alam Buzzer is turned off. If Relay Output menu is turned off when Alam
Buzzer is turned on.
For how to setting Buzzer Volume menu , see Section 3.8.6 "Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume)".
7-25 [.JRC) 8apanRadio Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
7.2.10 Network Setting (Network)
The system can receive data from other system via the JRC LAN. The purpose of
synchronized wi th datum in JRC-LAN network.
To connect JRC-LAN , LAN cable and HUB (option) is
necessary. For details, contact the JRC offices.
• connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower that performance.
• Accepted Devices
RADAR : JMA-7100/9100/5300MK2 Series
ECDIS : JMA-9018/7018
Chart RADAR : JMA-9008 Series
Conning Display : JMA-901 8-CON/701 8-CON
Route planning system : JAN-1186
Navigation workstation : NDC-1186
GPS/DGPS : JLR-7500/7800
• Receivable Data
[1] Route Data
The system can display the route created by other JRC navigation equipements. Re fe r to
Section 3.7 "USE ROUTE FUNCTION" .
When the system display Route which are created in the ECDIS ,
following items are not displayed.
• XTL
• Arrival Radius
• ROT
• Turn Radius
• Time Zone
• Sail
[2] Sensor Data

The system can rece ive sensor data (Heading, Speed etc ... ) from other system (ECDIS,
Chart RADAR etc... ).
[3] AIS Data
The system can receive AIS data from AlS.
[4] Selected GPS number
Selected G PS number can be synchronized.
[5] Day/Night mode, operation panel brilliance.
Day/Night mode and operation panel brilliance can be synchroni zed.
[~RC ] gopan Radio Co.,.lid. 7-26

----------------------------------
7.2.10.1 Network Function Setting (Network Function)
Turning on/off the network function.
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Network

Function setting menu.
~ 9. Next
~ 4. Network
3) Select the item 11. Network Function I in the menu, and turn on or off
the Network Function.
on : The Network Function is operated.
Off : The Network Function is stopped.
7 .2.1 0.2 Sensor Priority Setting

The system can receive data from 2 sensors. If the same sentences are received
from 2 sensors, the system use primary system's data.
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Sensor

Priority setting menu.
~ 9. Next
~ 4. Network
~ 3. Sensor Priority
3) Select the data source sensor for each priority.
11. Primary : High priority sensor (Factory-set: No.1 ECDIS
12. Secondary I : Low priority sensor (Factory-set: No.2 ECDIS
Settable sensors
No.1 ECDIS No.1 FFD Conning Display No.2 Data Server No.3 Remote GPS
No.2 ECDIS No.2 FFD No.1 Converter Unit Console Conning Nonei
No.3 ECDIS No.3 FFD No.2 Converter Unit NAVW/S
No.4 ECDIS No.4 FFD No.1 Alart 1/F No.1 GPS
No.1 MFD No.1 Chart RADAR No.2 Alart 1/F No.2 GPS
No.2 MFD No.2 Chart RADAR Port Conning No.3 GPS
No.3 MFD No.3 Chart RADAR STAB Conning No.1 Remote GPS
No.4 MFD No.4 Chart RADAR No.1 Data Server No.2 Remote GPS
i. if you selected "None", the system does not receive data.
7 - 27 [~RC ] gapan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
7 .2.1 0.3 Synchronization Setting
Day/Night mode and operation panel brilliance can be synchronized.
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the

Synchronization setting menu.
~ 9. Next
~ 4. Networl<
~ 4. Synchronization
3) Select the 11. Day/ Night I or 12.Keyboard I to be synchronized.

On : Day/Night and operation panel brilliance are sinchronized .
Off : Day/Night and operation panel brilliance are not sinchronized.
['-'RC] 8apan.Radio Co.,.i'Jd. 7 - 28

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
7.2.11 LAN Port Setting)
synchronized with datum in JRC-LAN network
necessa ry. For details, contact the JRC offices.
•connecting PC or other maker's system may cause a lower that performance.
7.2.11.1 Transmission Setting (TX Setting)

For each sentence, turn on/off transmission.
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the TX

Setting menu.
--t 9 . Next
--t 5. LAN Port Setting
--t l.TXSettin
3) Set on/off for each sensor.
On : The sentence is tran smitted.
Off : The sentence is not transmitted.
These sentences can be turned on/ofT.
Settable sentences
TTM(TT), TLL(TT), TTD(TT), TLB(TT), OSD, RSD, ALR, ACK, TTM{AIS), TLL(AIS),
TTD(AIS), TLB(AIS)
7-29 [ .JRC I aopon RadicJ Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
7 .2.11 .2 Reception Port Setting (RX Port)
using the automatic recognition function without specifying ports.
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the RX Port

setting menu.
~ 9. Next
~ 5. LAN Port Setting
~ 2. RX Port

Heading, Speed, AIS, GPS, DLOG, Alarm, Depth, Temperature, Wind, Current, ROT, RSA,
Time Zone, Datemme
Selectable ports
When the automatic AUTO
recognition function is used:
When the ports are specified: Own LAN LAN (GPS) LAN (Ship's Oock)
AUTO Data from JRC-LAN is prior
User Setting The system use the port selected by Section 3.12.1 "Receive
Port Setting (RX Port)". The _system use data from JRC-LAN
or sensor connected directly.'
Own The system use data from sensor connected to the system
directly.
LAN (GPS) The system uses GPS data from GPS (JRC-LAN connected).;;
LAN {Ship's Oock) The system uses ship's clock data from ship's clock (JRC-LAN
connected)"
i. In order to set Section 3.12.1 "Receive Port Setting (RX Port)", select User Setting in
advance.
ii. LAN (GPS) and LAN (Ship' s Clock) are selectable signals for Time Zone and Datemme.
!..JRC] gopan. RadiJJ Co.,J'Jd. 7-30

JMA-91 00 Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETIINGS
----------------------------------
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Rx

--7 9. Next
--7 5. LAN Port Setting
--7 3. RX Sentence
Selecti on value: Use or No Use can be set for each sentence.
1. GPS(LUCOG/SOG) : GGNRMC/RMNGNS/GLLNTG
2 . GPS(WPT/Time) : GGNRMC/RMB/BWC/BWRIZDA
3 . Depth : OPT/DBKIDBT/DBS
4 . Wind : MWV/MWD
5 . Current :
--+ Data Set Number : 0-9. Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data
-+Layer A : Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer A

-+ Layer B : Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer B

6. Autopilot : APB
7 - 31 ['-'RC] aopan.Radio Co.,.lld.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
ADJUSTMENT
This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by

&cAUTION
Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment
Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation.
7.3.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level)
7.3.1.1 Noise Level Adjustment for Signal Processing
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the noise

level adjustment menu .
J
9. RADAR/ TT Initial Setup
~ 1. Signal Processing
~ 1. Echo Noise Level J
3) Increase/decrease the noise level adjustment value.
The noise level is factory-set. (Lnitial value: 140)
After system installation, a great change in the noise level adjustment value should be
avoided; it should be fine adjusted within ±5.
[.JRC] 3opan Radio Co., .lid. 7-32

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
7.3.1.2 Noise Level Adjustment Mode (Setting Mode)
A noise level is factory-adjusted while this mode is turned on.
Procedures

level adjustment menu.
9. RADAR/ IT Initial Setup
--7 1. Signal Processing
--7 2. Setting Mode
The noise level adjustment mode is switched between on and off.
Factory-adjustment method
The noise level adjustment value is once decreased to about 130.
While the noise level adjustment value is gradually increased, the value
with which radar echoes start turning yellow is determined as the set
value.
The noise level adjustment mode is turned off w hen the adjustment is
finished.
7.3.2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function {TT}
7.3.2.1 Vector Constant Adjustment (Vector Constant)

Adjust the vector follow-up performance of the target tracking function.
The vector constant is adjusted to an optimal value, so do not change it carelessly.
.-------------- Attention --------------------------------~
Do not change the set value carelessly.

The vector constant shall be set to 5 normally. If the vector
constant value is higher, a target' s vector will be better followed
up when the target and own ship change their course or speed,
but the vector accuracy will be lower on the contrary.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Vector

Constant adjustment menu.
7 -33 [ .JRC l aapan Radio Co.,.J.'Jd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup
~ 2.TT
~ 1. Vector COnstant 1
The window for setting vector constants will appear.

For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input sc reen, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Val ue, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input menu".
7.3.2.2 Quantization Level Adjustment (Video TO Level)

Use the target tracking function (TT) to adjust the level of the signal to be
recogni zed as a target If a small value is set, even weak target signals wi ll be
input to the target detection circuit of the target tracking function. However, many
unnecessary signal s are also input, which may cause unstable target acquisition or
tracking. It is important to set a value four or five greater than the value with
which unnecessary signals are detected.
The quantization level is adjusted to an optimal value, so do not change it

carelessly.
&cAUTION
Do not change the set quantization level carelessly. If
the level deviates from the proper value, the target
acquisition and tracking functions will deteriorate.
Otherwise, this may cause accidents.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the target

tracking setting menu.
~ 2.TT
3) To change the quantization level of the automatic acquisition

area, specify the item 2. Video m Level in the menu. To change
the quantization level of tracking and manual acquisition, specify
the item 3. Video High Level
I.JRC I aopan Radio Co., .ltd. 7 - 34

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > ?.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
7.3.3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS)
Main Bang Suppression is adjusted to suppress main bang, a reflection signal
from 3D circuit including wave guide tube, that generally appears as a circular
image focusing on the center of the radar display. Optimum adjustment allows
main bang image to remain lightly on the display.
&cAUTION
Do not change this adjusted level carelessly.
Incorrect adjustment may erase targets in point-blank
range and cause collision, resulting in death or serious
injury.
7.3.3.1 Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression Level (MBS Level)
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the MBS

~RADAR/IT Initial Setup
---7 3. MBS
---7 1. MBS Level
3) Set the radar as follows:

• Set the radar range to 0.125 NM.
• Set the radar video enhance function (ENH) to OFF.
• Set the image processing (PROC) to OFF.
• Tum the [RATN] control to the minimum position (fully to the left).
• Tum the [GAIN] control to the maximum pos ition (fully to the right).
• Tum the [SEA] control to achieve the strength with which main bang can be judged.
4) Adjust the value so that the main bang can be erased.
7-35 ["' RC I aopan. Radio Co., .J'Jd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > ?.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
7.3.3.2 Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression Area (MBS Area)
Procedures

Area adjustment menu.
9. RADAR/IT Initial Setup
~ 3. MBS
---+ 2. MBS Area

• Set the radar range to 0.125 N M.
• Tum the [RAfN] control to the minimum position (fully to the left).
• Tum the [GAIN] control to the maximum position (fully to the right).
• Tum the [SEA] control to achieve the strength with which main bang can be j udged.
[.JRC ] 8opan Radki Co., .lid. 7-36

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > ?.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM O PERATION > 7 3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
7.3.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor
After replacement of either of the following units, adjust the performance monitor
according to the procedures in this section:
• Magnetron
• Performance monitor
• Antenna unit
7.3.4.1 Reception Monitor Adjustment (MON Adjustment)

Adjust the circuit for monitoring the reception performance of the radar
equipment.
The radar system is equipped with an interswitch.

For adjusting the performance unit, set the interswitch connection to
straight, i.e. No.1 scanner is connected to No.1 display unit as the Master.
Procedures
2) Open the MON (Performance Monitor) Adjustment menu by performing
the following menu operation.
1. Adjust Menu
~ 4. MON Adjustment
3) Increase or decrease the adjustment value so that the farthest point of

the performance monitor pattern touches the 18.0 NM line.
Increase or decrease the

adjustment value so that the
farthest point of the
Performance Monitor pattern
contacts the 18.0 nm line.
Fig 7-2: MON Adjustment
Notice: During performance monitor adjustment, all acquisitions by the

target tracking function are released.
The relea sed target acquisitions are not recovered.
7 - 37 (JRC] dOfJ'inRadkJCo.,.lid.
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > ?.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
7.3.4.2 Transmission Monitor Adjustment (MON Indicator Adjustment)
Adjust the circuit for monitoring the transmission performance of the radar
equipment.

Procedures

performance monitor Indicator Adjustment menu.
1. Adjust Menu
---+ 4. TXRX Adjustment
---+ 5. MON Indicator Adjustment
3) Increase or decrease the adjustment value so that the

performance monitor level indicator will be adjusted to "8".
MONb::::: I: I
4) Attach t he INFORMATION LABEL provided with the performance

monitor to an appropriate position on the display unit.
5) Write the performance monitor bar value check date to the

INFORMATION LABEL.
Notice: During performance monitor adjustment, all acquisitions by the

target tracking function are released.
The released target acquisitions are not recovered.
[JRc] ()opanRadicJ Co.,.i'id. 7 - 38

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
----------------------------------
MAINTENANCE MENU
This item is provided for equipment maintenance, including settings of antenna

safety switch, master reset, etc.
&cAUTION
Only our service engineers are to make the
adjustment. Neglecting this caution may cause
accidents and failures.
Do not make the adjustments during navigation.

Otherwise, adjustments may affect the radar functions,
causing accidents and failures.
7.4.1 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch)

Use this switch to measure the transmission/reception performance while the
antenn a is in stopped state.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Safety

Switch setting menu.
3. Maintenance Menu I
~ 1. Safety Switch
3) Select the item to be set.
Set operation when the antenna safety switch is turned off.
1. TX-QFF The tran smitter stops transmission. The screen on the

display unit remain s in transmission state.
2. Standy (Normal setting) The transmitter stops transmission. The
screen on the display unit is placed in standby state.
3. TX-QN The transmitter continues transmission. The screen on the
display unit remains in transmission state. In this case,
however, an error such as a bearing signa l failure occurs
because the safety switch is turned off.
4) Change the setting back to 2. standy when the work is finished.
7 - 39 I'-'RC] gopan Radio Co., .i'Jd.

JMA·9100 Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
----------------------------------
7.4.2 Initialization of Memory Area(Area Initial)
If system operati on is unstable, it may be stabilized by initializing the memory
area. To initialize the memory area, follow the procedure in this section. The
memory area is reset to the factory setting when initialized.
7.4.2.1 Partial Master Reset
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Partial

Master Rest operation menu for the memory area.
3. Maintenance Menu I
~ 2. Area Initial
~ 1. Partial Master Reset
3) Select the items to be initialized.
1. Serviceman Menu The set values in the Serviceman menu are initialized.
2. Except Serviceman Menu The set values not in the Serviceman menu are initialized.
3. User Setting : The user-set values are initialized.
4. TT Setting The set values for the target tracking function are initialized .
5. AIS Setting The set values for the AIS display function are initialized.
6. Day/Night The color scheme and brilliance setting for the day/night
mode are initialized.
4) Select 1. Yes in the Confirmation Menu.
The memory areas of specified items are initialized, and the system is restarted.
7.4.2.2 All Master Reset
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the All

3. Maintenance Menu J
~ 2. Area Initial
~ 2. All Master Reset
The whole memory area is initialized, and the system is restarted.
[.JRC] gapan Radio Co.,.tid. 7-40

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 7 SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 4 MAINTENANCE MENU
----------------------------------
7.4.3 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card1 /2)
The system can save internal memory data such as item settings in all menus onto
a fl ash memory card. If the radar processing circuit in the system has been
replaced, the set values before the circui t replacement can be restored by reading
the set va lues you saved before the replacement
To save the internal memory data onto a fl ash memory card (opti on), the card
must be inserted in card s lot beforehand.
7.4.3.1 Copying of Internal Settings onto Card (Internal To Card1/2)

Save the internal memory data, such as item settings in menus, onto a flash memory card.
T he internal memory data shoul d be saved at completion of system setting, and the operation
cond iti on should be saved periodically.
Procedures
2) Open the 3. Maintenance Menu .
3) Select Slot2 in the 13. Internal To cardl/2 1.
The internal memory data is saved on the flash memory card.
7.4.3.2 Reading of Internal Settings from Card (Card1/2 To Internal)

Read the saved memory data from the flash memory card into the system memory.
Perform the read operation in order to return the system to the previous operation condition
afler replacement of the radar processing circuit in the system.
Procedures
3) Select Slot2 in the 14. card 1/2 To Internal 1.
The memory data is read from the flash memory card into the system memory.
After the internal memory area is updated, the system is restarted.
7 - 41 [JRC) 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual> 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 4 MAINTENANCE MENU
----------------------------------
7.4.4 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time (TXRX Time)
The system adds up the fo ll owing operation time and contains it in the scanner
unit:
• Transmission time
• Motor run time
Clear the above total time when the magnetron or scanner unit motor is repl aced.
7.4.4.1 Clear of Motor Run Time (Clear TX Time)

C lear the scanner's motor run time.
Perform the following procedure to clear the motor run time when the scanner motor is
replaced.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Clear

Motor Time menu.
3. Maintenance Menu
~ 5. TXRX Time
~ 1. Clear TX Time
The motor rUJ1 time in the TXRX's internal control circuit is cleared to 0.
7.4.4.2 Save of Antenna Time (Clear Motor Time)

Save the following scanner unit time data from the scanner unit into the display unit.
Perform the followi ng procedure to inherit the scanner unit time data when the TXRX's
internal control circuit is replaced.
Procedures

Motor Time menu.
3. Maintenance Menu
~ 5. TXRX Time
~ 2. Clear Motor Time
The motor run time in the TXRX's internal control circuit is cleared to 0.
[.JRcl (japan. Radio Co.,.i'id. 7-42

----------------------------------
7.4.4.3 Save of Scanner Unit Time (TXRX To Display Unit)
Perform the following procedure of 7.4.4.4 to inherit the scanner unit time data when the
TXRX's internal control circuit is replaced.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TXRX to

Display Unit menu.
3. Maintenance Menu
---7 5. TXRX Time 1

---7 3. TXRX To Display Unit
The scanner unit time data in the TXRX's internal control circuit is saved transferred to the
display unit.
7.4.4.4 Restoration of Antenna Time (Display Unit To TXRX)

Restore the antenna time data from the display unit into the antenna's internal control circuit.
Perform the above procedure of7.4.4.3 to inherit the antenna time data when the antenna's
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Display

Unit to TXRX menu.
3. Maintenance Menu
---7 5. TXRX Time
---7 4. Display Unit To TXRX
The scanner unit time data in the display unit is restored transferred to the antenna's internal
control circuit.
7-43 ['-'RC] 8apan. Radio Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
7.4.5 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update)
The system is designed to transfer and display external character strings as the
second language display. The second language is factory-set to "Japanese."
Ask our agent or sales department for the supply of character strings to be
updated.
To update character strings, the flash memory card (option) containing the
character string file must be inserted in card slot 2.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the String

Data Update menu.
3. Maintenance Menu
~ 6. String Data Update
3) Select 1. Yes J in the Confirmation Menu.

The character string file on the flash memory card is read into the system, and the second
language area is updated.
To display the read character strings in the second language, select Other in the menu
shown in Section 7.2.6 "Language Setting (Language)".
[.JRC] gapan.Radio Co., .ltd. 7-44

SECTION 8
COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE
AND ADJUSTMENT
1
1 11111 ' 111111 1

8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1125/1129/1130/1139/21 03/2254 .................... 8-2
8.2.2 Flexible wave guide (JMA-9123-7XA/9XA) .................................... 8-4
8.2.3 Coaxial Cable (JMA-9133-SA) ........................................................ 8-4
8.2.4 Transmitter Receiver Unit (NTG-3225/3230) ................................ 8-5
8.2.5 Display Unit (NCD-4990) ................................................................ 8-5
8.3.1 .1 Self-diagnosis function (Self Test) ............................................8-7
8.3.1.2 Monitor Test ................................................................................ 8-9
8.3.1.3 Operation Unit Test (Keyboard Test) .......................................8-9
8.3.1.4 Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display) ............... 8-1 0
8.3.1.5 System Alarm Log display .......................................................8-12
8.3.1.6 System Information .................................................................. 8-12
8.3.1. 7 Magnetron Current .................................................................... 8-12
8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS .................................................. 8-13
(JRC ] gapan. Radio Co.,.ltd.

8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement .................................. 8-14
8.4.2 Replacement of magnetron .......................................................... 8-14
8.4.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1130 ............................................................ 8-15
8.4.2.2 Scanner Unit NKE-2254, NKE-1125 .......................................8-17
8.4.2.3 Scanner Unit NKE-21 03 ......................................................... 8-20
8.4.2.4 Transmitter Receiver Unit NTG-3230 .................................... 8-22
8.4.2.5 Transmitter Receiver Unit NTG-3225 .................................... 8-25
8.4.3 Replacement of Motor ................................................................... 8-29
8.4.3.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1139/1130 ................................................ 8-29
8.4.3.2 Scanner Unit NKE-1125/2254 ................................................ 8-31
8.4.3.3 Scanner Unit NKE-21 03 ......................................................... 8-32
8.4.4 Replacement of 23inch LCD CML-799 ......................................... 8-34
8.4.5 Replacement of Backup Battery ..................................................8-37
8.4.5.1 About the Battery Alarm ...........................................................8-37
8.4.5.2 How to Replacement of Backup Battery ................................. 8-37
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE > 8 1 ROUTINE MAINTENA NCE
----------------------------------
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
&wARNING
• Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the
equipment by users. Inspection or repair work by
unauthorized personnel may result in fire hazard or
electric shock. Ask the nearest branch, business office or
a dealer for inspection and repair.
• Turn off the main power before maintenance work.
Otherwise, an electric shock may result.
• Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment.

Especially, make sure to turn off the indicator if a rectifier
is used. Otherwise, equipment failure, or death or serious
injury due to electric shock may result, because voltage is
outputted from the rectifier even when the radar is not
operating.
For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make
the maintenance work as described below. If maintenance is made properly,
troubles wi ll reduce. It is recommended to make regular maintenance work.
Common points of maintenance for each unit are as follow:
• Clean the equipment.
Remove the dust, dirt, and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of
dry cloth.
Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation.
8- 1 [.JRC I gopan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE . > 8 2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
----------------------------------
MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1125/1129/1130/1139/2103/2254
&wARNING
• Turn off the main power source before starting
maintenance. Otherwise, an electric shock or injury
may be caused.
• Turn "OFFi" the safety switch to stop the scanner unit.

(Refer to Section 1.4 "EXTERIOR DRAWINGS".)
Otherwise, you may be injured if touching the rotating
scanner unit by accident.
• Do not touch the radiator. Even if the power is turned
off, the radiator may be rotated by the wind.
i. After the work, tum "ON" the scanner unit safety switch.
a. Precautions in Mounting the Cover

When the cover is removed for regular checkup and replacement of parts and
refitted after such work, the proced ures of fastening bolts shall be taken with the
fo llowi ng precautions:
I) The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 N/
em (120 to 150kgf/cm) (which makes the inside water-tight and protects
the packings against permanent compressive strain).The packings start
producing from the cover at a torque of approximately 1470N/cm
(150kgf/cm ). Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the
specified value. Otherwise, the screws may be broken.
2) Use an offset wrench of 11 mm X 13 mm or a double-ended wrench of

13 mm X 17 mm (not longer than 200 mm).
3) Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten
them evenly in order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the
bolts with 25% of the required torque at the first step.)
*Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order.
[.JRC] dt:ifXinRadio Co., .lt d. 8- 2

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE . > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
----------------------------------
4-M8 (stainless steel) bolt 8-M8 (stainless steel) bolt
Tightening torque : 120 to 150 kgf/cm Tightening torque : 120 to 150 kgf/cm
®
Bolt Tightening Procedure of Bolt Tightening Procedure of
NKE-1125/112912254 Cover NKE-1130 /1139 Cover
@ 4-M 8 (stainless steel) bolt

Tightening torque : 120 to 150 kgf/cm
Bolt Tightening Procedure of

N KE-21 03 Cover
b . Radiator
. - - - - - - - - - - Attention - - - - -- - -- - - -- - - - - - - ,
• If the radiator front face (radiation plane) is soiled with smoke,

salt, dust, paint or birds' droppings, wipe it with a piece of soft
cloth wetted with alcohol or water and try to keep it clean at all
times. Otherwise, radar beam rad iation may attenuate or reflect
on it, resulting in deterioration of radar performance.
• Never use solvents of gasoline, benzine, trichloroethylene and
ketone for cleaning. Otherwise, the radiation plane may
deteriorate.
Check up and clean the radiator.
8-3 1~Rc 1 aapan Radio eo., .lid.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UN IT
----------------------------------
c. Rotating section
c-1 Supply Oil Seal
The scanner unit NKE-1130 (JMA-9132-SA) and NKE-1139 (JMA-9133-SA)
with a grease nipple needs grease supply. Remove the cap on the grease nipple on
the front of the radiator support, and grease with a grease gun. Make the oil ing
every six months. The oil quantity shall be approximately I 00 g, which is as
much as the grease comes out of the oi l sea l. Use the grease of Mobilux 2 of
Mobil Oil.
c-2 Oiling gears

Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the
encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush. Oi ling in short intervals is more
effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service life, but
oil at least every six months.
Use Mobilux2 of Mobile Oil.
c-3 Mounting legs

Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the antenna unit case for corrosion
at intervals and maintain them to prevent danger. Apply paint to them once a half
year because painting is the best measure against corrosion.
8.2.2 Flexible wave guide (JMA-9123-7XA/9XA)
. - - - - - - - - - Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
• Install flexible wave guide without any clearance. Leaving a

clearance may cause water leakage or corrosion later.
8.2.3 Coaxial Cable (JMA-9133-SA)

The coaxial tube gland of a coaxial cable terminal is fully waterproofed when
installed. To prevent a water leakage accident, periodically inspect the coaxial
tube gland. In particular, the coaxial tube gland should be repainted every six
months.
[~Rc ] gopon Radio Co., .lid. 8-4

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE .. > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
----------------------------------
&wARNING
• Do not apply strong shock to the coaxial cable by
striking it with a tool or hammering it. Otherwise, an
open circuit failure may result.
• Do not place anything heavy on the coaxial

cable.Otherwise, an open circuit failure may result.
• Do not twist or pull the coaxial cable.
For details, re fer to the coaxial cable installation procedure for S-band radars.
8.2.4 Transmitter Receiver Unit (NTG-3225/3230)

Wipe dust off the transmitter and receiver with a dry cloth or feather duster.
8.2.5 Display Unit (NCD-4990)
&wARNING
• When cleaning the screen, do not wipe it too strongly
with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or thinner to
clean the screen. Otherwise the screen surface may be
damaged
Dust accumulated on the screen will reduce clarity and darken the video. For
cleaning it~ wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton).
Do not wipe it strongly with a pi ece of dry c loth nor use gasoline or thinner.
8-5 (~RC I aopan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
----------------------------------
PERFORMANCE CHECK
Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is
found , investigate it immed iately. Pay specia l attenti on to the high voltage
sections in checking and take full care that no trouble is caused by any error or
carelessness in measurement. Take note of the results of checking, which can be
used effectively in the next check work.
Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 8-1 Function Check
List in the order as specified in it.
TableB-1 : Performance Check List
Equipment Item to be checked Criteria Remarks
Display Unit VIdeo and echoes on the screen SensitiVIty Can be correctly controlled
LCD bnlliance can be controlled correctly
Various markers
Various numerical indications
Ughbng
Memory See the Section [1] "Memory Test"
Communications Lines See the Section [3] "Check of

Communication Lines (Line Test)"
Power Supply, Backup Battery See the Section [4] "Supply Voltage"
Monitor See the Section 8.3.1.2 "Monitor Test"
Operation Unit See the Section 8.3.1.3 "Operation Unit

Test (Keyboard Test)"
System Alarm Log Display See the Section 8.3.1.5 "System Alarm
Log display"
System Information Display See the Section 8.3. 1.6 "System

Information"
Magnetron current See the Section 8.3.1.7 "Magnetron

Current"
Target Tracking See the Section 5.2.7 "Operation Test

(TT Test Menu)"
Scanner Unit Signals from the Scanner Unit See the Section [2] "TXRX Test"
Performance Monitor See the Section 8.3.1.4 "Check of the

Performance Monitor (MON Display)"
[JRcl 8opan.RadioCo.,.ltd. 8- 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 6.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 6.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
----------------------------------
8.3.1 Check Performance on Test Menu
The radar operating state can be checked by opening the Test Menu.
Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Test
Menu.
Main J
---? 9. Test Menu J
2) Select the items to be checked.
1. Self Test ] 8.3 .1.1 Self-diagnosis function (Self Test)
2. Monitor Test J 8.3. 1.2Monitor Test
3. Keyboard Test 8.3 .1.30peration Unit Test (Keyboard Test)
4. MON Display 8.3.1.4Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display)
5. System Alarm '£U8.3.1.5System Alarm Log display
6. System InformationJ 8.3 .1.6System Information
IMagnetron Current 18.3 .1. ?Magnetron Current
T he list of check items will appear.
8.3.1.1 Self-diagnosis function (Self Test)

Check of memory, scanner unit, and communications Lines
1. Memory Test [1 ]Memory Test
2. TXRX Test [2]TXRX Test
3. Line Test J [3]Check of Communication Lines (Line Test)

4. Supply Voltag~ [4]Supply Voltage
[1] Memory Test
Checks for the performance of built-in memory.
1. SDRAM SDRAM Check
2. SRAM SRAM Check

---
3. FLASH ROM FLASH ROM Check
4. GRAPHIC GRAPHIC Check
When no abnormali ty is found, OK is displayed. When an abnormality is fo und, NG is

displayed.
8- 7 [.JRC I 8apan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMA NCE CHECK
----------------------------------
[2] TXRX Test
Checks for signals from the scanner.
Safety Switch Scanner's safety switch check

AZI Pulse Scanner rotation signal check
HL Pulse Heading line signal check
MH Current Check on the load current of high voltage in
the modulator
ITrigger Radar trigger signal check
!Video Radar video check
When no abnormal ity is found, OK is displayed. When an abnormali ty is found, NO is

display ed.
In standby , ** will appear.
[3] Check of Communication Lines (Line Test)
Check the status of communications with options.
TXRX Check on connection with the transmitter-receiver
SIG. PROC Check on connection with the signal processing circuit
n Check on connection with the target tracking unit
GYRO I/ F Check on connection with the GYRO 1/F unit
JSW Check on connection with the interswitch
When no abnormality is found, OK is display ed. When an abnormality is found, NO is

displayed.
T he status display fie ld of equipment not connected is left blank.
[4] Supply Voltage
Check the voltage of internal power supply.
Item Normal operating range
12V 11 .4 to 12. 6V
5V 4. 75 to 5.25V
3.3V 3.14 to 3.46V
Battery 2.5V or more
[.JRC] 8apanRadio Co., .lid. 8-8

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8 .COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE C HECK
----------------------------------
8.3.1.2 Monitor Test
Checks for the display.
The test pattern will be shown on the display.
1. Patternl : All colors are filled with white.

2. Pattern2 I: A white box is displayed on the black background of 1280
x 1024dot.
3. Pattern3 Displays rectangle X 2, circle X 2, and cross-shape X13
(white lines on the black background).
4. Pattern4 Displays "H" of 9 dots X 9 dots on the entire screen (white
character on the black background).
s. PatternS Gray scale display (16 levels)
6. Pattern6J : Displays a color bar.
7. Pattern? Displays the VDR test pattern.
8. PatternS : Displays the specified color.
To return to the nonnal display, press any key.
If errors occur in the monitor, no test pattern wi ll appear.
8.3.1.3 Operation Unit Test (Keyboard Test)

Checks for the controls and switches of the operation panel.
1. Key Test (1]Key Test
2. Buzzer Test [2)Buzzer Test
3. Light Test (3]Light Test
[1] Key Test
Each key on the operation panel on the display is shown in reverse video at the
same time the key is pressed, and the name of the pressed key is displayed.
[2] Buzzer Test
Checks for the operation panel buzzer.
The buzzer will sound. The buzzer automatically stops after it sounds for a
specified length of time.
[3] Light Test
Checks for the control panel light.
The brightness of the operation panel is gradually intensified at four levels.
8-9 (.JRC I aopon Radio Co., .ftd.

----------------------------------
8.3.1 .4 Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display)
0 For checking the performance unit, set the interswitch connection to

Procedures
1) Open the MON Display menu by performing the following menu
operation.
Main
~ 9. Test Menu
~ _,_
4. MON Display ____.
[1] Check the Transmitter System ( *including Magnetron)
Procedures
1) Check the attenuation value.
J * Transmitter System
Initial value: 8.0 bar

l Attenuation Value Normal operating range: -6.9dB to +2.0dB
Performance degradation range: -15.0d8 to -7.0d8
~ About one minute after opening this menu item, check the
~ transmitter attenuation value.
[.JRC ] 3opan. Radio Co.,.lid. 8-10

----------------------------------
[2] Check the Receiver System
Procedures
1) Turn the [VRM] dial to make adjustments so that the farthest
point of the performance monitor pattern.
Adjust the VRM to the farthest

point of the performance
monitor pattern

( When the performance of
receiver unit is degraded , th e
pattern distance will be
shorter. )
2) Check the attenuation value.
I* Receiver System
IMON Pattern Range Initial value: 18.0NM
IAttenuation Value Normal operating range : -2.9dB to +3.5dB

Performance degradation range: -15.0dB to -3.0dB
If Receiver System Attenuation Value display is under -3 dB or

Transmitter System Attenuation Value display is under -7 dB with
the performance monitor test , radar should be checked by service
engineer. This means that the TX/RX unit may be faulty. Consult
with the near-by dealer or our sales department.
8 - 11 [.JRC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8 3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
----------------------------------
8.3.1.5 System Alarm Log display
Displays previously occurred system alarms with the dates and times when they
occurred.
The current alarm is displayed at the lower right of the radar display. For detai ls,
refer to Section 9.1.1 "List of Alarms and other Indications".
The Alarm log display button (page2-31 Alarm) is clicked, in the sa me way as
that one.
To erase the alarm logs, press the All Oear button in the log display window.
8.3.1.6 System Information

Disp lays the current system information.
Indicator Processor software version information

TXRX Scanner software version information
System No. System number
TX Time Total magnetron transmitting time (Total time
during which radar was transmitted)
- lx-Band
_. I5-Band
IMotor Time Total operating time (Total power-on time)
ITXRX Total Time I Total operating time of the scanner unit (Total
power-on time of the scanner unit)
ITotal Time Total operating time of the display unit (Total
power-on time of the display unit)
8.3.1.7 Magnetron Current

Displays the Magnetron Current bar indicating the magnetron current to check.
When a 48 NM range is set, the magnetron current is normal if the Magnetron
Current bar reads the value below.
1OkW (JMA·9110)
: 4 to 7 scale marks
912 913
25/30kW (JMA· • or JMA- "> : 6 to 9 scale marks
Note: Displays the Magnetron Current bar instability indicating in sector blank area,
but it is normal operating .
For how to setting sector blank function , see Section 7.2.2 "Sector Blank
Setting (Sector Blank)".
[ JRC I 3opan Radio Co., .ltd. 8-12

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE .. > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
The system includes parts that need periodic replacement. The parts should be
replaced as scheduled. Use of parts over their service life can cause a system
failure.
&cAUTION
• Turn off the main power source before replacing parts.
Otherwise, an electric shock or trouble may be caused.
• Before replacing the magnetron, turn off the main
0 power source and wait for 5 minutes or more until the

high voltage circuits are discharged. Otherwise, an
electric shock may be caused.
• Take off your wrist watch when bringing your hands
close to the magnetron. Otherwise, your watch may be
damaged because the magnetron is a strong magnet.
• Two or more persons shall replace the liquid crystal
0 monitor. If only one person does this work, he may

drop the LCD, resulting in injury.
• Even after the main power source is turned off, some

high voltages remain for a while. Do not contact the
inverter circuit in the LCD with bare hands. Otherwise,
an electric shock may be caused.
8 -1 3 [ ~RC] 8opan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE > 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement
Here are parts required for periodic r eplacement
Part name Interval Radar model Part type Part code

1. Magnetron 4,000 hours JMA-911 0-6XN6XAH MAF1565N1 5VMAA00102
JMA-912.2 -6XN9XN6XAH M1568BS1 5VMAA00106
JMA-9123-7XN9XA
JMA-9132-SA M1555i 5VMAA00104
JMA-9133-SA
2. Motor 10,000 hours JMA-911 0-6XN6XAH H-7BDRD0048*ii 7BDRD0048*ii

JMA-9122-6XA/9XA MDBW10822*ii MDBW1 0822*ii
JMA-9123-7XA/9XA
JMA-9122-6XAH H-7BDRD0045*ii 7BDRD0045*ii
JMA-9132-SA MDBW10823* 11
MDBW10823*i1
JMA-9133-SA
3. Fan (Scanner Unit) 20,000 hours JMA-9122-6XA/9XN6XAH H-7BFRD0002*ii 7BFRD0002*ii

JMA-9132-SA
4. LCD PANEL 50,000 hours CML-799L CML-799L

5. Fan
(Radar Process Circuit) 20,000 hours 109R0612S4013 5BFAB00588
(Power Supply) 20,000 hours H-7BFRD0006*1i 7BFRD0006*ii
7. Backup battery 5 years CR2032 5ZBCJ00012
i. Use a genuine magnetron.

ii. • •" means revision, such as A , B and so on.
8.4.2 Replacement of magnetron

0 Replacemenl of magnetron must be made by specialized
service personnel.
For details , refer to Service Manual.
Use genuine parts as mentioned above.
When mounting a new magnetron, do not touch the magnet w ith a screwdri ver or
put it on an iron plate. After replacement, connect the lead wire correctl y.
Handling of Magnetron under Long-Time Storage
T h e magnetron that has been kept in storage for a long time may cause sparks and
operate unstably w hen its operati on is started . Perform the aging in the following
procedures:
l) Warm up the cathode for a longer time than usually. (20 to 30 minutes
in the STBY state.)
2) Start the operation from the short pulse range and shift it gradually to
the longer pulse ranges. If the operation becomes unstable such as
the magnetron current is unstable, in during this process, return it to
the standby mode immediately. Keep the state for 5 to 10 minutes until
the operation is restarted.
IJRC ] 3apan Radio Co.,.l.'id. 8 - 14

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
8.4.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1130
[Required tools]
• A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screw
• A wrench (width across flats 13 mm, for M8 screws)
[Replacement procedure]
1) Before starting part rep lacement work, turn

off the safety switch of the scanner unit. Bow side
The safe ty switch is located on the rear (stern)

side. Remove the cover and turn off (to the
lower side) the safety switch.
2) Remove the pedestal cover.

Make sure that there is no f oreign matter or
dust adhered to the gasket when you put the
cover on.
Remove the eight

hexagonal screws.
Removing the port side cover
8 - 15 [.JRC) gopon Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > B.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
3) Remove the cover on the left (port)
side and check that there is no
remaining electric charge between
121OJ pin J and 121 OJ pin 3 in the
modulation circuit board CPA-
264. (Multimeter requires
DCJOOOV input capability).
Remove the two screws (M4)
holding the magnetron cables
Remove the
(both yellow and green).
two screws.
4) Remove the eight screws (M6) to

remove the fixture holding the
magnetron. The screws cannot be
removed from the fixture, so loosen the
all eight screws and remove the
magnetron together with the fixture.
& cAUTION
The magnetron is held by a hook, but be
careful not to let it faiL
Remove the metal fixture.
& cAUTION Loosen the

Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the
eight screws.
magnetron comes into contact with any
metal (tool), its performance may
deteriorate.
5) Install the new magnetron together with the fixture and tighten the screws to hold the
cables.
Follow the removal procedure in the reverse order.
Do not forget to tighten the screws and connect the cables.
[Operation check]
After you have completed the replacement work, follow the procedure below to
check the operation.
[.JRC ] 8apan. Radio Co., ..fi d. 8 - 16

----------------------------------
1) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be
preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes I bring the radar unit to STBY mode).
2) Start emitting radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the
emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perform tuning
adjustment.
If operation becomes unstable such as the magnetron current is unstable, bring the
radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5
to 10 minutes.
3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode fo r about 15 minutes and reopen the
service engineer menu to perfo rm tuning adjustment.
Adjust the setting in the service engineer menu until the tuning indication bar on the
display unit reaches the 8th calibration marking.
Check in the service engineer menu that the magnetron current is between the 6th and
9th calibration markings.
4) Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu.
8.4.2.2 Scanner Unit NKE-2254, NKE-1125

[Required tools)
[Replacement procedure)
1) Before starting part replacement work, turn

off the safety switch of the scanner unit.
8-17 [.JRC ] 8apan Radio Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
2) Loosen the hexagonal bolts (4) and
remove the pedestal cover.
Make sure that there is no foreign matter
or dust adhered to the gasket when you
put the cover on.
When the starboard side cover is removed

3) Loosen the screws (four M4 screws) to
remove the magnetron cover.
4) Make sure there is no charge remaining

betweenJ2101 pin 1 andJ2101 pin 3 in
the modulation circuit board CPA-264
(Multimeter requires DCJOOOV input
capability), and then remove the screws
(two M4 screws) holding the magnetron
cables (yellow and green) in place.
5) Remove the screws (four M4 screws)

holding the magnetron in place, then
replace the magnetron after cutting the
leads (yellow and green) for the
replacement magnetron to an
appropriate length.
I ~ RC ] dCif"i"' Radio Co-. .lid. 8-18

----------------------------------
& cAUTION
Use a non-magnetic screwdriver. If the magnetron comes into contact with any metal
(tool), its performance may deteriorate.
6) After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly
procedure in the reverse order.
Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and do not forget to reconnect the cables.
& cAUTION
Extreme care should be taken to connect the leads (yellow and green) to the magnetron
for prevention of contact with other parts or the casing. Contact may cause them to
discharge.
[Operation check]
After you have completed the re placement work, follow the procedure below to
check th e operation.
2) Start emitting radio waves fro m the short pulse range and gradually change the
adjustment.
radar unit back to STBY mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5
to 10 minutes.
3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode fo r about 15 minutes and reopen the
service engineer menu to perform !lining adjustment.
8- 19 [JRC) 8opan.Radio Co.,.J.'Jd.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
8.4.2.3 Scanner Unit NKE-21 03
[Required tools]
• A wrench (width across flats 13 mm , for M8 screws)
1) Before starting part replacement work,

turn off the safety switch on the bollom of
the scanner unit.
2) Loosen the hexagonal bolts (four bolts)

and open the upper cover until the stopper of the
stay operates.
l'L cAUTION
When closing the upper cover, release the stay
stopper and then tighten the cover.
[.JRC] aopan.Radio Co.,J'Jd. 8 - 20

----------------------------------
I) Loosen the screws (four M4 screws), remove the
transmitter-receiver unit cover, and remove the cables
connected to the transmitter-receiver unit (ten cables).
Slide the cover of the transmitter-receiver unit to remove
it.
2) Loosen the bolts (five M5 bolts) and

remove the transmitter-receiver unit.
Slide the transmitter-receiver unit
upward to remove it.
3) Remo ve the screws (s ix M4 screws)

holding the magnetron in place and replace the Remove the
six screws .
magnetron.
& cAUTION
magnetron comes into contact with any metal
(tool), its performance may deteriorate.
4) Cut the leads (yellow and green) for the

replacement magnetron to an appropriate
length, then tighten the screws and fix the
cables in place.
After having replaced the magnetron, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly
8-21 [ .JRC ] 8apan Radio Co., .tid.

JMA-91 00 lnstructoon Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
iL cAUTION
iL cAUTION
Extreme care should be taken to connect the leads (yellow and green) to the magnetron
for prevention of contact with other parts or the casing.
[Operation check]
I) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be
2) Start emilling radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the
adjustment.
radar unit back to STB Y mode and restart emission after allowing f or an interval of 5
to I 0 minutes.
3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode f or about I 5 minutes and reopen the
service eng ineer rnenu to perform tuning adjustment.
display unit reaches the 8th calibration rnarking.
4) Finally, initialize the transmission time in the service eng ineer menu.
8.4.2.4 Transmitter Receiver Unit NTG-3230

[Required tools]
A flatblade screwdriver for 6 mm screws
[ .JRC I f)opan Radio Co.,.fid. 8 - 22

----------------------------------
I) Loosen the four screws and remove the cover.

The screws are slotted captive screws. Use a
jlatblade screwdriver.
2) Remove the screws (six M4 screws) and slide

the modulator cover to the right to remove it.
8-23 [.JRC I aopon Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE > 8.4 REPlACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
3) Remove the screws holding the cables (two
M4 screws) and the bolts holding the Modulator
rnagnetron (eight M6 screws) and remove the

metal filling and the magnetron.
Remove the
two screws.
& cAUTION
magnetron comes into contact w ith any metal
(too l), its performance may deteriorate.
4) Be careful to attach the colored cables 61ellow

and green) to the correct connections on the
replacement magnetron.
After having replaced the magnetron,
reassemble the unit by following the
disassembly procedure in the reverse order.
& cAUTION
Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws, and
do not forget to reconnect the cables.
[Operation check]
2) Start emilling radio waves from the short pulse range and gradually change the
emissions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to petform tuning
adjustment.
radar unit back to STBY rnode and restart emission after allowing fo r an interval of 5
to I 0 minutes.
3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 rninutes and reopen the
service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment.
[.JRC] 8opanRadicJ Co.,.lid. 8-24

----------------------------------
8.4.2.5 Transmitter Receiver Unit NTG-3225

[Required tools]
A flatblade screwdriver for 6 mm screws
·A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screw
1) Loosen the four screws and remove the cover.

The screws are slotted captive screws. Use ajlatblade
screwdriver.
8-25 I.JRC] 8opan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE .. > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
2) Loosen the upset head bolt (one M4 bolt),
and slide the tightening metal fitting,
located between the modulator and the
circulator, to remove it.
The magnetron is installed within the
modulator.
3) Loosen the inside screws of the modulator

(four M4 screws).
Removing the outside screws makes it possible
to slide the modulator.
[JRC] dOfXi'1- Radio Co.,.lid. 8-26

----------------------------------
4) Remove the cables connected to the modulator and
the screws on the outside of the modulator (four M4
screws) and slide the modulator to the right to remove
it.
5) Remove the screws (six M4 screws) and take off the

modulator cover.
6) Remove the screws holding the cables

(two M4 screws) and the screws holding
the magnetron (four M4 screws) and
remove the metal fitting and the
magnetron.
& cAUTION
magnetron comes into contact with any
metal (tool), its performance may
deteriorate.
8-27 (~Rc ] dapan.Radic,Co.,.l.td.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE > 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
7) Be carefu l to attach the colored cables
(yellow and green) to the correct
connections on the replacement magnetron.
After having replaced the magnetron,
reassemble the unit by following the
disassembly procedure in the reverse order.
& cAUTION
Do not forget to tighten the bolts and screws,
and do not forget to reconnect the cables.
[Operation check]
l) Turn on the power supply for the radar. Allow sufficient time for the radar to be
preheated (about 20 to 30 minutes I bring the radar unit to STB Y mode).
2) Start emitting radio waves from !he short pulse range and gradually change the
em issions to the long pulse range. Open the service engineer menu to perfonn luning
adjustment.
If operation becomes unstable such as I he magnetron current is unstable, bring the
radar unit back to STB Y mode and restart emission after allowing for an interval of 5
to 10 minutes.
3) Emit radio waves in long pulse range mode for about 15 minutes and reopen the
service engineer menu to perform tuning adjustment.
Adjust the selling in the service engineer menu unlilthe tuning indica/ion bar on the
4) Finally , initialize the transmission time in the service engineer menu.
[ ~RC I f)opan Radio Co.. .J'Jd. 8-28

- -- -- - - - - - -
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE .. . > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
8.4.3 Replacement of Motor
A Replacement of motor must be made by specialized service
v personnel.
For details, refer to Service Manual.
8.4.3.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1139/1130

[Required tools]
• Tools for removing the cover from the scanner unit.(Refer

to the 8.4.2.1)
1) Remove the cover on the right (starboard) side

(see 8.4.2.1) and loosen the fo ur screws (M4)
to remove the driver unit, which has the motor
driver circuit board on its back side.
Disconnect the cables connecting the motor to

the motor driver circuit board.
8 - 29 [ JRC I 8opan Radio Co.,.f'Jd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE . > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
2) Remove the cover on the left (port) side and
Remove the
remove the five screws (M5) to remove the
metal fixture.
fixture. w •
;-r
-
3) Remove the four hexagonal screws (M / Ox40,

SW/0, and WJO) that hold the motor from both the
right and left sides to remove the motor.
Remove the motor.

4) Apply grease to the gear wheel of the new
rnotor.
5) Install the new motor in the scanner unit and

secure it using the hexagonal screws. Tighten
the screws with the specified torque (380 kgf
em).
6) After replacing the motor, assemble the unit in

the reverse order of the disassembly procedure.
& cAUTION
Do not forget to tighten the screws and connect the cables.
[.JRC] f)apanRadiJJ Co.,.ltd. 8-30

JMA-91 00 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERM EASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
[Operation check]
1) Turn on the radar power supply. After the countdown is completed, start emission and
check that the radar image appears without error. Check that you do not hear any
unusual sound when the motor starts, rotates, and stops.
2) Open the service engineer menu to initialize the motor rotation time.
8.4.3.2 Scanner Unit NKE-1125/2254

[Required tools]
• Single-ended wrench (width across flats 17 mm for M8

bolts)
• Tools for removing the cover from the scanner unit.(Refer to the 8.4 .2.2)
1) Remo ve the cover on the left (port) side

(see Section 84.22) and remove the cables
connected to the motor driver circuit board.
2) Remove the hexagonal bolts (four M8 bolts)

and remo ve the motor.
3) Remove the hexagonal bolts (four MB bolts)

and remove the installation plate f rom the motor.
8-31 (.JRC ] gopan. Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
4) Attach the installation plale to the replacemenl
molar. Do no/ forget to tighlen the hexagonal bolts
to an appropriate torque (2 10 kgfcm) so they are
free of looseness.
5) Install the motor into the scanner unit. Press the

motor against the protrusions of the arm fixed to
the motor on which the arm extends through !he
wall of!he casing, adjust if Ia minimize backlash,
and fix it in p lace.
Do not forget to tighlen the hexagonal bolts, to an appropriate torque (140 kgfcm) so
they are free of looseness.
6) After having installed the molar, grease the gear

wheel.
7) After having replaced the motor, reassemble !he

unit by following the disassembly procedure in
the reverse order.
& cAUTION
8)
8.4.3.3 Scanner Unit NKE-21 03

[Required tools]
• Single-ended wrench (width across flats 10 mm for M6

bolts)
• Tools for removing the cover from the scanner

unit.(Refer to the 8.4.2.3)
[ ~Rc ] 8apan Radio Co.,.ltd. 8-32

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COU NTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
1) Open the upper cover (see Section 8.4.2.3) to remove

the transmitter-receiver unit.
2) Remove the hexagonal bolts (four M6 bolts) and

remove the motor. Grease the gear wheel of the
replacement motor and place it in the casing. Do not
forget to tighten the hexagonal bolts to an
appropriate torque (72 kgf-cm) so they are free of
looseness.
3) After having replaced the motor, reassemble the unit by following the disassembly
& cAUTION
& cAUTION
Clamp the cables so they do not interfere with the rotation of the motor's rotors.
[Operation check]
1) Turn on the radar and emit radar waves once the countdown is finished, and check that
the radar image is correctly displayed. Check that the motor does not make any
abnormal sound when it starts to rotate, while it is rotating, or when it stops.
8-33 I"'RC) 8opan Radio Co.,.fi:d.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
8.4.4 Replacement of 23inch LCD CML-799
Replacement of LCD monitor must be made by specialized
0 service personnel.
& cAUTION
Do not touch the LC D screen directly with your fingers.
& cAUTION
Do not touch the AR fi lter directly with your fingers.
& cAUTION
Perform the rep lacement work on a soft cloth to avoid damage to the LCD screen and
other parts.
[Required tools]
• A Phillips screwdriver for 4 mm screws
[Disassembly]
l) Remove the tilt fixing handle (standalone type

only).
2) Tilt up the screen as much as y ou can

(standalone type only).
3) Remove the screws (M6) from the jour

corners and displace the face co ver.
[~Rc ] 8opan.Radio Co., .lid. 8-34

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > e. COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
4) LRemove the LCD operation circuit cables
and remove the face cover.
5) Remove six M4 screws.
6) Displace the module and remove the three

cables.
7) Remove the LCD module.
8 - 35 (..JRC ] Japan Radio Co.,J'Jd.

----------------------------------
[Assembly]
1) Tighten the lower three M4 screws halfway.
2) Connect the cables to the LCD module.
3) Align the rnodule to the lower three screws

and insert it downward.
4) Check the positions of the two bosses and

ensure that appropriate space is maintained '•/
under the LCD module. Tighten the six

screws evenly.
5) Connect the LCD operation circuit cables

and attach the face cover.
6) Tighten the screws at the four corners.
7) Attach the tilt fixing handle.
[Operation Check]
1) After completing the replacement

procedures. start the system to make sure that images are displayed properly.
2) Turn the brightness knob to make sure the brightness can be changed between the
minimum and the maximum levels.
[.JRC] (Japan. Radio Co...J'id. 8 - 36

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
8.4.5 Replacement of Backup Battery
Replacement of backup battery must be made by specialized
service personnel.
A coin-cell battery maintains radar system configuration, date, and time

information while power off condition. Radar system configuration is saving to
non-volatile memory at fixed intervals.
8.4.5.1 About the Battery Alarm

If IBattery Low I is appeared at the lower-right of the display when start up the
radar system, the battery has not enough time left to li ve. We recommend to
rep lace the battery.
If IBattery Dead I is appeared at the lower-right of the display when start up the
radar system, the battery has no time left to live. There is a necessary to replace
the battery. In This condition, this radar system is restored configuration
information from flash memory and normal operation is available. However, you
turned of the radar system before savi ng to flash memory, the configuration
information is maybe lost. In thi s case, you must setup the configuration again.
About disposal of used battery, refer to Section 10.2.
8.4.5.2 How to Replacement of Backup Battery

[Required tools]
• A flat tip screwdriver for 6 mm screws
• A flat tip nonconductive screwdriver for 3 mm screws
8-37 [ JRC I gopan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE > 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
[Disassembly]
1) Remove the four fixing screws to remove

the cover from the display unit (NCD-
4990).
{A flat lip screwdriver for 6 nun screws)
For standalone type NCD-4990
For desktop type: NDC-1399-9
2) Remove the cable connected to the radar

process circuit board.
The radar process circuit is the first board from

the left.
3) Remove the two fixing screws (M4).
4) Pull out the board to the front.
5) Insert the flat lip nonconductive screwdriver

for adjustment or some stick between the ballery
and the battety holder and lift the battery up.
I~Rc ] f)opan Radio Co., .lid. 8-38

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE .. > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
6) Insert the flat tip nonconductive screwdriver for
adjustment or some stick to the location shown
in the figure below and slide the battery
sideways to remove the ballery.
[Assembly]
I) Check the polarity of the battery. Make sure that

the battery's positive(+) side is facing up.
2) Slide the batte1y sideways into the batte1y
holder.
3) Make sure that the battery is inserted fully.
[Check Item]
1) Check that no error message comes up.

2) Check that the system starts up normally.
[Notes]
8-39 [.JRC ) gopan. Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
& cAUTION
If you installed the battery with the wrong polarity, remove the battery immediately and
do not use the same battery again.
& cAUTION
During the procedures, do not put the battery on any circuit board or conductive item.
& cAUTION
To dispose of a used battery, follow the instructions provided in Section I 0.2 "DlSPOSAL
OF USED BATTERIES".
& cAUTION
To disassemble of a used battery, have to use non-conductive tool.
[ ~RC ] (Japan Radio Co., .ltd. 8-40

SECTION 9
TROUBLE SHOOTING AND
AFTER-SALES SERVICE
1
1'11 11 '' • 111 111

9.1 FAULT FINDING .....................................................................................9-1
9.1 .1 List of Alarms and other Indications ............................................. 9-1
9.1 .2 Operation Checking ................................................ ........................ 9-6
9.1 .3 Fuse Checking .................................................................................9-6
9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING ...........................................................................9-7
9.2.1 Special Parts .................................................................................... 9-7
9.2.2 Circuit Block to be Repaired ..........................................................9-9
9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE .................................................................... 9-15
9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts ......................................... 9-15
9.3.2 When you Request for Repair ...................................................... 9-15
9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance ........................................................ 9-15
[JRC ] 8apan. Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING
----------------- ---------- ------ -

FAULT FINDING
In case of semiconductor circuits, it is deemed that there are few cases in which
the used semiconductor devices have inferior quality or performance deterioration
except due to insufficient design or inspection or by other external and artificial
causes. In general, the relatively many causes are disconnection in a high-value
resistor due to moisture, a defective variable resistor and poor contact of a switch
or relay.
Some troubles are caused by defective parts, imperfect adjustment (such as tuning
adjustment) or insufficient service (such as poor cable contact). It will also be
effective to check and readjust these points.
9.1.1 List of Alarms and other Indications

If any of the following alarm occurs, the system displays the alarm message in red
in order to attract the attention of operator. Other messages are displayed with the
suitable color which is yellow or blue depending on the level of message
importance.
Alarm: Red • Collision-related Alarm
• Navigation Alarm
• System Alarm
Warning: Yellow • System Warning
Infomation: B lue • Operation Information
Alarm message is displayed in the lower right of the display. For more details
refer to page2-31 Alarm.
This section gives the list of alarms displayed by the system and other display
lists.
Table9-1 : Critical Alarm

Message Class Description ALR No.1
CPAITCPA Alarm There is a dangerous target. 301
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and ACK sentence
9- 1 [.JRC) 8apan Radio Co.,J.'ld.

----------------------------------
Table9-2 : List of System Error Message
Autopilot (Data) Alarm Autopilot: No communication or data error. 101
Current (Data) Alarm Tidal current: No communication or data error. 119
Date (Data) Alarm Date data: No communication or data error. 112
Datum (Data) Alarm DTM: No communication or data error. 122
Depth (Data) Alarm Water depth: No communication or data error. 115
Fan (LCD) Alarm LCD monitor: Fan error. 955
Fan (Power) Alarm Power Supply: Fan error. 953
Fan (PROC) Alarm RADAR Process Unit Interconnection: Fan error. 951
GPS (Status) Alarm GPS status error. 103
GYRO IfF (Data) Alarm GYRO 1/F: No communication or checksum error. 324
GYRO 1/F (GYRO) Alarm GYRO 1/F: GYRO error detected . 110
GYRO 1/F (Log) Alarm GYRO 1/F: Log error detected. 111
Heading (Data) A larm Heading data: No communication or data error. 113
Keyboard (Data) Alarm Operation unit: Communication error or checksum 325
error.
Keyboard2 (Data) Alarm Second operation unit: Communication error or 325
checksum error.
Out of Bounds Alarm Own ship's latitude is over 85° N or 85° S. 123
Position (Data) Alarm Latitude /longitude data: No communication or data 102
error.
PROC (AZI) Alarm Process unit: AZI error. 305
PROC (HL) Alarm Process unit: HL error. 306
PROC (Interrupt) Alarm Process unit: Interrupt error. 962
PROC (Trigger) Alarm Process unit: Trigger error. 304
PROC (Video) Alarm Process unit: VIDEO error. 303
ROT (Data) Alarm Rate of Turn: No communication or data error. 120
RSA(Data) Alarm Rudder Sensor Angle: No communication or data 121
error.
Speed (2AXG) Alarm 2-axis log (speed over ground): No communication 114
or data error.
Speed (2AXW) Alarm 2-axis log (speed over water): No communication or 114
data error.
Speed (GPS) Alarm GPS speed : No communication or data error. 114
Speed (Log) Alarm 1-axis log: No communication or data error. 114
SRB (Data) Alarm SRB: No communication or data error. 960
TEMP. (Data) Alarm Water temperature: No communication or data error. 117
TXRX (AZI) Alarm Scanner: BP error. 311
TXRX (Data) Alarm Scanner: No communication, communication 326
mismatched, checksum error, or collision.
TXRX (Fan 1) Alarm Scanner: FAN 1 error. 320
TXRX (Fan 2) Alarm Scanner: FAN 2 error. 320
TXRX (Heater) Alarm Scanner: Magnetron heater voltage error. 314
TXRX (HL) Alarm Scanner: HL error. 312
TXRX (MHV) Alarm Scanner: Modulator's high voltage alarm. 315
TXRX (Reverse) Alarm Scanner: Reverse rotation. 313
TXRX (SSW Off) Alarm Scanner: Safety switch OFF. 308
I..JRC] 8opan.RadicJ Co.,.fid. 9- 2

----------------------------------
TXRX (Trigger) Alarm Scanner: TRIGGER error.. 310
TXRX (Video) Alarm Scanner: VIDEO error. 309
Wind (Data) Alarm Wind direction/velocity: No communication or data 118
error.
Table9-3 : List of Notification

CCRP Changed INFO CCRP is automatically changed.
Copying INFO Displayed-image is capturing to file.
POSN Reset INFO Change the latitude and longitude sentence.
Set GYRO INFO Requires setting of true bearing .
TM Reset INFO Resetting TM in a short time.
Table9-4 : List of Target Tracking Alarms and AIS Function Alarms

AIS (Data) Alarm A IS: No communication or communication error. 116
AIS 95% Capacity INFO Over 95% of the maximum number of AIS targets.
AIS ACT95% INFO Over 95% of the maximum number of A IS targets to
Capacity be activated .
AIS ACT MAX INFO Maximum number of A IS targets to be activated .
AIS Alarm ***ii Alarm AIS alarm (Up to 10 alarm messages can be
displayed.).
AIS Max Target INFO Maximum number of AIS targets.
AIS PROC (Data) Alarm AIS processing circuit: No communication or 328
communication error.
CPAlTCPA Alarm There is a dangerous target. 301
Lost Alarm Failure in tracking the target that has been under
tracking .
Failure in receiving AIS target data for a specified
time.
New Target Alarm Acquisition or activation of a target in the automatic 302
acquisition I activation zone.
REF Target Alarm Decrease in the reference target accuracy.
Trial Warning There is a dangerous target, when trial maneuver is
active.
IT (Boot) Alarm Target tracking unit start failure. 344
TI(Data) Alarm The target tracking unit is malfun ctioning. 323
IT 95% Capacity INFO Over 95% of the maximum number of targets to be
tracked.
IT MAX Target INFO The maximum number of targets is under acquisition.
i. ALR No.: Unique alarm number in ALR sentence and A CK sentence
ii. ••• is a 3-digit number which is Local Alarm No in the ALR sentence.
9- 3 ["'Rc] 8opanRadi.o Co.,.ltd.

----------------------------------
Table9-5 : List of Route Messages and Warnings
Message Class Description ALR No.'
Approach Alarm Approach the route.
Arrival Alarm Arrive at way point.
Break Off(WPT) Alarm Out of the way point.
Cross Track Error Alarm Go off the route.
Table9-6 : List of Operational Alarm Messages and Warnings

Can't Transmit INFO Tried to transmit within 5 second after standby or
when the transmitter-receiver has any trouble.
Card Full INFO Card: Run out of free space.
Copy Failed INFO Card: Copy failure.
Delete Failed INFO Card : Deletion failure.
Format Card INFO Card : Unformatted card.
Format Failed INFO Card : Format failure.
Invalid Card INFO Card : Invalid card.
Invalid Connection INFO The operator set performance monitor to on without
selecting straight.
Invalid Data INFO Tried to enter any data beyond its range.
Invalid Range INFO TM selection due to TM-disabled range (96 nm).
Zooming in a ZOOM-disabled range (0. 125 nm).
MAX Point INFO Tried to enter navigation information beyond the
specified.
No Card INFO Card not detected yet.
No Heading Data INFO Target tracking operation or TM selection when
bearing data is invalid.
No Object INFO No object at the cursor-specified position.
No Position Data INFO Mark or line input when the latitude and longitude is
invalid.
Not Allowed INFO General operation error.
Out of Range INFO Out of target acq uisition range.
Read Failed INFO Card : Read failure.
Slave Mode INFO Operation of a menu for the scanner unit when the
slave mode is active.
Write Failed INFO Card : Write failure.
[..JRC] 8apanRadioCo.,.ltd. 9- 4
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9 1 FAULT FINDING
----------------------------------
Table9-7 : List of Conditions Messages
--------------------~~~~
1
Message Class Description ALR No.
Battery Dead Warning The battery is dead.
Battery Low Warning battery is weakening.
GPS (HOOP) Warning The HOOP level is increased (Decrease in the GPS
accuracy.).
MON Test Warning Performance monitor is active.
Scanner Rotating Warning The scanner is rotating (When transmitter is standby
state.).
Table9-8 : List of lnterswitch Alarms and Messages

----------------~~~~
Message Class Description 1
ALR No.
Connection INFO Inhibition of control/ connection is set.
Masked
ISW (Data) Alarm No communication , data mismatched, or checksum error. 327
ISW Busy INFO Access to the ISW menu was made during interswitching.
ISW Complete INFO The switchover of the lnterswitch ended normally.
ISW Error INFO The interswitch is disabled.
ISW Standby INFO The lnterswitch recovered normally.
ISW Straight INFO The interswitch is forced to change the connection
into straight.
ISWTime Out INFO Failed in switching.
Master Range CHG INFO The range of the own display unit has changed due
to change in the range of the master display unit.
Master Standby INFO The master display unit does not transmit any
signals.
Pattern CHG Failed INFO Connection change failed.
TXRX Standby INFO The scanner unit is in the standby mode.
Update ISW INFO Tried to enter new TXRX function, when interswitch
Software software used old version.
9-5 [.JRC ) 8opan Radio Co.,..tid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING
----------------------------------
9.1.2 Operation Checking
When the system is operating, the operation status (located at the upper right of
the screen) is changing pictures.
If picture freeze occurred, tum off the system and restart the system.
Operation Status
mrm; ~ .n
~~- ~
9.1.3 Fuse Checking

Melted fuses are caused by any clear cause. When a fuse is replaced, it is
necessary to check the related circuits even if there is no trouble. In checking, note
that there is some dispersion in the fusing characteristics. Table 9-8 shows a list of
fuses used in the equipment.
Table9-9 : Fuse List
Location Parts# Current Protection Type

Rating Circuit
AC/DC Converter F501 10A Motor ST6-10AN1
GYRO Interface F1-F4 0.5A GYRO MF60NR250V0.5

circuit Interface
circuit
(.JRC] 8apon RadkJ Co., .lid. 9-6

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING A ND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
----------------------------------
- -~
.
- - --
-- - -
--- TROUBLE SHOOTING
As this radar equipment includes complicated circuits, it is necessary to request a

specialist engineer for repair or instructions for remedy if any circuit is defective.
There are also troubles by the fo llowing causes, which should be referred to in
checking or repair work.
1 Poor Contact in Terminal Board of Inter-Unit Cables

a. Poor contact in terminal board
b . The cable end is not fully connected, that it, contacted with earthed another
terminal.
c . Disconnected cable wire
2 Poor Contact of Connector within Unit

This radar equipment is provided with Table 9-10 standard
spares.
Table9-10 : 7ZXRD0025
Name Type/Code Shape (mm) In Spare Parts# Location

use
Fuse MF60NR250V0.5 4 12 F1-F4 GYRO Interface
Circuit
_l_
(5ZFGD00006)
o===o 6.4 CMJ-462E
1.. 3o .,If
Fuse ST6-10AN1 1 3 F501 AC/DC Converter
_l_
(5ZFCA00053)
o===o <!>6.35
NBA-5135
1.. 31.8 .. I1
9.2.1 Special Parts

NKE- 2103
Table9-11 : NKE-2 103 (JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH , JMA-7110-6XA/6XAH )
Parts No. 1
Name : Type · Manufacture Location : Code
' I '
V101 Magnetron MAF1565N NJRC Scanner Unit 5VMAA00102
A101 /A102 Circulator FCX68R Onent Microwave Scanner Unit 5AJIX00027
A103 Dummy NJC4002 NJRC Scanner Unit 5ANDF00001
A104 Filter NJC9952 NJRC Scanner Unit 5AWAX00002
A301 Diode Limiter NJS6930 NJRC Scanner Unit 5ATBT00006
9-7 I.JRC I aopon Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 InstructiOn Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
----------------------------------
NKE- 1125/ 2254
Table9-12 : NKE-1125/2254 (JMA-9122-6XA/9XA/6XAH, JMA-71 22-6XA/9XA/6XAH)
Parts No. I Name I Type Manufacture Location J Code

V101 Magnetron M1568BS NJRC Scanner Unit 5VMAA00106
A101 /A102 Circulator NJC3901 M NJRC Scanner Unit 5AJBV00007
A103 Dummy NJC4002 NJRC Scanner Unit 5ANDF00001
A104 Filter NJC9952 NJRC Scanner Unit 5AWAX00002
NTG-3 225
Table9-13: NTG-3225 (JMA-91 23-7XA/9XA, JMA-7123-7XA/9XA)

Parts No. Name 1 Type 1 Manufacture Location Code
V101 Magnetron M1568BS NJRC Transm1tter 5VMAA00106
Receiver Unit
A101 /A102 Circulator NJC3901M NJRC Transmitter 5AJBV00007

Receiver Umt
A103 Dummy NJC4002 NJRC Transm i tter 5ANDF00001

Receiver Unit
A104 Filter NJC9952 NJRC Transmitter 5AWAX00002

Rece~ver Umt
A301 Diode Limiter NJS6930 NJRC Transm1tter 5ATBT00006

Recetver Umt
A302 PIN Attenuator NJS6926 NJRC Transm i tter 5ATBT00007

Receiver Umt
NKE-1130
Table9-14 : NKE-1130 (JMA-9132-SA, JMA-7132-SA)
Parts No. Name I Type I Manufacture I Location I Code

V101 Magnetron M1555 NJRC Scanner Unit 5VMAA001 04
A101 Circulator NJC33 16 NJRC Scanner Unit 5AJ BV00008
NTG- 3230
Table9-15 : NTG-3230 (JMA-9133-SA, JMA-7133-SA)

Parts No. Name Type Manufacture Location Code
V101 Magnetron M1555 NJRC Transmitter 5VMAA00104
ReceiVer UM
A101 Circulator NJC33 17 NJRC Transmitter 5AJBV00009

Rece1ver Un1t
A301 TRHPL TL378A NJRC Transmitter 5VLAA00037

Rece1ver Umt
[ .JRC ] f)apan Radio Co., .lid. 9- 8

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
----------------------------------
9.2.2 Circuit Block to be Repaired
Table9-16 : Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-9110-6XN6XAH)
Location I Circuit Block : Type I Remarks

SCANNER UNIT MOTOR H-7BDRD0048*i DC brushless motor (common
with HS)
SCANNER UNIT MODULATOR CIRCUIT CME-363 Excluding Magnetron
SCANNER UNIT RECEIVER UNIT NRG-610 Including CAE-529-1
SCANNER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CBD-1783
SCANNER UNIT ENCODER CHT-71A
SCANNER UNIT BRAKE CIRCUIT CFA-252
SCANNER UNIT MOTOR CONTROL POWER CBD-1779
CIRCUIT
SCANNER UNIT PERFORMANCE MONITOR NJU-85
RADAR RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MPBC4421 3* CDC-1324 with mounting bracket,
PROCESS UNIT CDC-1325 and CDC-11860
RADAR RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MDLW1 1900* CDC-1324 with mounting bracket
PROCESS UNIT
RADAR AI S PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC- 1325

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-11860

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR GYRO INTERFACE CIRCUIT CMJ-462E

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR TERMINAL BOARD CQD-2097A

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR MOTHER BOARD CQC-1192

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR FAN (RPU) 109R0612S4013

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR POWER SUPPLY CBD-1661

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR FAN (PSU) H-7BFRD0006*

PROCESS UNIT
OPERATION OPERATION CIRCUIT A CCK-973

UNIT
OPERATION OPERATION CIRCUIT B CCK-974

UNIT
OPERATION OPERATION CIRCUIT D CCK-976

UNIT
OPERATION TRACKBALL CCK-101 3

UNIT
MONITOR UNIT BEZEL KIT MPXP34376* Radar bezel kit

MONITOR UNIT 23 inch LCD CM L-799L 23.1-inch LCD PANEL
MONITOR UNIT LCD OPERATION CIRCUIT CCK-972
i. "•" means revision , such as A, 8 and so on.
9-9 [ .JRC I 8opon Radio Co.,.lt d.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-5ALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
----------------------------------
Table9-17 : Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-9122-6XN9XA)
Location J Circuit Block I Type Remarks

SCANNER UNIT MOTOR MDBW1 0822*i For 100/220VAC
SCANNER UNIT AC220V MOTOR DRIVER H-7EPRD0034* For 220VAC
SCANNER UNIT AC1 OOV MOTOR DRIVER H-7EPRD0035* For 100VAC
SCANNER UNIT BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT CCB-655
SCANNER UNIT BRAKE UNIT NZR-16 Including CFA-259/260
SCANNER UNIT T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC-1205R
SCANNER UNIT MODULATOR UNIT NMA-550-1 Including CPA-264, CMB-404
and CFR-229
Excluding Magnetron
SCANNER UNIT MODULATOR CIRCUIT CPA-264
SCANNER UNIT RECEIVER UNIT NRG-162A Including CMA-866A
SCANNER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CBD-1682A
SCANNER UNIT RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT CSC-656
SCANNER UNIT FAN H-7BFRD0002*
RADAR PROCESS RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MPBC44213* CDC-1324 with mounting bracket,
UNIT CDC-1325 and CDC-11860
RADAR PROCESS RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MDLW11900* CDC-1324 with mounting bracket
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS AI S PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC- 1325
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS ARPA PROCESS CIRCU IT CDC-11860
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS GYRO INTERFACE CIRCUIT CMJ-462E
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS TERMINAL BOARD CQD-2097A
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS MOTHER BOARD CQC-1192
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS FAN (RPU) 109 R061 2S4013
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS POWER SUPPLY C BD-1661
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS FAN (PSU) H-78FRD0006*
UNIT
OPERATION UNIT OPERATION CIRCUIT A CCK-973
OPERATION UNIT OPERATION CIRCUIT B CCK-974
OPERATION UNIT OPERATION CIRCUIT D CCK-976
OPERATION UNIT TRACKBALL CCK-1013
MONITOR UNIT 23 inch LCD CML-799L 23.1-inch LCD PANEL
i. "•" means revision, such as A. B and so on.
[.JRC] (Japan Radio Co., .lid. 9 - 10

JMA-9 100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
----------------------- -- -- -------
Table9-18 : Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-9122-6XAH)
Location I Circuit Block I Type J Remarks

SCANNER UNIT MOTOR H-7BDRD0045*i For 100/220VAC
SCANNER UNIT MOTOR CONTROL POWER CBD-1779
CIRCUIT
SCANNER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CBD-1682A
SCANNER UNIT MODULATOR UNIT NMA-550-1 Including CPA-264, CMB-
404 and CFR-229
Excluding Magnetron
SCANNER UNIT RECEIVER UNIT NRG-162A Incl uding CMA-866A
RADAR PROCESS RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MPBC4421 3* CDC-1324 with mounting bracket,
UNIT CDC-1325 and CDC-11 860
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC- 1325

UNIT
RADAR PROCESS ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-11860

UNIT

UNIT

U NIT
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS FAN (RPU) 109R061 2S4D1 3

UNIT
RADAR PROCESS POWER SUPPLY CBD-1661
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS FAN (PSU) H-7BFRD0006*

UNIT

OPERATION UNIT TRACKBALL CCK-101 3
i. "•" means revision, such as A. B and so on.
9 - 11 [ .JRC I gopan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
----------------------------------
Table9-19 : Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-9123-7XA/9XA)
Location I Circuit Block f Type I Remarks

SCANNER UNIT ENCODER CHT-71 A
SCANNER UNIT BRAKE UNIT NZR-15 Including CFA-259/260
TRANSMITTER T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC-1205R
RECEIVER UNIT
TRANSMITTER MODULATOR UNIT NMA-552-1 Including CPA-264, CMB-405 and

RECEIVER UNIT CFR-229
Excluding Magnetron
TRANSMITTER MODULATOR CIRCUIT CPA-264
RECEIVER UNIT
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT NRG-162A Including CMA-866A

RECEIVER UNIT
TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CBD-1682A

RECEIVER UNIT
TRANSMITTER RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT CSC-656

RECEIVER UNIT
RAOAR PROCESS RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MPBC44213* CDC-1324 with mounting bracket,
UNIT CDC-1325 and CDC-11860
RAOAR PROCESS RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MDLW11900* CDC-1324 with mounting bracket
UNIT
RAOAR PROCESS AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1325

UNIT
RAOAR PROCESS ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-11860

UNIT
UNIT

UNIT

UNIT
RADAR PROCESS FAN (RPU) 109R0612S401 3

UNIT
UNIT
RAOAR PROCESS FAN (PSU) H-7BFRD0006*

UNIT

i. "•" means revision, such as A, 8 and so on.
(.JRC] gopan. RadicJ Co., .ltd. 9-12

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
----------------------------------
Table9-20 : Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-9132-SA)
Location I Circuit Block i Type I Remarks

SCANNER UNIT MOTOR M DBW10823*i For 100/220VAC
SCANNER UNIT BRAKE UNIT NZR-17 Including CFA-261 /262
SCANNER UNIT MODULATOR UNIT NMA-551-1 Including CPA-264, CMB-406 and
CFR-229
Exluding Magnetron
SCANNER UNIT RECEIVER UNIT NRG-229
SCANNER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT C BD-1682A
SCANNER UNIT RELAY FILTER CIRCU IT CSC-656
RADAR PROCESS RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MPBC44213* CDC-1324 with mounting bracket,
UNIT CDC-1325 and CDC-1 1860
UNIT
RADAR PROCESS AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1325

UNIT
RADAR PROCESS ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-11860

UNIT

UNIT

UNIT

UNIT
RADAR PROCESS FAN (RPU) 109R0612S4D13

UNIT

UNIT
RADAR PROCESS FAN (PSU) H-7BFRD0006*

UNIT

i. "•" means revision, such as A, B and so on.
9-13 [..JRC] gopanRadio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
----------------------------------
Table9-21 : Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-9133-SA)
location l Circuit Block 1 Type Remarks

SCANNER UNIT BRAKE UNIT NZR-17 Including CFA-261 /262
TRANSMITTER T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT CMC-1205R
RECEIVER UNIT
TRANSMITTER MODULATOR UNIT NMA-553-1 Including CPA-264, CMB-

RECEIVER UNIT
407 and CFR-229
Exluding Magnetron
TRANSMITTER MODULATOR CIRCUIT CPA-264
RECEIVER UNIT
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT NRG-229

RECEIVER UNIT
TRANSMITTER POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CBD-1682A

RECEIVER UNIT
TRANSMITTER RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT CSC-656

RECEIVER UNIT
RADAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MPBC44213* CDC-1324 with mounting
bracket, CDC-1325 and
CDC-1186D
RAOAR PROCESS UNIT RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MDLW11900* CDC-1324 with mounting
bracket
RAOAR PROCESS UNIT AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1325
RADAR PROCESS UNIT ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-11860
RAOAR PROCESS UNIT GYRO INTERFACE CIRCUIT CMJ-462E
RADAR PROCESS UNIT TERMINAL BOARD CQD-2097A
RADAR PROCESS UNIT MOTHER BOARD CQC-1192
RAOAR PROCESS UNIT FAN (RPU) 109R0612S4D13
RAOAR PROCESS UNIT POWER SUPPLY CBD-1661
RADAR PROCESS UNIT FAN (PSU) H-7BFRD0006*
i. "•" means revision , such as A, 8 and so on.
[ .JRC I aopan Radio Co., J.'td. 9-14

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE
----------------------------------
AFTER-SALES SERVICE
9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts

Keeping period of maintenance parts is ten years from the production is
di scontinued.
9.3.2 When you Request for Repair

If you suppose the product may be out of order, read the description in Section 9
carefully and check the suspected point again.
If it is still out of order, you are recommended to stop operation of the equipment
and consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the product, or our branch
office in your country or district, the sales department in our main office in Tokyo.
Repair within the Warranty Period
If any failure occurs in the product during its normal operation in accordance with
the instruction manual, the dealer or JRC wi ll repair free of charge. In case that
any fa ilure is caused due to misuse, fau lty operation, negligence or force major
such as natural disaster and ftre, the product will be repaired with charges.
Repair after the Warranty Period
If any defective function of the product is recoverable by repair, the repair of it

will be made at your own charge upon your request.
Necessary Information for Repair
• Product name, model , manufacturing date and serial number

• Trouble conditions (as detailed as possible. Refer to "Radar Failure Check List"
on page 9-16
• Name of company/organization, address and telephone number
9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance

The performance of the product may deteriorate due to the secu lar change of the
parts used in it, though such deterioration depends upon the conditions of
operation. So checkup and maintenance is recommendable for the product in
addition to your daily care.
For maintenance, consult with the near-by dealer or our sales department.Such
maintenance wi ll be made with charges.
For further detai ls of after-sale serv ice, contact the JRC Offices.
9-15 [ .JRC] 8opan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-$ALES SERVICE > 9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE
----------------------------------
Radar Failure Check List
When placing an order for repair of the product, it is requested that you could
confirm the check items and fill the results and sent the sheet to our contact.
If there is any unclear items, contact the ship on which the product is
installed, and give the correct information on the product.
Ship name: Phone: Fax:

i Radar general model name:JMA- iserial No. :
i. Write the full model name correctly
Check the following items in the order of the number, and check the applicable
answer between YES or NO.
If the item cannot be determined as YES or NO, explain in detail in the item (18),
others.
No. Check Item Result

(1) Power can be turned on . (The lamp on the Operation unit is lit) YES NO
(2)i A few minutes after powering-on , it will become standby status. YES NO
(3)i When powering-on (or TX ON), LCD monitor something is lit. YES NO
(4 )1,11 The antenna rotates at the transmission (TX) ON . YES NO
(S)i,ii Current is supplied to the magnetron. (Refer to the instruction manual) YES NO
(6)ii Turning is enabled . (Check with the range of 6 NM or more) YES NO
(7)ii Fixed marker is displayed . YES NO
(8)il VRM is displayed. YES NO
(9)ii While noise is displayed while set at SEA and RAIN minimum, GAIN YES NO
maximum, IR-OFF and range 48 NM.
(1 0)11 Target reflection echo is displayed. YES NO
11
(11 ) Sensitivity of reflection echo is normal. YES NO
(12)ii EBL is displayed. YES NO
11
(13) Cursor mark moves. YES NO
111
(14 )"· GYRO course can be set and normally displayed. YES NO
(15)11 •111 LOG speed can be normally displayed. YES NO
(16)ii Target tracking function works normally. YES NO
11
(17) ·iii If equipped with an interswitch , when switching from the straight mode (II) to YES NO
(X), the failures (items marked NO) in the above (1) to (16 ), are switched over
to the other unit.
( 18) Others (Error message, etc. )
i. If result is NO, then check the fuse. (Refer to Section 9.1.2 "Operation Checking" and Section 9.2 ''TROUBLE
SHOOTING")
ii. Check these items while transmission is ON.
iii. Functions mentioned in the items (14), (15) and (17) may be optional, answer is not necessary.
[~Rc ) f}opanRadicJCo.,.ltd. 9 - 16
SECTION 10
DISPOSAL
II
DISPOSAL
10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON ..................................................10-2
10.4 DISPOSAL OF TR-TUBE ..................................................................... 10-2
[JRC ) Japan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 10.DISPOSAL > 10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT
----------------------------------
DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT
When disposing of this unit, be sure to follow the local laws and regu lations for
the place of disposal.
DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES
& wARNING
insulate the batteries by taping the <±>e terminals.
Otherwise, heat generation, explosion or a fire may
occur.
In this unit, Lithium batteries are used for the following parts:
Radar Processing circuit (CDC-1324): BT300 (Maxell: CR2032)
• Do not store used lithium batteries. Dispose of them in accordance with

regulations of local government.
• When disposing of used lithium batteries be sure to insulate the batteries by
taping the <±>8 terminals. For disposal of batteries, be sure to follow the local
laws and regulations. For detail, consult with the dealer you purchased the
product our business office, or local government.
10 - 1 (~ RC ) f}apan Radic Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 10.DISPOSAL > 10.3 DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON
----------------------------------
-t_~
-
--- --
-~- -= DISPOSAL OF USED MAGNETRON
Magnetron is used in the Scanner (NKE - 2103/2254/ 1125/l 130) and

Transmitter Receiver Unit (NTG-3225/3230).
• When the magnetron is replaced with a new one, return the used magnetron to
our dealer or business office.
For detail, consult with our dealer or business office.
DISPOSAL OF TR-TUBE
In the case that either mark shown in Fig l0- 1 is on the expired TR-tube,
Radioisotopes are in the TR-tube.
• Disposal of TR-tube with these marks must be done in accordance with the
laws and regulations of the pertaining country. For detail, consult with our
dealer or business office.
• Radiation from TR-tube has no effect on the human body.
• Don't take apart TR-tube.
Fig 10-1 : Radioisotopes Marks
[ .JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.lid. 10-2

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 10.DISPOSAL > 10.5 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS
----------------------------------
ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS
(Names & Content oftoxic and hazardo us s ubs tances or e lements )
m:tl.: ~(Ty p e) : JMA -9100 Series, JM A-7100Seties ~.#J; (Name): RA DA R
{i ·~{1'2?1iiJ$!!x;c*
~iH'I= ~f1' (Toxic and Hazardous Substances and Elements)

(Par1 name)
li} ;R t!.\ /\fftlB ;ttSVIX+ ;ti~ - ~lfd:
(Pb) (Hg) (Cd) (Cr6+) (PBB) (PBDE)
'd ;"Jl5.Atl€ tjt;i;

(Scanner Unit) X X 0 X X X
!JlC&: f:i '1'- ;c

(Transmiller-rcceiver Unit ) X X X X X X
l:Al}!AJ:lln£ (Inboard Unit)

· f~~:t&i"l (D isp lay Unit)
· ~JM::t&j"( (OperationUn it) X X X X X X
. 1,1 >::·:ll!:JIIlWn
(RADA R Process Unit)
:$'H:ll~~ (Peripherals)
· ~ff (Opt ions)
· tl!tx~ (Cables)
X X X X X X
• T-JUt (Documennts)
0: -!(,~ ~{i •li{i',lf4?1JJMI: if<.;rilf'rffrff ~JJM1 Htl •((.J-;'1- ill:~J {I:SJrr 11306-2006 .f,J,l1U!I~~(t'-J~ fJ'!!!;R J;J. f .
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all oft he homogeneous materials for this
par1 is below the requirement in SJff 11 363-2006.)
x , -&~ ~ {i ,tdf'JJ4?1JJ9t~ :.!>.(1: ijd~M'FI¥l Jt1: - ~J.IVl-f.f*l 'P ((.J-:'1- fJ:Jil :11 SJrr 11363-2006 f,f.l1U!l!)j; ((.J liM r,t '!!i;J(.
(Lndicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one oft he homogeneous materials
used for this par1 is above the limit requirement in SJff 11363-2006.)
10-3 [ ~Rc I gapan Radio Co.,.l.'id.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 10.01SPOSAL > 10.5 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS
----------------------------------
I~Rc ] 8apan.RadioCo.,.i'Jd. 10-4

- - - - -- -- - -----
SECTION 11
SPECIFICATION
lllll l l •·•11111 111
SPECIFICATION
11.1 JMA-9133-SA TYPE RADAR ............................................................... 11-1
11.2 JMA-9132-SA TYPE RADAR ............................................................... 11-2
11.6 JMA-911 0-6XA TYPE RADAR ............................................................ 11-6
11.8 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1139) ............................................................... 11-8
11 .9 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1130) ...............................................................11-9
11.10 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1129-7/9) ...................................................... 11-10
11.11 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1125-6/9) .......................................................11-11
11.12 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2254-6HS) .....................................................11-12
11.13 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-6) ..........................................................11-13
11.14 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-SHS) ..................................................... 11-14
11 .1 7 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990) ............................................................... 11-17
['-'RC I f)opan Radio Co.,.J.'td.

11 .18 Target Tracking Function ................................................................. 11-20
11.19 AIS FUNCTION .................... ................. .............................................. 11-21
11 .20 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-84) .............................................. 11-22
11 .22 AC-DC CONVERTER (NBA-5135) ..................................................... 11-22
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11 SPECIFICATION > 11 .1 JMA-9133-SA TYPE RADAR
----------------------------------
JMA-9133-SA TYPE RADAR
GENERAL SPECIFICATION
Class of emission PON
Display Color Raster Scan
Screen 23 .1inch LCD (Effective diameter of Radar: more than 320mm)
Range Scale 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96NM
Range Resolution less than 30m
Minimum Detection Range less than 40m
Bearing Accuracy less than 1o
Bearing Indication Relative motion mode: N-UP, C-UP and H-UP
True motion mode : N-UP and C-UP
Ambient Condition Temperature
SCANNER UNIT -25 to +55 °C (Storage -25 to +70 °C)
Other Unit -15 to +55 °C
Relative humidity 93% at +40 °C
Vibration 2 to 13.2Hz Amplitude +/-1mm +/-1 0%
13.2 to 1OOHz Acceleration 7m/s2
Power Supply Input AC100 to 115V, 50/60Hz, 1q> or
AC220 to 240V, 50/60Hz, 1q>
Power Consumption Approx.400VA typical
Approx. 2000VA at Maximum wind speed
PS Voltage Fluctuation +/-10% (at the maximum cable length)
Pre Heating Time Within 4 minute
From STBY to TX Within 5 sec.
SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1139)
See 11.8
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3230)
See 11 .15
DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
See 11 .17
PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-84)
See 11.20
OPTION
Scanner with Deicing Heater NKE-1139-D (Only heater collar)

lnterswitch Unit NQE-3141-2A (Maximum 2 Radars)
NQE-3 141-4A (Maximum 4 Radars)
DISPLAY UNIT (Desktop type) NCD-4990T
Maximum Cable Length
SCANNER UNIT to 30m

TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT
DISPLAY UNIT to 35m
SAFE DISTANCE FOR STANDARD COMPASS
SCANNER UNIT 1.4m

TRANSMITIER RECEIVER UNIT 3.9m
DISPLAY UNIT 4.0m
11 - 1 [.JRC] gopan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11 .2 JMA-91 32-SA TYPE RADAR
----------------------------------
Screen 23.1inch LCD (Effective diameter of Radar: more than 320mm)
Range Scale 0.125, 0.25 , 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48 , 96NM
Bearing Indication Relative motion mode : N-UP, C-UP and H-UP
AC220 to 240V, 50/60Hz, 1q>
See 11.9
See 11. 17
See 11.20
OPTION
Scanner with Deicing Heater NKE-11 30-D (Only heater collar)

lnterswitch Unit NQE-3141 -2A (Maximum 2 Radars)
NQE-3141-4A (Maximum 4 Radars)
Max.lmum Cable Length
SCANNER UNIT to 65m

T RANSMITIER RECEIVER UNIT
SCANN ER UNIT 5.1m

DISPLAY UNIT 4.0m
[.JRC) 8apan.Radic Co.,J.'id. 11-2

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATIO N > 11.3 JMA-9123-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR
----------------------------------
JMA-9123-7XA/9XA TYPE RADAR
Range Scale 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0. 75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96NM
Vibration 2 to 13.2Hz Amplitude +/-1 mm +/-1 0%
AC220 to 240V, 50/60Hz, 1q>
SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1129-7/9)
See 11.10
TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3225)
See 11.16
See 11. 17
See 11 .21
OPTION
Scanner with Deicing Heater NKE-1129-7D/9D (Only heater collar)

lnterswitch Unit NQE-31 41-2A (Maximum 2 Radars)
Maximum Cable length
SCANNER UNIT to 30m

DISPLAY UNIT to 35m
SCANNER UNIT 1.05m

TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT 2.8m
DISPLAY UNIT 4.0m
11 - 3 [.JRC l aopan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11 .4 JMA-91 22-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR
--------------------------------- -
JMA-9122-6XA/9XA TYPE RADAR
Range Scale 0 .125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75 , 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96NM
SCANNER UNIT -25 to +55 °C (Storage -25 to +70 °C )
AC220 to 240V, 50/60Hz, 1q>
SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1125-619)
See 11 . 11
See 11.17
See 11.21
OPTION
Scanner with Deicing Heater NKE-1125-6D/9D (Only heater collar)

SCANNER UNIT to 65m
SCANNER UNIT 2.4m

DISPLAY UNIT 4.0m
[..JRC I 8opan Radio Co.. .l'Jd. 11-4

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11.5 JMA-9122~XAH TYPE RADAR
-------------------------- --- -----

JMA-9122-6XAH TYPE RADAR
Screen 23 .1inch LCD (Effective diameter of Radar: more than 320mm)
Range Scale 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0. 75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96NM
AC220 to 240V, 50/60Hz, 1q>
Approx. 1OOOVA at Maximum wind speed
SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2254-0HS)
See 11.11
DISPLAY UNIT {NCD-4990)
See 11.17
See 11.21
AC/DC CONVERTER {NBA-5135)
See 11 .22
OPTION
Scanner with Deicing Heater None
SCANNER UNIT to 65m
TRANSMITTER REC EIVER UNIT
SCANNER UNIT 2.4m

DISPLAY UNIT 4.0m
11-5 [.JRC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11.6 JMA·9110-6XA TYPE RADAR
----------------------------------
JMA-911 0-6XA TYPE RADAR
Range Scale 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75 , 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96NM
Power Supply Input AC100 to 115V, 50/60Hz, 1<p or
AC220 to 240V, 50/60Hz, 1<p
Approx. 1OOOVA at Maximum wind speed
SCANNER UNIT (NKE-21 03-6)
See 11. 13
See 11 .17
PERFORMANCE MONITOR
(NJU-85)
See 11 .21
AC/DC CONVERTER (NBA-5135)
See 11 .22
OPTION
SCANNER UNIT lo 65m
SAFE DISTANCE FOR

STANDARD COMPASS
SCANNER UNIT 2.4m
DISPLAY UNIT 4.0m
["RC] (Japan Radio Co.,.lid. 11-6

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11 .7 JMA-9110-6XAH TYPE RADAR
----------------------------------
JMA-911 0-6XAH TYPE RADAR
Range Scale 0.125, 0.25 , 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24 , 48 , 96NM
True motion mode: N-UP and C-UP
Vibration 2 to 13.2Hz Amplitude +/-1mm +/-10%
Power Supply Input AC100 to 115V, 50/60Hz, 1<p or
AC220 to 240V, 50/60Hz, 1<p
Approx. 1OOOVA at Maxi mum wind speed
See 11.14
See 11.17
See 11.21
AC/DC CONVERTER (NBA-5135)
See 11 .22
OPTION
SCANNER UNIT - DISPLAY 65m
UNIT
SCANNER UNIT 2.4m

DISPLAY UNIT 4.0m
11 - 7 [ .JRC I 3opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11 8 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1139)
----------------------------------
-~~-
-
- -
---- -
=== = -~ --= SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1139)
SCANNER UNIT NKE-1139
Dimension Height 791 x Swing Circle 4000 (mm)
Mass Approx.150kg
Polarization Horizontal
Directional Characteristics Horizontal beam width : 1.9°
Vertical beam width : 25°
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/-1 0°)
: below -30dB (outside +/-1 0°)
Revolution Approx.24rpm
Power Supply for Motor AC100- 115V, 50/60Hz, 1 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.9 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1130)
------------------------------- ---
SCANNER UNIT NKE-11 30

Mass Approx.180kg
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/-1 0°)
:below -30dB (outside +/-10°)
Power Supply for Motor AC 100 - 115V, 50/60Hz, 1cp or
AC220 - 240V, 50/60Hz, 1cp
Maximum Wind Velocity 51.5m/s (100knots)
Transmitting Frequency 3050 ±20MHz
Transmitting Power 30kW
Transmitting Tube Magnetron[M 1555]
TX Pulse width I Repetition SP1 : 0.071Js/2250Hz
Frequency MP1 : 0.21Js/2250Hz MP2 : 0.31JSI1900Hz, MP3 : 0.41JSI1400Hz
LP1 : 0.81Js/750Hz, LP2 : 1.01Js/650Hz LP3 : 1.21-Js/51 OHz
0.125, 0.25, 0.5NM : SP1
0.75NM : SP1 /MP1
1.5NM : SP1 /MP1 /MP2/MP3
3NM : MP1 /MP2/MP3/LP1
6NM : MP1 /MP2/MP3/LP1 /LP2
12NM : MP1 /MP2/ MP3/LP1 /LP2
24NM : MP3/LP1 /LP2
48NM : LP2
96NM : LP3
Modulator Solid State Modulator Circuit
Duplexer Circulator + Diode Limiter
Front End Module Built-in
Intermediate Frequency Amplifier Intermediate Frequency : 60MHz
Band Width : 25/8/3M Hz
Gain : more than 90dB
Amplifying Characteristics : Logarithmic Amplifier
Overall Noise Figure 7.5dB ( Typical)
Tuning Manual/AUTO
11-9 [.JRC ] 8opan. Radio Co.,.I.'Jd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual> 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11.10 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1129-7/9)
----------------------------------
d- .d~(!) SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1129-7/9)
SCANNER UNIT NKE-1129-7/9

Dimension 7ft Height 536 x Swing Circle 2270 (mm)
9ft Height 536 x Swing Circle 2825 (mm)
Mass 7ft Approx.51kg
9ft Approx.53kg
Directional Characteristics Horizontal beam width : 1.0° (7ft)
: 0.8° (9ft)
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/- 10°)
: below -30dB (outside +/-10°)
Power Supply for Motor AC1 00 - 115V, 50/60Hz. 1q> or
AC220 - 240V, 50/60Hz. 1q>
Maximum Wind Velocity 51.5m/s {1OOknots)
I.JRC I 8opan. Radio Co.. .l'Jd. 11 -10

JMA-91 00 Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11.11 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1125-619)
-------------------------------- --
SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1125-6/9)
SCANNER UNIT NKE-1125-6/9

Dimension 6ft Height 536 x Swing Circle 1910 (mm)
9ft Height 536 x Swing Circle 2825 (mm)
Mass 6ft Approx. 55kg
9ft Approx. 60kg
Directional Characteristics Horizontal beam width : 1.2° (6ft)
: 0.8° (9ft)
Side lobe Level : below -26dB (within +/-10°)
Power Supply for Motor AC100- 115V, 50/60Hz, 1q> or
AC220 - 240V, 50/60Hz, 1q>
Transmitting Frequency 9410 +30M Hz
Transmitti ng Tube Magnetron[M1568BS]
Frequency MP1 : 0.21Js/2250Hz MP2 : 0.31Js/1900Hz, MP3 : 0.41Js/1400Hz
LP1 : 0.81Jsi750Hz, LP2 : 1.01Js/650Hz LP3 : 1.21Js/51 OHz
0.125, 0.25, 0.5NM : SP1
0.75NM : SP1/MP1
1.5NM : SP1 /MP1 /MP2/MP3
3NM : MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1
6NM : MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1 /LP2
24NM : MP3/LP1/LP2
48NM : LP2
96NM : LP3
Modu lator Solid State Modulator Circuit
Band Width : 25/8/3MHz
Overall Noise Figure 7.5dB (Typical)
Tuning Manual/AUTO
11 -11 [.JRC I 8opan. RadicJ Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11.12 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2254-6HS)
----------------------------------
SCANNER UN IT NKE-2254-6HS
Mass Approx. 55kg
Power Supply for Motor DC24V
Maximum Wind Velocity 51 .5m/s (1OOknots)
Transmitting Tube Magnetron[M 1568BS]
Frequency MP1 : 0.21JS/2250Hz MP2 : 0.31Js/1900Hz, MP3 : 0.41Js/1400Hz
LP1 : 0.81Jsfi50Hz, LP2 : 1.01Js/650Hz LP3 : 1.21Js/51 OHz
0.125, 0.25, 0.5NM : SP1
0.75NM : SP1/MP1
1.5NM : SP1 /MP1/MP2/MP3
3NM : MP1/MP2/MP3/LP1
24NM : MP3/LP1 /LP2
48NM : LP2
96NM : LP3
Band Width : 25/8/3M Hz
Tuning Manual/AUTO
[~RC ] (Japan RadkJ Co., .ltd. 11 - 12

JMA-9100 lnstructton Manual > 11 SPECIFICATION > 11 .13 SCANNER UNIT ( NKE -210~)
----------------------------------
SCANNER UNIT (NKE-21 03-6)
SCANNER UNIT NKE-2103-6

Mass Approx. 40kg
Transmitting Frequency 9410 ±30M Hz
Transmitting Power 1OkW
Transmitting Tube Magnetron[MAF1565N]
TX Pulse width I Repetition SP1 : 0 .08~s/2250Hz
Frequency MP1 : 0.25~s/1700 H z MP2 : 0 . 5~s/1200Hz
LP1 : 0.81Js/750Hz, LP2 : 1.01Js/650Hz
0.125, 0.25, 0.5NM : SP1
0.75NM : SP1 /MP1
1.5NM : SP1 /MP1 /MP2
3NM : MP1/MP2LP1
6NM : MP1/MP2/LP1 /LP2
12NM : MP1 /MP2/LP1 /LP2
24NM : MP2/LP1 /LP2
48NM : LP2
96NM : LP2
Tuning Manual/AUTO
11 -13 [JRC] 3 opan RadioCo.,J'Jd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11 .14 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-2103-GHS)
----------------------------------
SCANNER UNIT NKE-2103-6HS

Mass Approx. 40kg
Vertica l beam width : 20°
Maximum Wind Velocity 51 .5m/s (1 OOknots)
Transmitting Power 1OkW
Transmitting Tube Magnetron [MAF1565N]
TX Pulse width I Repetition SP1 : 0 .081Js/2250Hz
Frequency MP1 : 0 .251Js/1700Hz MP2 : 0.51Js/1200Hz
LP1 : 0.81Jsn50Hz, LP2 : 1.01Js/650Hz
0.125, 0.25, 0.5NM : SP1
0.75NM : SP1/MP1
1.5NM : SP1 /MP1 /MP2
3NM : MP1 /MP2LP1
6NM : MP1 /MP2/LP1 /LP2
12NM : MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
24NM : MP2/LP1 /LP2
48NM : LP2
96NM : LP2
Tuning Manual/AUTO
(JRC] 8apanRadio Co.,..tld. 11 - 14

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11 .15 TRANSMITIER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3230)
----------------------------------
11Jrzt6 TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT
(NTG-3230)

NTG-3230
Dimension :Width 615 x Depth 365 x Height 615 (mm)
Structure Wall Mount, Drip Proof
Mass Approx.33kg
Transmitting Tube Magnetron [M1555]
Frequency MP1 : 0.21Js/2250Hz MP2 : 0.31Js/1900Hz, MP3 : 0.41Js/1400Hz
LP1 : 0.81Js/750Hz, LP2 : 1.01Js/650Hz LP3 : 1.21-Js/51 OHz
0.125, 0.25, 0.5NM : SP1
0.75NM : SP1/MP1
1.5NM : SP1/MP1 /MP2/MP3
6NM : MP1 /MP2/MP3/LP1/LP2
24NM : MP3/LP1/LP2
48NM : LP2
96NM : LP3
Duplexer Circulator + TRHPL
Tuning Manual/AUTO
m
11 - 15 [ JRC) 8apan. Radit:J Co.,.lid.
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11.16 TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT (NTG-3225)
----------------------------------
==-~~t_fi TRANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT
(NTG-3225)
T RANSMITTER RECEIVER UNIT

NTG-3225
Dimension :Width 460 x Depth 227 x Height 461 (mm)
Structure Wall Mount, Drip Proof
Mass Approx.15kg
Transmitting Tube Magnetron[M1568BS]
TX Pulse width I Repetition SP1 : 0 . 07~s/2250Hz
Frequency MP1 : 0.21Js/2250Hz MP2 : 0.31JS/1900Hz, MP3 : 0.4~s/1400Hz
LP1 : 0.81Jsi750Hz, LP2 : 1.01Js/650Hz LP3 : 1.21Js/5 1OHz
0.125, 0.25, 0.5NM : SP1
0.75NM : SP1/MP1
1.5NM : SP1/MP1 /MP2/MP3
24NM : MP3/LP1 /LP2
48NM : LP2
96NM : LP3
Tuning Manual/AUTO
[.JRC) 3aponRadi.o Co.,.Dd. 11 - 16

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11.17 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
----------------------------------
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4990

Dimension Width 700 x Depth 850 x Height 1100 (mm)
Structure Self-Standing, Drip Proof
Mass Approx. 130kg
Screen 23.1 inch Color LCD (Effective Diameter, more than 320mm)
Viewing Distance 1m from the center of Display
Range Scale 0.125, 0.25, 0.5, 0. 75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96NM
Range Marker 0.025, 0.05, 0.1, 0.25, 0.25, 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16NM
Range Accuracyr Less than 1% of the Range Scale in use, or 30m whichever is larger
Variable Range Marker 2 (VRM1NRM2)
VRM Scale 0.000 to 1OO.Onm, Numerical Indication in 4 digits
Bearing Scale 360° in 1o step
Off Center Within 66% of Radius, except 96nm range
Trackball Cursor Built-in (Target Range, Relative/True bearing Presentation)
Electronic Bearing Lines 2 (EBL 1/EBL2) (on Center/Floating)
EBLBearing Indication 000.0° to 359.9• Numerical Indication in 4 digits
Tuning Indication Bar graph
Marking Function Electronic Mark (Maximum 20 points)
Heading Line Indication Electronic
True Motion Unit Built in (0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24 and 48nm)
Anti Sea Clutter (SEA) Manual/AUTO
Anti Rain Clutter (SEA) Manual/AUTO
Display mode North-up I Head-up I Course-up
Trails Indication Off/0.25/0.5/1 /3/6/10/15/30/60min
Video Process (PROC) Built in (Scan correlation I Remain)
Interference Rejection (IR) Built in ( Off I Low I Middle I High)
Auto-acquisition Zone (AZ) Sector (2)
User Mapi Built in, Mark and Line (20,000 points)
Self diagnostic function Built in
Own Ship's Track lndicationi Built in
Parallel Index Line (PI) Built in
AIS Indication Built in Display 300
Activate 100
Association function :Built in
Interfacing Slave Display (TRG, VD, BP, BZ)
GPS IEC61162-1(NMEA01 83)
LOG
GYRO
AIS IEC611 62-2
Inter Switch (OPTION)
Radar Buoy
External Alarm output
11 - 17 [.JRC I aopan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual> 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11 .17 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
----------------------------------
Receivable Signalii
Receive capability NAV1 /NAV2/LOG/ALM/AIS/H DG at TB4501
Port: COM DSub-9pin
Navigation equipment Longitude/Latitude GGA>RMC>RMA>GNS>GLL
IEC61162-1/2
Waypoint RMB>BWC(BWR)
COG/SOG RMC > RMA > VTG
SPEED VBW
Daymme information ZDA
Alarm acknowledge ACK
Rate of Turn ROT
Rudder RSA
Bearing signal GYRO-SYNC 360x, 180x, 90x, 36x(GYRO IIF)
GYRO-STEP 360x, 180x, 90x, 36X(GYRO IIF)
IEC61162-2 THS>HDT over 40Hz
384oobps
(HOG port at terminal board TB4501)
IEC61162-1iii HDT>HDG>HDM>VHW
(HOG port at terminal board TB4501)
Speed signal LOG-SYNC 360x, 180x, 90x, 30x(GYRO 1/F)
LOG-PULSE 800, 400, 200, 100(GYRO 1/F)
External event mark Contact input (EVENT port at terminal board TB4601)
Radar buoy Negative input (RBVD port at terminal board TB4401)
Depth IEC61162-1/JRC DPT>DBS>DBT>DBK,
JRC format
Water temperature IEC61162-1/JRC MTW, JRC format
Tendency IEC61162-1 /JRC CUR, JRC format
Wind IEC61162-1 MWV>MWD
AIS IEC61162-2 VDM,VDO (AIS port at terminal
board TB460 1 )
Acknowledge Contact input (SYSACK, ARPAACK, PWRACK port
at terminal board TB4601 )
Sendable Signal
Slave video Radar video: TIY, VD, BP(2048p), BZ
(Terminal board TB4401)
Send capability NAV1 /NAV2/ALM/ARPA/JARPA port at TB4501
Port MNT port at TB4601
COM at DSub-9pin
Navigation information Radar system data RSD
IEC61162-1/2
Own ship data OSD
Tracking target data TTM ,TLL,TTD,TLB,JRC-ARPA
AIS target data TTM,TLL,TTD,TLB
Alarm ALR
Auto pilot APB
Bearing of destination BOD
Latitude/Longitude data GGA,GLL,RMC
Waypoint RMB ,BWC
COG/SOG VTG
Cross track error XTE
11 - 18
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11 .17 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-4990)
----------------------------------
Heading data HDT,THS
External alarm Default setting normally closed contact
Maximum current 200mA (SYSALM, ALPAALM, PWRALM
port at terminal board TB4601 )
Acknowledge Contact output (ACKOUT port at terminal board TB4401)

Watchman reset Contact output (WMRST port at terminal board TB4401 )
Remote maintenance JRC format (MNT port at terminal board T B4601)
AIS alarm acknowledge ACK (AIS port at terminal board TB4601)
External monitor Multi scan monitor Analog RGB, HD15pin Connector 2 port
Only with Navigation Equipment is connected.
ii. The Speed measuring accuracy of speed sensor shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC.96(72).
The measuring accuracy of GPS shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC.112(73).
iii. Can't be use for target tracking.
m
11 -19 I.JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.lid.
JMA-91 00 Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11.18 Target Tracking Function
----------------------------------
Target Tracking
Function
Available range scale All range
Acquisition Acquisition mode Manual/AUTO ( AUTO mode uses Auto-acquisition Zone)
Manual Cancellation Any one Target or All targets at once

Acquisition Range 0.1 nm - 32nm (Available all range scale)
Tracking Number of Target 100 Targets (AUTO Tracking)
Tracking range Onm - 32nm (Available all range scale)
Presentation Display mode TM (True Motion) I RM (Relative Motion)
Azimuth mode North-up I Head-up I Course-up
Vector mode True/Relative Display
Vector Length Variable, 1 to 60 min. (1 min . step)
Past Position True/Relative Display
Number of Dots···10 points
Display Interval Time·· ·0.5 I 1 I 21 4 min
Time to Display Vector Within 1min
Time to Stabilize Vector Within 3min
Alarm Auto-acquisition Zone 2 (sector)
Setting Range AZ1 (0.5 ~ 32NM),AZ2 (0.5 ~ 32NM)
Alarm Indication Symbol on Display, Visible I Audible Alarm
Safe Limits Setting Condition CPA LIMIT 0.1 to 9.9NM
( CPA / TCPA) TCPA LIMIT 1 to 99 minute
Setting Condition Safe Target CPA > CPA LIMIT
O> TCPA
TCPA > TCPA LIMIT
Danger Target CPA ~ CPA LIMIT
0 ~ TCPA ~ TCPA LIMIT
Alarm Indication Status symbol Alarm Audible
Safe Target 0 (wht) OFF OFF
Danger Target O(red) CPAITCPA ON
Lost Target Symbol on Dtsplay
Visible I Audible Alarm
Data Indication Target Data Simultaneous and Continuous Display for 4 Targets
True Bearing, Range, True Course, True Speed,CPA,TCPA,BCR,BCT
Own Ship's Data Course and Speed

Trial Maneuver Manual Setting
Trial Course Oo to 359.9°
Trial Speed 0 to 100 kn
Accuracy of Display Complied with IMO Requirement
System Failure Alarm Visible I Audible Alarm
Speed Input Manual/AUTO (LOG)
[ .JRC I aopan Radio Co., .lid. 11 -20

JMA-9 100 Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11 .19 AIS FUNCTION
----------------------------------
AIS FUNCTION
AIS Function
Activation Activation mode Manual/AUTO (AUTO mode uses Auto-activation Zone)
Manual Cancellation Any one Target
Presentation Number of Activated Target 100 Targets
Number of Target 300 Targets {sleeping target and activated target)
Number of Dots···10 points
Display Interval distance· ··0.1 I 0.2 I 0.51 1 NM
Message Broadcast Message, Addressed Message
Display mode TM (True Motion) I RM (Relative Motion)
Vector Length Variable, 1 to 60 min. (1 min. step)
Alarm Auto-activation Zone 2 (Sector)
Setting Range AZ1 (0.5 to 32nm), AZ2(0.5 to 32nm)
(CPA / TCPA) TCPA LIMIT 1 to 99min
Alarm Condition Safe Target CPA > CPA LIMIT
O> TCPA
TCPA > TCPA LIMIT
0 ~ TCPA ~ TCPA LIMIT
Alarm Indication
Safe Target D. (wht) OFF OFF
Danger Target D. (red) CPAITCPA ON
Lost Target Symbol on Display
Data Indication Target Data Simultaneous and Continuous Display for 2 Targets
simple display Ship's Name, Call Sign, MMSI, Course, Speed,
CPA and TCPA
detail display Ship's Name, Call Sign , MMSI, Course, Speed, CPA,
TCPA, Bearing, Range, Ship's Heading Bearing ,
Rate of Turn, Latitude, Longitude, Destination
and Navigation Status
Own Ship's Data The ship's name, call sign, MMSI, course, speed,
ship's heading bearing , rate of turn, latitude,
longitude, destination and navigation status of own ship
Trial Course Oo to 360°
11 - 21 ['-'RC] doptin Radio Co., .l'Jd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11 .20 PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-84)
----------------------------------
Speed Input Auto (LOG)
~~24} PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-84)

PERFORMANCE MONITOR NJU-84
Mass Approx.0.7kg
Operating Frequency 3050 ±30M Hz
~j~j~ PERFORMANCE MONITOR (NJU-85)

PERFORMANCE MONITOR NJU-85
Mass Approx.0.7kg
Operating Frequency 9410 ±30M Hz
~~~ AC/DC CONVERTER (NBA-5135)
AC/DC CONVERTERNBA-5135
Mass Approx.5kg
Power supply Input AC100 to 240V, 50/60Hz, 1<P
Output Voltage DC24V +/-5%
Output Current 12A max
11 -22
Appendix A
I ~~~~~~~~I I 111 111

A .1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................ ................ A-1
A .1.1 Overview ......................................................................................... A-1
A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION ................................................................ A-3
A .2.2 Inter Switch Menu ........................................................................... A-4
A.2.3 Change of Connection Pattern (with 2 Display Units) ................ A-6
A.2.5 Operating Connection Pattern Files (File Operations) ............... A-8
A.3 REFERENCE ....................................................................................... A-1 0
A .3.1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern ................... A-1 0
A .3.3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit ................................... A-10
[JRC] 8apanRadkJ Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > A NOE-31 41 lnlerswitch Unit > A 1 OVERVIEW
----------------------------------
OVERVIEW
A. 1.1 Overview
fnterswitch NQE-3141 is equipment that enables free changeover between radar
display units installed on the bridge and antenna units having different
characteristics.
If display unit is turned off or malfunctioned, the scanner unit can be controlled by
other display unit.
If interswitch unit had malfunctioned, the radar system is switched to standa lone
mode.
Up to 8 units can be changed over.
When the connected scanner is changed, following setting values are

automatical ly loaded.
Tune Adjustment Section 7.1.3 "Tuning"
Bearing Adjustment Section 7 .1.4 "Bearing Adjustment"
Range Adjustment Section 7.1 .5 "Range Adjustment"
Antenna Height Section 7.1.8 "Antenna Height Setting (Antenna

Height}"
Antenna installation location Section 7.1.9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting)"
Sector Blank Section 7.2.2 "Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank)"
TNI Blank Section 7.2 .3 "TNI Blank Setting (TNI Blank)"
Performance monitor Section 7.3.4 "Adjustment of Performance Monitor"

adjustment
PRF Fine Tuning Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)"
A.1.2 lnterswitch Setup

Connection modes can be changed si mply by changing the interswitch connection
(upper left of the display).
A master display unit is always necessary for establishing a slave

connection.
Before a slave display unit can be placed in transmission state, the

master display unit must be placed in transmission state.
A -1 [.JRC ] f}opan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-31 41 lnterswitch Unit >A1 OVERVIEW
----------------------------------
upper left of the di splay
Connected
Scanner
Unit
Connection
•tMI!h,::~ l~~~~t...------ Mode
Connection Switch
The upper stand indicates the number of the connected scanner unit.
The lower stand indicates the connection mode.
Master :Mode in which the scanner unit can be controlled by the

display unit
Slave :Mode in which the scanner unit cannot be controlledi
i. When Slave is selected, transmission I standby and pulse length cannot be changed.
The available range is also limited.
I.JRC] f)opanRadio Co., .lid. A-2

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
----------------------------------
INTERSWITCH OPERATION
Follow the flowchart below to change the current interswitch connection pattern.
A.2.1 Operation Flow
Place the transmission standby state .
Open the Inter Switch Menu .
Change the connection pattern
Close the Inter Switch Menu .
A- 3 (.JRC ] 8apan Radic Co.,.ltd.

----------------------------------
A.2.2 Inter Switch Menu
The lnter Switch Menu can be opened only when the transmission standby state.
Procedures
1) Press the [TX/STBY] key to stop transmitting.
The transmission standby state will be placed.
2) Move the cursor onto the lnterswitch connection change (upper

left of the display), and left-click.
The Inter Switch Menu will appear.
Exit
1) Left-click the o.Exit button.
The Inter Switch Menu will close.
Inter Switch Menu (with 2 Display Units)
Current
connection
status
a. Connection
pattern
•.----:1+-- Display unit

in operation
b. Set c. Exit
[.JRC] 8 apan.Radio Co.,.ltd. A-4

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-31 41 lnterswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
----------------------------------
a. Connection pattern
If this button is clicked, the connection pattern is selected.
The display unit in operation is enclosed in a square 0.

The backg round of the current connection pattern display is highlighted.
b. Set
If this button is clicked, the change of connection is detennined.
c . Exit
If this button is clicked, the Inter Switch Menu is closed .
If only 2 display units are installed but the interswitch is set for 3
or more display units, the Inter Switch Menu for 3 or more
display un its will appea r.
Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units)
a. Connected
scanner unit
b. Display unit
connected as
master
c. Display unit
connected as
slave
f . Set
d. Name
e. File
g. Exit
Operations
a. Connected scanner unit
In mode for naming a display unit or antenna unit, clicking on a un it opens the name input
window.
A- 5 [ JRC l aapan Radio Co.,J'Jd.

JMA·9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit > A 2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
----------------------------------
b. Display unit connected as master
c. Display unit connected as slave
If this button is clicked, select I cancel the display unit.
If this button is clicked in the naming a display unit or scanner unit mode, the name input
window is opened .
d. Name
If this button is clicked, set to the display or scanner unit rename mode.
e . File Operations
If this button is clicked, the File Operations menu is opened.
f. Set
If this button is clicked, the change of connection is detern1ined.
g. Exit
If this button is clicked, the Inter witch Menu is closed .
A.2.3 Change of Connection Pattern (with 2 Display Units)

If two display units are installed, a connection pattern needs to be selected.
Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch menu (with 2 Display Units).
2) Move the cursor onto the Connection pattern (see Section A2.2 "Inter
Switch Menu" and Section a. "Connection pattern") to be changed , and left-click.
The connection pattern will be selected, and 3. Set (Section b. "Set") will blink.
3) Left-click the 3. set button.
The connection pattern will be changed.
(~Rc ] 8apan Radio Co., .lid. A- 6

----------------------------------
A.2.4 Change of Connection Pattern (with 3 or More Display
Units)
If three or more display units are installed, the layout of connection patterns needs
to be set.
Procedures
l ) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).
2) Move the cursor onto the display unit (Section b. "Display unit connected as
master" or Section c. "Display unit connected as slave") to be changed , and left-
click.
The selected display unit will be highlighted.
To deselect the display unit, left-click key again.
3) Move the cursor to the change-destination display unit, and left-

click.
he selected display unit in step 2 wi ll be switched to the change-destination display unit, and
3. Set (Section f. "Set") will blink.
If the change destination is empty, control wi ll move and 3. Set wi ll blink.

A master display unit is always necessary for establishing a

slave connection .
A-7 [ ~Rc ] 8opanRadi.oCo.,.ftd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lntersw1tch Unit > A 2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
----------------------------------
A.2.5 Operating Connection Pattern Files (File Operations)
Frequently used connection patterns can be read easily by saving interswitch
connection patterns.
(1] Loading connection patterns (Load)
Procedures
I ) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).
2) Left-click the 2. File Operation button.
The File Operations menu will appear.
Currently saved connection patterns in memory will be listed.
5) Left-click the 1. Yes to load.
[2] Saving connection patterns (Save)
Procedures
1) Open the Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units).

The File Operations window will appear.

The Save menu wil l appear.
Currently saved connection patterns in memory will be listed.
4) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be saved.
The Input File Name window will appear.
Up to 8 characters can be entercd.For the input method on the character input screen, see
The connection pattern wi ll be saved when the name is input.
[.JRC] 8opon.Radio Co.,.lid. A-8

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit> A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
----------------------------------
(3] Erasing a connection pattern (Erase)
Procedures
2) Left-click the 2. Rle Operation button.

The list of connection patterns stored in the memory will be displayed.

The selected connection pattern is erased and the file name is deleted from the list.
A.2.6 Names of Display Units and Scanner Units

The display units and antenna units can be named.
Procedures
2) Left-click the 1. Name button.
"Name" wi ll be highlighted, indicating that the rename mode is activated.
3) Move the cursor to the display unit (Section b. "Display unit connected as
or scanner unit
master" or Section c. "Display unit connected as slave") (Section a.
"Connected scanner unit") to be renamed , and left-click.
he Input IND Name or the Input TXRX Name window wi ll appear.
4) Input a new unit name.
Up to 8 characters can be input as a unit name. For the input method on the character input
menu, see Section 3.3 .4.7 "Entering a character".
The selected display unit or antenna unit wil l be renamed when the new name is input.
A-9 [~RC I aapan. Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit > A.3 REFERENCE
----------------------------------
REFERENCE
A.3.1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern

After the current interswitch connection pattern has been changed, operation
needs to wait until the system is ready. This is because the preheat time varies
depending on the previous connection of the scanner unit and display unit.
The wait time is necessary for protecting the electronic tubes that emit radio
waves.
a) When not changed to a new connection pattern Preheating not

required
b) When changed to a new connection pattern and an Preheating not
scanner unit had been used before the change required
c) When changed to a new connection pattern and an Preheating
scanner unit had not been used before the change required
A.3.2 Notes on Changing Connection Pattern

An attempt to change to another connection pattern immediately after the
completion of connection pattern change may fail.
This is because internal processing still needs some preparation time upon
completion of connection pattern change. Let several seconds pass between
connection pattern change operations.
A.3.3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit

Before a slave display unit can be placed in transmission state, the master display
unit must be placed in transmission state. Tf the master display unit is moved from
the transmission state to the transmission standby state, the slave display unit is
forcibly placed in transmission standby state. When they are in transmission
standby state, IMaster Standby Iis shown in the alarm indication (lower right of the
display), and the alarm sounds.
A slave display unit cannot control tune. Tune is controlled by the master display
unit. Slave is shown in the transmitter pulse length (upper left of the disp lay).
Range change for a slave display unit is limited by the range and pulse Length I
repetition frequency of the master display unit. As a rule, a greater range than the
range of the master display unit cannot be set for a slave display unit. However, if
the transmitter pulse length of a slave display unit is identical to the master
display unit's and the repetition frequency is within the master display unit's, a
greater range than the master display unit's can be selected for the slave display
unit. When the master display unit narrows the range or changes the transmitter
[JRC ) gapan Radio Co.,.f'Jd. A - 10

,
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit > A.3 REFERENCE
----------------------------------
pulse length, the range of the slave display unit may be forcibly changed. In this
case, IMaster Range CHG I is shown in the alarm indication (lower right of the
A.3.4 Setting at Installation

Setting of the interswitch circuit (CCL-304*)
The settings ofthe DIP switches SWl l to SW13 are shown below.
SoN 11 SoN 13 SoN 12

CJ Dc::::J
lnterswitch circuit PCB

CCL-304*
1) SW11 setting (extension mode and master/slave settings)

2 3 4
~~
ON
OFF
Unused
Description 1, 2
y
Set the switch to OFF in
Unused ON
normal state.
Unused OFF
Master/slave setting
Description 3
Set the switch to ON if the
slave ISW PCB is selected in Slave ON
extension mode.
Master OFF
Extension mode setting
Description 4
Set the switch to OFF if the
number of connected display Extension mode ON
units is four or less .
Normal mode OFF
A - 11 [.JRC] 8apan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit > A .3 REFERENCE
----------------------------------
2) SW12 setting (radar connection settings)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
Radar connection settings
No.1 display unit connected ON

1
No.1 display unit NOT connected OFF
No.1 scanner unit connected ON

2
No.1 scanner unit NOT connected OFF

3

4

5
No.3 scan ner unit connected ON

6

7

8
3) SW13 (unused)
2 3 4
Unused (All OFF) 1,2,3,4
Before the DIP switches of the interswitch circuit can be set, the
interswitch breaker must be turned off in order to ensure safety
operation.
[~RC l aopan Radio Co.,.ltd. A - 12

Appendix B
DRAWINGS
lllll l l • ' 111 111
'I
I I
II
DRAWINGS
8.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... B-1
8.1.1 NCD-4990 ........................................................................................ B-2
8.1 .2 NCD-4990 w/NBA-5135 ................................................................... B-3
8.1 .3 NCD-4990T ................................ ...................................................... 8-4
8.1 .4 NCD-4990T w/NBA-5135 ................................................................ B-5
8.1 .5 NWZ-170-R ...................................................................................... B-6
8.1.6 NWZ-170-RT .................................................................................... 8-7
8.1. 7 NCE-5163-R ................................................................................... .. 8-8
8.1.8 NCE-5163-RT ................................................................................... 8-9
8.1.9 NBA-5135 ...................................................................................... B-10
8 .2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... B-11
8.3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit ................................................ B-12
8.4 Primary Power System Diagram ....................................................... B-13
8.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit ........................................................ B-14
8.5.1 NKE-2103 ...................................................................................... B-15
8.5.2 NKE-2254 ...................................................................................... B-16
8.5.3 NKE-1125/NKE-1130 ..................................................................... B-17
[ .JRC ) 8apan Radio Co.,.ltd.

B.5.4 NKE-1129, NTG-3225 I N KE-1139, NTG-3230 ............................. B-18
B.6.1 NKE-21 03 ...................................................................................... B-20
B.6.2 NKE-2254 ...................................................................................... B-21
B.6.3 NKE-1125 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-22
B.6.4 NKE-1125 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-23
B.6.5 NKE-1129 (AC11 OV) ...................................................................... B-24
B.6.6 NKE-1129 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-25
B.6. 7 NTG-3225 ...................................................................................... B-26
B.6.8 NKE-1130 (AC11 OV) ...................................................................... B-27
B .6.9 NKE-1130 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-28
B.6.10 NKE-1139 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-29
B.6.11 NKE-1139 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-30
B.6.12 NTG-3230 ...................................................................................... B-31
B .7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ............................................... B-32
B.7.1 JMA-911 0-6XA/JMA-911 0-6XAH .................................................. B-33
B .7.2 JMA-9110-6XA/JMA-9110-6XAH (desktop) ................................. B-34
B.7.3 JMA-9122-6XAH ............................................................................ B-35
B .7.4 JMA-9122-6XAH (desktop) ................................................ ........... B-36
B. 7.5 JMA-9122-6XA/9XA ...................................................................... B-37
B .7.6 JMA-9123-7XA/9XA ...................................................................... B-38
B.7.7 JMA-9132-SA ................................................................................ B-39
B .7.8 JMA-9133-SA ................................................................................ B-40
B.7.9 NCD-4990T .................................................................................... B-41
B.8 GYRO 1/F ............................................................................................. B-42
B .9 Inter Switch Unit ................................................................................. B-44
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 8 .1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
----------------------------------
Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
8- 1 [ .JRC J gopan Radio Co.,.lid.

r------ ----------------
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ- 170-R
LCD PANEL OP£AATION OI'ERAnON

ORCUn 8 OROJIT A
CML-799L CCK-'17• CCK-973
(7WSRD0002C) PC.SZl PC61 0
I ...,.,,.,•.,.""'1
\!'!."': .!.. _.,1
I
I
I
I
I
I
'2
::::>
..>-
0..
r---------------
I
L--
:
-------.::-.::-.:-.:---..:--=----=----=--=------------------ -----------, I
I
I I
I I
I RADAR PROCESS UNIT ; A6 PROCESS
"'
i:5
I I NDC-1399-9 ~
ORCUI I -------------
1
0 I
I
i, CDC-1325 I
E
~
PC~O
..
~
0>
i:5
I
I ~ ARPA PROCESS
ORCUI
N
I
c:
0
CDC·11860
c.c
~c: "' PC<&SO
c:
~ RADAR PROCESS GYRO lNTERFACf
~ ORCUTT CRCUO
-
ai
1\
CDC-1324
PC440
CMH62E
PC.Zl
..-I
C/J (()
(.')
z TERMINAL BO ARD C)
CQD-2097 u:
! Q <)- " "'"""
' PC 43J
.,.
0 0)
ai 0)
1\
... MOTHERBO ARD
.:l
c: c CQC-1 192
::2 01
c:
0 z1I PC410
ti I
~
.E
I
~~ r-------- --------- ------------ ------NCD-4990( -- -- ---E!!r--
~D-----~
-
0
0 • :
1
liPHi$ljg)
~ ""': L-- ______ - - - ___ _ ____ - - - _____ - - - - ____ J JMA-9122-6/9XA,JMA-9123-7/9XAJMA-9132-SA ,JMA-91 33-SA
<{
::2
--,
Ill ln1erc onne c 1ion diag ram o f DISPLAY UNIT 1y p e NCD-4 990(self sl and ing)
r---------
MONITOR UNIT
- ------------
NWZ-170-R
2
:J
.
>.
Q.
LCD PANEL
CML-799L
"'
i5 (7WSRD0002C)
0
E
.
~
01
i5
5
·~
_____ .,
" (u~~=•cuu; IJ
c I
c I
§ I
Q)
I
5 I
I
r---------------i ----------------
~
ai
A
CIJ
L- -
-------------------------------- -----------, I
I
I I
C) RADAR PROCESS UNIT ~ A5 PROCESS I I
z NDC-1399-9 a OROJI I
!
0
ai
I COC·I325
PC460
I
I
C"')
Al11'A PROCESS
A
c;;
ORCUI I
co
..
:J
c
~
&t)
('I')
18522
ACIN
COC· I 1860
PC <SO
5
~
"'&t)""
I
RADAR PROCESS
ORCUIT
G YRO INlB!FACf
C RClA'T
Ill
.!: <( CMJ..162E
m CDC-1324 PC420
-
0
0 PC440
~
~
<
z
~
.., 3: TERMINAL BOARD
CQD-2097
I c N
PC43J
I en I
((}
en 18521
0)
I DC24VOUT
u::
"'z
MOTHERBOARD
I c CQC-1192 I
I (J I
PC410
I
I I
I
I I
I N r---------------------------------------------
1 - ---~
NCD-4990 ( E!.Ir~D .jii;I;J ti*l[8]
I "'"" L---- ----------------- - ------------- J JMA-91 10-6XA,JMA-9110-6XAH ,JMA-9122-6XAH
I m Interconnection diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-4990(self standing)
r---------------------~
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-170-RT
LCD PANEL
CML-799L
(7WSRD0002C)
~~~.::!:;1
I
I
I
I
I
I
'2
....,..
::J L--
r--------------- ----------------
-------------------------------- -----------~ I
I
Ci
0
RADAR PROCESS UNIT
~
..
~ I:
I .._ ___________ _
NDC- 1399-9T I
0
E
.~
0>
I
I
v
COC·I325
PC<I60
I
-.;t
c
AFA PFloc:ESS
o~cu•
I
c: Cl)
0 CDC· I 1860
~c: PC®
c:
~
.E
RADAR PR<X:ESS
ORCUIT
GYRO INIEJIFACE
CRCUIT
..... CMJ·<I62E
ai CDC- 1324 PCA20
A PC440
(/)
(!) TERMINAL BOARD
z CQD-2097
~
0
t-
0
0')
<)-- • " """"' PC4~
ai 0')
....
A
J
c:
'1'
c
MOTHERBOARD
CQC-1192
::iE () PC410
~
c:
z
E.
.E r---------------- - --------------------------------~
0 M 1 NCD-4990T(.!J..t!t1 ) tl~!lfl!Sl
0
o;
..(
::iE
...., al
. L-----------------------------------J
"'l""" JMA-9122~9XA,JMA-9123-719XA,JMA-9132-SA,JMA-9133-SA
Interconnection diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-4990T(desklop)
I r----------------------
MONITOR UNIT
I NWZ-170-RT
I
"'::::>
c
.,..
.
Q.
I
I
LCD PANEL
CML-799L
c5 (7WSRD0002C)
0 I
E
I
0
."'
~
I
5 I " ~~~=·c..u ll
~c I
-----~ I
c I
~ I I
~ I
c I
I I
CD
II
I r--------------- L--
----------------
-------------------------------- -----------, I
I
~
i .§
f I I
(/)
C)
I : RADAR PROCESS UNIT ~ I I
A6 ~OCESS
z I :_ !~~-~3~_:92 -. O~OJI I -------------
1
!
!
I g COC-1325 I
PC<I60
0 1
CD I • AIIPAP~ OCESS
L()
II I
iij I It)
OROJI
-------, Cil
..
::>
c
~
I M
"'l"""
lB522
ACIN
CDC·11860
PC«Ml
I
:
-<JII"'OH 1s 1o1
I
c
0
I It) I
I RADAR PROCESS I
~
CYRO INTERFACE
I <Z: t:: ORCUfT CRCUIT I
Ill z I
.f I fll =>
COC-1324
CMJ· <162E
I
8 I z "' PCOZl
~~~
PC440 I
I
~ I j -..:Z. .( .."""' I
TERMINAL BOARD
....~ ..... UOco
<Uz
I
CQD-2097
I 0 PC4J:>
I 0')
0')
I '1' MOTHERBOARD
I c CQC-1192
I (.) ~----
rr:~
-~m
I
z II PC4 10
I
I
I ~ l1
....,,....,_ 1
r----------------------- --------------------------~
NC0-4990T ( ~J: ~ ) tJIJ';Itlfl@
I .
"'l""" L __ :.: ~-:.. _____________ _ _ _ _ - - - __ _______ J JMA-9110-6XA,JMA-9110-6XAH,JMA-9122-6XAH
I fll Interconnection diagram o f DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-4990T(desldop )

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B 1 lnterconnecbon D1agram of Display Unit
----------------------------------
8.1.5 NWZ-170-R
CML- 799L
(H- 7WSRD0002C )
LCD
CCK- 972
PC710
0
Ln [J
v -'="
M ~
.-4 N
0 co
0::: M
u 0
N
,..... M
0
I
I ~
~
E
-
.-4
N 0
M
>
0
0
~
>
E
N
u
<
DDD ~
,.._
mm
oo
NC'?
l '<:t
0-:>
a
C)
CML-764-R (NWZ-17Q-R)
Monitor Unit Interconnection
Fig B-5: Interconnection Diagram of NWZ-1 70-R
[JRC ] gapan RadicJ Co., .lid. B-6

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > B DRAWINGS > 6 .1 Interconnection D•agram of D1splay Unit
---- --- --- --------------------- ---

8.1.6 NWZ-1 70-RT
CML-799L
(H-7WSRD0002C)
LC D
CCK-972
PC710
0
\0 <t: a
.r 0 -<:--
M M ~
...... M ll)
0 ...... CXl
0::: 0 M
u 0::: 0
N u M
0
f'.. N
I f'.. ~
I
I
I
>
E ......I
Lrl E 0
...... Lrl M
>
0
a.. 0
~
01
>
E
ll)
u
<(
v
D D D <{
.,.....
N ,..... (0 r-
M
.,..... 0
<0 0) 0)
(0 w
.,..... .....J
I v 0 0 I r-
()V N M
I v 0 :::J
o-:> 0 -, co 0
() CJ ()
()
CML-764-RT (NWZ-17Q-RT)
Fig B-6: Interconnection Diagram of NWZ-170-RT
B- 7 [ JRC I aopon Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
----------------------------------
8.1.7 NCE-5163-R
OPERATION UNIT
NCE-5163-R
OPERATION OPERATION
CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
CC~974 CCK-973
PC620 PC610
~
Ll"t M ~
M M
M
M M M
~ ~
~
0 0 0
~ ~
~
u u u
N N N
"::r:' "::r:' "::r:'

N M ~
Ll"t
~ ~ ~
~
3 3 3 3
6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P lSP

.16411 J6408 .16406 J6405 .16404 )6403 .16402
OPERATION CIRCUIT D
CCK-976
PC640
6P 6P 2P 30P
.16410 J6409 J6407 .16401
W67 2m H-7ZCRD1337
CMD-996-R {NCE-5163-R)
Operation Unit Interconnection
Fig B-7: Interconnection Diagram of NCE-5163-R
[..JRC I gapan Radio Co.,.lid. B- 8

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 8 .1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
----------------------------------
8.1.8 NCE-5163-RT
OPERATION UNIT
N CE-516~RT
OPERATION OPERATION
C IRCU IT B C IRCU IT A
CC~974 CCK-973
PC620 PC6 10
<t
Ll') M ~
M
M M
M M M
~
...... ......
0 0 0
ex: 0::: 0:::
u u u
N N N
r;-
":r:
I
"II
I
N Ll') M ~
o.s:> ID o.s:> o.s:>
~ ~ ~ ~
6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P lSP

J6411 ]6408 ]6406 ]6405 ]6404 ]6403 J6402
O PERATION CIRCUIT D
CCK-976
PC640
6P 6P 2P
J6410 ]6409 ]6407
W68 5 m H-7ZCRD 1338
CMD-996-RT (NCE-5163-RT)
Fig B-8 : Interconnection Diagram of NCE-5163-RT
B-9 [ .JRC l aopon Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
----------------------------------
8.1.9 NBA-5135
W6 H-7ZCRD1499
FL1 A1
LF-210 AES300- 24B
W3 H·7ZCRD1497
CBD-16846. (NBA-5135)
AC/DC Converter Interconnection
Fig B-9: Interconnection Diagram of NBA -5135
[~RC ] 8opon Radio Co.,.lid. B - 10

I
I +-' ;a
·;: I
c ~
:J
>- I
::) ~
~
"' I
a.
VI ~
-ro
0
0 ~
E 0..
*
"'
0,
0"'
E
>-
(/)
·-en
0
~ ~v\ ~
!
0
~
;;:
Q.
0 U,V 0>
0>
'l;t-
00
N E I
a(.)
ai
A ro
L.. <:
......
(/)
C)
z 0) .._. ______ I 0
ro E
~ ·- ..I\1A-9110-6XA
sv I> ~
0
ai
A
0 ..t.1A-9110-6XAH
..I\1A-9122- 6XAH
only
P+12V\
0C+24V a
0>
.!!1 ..-
..-
(ij
:::0
c
E
Q) 3.3V I> ~
E
(l)
"'
:::; +-' ~
+48V
u
c:
0 en AC220-240V (to SCANNER UNIT)
Cl)
....
2 ~ 50/ 60Hz I t/J
I> ~
u;
C/)
.E
0
0
&
o; L.. 0
<1: Q) ..-I
:::;
..., P+SV P+12V<l c:o
~ 0>
0 P+SV u::::
0...
INPUT VOLTAGE
SELECT SWITCH NCD-4990 fi;Jj ~*R~
Power supply system diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-4990[self standing)
L_ _
c
:::>
>.
ro
-0.
en
0 Jllmmer
~
0
E
ro
L..
0> N
......
ro
·- _ _ _ _ __::::
Jle:cai.:.:
Vkm JnO!~IO!
0 LCO Fen Alarm
~ Rldor >1<1«
Trigger)!«
0 ~
u.. Radlrvkleo,
Tngoer,Rot.JO\
<F--
......
......
Radar video. I
ro Trlgger,Raatlan 5e nai,GPIO GlRO/lOG

Rador Y'deo,
Trlgger,Rotatk Ill
c < se"'' :
0>
u:::
0>
·-
(/)
< OryC<nta:
< Seriai,GPIO )
~
GYRO
LOG
<] GlROQ.OG
<t iASfJSYI
~ r~J'(C<n~l
...
~...r~J'(Fan alarm
< 5erilll :
~----------------------------------------~)
l'l:>wer~J'(Callrol
Ft:twe:r s~ty Fan alarm
NCD-4990 i!·iH(~$1fjgi
Signal flow diagram o f DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-4990
I
I ;a
~
E I OVER VOLT AGE
~
!! PROTECTION
g> I IOOV 14&+ '-2V
a 220V 295+ '-2V
.,
E
-.;
I
I
E
AC100- 115\1
AC22().240'1 _j_
;--- ~
>-
V)
I
50160Hz,1 d> CIRCUIT
BREAKER UNE FILTER I l INTERSV\IITCH=1A ~
l
~ P.I2V OPERATION LNIT=O SA(typ)
~ I ro
~
20A
I GYRO 1/F ORCUIT=O 1A(typ)
Q.
+
(!-
~ I 0')
E
·c:
Q. I ro r l
...
H l
VOLTAGE SELCT
!ll
A
I
I
0 SWITCH
+48V±3V
'
SCANNER
X BM0_2 SA, S BAN0_3 Of\
E:
~
00
V)
C)
z I E
Q.)
-r Ol
-!!1
a
! I -+-' E:
-
AC1 00-115V
H I
0 (j) AC22().240V RADAR PROCESS ORCUIT • 1 2A(typ) Q)
I >-. '
MOMTOR t.HT +50V ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT= 0 15A(typ)
~....
II)
A I (f)
50160Hz,1d>
PO~R ~ !-- J AIS PROCESS ORCUIT = 0 15(lyp)
iii
~
:;,
c:
~
I ~ SCAN NER
MOTOR t
1 TERMNAL BOARD= 1 OA(typ)
Q)
~
("')
......
I Q.) &
-~
PO'M:R
I ~ AC1 001230V _ , I RADAR PROCESS ORCUIT • 2 2A(typ) ((I
~
., 1d> I d>.3d> ~Q1ij - f.-
PO~
+33V
I ' ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0 1A(typ) ~
cu
£ I 0 AIS PROCESS ORCUIT • 0 1(1yp)
TERMNAL BOARD = 0 2A(typ) .g
8
;;;
I 0... POWER CONTROL
CIRCUIT f Q
I
~ ~ 1 C\1
......I
....,
I
I
ro
E
H +12V I
_j
RAQb.R PROCESS CIRCUIT= 0 1A(typ)
TERMINAL BOARD= 0 4A(typ)
en
0>
u:
I
~
1
I a..
I
I
H - 12V
I
J
RAQb.R PROCESS CIRQJIT = 0.1A(typ)
TERMINAL BOARD= 0 1A(typ)
I
IIIIII
i
FAN_ALM 1'0\M:RCONIRQ.
I
BATTRY
I OC24V
I OPERATION UNIT= 0 1A
I
I
1
1111 1
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B 5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit
----------------------------------
Block Diagram of Scanner Unit
[.JRC I aapan Radio Co.,.lid. B - 14

JMA-9100 lnstruct1on Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.S Block Diagram of Scanner Unit
----------------------------------
8 .5.1 NKE-2103
NKE-2103 Scanner Unit
SLOT ANTENNA
 A,B,Z
T<re Control
Receiver
SWITOiiNG Banct.vklh
Control
ORQJIT
PC201
Tx Tr1ggeqP\ise Width
Status
Rotation Control
OC+24V
OC+24V
MOTOR CONTROL
SAFETY SWITCH 0C +24V
Speed cMtrol POWER
5101
PC1501
Fig B-13: Block Diagram of NKE-2103
B - 15 [~Rc) 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > B. DRAWINGS > B 5 Block Diagram of Scanner Uml
----------------------------------
8.5.2 NKE-2254
NKE-2254 Scanner Unit
SLOT ANTENNA
~ MOTOR
i 6101
TuneCcrtrol
---- ~ ---
INTERFACE ORQJIT
PC1101
status Serial Com, BP, BZ, VO, TRIG
OC+21V
MOTOR CONTROL
SAFETY SWITCH t--- -
OC+21V
POWER 5101
PC1501
Fig B-14: Block Diagram of NKE-2254
[.JRC] f)opan RadicJ Co.,.lid. B -16

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B DRAWINGS > B.S Block Diagram of Scanner Unit
----------------------------------
8.5.3 NKE-1125/NKE-1130
NKE-1130/ NKE-1125 Scanner Unit
SLOT ANTENNA
CI>A,CI> B, CI>Z
TL.ne Control
Receiver
Banct.li<th
Cortrol
PC201
Tx TrlggertPulse Wl<th
INTI:RFACE OROJIT
PC1101
Serial Com, BP, BZ, VD, TRIG
Fig B-15: Block Diagram of NKE-1125/ NKE-1130
B-17 ['-'RC] dt:ifX1"J Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 6 .5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit
----------------------------------
8 .5.4 NKE-1129, NTG-3225 I NKE-1139, NTG-3230
NKE-1139/NKE-1129 Sca nne r Unit
SLOT ANTENNA
MOTOR
CI>A, CI>B, CI>Z
DRIVER
PC1501
Slatus
NTG-3230 / NTG-3225
Transceiver Unit
DIODE llMITER
/ lRHPL
Receiver
Bar6Nklh
ecn..a
INTERFACE OROJIT
PCllOl
Serial Com, BP, BZ, VD, TRIG

•
--------------OC
~ +4W
~----
A000 -115/ 220-MIV
59'60iz.l(/)
Fig B-16: Block Diagram of NKE-1129, NTG-32251 NKE-1139, NTG-3230
[ ~RC I aopan. RaditJ Co., .lid. B-18

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B DRAWINGS > B 6 Interconnection D1agram of Scanner Unrt
----------------------------------
Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
B-19 [.JRC] aapanl«idio Co.,.fid.

I
I ANnNNA N.U: 118--4 I
I
I
J[ TRANSCSVER UIIT NZT 2103 TRANSCEIVER UNIT INTERCONNECTION
CltK- 591
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
·2 I
W\1101
::J
Q; I
c
c I
5
{/)
'15 I
E I
!'! 0
N
"'"' I
c5 POWER SUPPLY
MOOULATOR CIRCLfT
I
c I PC201:
0
CIRCUIT
(PCIOOI. CME - 363 co
~c CB0- 1783 TBI
c l- 21hort No,..l Sc>ood
~ 2-31hort H1,h Spood
£
"'CD I I'-
1\ I
I
..-
I
en
t?
I
I
OISPLAY
UNIT
m
z I Ol
!
0
a:i
('I')
0
L------~~~~~~~~~~~~~~;
I --- ----- --l!
i.L
~ NJu-85 (OPTION)
1\ N I ~- I
n; I
j
c w
I
8 101
~"'c ::.::: t+-71lllfii)OC)q
0
·u z L____
' ___________________
MOR10A C8Mal J
~ NKE-2103 I 2103-6HS
.!:
8 ~
~ctJ··~~-~~
c;;
<i:
CD . SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION
~
...., m (:A)(-10
.... NIT£NNI<
S?
I'JCo!OCII
RECEIVER UNIT NRG- 182A ~ao I ;71 :.;:..,

!~!~i~~~- u~0,~----,
. . ,. . . . .. MAO
m••
VIOl
M1!1ia18S
~;z:s?
r·-·-
I
I <
~ S'
IIOJ
MODULATOR UNIT NMA-550 Olf'IOI)
0 ~ lORD II~ ~
:r: ....
0
P1tl1
::lSI.
PliOl
J2102
L·l·
i :r: ....
IIWOIIfT I"MOJtT
0
ijo :r:
a: lMAOI JVAQI "":::"
~
0 JIIOII
~~!! '"
• :::
MODULATOR ""'1
CIRCUIT "' - •
:r: ~
Jil t I lO
0 L-<t-IP CPA- 254 5!1--n;;-;
L...,P ;: ; tr£
....
N
:g
:J
I
L:. =9
_,~ ~:D
T•IIV
5 ~m~~~R ....
~
I
iii
................ "J1 ll--G- • IQNC
"""
I§
.......
QRCUfT
......,.
~~ ~~~
c:
c: ""
'""
n..c: i:... -
~
en ; .,. .....
0
~58Z
~~ IHWCNT~ft~~
-
:;
2•15V
:ICHO
0
E
E
e
C> .....
""' T IR CONTROL CIRCUIT
•W
~ N
N
0>
c5'"
CMC-1205R J•IIV •tJV
UfHt•
BRAKE COHTR<X. CIACU!T .!!! I
sl ::;:: ;:. § l
='
4M U!
c:
0 T8101 llf.t1"aU..f11-(\ I IJV ltV :; .&.
CCB-t$5 a m
-,I ll~
............. c::
XI ;
-~
-> i~ { ..
lOP•
;~:~ ~~!
c:
c:
POYER SU PPLY
CIRCUIT :§
~ l ;~~ ;~~ X i
5 HtO•
CB0- 1182A Q)
ITftO·•
3 d, Jt11~ c::
£ I 7WT..
=ia :~;:
IMP
:'::.~~i
i:S •
r=..... c::
0
I MHt·
,. 0
<D
I
I V1EA ICI J 4 J 5
~
....
IOVO• 1
ai or- J111 2 J ll13 Jlll 4 ................
II YO-
..., ~
or- I lleO--~ L--o--~
.::
"enz I (.)
Jl JIIOI
-
~~
L+-11'
~ ~
J1105
~
L·"' IL..... - > L+"'
-
C)
I <2: ~~!§g~~t
....... .... ....
~
~~~
•. ""'...
~8~
-..... 0>
......
~
0
I l t') ,
I
ciJ
0> ~
ai I N
u::
~
or- (Will)
" I or-
I
""ID""~ I r7 II I
iij
:J
c: I w ~
~
'"c I ~
l
~
~ - z
~ SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTD N
DISPlAY UNT
NKE-1125PM (AC100V) X2S<W2 ~'~
£
I
~'*'··~!l·ll l
('I) CAX- 11
8,... I
0>
<
...,
~
I
•
(0
.
a:::a
00
.... ~
~
NITEN "'-
IUC4<ICII
9
·::::>
"c"' RECEIVER UNIT NRG-162A ....
NJSU:)O
I~M~YI ....
NJCeU2
~'
iiic
c
,._.""'"''"'~" 0~ ~ "" ).::~· ~
0
~
(/)
. u . ., .,. ~
l
E NJC310 1•
"' ~
lc
I
I
"
~
0
NMA-550
~
S'
0
~c r;;;"'""'!Qt~~~5tir~!IJ~ftil~~~@...,Ez::B:Illr---;-;:;;~3PII I1 C\1
~. SHORT ~~~~~~~~~ m~
I a: C\1
2.MAGI I.MAOI (.)
c
.,~ I
£ I
~
0
0
zw =
:9
I
u•
~ :~
0 ITIE
l•UV
SHORT
MODULATOR
CIRCUIT
CPA-28<1
~
ll)
C\1
00
.., .. IGNO ......
<0
ai ----------.J1 IL~-F
I HC ......
....~0
11TIY IOHC
,...,
"""
"z
(/)
(!)
"'"
I.JBP
I• BP£
•••
-~ I~Cm~~~~~;±~jt~~~~~~~~~~~~~
- 'IBZf =l' .....
:;a ,
~
GND
IVO
T /R CONTROL CIRCUIT
E:
~
0 C')
ai I lVD£
JMTA• CMC-1205R
I•ISY
l•UV •UY Ol N
"
. ...TA-
sl :: ':o 8! -~ I
iii
::>
c ...
T8101 MITIAI.IIII-G
t8P•
::d. s-u:v
..,. IIOV
::~~
lXI
:;l
.s-•sv
•
,.tiW-l
a
c::
Cl)
-> 1{
3BZ• "" POVt£R SUPPLY .!;2
"'
:::<
c
• .BZ
~TRG• I MCT I MCT
CIRCUIT
Q 882
......
(.)
0 ,_.. ,,..
ITR Q·
t '""" '""' (!)
ti::>
.b
Ill
I
I 0 ,..,..
I MTft•
IOVO•
~. HISlOP
:;. ::::
IMlER
JHSP
X !
e; •
:'::s':'op:;!
IC2
CB
J ..
-1 A
J 3
=)1.. c::
c:
0
£ N II VD-- J1112 J1113 J1114 UCROt~t ~
0
I N SJ/ IOcW L-G--IP IL- G-3P L-()o-..JP
~
0
u J8 J11Ge J11~
-2
~
L-IP IL· G-IP L-o-2P
:::<
....,
I
I -
<(
I t)
N '
0
N
ri:J
~
~
I
<WOII )
ZOf!:DU17. e 3 ;;:l &ftiOI)
ZCADIIMW
•
-;
en
u::
w
~
z ---, 1
I SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION DISPLAY UIIT NKE- 11 25PM (AC220V) X2S.W2.1.:?~
.
"'lt
CD.
• CAX-11 ~'*'·li~IIMB!D
m
. . -- l
I
I
I
HEAnR COilTROL PART
I CH0-211
(OPTION)
I
I
I
I
I
SH'UY SWITCH CSIH56 (~1285\'!!
~{ i S'
0
~
~
r&ii1
.... (.)
~
RED
REOT
2_ / 1
TJ:: REDT
z=~• 0)
C\j
:g ~ i l rr (W302) ZCRD1286* ~
~
~
::>
Gi
WIH II 1
-.;;1
I
c
c
rl i I BRAJ<E COHTRDl CIRCUIT
~5
.....
(/)
0
I
Clo:!
0
E
.
E
UOOo
lOY
~ -.:t
..e;,
i5
Ol
.!!1
N
I
c
0
a ('()
·~ t::
c ..... ,JJIOI
~ .Q
-> -l
.. z ~~
c: (3
L-------------------------flOtw~l ~w
@ (W303) ZCRl1211* "' •11
trte _ .. Q)
--------.fl:;:ljlw ..l l PCIIOII ,,., t::
!!
E I : :c ' .., ~llHDIIW , . , t::
0
.----:i.ikJio OHO
~ 0 i, .:;;;5:;:: § ~
CD I -~ - .. ~ ~ 1ft. ;;
~ ~
A I ~
I I .!:
9~
(/) (J
-
(!)
z I <( ..-
N
~Cl I
I
0)
Ill d
0> '3
ai I N u:
~
~
A I ~
iii I
..
c: I
:l
w ~
~ ·-----------·___; SCANNER UNIT INnRCONNECTION
!
~
c I
0
tl - z CAlH2
2 NKE-1129PM (AC100V) xn·;,r 3~,~

u;
E ~IP··~I'l·ll!ll
0
I ll)
.
00
0
o; CD
I
~ •
..., al
I
~
I
c I
~ I HEATER COIITROL PART
CH0-218
~
~ I
~
(OPTION)
5
~ I
0 ~
E I
l
~
~ I
Cl
5 I
~c I
SN'UY SWITCH Cso-t!lll
I{ S'
0
C\j
C\j
(.)
~ I
~ I
REO
~
0)
00
~ I ....
C\j
....
"Vl I
~ I
zt:
::>
" ~
......
! I i CI02
ZIOOo
50'{
0
E
q
CD
I ~ ~
OJ
l.{)
N
"iO I .~
Q
I
..
"c ,--\t/ c::
a:l
->
., ....
~
~
~ .. z: . ,.....
--,
~~ - ""'
j I
0
j
L - - - - - - - - - -M'""
L---------------t~=e2f POllOI -... ;~~ m--
! : ~ 1»1 ..._JIM)OOJ• JA2
--
I I
(.)
cu
c::
c::
£ I N r----=i:tt!;l!O;;n t~: := 1 iiiYi l
0
8 I N -:-- ...... ·'"- ~:; ~

~
(.)
~ I
~
.., I
-
< ~~
Jp,.,
I MOTOR
~
N
I : :~/ '
. N
0 ')
CSP-203 cD
N
"""" I
IL_tt-JIORDCI)fO
______ Ol
u::
""""
w
~
z
I
l--~-~_::_j
I I
SCANNER UNIT INTERCONNECTION

CAJH2
NKE-1129PM {AC220V) XI\JV 3:t::7f
c.o. ~'*'··Filltflll!l
c.o
m
_
.....
NJC40III
NlTENN4
RECEIVER UNIT NRG-182A om . ... I~Mzl ';T~I ...

~-RQ~ -·· B~-L__. ___J
,}, .
V IOl
MIHaS
- ();:. i > ll w-- w ~ ~ i I i~':"'

~ 1111
Tf
2~~ ~:r:
&e! :r:
1.0
(\j
(\j
<")
~~! : !!!: ~!!~~~ .. ~;g;
0 0
~:!! !:! MODULATOR :~OiHI--~ J PlLSETRANS 8i :r: '

Jl L-o-t!' i~l.-0:. ~~~~?.. J1 ~!!,1 ;: ~ :~~ g~c_~~ ~
""c:
:::l
IllY
·tTIYl
-~ l• IW
:;_, IOHO
<:
.._
~
c:
c: ll:l8:i'
P IINOCNC lll~=:tl===~~-+-~
tU[ 0
B 1UZE ~: E
!/)
~
0
E
.,.
!'!
I
J
2
1
·-
~~
l YTit•
u na-·
et
:; ;
HtMCf,j' f
::r ,.,,.,
J .NO c 11
Ol
.!E
a
t::
<0
N
1'" -··
T/ R CONTROL CIRCUIT ,,,,. •Uv
0 :2 I
c:
0
~c: .......
.......,
CMC-1205R
sl
=!
::=
I•IIV
•;:.''h' §:; lt
,.,. ·~.
- •
.11 002
.. 51 ..1 -·· J1001
M• f
1:
(.)

t::
co
.
I·•W ., IM
., lltv teY 1
Ill• t::
c: ::~ !:' POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT 0
~ ,.., t?
ITND•
CBD-1882A (WIOII ,...,
Y"":l
'*'"'" I ~
E umt·
;~;~OP·~=:tt==~~1
g:;af ~= ..... ~
II)
ID
A
t MTM
IOVO•
"""" J1112 J 11 13
.....
J 13
~
J'
........
J3
_,_
....
ZCN)U4* ~ ('>")
N
10/ GW L...W ll-G· P L -14'
~(j ~fl) co'
~
!/)
(.?
z ~!. i~~~ i~. ::~
!.
T8202 0>
! l l:
q ;I>
u::::
lt) / d
a I
ai
N zQN)~:: ii ; I;: !! I ~ ~
~
N (WICII) ZOM)I t(J•
'----..---l '----..---l
A I M AHTENNA DISPlAY
iii I UNIT
.
:l
~
c: I C)
....z ~
!
c: I
u -
0 DISPLAY UNIT ANlTh'NA NlTENNA DISPlAY UNIT
TRANSCEIVER UNIT ltm:RCONNECTION

~ H 7ZCRlUd• )
CMK-583
E
( ............ .....
•• • "Wt'& -oll-..cn ..,..,.. No.
NTG-3225
"m
,......"'.~ ~~
8 I
m*fl••~~~•ll!l
;;;
< I
~
--. •
(0
0
00
I
I J
+ l..
Nfm.NA
~
9
·~ I;l~ I Io;z I ~~~~~·
RECEIVER UNIT NR0-229
·-e I ~~
NJSe~'"X~o·--:.~ VI~m••
=:
Ill
I F CIRCUIT CAE-499
E
~
I
[] ~
j
0
E
I
I r··-
J 10 1
ll-iP
::;~~i~~~~
J 102
Il-l,
0~~~ z! 0
_________ __
~~:._) ---:~--J M1555 ~
l
:< -:! ... ~ ..... . . :::::; . ~;~ RFQFDJ!T
"'g, I ·~
CAF-595 L.__l QJM,II
8101 1
~ i -~~:-S=I=i=*=F*'I
P)OOI
-------------------- (WICII)
~
MODULATOR UNIT
0
I 0 I
I
ZCN)fl. . .
PliO.
NMA-551
ZCRDISJI.
-=
I
S'
.,._
0
~c: I l J 13
e :r: .,._
!~~~~~~~~~~-·
a: pu tt-tP ., ~ w
~ ~ ~ e~ a; ~ 3! st; ~ ~ z ~ § ~ (.)
~~!!
00
I SHOAl ISHORT
I
8 I 0
1 ez
2 •a tJ:;;;;
~ :9:!: '; :, ..... ;. ! ... " ~ ~ :; ... ~ ;. ~ = uu.a 1 .... 01
:r: ~
0 ... J1 1 ~ J 1110 ""' n---- - 1)!1~:; MODULATOR .,,
~
J l l91
"'
~=:--1H----~~ "' CIRCUIT ••1
~
I W
-4 • •
.5•UY
l <lND
L-.o.-.p ll-G--IIP I.-4P
=-• 1TI
lTE ~
:: ~ ,.,..., ~ n-- - - 1)!1 :~~511 CPA- 2114
0
(')
.,._
;:l I ..., .. ICNO IQHO .,._
Jl L-o-tP
••c ~~~---- c~·NC
~
IT~ IO NC IONC
1\
I ~
(J)
~ I ....•••
trrrt
38P
11"1C
1%NC
,....,., ..._
~
\
!
OBl£ 0
ao!:
I ==i ,.,...,
l HMCNT ZCftOUtl•
E
~·-..........
J2 L-<HP
::;. l .CNO =~no• ~ ~~~ ,...._
a I '"" T/ R CONTROL CIRCUIT PIIOJ PICIDJ
..... ~ N
III
~=
.~
~
lMfR• l• lfol
CMC - 1205R 1•12V 2•12Y
1\ I t I
10110
~t :·~,':
3•IV !2
it Cl c:o
~c: I
. ...
TBIOI MSTIAli/ 11-Q
-,1 I.IOV
40NO ~
5 "" ::;
I lOY c:
-> 1{ _" .2
1 10\IE 110VE
:::E lBZ• P0v.1;R SUPPLY ......
c: I
l•tV 1•5V
4.8 1 -
HRIO• u
Q)
~ I
""""' c:
ITIOO-
~c: I c .
l Mf"•
I MTR c:
~
twr ~
IOVO• - ""' ooo-"'" ~
0
gI ~ ll~·P Jsa:zot- 1
~
i~~l!!. ~~!!
J4
~ I
u ll..P L-<HP Jl 114
.s
~ I
I
-
<(
c
M
~
-.:t
N
0>
'
(])
I ~
(WOit) !
I u::
••I ~•~
I
ZCftD1171. I PIIDJ '
'~'
I w ' "' I
I
I
~
z -'
••,.,. '"' ""
""' "'~""
ii ,._,.....,.,
iI . ,,.,
i! m <
iI ::::\"' - ·
- - - - - - - -- -- -- "!
I
I 00. NKE-1 130PM ( AClOOV) SJOkw 2.:>::?f
I <D.
Ill
~ct'·ll~ltMIRI
I
I
I J + ~"
1...
I RECEIVER UNIT NRG- 228

A101
MJ$131 1
I F CIRCUIT CAE_. 99
~
I
I
I
,.......
i
:<
J101
IL-tl'
JIOZ
IL•JO
!!~!!!~! ....
_ ...... . ...,
[] RFaRUT
~ ...
V I.
~,
17 •
I i;;:
!i !i: ~- x-
~ ..... " --- CAF-585
..a..m.rr
L-
S'
~.
CMA- 102 _i 0
I C\J
~~~i !
0 letmiJO. 'tfl
C\J
(.)
I :•i ooffi ::~x ~
8i
I
·-c I
: I
I!_ _ _ _ _ tl+ltP
J1111
L·. . - ~
CFIH29
lALTER
0
('I')
~
~
~
-- CIICUfT
.'!_1 L-G--IP
Q) 22o.F "'
"~
2 I .::~ 1!
Vl
~
I
ti1Yl
••z
: : . . .....
0
0 IIIZl
1
E
~ I co
J ....
Jz,~...,...
~ N
0
~ I ,,.,.
l Wf"•
T/R CONTROL CIRCUIT
CMC -1 205R
0>
.~ I
5I
•UITIII
a co
~c I
TB101 lrllSTSAUi/ 11-G
UP
-> ;{ ...
c UZ•
~ I
Q)
•oz
$tlaa•
£ I
ITIWJ ·
un"•
~ I
0 ,...
un" ..
N lOW•
N
" I (.)
~
Vl
~ I
~ I
~ I
-
<(
0
M ~
~
"'l"""
1\
iii
I "'l"""
I
..~ I w ~
::E I ~
0
c
u2 I
~ I
~ I
z
(7)
.
NKE-1130PM ( ACZ20V) 5301\w 2.1.:1~
l
~ I CD ~'*'··~~~-~~ 00
::E
..., I r::o
I
El
I ~
9
·c: I SAf£TY SWITCH CSD-45 7
:: I
II> (W301) ZCRDI 288il!<1
~
~ I
u
~ I
0
REDT
BLKT i
~
~ I
fI
§ I
~c I ReD
(WJOe)
ZCFI>1543ll!
S'
0
.....
.....
0
l
~ I
II>
£ I BRAKE CONTROL CIRCUIT
::5.
0)
(\')
00
TB I03 CCEH55 .....
.....
~ I ru1J...------J I
~
t'V11----J I Ill ~·.. 'zcoo"''
A
I ~~-- I ULz7 ,. I -TT ~ .....
l
>
(/)
8
HEATEA OONTN>l
\ .
~ I ~ I
~ UTH - !I.,.) CHO-fU
(OPTION)
I (W305) ZCRDI457*
......
! 0
WHTT
I t:
z E
:>
~ en
~ I
CIOij• ljCI02
'------4----------li~IOI~ 'IJ ~,::

IOOOU 2200p
N
A I
fti
.,~ I
I~ :
lfl/
sa sa
501J
a
0>
.~
c:
I
CD
~ I
0
g I
-~ I
->
0
~--~~!!.-~!~~-J
TBHM
i>f1so
(W303) ZCRD1278ll! ,. 1 ; . ; ;- - - - - -- - - - -- - - , '-'"~~~\v-~· ~"'II 'T

2<.l

c:
§
!2
8 I
~ I
"'"'"
"'"'"
u ~~~~~~ ~~~ I ~':DRYER
!: C8r2001 ~
~
::E
. ., I
I
-
~
0')
M ! I
,
!...--------···--··-----~
!
I co
NI
CD
0>
I "'"'" R ! u:
"'"'" t:; N I
~{
I
I w
~ I
L--=--~~J
I
I
I
z
0
I SCANNER tiTERCONNECTION
CAX- 14
NKE-1139PM (AClOOV) St\~f 3:t.::,f

I "'CD
"'". ~'*'··~ltMII!Il
I
I m
I
I
I SM£TY SWITCH CSD-4S1
I REDT (W302) Zal01288* I

I
I
BLKT 0 I I BR.AKE aR:U l A
CFA-211
~
I "':, m~~ACUITB
I s:-
0
I C\1
C\1
I Ron (.)
~
I BRAKE CONTROl CIRCUIT 0)
C")
'2 I CCIHI55 .....
.....
::::> I
~
E I >
• • • llCMUSOt
\
~
<:
~ 8 ......
rn I
(W305) ZCR01457*
0 0
0 < UTH
~ I E
~ I
~ ~ ~"1 ~~rra ~
0
(")
I I
~w .~
c L-+------------,1~ -~
5 I a co
i I ~
t::
.Q
->
! (3
8I ;>tfso ! <ll
~ I
t::
t::
0 .. ,,IMI ------, ~
0
~ I
(W303) ZCRD1276lii
N
"rn I N •• .n~ i NJ'UW
MOTOR OFIVER ~
.s
Aa;
080-2000
(.)
~
u~
,.._
!
~ I
~ I
I -
~
Q)
M I
I
i
j
'---------- N
(l)
C>
I
~
u:
j
- I
- I
" I
~ I
..
"'"I'"
"'"'"
w
K I ~
~ I ~ ~~~ :
~
~
8
I
I
I
z
"'"'"
"'(Q
"'"
L--.
~~-8A l SCANNER tiTERCONNECTION
CAX-14
NKE-1139PM (AC220V) St\:A- 3~:::*

!l'*'··~lt·ll!l
l
~
~
I
I
.
al
00
I
E:1
I
I
~
~
·;: RECBVER UNIT NRG- U9
AJOJ
::::>
4i I TU71A
,----,
~
c U FCIRCl.IT
I
l(~
c IF C~CUIT CAE-499
~
(/)
0
I J IO I J I02 r-- ~
L-t• L-. . 1---
I
!
E
!!!~!~!~! 2~!!!~8
_..., . . .. .......
l"' I '---
c0
1lc
I
I
zo~~~ ~ ~~~ ll zc=~•;ffH+t~" i5i I gggg 0
c
~
.E
I
I
- ......... ~~;
5ii!l
J1 IL-.Q-·
~
JIIDe
L-G-IP
w
-..... !~!~~==~!~= !~~! .. §

• ~~~i>
""~, JIIIO
L-G ~ ItP
>Q~ 00
Jllll
IL· •
Q
"'
'"
..
IIHOIItr
.....01
C')
C'\1
C')
~
00
~+ ~~~v
CD ITT(
I <:
....
-
ai ~~:: ~- IQND
A
(/)
I ,., tHC
IO..C
11110
'0
C>
IIZE
E
z I J2 IL-G-•
llHC CMB-407 . v" ~ ~
! I =$ ;~ ,, ••
. .._
!YO Ol
I -~
0
'""'
)WTR•
:;6 lOHO
a .....
ai I 4 IIITR ~
T/ R CONTROL CIRCUIT PI Hill t::

("f)
I
I •I IV ,.,,... J1001
.S2 I
A
...
CM(r1205R
..., i:;:: -=-· .._
.... ~ ~ ~
!:;!" ~ $
~ ......... ....
(.)
co
..,
J100Z
I =
0 ....
I · ISV :c,': ~ l 15-14-i t.w
Q)
t::
"'c
~
I
J02•
tTAIO•
'IOV(
::;
1
PO'M:R SUPPLY CIRCUIT 0
t::
i ;:;
0 URIO ' C80-1S82A ~
~ I fMTR•
t¥17t-
~ Jf11T~
::~ X! ZDN>t••• ~
~ I ,.,.,.
·~""' ::; 4QHO
JH!IP l5
4 HT'lA .:;
....,
(WJ!n)
I .:::
~
IIVD . ..,., S f1STOP e
0
0 I J1112
I MlER
J13
IC2
lQNO
J4
:UOtC.I
J5
ll!ltCI-1 _,...,
J3 (W co
"'"'" N
~
L~ ofP :! ~ ;~ ~~
r. ,rp I I
IL... IMPS
I .. J1108
~!J~
,.,
•z
tliD: fOol-
m TB202 1~ (t r:O
~ I
L- 111' IL-Oo-U 1 1!1!1
.,
.R
0>
0 I ('WC»1) ZCftOt l D . ~I !
5 1i ! I f
u::
I M ....,,,..
N
(WOI4) I HC!U
I MI
,~,
~ZOIIIDtl:U.
iii' ~ I ; ! I !:
rr-----~,
~~
I (!) ~I 'L' I~~
T8203i;s!$~Ef !; LNIT UNIT
I ....
z l T I y
CXSP\.AY UNIT SCANNER UNIT SCANIER DISP\.AY
I l.MT UNIT
TRANSCEIVER UNIT M"ERCONNECTION
I N CMK-594
K-7ZCRl<-· )
I ~
..... - ... ...orca..t~ ~,.No. NTG- 3230
I .
U)
al
(
• •• - - - r--..ecn tl N eod~docunert..
m~11••~~~••
I
JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 8 .7 Terminal Board Connecbon Diagram
----------------------------------
Terminal Board Connection Diagram
I~RC ] 8opon RadicJ Co.. .ltd. B - 32

l
I

.OJ
~ I
---
SCANNER UNIT
71 .._ ~ I
11
RADAR •
CQOoMJT~IO.-
~.....,.,.._
•- A
r==
,,..,,.~c...wo:·-
-·
NKE-2103-6/6HS I
c3' I
OJ
c..
I
N
<0
-
VOR ,.,... ,,,......,..
3:
)>
I
I
I
(,C)
~ ~
I
35' ~
0
I
~ ~ ~; ... I I
OJ en
PERFORMANCE I s::c...
0
Q)
a
()
0
:::3
:::3
MONITOR
NJU-85
-~
c..
3:
)>
I ~
I 8
I 1I
~
~ I
(,C) I g·
g.
I "Ills::
~
:::3 ~
OJ C) 0
I Qj• I I ~
w CQ en I v
~
w ill
3 I ~
Q.
c....
::I: I ~
I ~
~I
I ~
....
(0
.... I ~
0I
0> I ~
00 ~
c...:
I
I
~
!!!.
~
~
f
Ill
I I a.
....
(0
.... I
(')
g
?0> "
I ~
f.
~
~
~
J:: ~
: ., ~
= ·~..-... SHIP'SMAJNS
~. ~ .o (X-BAND lOkW RADAR)
JMA-9110-6XA/ 6XAH v-~- liM fifoll81
I
I
I
~
~Ill
3
~
INTERCONNECTION D IAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9110-6XA/ 6XAH
I
I
El
........
ttJ I
I ~
'-
00 11
ca· RADAR tt»tt~um
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4990T
~~~c...l;JC....,.,r,
SCANNER UNIT .
I\) I §
<D
(r-----~mo=:•=•~•=-.=:~~~:=~------------~
/~~-------~~-=
~~c~
~~u~··~..,, NKE-21 03-6/6HS
l
(JI("""" - 5'
.I
OJ r--- Ill
~ ir-~,.n A
w
I
dr 2
9 -J+~ ..... ~
=
"=rlr
~ rli:::.-·--- c... 0
(Di .""'
H
... ·- · Jl
3: ~
~
" .
~ ~
.
f.
~
~
s·
~
co
0
VDR KN···- -~
S:!
-"rr
,. , . ..
~
~
~
JS
)>
<D
~
~
I
I
I
I
2
~
b
v
!<.
0
~
~
Q)
"" . J2
I
~ a ~ ::~
U-
I
0')
I
PERFORMANCE I z
~
()
0
::;, , -- «»~ ~ , .. u
' MONITOR
NJU-85 I
G)
(/)
v
~-~ ·
WC:Uflf
::;, ., _,_
,_- ·•·••u-o· c... I
. ...,
en
(!)
~
(")
g: 3:
::;,
_____ jill
~
ao,~,.-"
.~- '
)'
···-·-·
·-" )> I ii}
CJ
iii'
~
~~ <0
~
I
I .~
~
OJ
I
w
co
3
0
Q1
.....
"""'~
~-~
~.
-·~-:
..,_,.
_
. ........ ~~
- ~
0
I
0')
I
I
I g
a
..
T'fiii.vtT'I. ·'41'k l•-
'
~
~ DGPS i lOIII It\ Do ~
- ')=---u.!.!!
<... ;-- ~-...--
I,__..
........... I a·~
~ -m II ~-
k.~
EOiO .-.ew,,.,
4!YI!!QI p '!'Yi"fl-
.... . C..l. . . riU
I 0~
-
:I:
SO) NOB!
__.. ,,.ltlttJ• 1~1· r.r.;
I ,_y~u-
I
co LOG ~-·
- I ~-
' 1"51101•
ll · rttmt ~ 1
~
~
II
u
,_AU:O
,....I(X
a(t). Gl
0I
.......
I) hh'l'•
ACIDC CONVER!U UN~ • 3
--"
C/)
0)
. ""'
n assn-:
NBA-5135
~
c...:
~I
I t-.
11
":a.
ll
u
.aD•
.us.wo
Ml'ft•
_,.
II
I
ll
ITTYM
Of~
U I.Ut 0
"'C
co AIS
~
~
0I LOGo.,,. """' ll iiiil dr
0)
~ GYRO •n•
l"''!'''o:t
dr
R
, ...,.~
l: "'a
~- -rrn;::
Q:
(!)
(I)
"'""
~
ALARM MCH'OitltG
..,.
S't'SliM
_~~·· =
9=E ~~tl~~t:~-:;,_--~~=--!.!''!!;··: :·"~!;!
.,... -~
""·'--~'p· s~.~s -··
JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH
(X-BAND lOkW RADAR)
v-1'- ( ~..t~ ) HM tf$fjgi
~ INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9110-6XA/6XAH(desktop)
- ---'l
.m
~
I
I
~~ ~ Gta.fO III:......_YJ
SCANNER UNIT Colo) I
( JQ-Mitl ''
NKE-2254-6HS I
c... I
,
ce·
VOR -
:!"~"~.~~~-~-~~~~-------
3:
)>
I
I
I
(0 I
OJ
I
~
VJ
....>.
1\) I
1\)
~ ~lAM
I I
~
PERFORMANCE
en
~ I ....
3
s·
MO NITOR s:::
NJU-85 :I: I <0~
~
OJ I 8
0
Q) I [
a. 2
I g.
0
0
::J I ~ ..
CD
I
::J
<tl
()
I E ..v
VJ
U1
g: I
::J
CJ I ~
Qi•
<Q I ~
til I ~
:3
0
......
I ~
c._ I tc
....
~ I
[ru <o
~
I
I
m4
.~
rr.
N
NI
0>
I ~
I a.
~ I
()
g
l: GYRO :I
I ~.
I g
~ - ,.u....,..• SHIP' SMAINS 9
~ ·--- ~ , . , .. 0 » 1. _ , . ,
(X-BAND 25kW RADAR) I ~ .
? JMA-9122-6XAH v-$f- RIIIHl*l~ I 3
~
INTERCO NNECTION D IAG RAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9 122-6XAH
I
I
m
......,
t...
OJ i!:
1'
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-4990T ~
SCANNER UNIT ~
-
0
l....m.ICDMOfo"""GIIat JC.~· 0
NKE-2254 -6HS
...u••
c~~Q
RADAR ......uu 5'
.. .. " !JIC,...,l'l -. CQO-Ht,,. . . . . .,..,.
... .g= (II
n
.. ....-· -·
.,~ q
~~~~ c
I
= .......lUI.-·-- c... g,
-
, . . .1\hllfOVTl I
.g= TJ;. ·-- 0
.-c: ~'1~
-=::~
. . -
~ r;:;- "f'Jr H ... -;...-E s:: :J
..
i!:
--s : -
. 1
~ ~
Kl'fo\.__
?r -=- . ::_L_
I
:. ":;:-..:... ..- .../

AC/DC CONVERTER UNIT
NBA-5135
~ ~ ~
)>
I
:J
c
!!!.
~:.~
- ...
JS (Q v
!'~ l1
......
~
I ~ 't~
.'It::::: .. :::+--
11
11
J ' N
CD
' b
~ m~~ u :;~
r-;:r. . ~ :7.~:Qtt ,•-:.; "'·
-
I Tm
N
i
;z;= :21
I
-~ '-""-fap- I
[Q)::LM
'--i :E
..!....!L_
~ en
~ .."
-,z;: "
H'
r"f.::._ ~
,;;._
~
-.-. .
CIO~
'--..:..- MTR+
~rsz-
PERFORMANCE
MONITOR ><
)>
z
Gl
en
..-"
r -- ~tlt, ,
.. ...,.....1"1 I ,,·~
I
...!.,._ '-"'-"liE
.____ NJU-85 v
J .____ ::r:::
-c.
'-.....:;,_ Ml'R·
~ '7
;
"';. .
- ,.....
II
"
:~
....."""
. . ....uo.
= ~
CD
'--4
·····-· ~
ODI. . ~tl
.
~
"~ f-1-t*'-1 j I U
~
------~
F;;;;
;==: '"' A ~-·
I '
. -) J ~ CD 3
_,>« ,-
-
--"
u ::
~ t/) :;
ECDIS
1<11-)tftl. . .
JIC~t'\ =;;,. !!!.
.£
OJ CONNING
·~·
0
I .a.
CD
0
I OISPV.Y ,.........tn ....... "C

Trlr (')
w n:rT~~ .~~:~
~~ -,
0
...~~~ .i'F-
:J
= lll'tln :;... I :J
(J) DGPS ·~· ~
rlr ! :!i:.:.- I
,---------- ~~~~ --
~0
:r-~~
I ~nr~ !~ I '""'""""~ I
.
16 - - _ . ,
=
.~~
--·
ECHO lttu•-G"''nkl
""""""' :::u!- I I :J
.
I
ft~
'
SClJNOER
LOG :;1- ...... ....... ~ • t ...
I
4IUII'rl•.._. Ulln-Oflre'fS.U
I 9.
rlr
I
~~
!!~·
'
:~-:::s~
u~ti,~
U IU.,
...
mk:ffi!-
:: t ~
~~.;t:~ I
I Cr····--·
~------------- - -- - --
...,.,._
• ••·w~u SHlP' S MAINS
·~
I
~·~
-
<0
iil
3
- _ ,II Wli;,;; -
:::fi-:-
IS~~J::
-~ •• t ~
AIS ~~~'""'' =
I 'u
~~
~~
''~
• • n ,-
:· tJ:~
.. .,...
!'-:~
" =~
II
..' '""'
~ "* ::f:Ir
~ !!:: ~
~~
LOG • ...rlr
-;},. ~~
H~
:~
GYRO ..... .., ....
-;},.
~ .~
1 ~ -- .·-·
fi:'
.
l
s ~••
'
,.~
.
~~ c! -. .".
~ -
..... t.1U ~
'I
I
'
~ I ~::!" ..... - l ..
I ::J
.SHIP' S MAINS
tthY'0~4
~ ...~ / ~ •.n::..:t<l<
(X-BAND 25kW RADAR)
-·.-~~ ~ lliiiiii
OOUG
mri'M
... to16;~1,.111(JI/CIII.I'I\I') JMA-9122-6 XAH t...--$1'- ( ~..t!t! ) MMti*1f~
n •mt·--- ,I INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF RADA R TYPE JMA-9 122-6XAH(deslctop)
- '~
I
.tD...... I
SCANNER UNIT .U1 I
RADAR "~,~~::
- NKE-1 125-6 1/ 62/ 91 / 92
....~*""
~
a
~
j
I
c_ I
"TT 3: I
ca· VOR X:Noi :Wt.l,._l
)>
I
I
CD CD
I
(J.) ~
I
(...)
1\) I
1\)
(i)i fAl ..., I I
~
~ U -4WI
I PERFORMANCE
0)
I '-!:
~
:s· MONITOR
~ NJU-85 I ~
~
Q)
a.
_j CD
~ I
I 8
~
2
()
0 I g·
:::s
CP
:::s
(t)
()
I
I
.~E
I g: !!!.
(J.) :::s I v
-....J
0
iii" I ~
co
ti'l I ~
3 I ~
(/)
0
.....
c._ I v
~
~ I
I
I ;t
00
(Q
~
1\)
1\)
I AIS
I i
0)
I &' ..
i ~
c:o
~
I ()a.
I 3
I ~
r.
~
~
~
~ "''
= ,.,,.,..,....
~
SHIP"SMAINS
•<:• •C:tJr;;oelr-.-• · •
(X-BAND 25kW RADAR)
JMA-9122-6XA/9XA v -1'- §~Mtitft ~
I ~
I ~·
I 3
.
~
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9122-6XA/9XA
I
I
El
m '-
~
1'
I+COIIS~CIIai(M . .N.l'l
SCANNER UNIT .......
0)
~
8
t+-lfi95110056
NKE-1129-71 /72/91/92 ..2
5"
. -·_..
0
a
lt'OU, c...
. --
, . . .l . . . 0
:l
VDR
3:
)>
..
~
:::>
. .....,..,.
.,.., (0
~
I
c
~
v
al
N 0
w
u
1\
,.
,..Or.l,l
,.CLI,U
\ICIOu fl
I
...... i
z
H WI:IOI.tlll PERFORMANCE
>< G'l
-
It tw.GI I
,---------- ~~~~~ ---, MONITOR (/l
r-- ~~ ..-:- ,I ··~"' )> v
;IICSU"l1'1 I WWflf
SA-··-·
I ·.~!::W~~..!,' - "-- II NJU-85
"''""""'.... I
(0 al
:...
f:":::!:-1-•uu;·~'"""'=!.J..L
' SHIP"SMAINS
I
I ~ I ~
35
~
OJ
··~~·c.-
K-2695110056
.. ,. (.~'(1
FI!.<J FUXIBlE WAVE GIJIOE
(lRC9J PI'I.Y)
..a
&'
I (')
0
w
())
:l
:l
~
g
0
iii
I
..""'
,.,._
"'iil3
AIS

NTG-3225
~~
.-. -----,
mr=
:!J-~__.!!:;=~SHIP"I S MAINS
~ •IAC.;~~;O<Io"ti;/J"""I ' •
(X-BAND 25kW RADAR)
JMA-9123-7XA/9XA t.--1'- MMtl*l!Sl
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9123-7XA/9XA
.......m I
RADAR ".,..."'"
l'<atiS~(Aki4JIItiUM1)
SCANNER UNIT ....... I
NKE- 1130-1/ 2
ti-26951 10056
).~., 1111
c:oo,..,, ....... ICiroiiO =
"" £""
rlr rT'~~
.. ......-·""
I 00
, . . . IIISW~T)
-
. . ...---
c...
VOR
~
KZ.,oiMIII; . . - ' ""''
I '"'"'
... .... ; ; - ~ _.,
rlr
.....
......
..I
3:
. ' .."...
.~ )>
I
rlr -I I ~.
....
' .. . ....-·
I
.. .....
-·
I
.. - .: ..• .....
I ....I
w.
" CD
I
:!1.: :
..- .. --
,... ·~ ~
"
" "
= :+-
~;+=
w
.. ...... .
Tl
1\)
~~ ... ,_"_ '3;= "" " "
~ I
en
•I
- / " ' PERFORMANCE
~" )> c...
MONITOR ~
r-- to.a"~,
rlr
.
uc ........ , 1
- "
-'Oiflf
....... NJU-84 1"
_j
I
~--... \ 1-T ~
. ,.
~'
w.
"
""
:=-r- . 00 1. . te:DUTI
0
0
------ill . .
5"
t=t:lli:::J "'2
·-- - ~ --,
u
' ,-r -------- ~~~~ -
ECOIS tJICJUI"\'fl
" II·~·~SIS
,.,. •
&A _ _ ,....__
.,._:!:") I
~
0
CD . :J}r I ............... '"''"~Of'IIIC"'1.U I

.,"~
--
CONNING
I I
I ....... "!!!.c:
r
__,
DISPlAY
w
<0 DGPS --"'!tlntt
rlr
--""L
:"'"~
, ...... '
~
...... , -
,....,-en....,,.
.. -....
I
I
I Cr·k··
·- r-~-
••tW-ell'lnloU St·HP' s MANS
..
....,
JIW-II.·bo
I
I
v
-·- ?rlr
'+- .I=~=·
ti: :zm;_ .. -··
+t~
.......... """ ""' ~----- ------------- to
.. .......
I ti:.r-;;o;--
EOiO
SOJNOER ' .,...
...... -·
....v:-..-
. .........
I
..' .......
.......
......
i::J
~
" -...
LOG ..... I
!:!il-L z
rlr :·~.:__
!!" CM--
.. ........
G)
::~-
:!I::·
....,.. ...... ..
".... .... ....,..
I•
- ~IC!~ I
~
(J)
I .." t!*-,..
r-iil::·
.
~
""'
.... ......
. .....
I
~ ..
- " ....."""
I I
lllUI
to
:.,
AIS
:"1-!-trnn..,.
rlr
I
" -· I
~
-c '!t-:i*fr-
~ .~
~
35"
!!!.
LOG• ..nl.:.;.,r. .,0to
l ."I.
~
rlr '"'"" a
~ ti~
GYRO .... • "
"ii ()
0
rlr l ',.. ~!.!!!21 ' "'
" "
"
l':e.
, I ,~
I0
0
r:::n::: 'Hr-
.lI
l, I "0
t!!~
~ .
...
Iii • •, .. 0"""'4
SHIP'S MAINS ;;;·
~
_ !!~
OOIIG
tiT"' ~
.. e»;<~o
( 5-BAND 30kW RADAR) <0
iil
l fi~VP~It
JMA-9 132-SA v-11'- .UI'Ill tlMrgJ 3
rlr
- I INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9132-SA
I

0
...... I
1-.(C.tiCOMI'OV't.'*-1 . . . . . . ..,
SCANNER UNIT 0
co I
t+-2695110056
NKE-1139-1/2 I
.I-·
.......l . .Tl
'- I
-...
...
c..
3: I
)> I
I
CD
..a.
(,.)
(,.)
I
PERFORMANCE
en
MONITOR
)>
NJU-84
U ll'OI.IJM
H
H """""'"'
>
H .......
I•COIII~ltl_,l.JIC9ol'k'f'l
OJ ti-2695110056 1*-200 COAXIAlCABlf

(JRC9J PI'I.Y)
I
~
0
•
...
n ..
' ......
.,.
' -·
--
AIS

NTG-3230
($-BAND 30kW RADAR)

JMA-9 133-SA v-1f- §!In tift@
INTERCONN ECTION DIAGRAM OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9133-SA
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B DRAWINGS > 6 .7 Term1nal Board Connection D1agram
----------------------------------
8.7.9 NCD-4990T
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-170
OPERATION UNIT
NC E- 5163
oo oooo
000000 0
OO ODOO DO
0~
000000
!B1MINAL BOAtD
CCX>711f7
--------------------,
I Dllm
: SUB OPERATION UNIT
---------"" NCE-5163
..........=.~~~:.~r'.: :::J
, :.-.: I
I
I ODOOOO
0~
AC/DC I
CONVERTER UNIT I ODOOOOO
NBA-5135 I OOODOO DO
I~
I
O ODOO O
""---------- I
~--- ----------------
_________ ,., RADAR PROCESS UNIT

NDC-1399-9
JMA-9100 Series RADAR

NCD-4990T Jl..J:~ v-11" -tliff-tll .:l.=·:~HVHlf:l[g]
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF DISPLAY UNIT TYPE NC94990T(desklop)
Fig B-37: Inter-Unit Connection Diagram of NCD-4990T
B - 41 I.JRC I aopan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 6 .8 GYRO 1/F
----------------------------------
GYRO 1/F
CYROlOW'IOUAGE
AllRlLED
'ill
~_,...-a••a•elED -QO\\'"""
GYROSIGHAL PI10ClSS
NliCA lOR LED
~~.ofotatt•• ••llO
n -•• I. :!A
~------. i
flOJDJ
.. ~ lOW VOll,..CE GYRO
S£TIING
LOC 1'\JUE
INOCAIOR L£0
o~'l"'xa•uo
··~
~.,."f'o•t{£•1:11~
~
1-J.--.J;._-l s:2
J--.=:...-.J~
,~
Fig B-38: Parts Location of CMJ-462E
TableB-1 : Setting Table of CMJ-462E S1 /S2

Sl SET11HG I I
IOH
2 3 • 5 e 1
• S2SETT1NG I 2 3 • 5
• 1
•
~
STEP
BSHLOGALM
SYNC T OFF
"
.. z 36X OH ON
GYRO SIMUlATOR
~
ON
...~§
2 90JI OFF ON
~ IIIOll ON OFF OH
~~ 3IIOll OFF OFF
LOG SIMULATOR
~
. til!JII 1~" REV ON N C (No Connodoan) OFF
OIR£CTION ii / NOR OFF 5SEC ON
GVROALMTIME
'l!:.I'JO/SYNC ON I 02SEC OFF
H
...
11
t<lt.. A. PULSE
~., NC
IOOP/ JOX
OFF
OFF
ON ON
GYROSRC
(Hoedong Sonoor Sc>IRe)
HOT ( NMEA (HOTITHS))
GYRO
• aooBPS
ON
OFF
OFF OFF
D§ .t(}l.A
PULSEINM
200P/ IIOX
400P/ IIIOX
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
HMEA BAUORATE
IIIIOOBPS
ID200BPS
ON
OFF
Of"F
ON
IIOOP/ 3110X OFF OFF 3&400 BPS ON ON
[..JRC) f)opan.Radit:J Co.,.lid. B-42

l
I
I
Item C M.H62 Ovro sc cct sw-ches (SI, S S, S7,ocill ed on tne CMJ-46 2)
I
Oyro compasses Rcocatcr me 101'5 S l sct~nl SG, S7 I
Manufact ucr (For rcfcm c c only) FJtC tat on vo,tate I 2 3 4 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 scn nl
lS-2/ 11, Synchro motor I
OlT- 100-1 03 1 105 ' I CGK/107/ 11 04, IH~IS 115 VAC
OFF OH OH I\. S'I'HC
HJZ-501 CR501 ) 'TS63H7E13) 60Ht ~
'36X) Sae ed 10 41 sc ect.on

ES- IIA, OM- II IIA/ 21 110 12:3, Sync hro n a tor
M5-2000/3000 TSAHSO[II II OVAC
PR- 222RI2 26/ 237/ 237 l 190X) 601tt OH OFF ON SYNC
/ 1•8• ( 2022/2023/ 22*<>,
1-+JI·;.? r o-200
fO KI~EC OLT- 20 1/202 203, Ste o rrotor
IJIIPAH ) ~IK- 14 / IH, OA- 200 10
~IKE- 1 / IH, 01UWI!1l111035908 10
;a._.;,rJ - MOD-1/ 2/f, 600 CAC•t.lt•on
70VDC OH OH OFF STEP
Socrrv PR- 500 12502/2503 ' 2507 ' 2507L usox>
!USA) ':1507' 4507 ' 5507, ~
SfHJD/ 140, c-
TQ-1 0ll '5000 ro
(J)
rs 1e Ste o rroto r
JSVOC
I
SR- 120 / 220 OA- 20010 N
Ct.1 Z- 7000 0nJv;onVJ103590820
[S- 140 / 160 150 exc tat on OH OH OH STEP (j)
PR- 26H ( 6"6• '6• 7• (180X) 24 VOC '<
...., t...
SR- 140/ 160

TQ-6000fSOOO OFF"
_o ~
co
r
c - IA/213/ E, Sy~chro motor 0 8
HOKUSHIH PLATH- 55 'C.
PlATH HKRK-cJ
~~~-~·
TS- 19
60VAC
60H.t
OFF orF OH ~
1!1 v ~ -& JotlW
S'I'HC
co
en .2
5"
Cll
.f.llil lltlll Cl JR. C- 1JUNIOR.
1360)()
Sync nro n a tor

COURSEQl}lf,y;
IJ{iH r.v- ~lia r~
a:.
:J
g.
0
YOKOOAWA CMZ- 200A/300, P Y76- H2 OH I :.l~}!'Y .Q co ::l
(JIIPAH) D-1, (360Xl

(/) ~
IPS, IPS- 2- Il2/2B '2B-H 2C '5, IOO VAC OFF OFF OFF S\'HC "'c
::l
Kt.IOOB, KR-{)53 50/ 6011: !!1.

PlATH HAVIOAT I, v
PTII-H2/ 2 1/ 2 1 112 Cll
1351. Stco rrotor 0
~
y '7,( 7 5r'J'J MK- 1- 7/ 10"1!0, MKL- 1, BZ- 2 19 1
ARtolA BROWN HOD~. HB 23 88, !180XJ
50 VDC ON OH OFF sn;p
IFr.,ce) SCRE, SOB- 1000 zG')
!I W - ;l!ll , l;J9 ;Jl, 1:>yncnro motor (/)
7'J:,"..':J AHSCHUTZ- 1-6/ 12/14 ' Z, HB23- 91 SOVAC v
ANSCHUTZ 0 ~1--BH, K805 t. 1360X) OFF OFF OFF SYHC
SOH: Cll
(Oormany) HB23-126, Z0658U 01
7? -t-u HAVIGAT 763 JJIE, Synchro motor G')
C PlATH PlATH HAVIOAT- D / II IYMI4A 50VAC OFF OFF OfF SYNC -<
COcm>any) ;o
(360.'() 60H! 0
• Humenc numbe r
:;;
_EI
JMA-9100 lnstructoon Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 8 .9 Inter Swotch Unot
----------------------------------
Inter Switch Unit
8.9.1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram

DI.SI'l.AY 1 D!SI'I..AY 2
NCD-4990 NCD-4990
TS4201
ISW IN/OUT
I TDI201
ISW IN/OUT
(\ 1f I (\
VDIN I 1 1 VDINI
VOIN IE
TRJGIN I
2
3
~~·
I I BLUE
II
I I
t__ 2
3
VDIN IE
TRIGIN I
TRIGIN IE ~ p-1 I IlL ~ TRIGIN IE
I I YELLOW I I
BPIN I 5 5 BPIN I
BPIN IE 6 LT: i
I I GREEN
:j-c_
I I
6
7
BPIN IE
BZIN I 7 BZIN I
p-1 I IlL_
BZINIE 8 I I I I 8 BZIN 1E
WHITE· BLUE
MTRINL+ 9 w- 1 I 1 I-n 9 MTRIN I +
MTRIN I · 10 II I I WHITE· WHITE I I II 10 MTRIN I·
J'i 'jL_
MTRIN IE
PWRIN 1 +
II
u l I
I
ORAI'G:
l I
I
II
12
MTRIN lE
PWRIN l+
I BLACK I
PWRIN lE 13 13 PWRIN 1E
PINK
PWROVT 1 14 I : I 14 PWROVT I
I I BROWN I I
PWROUT lE
voovr 1
LS
16 (\' I 2 I : r\
LS
16
PWROVT lE
voovr 1
voovr IE 17 Jl I i 11:_ 17 VOOVTIE
_I I I 1_
_:r: ;
RED
TRIOOVT I 18 18 TRIGOVT I
TRIOOVT IE 19
PURPlE
:;-r:_ 19 TRIOOVT IE
BPOVT I 20
I I I I 20 BPOVT 1
BPOVT lE 21
J I I
I I
IlL_
I I 21 BPOVT IE
CLEAR
I I I
B20VT I 22 22 B20VT I
BZDVT IE 23 Jll IlL_ 23 B20VT IE
:rr- I : WHITE-YELLOW I : l't
MTROVTI+ 24 24 MTROVTI+
MTROVT I· 25 II i I WHITE-WHITE
II II 25 MTROVTI ·
MTORVTIE 26
_:r II tiL_ 26 MTORVT lE
H· 2695111LSJ
(lRC SlJPPI.y)
L __j
Fig B-39: Terminal Board Connetion Diagram of NQE-3141-2A
[.JRC] !}opanRadicJ Co.,.ltd. B -44

l
I
DISPLAY! DISPLAY2 DISPLAY) DISPLAY4
NCD-1990
1114201
NC0-1990 NCD~990 NCD-4990 I
1114201 1114201 TB4201
I
r A 1 1 I
I I
WIN I W IN! 1 vorN 1
VDIN IE VDIN IE
/ ~ 2 VDIN IE
I
TRIGIN I TRIG IN I BLU - 3 TRJGJil I
I
TRJGJil IE
BPIN I
TRJGJN IE
BPIN I
TRIGJN IE
BPIN I
v YEL
:;j I
_
4
5
TRIGIN- IE
BPIN I
I I
BPIN IE SPIN IE SPIN IE i; !PIN IE
"'T1 SZIN I SZIN I SZ!N I 7 BZIN I
I
<0"
OJ
SZIN IE
MTRIN I+
BZIN IE BZIN IE 8 BZIN IE I
MTRIN I+ MTRIN I+ 9 MTRIN I+
.J:,. MTRIN I· MTRIN I· V WHH'IHT J1 10 MTRIN I· I
MTRIN I·
v
I
0 MTRJN IE MTRIN IE MTRIN IE L 11 MTRIN IE
I
PNRJN I+ PWRIN I+ PWRJN I+ ORG 12 PWRIN I+
Qii PWRIN IE PWRIN IE PNRINIE V BLK 13 PNRIN IE I
~ PNROliT I V
s·
~
PNROliT IE
VDDliT I
IWROliT I
PNROUT I E
IWROUT I
PWROUT IE v:
Jl':
Ft.'K
BRN
14
IS
PNROUT I
PWROUT IE I
Ill
0
17 VDDliT IE
VDDUT I
WOUT IE
VDDUT I
WOUT IE v 2 ..Cl.
't_
16
17
VDDUT I
WCl.IT IE
I
I
r
18 TRIGOliT I TRIGOUT I TRIGOUT I RED- = - l8 TRIGOUT I
I
Q)
a. 19
20
TRIGOliT IE
II'OJT I
TRIGOJT IE TRIGOJT IE PUR ~ 19 TRIGOJT IE I
CD ~
::J
::J
21
22
BI'OUT IE
BZOJT I
II'OJT I
BI'OUT IE
BZOJT I
BPOJT I
BI'OUT IE
BZOJT I CLR
:::] 21
- 22
20
I. SPOUT 1
BFQUT IE
BZOJT I
I I
I
~
;
I (!) 23 S20l/T IE B20UT IE 820UT IE 23 820UT IE 0
~
~
() 24 MTROliT 1+
(J1 g: MTROUT I+ MTROUT 1+ 24 MTROUT 1+ I
25 MTROJT I· MTROJT I· MTROUT I· "'
~
25 MTROUT I·
::J 26 MTOIUT IE MTCRUT IE MTCRUT IE 26 MTCRUT IE I 0
0 I
ur---==----
Q)• g-
(Q
II "'
iiJ I ~
:3 I "'~
0
..... I
II~
v
<
0
Oi-l CH·2 k- CH-3
CH~ I
Cll
o
00 r;n
w
...... ~
TB912 111913 TB914 111915 TB9!6 TB915 111916
I ~
z
~ ~ ~ ~ I ~
f
......
~
N
t ~ ~ ~ I v
Cll
Ei § § § I <.o
~
~ ~
f.
~
n
~
~ ~
~
~
~
~
I
I
I
l
g.
c
~
I ~
'-L
~ -· I
I
El
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 8 .9 Inter Switch Unit
----------------------------------
8 .9.2 Interconnection Diagram
I TB918 I
5[ I TB917 I
~[
I TB916 I
v
0
M
_:.
I TB915 I
()
1-=
~ lr-=rs9i4-
()
~[ §[_~s91~=J -
1 -
~ , _ _ _ _ _. 1
I ..,
I
1.
r--
-::-;;
~ lr-TB9l2-
![§[_~891 ~~-~j
1 -
~ , _ _ _ _ _. 1
I ..,
I
'---
-
il o
,_
on
-
<0
0
m
I
()
Fig B-41 : Interconnection Diagram of NQE-3141-2A
B - 46
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------~ .---
CBA-357
C8101
CN2 PI02
1
,.
H-7ZCADOI20 Ptol
1
JIOJ
PtOI CHI - ISV ISV

H-7ZCRD0t).l 2 2
UHE LOAD 1 CNO CNO
ACO.. 3 3
3
r--K "c:-- 5
ACCN)
CNO
4 4
CNO
~y
•ISV •ISV
FO
CI02 CIOJ _l_ (00 D \.
CNO
5
6
5
6
CNO
5V 5V
3 4 :..____] \.
LFIO I
11
<0'
ClJ
. E
~ ,.
.J:,. H·lZCROOI21 PI04 Jill<
1
!':'
5"
....
(!)
I I
1
FO
2
3
0
AC
(L)
AC CCL-304
2J
Ci TBIO I
/
40 (N)
0
:J bu b~ TEJOI
5
TRT
:J 60
(!) AC1r¥N -240V P+ '-
7
\.
C)
TRT i:
OJ 6- 80 P-
=!'
:J ~
I CD9 9 E 8
o~u
~ CJ 5'
-..J Qj• 10 -"OM I I
CQ CH- I CH 2 CH 3 CH '
~
Cil
:3 r----------- g·
-o -o -o ~
TB lt1 T8112 TBIIl T8 tl 4 TB 11S 1B Ill lB 111 TB tit :;)
8901
p;;-~
0
....... I I :;~:I:;::·· i:
·-
Pt05 JI05
~ )\s
1
i"""" 1·..~· ., "'c
:;)
~ I 2 I::, I:::;. ~
v
r;n I
FANe
..... ~~
w
..... \( ';;! 3
IYttol
wt.,:~
I tarwn
I '""''N"
OJ
0
I 1
~z
p
~
..... I ~ ..
00 I l ___________
EW>
~ ~ TJ
t P909 JIOII
G>
en
i
RIO I
~
1 v
2 OJ
(o
5'
~
f.
~
~
TO
DISPLAY I
NCD-4990
TO
DISPLAY2
NCD-4990
TO
DISPLAY3
NCD-4990
en
~
§:
.
c:;)
TB4201 TB4201 TB420 1
~
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 8 .9 Inter Switch Un1t
----------------------------------
['-'RC] 3opan Radio Co.,.fid. 8 - 48

Appendix C
Menu Index
lllllll l · ·•11 111 111
I I
I'
Menu Index
C.1 Main ....................................................................................................... C-1
C.2 PI ................................................. ........................................................... C-5
C.3 TT ....... .................................................................................................... C-7
C.4 AIS ......................................................................................................... C-8
C.S AZ ...... ................................................. .......................... ......................... C-9
C.6 Track .................................................................................................... C-1 0
C.7 Route ................................................................................................... C-11
C.8 U.Map .................................................................................................. C-12
[JRC ) 8opan RadicJ Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C Menu Index > C 1 Ma1n
----------------------------------
~m~-
--
-
----
--- ---
- - - - - ----
~-
--
--- Main
f- - 1. EBLManeuver Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- section415onpage4-14

I f- 1. EBL Maneuver
I f- 2. Reach
I f- 3. Turn Mode
I L 4 . Turn Set
f- 2. File Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 11 1 on page 3-120
f- - 3. RADAR Menu
f- - 1. Process Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3 8. 1 on page 3-91
I f- 1. Video Latitude - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8. 1 1 on page 3-91
I f- 2. Video Noise Rejection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8 1 2 on page 3-92
1 f- 3. AUTO Dynamic Range - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8 1 3 on page 3-92
1 f- 4. Process Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8 1 4 on page 3-93
1 f- 5. 2nd Process Mode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8 1 5 on page 3-93
I f- 6. Process Switch Rrange - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8 1 6 on page 3-93
I f- 7. Fast Target Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8.1.7 on page 3-94
I f- - 8. User Function Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3 9.3 on page 3-113
I f- - 1. Function1 Setting
I f- 1. Mode - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - page3-113
I f- 2. IR
I f- 3. Process
I f- 4. Target Enhance
I f- 5. AUTO Sea/Rain
I f- 6. Save Present State
I f- - 9. Next
I I- 1. Pulse Length 0.75nm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page3-115
I f- 2. Pulse Length 1.5nm
I f- 3. Pulse Length 3/4nm
I f- 4. Pulse Length 6/8nm
I f- 5. Pulse Length 12nm
I f- 6. Pulse Length 16nm
I f- - 9. Next
I f- 1. Video Latitude - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3-115
I f- 2. Video Noise Rejection
I f- 3. AUTO Dynamic Range
I f- 4. Process Switch
I f- 5. 2nd Process Mode
I f- 6. Process Switch Range
I f- 7. Fast Target Detection
I f- - 9. Next
I I- 1. Trails Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3-115
I f- 2. Trails Mode
I f- 3. Trails Reference Level
I f- 4. Trails Reduction
I f- 6. Trails Process
I f- 7. Max Interval
I f- - 9. Next
I f- 1. Gain Offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3- 115
I 1- 2. PRF
I I- 3. Small Buoy Detection
I f- 4. Fishnet Detection
I f- 5. Antenna Height
I f- 8. Set Mode Default
I L 9. Initialize
I f- + 2. Function2 Setting
I f- + 3. Function3 Setting
I L + 4. Function4 Setting
I L 9. SART - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 6.5 on page 6-12
f- - 2. RADAR Trails Setting
I f- 1. Trails Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.2.1 on page 3-95
I f- 2. Trails Reference Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8.2.2 on page 3-95
I f- 3. Trails Reduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8 2.3 on page 3-96
I f- 5. Trails Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8 2 4 on page 3-96
C- 1 [.JRC) 8opanRadic Co.,.fid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C 1 Main
----------------------------------
I I L 6. Max Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8 2.5 on page 3-96
I L - 3. TXRX Setting
I I 1- 1. PRF Fine Tuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8 3 1 on page 3-97
I I 1- 2. Stagger Trigger - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectiOn 3 8 3 2 on page 3-97
I I 1- 4. PRF - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectiOn 3 8 3 3 on page 3-97
I I L 5. Ice Class Standby Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3.8 3 4 on page 3-98
1- - 4. Multi Window Setting
I f- 1. DIRIDIST EXP Display- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.8. 1 on page 3-105
I 1- 2. Numeric NAV INFO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3.8.8 2 on page 3-105
1- - 3. Depth Graph Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8 8 3 on page 3-106
I 1- 1. Depth Graph Display
I 1- 2. Depth Range
I 1- 3. nme Range
I L 4. Depth Unit
1- -4. Wind Graph Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3.8.8.4 on page 3-107
I 1- 1. Wind Graph Display
I L 2. Wind Speed Unit
1- - 5. TEMP Graph Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectiOn 3 8 8 5 on page 3-108
I 1- 1. TEMP Graph Display
I 1- 2. TEMP Graph Color
I 1- - 3. TEMP Range
I I 1- 1. Temperature setting {MIN)
I I 1- 2. Temperature setting
I I L 6. Temperature setting (MAX)
I L 4. nme Range
L - 6. Course Bar Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3.8 8 6 on page 3-109
I 1- 1. Course Bar Display
I 1- 2. Autopilot Course
I I L 3. ROT Scale
1- - 5. Map Setting
I 1- - 3. JRC/ERC Setting
I 1- 1. Day/Night
I 1- 2. Color of Land
1- 3. Bright of Land
1- 4. Color of Sea
1- 5. Bright of Sea
1- 6. Color of Name
1- 7. Bright of Name
1- 8. Bright of Track/Mark/Line
1- - 9. Next
f- 1. LATILON Line
1- 2. Color of UL Line
L 3. Bright of UL Line
1- - 5. Map Display Setting
I L 3. LAT/LON Correction
L 7. Map Draw AZI Mode
1- - 6. NAV Equipment Setting
1- 1. GYRO Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3.4. 14 on page 3-36, section 7 1 7 on page 7-9
1- - 2. MAG Compass Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3.4 16 on page 3-37
I 1- 1. Heading Correction
I L 2. Correct Value
L - 3. Set/Drift Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect10n 3.4 16 1 on page 3-38
I 1- 1. Correction
I I- 2. Set
I L 3. Drift
L - 6. Rx Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.12 on page 3-127
I 1- 1. Heading
I 1- 2. Speed
I 1- 3. AIS
I 1- 4. GPS
I 1- 5. DLOG
I 1- 6. Alarm
I I- 7. Depth
I 1- 8. Temperature
I 1- - 9. Next
I 1- 1. Wind
I 1- 2. Current
[ JRC I aopan RadicJ Co., .ltd. C-2

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C Menu Index > C 1 Matn
----------------------------------
1- 3. ROT
f- 4 . RSA
1- 5. Time Zone
I I 1- 6 . Datemme
1- -7. Sub Menu
I 1- - 1. Display Color Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3.8 5 1 on page 3-99
I 1- 1. Day/Night-- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section3.8.5.2onpage3-100
I 1- 2. Outer PPI
I 1- 3. Inner PPI
I 1- 4 . Character
I 1- 5. RADAR Video
I 1- 6. RADAR Trails(iime)
I 1- 8. Target Symbol
1- -9. Next
1- 1. Cursor
1- 2. Range Rings
f- 3. EBLNRM/PI
L 4. Own Symboi/HLNector
1- -2. Brilliance Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section38.5.3onpage3-100
I 1- 1. RADAR Video - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -sectlon3.8.5.4onpage3- 101
I 1- 2. RADAR Trails
I 1- 3. Target Symbol------------------- -sectJOn3.855onpage3-102
I 1- 4. Range Rings
I f- 5. EBLNRM/PI
I 1- 6. Character
I 1- 7. Own Symboi/HLNector
I L 8. Keyboard
1- - 3. User Setting
I 1- 1. LoadUserSetting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- - seclion3. 10. 1onpage3-118
I 1- 2. Save User Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 10.2 on page 3-119
I L 3. Delete User Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 10.3 on page 3-119
1- - 4. Option Key Setting
I 1- 1. Option1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8. 7 on page 3-103
I L 2. Option2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -sectJOn3.8 7 on page 3-103
1- - 5. Buzzer Volume - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3.8 6 on page 3-102
I 1- 1. Key ACK
I 1- 2. OPE Miss
I 1- 3. CPAITCPA Alarm
I 1- 4. New Target Alarm
I 1- 5. Lost Alarm
I 1- 6. Navigation Alarm
I 1- 7. System Alarm
I L 8. Inter Switch
1- - 6. Datemme Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 7.2 7 on page 7-20
I 1- 1. UTC/LMT
I 1- 2. LMT Date
I 1- 3. LMT Time
I 1- 4. Time Zone
I 1- 5. Display Style
I L 6. Synchronize with GPS
1- - 7. Screen Capture Setting
I 1- - 1. Select Item
I I 1- 1. Graphic
I I 1- 2. RADAR Video
I I 1- 3. RADAR Trails
I I L 4. Map
I 1- 2. Select Card Slot
I 1- 3. File Erase
I 1- 4. AUTO Capture Interval
I L 5. AUTO File Erase
1- - 9. EBUCursor Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 4 1 3 on page 4-3
I 1- 1. EBL1 Bearing Fix
I 1- 2. EBL2 Bearing Fix
I L - 3. Cursor Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 4. 1.3 3 on page 4-5
I I 1- 1. EBLNRM Control Cursor
I I 1- 2. Cursor Length
I I I L 4. Cursor Pattern
1- - 8. Plot Setting
I L 6. AUTO Backup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -- -section3.8.9onpage3-110
1- - 9. Test Menu- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 8 3 1 on page 8-7
C- 3 [.JRC] 8opan. Radio Co., .J'id.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C Menu Index > C 1 Main
----------------------------------
1- - 1. Self Test- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1011 8 3 1 1 on page 8-7
I 1- - 1 . Memory Test
I I 1- 1. SDRAM
I I 1- 2. SRAM
I I 1- 3 . FLASH ROM
I I L 4 . GRAPHIC
I 1-2. TXRX Test
I 1-3. Line Test
I L 4 . Supply Voltage
1- - 2. Monitor Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8 3. 1.2 on pege 8-9
I 1- 1. Pattern 1
I 1- 2. Pattern 2
I 1- 3. Pattern 3
I 1- 4 . Pattern 4
I 1- 5. Pattern 5
I 1- 6. Pattern 6
I 1- 7. Pattern 7
I L 8. Pattern 8
1- - 3 . Keyboard Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8 3 1 3 on page 8-9
I 1- 1 . Key Test
I 1- 2 . Buzzer Test
I L 3. Light Test
1- 4 . MON Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3 1 4 on page 8-10
1- 5. System Alarm Log- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8 3 1 5 on page 8-12
L 6. System Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8 3. 1 6 on page B-12
L 0. EXIT
[ .JRC ] gapan Radio Co., .lid. C-4

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.2 PI
----------------------------------
PI
f- 1. Display for All Lines - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 4.1.4.3 on page 4-9

f- - 2. Operation Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-10
I f- All
I f- Individual
I f- Track
I L Equiangular
f- - 3. Control 1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-11
f- AII:All2
f- lndividuai:Sequential
f- lndividual:lndex Line 1
f- Track:Group 1
f- Track:Group 2
I f- Track:Group 3
I f- Track:Group 4
I f- Equiangular:Group 1
I L Equiangular:Group 4
f- 4. Floating - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-11
f- 5. Heading Link - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-11
f- 6. Next
f- 8. Press EBL Dial to Control Pl#3
f- 9. Press VRM Dial to Move End Point#;
f- 1. Range Scale Link - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4- 12
f- - 2. Reference Bearing;- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-12
f- AII:True4
f- AII:HL
f- lndividuai:True
f- lndividuai:HL
f- Track:True
f- Track:HL
f- Track:lndex Line 1
I f- Track:Index Line 6
I f- Track:lndex Line 7
I L Track:lndex Line 8
f- 3. Operation Area - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-13
f- - 4. Display for Individual Line - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-13
1.The setting items are determined by the setting of Operation Mode.

2.0perating Mode: Control
3.Displayed only when "3. Control" is Individual.
4.0perating Mode: Reference Bearing
C- 5 [..JRC l aapan RadkJ Co., ..ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C .Menu Index > C.2 PI
----------------------------------
I f- 1. Index Line 1
I L 8. Index Line 8
f- 8. Press EBL Dial to Control Pl#li
L 9. Press VRM Dial to Move End PoinmU
C- 6
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C Menu Index > C.3 TT
----------------------------------
TT
1- - 1. Association Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.4 on page ~8
I 1- 1. Association
I 1- 2. Proprity
I 1- 3. Bearing
I 1- 4. Range
I 1- 5. Course
I 1- 6. Speed
I L 7. Applicable AIS Target
1- - 2. Target Track Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2 on page 5-45
I 1- 1. Target Track Function - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.2 on page 5-45
I 1- - 2. Target Track Color- - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.1 on page 5-45
I 1- 1. All
I 1- 2. Target Track No.1
I 1- 9. Next
I L 4. Other
I 1- - 3. Target Track Display- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.4 on pege 5-47
I f- 1. All
I f- 3. Target Track No.2
f- 8. Target Track No.7
1- 9. Next
1- 1. Target Track No.8
L 4. Other
1- 4. Track Memory Interval - - - - section 5.6.2.5 on page 5-48
1- 5. Clear Track Color - - section 5.6.2.6 on page 5-48
1- 6. Clear Track Number
L -7. File Operations - - - sect1on 5 6.2 7 on page 5-49
I f- 1. Select Card Slot
I f- 2. Load Mode
I 1- 3. Load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-page 5-50
I 1- 4. Save - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-page 5-51
I f- 5. Erase - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-page 5-52
I L 6. Card T.TRK Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
-page 5-'3
1- - 3. Trial Maneuver - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectJOn 5 7 on page 5-54
I 1- 1. Trial Function
I 1- 2. Course(EBL)
I 1- 3. Speed(VRM)
I 1- 4. Vector Time
I 1- 5. Time to Maneuver
I L - 6. Own Ship's Dynamic Trait
I I f- 1. Reach
I I 1- 3. Tum Radius
I I 1- 4. Acceleration
I I L 5. Deceleration
f- 4. Target Number Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.4 on page 5-19
L - 9. TT Test Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5. 2. 7 on page 5-22
1- 1. Test Video - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5. 2. 7. 1 on page 5-23
1- 2. TT Simulator - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.7 2 on page 5-24
1- 3. Status - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5. 2. 7 3 on page 5-25
L 4. Gate Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5. 2. 7.4 on page 5-26
C- 7 [~Rc ) 8apan.Radi.o Co.,.J'Jd.

JMA-9100 lnstrucbon Manual > C.Menu Index > C 4 AIS
----------------------------------
AIS
1- - 1. Association Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.4 2 on page 5-38

I 1- 1 . Association
I 1- 2 . Proprity
I 1- 3. Bearing
I 1- 4 . Range
I 1- 5. Course
I 1- 6 . Speed
1- - 2. Target Track Setting - - - - - - sec/ton 5.6.2 on page 5-45
1- 1. Target Track Func1ion section 5 6.2.2 on page 5-45
I -2. Target Track Color- - sect/Ofl 5.6. 2 1 on page 5-45
1- 1. All
I- 2. Target Track No.1
I- 3. Target Track No 2
I- 4 . Target Track No.3
I- 7 . Target Track No.6
I- 9. Next
L 4 . Other
1- - 3. Target Track Display- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2 4 on page 5-47
I 1- 1. All
I I- 2. Target Track No.1
I I- 9 . Next
I L 4. Other
1- 4. Track Memory Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6. 2.5 on page 5-48
1- 5. Clear Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec//Ofl 5 6. 2 6 on page 5-48
L -7. File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec/ton 5.6 .2 7 on page 5-49
I 1- 1. Selec1 Card Slot
I 1- 2. Load Mode
I 1- 3. Load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-50
I 1- 4 . Save - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-51
I 1- 5. Erase - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-52
I L 6. Card T.TRK Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-53
1- - 3. Trial Maneuver - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec/ton 5. 7 on page 5-54
I 1- 2. Course(EBL)
I 1- 3. Speed(VRM)
I 1- 4 . Vec1or Time
I I 1- 1. Reach
I I 1- 2. Turn Radius
1- - 4. AIS Filter Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec/ton 5.3. 7 on page 5-33
I 1- 1 . Filter Type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.3. 7 2 on page 5-33
I 1- 2. Make AIS Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 53.7 3 on page 5-34
C-8
JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C Menu Index > C 5 AZ.
----------------------------------
I f- 3. Filter Display sect1on 5.3. 7 4 on page ~5
I f- 4. ENT
I L 6. Filter Mode - - section 5 3. 7 5 on page 5-35
f- 5. Target Number Display - sect1on 5 3 6 on page ~2
f- - 6. AIS Alarm Setting - - - - - - - - - sect1on 5 3.9 on page ~7
I f- 1. Lost Alarm- - - - - - - - section 5 3.9. 1 on page 5-37
I L 2. CPNTCPA Alarm - - - - section 5 3.9.2 on page 5-37
f- - 7. Message - - - - - - - - - - sectton 5 3 5. 5 on page 5-30
I f- 1. Addressed Message
I L 2. Broadcast Message
f- 8. Display Lost TGT Data section 5.3.5.6 on page 5-32
L 9. Own Ship's AIS Data - - - - section 5.3.5.7 on page ~2
AZ
f- 1. AZ1----- section 5.2. 1. 1 on page 5-15

f- 2. AZ 2- - - - - section 5.2.1. 1 on page 5-15
f- 3. Make AZ 1 section 5.2.1.1 on page 5-15
f- 4. Make AZ 2 section 5 2. 1 1 on page 5-15
L S. ENT
C- 9 [.JRC ] 8apan. Raci«J Co.,.lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.6 Track
----------------------------------
-~
-
- --
-- -
- -
-
- -
-
--
---
---
----- ~-- Track
1- - 1. DISP Own Track Color- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 52 on page 3-40

I 1- 1. All
I 1- 2. White
I 1- 3. Cyan
I 1- 4. Blue
I 1- 5. Green
I 1- 6. Yellow
I 1- 7. Pink
I L 8 . Red
1- 2. Clear Own Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectiOn 3 55 on page 3-42
1- 3. Track Type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectK>n 3 5 6 on page 3-42
1- 4. NumNector Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectK>n 3 56 on page 3-42
1- - 5. File Operations
I 1- 2. Load Mode
I 1- 3. Load
I 1- 4. Save
I 1- 5. Erase
I L 6. Card Own Track Display
1- - 6. Water Depth Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3 5 7 on page 3-44
I 1- 1. Depth setting (MIN)
I 1- 2. Depth setting
I L 6. Depth setting (MAX)
1- - 7. Water TEMP Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.5 8 on page 3-45
I 1- 1. Temperature setting (MIN)
I 1- 2. Temperature setting
I L 6. Temperature setting (MAX)
1- - 8. Current Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectton 3 5 9 on page 3-46
I 1- 1. Current Size
I 1- 2. Layer A
I 1- 3. Layer B
I L 4. Layer C
["'RC) 8opan Radic Co.,.ltd. C - 10

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.7 Route
----------------------------------
Route
f- 1. Select Route - - - - - - - - section 3 7. 1 on page 3-67

f- - 2. WPT/Route Settig
I f- 1 . Waypoint Alarm - section 3. 7.4.1 on page 3-79
I f- 2 . Route Alarm- - - section 3. 7.4.2 on pege 3-80
I f- - 3. Set Route Sequence- - - section 3. 7 2 on pege 3-68
! I f- 1. Planned Speed - section 3 7 3.5 on pege 3-77
I I f- 2. Add - - - - - - - section 3. 7.2.2 on page 3-69
I f- 3. Correct Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 7.2.3 on page 3-70
1 f- 4. Correct Planned Speed - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 7.2.4 on pege 3-71
1 f- 5. Delete - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 7.2.5 on page 3-72
1 f- 6. Insert - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - __ section 3 7 2.6 on page 3-73
I L 7. New Monitor Route - - section 3 7 2 . 1 on page 3-68
f- 6 . Waypoint Input - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 7.3 on page 3-75
f- 7. Save Temporary Route
f- 8. Off-Track Limit Line - - - - - - sect1on 3 7 6 1 on page 3-83
f- - 9. Next
f- 1. SEL. NUM/Comment Size - - section 3. 7 6.2 on page 3-84
f- 2. Waypoint Vector - - - - - section 3. 7.6.3 on pege 3-84
f- 3. Status of Origin/DEST - - section 3. 7 6 4 on pege 3-85
L 4. WPT Number Display sect1on 3.7 6.5 on page 3-85
f- - 3. WPT/Route Operations - - - - - - - section 3 7.5 on pege 3-81
I f- 1. Route Sequence- - - - - section 3. 7.5 . 1 on page 3-81
I f- 2. Waypoint Switch Mode- - section 3 7.6.6 on pege 3-86
I f- 3. Waypoint Skip - - - - section 3 7 5 2 on pege 3-82
I f- 4 . Waypoint Back Skip - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 7.5.2 on page 3-82
I f- 5. SeUCancel Waypoint
I L 6. Clear WPT/Route Data
f- - 4. File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 7 8 on pege 3-87
I f- 1. Select Card Slot - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 7 8 1 on page 3-87
I f- 2. Load - - - - - - - section 3 7 8 3 on pege 3-88
I f- 3. Save - - section 3 7.8 2 on pege 3-87
I L 4. Erase- section 3 7 8.4 on pege 3-89
C - 11 [ ~Rc I 8apan. Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C .Menu Index > C.B U Map
----------------------------------
--~-~-
--
-- - -- - -
--- ---
==-- -=~ -== U.Map
f- 1. Own Ship Position - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3 6 3 1 on page 3-52
f- - 2. Edit User Map - - - - - - - • - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3 6.3 on page 3-52
I f- - 1. Make with Cursor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.1 1 on page 3-47
I I f- 1. Type
I I L 2. Color
I f- - 2. Make with UL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 6 1 3 on page 3-49
I I f- 1. Type
I I f- 2. Color
I I f- 3. UL
I I f- 4. Comment
I I f- 5. Enter
I I L 9. New Line lnpuU9.New Mark Input
I f- 3. Move - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 6 3.2 on page 3-53
I f- 4. Delete - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect100 3 6 3 3 on page 3-55
I f- 5. Insert/Move Vertex- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - seciK>n 3 6 3 4 on page 3-56
I f- 6. Delete Vertex - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - secllon 3 6 3 6 on page 3-58
I L 7. Delete by Type by Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 6 3. 7 on page 3-59
f- 3. Shift- - - - - - - - - - - • - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 6 4 1 on page 3-60
f- 4. Shift Clear - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 6 4 2 on page 3-61
f- - 5. Mark Display Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 6.2 on page 3-50
I f- - 1. Display Mark Type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section3.62. 1onpage3-50
I I f- 1. All
I I f- 2. o
I I f- 3. t:.
I I f- 4. "i1
I I f- 5 . o
I I f- 6. o
I I f- 7. Wreck (mark)
I I f- 8 . t:. t:.
I I f- - 9. Next
I I f- 1. "il"il
I I f- 2. t:. "i1
l l f- 3. "i1 t:.
f- 4. +
f- 5. X
f- 6 . y
f- 7. Hand drum (mark)
f- 8. Light house (mark)
f- - 9. Next
f- 1. Trapezoid (mark)
f- 2. filled Trapezoid (mark)
f- 3. Hat(mark)
f- 4 . • •
f- 5 . •
f- 6. Filled Triangle(mark)
f- 7. !
f- 8. anchor(mark)
f- - 9. Next
f- 1. slash-anchor(mark)
f- 2. circle-dotted line(mark)
f- 3. non-dangerous wreck(mark)
f- 4. @
f- 5. mariner's event mark(mark)
f- 6 . .
f- 7. Wavy line (mark)
f- 8. Solid line (mark)
L 9. Dashed-dotted line (mark)
f- - 2. Display Mark Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.2.2 on page 3-51
I f- 1. All
I f- 2. White
I f- 3. Cyan
I f- 4. Blue
[.JRC ] 8opan RadicJ Co., .lid. C-12

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C Menu Index > C .B U Map
----------------------------------
I I f- 5. Green
I I 1- 6. Yellow
I I 1- 7. Pink
I I L 8. Red
I 1- 3. Select Mark Size ----- - section 3.6.2.3 on page 3-51
I L 4. Comment Font Size - section 3.6 2.4 on page 3-52
1- 6. Geodetic - - - - - - - - - section 3 6 6 on page 3-65
L - 7. File Operations - - - - - - - - sect1on 3 6.5 on page 3-61
1- 1. Select Card Slot
1- 2. Load Mode - - - - - section 3.6.5. 1 on page 3-61
f- 3. Load - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5. 1 on page 3-61
f- 4 . Unload - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.2 on page 3-62
f- 5. Save - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.3 on page 3-62
f- 6. Erase - - - - - - - - section 3 6.5 4 on page 3-63
L 7. Card Mark Display - - - - section 3 6 5 5 on page 3-64
C - 13 [.JRC I (Japan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C 9 Serviceman Menu
----------------------------------
Serviceman Menu
!-Serviceman Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7. 1. 1 on page 7-1

1- - 1. Adjust Menu
I 1- 1. Tune Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 7.1 3 on page 7-5
I 1- 2. Bearing Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 1.4 on page 7-7
I 1- 3. Range Adjustment- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 7.1.5 on page 7-7
I L - 4. TXRX Adjustment
I I 1- 1. Antenna Height - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7. 1.8 on page 7-9
I I 1- 2. Tune Peak Adjustment- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7. 1.3.2 on page 7-5
I I 1- 3. Tune Indicator Adjust - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.1 3 3 on page 7-0
I I 1- 4. MON Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 73.4 1 on pege 7-37
I I 1- 5. MON Indicator Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3 4 2 on pege 7-38
I I L 6. Output Pulse - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.4 on pege 7-18
1- - 2. Installation Menu
1- - 1. Installation Information- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectton 7 2.8 on pege 7-21
I 1- 1. Date
I 1- 2. Name
I L 3. Company
1- 2. Master/Slave - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2 5 1 on pege 7-19
f- - 3. Sector Blank- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2 on pege 7-16
I 1- 1. Sector1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2.1 on pege 7-16
I 1- 2. Sector2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2 1 on pege 7-16
I 1- 3. Sector3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.2 1 on pege 7-16
I 1- 4. Make Sector1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectton 7 2.2 2 on pegs 7-16
I f- 5. Make Sector2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.2.2 on pegs 7-16
I L 6. Make Sector3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.2 2 on pege 7- 16
1- 4. CCRP Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 1 9 on pegs 7-10
1- - 5. COM Port Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2 1 on pegs 7-12
1- - 1. Baud Rate - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectiOn 7 2 11 on pegs 7- 12
I 1- 1. COMPASS
I 1- 2. MAINTENANCE/LOG
I 1- 3. NAV1
I 1- 4. NAV2
I 1- 5. ALARM
I I 6. JARPA
I 1- 7. AIS
I 1- 8. BRIDGE NET
I 1- -9. Next
I f- 1. ARPA
I L 2. COM
f- - 2. RX Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2 1 2 on pege 7-13
I 1- 1. GPS
I 1- 2. DLOG
I 1- 3. Alarm
I 1- 4. Depth
I 1- 5. Temperature
I 1- 6. VVind
I 1- 7. Current
I 1- 8. ROT
I I- - 9. Next
I L 1. RSA
1- - 3. RX Sentence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.1 3 on pegs 7-1 4
I 1- 1. GPS(LUCOG/SOG)
I f- 2. GPS(WPTITIME)
I 1- 3. Depth
I 1- 4. VVind
I L - 5. Current
I I 1- 1. Data Set Number
I I 1- 2. Layer A
I I 1- 3. Layer B
I I L 4. Layer C
1-- 4. TX Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.1 4 on pegs 7-15
I 1- 1. TIM(TI)
I f- 2. TLL(TI)
[JRC ] fJCifXI"' RadicJ Co., .lid. C - 14

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C 9 SefVlceman Menu
----------------------------------
1- 3. TID(TT)
1- 4. TLB(TT)
1- 5. OSD
1- 6. RSD
1- 7. ALR
1- 8. ACK
1- - 9. Next
1- 1. TIM(AIS)
1- 2. TLL(AIS)
1- 3. TID(AIS)
1- 4. TLB(AIS)
1- 5. Remote Maintenance
1- 6 . JRC-ARPA
1- 7. NMEA0183 Output Format
1- 8. NMEA0183 Talker
1- -9. Next
1- 1. NMEA0183 TX Interval
1- 2. APB
1- 3. BOD
1- 4. GGA
1- 5 . GLL
1- 6. RMC
1- 7. RMB
1- 8 . VTG
1- - 9. Next
1- 1. XTE
1- 2. BWC
1- 3. HOT
L 4 . THS
1- - 7. Line Monitor
I 1- 1. COMPASS
I 1- 2. MAINTENANCE/LOG
I 1- 3. NAV1
I 1- 4. NAV2
I 1- 5. ALARM
I 1- 6. JARPA
I 1- 7. AIS
I 1- 8. BRIDGE NET
I I- - 9. Next
I 1- 1. ARPA
I 1- 2. COM
I 1- 3. TXRX/ISW
I 1- 4. KEYBOARD1
I L 5. KEYBOARD2
1- - 6 . Alarm System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2 9 on page 7-22
1- - 1. Watch Alarm
I 1- 1. Reset Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.1 on page 7-22
I L 2. Trackball Threshold - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.2 on page 7-22
1- - 2. Relay Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9.3 on page 7-23
I 1- 1. Relay Output Mode
I 1- 2. TI CPNTCPA
I 1- 3. AIS CPNTCPA
I 1- 4. New Target
I 1- 5. Lost
I L 6. RADAR Alarm
1- - 3. ALR Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2 9 4 on page 7-23
I 1- 1. System Alarm
I L 2. TI/AIS Alarm
1- 4. Sound Output Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.9 6 on page 7-25
1- - 5. External ACK Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2 9.5 on page 7-24
I 1- - 1. Critical Alarm
I I 1- 1. Audio
I I 1- 21ndication
I I L 3. Acknowledge State
I 1- - 2. Normal Alarm
I I 1- 1. Audio
I I 1- 2. Indication
I I I L 3. Acknowledge State
1- - 7. Inter Switch
I 1- 1. ISW Install
C-15 ["'RC] 8opan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C 9 Serviceman Menu
----------------------------------
I f- - 2. Mask Setting
I I f- 1. No.1 Connection1No.1 Master
I I f- 2. No.2 Connection/No.2 Master
I I f- 5. No.5 Connection/No.S Master1
I I f- 6. No.6 Connection/No.6 Master'
I I f- 7. No.7 Connection/No.? Master'
I I L 8. No.8 Connection/No.8 Maste~
I L 3 . S-ISW TXRX Power Supply
f- 8. Language - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.6 on page 7-20
f- - 9. Next
f- 1. Input BP Count - - - - - - - - - sectiOn 7 2 52 on page 7-19
f- - 2. TNI Blank - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.3 on page 7-17
I f- 1. TNI Blank- - - section 7.2.3 1 on page 7-17
I L 2. Make Sector- section 7 2.3 2 on page 7-17
f- - 3 . Device Installation - - - - -sectiOn 7 1 6 on page 7-8
I f- 1. Gyro
I f- 2. Compass
I f- 3. GPS Compass
I f- 4 . LOG
I f- s. 2AXW
I f- 6. 2AXG
I L 7. GPS
f- - 4 . Network
I f- 1. Network Function - - - -section 7.2. 10 1 on page 7-27
I f- 2. IP Address
I f- 3. Sensor Priority- - - - - - section 7 2 10 2 on page 7-27
I L 4 . Synchronization - - - - -section 7 2. 10 3 on page 7-28
f- - 5. LAN Port Setting
I f- 1. TX Setting - - - - - - - - - - - • - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2. 11 1 on page 7-29
I f- 2. RX Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2. 11 2 on page 7-30
I L 3 . RX Sentence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2. 11.3 on page 7-31
f- - 3. Maintenance Menu
f- 1. Safety Switch - - - - - - - - - - section 7 4 1 on page 7-39
f- - 2. Area Initial- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectiOfl 7 4 2 on page 7-40
L - 1. Partial Master Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 4 2 1 on page 7-40
I I f- 1. Serviceman Menu
I I f- 2. Except Serviceman Menu
I I f- 3. User Setting
I I f- 4. TT Setting
I I f- 5. AIS Settmg
I I 1- 6. DayfNight
I I L 7. JRC Card Copy Record
I L 2. All Master Reset- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.2 2 on page 7-40
1- 3. Internal To Card2 - - section 7.4 3 1 on page 7-41
1- 4. Card2 To Internal - - - - section 7 4 3 2 on page 7-41
f- - 5. TXRX lime - - - - - - - - section 7 4 4 on page 7-42
I f- 1. Clear TX lime - - section 7 4 4 1 on page 7-42
I f- 2. Clear Motor lime section 7.4 4 2 on page 7-42
I 1- 3. TXRX to Display Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - • sectton 7.4 4.3 on page 7-43
I L 4. Display Unit to TXRX - - • • - - - - - - - - - • sectton 7.4 4 4 on page 7-43
L 6 . String Data Update - - - - - - - - - - - - - • - - - - - - - - section 7 4 5 on page 7-44
L - 9. RADAR!TT Initial Setup
f- - 1. Signal Processing - - - - - - - - • - • • - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 3 1 on page 7-32
I f- 1. Echo Noise Level - - - - - • • • - - - - - - - - - • section 7 3 1 1 on page 7-32
I L 2. Setting Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - • • - - - - - section 7.3. 1 2 on page 7-33
f- - 2. TT- - - - - • - - - • - - - - - - - - - - - - - • • · • section 7 3 2 on page 7-33
I f- 1. Vector Constant - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 3 2 1 on page 7-33
I 1- 2. Video TD Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectiOn 7 3 2 2 on page 7-34
I 1- 3. Video High Level
I f- 4. Video Low Level
I f- 5. Gate Size
I L 6. Limit Ring
L - 3. MBS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 .3 3 on page 7-35
I 1- 1. MBS Level- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 3 .3 1 on page 7-35
I L 2. M BS Area - - - - - - - - - - - • - - - - - - - - - - section 7 3.3 2 on page 7-36
1.0nly for ISW Extended Mode
[~Rc ] gopanRadio Co.. .lid. C - 16

JMA-9100 Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.9 Serviceman Menu
----------------------------------
C-17 [~RC I f)opan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9100 lnstructJon Manual > C.Menu Index > C.9 Serviceman Menu
----------------------------------
C - 18
For further information.contact:
7 .A"'.A 1- l;l:{iffl '--"'(;to IJ !J:ttlv

Not use the asbestos
I.JRCI 3apanRadio Co.,.lld.
Since1915
URL http: wvvw.irc.co.ip

Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile : +81-3-3779-1420
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31 -20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654-7030
CODE No.7ZPR00685 OlETII ISO 9001 . 1SO 14001 Certified
©SEP. 2 011 Edition 6 JRC Pnnted~nJapan
JMA-9172-SA
MARINE RADAR
EQUIPMENT
SIMPLIFIED MANUAL
1 INTRODUCTION .......................................................................•....................... 1
1.1 READ ME ................................................................................•................ 1
2 BASIC OPERATION ............................................................•............................ 2
2.1 POWER ON AND START THE SYSTEM ................................................. 2
2.2 END THE OPERATION AND POWER OFF ............................................. 3
2.3 ADJUST MONITOR BRILLIANCE [BRILL] .....................•....................... 3
2.4 CHANGE OBSERVATION RANGE [RANGE + I - ] ................................. 4
2.5 ADJUST GAIN [GAIN] ....................................................................•........ 4
2.6 SUPPRESS SEA CLUTTER [SEA] ......................................................... 4
2.7 SUPPRESS RAIN I SNOW CLUTTER [RAIN] ........................................ 6
2.8 USING ELECTRONIC BEARING LINE (EBL 1 I EBL2) ..........................• 7
2.9 ~-~~'!G VARIABLE RANGE MARKER (VRM1 I VRM2) ..•....................... 9
IMO NO. : 9683415

DEP'T NO. DEP'T NAME SHIP TYPE
5660 ELECTRIC DESIGN DEP'T SOK DWT CLASS PRODUCT I CHEMICAL TANKER
TEL.NO. SHIP NO. SHIP NAME
3980 241 9 SILVER LINDA

NAME OF DRAWING
APPROVED : P.W. LEE

,...
0
It) C HECKE D : H.C.WOO RADAR (3/4)
0
w It)
1- ..... DRAWN S.S. KIM
-d: 0
0 N SCALE DRAWI NG NO. REV.NO
NONE 51810E003 FINAL
~
HYUNDAI
MIPO DOCKYARD CO ., LTD.
ULSAN KOREA
CONSOLIDATED
I E-33
-----------------------
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 Read Me
About t his manual
See the INSTRUCTION MANUAL for details.
Maintain thi s SIMPUFIED MANUAL so that operators can refer to it at anytime.
About radar equ ipment

Use the radar only as a navigation aid. The final navigation decision must always be made by the
operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause
accidents such as collisions or running aground.
About sea clutter suppression

When using the sea clutter suppression fu nction, never set the suppression level too high canceling out
all image no ises from the sea surface at close range.
Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets such as other ships or dangerous objects wi ll
become inhibited.
When using the sea clutter suppression function function, make sure to choose the most appropriate
image noise suppression level.
About rain/snow clutter suppression

When using the rain/snow clutter suppression function function, never set the suppression level too
high canceling out all image noises from the rain or snow at close range.
Detection of not only echoes from the rain or snow but also targets such as other ships or dangerous
objects wi ll become inhibited.
When usi ng the rain/snow clutter suppression function function, make sure to choose the most
appropriate image noise suppression level.
About target tracking (1J) function

Use target tracking function only as a navigation aid. The final navigation decision must always be
made by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision based only on tracking target
information may cause accidents.
Tracked target information such as vector, target numerical data, and alarms may contain some errors.
Also, targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be acquired or tracked.
Making the final navigation decision based only on the radar display may cause accidents such as
collisions or running aground.
-----------------------
2 BASIC OPERATION
2.1 Power ON and Start the System
Procedures
1 Check that the ship's mains are turned on.
• c
cc 0000 8 @
C C C CCC C C
0 C
C
CCC
C C C
0
Preheat
3 Wait until the preheating time is over.
When the preheating time is over, the preheating time screen disappears, and I Preheat Iupper left of
the display changes to I Standby I.
StandbY
c c
• c00008@
C C C CCC C C
0 C
C
CCC
CCC
0
T he radar will start transmissio n and the antenna will start rotating.
I Standby I upper left of the display changes to I Transmit I.
Transmit .
2
-----------------------
2.2 End the Operation and Power Off
l=tfll
c c
. cooooB@
C C C CC C C C
0 C
C
CCC
CCC
0
T he radar wi ll stop transmission and the antenna will stop rotating.
I Transmit I upper left of the display changes to I Standby I.
StandbY
• c
cc00008@
C C C C CC C C
0 C CCC
C CCC
0
2.3 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL]
Procedures
1 Obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance by turning the

[BRILL] dial at the lower right of the LCD monitor unit.
•
Ln consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust LCD monitor bri ll iance that is high enough to easily
o bserve the radar display but does no t g lare.
3
-----------------------
2.4 Change Observation Range [RANGE +I-]
Procedures
1 When increasing the observation range, press the [RANGE+] key.
0 0
ccOOOO
0 0 0
~ @ [J[J [J [J [J
0 0
0
CC C
0 0
[J
0
Increasing the observation range will enable a wider range to be observed.
2 When decreasing the observation range, press the [RANGE-] key.
[J [J
ccOOOO
0 0 c oo
~ @
0
[J
[J
[J
[J [J[J
[J[J[J
0
[J [J
Decreasing the observation range will enable a narrower range to be observed .
2.5 Adjust Gain [GAIN]
Procedures
1 Turning the [GAIN] dial.
0 0
ccO O O e 8@
0 0
0
[J [J [J[J [J [J
0 0
0
[J [J[J
[J 0 0
By increasing receiving gain, the range to observe radar video is widened.
2.6 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA]
Using the manual sea clutter suppression mode
Procedures
1 Turning the [SEA] dial.
[J 0
ccoo e o8@
0
0
0 0
0
0
[J[J[J
[J[J[J
CCC
0
0 0
The sea clutter suppression function suppresses sea clutter returns by decreasing the receiving gai n on
a short range.
4
-----------------------
Using the automatic sea clutter suppression mode
Procedures
c c
c c
c c
oo e
0 c ceo
C
C
CCC
CCC
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, and I AUTO I is displayed in sea clutter
suppression (Sea) mode switching.
2 Make adjustments by turning the [SEA] dial.
c c
c coo e o B@
0 c ceo 0
0 0 C CCC C C
C CCC
Even when the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the ISEAl dial can make
fine adjustments manually.
Cancellation
c c I I
oc
0 0
OO e oc cB@
c coo
coo 0
0 c0 coo
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and I MAN I is displayed in the sea clutter
suppression (Sea) mode field .
5
-----------------------
2.7 Suppress Rain I Snow Clutter [RAIN]
Using the manual rain I snow clutter suppression mode
Procedures
1 Turning the [RAIN] dial.
[] []
oooeooB@
0 [] [][][] 0
[] [] [] [] [] [] [] []
[] [] [] []
The rai n I snow clutter suppression function suppress rain I snow clutter returns by decreasing the
receiving gain.
Since the rain I snow clutter suppression function also has the effect of suppressing sea clutter, the
suppression efficiency improves when the IRAI N I dial is used w ith the !SEAl dial.
Using the automatic rain /snow clutter suppression mode
Procedures
[] []
oooeooB@
0 [] [][][] 0
[] [] [] [] [] [] [] []
[] [] [] []
I I
The automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is selected, and AUTO is displayed in the sea
clutter suppression (Sea) mode switching and the rain I snow clutter suppression (Rain) mode
switching.
When the automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is selected, the automatic sea clutter mode
and Doppler Filter* are also activated.
*Doppler Filter: This fu nction possi ble on solid radar is provided superior detection in the case of
heavy rain and snow situation
2 Make adjustments by turning the [RAIN] dial and the [SEA] dial.
[] []
oooeeoB@
0 [] [][][] 0
[] [] [] [] [] [] [] []
[] [] [] []
Even when the automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the JRAI NI dial and
the ISEAl dial can make fine adj ustmen ts manually.
6
-----------------------
Cancellation
0 0
ooo e ooB@
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
00 0
0
The automatic rain I snow clutter suppress ion mode is cancell ed, and I AUTO I is changed to
I MAN I in the sea clutter suppression (Sea) mode field and the rain I snow clutter suppression (Rain)
mode field.
2.8 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL 1 I EBL2)
[I] Operating EBL (EBL)
Procedures
1 Press the [EBL 1] or [EBL2] key.
0 0
oooooo8@
° 0
•
0
• 0
0
0
000
000
000
0
The EBL adjustment will be highlighted, and the selected EBL becomes operable.
rT QA~n IO I
-~---~~~
VRMl- - - .NM -
EBL2 R t~~.Q_ '(' '0
VRM2 NM
2 Turn the [EBL] dial.
0 0
oo00008@
0 coo
0 0 0 0
• 0 coo
0
0 000
To turn the IE BLI dial to the right, tum the EBL dial clockw ise, to turn the IEBLI dial to the left, tum
the E BL dial counterclockwise.
7
-----------------------
Cancellation
1 Press the (EBL1] or [EBL2] key again.
0 0
c c 0 0 0 00 80 @
coo
•
0
• 0
0
0
CCC
CCC
0
The selected EBL display wi ll disappear.
[II] Moving the Starting Point of EBL

The system provides three types ofEBL starting points. Select one of them in accordance with
ose.
:The EBL starting point is defined as the own ship's position.
:The EBL starting po int is moved and fixed on the radar display.
:The EBL starting po int is moved and fi xed at the latitude and longitude.
To move the starting point of EBL
Procedures
1 Make EBL 1 or EBL2 operable.
2 Press the [EBL] dial to set [f] or []] for the EBL1 I EBL2 starting
point mode switching.
0 0
cc00008@
0 0 0 CCC 0 0
•
0
0
CCC
CCC
0
The selected EBL starting point mode is switched as shown below each time the dial is pressed.
T
--- 045.0 °__
,
VRMl NM
EBL2 R -
--- 135.o
--
o___ _
.,_ ·o
VRM2 NM
3 Put the cursor on the EBL starting point is to be moved, and left-click.
0 0
cc00008
00 0 CCC 0 0
~
0 0
0
CCC
CCC
0
The selected EBL starting point will be determined.
8
-----------------------
To return the EBL starting point to own ship's position
Procedures
1 Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable.
2 Press the [EBL] d ial to set D for the EBL 1 I EBL2 starting point mode
switching.
0 0
o o 00008@
0 0 0 000 0 0
•
0
0
0 0 0
0 0 0
0
The selected EBL starting point wi ll be set as the own ship's posi tion.
2.9 Using Variable Range Marker (VRM1 I VRM2)
To operate VRM
Procedures
1 Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key.
o o I I
oo00008@
0 0
0
0
0
0
000
000
000
0
••
The VRM adjustment will be highlighted, and the selected VRM becomes operable.
EBLl T __[_!_
3.00 NM
--~-------------~ -D
0
EBL2 iT
VRM2 6.00 .NM
2 Turn the [VRM] dial.
0 0
oo00008@
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
•
To tum the IYRMI dial to the right, the RM contro l wide, to tum the IYRMI dial to the left, the
VRM control narrow.
9
-----------------------
Cancellation
1 Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key again.
0 0
oo00008@
0 0
0
0 000 • •
0 coo
0 000
0
The selected VRM display wi ll disappear.
2.10 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN]
Procedures
1 Press the [GAIN] dial.
0 0
a oOOO e 8@
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
The selected pulse length will be displayed in the pulse length indicatio n.
2.11 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI Mode)
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the azimuth display mode switching, and left-click.
a a I I
oo00008~
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0 000
0 000
0
The azimuth display modes are switched.
10
-----------------------
2.12 Switch True I Relative Motion Display Mode (TM I RM)
Switching Motion Display Mode
rocedures
1 Put the cursor on the motion mode true [!MJ I relative I RM I

switching, and left-click.
0 0
oo00008
0 0 0 c oo 0 0
~
0 0
0
c oo
c oo
0
The motio n display mode are switched.
Resetting Own Ship to its Initial Position in True Motion (TM) Mode
rocedures
1 Hold down the motion mode true I relative switching [!MJ for
2 seconds.
o o I I
oo00008
00 0 co o 0 0
~
0 0
0
coo
coo
0
Own ship wi ll be reset to its in iti al position as established when the relative motion mode is changed to
the true motion mode. The ship starts moving from that position.
II
-----------------------
2.13 Display Radar Trails (TRAILS)
Changing the length of the trail
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the radar trails display time switching, and left-click.
0 0
ooooB0 ~
0
0
0 0 0
0 0 0
°0
0 00 0
Values of the length of the radar trail are switched.
Erasing Trails Data
Procedures
1 Hold down the radar trails display time switching for 5 seconds.
oo . _ _ I_ _ _,
000
All the saved trails data will be erased. The system starts plotting trails in initial state.
If radar trails display time switching button is pushed for 2 seconds, a RADAR Trails Setting menu
will be displayed. Furthermore, data will be erased if it continues pressing.
Changing Motion Mode of Trails (Trails mode)
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on radar trails display true [!] I relative [BJ switching,
and left-click.

If true motion (TM) mode is selected in azimuth display mode, only the true motion trails mode is
available.
12
-----------------------
3 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
3.1 Acquiring Target [ACQ MANUAL]
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the target to be acquired, and press the

[ACQ MANUAL] key.
0 0
oo00008@
oo oo•o oo
0 0 DCC
C DCC
0
The target will be acquired and the initial acq uisition symbol will be di splayed. The vector wi ll be
displayed with in one minute.
3.2 Display Tracked Target Data [TGT DATA]
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the tracked target for which numeric data is to be
displayed, and press the [TGT DATA] key.
0 c
oc00 00 8@
o c 0 •o c co
0 o ace
0 coo
O
The data of the selected target wi ll be displayed.
0 .J
13
-----------------------
3.3 Canceling Tracked Targets [ACQ CNCL]
Canceling targets one by one [ACQ CNCL]
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the tracked target to the desired for canceling target,
and press the [ACQ CNCL] key.
0 0
oo00008@
o o 0 c o• o o
0 0 c oo
0 coo
0
The vectors and symbo ls of the tracked targets will disappear, and only the radar video remain .
Canceling all targets collectively [ACQ CNCL]
Procedures
1 Press the [ACQ CNCL] key for 5 seconds.
0 0
oo00008@
0 0 0 0
0
o c o•
[J
[J
[J[J[J
[J [J [J
0
The vectors and symbols of all the targets wi ll disappear, and only the radar vi deo remain.
(:'\=
\J~
14
-----------------------
4 AIS OPERATION
4.1 Setting AIS Display Function [AIS ITT]
Procedures
1 Press the [AIS I TT] key.
0 0
oo 0 0 0 0 8 @
0 0 0 0 00 0 0
0 o0 000
•oo O
The received Al S information will be shown on the radar di splay.
4.2 Activate AIS Targets (ACT AIS)
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the sleeping AIS target to be activated, and right-click.
o o I I
oo OOoo B~
0
0 0 0 000
0
0
0 0
000
000
0
The setting items for cursor modes will be di splayed.
15
-----------------------
2 Left-click I 2. ACT AIS 1.
0 0
cc00008
00 0 CCC 0 0
~
0 0
0
C CC
CCC
0
The selected AlS target will be activated.
4.3 Display Activated AIS Target Data [TGT DATA]
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the AIS target of which data is to be displayed, and
press the [TGT DATA] key.
0 0
cc 0 0 0 0 8@
c c 0 • co c c
0 0 coo
0 CCC
0
The data of the selected AIS target will be displayed .
16
-----------------------
4.4 Deactivate AIS Targets (DEACT AIS)
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the activated AIS target to be deactivated, and

right-click.
o o I I
oo0 0000
0
0
oc
0
0
0
8~
0
DO C
DO C
000
2 Left-click I 5. DEACT AIS 1.
0 0
oo OOoo
0 0
B~
0 DOC C 0
0 0
0
DOC
coo
0
The selected AlS target will be deactivated.
17
-----------------------
5 TARGET TRACKING I AIS COMMON
OPERATION
5.1 Setting Vectors (Vector)
Setting vector mode IT I R I VECTI
Procedures
1 Press the [T I R I VECT] key.
0 0
oo00008@
0 0 • co o 0 0
0 0 coo
0 co o
0
The current vector mode [Y) (true vector) or [[) (relative vector) will be displayed in the target
vector display true I re lative switching.
Vector l:l~>.i;f?6Q min
Setting vector time on the display (Vector Time)
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the target vector time setting, and left-click.
0 0
oo 0000 8~
co coc o co
0 0
0
coo
coo
0
2 Enter the value to be set as vector time.
0 0
o o00 0000
0 0
000 08 ~
0 0
0
c oo
coo
0
18
-----------------------
5.2 Setting Collision Decision Criteria (CPA I TCPA Limit)
Input of CPA Limit
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the CPA limit setting, and left-click.
The CPA Limit value input screen will appear.
2 Enter the value to be set as a CPA limit.
o o I _
~_ _ ...JI
~0~000~0~ ~
0
0
000
000
0 0 0 0
Input of TCPA Limit
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the TCPA limit setting, and left-click.
0 0
oo00008
00 0 000 0 0
~
0 0
0
000
000
0
Limit 1.5NM 10
The TCPA Lim it value input screen wil l appear.
2 Enter the value to be set as a TCPA limit.
0 0
ooOOooB
0 0 0 000 0 0
~
0 0
0
000
0 00
0
19
-----------------------
6 OTHER CONTENTS
6.1 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK]
Procedures
1 Press the [ALARM ACK] key.
o o I I
o . ooooB@
0 0 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
The ala nn will stop buzzing .
6.2 Operation on Numeric Value Input menu
Entered value
Numeric button
Enter button
Procedures
1 Put the cursor on the numeric button to the desired value, and left-click.
o o I I
oo00008~
00 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
0
2 Make sure that the entered value is correct, put the cursor on the enter
button I ENT I, and left-click.
0 0
oo00008~
0
00 0 000 0 0
0 0
0
000
000
20
For further information, contact:
7 .A--<.A HlWH t., -ra ~ ll:-ttA., I~Rcl 3apanRadio Co.,.ltd.

Not use the asbestos Smce1916
URL http:/ / www.irc.co.ip

Telephone : +81-3-3492-1305
Facsimile: +81-3-3779-1420
AMSTERDAM Branch
Telephone : +31-20-658-0750
Facsimile : +31-20-658-0755
SEATTLE Branch
Telephone : +1-206-654-5644
Facsimile : +1-206-654 -7030
CODE No.7ZPR00732 01 ETII ISO 9<X>1. ISO 1 4001 Certfied
© APR 2011 Edition 1 JRC PrlntedinJapan
1/ 5
Messrs.
~~,oXMit
INSPECTION DATA
J3'J*sv~!l~~~w:
MARINE RADAR EQUIPMENT
JMA-9172-SA
~)E!J!!:Mr
Approved type JMA-9172-SA
~%
Approval NO. QQ-MED-17/08-01R1
~AI3
Approval date 13 AUG 2010
Serial No. LC 53798
Date of Inspection 27 JUN 2014
ill *
Approved by
~~A
Inspected by
~1!tttl~$~~ #iJ:~J'oWf*IDEml Alt~~&b Wf*IDE?''~t-7'

Section NavigationGroup, Quality Assurance Department I MarineElectronics
(~Rc) 3apanRadioCo.,.lld.
2DJ-8886
2/ 5
m:!i1NH=~
Ser i al No. LC 53798
t~~~~ !j!JJ ~
1. Verification to specification Judgment Good
tl ft. :g M :g ~~-if%
u n i t Mode I Serial No .
~rp~ C,,·n-<:..-.A~::~t!Uit)
Scanner Unit NK E -1532-1 LC 1 6 3 9 5
tJft.O)~Jil(;
[ Build in Performance Monitor 1
Components m?F-t~
NC D -9170T LC 53798
Display Unit
it.(I~- v-7'-WJ~~fl NQE -3141-2A

Accessories lnterswitching Unit
ti~tlft.i± ..
2. Specifications of sensor signal
tl ft. j.-tJ- ~ it {J: tl

N a m e Manufacturer Mode I Specifi cation
G y R 0
180X STEP
L 0 G
200 P / NM
tlfJt~Jf C*llUHtfJtl!) !i!IJ ~

3. Structural inspection (Appearance & Construction) Judgment Good
tt~~Jf !j!IJ ~
4. Penormanceinspection Judgment Good
4.1 Overall operation test
txt~!l§ m ~ ~
I t e m .................
"· """ ' Result *
~!W.J~r,IJ 60 tpJ;;J,~ 50 tJ.'
1.
Time from Power ON to Within 60 sec s
Transm ission
tE::Jtm~ms: AC 100/11 0/ 115V, 50/60Hz,1¢

2. AC 220 V 50 Hz 1 ¢
Rated power supply voltage AC220/230/240V, 50/60Hz 1¢
3. m~mJE~!tfJ tf::lttlttliUttEE ± 10% Good

Power supply voltage variation Rated value ± 10%
4.
till ~'illt.J l.OkVAJ;I.r 0 . 540 kVA
Power consumption 1.0 kVA or less
ltl:kie~~w~JJ 96 OOv/~
5. Good
Maximum detectable range 93NM range
~,J,ie-~W'H~JJ 40mJ;;J.r
6. Good
Minimum detectable range 40m or less
7. ffifffiiBt!M~lHiiiJ (STC) W!-*i.l';maot:,.n.o.:.c Good

Anti-Clutter sea (STC) Should be effective
ffi"'?9Jj~:j!J]f!iiJ (FTC) Wl*i.l;~aot:,.n.o.:.c
8. Good
Anti-Clutter rain (FTC) Should be effective
Wa-g"-~ (SHM) Wi o.5 ltJ;;J. r
9. Good
Ship's heading marker (SHM) Maker width ; with in 0.5°
3/ 5
~ifr:ffl:-8-
Seria l No. LC 53798
ttDilEI
~.
I t e m Result
il~ifi!Jf"F 8 llffr", .~;~. J:
10.
I
Continuous operation More than 8 hours
Good
~~~ttiitO
4.2 Electrical characteristic test
tt:Dl.REI m ~ ~
I t e m r- :.<: .
Result *
lt<.!Jrl::'"-A~~
1. 1.9° +0.1° / - 0.2° Good
Horizontal beam width
mutt:·-A~
2. 25" ± 10% Good
Vertical beam width
3.
.:C-?'llll'lt tJ 900VA .l;l.r
1 50 VA
Scanner motor power 900VA or less
~~f!.:C~.:L-Jv~~ · .Jif%
4. CMN-750 No. 047 1 00374
TRX Module type and serial No.
~181!!7Bi~ PON : 3040± 0.8MHz 3 0 4 0. 2 MHz
5.
Transmitter Frequency
QON : 3060 ± 0.8MHz 3 0 6 0. 1 MHz
~fg~iiJH:I:lJJ 1 9 9. 2 w
6. 250W +25% I -50%
Transmitting peak power
tl~~~tttJtO
4.3 Mechanical characteristic test
~ cp tJiHIDfif£ 20 @].l;f.J:./7! 2 4. 0 @]17!

1.
Scanner revolution 20rpm or more rom
v-~ -a~{l(7,)1'f:AAU!~ 320mmJ;JJ:
2. Good
PPI effective diameter 320mm or more
~c:p*.-lt1l*~~ !j!IJ :iE

5. SCANNER Water-Proof test Judgment Good
-- - - - - - --
4/ 5
.!1!\!ii!Hif%
Seri a l No. LC 53798
~~71!1i11~tit:l:
6. Performance inspection (TT)
~~I!:Jt'f:tt~
6.1 Overall operation
tt~Jlil3 m t& I ~ itf {f5

*
I t e m Specification/Cond i tion Result
~ ~tiiHJf& V~~ 13~~ ftj;;: 100 13 ~
1J ;~ 13 11J/=F I1J
1. Good
Acquisition and Tracking Automatic and Manual
Up to 100 targets
...-<~(-;v~;;?- ~- t: J{tm~llll'"'? " '"'
""' ? "Jl.-~0)~~
2. Good
Vector display Mode True/Relative
Vector length
AitHi/F~;;?- 10 #.. ~if-
3. Good
Past position 10 dots
~fftiA!} =FI!JI:: J:: ~llll!ti!
4. Good
Trial simulation Speed and cou-se charge by manual
~~rill~ 1 13tl4i~ li~I3~Fcl~
5. Good
Tracking cancel One by one and all
6.
tiiHJf ~71-ilJi lJiX ( 13 lhtiiHJf 11\¥) Good
Suppression area
~it~if-
7. Good
Numerical display
7!-r!J::..--~ ftj;;: 32 ).!
8. Good
Guard ring Max 32NM
W¥&~7r-
9. Good
Warming alarm
~?.7 A7.:r.-1'7-tHfl
10. Good
System failure alarm
5 /5
~i~f{fi:~
Ser ia I No. LC 53798
List of Measurement Equ ipment
27 JUN.2014
~~ ~ -1J~ ~~ WJ!Ii~ ~AAWIIJH

Name Manufacture Model Management code Ca l Due Date
;t~D.A:::J- :1
Tektronix 4658 67- 1- 368 MAR 2015
OSCILLOSCOPE
J ~ f")-:J.-9 Ag i Ient
4358 05-2- 905 APR 2015
POWER METER Technologies
J ~ f")--t! /-IJ'- Agi lent 10-00041 JAN 2015
8481 A
POWER SENSOR Technologies
.A~?~7.b.7-T71+f Agi Ient
8563EC 04-02293 FEB 2015
SPECTRUM ANALYZER Technologies
nlli~~ :t.J rJ /9 Ag i Ient
5382A 11-1 -383 APR 2015
FREQUENCY COUNTER Technologies
T':JT;?'--9 Ag i Ient
X382A 1990- 0097 JAN 2015
ATTENUATOR Technologies
.A ~ ':1 :1 rJ :;t ':1 7'
SE IKO S032-4000 01 -02206 SEP 2014
STOP WATCH
~~LA\o@'i]7J~o@LA\
MARINE RADAR
EQUIPMENT
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
IMO NO. : 9683415

DEP'T NO. DEP'T NAME SHIP TYPE

NAME OF DRAWING
APPROVED : P.W. LEE

,....
0
I() CHECKED : H.C. WOO RADAR (4/4)
0
w
.... I()
..- DRAWN : S.S. KIM
<! 0
0 N
SCALE· DRAWING NO. REV.NO
~
HYUNDAI NONE 51810E003 FINAL
MIPO DOCKYARD CO ., LTD .
CONSOLI DATED E-33
ULSAN KOREA
I
......
----------------------------------
+++ PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION +++
• Cautions for high voltage
High voltages from hundreds volts to tens of thousands volts are to be applied to
the electronic equipment such radio and radar devices. You do not face any
danger during normal operation, but sufficient cares are required for maintenance,
inspection and adjustment of their internal components. (Maintenance, check-up
and adjustment of the inside ofthe equipment are prohibited except by
maintenance specialists.)
High voltages of tens of thousands volts are so dangerous as to bring an

instantaneous death from electric shock, but even voltages of hundred volts may
sometimes lead to a death from electric shock. To prevent such an accident, make
it a rule to turn off the power switch, discharge capacitors with a wire surely
earthed on an end make sure that internal parts are no longer charged before you
touch any parts inside these devices. At the time, wearing dry cotton gloves
ensures you further to prevent such danger. It is also a necessary caution to put
one of your hands in the pocket and not to use your both hands at the same time.
It is also important to select a stable foothold always to prevent additional injuries

once you were shocked by electricity. If you were injured from electric shock,
disinfect the burn sufficiently and get it taken care of promptly.
• What to do in case of electric shock

When finding a victim of electric shock, tum off the power source and earth the
circuit immediately.
If it is impossible to turn off the circuit, move the victim away promptly using
insulators such as dry wood plate and cloth without touching the victim directly.
In case of electric shock, breathing may stop suddenly if current flows to the
respiration center in the brain. If the shock is not so strong, artificia l respiration
may recover breathing. When shocked by electricity, the victim will come to look
very bad with weak pulse or without beating, resulting in unconsciousness and
rigidity. In this case, it is necessary to perform an emergency measure
immediately.
[.JRC ] !Japan Radio Co.,l'id.

7ZPRD0730
+++ FIRST-AID TREATMENTS +++
* First-aid treatments
As far as the victim of electric shock is not in dangerous condition, do not move
him and practice artificia l respiration on him immediately. Once started, it should
be continued rhythmically.
(I) Do not touch the victim confusedly as a result of the accident, but the
rescuer may also get an electric shock.
(2) Tum off the power source calmly and move the victim away quietly from
the electric line.
(3) Call a physician or ambulance immediately or ask someone to call a doctor.
(4) Lay the victim on thi s back and loosen his necktie, clothes, belt, etc.
(5)
a. Examine the victim's pulse.
b. Examine his heartbeat bringing your ear close to his heart.
c. Examine hi s breathing bringing the back of your hand or your face

close to his face.
d. Check the size of the pupils of his eyes.
(6) Open the victim's mouth and take out artificial teeth, cigarette or chewing
gum if any. Keep his mouth open, stretch his tongue and insert a towel or
the like in his mouth to prevent the tongue from suffocating. (If it is hard to
open his mouth due to set teeth, open it with a screwdriver and insert a towel
in this mouth.)
(7) Then, wipe his mouth so that foaming mucus does not accumulate inside.
ii
......
----------------------------------
*When pulse is beating but breathing has stopped
(Mouth-to-mouth resp iration) Fig 1.
(1) Tilt the victim's head back as far as this face looks back. (A pillow may be
inserted hi s neck.)
(2) Push his jaw upward to open his throat wide (to spread his airway).
(3) P inch the victim's nostrils and take a deep breath, block his mouth
completely with yours and blow into his mouth strongly. Take a deep breath
again and blow into his mouth. Continue this 10 to 15 times a minutes
(blocking his nostri ls).
(4) Carefully watch that he has recovered ill s natural breathing and atop
practicing artificial respiration.
(5) If it is difficult to open the victim's mouth, insert a rubber or vinyl tube into
one of his nostrils and blow into it blocking the other nostril and hi s mouth
completely.
(6) When the victim recovers consciousness, he may try to stand up suddenly,
but Jet him lie calmly and serve him with a cup of hot coffee or tea and keep
him warm and quiet. (Never give him alcoholic drinks.)
Method of mouth-to-mouth respiration by raising hea

(1 )Raise the victim's head. Support
his forehead with one of your hand
and his neck with the other hand. CD
When you tilt his head backward , the

victim , in most cases, opens his
mouth to the air. This makes mouth-
to mouth respiration easy.
(2)Cover his mouth as widely as

possible with yours and press you r
cheek against his nose 0
or, pinch his nostrils with your fingers

to prevent air from leaking. Q)
(3)Biow into his lungs. Continue

blowing into his mouth until his breast
swells. Blow into his mouth as quickly
as possible for the first 10 times.
Fig 1. Mouth-to mouth respiration
iii I..JRC I aapon. Radio Co., .l'id.

*When both pulse and breathing have stopped
Perform the (Cardiac massage) Fig 2. and (Mouth-to-mouth respiration) Fig 1.
When no pulse has come not to be felt, his pupils are open and no heartbeat is
heard, cardiac arrest is supposed to have occurred and artificial respiration must
be perfonned.
( 1) Place your both hands, one hand on the other, on the lower one thjrd area of
hi s breastbone and compress his breast with your e lbows applying your
weight on his breast so that it is dented about 2cm (Repeat compressing his
breast 50 times or so a minutes). (Cardiac massage)
(2) In case of one rescuer,
Repeat cardiac massages about 15 times and blow into his mouth 2 times
quickly, and repeat this combination.
In case of two rescuers,
One person repeats cardiac massages 15 times w hile the other person blow
into his mouth twice, and they shall repeat thjs combination. (Perform the
cardiac massage and mouth-to-mouth respiration)
(3) Examine his pupils and his pulse sometimes. When the both have retumed
to normal, stop the artificial respiration, serve him with a cup of hot coffee
or tea and keep him warm and calm while watching him carefully. Commit
the victim to a medical specialist depending on hi s condition. (Never give
him alcoholic drinks.) To let him recover from the mental shock, it is
necessary for persons concemed to understand his situations and the
necessary treatment.
Fig 2. Cardiac massage
[~RC ] 8apan. Radio Co., .lid. iv

----------------------------------
PREFACE
Thank you very much for purchasing the JRC marine radar equipment, JMA-
9172-SA.
This equipment is a marine radar equipment designed to obtain safe operation of

marine ships.
This equipment consists of a radar signal transmitter-receiver unit, a LCD display

unit and a scanner unit as its mau1 units.
• Before operating the equipment, be sure to read this instruction manual

carefully for correct operation.
• Maintain this instruction manual so that operators can refer to it at anytime.
Refer to this manual when any inconvenience or defect occurs.
v [.JRC) f)apon Radio Co.,.lid.

e Before Operation e
Pictorial Indication
Vari ous pictorial indication s are included in thi s manual and are shown on these
equipment so that you can operate them safety and correctly and prevent any
danger to you and/or to other persons and any damage to your prop erty during
operation. Such indications and their meanings are as fo llows.
Please understand them before you read this manual:
This indication is shown where incorrect

& DANGER equipment operation due to negligence may
cause death or serious injuries.

ill WARNING supposed to be in danger of being killed or
seriously injured if this indication is neglected
and these equipment are not operated correctly.
& cAUTION supposed to be injured or any property damage
is supposed to occur if this indication is
neglected and these equipment are not
operated correctly.
Examples of Pictorial Indication
The 6 mark represents CAUT ION (incl uding DANGER and

WARNfNG). Detailed contents of CAUTION ("Electric
S hock" in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark.
Electric Shock
The 0 mark represents prohibition. Detailed contents of the
®
Disassembling Prohibited
prohibited action ("Disassembling Prohibited" in the example
on the left.) is shown in the mark .
Prohibited
The e mark represents instruction.
Disconnect the
0
Instruction
Detailed contents of the instruction ( "Disconnect the power
plug " in the example on the left.) is shown in the mark.
power plug
Warn ing Label
There is a warning label on the top cover of the equipment.
Do not try to remove, break or modify the label.
[.JRC] 8 apan. Radic,Co.,.fld. vi

----------------------------------
e PRECAUTIONS e
ilioANGER
Never conduct inspection or repair work of equipment
components.
Inspection or repair work by uncertified personnel may
result in fire hazard or electrocution.
For inspection and repair work of equipment
When conducting maintenance, make sure to turn the
main power off.Failure to comply may result in
electrocution.
Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment.

Especially when a rectifier is used, make sure to turn it
off since voltage is still outputted from the rectifier even
after the indicator and the radar are turned off. Failure to
comply may result in equipment failure, or death or
serious injury due to electric shock.
When conducting maintenance work on the scanner,
make sure to turn its main power off.Failure to comply
may result in electrocution or injuries.
vii [..JRC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.ftd.

& oANGER
Make sure to turn off the scanner safety switch. Failure to
8 comply may result in injuries caused by physical contact

with the rotating scanner.
& wARNING
Never directly touch the internal components of the
scanner or indicator. Direct contact with these high-
voltage components may cause electrocution. For
maintenance, inspection, or adjustment of equipment
To contact our sales department, branch offices, branch
shops, and sales offices:
Please refer to the "Office List" at the end of the
document.
Do not get close to the radiant section of the scanner. It
is a rotating part, and it may cause injuries if it suddenly
starts rotating and consequently hits the body. It is
recommended that the radiant section be installed at a
high place such as on the roof of the wheelhouse, on the
flying bridge, on the trestle, or on the radar mast so that
no one can get close to it. When any work must be done
on the scanner, make sure to turn the safety switch off.
[.JRC] f)apan Radio Co.,l'Jd. viii

----------------------------------
&wARNING
Microwave radiation level:
Keep away from a scanner when it is transmitting.
The high level of microwave is radiated from the front
face of the scanner specified below. The microwave
exposure at close range could result in injuries
(especially of the eyes).
Make sure to install the scanner at a place higher than

human height.
will have adverse effects on the human body. When it is
necessary to get close to the scanner for maintenance or
inspection purposes, make sure to turn the indicator
power switch to "OFF" or "STBY."
When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn
off the power so that the power supply to the equipment
is completely cut off.
Some equipment components can carry electrical current
even after the power switch is turned off, and conducting
maintenance work without unplugging the power
connector may result in electrocution, equipment failure,
or accidents.
ix [..JRC l aopan. Radio Co.,.ltd.

&wARNING
When cleaning the display screen, do not wipe it too
strongly with a dry cloth. Also, do not use gasoline or
thinner to clean the screen. Failure to comply will result
in damage to the screen surface.
Do not change MBS Level/Area unless absolutely
necessary.
Incorrect adjustment will result in deletion of nearby
target images and thus collisions may occur resulting in
death or serious injuries.
8 insulate the batteries by attaching a piece of adhesive

tape on the + and - terminals. Failure to comply may
cause heat generation, explosion, or fire when the
batteries get shorted out.
&cAUTION
Use the radar only as a navigation aid. The final
8 navigation decision must always be made by the

operator him/herself. Making the final navigation decision
based only on the radar display may cause accidents
such as collisions or running aground.
[ JRC J 3opan Radio Co., .f'Jd. X

----------------------------------
& cAUTION
Use Target Tracking (TT) function only as a navigation
8 aid. The final navigation decision must always be made

by the operator him/herself. Making the final navigation
decision based only on tracking target information may
cause accidents.
Tracking target information such as vector, target
numerical data, and alarms may contain some errors.
Also, targets that are not detected by the radar cannot be
acquired or tracked.
radar 'display may cause accidents such as collisions or
running aground.
A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is
8 instantaneously interrupted during operation of the radar.

In this case, the power should be turned on again.
When using the [AUTO SEA] function , never set the

from the sea surface at close range.
Detection of not only echoes from waves but also targets
such as other ships or dangerous objects will become
inhibited.
level.
When using the [AUTO RAIN] function, never set the
from the rain or snow at close range.
When using the [AUTO RAIN] function , make sure to
level.
xi [.JRC ] gopan Radio Co.,.lid.

&cAUTION
When setting a guard zone, make sure to properly adjust
8 gain, sea-surface reflection suppression level, and rain/

snow reflection suppression level so that the optimal
target images are always on the radar screen. The guard
zone alarm will not be activated for targets undetected by
the radar, and it may result in accidents such as
collisions.
The simulation function is used exclusively for deciding
whether or not target tracking is properly operating.
Therefore, never use this function unless you wish to
check target tracking operations.
Note especially that, if this function is used during actual
navigation, simulated targets are displayed and may
become confused with other actual targets. Therefore,
never use this function during actual navigation.
Optimal values have been set for VD LEVEL and
CONSTANT; therefore, never change their values unless
absolutely necessary. Failure to comply may result in
accidents that would lower target tracking performance.
Make sure to shut off the main power before replacing
8 parts. Failure to comply may result in electrocution or

equipment failure.
[.JRC] 8apan Radio Co., .lid. xii

...
...
----------------------------------
&cAUTION
Make sure that two or more staff member work together
8 when replacing the LCD. If only one person attempts to

replace the LCD, he/she may drop it and become injured.
Do not directly touch the inverter circuit of the LCD

display with a bare hand since high voltage temporarily
remains in the circuit even after the main power is shut
off.
Failure to comply may result in electrocution.
personnel.
Incorrect settings may result in unstable operation.

failure.
personnel.
Failure to comply may result in accidents or equipment
failure.
failure.
Do not change the quantization level settings unless
absolutely necessary. If set at an inappropriate value, the
target acquisition or target tracking function deteriorates,
and this may lead to accidents.
xiii [.JRC I 8apan Radio Co.,.lid.

The Mounting Point of the Warning Label
om:J 0
h _,....__ il
0
I I
Ill
• 0 0
~ DO ~
Warn ing Label / ~ ~ D
0000000000000000 0000000000000000
0 0
NCD-9170 Di splay Unit
W arning Label
• QBJ • . /
/ .
"
.
["J""""f
.
c::::J
-=:.
-=:. •
. /
-=:.
-=:.
-=:.
. .. . • .
.. .. .
1!::::=======::!..1@
• •
Front face Back face
NWZ-178 Monitor Unit
[JRC I 8opan Radio Co., ..ltd. xiv

......
----------------------------------
0
ooD o a
Warning Label
0 0
I B
0 0
NDC-1478 Radar Process Unit

(Desktop Type)
XV [.JRC] 3opanRadioCo.,.lid.
0 0 0 0
Warning
Label
0 0 0 0
NQE-3141-4A/8A lnterswitch Unit
I ~RC I 8opan RadicJ Co.,.lid. xvi

......
----------------------------------
0 0 0 0 0 0
II
NKE-1532 Scan ner Unit
xvii [..JRC l aopan Radio Co., .lid.

EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE
Scanner Unit Type N KE-1532 ( 12 feet)
Display Unit Type NCD-9170 (Stand alone type)
[.JRC ] (Japan Radio Co., ..ftd. xviii

......
----------------------------------
Interswitch Unit Type NQE-3 141-4A
Monitor Unit Type NWZ- 178 (Desktop type)
Operation Unit Type NCE-5322 (Desktop type)
xix [~RC ) 8opan.Radi.o Co., .lid.

Radar Process Unit Type NDC- 1478 (Desktop type)
DISPLAY UNIT TYPE NCD-9170T (DESKTOP TYPE)
[.JRC ] 8apan RadicJ Co., .lid. XX

......
----------------------------------
GLOSSARY
This section describes the main terms used for this equipment and general related
maritime terms.
A
AZ Acquisition/Activation zone
A zone set up by the operator in which the system should
automatically acquire radar targets and activate reported AJS targets
when entering the zone.
Activated target A target representing the automatic or manual activation of a
sleeping target for the di splay of additional information.
AIS Automatic Identification System
A system which enables ships and shore stations to obtain
identifying and navigation information about other ships at sea,
using an automated transponder.
Anti-clutter rain Rain/snow clutter suppression.
Anti-clutter sea Sea clutter suppression.
Associated target A target simultaneously representing a tracked target and a reported
AJS target having simi lar parameters (position, course, speed)
which comply with an association algorithm.
AZI AZimuth stabilization mode
B
BCRIBCT Bow Crossing Range/Bow Crossing Time
c
Cup Course up
Own ship's course is pointed to the top center of the radar display.
CCRP Consistent Common Reference Point
A location on own ship, to which all horizontal measurements such
as target range, bearing, relative course, relative speed, CPA or
TCPA are referenced, typically the conning position of the bridge.
Clutter Unwanted reflections on a radar screen, from sea surface, rain or
snow.
COG Course Over Ground
The direction of the ship's movement relative to the earth, measured
on board the ship, expressed in angular units from true north
CORREL CORRELation
xxi [ .JRC I aopon Radic Co.,.!Jd.

CPAITCPA The di stance to the Closest Point of Approachffime to the Closest
Point of Approach.
Limits are set by the operator and are related to own ship.
CTW Course Through Water
The direction of the ship's movement through the water
D
DRIFT The current velocity for manual correction or the current speed on
E
EBL Electronic Bearing Line
An electronic bearing line originated from own ship's position.
ETA Estimated Time of Arrival

G
Ground A display mode in which speed and course information are referred
stabilization to the ground, using ground track input data.
H
HOG Heading
The horizontal direction that the bow of a ship is pointing at any
instant, expressed in angular units from a reference direction.
HL Heading line
A graphic line on a radar presentation drawn from the consistent
common reference point to the bearing scale to indicate the heading
ofthe ship.
HSC High Speed Craft
Vessels which comply with the definition in SOLAS for high speed
craft
H up Head up
Own ship's heading line is always pointed to the top center of the
radar display.
IMO International Maritime Organisation

IR RADAR Interference Rejector
ISW A device to switch over two or more radar di splay units and two or
more scanners.
[.JRC] 8apanl<adkJ Co.,.ltd. xxii

.........
----------------------------------
Lost AIS target A target symbol representing the last valid position of an AIS target
before the reception of its data was lost, or its last dead-reckoned
position.
Lost tracked One for which target information is no longer available due to poor,
target lost or obscured signals.
LP Long Pulse
M
MMSI Maritime Mobile Service Identity
MOB Man OverBoard
MON Performance monitor
MP Medium Pulse
N
NM lnm= l852m
N up North up
p
PI Parallel Index line
Past positions Equally time-spaced past position marks of a tracked or AJS target
and own ship.
POSN POSitioN
PRF Pulse Repetition Frequency
The number of radar pulses transmitted each second.
PROC PROCess
Radar signal processing function
R
Radar cross- Radar cross-section of a target determines the power density
section returned to the radar for a particular power density incident on the
target
Range Rings A set of concentric circles labeled by di stance from CCRP.
Reference target A symbol indicating that the associated tracked stationary target is
used as a speed reference for the ground stabilisation
Relative speed The speed of a target relative to own ship's speed data
Relative vector A predicted movement of a target relative to own ship's motion
RM Relative Moti.on
A display on which the posi tion of own ship remains fixed, and all
targets move relative to own ship .
xxiii [ ~Rc ] 8apan.Radio Co., ..ltd.

RM(R) Relative Motion. Relative Trails.
RM(T) Relative Motion. True Trails.
ROT Rate OfTurn
Change of heading per time unit.
Route A set of waypoints.
RR Range Rings
s
Sea stabilization A display mode in which speed and course information are referred
to the sea.
Sea state Status of the sea condition due to the weather environment,
expressed as a sea state 0 for flat conditions with minimal wind, to
sea state 8 for very rough sea conditions.
SET The current direction for manual correction or the current speed on
Sleeping AIS A target indicating the presence and orientation of a vessel
target equipped with AIS in a certain location.
SOG Speed Over the Ground

The speed of the ship relative to the earth, measured on board of the
ship.
SP Short Pulse
STAB STABilization
STW Speed Through Water
The speed of the ship relative to the water surface.
T
TCPA Time to Closest Point of Approach to own ship
Test target Radar target of known characteristics used for test requirement
TM True Motion
A display across which own ship moves with its own true motion.
Trails Tracks displayed by the radar echoes of targets in the form of an
afterglow.
Trial manoeuvre A graphical simulation facility used to assist the operator to
perform a proposed maneuver for navigation and collision
avoidance purposes.
True course The direction of motion relative to ground or to sea, of a target
expressed as an angular displacement from north
True speed The speed of a target relative to ground, or to sea
[.JRC I 3opan Radio Co.,.lid. xxiv

----------------------------------
True vector A vector representing the predicted true motion of a target, showing
course and speed with reference to the ground or sea
TT Target Tracking.
A computer process of observing the sequential changes in the
position of a radar target in order to establish its motion. Such a
target is a Tracked Target.
TTG Time To Go.
Time to next waypoint.
TXRX Transmitter Receiver Unit
u
UTC Universal Time Coordinated.
The international standard of time, kept by atomic clocks around
the world.
v
VRM Variable Range Marker
An adjustable range ring used to measure the di stance to a target.
w
Waypoint A geographical location on a route indicating a event.
XXV
[.JRC ) 8apan Radio Co., .ltd.
----------------------------------
+++PRECAUTIONS BEFORE OPERATION+++ ............ ........ ... .. ..................... i
+ + + Fl RST-AID TREATMENTS ++
+ ........ ............ .. ..................... ... ... ................. ii
PREFACE ...... ........................................... ... ...... .. ............ ..................... ... ........... .... .... v
The Mounting Point of the Warning Label ..................... .. .. .......................... ...... .. ..... xiv
EQUIPMENT APPEARANCE ........................................................... ...................... xviii
GLOSSARY ...... ... .. ... ... ....... .... .. .... . ... . . ... .. . ... ....... ..... .. . ... .. .. ... . .... .. . ... .... . ... ... .. .. . .. . .. . .. xxi
SECTION 1
1.1 FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.1 Function of This System .................................................................1-1
1.2 FEATURES ............................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................1-4
SECTION 2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY ............................................................................. 2-1
2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ........................................... 2-16
SECTION 3
BASIC OPERATION
3.1 OPERATION FLOW ............................................................................... 3-1
3.1 .1 Power ON and Start the System .................................................... 3-2
3.1 .2 Observe and Adjust Video .............................................................. 3-4
3.1 .3 Acquire and Measure Data ............................................................. 3-4
3.1 .4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP ............................ 3-4
3.1.5 End the Operation and Stop the System .......................................3-5
3.2.3 Tune .................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN] ......................................................................... 3-8
3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA] ..........................................................3-9
[.JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.lid.

3.2.8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed .
3-14
Input menu .............................. ....................................................... 3-18
3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure .......................................... ............... 3-23
3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERAliON ........................................................ 3-24
3.4.1 Interference Rejection (IR) ............ ................................................ 3-24
3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH) ..................................................... ............. 3-26
3.4.7 Move Own Ship's Display Position (Off Center) .. .. ..................... 3-30
3.4.9 Zoom (x2) ....................................................................................... 3-34
3.4.1 1 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF] ....... 3-35
3.4.14 Set True Bearing ............................................................................ 3-37
3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK ...................................................................3-40
3.5.1 Display Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track) .........................3-40
3.5.7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track) ..............................3-45
[.JRC J (Japan RadicJ Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP ........................................................................... 3-48
3.6.5 Save User Map ............................................................................... 3-62
3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION ......................................................................3-68
3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence) ................................................3-69
3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint Input) 3-76
3.7.4 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm) .........3-80
3.7.5 Method of Using Route ................................................................. 3-82
3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS ...................................................................... 3-93
3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting) ................................................. 3-99
3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) ........................................................ 3-100
3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) ..........................................3-101
3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) ....................................3-104
3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2] ..........................................3-104
3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting) ............... 3-1 06
3.8.9 AUTO Backup ..............................................................................3-111
3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER] ........................................................... 3-113
3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items .....................................................3-114
3.9.3 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting) .....3-115
3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data .................................3-119
3.10 USE USER SETTING .........................................................................3-120
3.10.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting) ................................3-120
3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting) ................................3-121
[~RC ] f)opan Radio Co.,.lid.

3.11 USING CARD ..................................................................................... 3-122
3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager) ................................... 3-122
SECTION 4
4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS ..............................................................4-1
4.1.1 Using Cursor (Cursor) .................................................................... 4-2
4.1.2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings) ................................................ 4-2
4.1 .3 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL1/EBL2) ................................4-3
4.1.4 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu) .............................................4-8
4.1.6 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor ...................................4-16
4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING ....................................4-19
4.2.1 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor) ..............................4-20
Marker [EBL] [VRM] ..................................................................... 4-20
4.2.3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points ................................ ..... 4-21
SECTION 5
5.1 PREPARATION ...................... ,............................................................... 5-1
5.1 .1 Collision Avoidance ............................................................. ,.......... 5-2
5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols ................................................................... 5-5
5.1.3 Radar Display .................................................................................. 5-9
5.1.6 Setting Vectors (Vector Time) ...................................................... 5-14
[JRC] 3apanRadioCo.,.ltd.
----------------------------------
5.2.7 Operation Test (TT Test Menu) ...................................................5-22
5.3 AIS OPERATION .................................................................................. 5-27
5.3.1 Restrictions .................................................................................... 5-27
5.3.5 Displaying AIS Information [TGT OATA] ..................................... 5-29
Identical (Association Setting) ..................................................... 5-38
5.5 ALARM DISPLAY ................................................................................. 5-40
5.5.1 CPA I TCPA Alarm ......................................................................... 5-41
(New Target) ................................................................................... 5-42
5.5.4 Gyro Set Alarm .............................................................................. 5-43
5.6 TRACK FUNCTION ..............................................................................5-44
5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) .......................... 5-54
SECTION 6
[~RC l aopan Radio Co., .ltd.

6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW CLUTTER ...................... ........ 6-5
6.4 FALSE ECHOES .................................................................................... 6-9
6.5.1 Display ........................................................................................... 6-12
6.5.2 Numeric Display ............................................................................ 6-13
SECTION 7
7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION .............................................................7-1
7.1.2 GYRO 1/F Setting ............................................................................. 7-2
7.1.3 Tuning (Tune Adjustment) ............................................................. 7-5
7.1.5 Range Adjustment ........................................................................... 7-5
7.1.6 Navigator Setting (Device) ............................................................. 7-6
7.1.7 Setting of True Bearing Value ........................................................ 7-7
7.1.8 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height) ..................................... 7-7
7.1.9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting) .................................................... 7-8
7.2 SETTINGS ............................................................................................ 7-11
7 .2.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting) ....................... 7-11
7.2.6 Date Time Setting ..........................................................................7-18
7.2.7 Input Installation Information ....................................................... 7-19
7.2.8 Setting the Alarm System ............................................................. 7-19
7.2.9 Network Setting (Network) ........................................................... 7-24
7 .2.1 0 LAN Port Setting) .......................................................................... 7-27
7.3 ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................................... 7-30
7 .3.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level) ........................................ 7-30
7.3.3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS) ............... ...... 7-33
7.3.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor (SSR MON) ....................... 7-35
7.4.1 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch) .......................................7-38
[.JRC ] 8apan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
7.4.5 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update) .............7-43
SECTION 8
8.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE ....................................................................8-1
8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1532 .................................................................8-2
8.2.2 Display Unit (NCD-9170) ................................................................8-4
8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS ..................................................8-11
8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement .................................. 8-12
8.4.2 Replacement of Motor ................................................................... 8-12
8.4.3 Replacement of 23inch LCD ........................................................ 8-17
8.4.4 Replacement of Backup Battery ..................................................8-20
SECTION 9
9.1 FAULT FINDING ..................................................................................... 9-1
9.1 .1 List of Alarms and other Indications .............................................9-1
9.1 .2 Operation Checking ........................................................................9-6
9.1.3 Fuse Checking ................................................................................. 9-6
9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING ...........................................................................9-7
9.2.1 Circuit Block to be Repaired .......................................................... 9-7
9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE ...................................................................... 9-9
9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts ...........................................9-9
9.3.2 When you Request for Repair ........................................................ 9-9
9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance ..........................................................9-9
SECTION 10
DISPOSAL
[JRC I aapan Racl.kJ Co., .ltd.

SECTION 11
SPECIFICATION
11.1 JMA-9172-5A TYPE RADAR ............................................................... 11-1
11.2 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1532) ...............................................................11-2
11.3 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-9170) ................................................................. 11-3
11.4 Target Tracking Function ................................................................... 11-6
11.5 AIS FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 11-7
Appendix A
A.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................ A-1
A.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................... A-1
A .2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION ................................................................ A-3
A .2.1 Operation Flow ............................................................................... A-3
A.2.3 Change of Connection Pattern (with 2 Display Units) ................ A-6
A.2.5 Operating Connection Pattern Files (File Operations) ............... A-8
A.3 REFERENCE ....................................................................................... A-1 0
A .3.1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern ................... A-1 0
A .3.2 Notes on Changing Connection Pattern .................................... A-1 0
A.3.3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit ................................... A-1 0
A .3.4 Setting at Installation ................................................................... A-11
Appendix 8
DRAWINGS
8.1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... 8-1
8 .1.1 NCD-9170 ........................................................................................ 8-2
8 .1.2 NCD-9170T ...................................................................................... 8 -3
8.1.3 NWZ-178-R ...................................................................................... 8-4
8.1.4 NWZ-178-RT .................................................................................... 8 -5
8.1.5 NCE-5322-R ..................................................................................... 8-6
8.1.6 NCE-5322-RT ................................................................................... 8 -7
8.2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit ............................................. 8-8
8.3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit .................................................. 8 -9
[JRC ] 3apan Radio Co.,J.'id.

----------------------------------
B.4 Primary Power System Diagram ................................... .................... B-1 0
B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit ............................................... ......... B-11
B.5.1 NKE-1532 ...................................................................................... B-12
B.6.1 NKE-1532 (AC11 OV) ...................................................................... B-14
B.6.2 NKE-1532 (AC220V) ...................................................................... B-15
B.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ............................................... B-16
B.7.1 JMA-9172-SA ................................................................................ B-17
B.7.2 NCD-9170T .................................................................................... B-18
B.8 GYRO IfF ............................................................................................. B-19
B.9 Inter Switch Unit ................................................................................. B-21
Appendix C
Menu Index
C.1 Main ....................................................................................................... C-1
C.2 PI ............................................................................................................ C-5
C.3 TT ........................................................................................................... C-7
C.4 AIS ......................................................................................................... C-8
C.5 AZ. ................................ .................................. ........................................ C-9
C.6 Track .................................................................................................... C-1 0
C.7 Route ................................................................................................... C-11
C.8 U.Map .................................................................................................. C-12
['-'RC] f)opan.Radio Co., .ltd.

1
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL
2 KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS
BASIC OPERATION
3
4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING
5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS

6
7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION
8 COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE AND

ADJUSTMENT
9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES

SERVICE
10 DISPOSAL
SPECIFICATIONS
11
Appendix
_ _ ________
....___ -- -- _ _ _ __ _ _ _ _ _ _ __ ____,
SECTION 1

1.1 FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 FEATURES ............................................................................................. 1-2
1.3 CONFIGURATION .................................................................................. 1-4
[.J RC ] dCifJI'P'- RadiD Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.1 FUNCTIONS
----------------------------------
FUNCTIONS
This equipment is a high-performance radar equipment consisting of a scanner

unit, a transmitter-receiver unit and a high resolution color LCD display unit.
This equipment complies with the performance standard oflMO.
1.1.1 Function of This System
The JMA-9172-SA is a color radar system designed to comply with the

international standards of the IMO.The main function s include:
• sensitivity adjustment
• sea clutter and rain/snow clutter suppression
• interference rej ection
• bearing and range measurement using a cursor, fixed/variable range markers,
and electronic beating line
• colored own track display(? colors)
• NAY line and marker displays
• TM (True Motion) presentation
• self-diagnostic facilities
• radar performance monitoring (Performance Monitor)
• Target Tracking functions (manual/automatic, target acquisition and tracking,
vector and trail displays, Trial maneuver and alarm displays)
• 8-unit switchover (Interswitch) function (option)
1- 1 [ ~RC ] 8apan Rt:idUJ Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION> 1.2 FEATURES
----------------------------------
FEATURES
Realization of Large, Easy-to-see Screen with High Resolution
The 23.1-inch color LCD 1 with high resolution can display radar images of 320
mm or more in diameter. Even short-range targets can also be displayed as h igh-
resolution images.
Target Detection by Latest Signal Processing Technology
The system employs the latest digital signal processing technology to eliminate
un desired clutter fi-om the radar video signals that are obtained from the receiver
with a wide dynamic range, thus improving the target detection.
Target Tracking (TT) Function based on Advanced Technology
The target acquisition and tracking perfom1ance is enhanced by the use of the
fastest DSP and tracking algorithm. So stable operation in target tracking under
clutter is ensured.
• Acquisition and tracking of 100 targets.

• Hazardous conditions are represented by shapes and colors of symbols as well
as sounds.
• Trial maneuvering functions provided.
• Tracks of up to 20 target ships can be stored with a maximum of I ,500 points
for each of them, and displayed distinguished by using seven different colors.
Overlay of Radar Images, Coastlines, and Own Ship's Track
As well as operator-created NAY lines and own ship's tracks/ARPA tracks, which
is stored on the memory card can be superimpose-displayed with radar images and
radar trails in all di splay modes including the head-up mode.
Easy Operation with GUI
All the radar functions can be easily controlled by simply using the trackball and
two switches to operate the buttons shown on the radar display.
1.The displayed resolution corresponds to SXGA(1280x1024).
[.JRC ] dt:ifXin Radio Co., .ltd. 1-2

JMA-9172-SA lnstruc!Jon Manual > 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1 2 FEATURES
----------------------------------
Improved Day/Night Mode
Five types of background colors are available in Day/Dusk/N ight mode (total 5
background colors). Each background color can be reproduced to be suited for the
user's operating environment by simple key operation. The radar echoes and a
variety of graphics can also be represented in different colors, ensuring easy-to-
see displays.
Compact Design and Low Power Consumption
Since an LCD has been implemented as the display device, the weight of the
display is greatly reduced and the power consumption is lowered in comparison
with the conventional radar equipment.
Self-diagnostic Program Incorporated
The Self-diagnostic program always monitors all the functions of the system. If
any function deteriorates, an alarm message wi ll appear on the radar display and
an alarm sounds at the same time. Even when the system is operating, the
functionality test can be carried out. (except on some functions)
Performance Monitor
The radar performance (transmitted output power and receiving sensiti vity) can
appear on the radar display.
Easy lnterswitch Operation (Option)
If an interswitch unit (option) is connected, up to eight JMA-9 172-SA radar can

be switched over by performing simpl e operation.
Up to 2 radars: NQE-3 141 -2A is needed in Display Unit.
Up to 4 radars: NQE-3 141-4A is needed separately.
Up to 8 radars: NQE-31 41 -BA is needed separately.
Various Functions
• RADAR Trails (Other ship's track display)

• TM (True Motion) display
• Head-up/North-up/Course-up display
• Own ship's track display
• Auto-acquisition Zone function
1- 3 I~RC I 8apan Rodic Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-5A Instruction Manual> 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION> 1.3 CONFIGURATION
----------------------------------
CONFIGURATION
Table1-1 :Specified of scanner, and categories of ship/craft for SOLAS V
Type of Radar Antenna type Transmitted Band Rate of Category

Output Power rotation
JMA-9172-SA 12ft Slotted Antenna 250W s 24rpm CAT 1
The class of emission: PON , QON
Table1-2:Radar Configuration and Ship's Mains
Type of Radar Scanner Unit Display Ship' s Main

Unit
JMA-9172-SA NKE-1532 NCD-9170 AC100 to 115V, or

AC220 to 240V 50/60Hz
1cp
Notes:
1) The drive motor for the scanner unit is available in AC100-115V

or AC220-240V type for NKE-1532 . Please specify the motor type
when ordering.
2) The scanner unit can be equipped with a deicing heater as an

option, and '-D' shall be suffixed to the type name. (e.g . NKE-
1532-D).
3) When using the ship's mains of AC440V as the radar power

source, a step-down transformer shall be used.
4) The desktop option is available for display NCD-9170. It has a

separate structure consisting of the following :
Monitor Unit NWZ-178

Radar Process Unit NDC-1478
Operation Unit NCE-5322
[JRC ] gapon Radic Co., Ed. 1-4

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1 GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
Fig 1-1 : Outline Drawing of Scanner Unit, Type NKE-1532
Fig 1-2: Outline Drawing of Display Unit, Type NCD-9170
Fig 1-3: Outline Drawing of Monitor Unit, Type NWZ- 178 (Desktop type option)
Fig 1-4: Outline Drawing of Radar Process Unit, Type NDC-14 78 (Desktop type option)
Fig 1-5: Outline Drawing of Operation Unit, Type NCE-5322 (Desktop type option)
Fig 1-6: Outline Drawing of Jnterswitch Unit., Type NQE-3141-4A (Option)
Fig 1-7: Outline Drawing of lnterswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-SA (Option)
1-5 [ ~RC I aopan Radio Co.,.ltd.

I <...
::
I 1'
~
.....
I
I
b:
)>
I ..
3'
"f
c:
g
I 0
:>
I .,
::
,
ce·
I
:>
c:
!!!.
v
I ~
-- -
(;)
(I'IUC
~
fEotQoll
.
~.u
~n:-
I m
z
m
r· ~
l a .O.'l
'
6 3) •1 .:.s )>
:z
ll
12t
!20
oc
•l!i
&25 ,, 0
m
0
40: IJOO a
..,"'ol.
1\X:(J
c
® t3 'ij
21,_ u. ::
m
z
-i
()
"11t ""~ llrt-t:t 0
::
_llll
~
1
_!_&!
_1.
6 ""til~
t1
1tR
~
'0
0
(/)
:::;
'1
l1f
w
'~
•\5
t},'J ,, 6
z
'.
l AO
IJ~
t'Jl0
~
tf
•1 v
~
:..
20JO oro .., aJ
m
X
-i
m
;o
-
IIAII .wROX. no !I ~our 01'11010 6
;o
UIIT
0
~
OOLOil loNl'iiiiA W!tJ1
COI.Oil I'Bl!!IT/It. lilliE z
G)
(/)
'l. TE •...brr.!r r:r

.,,._ l•t·hrirtt'•H ...
cd>t 9crd Is ru oh.e 1!: du-9e.
II
n
I
I
...-
a nur
..(.,~ , ... fl
1!1
~318-7
S::::A\J ER UNIT OJTLI E JRAVviNG 1\JKE-'537.
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION> 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
11
0
~
>< .::
~ ~
~ ~ fi: 9
) \ ~- '11: j
"'"' t:
~
:.!:.
:.l
•• • ~
"! C)
-. ;
z
3::
<(
0::
0
I
' w
~
. • >j
-,.........-...
C:o ....J
f-
-.
:::)
~ 0
. ;:
I-
z
:::)
8 >-
0! ) .• ,
•
1
o
~
ooo.o_j'J
!1l .
r JI <(
l[
l/)
~ l I
0
n.
Fig 1-2: Outline Drawing of Display Unit, Type NCD-9170
1- 7 I.JRC] gapan Radio Co.,.f'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
r-'
i~i~ ....
-. .... .
-":!Itt
'= ':1
Ti»
:;c "'2 -"' M
.lg~~ ~
II' c!!!
U>
c-o
r• >< 1t
ldl "' "'"'
!;!-;; :;;~ +l'fl'l!
-
llllcx
~ .. "'en~ ~:g ~'ft'a
0
P'.
"-
~ ~
.,c-o
.. ~
~~
...
~"' ~1'! ~§ !I!! ~e
)'-G J;l6j
a
~~
"!
r en
~
en
a~
" ~M .. l'l
og
"'~ ~~
~
;;. ~ .. ~ ~ ~ !! ~ ~ ~
1_....
·~·
IOZ~I
C)
6
3
<(
1{1091 0:::
0
- w
6
_J
1-
::J
0
t=:
~
z
::J
0:::
0
!:::
z
0
~
I
u
6
..-
C')
N
@
@ (J
Fig 1-3: Outline Drawing of Monitor Unit, Type NWZ-178 (Desktop type option)
[.JRC) gopan.RadicJ Co., .ltd. 1-8

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 1.GENERAl AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
id§
~g!l~
"'
~ -~ N
~ ':1
'I! If$
T-1!1>
i~
"'
~ -........ ':1
II' cl!l
.,
0
w J.,
i~~~~
! jf'
~ta ~
"''il-;; "'"'
'i:!:t ::I'll~
..fill
11!01>
~
"'
'ij:;; !I"'
.. !:1 ::l'!i~
><
0
p::
""~
J:
0
M
1--
~ ~ ~
i!"' j;l§ ~~
~~ ~-- R fl 6 a ~~
~~
~
-It!
r
a;i
"
OR
~ ... "':'il 1'1,.
~u
IQ
*" ... ;r;~ ., R @ 6 a~

"'
~ ~
1-
•• • t!!
~£ 'II: I 1161 _I
c;zrz
~---- "
1=4 C)
-' ~I z
~~
I":!
~ -~ ~ 3
<(
1:5~ ~i
(Q/ - ;z o
...... ~~ ••
0:::
0
~~-
Cl.-(
u. - LUC
Cl
• • • 0
•• w
~f.;- -"' ..."'
:z! "
wl
$!~
• §~.i_ • 6
_J
~~ ~ !C f-
~';'
(.)
!'---. :::::l
~~ • •
0
ii: • t=
'i! • • • •
~ ~- ' - ' z
• • :::::>
• •
·- • (/)
(/)
w
u
0
0:::
o_
0:::
<(
0
<(
0:::
0
e e
0 0 0
Fig 1-4: Outline Drawing of Radar Process Unit, Type NDC-1478 (Desktop type option)
1-9 I~RC ) 8apan Radio Co., .lid.

.__________________________________________________________________________________________________ ------- -
I <-
3:
~
I ~ 1>
I .....
"'(n
y "'Tl
<0'
~
I )>
3'
I ~
g.
..•
I 0
(}1 :>
~ C.oll .E WTLET 3:
f.
R.ATE/
0 : •-t~ol
Ql
:>
~~WUH~
c:: c:
~ 0~
QJTLtoE F'ER~ISSB.E
OJTL>E
OWE.• SO<H.
PER!o<ISSB.E
~Tt<O
I !!!.
v
(!) •-•·• ~ · Nt•»IN0.11 11ll~l
CEV\ATO.S 8t~~ : ~
~
OVER TO
0
CJ J B 10.5 m
~
ii1 8 ll ±1 10 .~
z
m
~ e~[ )~
~ 30 120 ±t5
~
s·
(Q
120 400 I :<25 ±1 ,....
)>
400 1000 I ±4 I ±2
z
....
0 'COO 2000 I :6 I tJ 0
:~~ 0 ~
200) 1000 I ±B I m
~
(!) I~ 0
c
15
ii1
g: 88 : 88 \a tl-'f'!it
lI f!.Mt,J: -~'1:1
3:
m
z
-i
~
0
;::,
~
_......
0 B 8eaea V · I U.t
! 3
I
lO
~n
I
:II
1lOI
I
I
ft3.
lll.5
±1
±t5
1':&1
±0.5
(')
0
3:
"0
0
en
.,
-<
"b
(!)
<::
tOO
tfr 1lO
(01)
1000
2000
1llO
ace
20001
lOOO!
I .!2.5
±4
jfi
±B
±1
±2
±3
I :3
0
z
~
v
() ~
r;n m
Ol X
w -i
m
1\J ;o
1\J
MASS APPROX. 3. 5 kg 0
0
~ \ I .. I UNIT mm
;o
0
~z
JOO !FJXNO PI"'CHI
~
l all~·~l
~
"b
(!)
4 161PTH 5
4 "'~' ·1 115
C">t:R ::U.!Jt'(JT ~P'l8.t
U ~ \1.5•> tUU"'ll •••& IJ 3. 5 kg
mm
Gl
en
.g
g:
-2.
OPERATION UNIT OUTLINE DRAWING

"'T1 '-
3::
<0"
.....
I
~
-.j
~
0 ~"'
-
c::
~
(I) ---
360
Dm.~!
Ct.E><SO<S
f'ERII5SIU
OJ1'tfl£
OlhEJoi~AL
OEVIATDIS
.........
f'Ett.<SSB..£
CM:HSD'iAI..
OEV~liNS
5"
~
g.
330 DVEI' 10 ::>
CJ
Q3 3
6
6
30
10.5
tl 10.5
.,::>3::
~ - ...
s· ICI.""!
~
30 120 itS
,, c
!!!.
!Q
.• . lil 120
400 IXIO
400 f2.5
t4 t2
v
-
~
0 1l00 2000 16 G>

....... t3
m
2000 4000
5"
(i)
"' z
m
..... Cil i!:! Ei ~

~ f!ol!'flt 1'1111>i ll.~'lli )>
z
..... ~ t-8A ~JT
IIWI: IU1ll!
0
..... ::;,-
~P.ATE
3
• t0.5 I 0m
§= 0 • •
:Jl
:Jl
120
t1
ttS
t05
I c=u
._;;: 1211 <m f2.5 11 3::
-
'llD UlO 1.4 f2 I m z
~ UlO rooo t6
"tj tJ I ()-i
(I)
<:
4000
"' I .,03::
ynCRNA SENI-G.OSS TEX.--
0 l · N4."~•.:Mll
I 0
rn
I
(/)
=i
w
~
..... MASS APPROX. 6 k& I 6
~ UNIT
z
..... mm I v
I ~
~
I :,.
):.
••.fit
i
¥l 6
....... I ~-i
~ mm m
I ::0
g: 6;o
2.. I 0
r. SCNOE5084 IN TERSWITCH UNIT OUTLINE DRAWING NOE-3141-4A

I
~
I G)z
.:~
(/)
I
I
~ I
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1 4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
<!
§~~~ ~ ':1 f= "''il :;~ ':?
co
..--I
~bg •"'
- N
"'<!"
..--
I~i~
~ (T)
I
~6 J~ ...,.., 11 ..
l'·IIC>
.., ~ w
~ ... ~~ -:I'll~ 'i!-;; ~~ -;,~~
g: 0
~-· ""< ~
~
i; ~
z
e ., j;!g
6! ~~ I'-m j;l
!1
g §B u
:::~ "'r "'"'
~~ ~M "'j;! g~
~~
I)
4.
;"
...
m j;l
!l!:l u ~ ~ =:1
0
z
3
<!
IY
0
w
6
_J
I-
~
0
t:::
z
~
I
OWl
u
1-
3
(/)
IY
• w
1-
6
• ol
/
-~~~
i
.. !
•r;~:
~i t. ;n ~q~
~ >! •
~~~ L{}
tO
0
L{}
w
0
z
~
Fig 1-7: Outline Drawing of lnterswitch Unit, Type NQE-3141-BA (Option)
[.JRC) gapan,Radit:J Co.,.fid. 1-12

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.4 EXTERIOR DRAWINGS
----------------------------------
,..._
liil ;; -. - iE ::1 ;..'.:. ~

~
(T)
I
w
"lb§(! il"~ ::":'f?'9 ii ~-;.t';; ... , 0
z
'~,.!:
ij i ~~,.
!~U9
~eu
i .-
:· ..... ~
I! I
Ill
T1101Z
Oil ... - I
'"
·rn
• • ~<:;:l 1::
J
C>
~
<{
0::
0
w
z;
_J
t-
a
r
!::::
z
~;I ::::>
~~
~
t-
6
~
0 0
(.)
~ !
"'
D
"'
1j;! $
0::
~
~
..
~
·J "'
l
l ~;I
,~
ll
..
~
0
<0
<..>
"'<..>w
7.
~
1 - 13 j.JRC] dopan.Radio Co.,.i'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
['-'RC] dOfXi"' Radit:J Co.,.ltd. 1-14

JMA- 9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND E QUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1. 5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
NKE-1532
SCANNER UNIT
C IRCUIT BREAKER
(SHIP YARD SUPPLY)
lL--- ------,----,.-- --------l
I
r..~
c ~~
oo-::-:
v,60 , -III
:::::H:- (5A) I
~1------~II I
I~ 200W ~ /
0 8 /1 kV-OP YCYS- 1 5
~AIN
*
r - 1 _ 4 -- - - - - 1
1?
,N_B_L----S-,1 S HIP 'S
f01 HEATER
STEPDOWN AC220V.60HLI e
TRANSFORMER
14 CORES CO MP OSITE CABLE

H-2695 11 0056
MAX 23 dJ (JRC S UPPL Y)
NCD-9170
DISPLAY UNIT
GYR0 -~2~50~V~-~M~P~Y~C~Y~S-7~-----~J
LOG IN-01131 -~2~50=-V
~·...;Tc..;T_;Yc..;C:..;S:..-...;1_ _ _ _ _ _ _~
l 0 . 6/1 k V - DPYCY -6 SHIP ' S MAIN
AC220V .60HL1e.800VA
DGPS -~2~50=-V
~·_;Tc..;Tc..;Yc..;C:..;S
:..·...;1_ _ _ _ _ __ 0 . 6/1 kV-DPYCYS -1 5 SHIP'S MAIN
101' POWER fAll ALARM
V DR -~ 3 ,;:c
C...;
-2 :..V;...;;x,;:c
5_,(.;.;M;.;.A.;.;X~3,;:c
O;.;.m..,
) _______. - 0C2.tV(BA nERY)_I w
18 CORES CO MPOSITE CABLE
H-2695111153
RADAR,..,,. swncHI -~M.!:!A,::.
X_Iu.B~ . o"-l
111> r.J R:1
1!....1.:!.: l-'c
~s~ L-------"'
u:.t;.l;
P IP..;.
L.J..
Y
250V- T TYCS- 4
ECDISIJAN·901MJ H -26951 10 006 (JRC SUPP LY )

{ H-2668510019 (JR C SUPP LY) SPARE
ALERM MON ITORING SYSTEM 250V- MPYC - 4

INfARESTI~6~~~~~~ ---=
2.;:c5.;:c
0 ..;..
V_; - T.;.;.T;_Y
..;..C
.;:cS
_ .-.;..4__________________. -
CONNING DISPLAY !JAN 701-<:0NI ---=.;:c.;:c..:._;_;_:..;:..=--;__------------------"
AIS ---= 2,;:c
5,;:c
D..;_
V_-T;_T;_Y;...C
.:..S
.:..-_4;__________________,

equipment.(Ex. Radiotelephone. Communi cations receiver and direction finder, etc. )
1 - 15 !.JRC] dOfXll'- Radio Co.,.i'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 1.GENERAL AND EQUIPMENT COMPOSITION > 1.5 GENERAL SYSTEM DIAGRAMS
----------------------------------
(-JRC] 3apan Rt:idio Co., .ltd. 1-16

SECTION 2
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL
PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF
SOFTWARE BUTTONS
1
11111 11 " ·•11111 111
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF CONTROL PANEL KEYS AND FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS
2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY ............... .............................................................. 2-1
2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS ...........................................2-16
['"'RC] 8apan. Radic Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONT ROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
NAMES OF DISPLAY
Example of screen display
In this example, the screen is divided into a number of areas and the names in
each area are indicated.

Own ships
·, - information
~
- -- Target
tracking(TT) I
AIS information
Digital information
Menu
Brilliance/
Display information
Alarm
of the display of the display
2- 1
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
PPI
Automatic acquisition'
activation zone Association target Own ship s sy mbol
Ship' s heading
marker
Past position
Ship's
heading line
AIS target number
AIS target symbol

Trac ked target
vector
AIS target vector
Radar trails
Tracked target
sym bol
Parallel index lines
v
Other ship s trac k
V RM1 EBL1 CPA ring
[JRC] 8apanRadioCo.,.ftd. 2-2

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2 CONTROL PAN EL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Range scale Optimum performance indication
Range rings display On I Off

Range rings interval
Transmission pulse length
Motion mode true I relative

Radar trail true I relative
Stability mode
Off center
On I Off
Azimuth display mode
Transmission I standby
S band /
lnterswitch connection status
About ground and sea stabi lization
Speed sensor source is MAN , LOG 2AXW
If Set/Drift Setting menu is on : GND (Ground stabilization)
If Set/Drift Setting menu is off : Sea (Sea stabilization)
Speed sensor source is GPS , 2AXG : GND (Ground stabilization)
Double zoom On I Off

Interference rejection ( IR) mode
Radar vid eo processing (PROC) Target enhance (ENH) mode

mode
Sea clutter suppression (Sea)

Function (FUNC) mode mode
Gain dial position Rain I snow clutter suppression
(Rain) mode
Sea clutter uppression (Sea)
dial position
Rain I snow clutter

suppression (Rain)
dial position
2-3 [ ~ RC I 8CifXI'I- Rad.icJ Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstrucbon Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Upper right of the display
Cursor bearing Cursor bearing Cursor mode
numeric value indication Cursor latitude
true I relative
Cursor range Cursor longitude
EBL 1 numeric value indication EBL1

true I relative - -.:.:: starting point mode
EBL2
EBL 1 bearing
starting point mode
Parallel index line

VRM1 range
starting point mode
EBL2 numeric value indication Consistent Common

EBL2 bearing VRM2 range
Own ship's track interval
Mark color
Own ship's track interval unit

Own ship's track color
Map display Map position correction

On I Off indication
Graphic display CPA ring display

On I Off On / Off
Ship's heading line
On I Off

Operation status

Heading device
Own ship's speed
Speed sensor
Own ship's
course over ground
Time display mode
Own ship's
speed over ground
Positioning system
(example: GPS, DGPS)
Date and time
Geodetic positioning system

CC RP latitude CCRP longitude
["Rc] gopanRadi.o Co.,.ltd. 2- 4

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS> 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Target tracking (TT) I
EPA / AIS

TCPA limit interval
CPA limit
Past position d isplay
interval unit
AIS On I Off Association On I Off
AIS filter mode

Tracked target symbol
display On I Off Radar trails remaining time
AIS target symbol display

On I Off Radar trails display time
Radar trails true I relative

AIS target number
Ship's name
Unread message
Course
CPA
Speed
Bearing Ship's heading bearing
Range
Latitude / longitude error Longitude
Navigation status Destination
2-5 (~RC ] aapan.Radio Co.,.lfd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstruc!Jon Manual> 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 21 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
About time display mode
UTC : Universal Time Coordinate
UTC{S) : UTC (System Time)
LMT (S) : LMT (System Time)

Tracked target number
Beari ng
True course Range
True speed
CPA
BCR
TCPA
BCT
No information is displayed
if digital information value is
not displayed
Numeric information: Enhancement of cursor position numeric value indication
Cursor bearing numeric

Cursor bearing value indication
true I relative
Cursor latitude
Cursor longitude
[.JRC] gapan. Radio Co., 1/d. 2-6

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Numeric information: Enhancement of EBL I VRM numeric value display
EBL bearing
EBLbearing numeric value indication
true I relative
VRM range
Depth
Wind direction I speed Wind speed

true I relative
Destination bearing Destination distance
Remaini ng time before

arriving destination
Graph information : Depth indication
Depth
Depth range
Depth graph
Time ra nge
2- 7 [ ~RC ] gopan.Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstruct1on Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Graph information: Water temperature indication
Water temperature
Water temperature range
Water temperature graph
Time range
Wind direction I speed

true I relative
Wind speed
Graph information: Course bar
Rate ofturn
[ JRC I 8opan RadicJ Co., ..ftd. 2-8

JMA-91 72-sA Instruction Manual > 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2 1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Numeric information: Marker
Marker bearing Marker latitude
Marker longitude
Arrival time
Menu
Main menu
Target Tracking (TT) menu _ _ ......_
~~~~._~~~~~._~ activation zone (AZ) menu
AIS menu Route menu
Brilliance
Main menu
AIS menu Route menu
Display information
Panel lighting trilliance Day I night mode
Radar video brilliance Tracked target I AIS target

symbol brilliance
2- 9 [ ~Rc ] f)apan.Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.1 NAMES OF DISPLAY
----------------------------------
Alarm
Alarm indication
(The system alarm indicated in red .
Other information indicated in blue or yellow.)
2-10
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
----------------------------------
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
Hl--+--+io f®(ffi®
Hl--+--+io ~@
~~ 0 ~@
~==.61
e@ ~m
e(§ID ®ffi
The name of each button is described from the following page. See below.
2-11 ["'RC l aopan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWAREBUTIONS > 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
----------------------------------
CD [POWER] (Power supply) switch
The lamp is lit and the equipment is activated.
lf this switch is pressed while the equipment is running, the power of the equipment is
shut down.
~ 3. 1. 1 on page 3-2
@ [PWR ACK] (Power alarm acknowledgement) key

Use this function to acknowledge the alarm when power supply abnormality occurs.
To enable this key, an externa l battery (separate power from normal AC) is required.
Q) [TX/ STBY] (Transmission/Standby) key

When the [POWER] switch is pressed, the "STANDBY" message is displayed in the
top-left corner of the screen in about I 0 seconds. If this key is pressed, transmission
starts. If this key is pressed during transmission, the equipment is set to a standby state.
~ 3.1. 1 on page 3-2
® [ALARM ACK] (Alarm acknowledgement) key

Use this function to acknowledge alarms such as failure alarm, approaching target alarm,
and collision alarm.
By pressing this key at the occurrence of an alarm, the alarm sound can be stopped.
If multiple alanns occur, press thi s key same time as the alarms.
~3 .2. 7 on page 3-13
@ [TUNE] (Tuning) dial

Not function.
JMA-9172-SA radar is fully automatic. There is no necessary for a tuning function .
® [RAIN] (Rain I snow clutter suppression) dial

This function suppresses rain I snow clutters.
To increase the effect of suppression, tum the dial clockwise.
~ 3.2.6 on page 3-1 1
0 [SEA] (Sea clutter suppression) dial

This function suppresses sea clutter.
To increase the effect of suppression, turn the dial clockwise.
~ 3.2.5 on page 3-9
[JRC] (japan Radio Co., .lid. 2-12

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
----------------------------------
® [GAIN] (Gain/pulse length) dial
This function adjusts the reception sensitivity of the radar.
To increase the sensiti vity, tum the dial clockwise.
The transm ission pulse width can be switched by pressing the dial.
gain ~ 3.2.4 on page 3-8
pulse width ~ 3.4.2 on p age 3-25
® [RANGE + /-] (Range switching) key

This function switches the range.
Press[+] to increase the observation range.
Press [-] to reduce the observation range.
~ 3.2.2 on page 3-6
® [EBL 1] (Electronic Bearing Line 1) key

Use this function to display and select EBL I.
If the key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, the menu for setting EBL I is displayed.
~ 4.1.3 on page 4-3
@ [EBL2] (Electronic Bearing Line 2) key

Use this function to display and select EBL2.
If the key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, the menu fo r setting EBL2 is displayed.
~ 4.1.3 on page 4-3
@ [EBL] (Electronic Bearing Line) dial

This function rotates the azimuth of the EBL that is selected in EBL 1/2.
By pressing the dial, the selected EBL can be switched to Center fixing ~ Float ing ~
Center fixing.
~ 4.1.3 on page 4-3
@ [VRM1] (Variable Range Marker 1) key

This function selects YRM I. The On/Off and dial use right are switched.
~ on page 4-6
®> [VRM2] (Variable Range Marker 2) key

This function selects VRM2. The On/Off and dial use right are switched.
~ on page 4-6
2 -13 [ JRC I aopan. Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA·9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
----------------------------------
@ (VRM] (Variable Range Marker) dial
This function changes the range of the VRM that is selected by VRMl /2.
By pressing the dial, the parallel line cursor function can be switched to Operation--+
Fixed --+ Off--+ Operation.
--+ on page 4-6
@ (T / R VECT] (True vector display I Relative vector display) key

This function switches the display mode (true/relati ve) of the tracked target and A IS
target vector.
--+ 5.1.6 on page 5- 14
@ (TGT DATA] (Target data display) key

This function displays the digital data of the tracked target or AIS target at the cursor
position.
the tracked target -+ 5.2.3 on page 5-1 8
the AIS target -+ 5.3.5 on page 5-29
@ (ACQ MANUAL] (Manual acquisition) key

T his function enables manual acquis ition of the target at the cursor position.
--+ 5.2. 1 on page 5- 15
@ (ACQ CANCEL] (Tracked target cancellation) key

Thi s function cancels the symbol and vector of the target that is being tracked and stops
the tracking of the target.
l f this key is pressed for 2 seconds or more, all the targets that are being tracked are
cancelled.
--+ 5.2.2 on page 5-1 7
@ [DAY / NIGHT] (Day/night mode) key

This function switches the color and brightness of the screen that was preset.
--+ 3 .4.12 on page 3-36
@ [AIS/TT] (AIS On/Off) key

This function switches the AlS function to ON/OFF when the ATS function is enabled.
--+ 5.3.2 on page 5-27
@ [HL OFF] (Ship's heading line Off) key

HL (shi p's heading highlight line) can be set to OtT only w hile th is key is pressed.
--+ 3.4.1 0 on page 3-35
[ ~RC ] 3opan Rad«J Co., .ltd. 2 - 14

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2 CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS> 2.2 NAMES AND FUNCTIONS OF
CONTROL PANEL KEYS
----------------------------------
@ [DATA OFF] (DATA Off) key
This function sets the graphics other than HL, range ring, EBL, and VRM to OFF
temporarily while this key is pressed.
--+ 3.4.11 on page 3-35
@> [PANEL] (Operator panel brilliance) key
This function adj usts the lighti ng brilliance of various switches and dial positions on the
operator panel. The brightness changes cyclically whenever this key is pressed.
--+ 3.4.13 on page3-36
@ [USER] key
By pressing this key, the signal processing setting that is preset can be called .
The setting changes to FUNC OFF => FUNC I => FUNC2 > FUNC3 =>
FUNC4 whenever this key is pressed.
If this key pressed for 2 seconds or more, the function setting menu is displayed.
--+ 3.9 on page 3-113
@ [OPTION1] key
By pressing this key, the pre-registered menu position can be directly displayed.
At factory shipment, the call ing of [Main Menu] is assigned .
--+ 3.8.7 on page 3-104
@ [OPTION2] key
By pressing this key, the pre-registered menu position can be directly displayed.
At factory shipment, the calling of [Sub Menu] is assigned.
--+ 3.8.7 on page 3-104
@ Track ball
This function moves the cursor mark to any position. Use this function for setting in
each mode.
Use thi s function to specify a center position of floating EBL and an off-center position.
--+ 3.3 . 1 on page 3-1 5
@> [Track ball left button]
Use thi s function to confim1 menu selection and numeric value input.
® [Track ball right button]
Use this function to reset menu selection and numeric value input.
@ [BRILL] (Brilliance dial)
This dial is provided at the rig ht of the monitor. Use this function to adjust the brilliance
of the monitor.
--+ 3.2. 1 on page 3-6
2 - 15 [.JRC I gopan RacikJ Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
----------------------------------
G) Range scale switching
® Range rings display CD Transmission pulse lengt

On /Off switching
DMotion mode tru e I relative

sw itching
@ Off center switching
@ Tran smission I Standby

switchng ® Azimuth display mode
switchi ng
@ lnterswitch co nnectio n
change

To increase the observation range scale (maximum 96NM), click + and to reduce
the range (minimum 0.125NM), cl ick
0 Range rings display On I Off

T he display of range rings are set to On I Off w henever this button is cl icked.
W hen the display is set to On, the interval of the fixed range marker is displayed.
@ Motion mode true I relative switching

The screen motion mode is switched whenever the button is cl icked.
TM (true motion) ::::} RM (relative motion)::::} TM
RM(R) indicates that the radar trails is a relative trail.
RM(T) indicates that the radar trails is a true trail.
® Off center switching

If thi s button is clicked, the cursor is moved, and left-clicked, the ship's pos ition can be
moved to the cursor position. The moving range is within 66% of the radius.
If the button is c licked for 2 seconds, the off-center is set to Off and the ship's position is
returned to the center of the screen.
~ Transmission I standby switching

At expiration of the pre-heat time after the power is turned on, Preheat changes to
Standby
Standby :Indicates a standby state. If this button is clicked in this state, the
equipment is set to a transmission state.
2 - 17 [..JRC ] (japan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS > 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTIONS
----------------------------------
Transmit :Indicates a transmission state. If this button is clicked in this state,
the equipment is set to a standby state.
® lnterswitch connection change

This button is displayed when the interswitch is connected. This button indicates the
connection status of the scanner unit that is connected to the indicator.
I f the button is cl icked in th e transmission standby state, the menu for changing the
connection state between the scan ner unit and the indicator is displayed. T he connection
state of the scanner un it and indicator cannot be changed unless the master indicator is in
a standby state.
Refer to the Appendix A NQE-3141 Jnter swirch Uni/lnterswitch (Optiona l) Instruction
Manual that is attached for the setting method. This button is not displayed if the
interswitch is not connected. Un-available for evaluation model.
(!) Transmission pulse length switching

The transmission pulse length is switched whenever thi s button is clicked. Three types
of pulses are available, short pulse (SP), middle pulse (MP), and long pulse (LP). The
pulse length and repetition frequency vary even for the same short pulse, according to
the range that is used and it is displayed as SPl , SP2 .
® Azimuth display mode switching

The azimuth display is switched w henever this button is clicked .
H Up (Head Up) ==} N Up (North Up) ==} C Up (Course Up) ==} H Up
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the GYTO Setting menu is displayed.
G) Double zoom switching

~ Interference rejection (IR)
@ Radar video processing (PROC)
mode switching
mode switching
@ Function (FUNC) @ Target enhance (ENH)

@ Sea clutter suppression (Sea)

@ Gain adjustment
mode switching
(J) Sea clutter suppression (Sea)

® Rain and sno.v clutter
adj ustrnent
suppression (Rain)
mode switching
® Rain I snow clutter
suppression (Rain)
adj ustrnent
[JRC) 8opanRadio Co.,l'Jd. 2-18

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFlWARE BUTIONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFlWARE
BUTTONS
----------------------------------
CD Double zoom switching
Use this function to enlarge to double the s ize the display screen of the pos ition specified
by the cursor. lfthis button is clicked, the zoom mode is set. When the cursor is moved
to the radar screen and left-clicked, th e screen is enlarged to double the size so that the
m iddle of the cursor and the own ship's pos ition is set to the center of the screen. This
funct ion cannot be used when the range is 0. 125NM.
<6> Interference rejection (IR) mode switching

The interference rejection mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.
IR Off IR Low ::::} IR Meddle ::::} IR High ::::} IR Off
Q) Target enhance (ENH) mode switching
The target enhance mode is switched whenever this button is clicked.

ENH Off ::::} ENH Levell ::::} ENH Level2 ::::} ENH Level3 ::::} ENH Off
® Radar video processing (PROC) mode switching

The radar video processing mode is switched w henever this button is clicked.
PROC Off ::::} 3Scan CORREL ::::} 4Scan CORREL ::::} SScan CORREL
Remain ::::} Peak Hold ::::} PROC Off
~ Function (FUNC) mode switching

The function mode is switched w henever this button is clicked .
FUNC Off ::::} Coast ::::} Deep Sea Rain
Storm ::::} FUNC Off
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the function registration menu (User Function
Setting) is opened.
® , (!) , and@ Gain , Sea clutter suppression(Sea), Rain I snow

clutter suppression (Rain)
Adjust the gain, sea c lutter suppression, rain I snow clutter suppression and tune using
the track ball.
If the button is clicked on, the adjustment value is shown at the upper-right of the curso r.
Make adjustments by moving the track ball to the left and ri ght. Determine the
adjustment by left-cl icking.
2-19 (.JRC] 8opan.Radio Co.,.fid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
----------------------------------
® , @ and @ Sea clutter suppression (Sea) mode, Rain and snow clutter
suppression (Rain) mode switching
Use these functions to switch to the manual or automatic mode of sea clutter
suppression, rain and snow c lutter suppression, and tune. The bar on the left side
indicates the position of the dial.
The mode is switched to MAN (manual) I AUTO (automatic) whenever the
button is clicked. If rain and snow clutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode,
sea clutter suppression is switched to an automatic mode a lso.
Upper Right of the display

® EBL1 numeric value indication ® Mark font /line pattern
<D Cursor mode switching ® Mark color /line color

switching
@ Cursor bearing
numeric value display
mode switching
mode switching
@ EBL1 adjustment
@ VRM1 adjustment @ Parallel index line

setting
(f) EBL2 adjustment
@ VRM2 adjustment
® EBL2 numeric value indication @ Parallel index line
true I relative switching starting point mode
switching
CD Cursor mode switching

The mode of the function that uses the cursor is switched whenever this button is
pressed.
I AUTO I => IACQ n I => I ACT AIS I => I TGT Data I => I CNCL TT I =>
IDEACT AIS I =} ICNCL Data I =} 0 => - - - - - - - =} Property =}
I AUTO I
@ Mark font I line pattern switching
This function switches a mark font I line pattern. If this button is clicked while the cursor
mode is 0 (mark) or - - - - - - - (line), the mark font I line pattern is
changed .
("'RC J !Japan RadicJ Co.,.ltd. 2-20

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
----------------------------------
Q) Mark color I line color switching
This function switches a mark color I line color. If this button is clicked while the cursor
mode is 0 (mark) or - - - - - - - (line), the mark color I line color is
changed.
® Cursor bearing numeric value display true I relative switching

The bearing numeric va lue display T (true bearing) I
cursor is switched whenever this button is c licked.
R (relative bearing) of the
B
®,®.~ and ® EBL 1 I 2 and VRM1 I 2 adjustment
These functions set the EBLI , VRM I , EBL2 , and VRM2 displays to O n I Off and
acquire the operation right.
If the button is clicked on, the operation rig ht is acqu ired. Make adjustments by moving
the track ball to the left and right Determine the adjustment by left-clicking.
® and @ EBL 1, EBL2 numeric value true I relative switching

The EBL I I 2 bearing numeric val ue display T (true bearing) I R (relative
bearing) is switched whenever the button is clicked.
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the EBL I Cursor Setting menu is displayed.
@ and @ EBL 1 I EBL2 starting point mode switching

The EBL starting point is set to CCRP or any pos ition on the radar screen w henever this
button is clicked.
: Center The starting point is fixed to the CCRP position.
C : Screen Fix The starting point is set to the cursor position. If left-
clicked subsequently, the starting position is fi xed to
the cursor position.
D : LIL Fixi The starting point is set to the cursor position. If

left-clicked subsequently, the starting position is
fixed to the latitude I longitude of the cursor.
(Connection of a navigator is necessary.) If the
starting point is moved outside of the screen, the
operation is reset automatically and the starting
point returns to the CCRP position.
i. D is enabled only when a navigator is connected.
@ Parallel index line setting
This function sets the parallel index line display LoOn I Off and acquires the operation
right.
If this button is clicked, the operation right is acquired and the menu is opened. After
setting, determine the setting by left-clicking.
2-21 (.JRC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
----------------------------------
Parallel index line starting point mode switching
The parallel index line starting point is set to CCRP or any position on the radar screen
In the same way as for the EBL starting point, three options are available, :Center,
c : Screen Fix, and 0 : LIL Fix.

@ Own ship's track interval
switching
CD Mark color switching @ Own ship's track interval unit
switching
® Own ship's track color
switching
@ Map display
On I Off
® CPA ring display
On I Off
Q) Ship's heading line Off
CD Mark color switching

The color of the mark is switched whenever this button is c licked.
If the button is c licked for 2 seconds, the Mark Setting menu is opened.
@ Own ship's track color switching
The own ship's track color is switched whenever this button is clicked.
Q) Own ship's track interval switching
The own ship's track interval is switched whenever this button is c licked.
® Own ship's track interval unit switching

The unit of the own ship's track interval is switched whenever this button is c licked.
sec ::::} min ::::} NM ::::} sec
® Map display On I Off

The own track, target track and route display are set to On I Off whenever this button is
clicked. If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the Map Setting menu is opened.

While the button is clicked, the g raphic display other than VRM, EBL, HL, a cursor, and
range rings on the rada r screen is c leared temporarily.
[ ~Rc ] (japan-Radio Co.. .f'Jd. 2-22

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTIONS
----------------------------------
(!) Ship's heading line Off
The ship's heading line (HL) display is set to Off while this button is clicked.
Since the ship's heading line is cleared while the button is clicked, the target in the ship's
heading bearing can be clearly seen.
® CPA ring display On I Off
The CPA ring display is switched to On I Off whenever the button is clicked.
When the target vector display mode is T (true vector), the CPA ring cannot be set to
On.
@ Manual own ship's speed

® Speed sensor setting
switching
® Time display mode

switching
CD Heading device switching

The heading device is switched whenever this button is clicked.
GYRO =9 CMPS (Electronic compass) =} GYRO
When the selected heading device is not connected to the equipment, an alarm is issued.
0 Speed sensor switching

The speed sensor is switched whenever the button is c licked.
MAN (Man ual) :::} LOG (Sing le-axis water log) :::} 2AXW (Dual-axis water
log) =9 2AXG (Dual-axis ground log) :::} GPS ::::9 MAN
When the selected speed device is not connected to the equipment, an alarm is issued.
® Time display mode switching

The time display mode liTe (universal time clock) I (local mean time) is
switched whenever this button is c licked.
2-23 [ JRC I 8opan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTIONS
----------------------------------
® Manual own ship's speed setting
When selection of the speed sensor is set to MAN , enter the own ship's speed
manually.
If this button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting a value,
determine the entry by clicking ENT

CD Target vector display ® Target vector length setting @ TCPA limit setting
® Past position display

@ CPA limit setting
interval switching
@ Past position display

true I relative switching (/) Past position display
interval unit switching
@ AIS
On I Off ® Association
On I Off
® Tracked target symbol
display On I Off
® AIS filter mode switching
® AIS target symbol display
On I Off
® Radar trails display ® Radar trails display time
Q) Target vector display true I relative switching

The tracked target I AI target vector display is switched to T (true vector) I R
(relative vector) whenever this button is clicked.
This setting is switched together with the past position display true I relative switching.
a> Target vector length setting

Set a vector length of the tracked target I AIS target.
If this button is c licked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After setting the
length, detem1ine the setting by c licking ENT
~ CPA limit setting

Set a CPA limit.
If th is button is clicked, the numeric value input screen is opened. After etting the limit,
® TCPA limit setting

Set a TCPA limit.
If this button is c licked, the numeric va lue input screen is opened. After setting the limit,
[.JRC] gopan Radio Co., Ltd. 2-24

BUTTONS
----------------------------------
@ Past position display true I relative switching
The tracked target I AI target past position display is switched to T (true past
position) I R (re lative past position) whenever the button is c licked.
This setting is switched together w ith the target vector display true I relative switching.
® Past position display interval switching

The past position display interval is switched whenever the button is c licked.
(!) Past position display interval unit switching

B
The past position disp lay interval unit is switched whenever the button is c licked.
min ==? NM ==? min
® AIS On I Off
The A IS display is switched to On I Off whenever the button is clicked.
® Tracked target symbol display On I Off

The tracked target symbol display is switched to On I Off whenever the button is
c licked. Use this function to avo id confusion with the AIS symbo l.
® AIS target symbol display On I Off

The A IS target symbol display is switched to On I Off whenever the button is clicked.
Use this function to avoid confusion with the tracked target sym bol.
@ Association On I Off
The tracked target I AlS target association is switched to On I OfT whenever the button is
cl icked.
The A IS filter is switched whenever the button is c licked.

Range ==} Sector ==} Zone ==? Range
@ Radar trails display true I relative switching

Radar trails are switched to T (true motion trail) I R (relati ve motion trail)
This setting is restricted by the radar display motion mode.
In relative motion display mode (RM), switching to T I R is possible.
In true motion display mode (TM), only T can be set.
2 -25 [JRC] 8opan.Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstruct1on Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS > 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTIONS
----------------------------------
@ Radar trails display time switching
The radar trails djsplay time is switched whenever the button is clicked.
If the time does not reach the radar trails time that was set, the remaining time is
displayed on the right-hand side.
If the button is clicked for 2 seconds, the RADAR Trails Setting menu is opened.

si
CD : Detail /
simple
display switching
: Unread message
display
CD Detail I simple display switching

This function switches the display mode to detail I simple display when AI target
information is displayed.
~ Unread message display

When there is an unread message from the A!S target that is displayed, the message is
displayed. If this button is clicked, the message is displayed.
[~RC ] 8opan Radio Co_, .lid. 2 -26

BUTTONS
----------------------------------
<D Tracked target

scroll
CD Tracked target numeric value indication scroll

This fu nction scro lls the target numbers that are indicated in the tracked ta rget
infom1ation.
<D Wind direction I speed


switching
The wi nd di rection I speed numeric value indication is switched to T (true) I R
(relative) whenever this button is c licked.
2-27 [~Rc ] 8opan Radit:J Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-5A lnstructton Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTTONS > 2 3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTTONS
----------------------------------
(!) Wind direction I speed


switching
The wind direction I speed numeric value indication is switched to T (true) I R
(relative) whenever this button is clicked.
Menu
@ Main menu
<D Digital information display (J) Parallel index line menu
® Automatic acquisition I
® User map menu
@ AIS menu @ Route menu
CD Digital information display

If this button is clicked while the menu screen is open, the menu is closed and control
returns to the digital information display.
This function switches between the tracked target I AlS target display and navigation
information or the course bar, and so on.
@ Target Tracking (TT) menu
If this button is clicked, the TT Menu is opened.
Q) Own track menu
If this button is clicked, the Own Track Men u is opened.
® Main menu
If this button is clicked, the Main Menu is opened.
[ ~RC ] 3opan RadicJ Co.,.J'Jd. 2-28

BUTTONS
----------------------------------
<2) AIS menu
1f the button is clicked, the AIS Menu is opened.
@ Route menu
I f this button is clicked, the Route Menu is opened.
(!) Parallel index line menu
If this button is clicked, the PI Menu is opened.
® Automatic acquisition I activation zone menu

If this button is clicked, the AZ Menu is opened.
® User map menu

If the button is clicked , the User Map Menu is opened.
Brilliance
G) Display item switching
® Panel lighting brilliance

switching @ Day I night mode
switching
@ Radar video brilliance @ Tracked ta rget I A IS target symbol

switching brilliance switching
Display information
G) Display item switching
@ User map load
(J) User setting load
2 -29 [.JRC ] (Japan Radio Co.,.lid.

BUTTONS
----------------------------------
The brilliance adjustment screen and display information setting screen interchange
@ Panel lighting brilliance switching

This function enables the setting of the brilliance of the lighting of the control panel.
The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked. Five levels of settings are
available.
@ Radar video brilliance switch ing

Adjust the brightness of the radar video (echo).
The brill iance changes whenever this button is cli cked. Four levels of settings are
available.
® Tracked target I AIS target symbol brilliance switching

Use this function to adjust the brilliance of the tracked target I AIS target symbol.
The brilliance changes whenever this button is clicked. Five levels of settings are
available.
® Day I night mode switching

The day I night mode is switched whenever th is button is clicked.
Dayl ---+ Day2 ---+ Day3 ---+ Dusk ~
L Day2 ~ Day3 ~ Dusk ,__ Night
@ User map load
If this button is clicked, the user created map read menu is opened.
(!) User setting load

If this button is clicked, the user setting read menu is opened.
[.JRC ] 8opan Radio Co., .ltd. 2-30

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 2.CONTROL PANEL KEYS and SOFTWARE BUTIONS> 2.3 FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE
BUTIONS
----------------------------------
Alarm
CD Alarm acknowridgement
® Error log display
CD Alarm acknowledgment
If this button is clicked, the buzzer sound of the alarm that is currently issued is stopped
and the a larm lamp stops blinking. If multiple alarms are issu ed, the next a lann to be
acknowledged is displayed.
B
I f the button is clicked, the alarm displayed on the top is acknowledged.
T he alarms that are currently issued are displayed at the bottom one by one.
0 Alarm log display

I f this button is clicked, the ala rm log is display.
2-31 [..JRC] Japan Radio Co.,.J.'Jd.

BUTTONS
----------------------------------
[JRC I aopan. RadicJ Co.,.ltd. 2-32

SECTION 3
BASIC OPERATION
BASIC OPERATION
3.1 OPERATION FLOW ............................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Power ON and Start the System .................................................... 3-2
3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video .............................................................. 3-4
3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data ............................................................. 3-4
3.1.4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP ............................ 3-4
3.2.1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL] ............................... ................... 3-6
3.2.3 Tune .................................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN] .........................................................................3-8
3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA] .......................................................... 3-9
[..JRC] 8opanRadioCo.,.lid.
Input menu .....................................................................................3-18
3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure ......................................................... 3-23
3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH) .................................................................. 3-26
3.4.7 Move Own Ship's Display Position (Off Center) .........................3-30
3.4.9 Zoom (x2) .......................................................................................3-34
3.4.1 0 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF] ........................................... 3-35
3.4.14 Set True Bearing ............................................................................3-37
3.5. 7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track) .............................. 3-45
3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP ........................................................................... 3-48
3.6.5 Save User Map ............................................................................... 3-62
3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION ......................................................................3-68
3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence) ................................................ 3-69
3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint Input) 3-76
3.7.5 Method of Using Route .............. ................................................... 3-82
3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS ...................................................................... 3-93
3.8.1 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting) .................... ..... 3-93
3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting) ...................... ........................... 3-99
3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting) ........................................................3-100
3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting) .......................................... 3-1 01
3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume) .................................... 3-104
3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2] ..........................................3-104
3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting) ...............3-106
3.8.9 AUTO Backup ................ .............................................................. 3-111
3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER] ...........................................................3-113
3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items .....................................................3-114
3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data ................ .................3-119
3.10 USE USER SETTING ......................................................................... 3-120
3.10.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting) ................................3-120
3.10.2 Load Operating State (Load User Setting) ................................ 3-121
3.11 USING CARD ..................................................................................... 3-122
3.11.1 Operate File on the Card (File Manager) .......... .........................3-122
3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETTING .................................................................3-129
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW
----------------------------------
OPERATION FLOW
. - - - - - - - - - Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
• Do not put anything on the operation panel.

If you put anything hot on it, it may be deformed.
• Do not give any impact to the operation panel,
trackball, or controls.
Otherwise, any failure or damage may result.
POWER ON AND
START THE SYSTEM
l
OBSERVE AND
ADJUST VIDEO
l
ACQUIRE AND
MEASURE DATA
l
END THE OPERATION
AND STOP THE SYSTEM
Each operation is described in detail below.
3-1 [ .JRC I 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATION FLOW
----------------------------------
3.1 .1 Power ON and Start the System
&cAUTION
• A malfunction may occur if the power in the ship is
8 instantaneously interrupted during operation of the

radar. In this case, the power should be turned on
again.
r - - - - - - - - - - - - Attention -----------~
• Wait for about 2 seconds before turning on the power again.
[ ~RC ] gopan Radio Co.,.lid. 3-2

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.1 OPERATIO N FLOW
----------------------------------
Procedures
1) Check that the ship' s mains are turned on.
The system is turned on, and the preheating time is displayed.
Preheat is indicated at the upper left of the radar display.
3) Wait until the preheating time is over.
When the preheating time is over, the preheating time screen disappears, and Preheat
at the upper left of the radar display changes to Standby
4) Press [TX/STBY] key.

The radar will start transmission and the antenna will start rotating.
Standby at the upper left of the radar display changes to Transmit
It will be djsplayed I Tuning OK I at the upp er left of the ra dar display.

The radar system is o ptimum.lfnot dis played, Rada r should be checked
by a service engineer.
The radar does not start transmission if you press [TX/STBY]

NOTE: key while Preheat is indicated.
3- 3 [.JRC] 8opan RadicJ Co.,.lid.

JMA·9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 1 OPERATION FLOW
----------------------------------
3.1.2 Observe and Adjust Video
Procedures
1) Press [RANGE+] key or [RANGE-] key to set the range to the
scale required for target observation.
2) [GAIN] [SEA] and [RAIN] to obtain the clearest targets.
Refer to
[GAIN] dial-+ Section 3.2.4 "Adjust Gain [GAIN]"
[SEA] dial- Section 3.2.5 "Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA]"
[RAIN] dial- Section 3.2.6 "Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter

[RAIN]"
for how to use each dial.
For how to adjust video, see Section 3.2 "OBS ERV E AND ADJUST V IDEO"
3.1.3 Acquire and Measure Data
For detail s on how to acquire data and measure, see the SECTION
4"MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING".
3.1.4 Display and Measure with Reference to CCRP

The radar video, range, bearing, Target Tracking and AJS data di splay etc ... are
displayed with reference to CCRP (Consistent Common Reference Point).
If scanner is switched, these data are measured from CCRP.
If some kind of functions (for example off center, true motion mode, etc.) set
scanner position to 75% outside of the PPl range, these data except Target
Tracking and AIS data are displayed with reference to scanner position.
For how to setting CCRP, see the Section 7.1.9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP
Setting)".
[ ~RC ] (japan RadicJ Co.,.lid. 3- 4

- - - - - -- -
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 1 OPERATION FLOW
----------------------------------
3.1.5 End the Operation and Stop the System
Exit
I) Press [TX/STBY] key.
The radar will stop transmission and the antenna will stop rotating.
Transmit at the upper left of the radar display changes to Standby
Maintain the standby state if radar observation is restarted in a

17\ relatively short time.Only pressing the [TX/STBY] key starts
~observation.
& wARNING
• When conducting maintenance work, make sure to turn
8 off the power and make the main breaker OFF so that the
power supply to the equipment is completely cut off.
• Some equipment components can carry electrical
current even after the power switch is turned off, and
conducting maintenance work without unplugging the
power connector may result in electrocution, equipment
failure, or accidents.
3-5 [.JRC] 8opan.Rodio Co.,.lfd.

JMA·9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
----------------------------------
3.2.1 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL]
Procedures
1) Obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance by turning
the [BRILL] dial at the lower right of the monitor unit.
Turning the [BRILL] dial clockwise increases the brilliance of the entire display.
Conversely, turning the [BRILL] dial counterclockwise decreases the brilliance of the entire
display.
In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust display brilliance that is high enough to
easi ly observe the radar display but does not glare.
3.2.2 Change Observation Range [RANGE+/-]
Procedures
1) Pressing the [RANGE+] key will increase the observation range,
enabling the wider area to be observed.
Increasing the observation range wi ll enable a wider range to be observed.
However, a video image is small and the ability to detect targets near own ship decreases.
Therefore, when observing the vicinity of own ship, use the smaller observation range.
2) Pressing the [RANGE-] key will decrease the observation range,

reducing the area that can be observed.
Decreasing the observation range will enable the vicinity of own ship to be enlarged.
However, caution must be taken because video images of the area beyond the observation
range cannot be displayed.
[JRC] 8opanRadicJ Co., .lid. 3-6

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
----------------------------------
3.2.3 Tune
JMA-9172-SA radar is fully automatic.
There is no adjusted necessary for a tuning function.
It is displayed on the left of the screen, "Tuning OK".
3-7 (~RC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.ltd.

----------------------------------
3.2.4 Adjust Gain [GAIN]
& cAUTION
If the gain is too high, unnecessary signals including
receiver noise and false images increase resulting in
reduction of visibility of targets.
On the contrary, if the gain is too low, targets including
ships and dangerous objects may not be clearly
indicated.
Be sure to always adjust for the best gain.
observed".
Procedures
1) Adjust noise on the radar display by turning the [GAIN] dial until
targets can be easily observed.
Tuming [GAIN] dial clockwise increases gai n.
Tuming [GAIN] dial counterclockwise decreases gain.
Turning the [GAIN] dial clockwise will increase the receiving gain, and the
range to observe radar video is widened . However, if the gain is too high,
unnecessary signals including receiver noise and false images increase
resulting in reduction of targets' visibility.
To observe densely crowded targets or short-range targets, turning the

[GAIN] dial counterclockwise will decrease the receiving gain , which
enables targets to be easily observed. However, caution must be taken so
as not to overlook a small and important target.

settings. The factory default level is shown on ~
the bar chart as a green line. ~··---~
[.JRC ] popan Radio Co., .lid. 3-8

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 O BSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
----------------------------------
3.2.5 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA]
& cAUTION
When using the sea clutter suppression function,
all image noises from the sea surface at close range .
Detection of not only echoes from waves but also
targets such as other ships or dangerous objects will
become inhibited.
level.
observed".
3.2.5.1 Using the manual sea clutter suppression mode
Procedures
I) Adjust the sea clutter returns on the radar display by turning the
[SEA] dial until targets can be easily observed.
Turning [SEA] dial clockwise suppresses sea clutter returns.
Turning [SEA] djal counterclockwise intensifies sea clutter returns.
The sea clutter suppression function suppresses sea clutter returns by

decreasing the receiving gain on a short range.
Turning the [SEA] dial clockwise heightens the effect of sea clutter
suppression. However, be careful that excessive suppression causes
low signal-strength targets such as buoys and boats to disappear from
the radar display.

The factory default level is assigned by

~
""'I
Factory Default
3- 9 (JRC] Japan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
3.2.5.2 Using the automatic sea clutter suppression mode
The sea clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of sea clutter is
possible. Use thi s mode when the sea clutter's intensity differs according to
directional orientation.
Procedures
1) Press the [SEA] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Sea MAN
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, and Sea AUTO is displayed in the
2) Make adjustments by turning the [SEA] dial.
Even when the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the [SEA] di al can
make fine adjustments manually.
When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode is selected,

NOTE: the automatic rain/snow suppression mode is switched to the
manual mode.
To select both the sea clutter suppression function and the rain/
snow suppression function in the automatic mode, use the
automatic rain/snow suppression mode.
Cancel
1) Press the [SEA] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Sea AUTO
The automatic sea clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and Sea MAN is displayed in the
[ ~RC ] aapanRadio Co.,.ltd. 3 - 10

----------------------------------
3.2.6 Suppress Rain/Snow Clutter [RAIN]
& cAUTION
When using the rain clutter suppression function ,
all image noises from the rain or snow at the close
range.
When using the (AUTO RAIN] function , make sure to
level.
See also the Section 3.2.8 "To gel the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed".
3.2.6.1 Using the manual rain I snow clutter suppression mode
Procedures
1) Adjust the rain I snow clutter returns of the display by turning the
(AUTO-RAIN] dial until targets can be easily observed.
Turning [RAIN) dial clockwise s uppresses rain I snow clutter returns.
Turning [RAIN] dial counterclockwise intensifies rain I snow clutter returns.
When the [RAIN] dial is turned clockwise, the rain I snow clutter
suppression function suppresses rain I snow clutter returns and gets
targets hidden by rain I snow clutter returns to appear of the display.
However, be careful that excessive suppression may cause small
targets to be overlooked. Since the rain I snow clutter suppression
function also has the effect of suppressing sea clutter, the suppression
efficiency improves when the [RAIN] dial is used with the [SEA] dial. In
general, turn the [RAIN] dial fully to the left.


3-11 ( ~RC ] doptm Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 .2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
----------------------------------
3.2.6.2 Using the automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode
The rain I snow clutter suppression in accordance with the intensity of rain I snow
clutter is possible. Use this mode when the rain I snow clutter's intensity differs
according to directional orientation.
Procedures
1) Press the [RAIN] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Rain MAN
The automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is selected, and Sea AUTO, Rain
AUTO is d isplayed in the lower left of the radar display.
2) Make adjustments by turning the [RAIN] dial and the [SEA] dial.
Even w hen the autom atic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is selected, turning the
[RAIN] dial and the [SEA] dial can make fine adjustments manually.
When the automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is

NOTE: selected, the automatic sea clutter suppression mode and
Doppler Filter* are also activated.
It is not possible to set only the rain I snow clutter suppression
function to the automatic mode.
Cancel
1) Press the [RAIN] dial. Alternatively, Left-click the Ra in AUTO
The automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode is cancelled, and Sea AUTO, Rain
AUTO is changed to Sea MAN ,Rain MAN in the lower left of the radar display.
* Doppler Filter: Thi s function possible on solid radar is provided superior

ditection in the case of heavy rain and snow situation.
[JRC] 8opanRodioCo.,.lid. 3-12

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.2 OBSERVE AND ADJUST VIDEO
----------------------------------
3.2.7 Reset Alarm Buzzer [ALARM ACK]
When an audible alann is issued, use ALARM ACK to acknowledge the alann
infonnation, stop the alann buzzing, and stop the a1ann lamp flashing. (If more
than one alann has occurred, press the switch for each alann indication.) The
alann stops buzzing, but the alann indication does not disappea r.
Procedures
1) Press [ALARM ACK] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Alarm
Acknowridge button located at the lower right of the display.
T he alarm will stop buzzing.
3- 13 IJRC I aopan Rac/k; Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
3.2.8 To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily
observed
To get the appropriate image that targets can be easily observed wruch requires an
understanding for RADAR signal processing features and an adjustment for the
sea state. All of the parameter can be set indivisually and manual ly, but it may by
difficult for even expert person.
The sets of signal processing parameters for the general using condition are stored
in FUNC as factory default settings. In most cases, to select the FUNC mode
wruch fit in the current sea state is lead to get the appropriate image easily and
quickJy. So lt is recommended to enab le the FUNC mode.
Procedures
I) Press [USER] key I Press
FUNC mode switch button
and select the mode which fit
in the current sea state.
The four preset modes is assigned on the
FUNC mode. For details, refer to the
Section 3.9 "USE FUNCTION KEY
[USER) ".
: Use this mode to monitor a relatively short range, for example,

Coast
bays and coasts where many boats and ships are
running.(lmportance is attached to resolution .)
: Use this mode to monitor a relatively long range, for example,
Deep Sea
the open sea. (Importance is attached to long-range gain.)
: Use this mode when many rain I snow clutter returns or sea
Storm
clutter returns are detected in stormy weather. (Importance is
attached to rain I snow clutter and sea clutter suppression, and
: Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain I snow
Rain
clutter is strong. (Importance is attached to rain I snow clutter
suppression, and gain slightly lowers.)
2) Make adjustments by turning the [GAIN] dial, the [SEA] dial a nd

the [RAIN] dial when it is necessary.
In most cases, it may be get the appropriate image.

Current Level
the bar chart as a green line. ~
The factory default level is assigned for Factory Default
I
[.JRC) 8apan RadicJ Co.,.ltd. 3 - 14

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
--------------------------------- -
OPERATION PROCEDURES
3.3.1 Move Cross Cursor Mark by Trackball
The cross cursor mark + is used for position designation and other purposes in
various operating procedures. The cross cursor mark + moves in coupling with
the trackball. If the trackball is rotated up and down or right and left, the cross
cursor mark fo llows the move of the trackball.
Operators must be familiar with trackball operation before running the system.
3.3.1.1 Operation inside Rada r Video PPI

The cross cursor mark as shown at right is displayed inside the radar video
PPI.
• The distance, bearing, and latitude/longitude are digitally indicated in the

cursor bearing, distance, latitude, and longitude fields (located at the upper
right of the radar display.)
• When moving the current center position, use the cross cursor mark to
designate a new center position.
• Use the cross cursor mark to create marks and lines.
• Use the cross cursor mark to manually acquire a target in the target tracking I
AIS display functions.
3.3.1.2 Operation outside Rada r Video PPI
As shown at right, the cursor mark changes into the cursor outside the radar f'.-..
video PPI. ~
• Use the cursor to operate software buttons.

• Use the cursor to select menu items.
The EBL I V RM dial is available for operating the cursor mark.
Pressi ng the EBL dial for 2 seconds can perform switching to
the trackball operation. For details, refer to Section 3.8.4 "Set
Cursor (Cursor Setting)".
3-15 [~Rc ] 8opan.RadioCo.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstruct1on Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
----------------------------------
3.3.2 Operate Software Buttons
Software buttons are provided on the radar di splay so as to easily switch functions
without operating menu items.
For software buttons that can be operated and their locations, see Section 2.3
"FUNCTIONS OF SOFTWARE BUTTONS".
Procedures
I ) Put the pointer on the software button on the radar display.
The software button indicated by the cursor will be shown in reverse video, which indicates
that the button is specified.
StandbY
S-Band
2) Press the left button of the trackball.
The operating state changes according to the function of the software button.
In this instruction manual, this manual operation is described as "left-clicking."
• On/Off settings
Each time the left button is pressed, the operating state switches as foll ows:
On ~ Off ~ On ~ Off
• Multiple settings
For example, each time the left button is pressed, the operating state switches as
follows:
[.JRC] (japan Radi.o Co.. i'Jd. 3-16

----------------------------------
3.3.3 Basic Menu Operation
3.3.3.1 To open the menu

By left-clicking the Main button located at the lower right of the radar
display, the main menu wlll open
By left-clicking the buttons, n AIS , and AZ , adjacent to

Main , each function' s exclusive menu wil l open.
For the arrangement of software buttons, see Section 2.3 "FUNCTIONS OF

SOFTWARE BUTTON S".
3.3.3.2 To close the menu

By left-clicking the Target button, the menu will close and the target data
di splay screen will appear.
Alternatively, left-click O.Exit located at the bottom of the menu until the
menu will close.
3.3.3.3 To move to a lower level of the menu

The menu is in hierarchical structure. By left-clicking the software button for a
desired menu item, it is possible to move to the lower level of the menu.
Alternatively, Click items corresponding to the desired menu item number, and the
> mark wi ll appear at the right end of a menu item having a lower level.
3.3.3.4 To move to a higher level of the menu

By left-clicking O.Exit at the bottom of the menu while the menu is open, it is
possible to return to the upper level of the menu.
3.3.3.5 To determine an item

By left-clicking the software button for a menu item for which settings are to be
changed, the selected item will be displayed.
3.3.3.6 To determine the selected item

Left-click the software button for an item you want to set, and then the selected
item will be determined.
If you do not change the setting, right-click the button. The selected item will
close without changing the setting.
3-17 [JRC] 8apan.RadioCo.,.lid.

----------------------------------
3.3.3.7 Menu Operation with the Trackball
Item
Selected item
Press numeric keys
corresponding to the desired
item number to display the
Present state
selected item.
Press numeric keys

corresponding to the
desired item number to Cursor
select a set value .
Software button When the [ > ] mark appears

at the right end of a menu
item, press numeric keys
Press the [0] key to
corresponding to the selected
move to the higher level .
item number to move to a
lower level
3.3.4 Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and

Character Input menu
When a numeric value must be entered while operating this radar system, the
numeric value input screen will appear. In that case, enter a numeric value
according to the following operation method.
[JRC] gopan Radit'J Co., .lid. 3-18

JMA-9172-SA lnstructton Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
----------------------------------
3.3.4.1 Numeric value input screen
Entered value
Numeric button
-button +button
Clear button Enter button
3.3.4.2 Directly entering a numeric value
Procedures
I) On the numeric value input screen, sequentially left-click the
software number keys located on the radar screen, and enter a
desired numeric value.
For exam ple, when entering 1 -+ 2 -+ 3 -+ 4 for a bearing value, sequentially left-
click the software number keys as shown below.
ENT button.
The set value is refl ected to the operating state.
3) To stop entering a value, right-click the [ENT] button.

state.
3-19 (.JRC I 8apan Radio Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
3.3.4.3 Increasing or decreasing a numeric value
Procedures
1) On the numeric value input screen, sequentially left-click the
software button + or located on the radar screen, and
enter a desired numeric value.
For example, when adjusting 123.0° to 123.4° for a bearing value, sequentially left-click the
software number keys as shown below.
+ -. + ~ + -+ +
ENT button.
3) To stop entering a value, right-click the ENT button.

state.
3.3.4.4 Latitude/longitude input screen
MaP Center Position
Numeric button
- button (south latitude I +button (north latitude /

west longitude) east longitude )
CLR button ENT button
[.JRC ] 8apan Radio Co.,.ltd. 3-20

JMA-9172-5A lnstrucbon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
----------------------------------
3.3.4.5 Entering latitude/longitude
Procedures
1) On the latitude/longitude input screen, sequentially click numeric
buttons to enter latitude poco XX. XXX').
For example, to enter 12° 34.567', sequentially cljck numeric buttons as follows.
1 ~ 2 ~ 3 ~ 4 ~ 5 ~ 6 ~ 7
2) To make change between north latitude and south latitude, use

+ and
North latitude:Left-click the + button.
South latitude:Left-click the - button.
The manually entered lati tude value is determined. Then, enter the longitude value.
4) Sequentially click numeric buttons to enter longitude (XXXo XX.

XXX').
5) To make change between east longitude and west longitude, use

+ and
West longitude: Left-click the - button.
The manually entered longitude value is determined.
7) To cancel input, put the cursor on CLR and then left-click the
button.
The latitude/longitude input screen will close without reflecting the set va lue to the operating
state.
3-21 [.JRC ] gopan Radio Co., ..lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
----------------------------------
3.3.4.6 Character input screen
Character/Number button Entered character
Enter button
Delete button
Back Space button

Ex1t button
3.3.4.7 Entering a character
Procedures
1) On the character input screen, use trackball to select alphabet
from A to Z, numbers from 0 to 9, or symbols (only comments for
mark/line), and then left-click the ENT button to enter one
character of the name to be inputted.
For example, JRC for a name, click button as follows:
J -+ R -+ C
2) Make sure that the entered character is correct, left-click the

ENT button.
The character has been entered.
3) To cancel input, left-click the Exit button.
The character input screen will be closed without entering the character.
[~RC ] (Japan RadicJ Co., .ltd. 3 - 22

- - - ------- ------
JMA-9172-5A Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.3 OPERATION PROCEDURES
----------------------------------
3.3.5 Overview of Menu Structure
The menu structure of thi s radar system consists of eight frequently used function
menus, one main menu, and one service man menu used for the installation
settings.
Software buttons for opening those menus are displayed in the menu area located
at the bottom ten of the display.
For each menu item and structure, see the menu list in the appendix.
To prevent incorrect use, enter the special code to open the service man menu. For
operating the service man menu, see Section 7 . 1. 1 "How to Open the Serviceman
Menu (Service Man Menu) "
Frequently used functions

TT Used for operating and setting the target tracking function.
Track Used for operating and setting the other ship trails function .
AIS Used for operating and setting the AIS display function.
Route Used for operating and setting the route function .
PI Used for operating and setting the parallel-index-line function .
AZ. Used for operating and setting the automatic acquisition
activate function .
U.MAP Used for operating and setting the user map function.
Main menu
Main Used for operating and setting the functions.
Serviceman menu
This menu is used for operation and settings when a system is
installed.
It is not used during normal operation.The special code must be

entered to open the service man menu.
3-23 [.JRC] aapanRadio Co.,.ftd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
3.4.1 Interference Rejection {IR)

Interference by other radars is rejected.
Procedures
1) Left-click the IR button located at the lower left of the radar
display.
The interference rejection modes are switched.
Rejection levels of the interference rejector
IR Off : Interference rejector off/ Stagger trigger off
IR Low : Interference rejection level - low/ Stagger trigger off
IR Middle : Interference rejection level- moderate/ Stagger trigger on
IR High : Interference rejection level - high/ Stagger trigger on
When a high interference rejection level is selected, the radar ' s ability of
detecting small targets such as buoys and small boats lowers.
In general , IR Low should be selected.
Interference rejector switch link with stagger trigger switch automatically.

When a high interference rejection level is selected, the radar's ability of detecting small
targets su::h as buoys and small boats lo~rs.
In general, IR Low should be selected.
[.JRC] 3apan Radio Co., J'ld. 3-24

- --- - - - -- - -
JMA-9172-SA lnslruction Manual> 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.2 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN]
Procedures
1) Press [GAIN] dial
Values of the transmitter pulse width are switched.
Effects of transmitter pulse width
With L...l_S_P__.I selected: The transmitter pulse becomes shorter, and the
range resolution improves. The effect of
suppressing sea clutter returns and rain/snow
clutter returns heightens.
Recommended condition for selection: In bays/harbors where targets are densely

crowded. Rough sea state due to torrential rain or
stormy weather.
With I MP I selected: The normal transmitter pulse length is set. Both

range resolution and gain are appropriately set.
Recommended condition for selection: General navigation
With Ll _L_P___JI selected: The transmitter pulse becomes longer, and gain
improves. Small targets are zoomed and are easy
to observe. When the sea state is bad, detection
performance decreases.
Recommended condition for selection: Detection of small targets in good weather

conditions.
Usable transmitter pulse width differs according to the type of antenna being used
and the observation range being used. For usable pulse width, see Section 11.2
"SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1532)"
3-25 [.JRC I aopan Rt:idicJ Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.3 Target Enhance (ENH)
The dimension of video display is enlarged to enhance a target.
Procedures
I) Left-click the ENH button located at the lower left of the radar
display.
The target enlargement levels are switched.
ENH Off ::::} ENH Levell =} ENH Level2 ::::} ENH Level3 ::::} ENH Off
Effect of target enlargement
ENH Off :Expansion off Select this mode particularly when

resolution is required.
ENH Levell :Expansion small Select this mode in general. Radar echoes
are expanded by 1 scale in all directions.
ENH Level2 :Expansion medium Select this mode to easily view the radar
video. Radar echoes are expanded by 2
scales in all directions on the display.
ENH Level3 Expansion large Select this mode to detect small targets
such as buoys. The expansion near a
screen center is added to ENH Level2.
When ENH Level3 is selected, sea clutter returns and rain/

NOTE : snow clutter returns are apt to be expanded. When using this
expansion mode, operate [SEA] dial and [RAIN] dial to
suppress sea clutter return s and rain/snow clutter returns.
In general, ENH Levell or ENH Level2 should be selected.
[JRC ] 3apan RadicJ Co., .lid. 3-26

----------------------------------
3.4.4 Use Video Processing (PROC)
This function reduces unnecessary noise to highlight targets.
Attention
• If video processing mode is set to CORREL , it may
be difficult to detect high speed target.
Procedures
1) Left-click the PROC button located at the lower left of the
display.
The video processing modes are switched.
PROC Off ~ 3Scan CORREL ~ 4Scan CORREL
L Peak Hold Remain ~ SScan CORREL
Video process modes
3Scan CORREL : Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected .
4Scan CORREL : Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter
returns.
SScan CORREL : Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter
returns.
Peak Hold : Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection
probability is low.
3 - 27 [.JRC] 8opan RadkJ Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstrudlon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.5 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI MODE)
Select the bearing for the radar video to be displayed on the radar display.
Procedures
1) Left-click the AZI Mode button located at the lower left of the
display.
The bearing display modes are switched.
H Up ~ N Up ~ CUp
True Bearing Mode [North Up]
The video is di splayed so that the zenith of the PPI (0° on range rings) points to the due
north. Fixed targets do not nicker and are easily identified on the chart, a nd the true bearing
of a target can easily be read out.
Relative Bearing Mode [Head Up]
The video is di splayed so that the ship' s heading line points to the zenith of the PPI (0° on
range rings). Since targets are displayed in thei r d irections relative to the ship' s heading
line, the operator can view the video in the same field of view as in operating the ship at sea.
This mode is suitable for watching over other ships.
Course-up Bearing Mode [Course Up]
By setting the course-up mode, own ship's course is fixed so that it is located on the zenith of
the radar display (0° on range rings). In the same way as in the North-up mode, fixed targets
do not flicker, and are stabili zed even if the ship is yawi ng. The bearing of the heading line
varies by the same shift of own ship ' s course. To change the course, press th e [AZI
MODE] key several times again to select the course-up mode so as to set a new cou rse.
North HL HL
North-up mode Head-up mode Course-up mode
[.JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.ltd. 3-28

. -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -~------------------------------------
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.6 Switch True/Relative Motion Display Mode (TM/RM)
3.4.6.1 Switching Relative Motion (RM) Mode to True Motion (TM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button located at the upper left of the
radar display.
RM(T ~
The true motion mode will be selected. In the true motion mode, the own ship ' s position on
the radar display moves depending upon its speed and course and the influence of the
current. Land and other fixed targets are fixed on the radar display and only actually moving
targets move on the radar display. When the true motion mode is selected, the own ship ' s
position is set to about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course
allowing for the influence of the current. Own ship starts moving depending upon its speed
and course and the influence of the current. Subsequently, when own ship arrives at the
position of about 66% of the display radius, it is automatically reset to its initial position at
about 60% of the display radius in the opposite direction to its course allowing for the
influence of the current.
Moving depending on
own ship's speed
True Motion Display
3.4.6.2 Resetting Own Ship to its Initial Position in True Motion (TM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button for 2 seconds.
Own ship will be reset to its initial position as established when the relati ve motion mode is
changed to the true motion mode. The sh ip starts moving from that position.
3.4.6.3 Switching True Motion (TM) Mode to Relative Motion (RM) Mode
Procedures
1) Left-click the motion mode button.
RM(T ) TM
The relative motion mode will be selected. Own ship returns to the center of the radar
display.
3-29 [ .JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
3.4.7 Move Own Ship's Display Position (Off Center)
The own ship ' s position can be moved from the display center to any position
within 66% of the display radius. This function is convenient for observing a wide
coverage in any direction.
If Off Center functions set to scanner position is outside of the PPI range, when
function switching display with reference to scanner position.
0 This function is not available on the 96 NM range.
Procedures
1) Left-click the Off Center button located at the upper left of the
display.
The cross cursor mark will appear at the own ship' s position on the radar display.
2) Move the cross cursor mark (own ship' s display position) to a

desired position by using the trackball.
While the cross cursor mark i s moving, the own ship' s display position moves fo llowing
the cross cursor mark.
When it moves to a position outside 66% of the display radius, the center position is limited
to a position w ithin 66% of the display radius.
3) Press the trackball button on the left key .
The own ship's display position will be fixed to the cross cursor mark.
HL
HL
Press the [ENl] key

Move the cursor mark to
The own ship's display
a desired position
oosition will be fixed
3.4.7.1 Returning Own Ship's Position to the Center
Procedures
1) Left-click the Off Center button for 2 seconds.
The own ship position is returned to the center of the display .
[JRC] 8opan.Radio Co., .lid. 3-30

----------------------------------
3.4.8 Display Radar Trails (Trails)
Other ship's movements and speeds can be monitored from the lengths and
directions of their trails, serving for collision avoidance. The trail length varies
according to setting.
3.4.8.1 Changing the length of the trail
Procedures
1) Left-click the Radar trails display time button located at the
II
upper left of the display.
RADA R trails display t ime
Values of the length of the radar trails are switched.
Trails length setting: Short mode
Off l Ssec ~ 30sec ~ lmin
L 15min f- lOmin f- 6min 3min
Short 15sec, 30sec, 1min, 3min, 6min, 10min and 15min
Middle 30sec, 1min , 3min , 6min, 1Omin, 15m in and 30m in
Long 1min, 3min , 6min, 10min, 15min, 30min and 60min
Saved trails cannot be erased even when the trail lengths are changed by using T rails button.
Even after the trails display is turned off, the past trails can be displayed traced back by
setting a desired time.
The radar system is start transmission, trails is start plot.
The system is plotting trails even while the trails display is off.
I f the transm it time is short, the indicated trai ls duration may not have ach ieved the specified
time. The radar trails remaining time is indicated at the right of the trails length setting.
3.4.8.2 Erasing Trails Data
Procedures
1) Hold down the Trails button for five seconds located at the
A ll the saved trails data wi ll be erased. The system starts plotting trai ls in initial state. When
Trails button is clicked for 2 seconds, a RADAR Trails Setting menu will be displayed.
Furthermore, data wi ll be erased if it continues p ushing.
3 - 31 [.JRC ] 8opan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.8.3 Trails Motion Mode
There are two ty pes of trails: relative motion trai ls and true motion trai ls.
Relative motion The system plots the trails of a target at a position relative to
trails: the own ship. The operator can easily judge whether the target
is approaching the own ship. While the own ship is moving , the
system also plots the trails of land and other fixed targets.
True motion The system plots the absolute motion trails of a target,
trails: irrespective of the own ship's position. The operator can easily
judge the course and speed of the target. The system does not
plot the trails of land and other fixed targets.
HL HL
True Motion Trails Ship Relative Motion Trai ls
Trails modes provided with this system vary depending on the motion mode.
With true motion (TM} Only the true motion trails mode is available.
mode:
With relative motion The relative motion trails mode or true motion trails
(RM) mode: mode isselectable.
RM(R) is indicated while the relative motion
trails mode is active.
RM(T) is indicated while the true motion trails

mode is active.
Whi le the true motion trails mode is active, this system enables the conti nuous use of true
motion trai ls even if any of the following operations is performed:
• Motion display mode change (TM/RM)
• T M reset
• Bearing display mode change
• Center move (Off Center)
• MAP display o n/off (Map)
Accurate true bearing signals and speed signals are necessary

for using the tru e motion trails mode.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.8.4 Changing Motion Mode of Trails (Trails Mode)
Procedures
L) Click the Trails Mode located at the upper right of the radar
display.
RADAR trai ls true/ relative
T {::} R
3-33 (JRC] 8 opan Radio Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
3.4.9 Zoom (x2}
This function doubles the size of radar video near a specified position.
NOTE: If the range is 0.125 NM . this function is not available.
Procedures
1) Left-click the x2 button located at the lower left of the display.
The zoom mode is selected.
2) Subsequently, put the cross cursor mark on a location you want

to zoom into, and press the left key of the trackball.
The zoom is set.
Using the cross cursor mark as reference, the zoom function doubles the size of a radar video
with the midpoint between the cursor mark and own ship ' s position being set to the center
of radar display.
HL
Cursor mark
Own ship's Center of

position radar display
Own Ship's Position before Own Ship's Position after

Zooming position Zooming position
Cancel
J) Left-click the x2 button located at the lower left of the
display.
The zoom mode is cancelled.
( ~Rc ] 8apanRodioCo.,.ftd. 3 - 34
- - - -- -- - - - - - - ------------
----------------------------------
3.4.1 0 Hide/Display Range Rings [HL OFF]
Procedures
HL
1) Press the [HL OFF] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Off
The ship's heading line (HL) is hidden while the [HL OFF] key is held down.
The ship's heading line that indicates the course of own shjp is always shown on the radar
display. The heading line is hidden while the [HL OFF] key is held down, so the targets on
the heading line can be easi ly observed.
3.4.11 Hide Graphics Information on Radar Display [DATA OFF]
Various graphics information such as target tracking TT/AIS symbols, NAY lines,
and MAP information is shown on the radar display of this radar system, and may
make it difficu lt to view the radar video. In that case, use this function to
temporarily hide unnecessary graphics information.
Procedures
Data
1) Press the [DATA OFF] key. Alternatively, Left-click the Off
While the key is pressed, graphics data other than VRM, EBL, HL, cross cursor mark, and
range rings on the radar display is temporarily hidden.
3-35 [.JRC] aapan.Radio Co.,.J.'Jd.

----------------------------------
3.4.12 Switch Day/Night Mode [DAY/NIGHT]
Several combinations of the display color and brilliance according to the ambient
lighting conditions are provided. The display color setting is easily changed.
Procedures
I ) Press the [DAY/NIGHT] key. Alternatively, left-click the Day/Night
TheDA Y/NJGHT modes are switched.
Dayl ~ Day2 ~ Day3 ~ Dusk ~
L Day2 ~ Day3 ~ Dusk ~ Night
The current mode is displayed at the lower right of the radar display.
For how to set the display color and brilliance for each mode, see Section 3.8.5 "Set Radar
Display (Display Setting)"
3.4.13 Adjust Operation Panel Brilliance [PANEL]
Adjust brilliance of the operation panel according to the ambient lighting

conditions.
Procedures Panel
1) Press the [PANEL] key. Alternatively, left-click the 0
In consideration of the ambient brightness, adjust panel brilliance that is high enough to read
the characters on the operation panel but does not g lare.
The [PANEL] key lamp lights up irrespective of panel brilliance adjustment.
lJRC] 3opan Radio Co., .lid. 3-36

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.4 GENERAL RADAR OPERATION
----------------------------------
3.4.14 Set True Bearing
When the GYRO IfF is used to enter a gyro signal, there is a rare case in which a
true bearing value indicated by the master gyro does not match the true bearing
value indicated by this radar system.
In that case, adjust the true bearing value of thi s system so that it matches the
value indicated by the master gyro.
Procedures
1) Open the numeric value input screen to enter a true bearing
value by performing the menu operation below.
Main
~ 1. Gyro Setting
2) Enter a value indicated by the master gyro on the numeric value

input screen.
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Section
3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input
menu".
3.4.15 Set Own Ship Speed
3.4.15.1 Switch the own ship speed device
Procedures
Information area located at the upper right of the display.
The speed sensor is switched whenever the button is clicked.
MAN (Manual) --+ LOG (Single-axis water log) --+ 2AXW (Dual-axis water log) ~
L GPS (GPS) +- 2AXG (Dual-axis ground log)
3-37 [.JRC ] 8opanRadio Co.,.i'Jd.

----------------------------------
NOTE: •If the single axis water log display can present the speed of
the ship in other than the forward direction, the direction of
movement should be indicated unambiguously. Therefore
sing le axis water logs cannot detect the effect of leeway.
•If you selected the 2AXW, the value of forward-backward
direction is indicated.
•If ships in shallow water, when the accuracy of the dual-axis
log may be decreased. If ships in deep sea area, when the
accuracy of the dual-axis log error may be occurred .
•The accuracy of GPS's COG is± 3° when own ships speed
no fewer than 1kn, no more than 17kn. The accuracy of
GPS's COG is ± 1o when own ships speed over 17kn.
3.4.15.2 Input the own ship speed (Manual Speed)

If the ship-speed system , such as LOG, etc., connected to this radar system
malfunctions, it is possible to manually enter own ship speed by the method
described below to use the target tracking (TT) and true motion display functions.
Procedures
Information area located at the upper right of the display, and
select the manual mode MAN .
2) Left-click the value of the speed.
The numeric value input screen wi ll open to enter the own ship speed.
3) Enter the value for the own ship speed on the numeric value
input screen.
3.4.16 Magnet Compass Correction (MAG Compass Setting)

Set the correction value, when the radar receive HDM sentence from magnet
compass or the variation of HDG is NULL.
Procedures
I) Open the MAG Compass Setting menu by performing the
Main
~ 2. MAG Compass Setting
[.JRC] 8opan Radio Co., .ltd. 3 - 38

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BAS IC OPERATION > 3 4 GENERAL RADAR O PERATION
----------------------------------
1. Heading Correction
Off On
3) Input the correction value.
Press the + or button to select south and north for latitude or the east and west
for longitude.
For how to input numeric data on the nume ric value input screen, see Section 3.3 .4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character In put menu".
3.4.16.1 Set Drift Correction

The direction and speed of the drift are set
This function can be used only when MAN or LOG is selected for ship-speed
data.
Procedures
1) Open the Set/Drift Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 3. Set/Drift Setting

1. Correction
Off On
For menu operation, see Section 3.3.3 "Basic Menu Operation".
3) Enter the correction value for tidal current.
2.Set : Direction of tidal current (true bearing)
3.Drift : Speed of tidal current
"Operation on Nume ric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input menu".
3-39 I..JRC I aapan Radio Co.,.f'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstructJon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
The own ship's track function saves and disp lays own ship's track.
Jf navigation equipment is connected, this radar system records latitude/longitude

data sent from the navigation equipment and displays own ship's track.
NOTE: Even when own ship's track storage interval is turned

Off , own ship's track can be displayed. However, in this
case, if rewrite operation such as changing of the display
range is performed for the radar display, own ship's track
display is erased and the track will not be plotted again.
If the own ship track display is turned off when own ship
track is in storage, own ship's tracks are not shown on the
radar display, but own ship's track is still saved.
The own ship's track function is available between latitudes

of 85° N and 85° S.
3.5.1 Display Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track)
Procedures
1) Left-click the Own Track Color Track button located at the
lower right of the display.
Own Track Interval
Map On/Off
The color of the own ship's track are switched.
Off White ~ Gray
L Red <- Pink Yellow Green
2) Left-click the Map button located at the lower right of the

display.
The map di splay function is turned on Ma p or off
When Color is selected, the own ship's track is displayed.
[.JRC] 3opanRadio Co.,.J.'Jd. 3 - 40

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.2 Set Display Color of Own Ship's Track (Display Own Track
Color)
Own ship's track can be saved in seven different colors.
Own ship's track can be displayed or not displayed individually by color.
Procedures
1) Open the Display Own Track Setting menu by performing the
menu operation
Track
---+ 1. DISP Own Track Color
The Display Own Track Setting menu will open.
Operati ons differ according to the following set modes.0
When I 1. All I is set to On All of own ship's tracks are displayed.
When I 1. All I is set to Off All of own ship's tracks are not displayed.
When I 1. All I is set to Individual Settings are made by color by performing the
operation below.
2) Left-click the color button for the desired display setting which is
to be changed.
Display of each item is switched between On and Off
On : Own ship's track plotted by the color is displayed.
Off : Own ship's track plotted by the color is not displayed.
3 - 41 [JRC] dOfXii'J Radio Co., J'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstruct1on Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.3 Save Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory)
To save own ship's track, storage at a specified time interval and at a specified
range interval can be selected.
The track storage interval can be selected from I 0 preset time intervals and 8
preset range intervals.
Storage intervals that can be selected

Time: 3 sec, 5 sec, 10 sec, 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min , 5 min , 10 min, 30 min, and 60 min
Range: 0.1 NM, 0.2 NM, 0.3 NM, 0.5 NM, 1 NM, 3 NM, 5 NM, and 10 NM
Procedures
I) Left-click the Own Track Interval unit button located at the lower
Every time the button is clicked, the units of measure for the storage are switched.
Own Track Interval

Own Track Color
Map On/Off
of the display.
Every time the button is clicked, storage intervals are switched.
3.5.4 Cancel Saving of Own Ship's Track (Own Track Memory)

Storage of own ship's track can be turned off.
Cancel
I) Left-click the Own Track Interval button located at the lower right
of the display.
Every time the button is clicked, interval for track storage are switched.
When Off is selected, the storage fu nction is turned off.
3-42
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.5 Clear Own Ship's Track (Clear Own Track)
This function cancels the storing of own ship's track.
Procedures
1) Open the Clear Own Track Color menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Track
---t 2. Clear Own Track Color
The Clear Own Track Color menu will appear.
2) Left-click the button for the color to be deleted.
All : All tracks are deleted
White I Gray I Blue I Red I Pink I Yellow I Green

Only track of specified color is deleted.
After the item has been selected, Clear Own Track Confirmation Window will appear.
3) Left-click the Yes button.
Own ship's track indicated by the specified color will be deleted.
3.5.6 Use Expanded Own Ship's Track (Own Track Type)
The following expanded track functions can be used for this radar system.
Water temperature track : The water temperature value at the latitude/longitude is

recorded.
Water depth track : The water depth value at the latitude/longitude is recorded.
Tidal current track : The tidal current vector at the latitude/longitude is recorded.
Only one type of expanded own ship's track can be used at a time. Multiple types
of expanded tracks cannot be used at the same time.
Specify the type of the expanded own ship's tracks to be used by performing the
operation below.
3 - 43 [ .JRC l aapan Radio Co.,.tid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
Procedures
I ) Left-click the Track button located at the lower right of the
display.
Track menu
The Own Track Menu will appear.
2) Left-click the item button of 3. Track Type
The numeric value of the navigation data can be shown by the color of own ship's track.
Normal : The expanded own ship's track function is not used.
Depth : The color of the tracks is changed according to the water

depth value
Temperature :The color of the tracks is changed according to the water

temperature value.
4) Left-click the item button of 4. Num Vector Display
Numeric value or vector of navigation data can be added to own ship's track.
Off : Numeric value and vector are not added .
Depth : Water depth value is added .
Temperature : Water temperature value is added.
Current :current vector is added.

NOTE: To use the expanded own ship's track function , the track
must be entered from the special navigation equipment
into this radar system.
[JRC] 3opan.RadicJ Co.,.lid. 3 - 44

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.7 Use Water Depth Track (Water Depth Track)
Set the corresponding cond itions for the water depth value and the color of own
ship's track by performing the operation below.
Procedures
1) Open the Water Depth Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Track
--+ 6. Water Depth Setting
The Water Depth Setting menu will appear.
Enter a value of the boundary water depth for each item according to the table below to set
up the corresponding conditions for the water depth value and the color of own ship's track.
Water depth Color of track

value
White
1. xxxxm Min
Gray
2. xxxx m
Blue
3. xxxx m
Green
4. xxxx m
Yellow
5. xxxx m
Pink
6. xxxx m Max
Red
For example, if I Om is entered for I. , 30m is entered for 2. , and 50m is entered for 3. , the
area with a water depth of less than I 0 meters is indicated by white tracks, the area with a
water depth of I 0 to 30 meters is indicated by gray tracks, and the area wi th a water depth of
30 to 50 meters is indicated by blue tracks.
3-45 [..JRC I 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstructton Manual> 3.BASIC OPERATION> 35 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.8 Use Water Temperature Track (Water TEMP Track)
Set the corresponding condjtions for the water temperature value and the color of
own ship's track by perfonning the operation below.
Procedures
I ) Open the Water TEMP. Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below
Track
~ 7. Water TEMP. Setting
The Water TEMP. Setting menu will appear.
Enter a val ue of the boundary water temperature for each item according to the table below
to set up the corresponding conditions for the water temperature va lue and th e color of own
ship's track.
Water temperature Color of track

value
White
1. xx.x °C Min
Gray
2. xx.x °C
Blue
3 . xx.x °C
Green
4 . xx.x °C
Yellow
5. xx.x °C
Pink
6. xx.x °C Max
Red
For example, if I 0.0 C is entered for I. , 13 .0 C is entered for 2. , and 15.0 is entered for
3. , the area w ith a water temperature of less than I O.O "C is indi cated by wh ite tracks, the
area with a water depth of J 0.0 to 13.0 oC is indicated by gray tracks, and the area with a
water depth of l 3.0 oC to 15.0 "C is indicated by blue tracks.
[.JRC l aapan Radio eo.,.lid. 3 - 46

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 5 USE OWN SHIP'S TRACK
----------------------------------
3.5.9 Use Tidal Current Track (Current Vector Track)
Set the conditions for adding tidal current vectors to own ship's track by
perforrning the operation below.
Procedures
I) Open the Current Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Track
~ 8.CurrentSeDng
The Current Selling menu w ill appear.
Set the tidal current vector display conditions.
[1]Length of the tidal current vector (Current Size)

• Set the length of the tidal current vector.
• The unit of measure is kn/cm.
• If 1.0kn/cm is set, a tidal current of 1.0kn is shown as a one-centimeter line
[2]Color of the vector for tidal current layer A (Layer A)

• Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer A.
[3]Color of the vector for tidal current layer B (Layer B)

• Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer B.
[4]Color of the vector for tidal current layer C (Layer C)

• Set the vector's display color for tidal current layer C.
3 - 47 !.JRC] gopanRadi.o Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172.SA lnstructton Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 36 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
DISPLAY USER MAP
Up to 20,000 items of NAY lines, coastlines, depth contours, and NAY marks can
be created, disp layed, loaded, and saved. (This function is avai lable only when
navigation equipment is connected to this radar system.)
Marks that can be used : 29 types
Lines that can be used : 3 types (solid, broken, and dashed-dotted line)
Color of mark and lines : 7 colors

that can be used
If radar video is poor visibility caused by user map function ,

press the [DATA OFF] key to map displays temporarily off.
NOTE: The user map function is available between latitudes of asv Nand asv S.
3.6.1 Create User Map (Mark/Line)

In this system, when the radar is in the transmission state, the user map is
displayed all the time. However, valid latitude/longitude data and true bearing
data must be entered into the system.
The user map can be created and edited by perfom1ing the following operation.
3.6.1 .1 Plotting a mark
Procedures
I) Left-click the ICursor button located at the upper right
of the display to set the Mark mode.
Mark font I line pattern Mark color I line color
Cursor mode swil:<:hing ~switching switching
The mark font LO be used is displayed to the right of Ule ._Ic_u_rs_o_r_ __ _ __.l bu!Lon.
[JRC] gopan.Radio Co.,bd. 3-48

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
2) Left-click the mark font L-----~
0 button to select a font for the
mark.
The mark fonts arc switched.
3) Left-click the c button located to the right of the mark font to

select a color for the mark.
The color for the mark font located to the right ofthelL C_u_rs_o_r_ _ _ _..~l bulton will
change.
The specified mark wi ll be displayed in the specified color.
To create another mark, repeat the above procedures.
3.6.1.2 Plotting a line
Procedures
1) Left-click the Icursor I button located at the upper right
of the display to select the line mode.
The line pattern to be used is displayed to the right of the ._Ic_u_rs_o_r_ _ _ __,l button.
2) Left-click the _ __ __ __ button located at the upper right of the

display to select the line pattern.
The line pattern to be used is displayed to the right of the I._C_u_rs_o_r_ _ _ __,I button.
3) Left-click the c button located to the right of the line pattern to

select a color for the line.
The color for the line pattern located to the right ofthel._C_u_rs_o_r_ _ _ __,l button will
change.
Line colors are switched.
3-49 !"'Rc] 8orxznRadio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA lnslructton Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
5) Move the cursor to a desired location on the radar display and
left-click.
A line is plotted between the previous poin t and the end point. Repeat this procedure so that
sequential lines can be plotted.
6) When you want to finish plotting the line, left-click at the

previous point.
Line plotting v. ill be terminated. To plot another line, repeat procedures 3.
3.6.1 .3 Plotting a mark / line make with latitude and longitude
Procedures
operation.
U.Map
---+ 2. Make with L/ L
2) Left-click the 9. New Mark Input button.
The Mark Input menu and the Li ne Input menu are switched .
3) Left-click the item button of 1. Type to select the type of

mark font or line pattern to be created.
The desired mark font or line pattern is selected.
To add a line, select midpoint -0-.
4) Left-cl ick the item button of 2. Color to select the color of

mark or line to be created.
The desired mark or line color is selected.
3-50
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
5) Left-click the 3. LJL button to input the latitude I
longitude.
For the input method on the latitude I longitude input screen, see ection 3.3.4.5 "Entering
latitude/longitude"
6) Left-click the 4. Comment button to input the comment.
For the input method on the character input screen, see Section 3.3.4. 7 "Entering a character"
The window wi ll not be open when the system is in the transmission state.
7) Left-click the 5. Enter button.
Mark I Line plotting will be terminated.
To create another mark or line, repeat procedures 4 to 7.
3.6.2 Set User Map Display (Mark Display Setting)
The user map can be individually di splayed (On) or hidden (Oft).
Setting by type: Setting can be made by mark font and line pattern.
Setting by color: Setting can be made by color of mark or line.
The mark font di splay size can be selected.
Normal: The mark is displayed in normal size.

Small: The mark is displayed in a size smaller than usual.
3.6.2.1 Setting display by type

Procedures
1) Open the Display Mark Type menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.Map
---7 5. Mark Display Setting
---7 1. Display Mark Type
3-51 I~Rc ) JapanRadioCo.,.lJd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstructJon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
The Display Mark Type menu will open.
2) Specify whether to turn on or off the display for each type of

mark and line.
When 1. All I is selected, the setting will renect to all types of marks and lines.
Off : All types are not displayed .
Individual : All types are displayed.
On : Setting by type is activated.
3.6.2.2 Setting display by color
Procedures
I) Open the Display Mark Color Type menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.Map
-t 5. Men Display Setting
-t 2. Display Mark Color
The Display Mark Color Type menu will open.
2) Specify whether to turn on or off the display for each color type
of mark and line.
When 1. All I is selected , the setting will reflect to all color types of marks and
lines.
Off : All color types are not displayed.
Individual : Setting by color type is activated.
On : All color types are displayed .
3.6.2.3 Setting the mark font size
Procedures
I) Open the Mark Size menu by performing the menu operation
below.
U.Map
-t 5. Mark Display Setting
-t 3. Select Mark Size
The Mark Size menu will appear.
[~Rc ] gapan.RadicJ Co., .lid. 3-52

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
2) Specify the mark font size.
Normal : The mark is displayed in normal size.
3.6.2.4 Setting the character size for comments
Procedures
1) Open the Comment Font Size menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.Map
~ 5. Marl< Display Setting
~ 4 . Comment Font Size
T he Comment Font Size menu will appear.
2) Specify the comment font size.
Normal : The characters for comments are displayed in normal size.
Small : The characters for comments are displayed in a size smaller

than usual.
3.6.3 Edit User Map (Edit User Map)
3.6.3.1 Manually entering the own ship position (Own Ship Position)
Use this function when ediLing navigation data for a location different from the own ship
position.
Procedures
1) Open the Own Ship Position menu by performing the menu
operation below.
U.Map
~ 1. ONn Ship Position
The number key screen for e ntering the latitude/longitude of the Own Ship Position will
appear.
3-53 [ .JRC I ac;pan. Raclio Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
2) Use the number buttons o to 9 to enter a value of latitude
0
(XX XXX.xxx').
3) To make changes between north latitude and south latitude, use

the + and buttons.
North latitude : Left-click the + button.
South latitude : Left-click the button.
The manually ente red latitude wi ll be dete rmined. Then, ente r the value o f longitude.
5) Use the number buttons o to 9 to enter a value of longitude

0
(XX XXx.xxx').
6) To make changes between east longitude and west longitude,

use the + and buttons.
West longitude: Left-click the button.
The manually entered longitude will be determined.
NOTE: The own ship's position manually entered by using the

function above is valid only in the navigation data setting
menu. After exiting from the menu, the manually entered
position data is invalidated .
3.6.3.2 Moving a mark or line (Move)

With regard to the created user map. a mark or line is moved indiv id ually.
Procedures
operation.
U.Map
~ 2. Edit User Map
The Edit User Map menu wi ll a ppear.
2) Left-c lick the 3. Move button.
[.JRC] 8apan Radio Co.,.lid. 3 - 54

JMA-9172-SA lnstrucbon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
The user map move mode is selected.
Move Map I is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display.
When a mark or line to be moved is selected, the + cursor mark will appear.
The selected mark or line is moved to the destination.

To move another mark or line, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

o.Exit button.
The cursor mode changes to the nonnal operation mode, terminating the user map move
mode.
(Example)
I,
I '
/ ',~
II '
I '
I '
I ',
I '
I '
' '·
3-55 I~RC ] gopan Radio Co., .J'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 36 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
3.6.3.3 Deleting a mark or line (Delete)
With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is deleted individually.
Procedures
operation.
U.Map
~ 2. Edit User Map
Delete I is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display.
The entire selected mark or line is deleted.
To delete another mark or line, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

o.Exit button.
The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map delete
mode.
[JRC) !Japan Radio Co., .lid. 3-56

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
3.6.3.4 Inserting a vertex into a line (Insert/Move Vertex)
With regard to the created user map, a vertex is inserted into a line.
Procedures
operation.
U.Map
-t 2. Edit User Map
The Ed it User Map menu w ill appear.
2) Left-click the 5. Insert/ Move Vertex button.
The user map insert/correction mode is selected.
IInsert/ Move I is displayed in the c ursor mode located the upper right of the d isplay.
3) Put the cursor to a side line into which a vertex will be inserted,
and left-click.
A vertex is inserted into the selected li ne, and the + cursor mark wi ll be displayed.
4) Move t h e + cursor mark to the newly inserted vertex, and left-

click.
To insert another vertex, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

O.Exit button.
Th e cursor mode changes to the norm al operation mode, terminating the user map insertion/
correction mode.
3- 57 [.JRC] aapan.Radi.o Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstructJon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
(Example)
The side line into wh ich
a vertex is inserted
Inserted vertex
3.6.3.5 Correcting the mark or vertex of a line (Insert/Move Vertex)

With regard to the created user map, a mark or line is corrected.
Procedures
operation.
U.Map
~ 2. Edit User Map
2) Left-click the 5. Insert/ Move Vertex button.
The user map insertion/correction mode is selected.
IInsert/Move I is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the display.
+
3) Put the cursor on the mark or vertex of a line, and left-click.
When the mark or vertex of a line to be corrected is selected, the cursor mark will
appear.
The selected mark or vertex of the line is moved to the destination.
To correct another mark or vertex of a line, repeat procedures 3 and 4.

O.Exit button.
["RC] gapan Radio Co.,.J'Jd. 3 -58

JMA-9172-SA lnstructlon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
The cursor mode changes to the normal operation mode, terminating the user map
insertion/correction mode.
(Example)
Original vertex
New vertex
3.6.3.6 Deleting a mark or vertex from a line (Delete Vertex)

With regard to the created user map, a vertex is deleted individually from a mark or line.
Procedures
operation.
U.Map
T he Edi t User Map menu wi ll appear.
2) Left-click the 6. Delete Vertex button.
Delete I is displayed in the cursor mode located at the upper right of the radar display.
3) Put the cursor on the vertex of a mark or line, and left-click.
The selected mark or vertex of the li ne is deleted.
All of the lines drawn by joining two points are deleted.
To delete another mark or vertex of a line, repeat procedure 3.

o.Exit button.
3 - 59 (..JRC] gopanRadi.o Co.,.l.td.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
The cursor mode changes to the nom1al operation mode, terminating the user map delete
mode.
(Example)
The vertex to be deleted
3.6.3.7 Batch clearing marks or lines (Clear)

With regard to the created user map, marks or lines are batch cleared by type or by color.
Procedures
operation.
U.Map
2)- 1 Left-click the item button of I 7. Delete by Type
Select the type of marks or lines to be deleted.
To select all types, select All
For example, to delete "red 0 " marks, select 0
2)-2 Left-click the item button of I 7. Delete
Select the color of marks or lines to be deleted.
To select all colors, select All
For example, to clear "red 0 " marks, select Red
After the items have been selected, Confirmation Window will appear.
[.JRC] 8opon.RadioCo.,.lJd. 3-60

r - - - - -- -- - - - - - - - ---
----------------------------------
The selected mark will be deleted.
NOTE: If data is not copied on the flash memory card (option), the data
is not be reloaded.
3.6.4 Correct Position on User Map (Shift User Map)
3.6.4.1 Correcting the display position on the user map (Shift)

If the display position on the user map is difTerent from an actual position, it can be changed
to the correct position in manual mode.
Procedures
J) Open the [Shift] menu by performing the menu operation below.
U.Map
3. Shift
Shift is displayed for the Cursor mode, indicating th at the user map shift mode is
selected.
2) Put the pointer on a mark or end of a line, coastline, or depth

contour line, and left-click.
3) Move the cross cursor mark to the location to be corrected, and

left-click.
Positions of all marks and lines currently displayed will be corrected.
At this time, Map Shift is displayed in the map position correction (lower right or the
display), indicating that the position is being corrected.
3-61 [.JRC I aopan RadkJ Co., Ltd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstructJon Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
3.6.4.2 Restoring the corrected user map to its original state (Shift Clear)
Procedures
menu operation.
U.Map
4. Shift Clear
Only the most recently corrected data (for a single input) will be cleared, and the data will be
displayed at its original position.
At this time, Map Shift is not displayed in the map position correcti on (lower right of the
display).
3.6.5 Save User Map
3.6.5.1 Loading navigation data (Load User Map)
Procedures

menu operation.
U.Map
-+ 7. File Operation
3) Left-click the item button of j1. Select Card Slot and select the
card slot.
4) Left-click the item button of 2. Load Mode and select

Add Ill Overwrite 1.
Add Iand I Overwrite Iof the Load Mode items are switched.
When [Add) is selected, new data is added to the savedd data. When [Overwrite) is selected,
the saved data is overwritten.
(.JRC] 8apan RadicJ Co.,.lid. 3-62

JMA-9172-SA lnstrucbon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
The list of navigation data saved in the system will be displayed.
Continuation Window will appear.
The selected navigation data will be loaded and displayed on the radar display.
3.6.5.2 Discarding navigation data (Unload User Map)
Procedures
menu operation.
U.Map
~ 7. File Operation
2) Left-click the 4. Unload button.
Unload Confinnation Window will appear.
3) Lett-click the 1. Yes button.
The saved navigation data will be discarded.
3.6.5.3 Storing navigation data (Save User Map)

Navigation data can be saved when navigation equipment is connected, or the own ship
position on the user map is entered in the manual mode.
Procedures
3-63 IJRC I aopon Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-5A lnstructJon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 36 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
menu operation.
U.Map
~ 7. File Operation
card slot.
Slot I and Slot2 of the elect Card Slot items are switched.
The Input File Name screen will appear.
Up to I 0 characters can be entered. For the input method on the character input screen, see
ection 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".
Aficr the data has been entered, Confirmation Window will appear.
Navigation data currently being displayed is saved.
3.6.5.4 Clearing the saved navigation data (Erase User Map)
Procedures

menu operation.o
U.Map
~ 7. File Operation
card slot.
lot I and lot2 of the elect Card lot items are switched.
[~RC] (Japan RadicJ Co., .lid. 3 - 64

----------------------------------
The Erace screen will appear.
5) Click numeric buttons corresponding to the number for the file to

be deleted.
The selected navigation data is deleted and the name of the file is deleted from the list.
3.6.5.5 Displaying saved navigation data (Card Mark Display)
Procedures

menu operation.
U.Map
--+ 7. File Operation
3) Left-click the item button of 11. Select Card Slot land select the
card slot.
lot I and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.
4) Left-click the 7. Card Mark Display button.
The Card Mark Display screen wi ll appear.
The list of navigat ion data saved in the card will be displayed.
5) Left-click the button corresponding to the number for the file to

be displayed.
Confirm ation Window will appear.
The selected navigation data will be displayed.
3-65 [.JRC ] 8apan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstrucllon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 6 DISPLAY USER MAP
----------------------------------
3.6.6 Set and Display Geodetic System (Geodetic)
To create navigation information, set the geodetic system that is used with the
connected navigation equipment. When navigation information is loaded, the
geodetic system used when the navigation information was saved, is displayed.
Make sure that the di splayed geodetic system is identica l to the one used with the
navigation equipment. If the two geodetic systems are different, the positions of
navigation information on the radar display will be shifted. Therefore, it is
important to set the geodetic system of the navigation equipment.
[1] Setting the geodetic system for navigation data to be saved (Geodetic)
Procedures
1) Open the Geodetic menu by performing the following menu
operation.
U.Map
6. Geodetic
The numeric value input screen for Geodeti c will appear.
2) Enter the desired geodetic system number.
The geodetic system is determined.
For how to input numeric datas on the numeri c value input screen, see Sectio n 3.3.4
"Operati on on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input menu".
[2] Displaying the geodetic system of the navigation data being displayed (Geodetic)
Procedures
1) Load navigation data by referring to Section 3.6.5.1 "Loading
navigation data (Load User Map)".

menu operation.
U.Map
The geodetic system wi ll be displayed in the 6. Geodetic fi eld.
[.JRC] f}apon Radio Co.,.lid. 3-66

. -----------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------
Table3-1 : Geodetic System List
#NAME
0 WGS-84
1 WGS-72
2 Japan
3 North American 1927(U.S)
4 North American 1927(Canada & Alaska)
5 European 1950 (Europe)
6 Australian geodetic 1966 (Australia)
7 Ordnance Survey of Great Britain (England)
8 NAD-83
9 - (No Use)
10 -(No Use)
11 ADINDAN (Ethiopia & Sudan)
12 ARC 1950 (Botswana)
13 AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 (Australia)
14 BERMUDA 1957 (Bermuda islands)
15 BOGOTA OBSERVATORY (Colombia)
16 CAMPO INCHAUSPE (Argentine)
17 CHATHAM 1971 (Chatham Islands)
18 CHUA ASTRO (Paraguay)
19 CORREGO ALEGRE (Brazil)
20 DJAKARTA (VATAVIA) (Sumatra)
21 EUROPEAN 1979 (Europe)
22 GEODETIC DATUM 1949 (New Zealand)
23 GUAM 1963 (Guam)
24 HAYFORD 1910 (Finland)
25 HJORSEY 1955 (Iceland)
26 INDIAN (India & Nepal)
27 IRELAND1965 (Ireland)
28 KERTAU 1948 (West Malaysia)
29 L.C.5 ASTRO (Cayman Brae Island)
30 LIBERIA 1964 (liberia)
31 LUZON (Philippines)
32 MERCHICH (Morocco)
33 MINNA (Nigeria)
34 NAHRWAN (Oman)
35 NAPARIMA, BWI (Trinidad & Tobago)
36 OLD EGYPTIAN (Egypt)
37 OLD HAWAIIAN (Hawaii)
38 PICO DE LAS NIEVES (Canary Islands)
39 PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 (South America)
40 PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 (South Chile)
41 PUERTO RICO (Puerto Rico & Virgin Islands)
42 QORNOQ (South Greenland)
43 RT90 (Sweden)
44 SANTA BRAZ (San Miguel island & Santa Maria islands)
45 SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 (South America)
46 SOUTHWEST BASE (Faial & Sao Jorge & Pice & Graciosa & Terce~ra ISland)
47 TIMBALAI 1948 (Brunei & East Malaysia)
48 -(No Use)
49 -(No Use)
3-67 [.JRC J gopan Radio Co.,.rtd.

JMA-9172-$A Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
USE ROUTE FUNCTION
In this radar system, a destination mark set by navigation equipment can be

displayed, and a simple route can be created, displayed, loaded and saved. (To use
thi s function, navigation equipment must be connected to this system)
1"7'\ If radar video is poor visibility caused by route function, click the
\V Map button to turn off the Map function. Otherwise, press the
[DATA OFF] key to map displays temporarily off.
NOTE: The user map function is available between latitudes of 85u Nand 85u S.
3.7.1 Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route)

fn this radar system , the following route and destination marks can be displayed.
Route Route created in the radar system , ECDIS and GPS are displayed.
Destination mark Destination marks sent from outside navigation equipment are
displayed.
Procedures
1) Left-click the Route button located at the lower right of the
radar display.
The Route Menu will appear.
2) Set the 11. Select Route item.
The following route/destination mark display modes can be se lected.
Off Route and destination marks are not displayed.
Internal Route saved in the system are displayed .
NMEA Destination marks are displayed by using WPT data

sent from outside navigation equipment.i
ECDIS/GPS Route created in the ECDIS and GPS are displayed.ii
i. I I
To display the O WP mark on the radar display, NMEA select. The
destination mark is displayed only when lhe Waypoint data is received from
outside by using the NMEA sentence (RMB,BWC,BWR).
ii When the system display Roule which are created in the ECDIS, following items
are not displayed.
• XTL
• Arrival Radius
• ROT
• Turn Radius
• Time Zone
• Sail
[.JRC] 8opan Radio Co.,.lid. 3-68

. ---------------
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
3.7.1 .1 Displaying route created by the radar system (Internal)
In this radar system, route created by the radar system are displayed as shown below.
Planned Course
j ~001 Route alarm line

Waypolnt
004
07~
vector
~ 2.5a<n
~ABCDE
Wa omt number
Planned Speed
Route
Route alarm line
The following rout data is displayed.
Waypoint : Up to 512 points (number: 000 to 511), comments can be entered.
To Waypoint : Next Waypoint is displayed in a light blue circle.
Route : A route line that connects Waypoints.
Planned Courese : Scheduled route between Waypoints (automatically calculated).
Planned Speed : Scheduled sailing speed between Waypoints (entered by user).
Waypoint alarm circle : T he circle that shows the distance to judge arrival in Waypoint.
Route alarm line : The line that shows the distance width to judge route alarm.
Waypoint bearing vector : A vector line that shows next destination from own ship's CCRP.
3.7.2 Edit Route (Set Route Sequence)
In this radar system, it is possible to easily create and correct route by performing
operation on the radar display.
3.7.2.1 Initializing route data (New Monitor Route)

Route data saved in th e radar system is initialized.
Once route data is initialized , route data saved in the

NOTE: radar system's storage section is deleted. If there is
necessary route data, save the route data on the flash
memory card before initializing it.
3-69 [.JRC] (Japan. Radio Co.,.i'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstructton Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
Procedures
operation below.
Route
2) Left-click the 7. New Monitor Route button.
Confirmatio n Window will appear.
The saved route data will be deleted.
3.7.2.2 Adding a Waypoint (Add Waypoint)

Procedures
I ) Open the Set Route Sequence menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
2) Left-click the 2. Add button.
The Waypoint adding mode is selected .
The rubber band from the last Waypoint to the cursor position will be displayed on the radar
display.
3) Left-click the location at wh ich you want to add a Waypoint.
When a Waypoint is added, the va lue of the Planned Speed in th e section up to the menu is
used for the Planned peed value up to the added Waypoi nt.
[.JRC) Japan Radio Co., ..lid. 3 - 70

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
4) To add another Waypoint, repeat procedure 3.
5) To finish adding a Waypoint, left-click twice at the last Waypoint.
T he Waypoint adding mode is cancelled.
(Example)
............
~23
\ o62T
12.0kn \
Rubber band
3.7.2.3 Correcting coordinates of a Waypoint (Correct Position)

The coordinates of a Waypoint in the route data saved in the radar system are corrected.
Procedures
operation below.
Route
2) Left-click the 3. Correct Position button.
T he Waypoint correcting mode is selected.
3) On the radar display, put the cursor on the Waypoint that is to

have its coordinates corrected, and left-click.
The cursor display becomes a +

The Waypo int to be corrected is specifi ed.
cursor mark, and a rubber band is displayed.
3 - 71 [.JRC I dOfXi"' Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
4) Move the cursor to new coordinates, and left-click.
T he coordinates of the Waypoi nt are corrected, and then the Waypoint correcting mode is
cancelled.
(Example)
064T /
~ 108T
~ 064T . /
JC) ~ 108T
~
/ 12.0kn 800kn ~ 026 / 120kn 800kn
026
~024 I
Waypointthat is to l"l!ve its
osition corrected
Cross cursor mark
JC) o2s Planned Course

064T ........ 108T
/ s ook;;---
1
/ 120kn 026 026
C\ n24 060T/
o-' ........ 106T ,
120kn. _ ~ BOOkn
'f'""'25 I
3.7.2.4 Correcting Planned Speed (Correct Planned Speed)

Procedures
operation below.
Route
2) Left-click the 4. Correct Planned Speed button.
The Planned Speed correcting mode is selected.
3) Left-click the 1. Planned Speed button.

The Planned Speed input screen will appear.
Enter a numeric value of new Planned Speed.
[.JRC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.l'Jd. 3 -72

----------------------------------
4) On the radar display, put the cursor on the line extending
between Waypoints that is to have its Planned Speed corrected.
The section that is to have its Planned Speed corrected is specified, and the new Planned
Speed is applied to the section.
5) To correct the Planned Speed of another section, repeat

procedures 3 and 4.
6) To finish correcting Planned Speed, left-click the

4. Correct Planned Speed button.
The Planned Speed correcting mode will be cancelled.
(Example)
Planned spee1 10.001<~
±
G.2_oo ~02 f t . -04
.......... 113T 064T ' 113T 064T ' ll3T
8 O()..n ........._ 9 IOOkn .........._ / ,1.0kn 120kn ' -
'"e'Oo1 e<Jo3 u oos
Section lhat IS to have its Planned Speed corrected
3.7.2.5 Deleting a Waypoint (Delete Waypoint)

Procedures
operation below.
Route
~ 2. WPT/ROute Setting
T he Waypoint deleting mode is selected.
3- 73 [..JRC] aopan.Radi.o Co.,.fid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstrucllon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
3) On the radar display, put the cursor on a Waypoint to be deleted,
and left-click.
The specified Waypoint is deleted, and the previous and following Waypoints are then
4) To delete another Waypoint, repeat procedure 3.
5) To finish deleting a Waypoint, left-click the 5. Delete

button.
The Waypoint deleting mode wi ll be cancelled.
(Example)
oint to be deleted
Q.Q.oo ~ 004
........... 113T 064T / ........... 113T 064T /""""
800kn -.......... / go n 100kn ........... / ,10kn , ,~
'e'5'o1 6'6o3 12.0kn u oos
Left-dick Planned speed
Q.Q.oo
........... 113T
8 OOkn ...........
Calculated again
3.7.2.6 Inserting a Waypoint (Insert Waypoint)

Procedures
operation below.
Route
[.JRC] ()opanRoclicJ Co., .ltd. 3- 74

----------------------------------
2) Left-click the 6. Insert button.
The Waypoint inserting mode is selected.
3) On the radar display, put the cursor on the section line into
which a Waypoint is to be inserted, and left-click.
The section is specified, the cursor becomes a cross cursor mark, and the cross cursor mark is
connected to the previous and fo llowing Waypoints by a rubber band.
4) On the radar display, put the cursor on the location at which a

Waypoint is to be inserted, and left-click.
The coordinates of the new Waypoint are specified, and the new Waypoint is connected to
the previous and fol lowing Waypoints by a line.
5) To insert another Waypoint, repeat procedures 3 and 4.
6) To finish inserting a Waypoint, left-click the 6. Insert
button.
The Waypoint inserting mode will be cancelled.
(Example)
1-
+ 090T
--
100kn
Waypoint is inserted into this section Waypoint is inserted into this section
3-75 [~RC I aopon Radi.o Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
3.7.3 Edit Route Make with Latitude and Longitude (Waypoint
Input)
In this radar system, it is possible to create and correct route by performing
operation on the Waipoint Input menu.
Waypoint
Wayp oint Number Waypoint Scroll Latitude/ Longitude Planned Speed Waypoint Comment
Waypoint Scroll Exit Waypoint Waypoint Waypoint Input Character

Insert Addition Delet e
3.7.3.1 Open the Waipoint Input Menu
Procedures
1) Open the Waypoint Input menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
~ 6. Waypoint Input
When transmitting, it can not be open.
[.JRC I aapan Radio Co.,.lid. 3 - 76

- -- - - - -- -- - - ---- - - - - - - - -- -- · - --- -·~----------
----------------------------------
3.7.3.2 Adding a Waypoint (Add)
Procedures
2) Left-click the ADD button.
3.3.4.5 "Entering latitude/longitude" and Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".
3.7.3.3 Adding a Comment (Comment)

Procedures
Left-click to show the desired comment.
3) Left-click the Comment button to be added.
The comment of waypoint is reversed.
4) Enter a comment.
A comment will be added.
character".
3- 77 [~RC I 8apan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-5A Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
3.7.3.4 Correcting latitude /longitude of a Waypoint (LAT/LON)
The latitude I longitude of a Waypoi nt in the route data saved in the radar system are
corrected.
Procedures
Left-click to show the desired latitude I longitude.
3) Left-click the Latitude I Longitude button to be corrected.
The latitude of waypoint is reversed.
4) Enter a latitude /longitude.
A Waypoint will be corrected.
latitude/long itude".
3.7.3.5 Correcting Planned Speed (Planned Speed)

Procedures
Left-click to show the desired planned speed.
3) Left-click the Planned Speed button to be corrected.
The planned speed of waypoint is reversed.
4) Enter a planned speed.
A Planned Speed will be corrected.
For the input method on the numeric value input screen, see Section 3.3.4 "Operation on
Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input menu".
[JRC] f)opan.Radio Co.,.ftd. 3-78

----------------------------------
3.7.3.6 Deleting a Waypoint (DEL)
Procedures
3)
Left-click the DEL

button to be corrected. El
T he specified Waypoint is deleted, and the previous and following Waypoints are then
3.7.3.7 Inserting a Waypoint (INS)

Procedures
3) Left-click the INS button to be corrected.
A Waypoint will be inserted.
For the input method on the latitude / longitude and numeric value input screen, see Section
3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input menu".
3- 79 (.JRC l aopan RadkJ Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
3.7.4 Use Route Monitoring Function (Waypoint/Route Alarm)
This radar system can monitor the movement of own sh ip with regard to its route
and activate a variety of alarms.
Destination alarm When own ship arrives at next Waypoint, an alarm will
(Waypoint Alarm): be activated.
Route alarm : When own shi p deviates from the specified route, an
alarm will be activated.
3.7.4.1 Destination alarm (Waypoint Alarm)

The destination alarm is activated when own ship has reached next Waypoint or own ship
has deviated from the scheduled route.
A Waypoint alarm circle with a specified radius distance is displayed .

Wa oint alarm circle
ToWaypoint
Waypoint Alarm has the following two types of alarms:
Arrival: An alarm is activated when own ship has entered the circle from outside.
Break Off: An alarm is activated when own ship has left the circle to the outside.
Procedures
operation below.
Route

11. Waypoint Alarm I item, and select 11. Waypoint Alarm
Arrival O.OOnm
an operation mode.
/
Radius of the
Operation mode
Waypoint alarm
circle
[JRC] 8opan.Radic Co., .lid. 3-80

----------------------------------
Arrival I Break Off : Set the operation mode.
O.OOnm : Set the radius of the Waypoint alarm circle. If

O.OOnm is set, alarm operation will be turned off.
3.7.4.2 Route Alarm

The route alann is activated when own ship deviates from the specified width of the route.
The route alarm lines are displayed with a specified width provided.
Route alarm hne
Break Off alarm is activated

' when own ship is outside the
~ --- ;,......:
speafied range
ToWaypoint
,,"" '
~.. . Routealarmline
Route Alarm has tJ1e following two types of operations:
Approach : An alarm is activated when own ship enters the route range from
outside.
XTE(Cross An alarm is activated when own ship leaves the route range.
Track Error) :
Procedures
I ) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
- 2. WPTIRoute Setting

12. Route Alarm I item, and select an 12. Route Alarm
Approach O.OOnm
operation mode.
/ /
Width of the route
Operation mode (one side)
Approach I XTE : Set the operation mode.
O.OOnm : Set the width of the route (one side). If

O.OOnm is set, an alarm operation will be
turned off.
3-81 [~RC I aapan Radio Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
3.7.5 Method of Using Route
The m ethod of using the route will be described.
Displaying the route The internal route is displayed according to the procedures in
(Route Alarm Color): Section 3.7.1 "Display Route/Destination Mark (Select Route)".
Selecting the forward or Whether to use Waypoints forward or backward is selected .

backward of the route
(Route Sequence):
Skipping of route The Waypoint which is after next Waypoint is set as the next
(Waypoint Skip): Waypoint.
Skipping back of the route The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.
3.7.5.1 Selecting the forward or backward of the route (Route Sequence)

Select whether W aypoints in route data ar e used i n the forward direction or
backward direction.
,-... no7
~ ..... - - - - --...
- --. : Forward
- - • : Backward
----
-----1:.'\
~,
'
00
'
'G.:o' , ',,
....
' ', '''
',O oos ~
' .... , ..E)<l93 ,,'' / /
' ' - ''Y::\ nnL
' ~ ----- -----eo-o2 _- ..,.,..
'_
------~~
-- ____ -.. --,__
........... ---e-uo..,'!. ,
- __
.,-'"
-.......~'
/
/
Procedures
operation below.
Route
--? 3. WPT/Route Operations
2 Left- click the set va lue of the 11. Route Sequence item , and sel ect an
operation m ode.
Forward :Waypoints are used in the forward direction (ascending order).
Reverse :Waypoints are used in the reverse direction (descending order).
[.JRC I 8opan. Radio Co.,.ltd. 3 - 82

----------------------------------
3.7.5.2 Skipping/Back-skipping of the route (Waypoint Skip/ Waypoint Back
Skip)
Next Waypoint of the route can be changed by user manually.
Skipping of route The Waypoint which is after the next Waypoint is set as the
(Waypt>int Skip): next Waypoint.
Skipping back the route The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypoint.
Procedures
I) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
~ 3. WPT/ROute Operations
2) To execute Waypoint Skip, left-click the 3. Waypoint Skip
button.
The Waypoint which is after the next Waypoint is set as the next Waypoi nt.
3) To execute Waypoint Back Skip, left-click the

4. Waypoint Back Skip Skip button.
The previous Waypoint is set as the next Waypo int.
3.7.6 Detailed Route Settings

Make detai led settings of the route.
Color for the route alarm line Set the display color for the route alarm line.
(SEL NUM/Comment Size)
3 - 83 [.JRC] (Japan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstrucbon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 7 USE ROUTE FUNCTION
----------------------------------
Display character size :Specify the size of the numeric value and character displayed on
(SEL NUM/Comment Size) the radar display.
Waypoint bearing vector :Set the method to display line between next Waypoint and own
(Waypoint Vector) ship.
Display of bearing distance to the :Select the start point to be used for the bearing/distance display in
destination(Status of Origin/DEST) the Waypoint data display area.
ON/OFF of Waypoint number display :Set whether or not to display Waypoint number next to the
(WPT Number Display) Waypoint mark.
Waypoint update :Set how to update Waypoint number when one Waypoint has been
(Waypoint Switch Mode) reached.
3.7.6.1 Color for the route alarm line (Cross-Track Limit Line)
Route alarm lines are displayed on both sides of the center line of the route.
For this item, set which color is used to display each line.
Route alann line Route alann line
' T,..,., d rtl20'\

' J '
Route Alarm Color Area A Route Alarm Color. Area B
'
Area A (IALA-A) : The port-side is red and the bow-side is green
along the traveling direction .
Area 8 (IALA-8 ) : The port-side is green and the bow-side is red

Procedures
I) Open the WPT/Route Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
---? 2. WPT/Route Setting
2) Left-click the set value of the Is.Off-Track Limit Line item, and
!ALA-A : Area A
IALA-B : Area 8
['-'RC] 8opan Radio Co.,.ltd. 3-84

----------------------------------
3.7.6.2 Display character size (SEL NUM/Comment Size)
Specify the size of the numeric value and c haracter displayed on the radar display.
Procedures
I) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route
~ 9. Next
2) Left-click the set value of the j1. SEL NUM/Comment Size item , and
Normal :Numbers and characters are displayed in normal size.
Small :Numbers and characters are displayed in a size smaller than

usual.
3.7.6.3 Waypoint bearing vector (Waypoint Vector)

Set how to display a line between next Waypoint and own ship.
Procedures
I ) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route
~ 9. Next
2) Left-click the set value of the j2. Way point Vector item, and select
an operation mode.
Off : The Waypoint bearing vector is not displayed.
From Origin : A line is displayed from the previous Waypoint to next Waypoint.
- - s.. A wa ont beanng Vodor
........................ "'--.)
...................
From CURR : A line is displayed from own ship to next Waypoint.

C'\ A waypoont bearing vector
--or-.._ ~ /
....... ....... ' /
....... .......'~ '~.
..._ __ -
3-85 I..JRC ] (Japan Radit:J Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
3.7.6.4 Displaying bearing distance to the Waypoint (Status of Origin/DEST)
Select a start point used to display bearing/distance in the Waypoint data display area.
Procedures
Route
~ 9. Next
2) Left-click the set value of the 13.Status of Origin/DEST item, and

From CURR POSN :The bearing distance from the own ship position
Fix :The bearing distance from the previous Waypoint

3.7.6.5 ON/OFF of Waypoint number display (WPT Number Display)

Set whether to display a Waypoint number next to the Waypoint mark.
Procedures
I ) Open the Next menu by performing the menu operation below.
Route
~ 9 . Next
2) Left-click the set value of the 14.WPT Number Display item, and
Off : The Waypoint number is not displayed.
On : The Waypoint number is displayed .
3-86
- -- - --------- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -
----------------------------------
3.7.6.6 Route Information Display
Display the planned couse and the planned speed onto the route.
Procedures
- 2. WPT/ Ro ute Setting
-t 9. Next
Left-click the set value of the 16. Route Information Display I item, and
Off : The Planned Course and the Planned Speed are

not displayed.
on : The Planned Course and the Planned Speed are

displayed.
3.7.6.7 Map Draw AZI Mode

Set the azimuth direction of the route and user map.
Procedures
Route
- 2. WPT/Route Setting
-t 9. Next
Left-click the set value of the 17- Map Draw AZI Mode I item , and select
an operation mode.
N Up : The azimuth direction is set North Up mode.
c Up : The azimuth direction is set Couse Up mode.
3.7.6.8 Updating Waypoint data (Waypoint Switch Mode)

Set how to update the Waypoint number when one Waypoint has been reached.
3-87 [.JRC) aopan Radio Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
Procedures
I) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
---7 3. WPT/Route Operations
2) left-click the set value of the 12. Waypoint Switch Mode item, and
Manual : When next Waypoint has been reached, user updates the
following Waypoint.
AUTO : When next Waypoint has been reached, the following

Waypoint is automatically updated.
3.7.7 Clear Waypoint/Route Data (Clear WPT/Route Data)

This function clears waypoint/route data from memory.
Procedures
I ) Open the WPT/Route Operations menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Route
---7 3. WPT/ Route Operations
2) left-click the 16. Clear WPT/ Route Data button.
3) left-click the 1. Yes button.
A route data will be cleared.
If data is not copied on the flash memory card (option),

NOTE: the data is not be reloaded.
[.JRC ) gapan Rodit:J Co., .lid. 3-88

----------------------------------
3.7.8 Operate Route Data File
Route data saved in the radar system can be saved onto a flash memory card, and
data can be loaded from a flash memory card into the radar system.
With regard to this item, only route data can be saved and loaded. To save or load
own shjp's track, target track data, and mark/line data, see Section 3.11 "USING
CARD ".
Selecting a card slot Specify the card slot to be used for operating a
(Select Card Slot): route data file .
Saving route data (Save): Route data saved in the radar system is saved
onto a flash memory card.
Loading route data (Load): Route data saved on a flash memory card is
loaded into the radar system.
Erasing route data file A route data fi le saved in a flash memory card
(Erase): is erased.
3.7.8.1 Selecting a card slot {Select Card Slot)

Specify the card slot to be used for accessing a route data file
F lash memory card (option) is necessary.
Procedures

operation below.
Route
~ 4. File Opera..:..
tio_n_ ___.
3) Left-click the set value of the 11. Select Card Slot item , and
select a card slot.
Slotl and Slot2 of the Select Card Slot items are switched.
3.7.8.2 Saving route data {Save)

Route data saved in the radar system is saved onto a flash memory card.
3 - 89 [..JRC I 8opan Radio Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
Procedures

operation below.
Route
--7 4. File Operation
The file name input screen will appear.
character".
4) After having entered a file name, left-click the ENT button.
The entry of the file name will be finished.
The route data will be saved w ith the specified file name.
3.7.8.3 Loading route data (Load)

Route data is loaded into the radar system from a nash memo ry card.
Once route data has been loaded into the radar system from a
NOTE: flash memory card , the route data that has been saved in the
radar system is overwritten and erased. Route data that has
been erased cannot be resaved. Note that important route data
should be saved in a flash memory card.
[.JRC] 8opanRaclicJ Co.,.ftd. 3 - 90

----------------------------------
Procedures

operation below.
Route
----t 4 . File Operation
Confinnation Window wi ll appear.
The route data with the specified file name wi ll be loaded.
3.7.8.4 Erasing route data (Erase)

An unnecessary route data file saved on a flash memory card is erased.
Once route data fi les that have been saved on a fla sh

NOTE: memory card is erased, the erased data cannot be
resaved. Note that important files should not be erased.
Procedures

operation below.
Route
----t 4 . File Operatio n
3-91 [.JRC I aopan. Radio Co., J'id.

----------------------------------
A route data file with the specified file name will be erased.
[JRC] (Japan RadkJ Co., .ltd. 3 - 92

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
APPLIED OPERATIONS
3.8.1 Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting)

This function enables the setting of detail informati on about radar signal
processmg.
Procedures
operation below.
Main
- 3. RADAR Menu
- 1. Process Setting
The Process Setting menu wi ll appear.
Detail informat ion about radar signal processing can be set by changing the settings of the
menu items.
After the settings for radar signal processing are

NOTE: changed, small targets may not be displayed or
unwanted waves may not be suppressed. Thus, do not
make a significant change in the settings.
3.8.1.1 Video Latitude

• Select the dynamic range in which receiving signa ls are to be shown on the
radar display.
• Select Normal in standard, and Wide in rainy weather.
• Narrow clearly displays short-range videos when STC is used in manual
mode.
Narrow : Narrows the dynamic range at short range.
Normal : Standard setting

The dynamic range varies depending on the actual range:
Short distance: wide Long distance: narrow
Wide : Use this mode when rainy weather intensifies unwanted

waves.The dynamic range is about twice as wide as when
Normal is selected.
Super Wide : Use this mode when rain cloud remain at Wide mode.
3-93 [.JRC ] 8apan. Radio Co.,.tid.

----------------------------------
3.8.1.2 Video Noise Rejection
• This function r ejects signals that assumed as noise and clutter in radar videos.
• Select Off to display radar videos like analog signals.
• Select Levell or Level2 to suppress noi se and clutter.
Off Turns off the noise rejection function, and displays all
signals. Targets are popped up from noise and displayed
like analog signals.
Levell Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and

definite, the signals are displayed.
Level2 Rejects the signals of definitely unwanted waves (noise and

definite, the signals are rejected. Only when detection of
targets is definite, the signals are displayed.
3.8.1.3 Auto Dynamic Range

• When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode and the automatic rain/snow
clutter suppression mode are in use, the dynamic range is automatically
controlled.
• When the automatic sea clutter suppression mode i s in use, this function
improves gain by widening the dynamic range of only areas where sea clutter
is strong and narrowing the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter is not
detected.
• When the automatic rain/snow clutter suppression mode is in use, this function
improves gain by widening the dynamic range of areas where sea clutter and
rain/snow clutter are strong and narrowing the dynamic range of the other
areas.
• Land videos become obscure when the automatic rain/snow clutter suppression
mode is in use.
Off Does not control the dynamic range automatically.

(Standard setting) The dynamic range is set in the same
manner as when the manual sea clutter suppression mode
or the manual rain/snow clutter suppression mode is in use.
On Automatically controls the dynamic range.
[.JRC] dOfXi'J RadicJ Co., .i'ld. 3-94

----------------------------------
3.8.1 .4 Process Switch
• This function sets a specific area and switches the video process mode between
the inside and outside of the area.
• In Section 3.8.1.5 "2nd Process Mode" 2nd Process Mode, set the second v ideo
process mode for the area outside the boundary.
• In [2] PROCESS of Main Menu , set the first video process mode for the area
inside the boundary.
• Gain at a distan ce can be improved by suppressing near sea c lutter through the
correlative process.
• There are two methods for setting an area:
Off Disables the Process Switching function . (Standard

setting)
Range Fix Sets a boundary at a constant range from the center. Set
the boundary range in Section 3.8.1.6 "Process Switch
Range". The specific area turns out to be a circle with the
own ship ' s position as the center.
AUTO Automatically sets a s pecific area. The area subject to

many clutte r re turns is inside the boundary, a nd the area
less subject to clutter returns is outside the boundary.
3.8.1 .5 2nd Process Mode

• Set the second v ideo process mode for the outside of a specific area.
• This function is enabled w hen Range Fix or AUTO is selecte d in Section
3.8. 1.4 "Process Switch".
Video process modes

3Scan CORREL : Select this mode when many rain/snow clutter returns are detected.
4Scan CORREL : Select this mode to highlight targets while suppressing sea clutter returns.
SScan CORREL : Select this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns.
Peak Hold : Select this mode to detect small targets of which detection probability is low.
3.8.1 .6 Process Switch Range

• Set the boundary range of a spec ific area.
• This function is e nabled w hen Range Fix is selected in Section 3.8.1.4
"Process Switch".
• The specific area turns out to be a circle with the own ship ' s position as the
center.
• The boundary range can be set in units of 0.1 nm, rang ing 0.1 to 25.5 run.
3 - 95 IJRC I aopan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
3.8.1.7 Fast Target Detection
• This function displays fast moving targets that are suppressed in scan-
correlative process mode.
• This function is enabled when 3Scan CORREL , 4Scan CORREL , or
SScan CORREL is selected as the video process mode.
• If unwanted waves remain on the radar display, suppress them by using the
[SEA], [RAIN], or [GAIN] dial, or adjusting the interference rejection mode.
Off : Disables the Fast Target Detection function.
On : Enables the Fast Target Detection function.
[.JRC] gapan Radio Co.,.lid. 3 - 96

----------------------------------
3.8.2 Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting)
This function enables the setting of detail information about radar trail s
processmg.
Procedures
1) Open the RADAR Trails Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
---7 3. RADAR Menu
---7 2. RADAR Trails Setting
The RADAR Trails Setting menu will appear.
Detail data about radar trails processing can be set by changing the settings of each men u
item.
After the settings for radar trails processing are changed,

NOTE: targets' trails may not be displayed or trails may be plotted with
unwanted waves. Thus, do not make a significant change in the
settings.
3.8.2.1 Trails Mode

• Set the radar trail di splay mode.
• For details on the trail mode, see Section 3.4.8 "Display Radar Trails (Trail s)"
3.8.2.2 Trails Reference Level

• Select a radar video level required for plotting radar trails.
• The radar video threshold level increases in order of Levell ---7 Level2
---? Level3 ---? Level4 .
• To plot radar trails with unwanted waves, change to a higher level.
• To thin radar trails, change to a higher level.
• If radar trails are plotted in snatches, change to a lower level.
3-97 [JRC I aapan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
3.8.2.3 Trails Reduction
• Make a setting for thinning radar trails.
• The effect of thinning increases in order of Levell ~ Level2 ~
Level3 .
• Radar videos do not become obscure because of the thinning of radar trails.
Off : Disables the Trails Reduction function.
Levell : Enables the Trails Reduction function . (Effect: Low)

Level2 : Enables the Trails Reduction function . (Effect: Modest)
Level3 : Enables the Trails Reduction function . (Effect: High)
3.8.2.4 Trails Process

• Determine whether to use the video process with radar signals for plotting
radar trails.
• When Trails Process is On , radar trai ls are never plotted with unwanted
waves, but the radar trails of moving targets may not be plotted.
• When Trails Process is Off , radar trails may be plotted with unwanted
waves, but the radar trails of moving targets are always plotted.
Off : Disables the Trails Process function .
On : Enables the Trails Process function .
3.8.2.5 MAX Interval

• Select the maximum time for displaying radar trails.
• Select Short when short radar trails are often used in bays and the likes.
• Select when long radar trails are necessary for ocean navigation.
Short : Sets 15 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.
Middle : Sets 30 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.
Long : Sets 60 minutes as the maximum time for radar trails display.
I'-'RC] 8opan.Radio Co.,.lid. 3-98

----------------------------------
3.8.3 Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)
This function enables the setting of detail information about an antenna.
Procedures
1) Open the TXRX Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.
Main
~ 3. RADAR Menu
~ 3. TXRX Setting
The TXRX Setting menu will appear.
Detail information about antenna operation can be set by changing the settings of the menu
items.
3.8.3.1 PRF Fine Tuning

• Fine-tune the transmitting repetition frequency of the transmitter in the range
90 to 100%.
• If radar ' s interference patterns are concentrically displayed, increment or
decrement the set value by 3 to 4 in order to heighten the effect of interference
rejection.
• One of 32 levels 0-31 can be set.
3.8.3.2 PRF
• Select the operation mode the transmitting repetition frequency of the
transmitter.
Normal :Standard mode Appropriategain expectancy is maintained.

High Power :High gain mode Gain improves when "SP1 /MP1 /MP2" pulses
are used.
When "High Power" is selected, the target acquisition

NOTE: and tracking function becomes 24nm or less from 32nm
or less.
3.8.3.3 Ice Class Standby Mode

• In this mode, the antenna is rotated when transmission is in the standby state.
• This mode is effective to prevent the antenna's rotating shaft from freezing.
Off :The ice class standby mode is not used. When transmission is
in the standby state, the antenna also stops rotating.
On ...J :The ice class standby mode is used. When transmission is in

the standby state, the antenna rotates.
3-99 (.JRC ] dOfXi'l Radio Co.,.ltd.

----------------------------------
3.8.4 Set Cursor (Cursor Setting)
This function enables the setting of detail information about cursor operation and
display.
Procedures
1) Open the Cursor Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
~ 9. EBL/Cursor Setting
~ 3. Cursor Setting
The Cursor Setting menu will appear.
Detail information about cursor operation and display can be set by changing the settings of
the menu items.
3.8.4.1 EBLNRM Control Cursor

• The EBLNRM Control Cursor is switched between Valid and Invalid.
• The trackball is provided as a standard device. If the trackball malfunctions, the
cursor can be moved by using the [EBL] dial and [VRM] dial.
• The cursor moves horizontally when [EBL] is operated, and moves vertically
when [VRM] is operated.
• To switch between EBLNRM operation and cursor operation while ON is
selected, hold down the [EBL] dial for 2 seconds.
On : Cursor is operated using a [EBL] [VRM] dial.
Off : Cursor is operated using a trackball.
3.8.4.2 Cursor Length

• Set the length of the cross cursor mark on the radar display.
Short Cuts the cross cursor mark in length.
Long : Makes the cross cursor mark twice as long as when

Short is selected.
[.JRC ] (japan Radio Co.,.ltd. 3-100

----------------------------------
3.8.4.3 Cursor Pattern
• The type of the cross cursor mark displayed of the display is selected.
3.8.5 Set Radar Display (Display Setting)
This system can save combinations of display color and brilliance in accordance
with ambient lighting conditions and the radar display can be easily switched.
Follow the procedures below to set display color and brilliance to be saved before
hand.
3.8.5.1 Setting display color (Display Color Setting)
Procedures
1) Open the Color Setting menu by performing the menu operation
below.
~ 7. Sub Menu
~ 1. Display Color Setting
Display Color Setting menu will appear.
3.8.5.2 Day/Night
• Specify the mode to be changed.
• The following modes are available:
Dayl : Day mode 1 : Used under bright lighting conditions.
Day3 I : Day mode 3 : Used under bright lighting conditions.
Dusk : Dusk mode : Used under dim lighting conditions.
3 - 101 [.JRC I 8opan Radio Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
J!!g!)!J : Night mode : Used under dark lighting conditions.
Setting color of each element
• Specify the color for the element.

• The color for the following elements can be specified.
IOuter PPI : The color of the background outside radar video PPI is
selected.
IInner PPI : The color of the background inside radar video PPI is
selected.
Character : The color of the character and bearing scale is selected.
RADAR Video : The color of the radar video is selected.
RADAR Trails(Time) : The color of the time radar trails is selected.
RADAR Trails(AII) : The color of the time radar trails is selected.
Target Symbol : The color of the target symbol is selected .
Cursor : The color of the cursor is selected.
Range Rings : The color of the range rings is selected.
EBL/VRM/PI : The color of the EBL I VRM I PI is selected.
IOwn Symboi/HL/Vector : The color of the own ship symbol, heading line, own
ship vector is selected.
G) Those selected color can be saved for each Day/Night mode.
3.8.5.3 Setting display brilliance (Brilliance Setting}

For each Day/Night mode, background color outside the bearing scale,
background color inside the bearing scale, and color for characters, radar echo and
radar trails can be selected.
Procedures
I) Open the Brilliance Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
~ 2. Brilliance Setting ]
[~RC ] 8apan Radio Co., .lid. 3- 102

----------------------------------
Display Brilliance Setting menu will a ppear.
Setting brilliance of each element
• Specify the brilliance for the element.

• L e vel4 indicates maximum brilliance and Level I indicates min imum brilliance.
• The brilliance for the following elements can be specified.
RADAR Video : The brilliance of the radar video is selected.
RADAR Trails : The brilliance of the radar trails is selected.
Target Symbol : The brilliance of the target symbol is selected.i
Range Rings : The brilliance of the range rings is selected .
EBL/ VRM / PI : The brilliance of the EBL I VRM I PI is selected.
Character : The brilliance of the character and bearing scale is

selected .
IOwn Symboi / HL/Vector I : The brilliance of the own ship symbol, heading line, and
own ship vector is selected .
IKeyboard : The brilliance of the operation panel is selected .i
i. Minimum level is LeveiO.(it means OFF)
(!) Those selected brilliance can be saved for each Day/Night mode.
3.8.5.4 Setting radar video brilliance (VID)

The brilliance of the video on the radar display is adjusted.
Procedures VID
1) Left-click the 0 button located at the lower right of the
radar display, and adjust the brilliance of the radar video so as to
get the best view of the video display.
T he brilliance of the radar video can be adjusted o n fo ur stages without open ing the
Bri II iance Setting menu.
3.8.5.5 Setting target symbol brilliance (TT)

Th e brilliance of the target symbol on the radar d isplay is adj usted.
Procedures TT
1) Left-click the 0 button located at the lower right of the
radar display, and adjust the brilliance of the target symbol so as
to get the best view of the video display.
3 - 103 I..JRC j aapan.Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
The brilliance of the target symbol can be adjusted on four stages without opening the
3.8.6 Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume)

When an alarm is activated, the operation panel issues an alarm audible to inform
user of the change of the condition.
The alarm sound can be adjusted by performi ng the following p rocedures.
Procedures
1) Open the Buzzer Volume menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 7. Sub Men u
~ 5. Buzzer Volume
Display Buzzer Volume menu will appear.
The volume of the alarm sound can be specified for each cause for alam1.
Level4 indicates maximum volume and Off indicates minimum volume.
LK_e...:.y_A_C_K_ _ _ __J : The operation key acknowledgement is set.
OPE Miss : The incorrect operation alarm is set.
CPA/TCPA Alarm : The dangerous ship alarm is set.
New Target Alarm : T he automatic acquisition target alarm is set.
Lost Alarm : The target lost alarm is set.
Navigation Alarm : The navigation data abnormality alarm is set.
System Alarm : The system abnormality alarm is set.
Inter Switch : The inter switch switching alarm is set.
3.8.7 Set User Option Keys [OPTION 1/2]
Users can freely make settings with [OPTION 1] key and [OPTION 2] key.
By using the keys, users can open a frequently used menu by only single
operation, or assign special functions, to the user key switches.
[.JRC) f)opanRadicJ Co., .lid. 3-104

- - - - - - -- - - -- -
----------------------------------
3.8.7.1 Initial Setting (Option Key Setting)
Set functions that can be performed with the option key switches.
Procedures
1) Open the Option Key Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
7. Sub Menu
_ 4. Option Key Setting
The Option Key Setting men u will appear.
This system provides two user keys: [OPTION I] and [OPTION 2]. Different functions can
be allocated to each key.
Functions that can be allocated to each key are as follows:
Menu : A specific menu is directly displayed.
Zoom : The zoom display function is switched between on and off.
DEST : SeVCancel Waypoint menu key
-> 0 : Start-point, Pass-point key in simple route operating
0-> : End-point key in simple route operating
Capture Screen : Screen capture key (This function is enabled only when the
card (optional) is connected.)
3.8.7.2 Using Option Keys (Directly displaying a specified Menu )
Preset the Menu that i s to be di splayed with the option key switch.
Procedures
1) Perform the general menu open procedure to open the menu that
is to be directly displayed with Option Key.
2) While the menu is open, hold down [OPTION 1] key or [OPTION 2]

key for 2 seconds.
3 - 105 [~RC I 8apan Radio Co.,.i'Jd.

----------------------------------
The menu currently being displayed is saved for the pressed option key.
("";'\ The menu set for the pressed option key will open.
\..!) Subsequently, general menu operation can be performed.
3.8.7.3 How to use the Optin key ( Zoom Display)

Preset whether to execute the Zoom di splay by operating the user key.
Procedures
1) Press either [OPTION 1] key or [OPTION 2] key for which
Zoom has been set.
The zoom mode is activated.
2) Put the cursor on a location that is to be zoomed, and left-click.
Zoom is set.
Cancel
1) Press either [OPTION 1] key or [OPTION 2] key for wh ich
zoom has been set.
T he zoom mode is cancelled and a normal display will appear.
3.8.8 Set Navigation Data Display (Multi Window Setting)
By performing the following operation, it is possible to display navigation data of

the wind direction I velocity, water depth and the like, as a graph on the radar
disp lay.
Procedures
1) Open the Multi Window Setting menu by perform ing the menu
operation below.
Main
[JRC] 8apanRadkJCo.,.!Jd. 3 - 106

------------- -------------- -------

~ 4. Multi Window Setting
The Multi Window Setting menu wi ll appear.
Detailed settings ofthe display are possible by changing the settings of each item.
3.8.8.1 DIRIDIST EXP Display

• Determine whether to expand the value display of cursor, EBL, and VRM.
• The value display is expanded in digital information area 2.
• When the cursor mark moves on the PPI, the display of cursor information is
expanded.
• When an EBL or VRM is operated, the value display of each marker is
expanded.
• While the menu is open, any display is not expanded.
Off : Does not expand any display.
On : Expands the display in digital information area 2. The

expanded display remains for 5 seconds after the
operation of each marker, and then it will disappear.
Always On : Expands the display in digital information area 2.
3.8.8.2 Numeric NAV INFO

• Determine whether to display the numeric values of received navigation
information .
• When navigation data is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/AIS
numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
• Navigation information of the water depth, water temperature, tidal current,
wi nd direction/velocity, and destination is displayed with numeric values.
navigation data display function is switched between On and Off.
Off : Does not display the numeric values of navigation information.
Areal : Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 1.
Area2 : Displays the numeric values of navigation information in digital information area 2.
3.8.8.3 Depth Graph Setting

• The Depth Graph Setting menu wi ll appear.
3 - 107 [.JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > J.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
[1] Depth Graph Display
• Determine whether to di splay received water depth information with a graph.

• One of two digital infonnation areas is used to display data .
• When the water-depth graph is di splayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/
water-depth graph di splay function is switched between On and Off.
Off : Does not display a water depth graph.
Areal : Displays the water depth graph in digital information area 1.
Area2 : Displays the water depth graph in digital information area 2.
[2] Depth Range
• Select the depth range on the water depth graph.
SOm : Sets 50 m as the depth range.
AUTO : Uses the depth range in the OPT sentence included in

received data.
[3] Time Range
• Select the time range on the water depth graph.
12hour : Sets 12 hours as the time range.
[4] Depth Unit
• Set the unit of water depth for the water-depth graph.
Feet : The foot is used as the unit of water depth.
[.JRC ] 8apan. Radio Co., .ltd. 3- 108

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
Fathom : The fathom is used as the unit of water depth.
Meters : The meter is used as the unit of water depth.
3.8.8.4 Wind Graph Setting

• The Wind Graph Setting menu will appear.
[1] Wind Graph Display
• Determine whether to display received wind direction/velocity information

with a graph.
• When the wind direction I speed graph is displayed, the sizes of the target
tracking (TT) I AlS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
• Left-click the Target button located at tbelower righit of the display. The
wind direction I speed graph display function is switched between On and Off.
Off : Does not display the wind direction I speed graph.
Area l : Displays the wind direction I speed graph in digital information area 1.
Area2 : Displays the wind direction I speed graph in digital information area 2.
[2] Wind Speed Unit
• Set the unit of wind velocity for the wind direction I speed graph.
mls : Meters per second are used as the unit of wind speed.
kn'Vh : Kirometers per hour are used as the unit of wind speed.
kn : Knots are used as the unit of wind speed.
3.8.8.5 TEMP Graph Setting

• The TEMP Graph Setting menu will appear.
[1] TEMP Graph Display
• Determine whether to display the graph of the water-temperature data that has
been received on the radar display.
• When the water-temperature graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking
(TT)IAIS numeric data display areas are exclusively decreased.
3-109
----------------------------------
water-temperature graph display function is switched between On and Off.
Off : The water-temperature graph is not displayed.
Areal : The water-temperature graph is displayed in digital information area 1.
Area2 : The water-temperature graph is displayed in digital information area 2.
[2] TEMP Graph Color
• Set the color for the water-temperature graph.

• There are eight selection items:
White Gray Blue Green Yellow Pink Red
(3] TEMP Range
• When Color is selected for the display color for the water-temperature graph,
set the temperature range of each color.
[4] Time Range
• Set the time range for the water-temperature g raph.
lOmin : The time range is set at 10 minutes.

lSmin : The time range is set at 15 minutes.

12hour : The time range is set at 12 hours.
3.8.8.6 Course Bar Setting

• The Course Bar Setting menu will appear.
[1] Course Ba r Display
• Determine whether to display the bar graph for the course data that has been
received on the radar display.
(.JRC] 3opon Radio Co., .lid. 3 - 110

JMA-9172-SA lnstrucbon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
• When the course-bar graph is displayed, the sizes of the target tracking (TT)/
• Left-click the Target button located at the lower righit of the display. The
course bar display function i s switched between On and Off.
Off : The course bar graph is not displayed.
Areal : The course bar graph is displayed in digital information area 1.
Area2 : The course bar graph is displayed in digital information area 2.
[2] Autopilot Course
• Determine which field of the APB sentence that has been received is used to
display AP course.
Course to Steer : Heading to Steer to Destination
From Origin : Bearing Origin to Destination
From CURR POSN : Bearing , Present Postion to Destination
[3] ROT Scale
• Set the maximum scale for the TURN Rate graph.
3(}()-30 : The scale is set at ±30°/min.

15(}()-150 : The scale is set at ±150°/min .
3.8.9 AUTO Backup
Data can be automatically backed up when the power supply is turned on.
Procedures
3-111 ["'RC l aopan Radio Co.,..tid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstructJon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 8 APPLIED OPERATIONS
----------------------------------
2) Open the Plot Setting menu by performing the following menu

operation.
Main
~ 8. Plot Setting
3) Left-click the item button of s. AUTO Backup Backup button.
The AUTO Backup menu will appear.
4) Select the number for the card slot to back up data.
Off : The automatic backup function is turned off.
Slotl : Data is automatically backed up on the compact flash

memory ca rd inserted into slot 1.
Slot 2 : Data is automatically backed up on the compact flash

Data that can be backed up includes own ship's track (Own Track), other ships' trails data
(Target Track), mark/line data (Mark/Line), destination data (WPT), and route data (Route).
The fi le name to be saved is either 9998 or 9999. Every time the power supply is turned on,
those numbers are alternately displayed.
3 - 112
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC O PERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
----------------------------------
USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
"Radar Function Setting" is provided for easily obtaining the best radar video by
storing complex radar signal processing settings in the optimum status by use, and
calling the setting in accordance with the conditions for using the function.
Functions are factory-set for genera l use, and the settings can be fine adjusted by
operating the menu.
Four function modes are avai lable, and they are factory-set as follows:
Function 1: Coast Useful for observing short-range videos.
Function 2: Deep Sea Suitable for general ocean navigation.
Function 3: Storm Useful for observing videos in stormy weather.
Function 4: Rain Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but
rain I snow clutter is strong.
3.9.1 Operation Procedures
3.9.1.1 Calling a Function
Procedures
1) Press the (USER] key.
Each time the [USER] key is pressed, the selection changes cyclically as follo ws:
Function Qff-4 Function l -4 Functi on2 _. Functi on3 -4 Function4 _. Functi on Off
The name of the current function

mode is displayed at the lower left
o f the display.
Alternati vely, left-clicking the

function button located at the
lower left of the radar display will
enable the same operation.
3.9.1.2 Changing Function Setting (temporary change)

When radar signal processing setting is changed by using the menu or button on the radar
display while function I to 4 is called, the change is temporarily refl ected to the operating
state.
Since this method does not change the memory contents, the new setting is discarded as soon
as another function is called.
When the previous functi on is called agai n, operation is performed accordi ng to the memory
contents.
3 - 113 [.JRC] a opan- Radio Co.,.ll.d.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY (USER]
----------------------------------
3.9.1.3 Changing Function Setting (memory contents change)
To change the memory contents of functions I to 4, use the function setting menu.
For how to operate the function setting menu, see Section 3.9.3 "Overview of Function
Operations (User Function Setting)".
3.9.2 Function Setting Menu Items

The function setting menu has the items below.
page 1 Option
1. Mode Name of the mode to be used CoasVDeepsea/....
2. 1R Radar interference rejection Off/Low/Middle/High
3. Process Video process PROC Off/3Scan CORREU ....
4. Target Enhance Target expansion Off/Levei1/Levei2/Level3
5. AUTO Sea/Rain Automatic clutter suppression Off I AUTO Sea I AUTO Sea/Rain
6. Save Present State Saving the present state
page 2 Option
1. Pulse Length 0.75NM Standard pulse length for 0.75nm range SP1/MP1
2. Pulse Length 1.5NM Standard pulse length for 1.5nm range SP1/MP1 /MP2/
3. Pulse Length 3/4NM Standard pulse length for 3nm range SP1/MP1 /MP2//LP1/LP2
4. Pulse Length 6/BNM Standard pulse length for 6nm range MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
5. Pulse Length 12NM Standard pulse length for 12nm range MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
6. Pulse Length 16NM Standard pulse length for 16nm range LP1/LP2
page 3 Option
1. Video Latitude Dynam1c range of radar video Narrow/ Normal/Wide/Super Wide
2. Video Noise Rejection Radar video noise rejection Off/Levei1/Level2
3. AUTO Dynamic Range Automahc dynamic range control Off/On
4. Process Switch Radar video process switching Off/Range FIX/AUTO
5. 2nd Process Mode 2nd video process mode PROC Off/3Scan CORREU....
6. Process Switch Range Video process switching range Range Setting
7. Fast Target Detection Off/On
page 4 Option
1. Trails Interval Radar trails length Off/15sec/....
2. Trails Mode True/Relative
3. Trails Reference Level Radar trails plotting threshold Level1-4
4. Trails Reduction Thinning of radar trails Off/Level1 -3
6. Trails Process Superimpose-display of time radar trails and Off/On
continuous radar trails.
7. Max Interval Maximum time for radar trails display ShorVMiddlellong
page 5 Option
1. Gain Offset Gain correction
2. PRF Transmitting repetition frequency NormaVEconomy/High Power
3. Small Buoy Detection Small target detection mode Off/On
4. Fishnet Detection Fishnet detection mode Off/On
5. Antenna Height DefauiU-Sm/5-1Om/1 0-20m/20m
8. Set Mode Default
9. Initialize
[.JRC] 3opon Radio Co., .ltd. 3 - 114

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY (USER]
----------------------------------
3.9.3 Overview of Function Operations (User Function Setting)
The following outlines the operation of each function selected from the function
setting menu:
Procedures
operation below.
Main
~ 3. RADAR Menu
The User Function Setting menu will appear.
Specify the number for the function for which the settings are to be changed.
The following are the operation overviews of each function setting item.
page 1-[1] Mode

• Selects the function name to be indicated at the lower left of the radar display
when the function is selected.
• When the setting is changed back to the factory setting, the initial value of the
selected mode is called.
• The following II modes are provided:
coast : Use this mode to monitor a relatively short range, for example, bays
and coasts where many boats and ships are running. (Importance is
attached to resolution.)
Deep Sea : Use this mode to monitor a relatively long range, for example, the open
sea. (Importance is attached to long-range gain.)
Fish Net : Use this mode to detect small targets such as fishnets of round haul
netters hidden by sea clutter returns. (Importance is attached to sea
clutter suppression, and gain to moving targets lowers.)
Storm : Use this mode when many rain I snow clutter returns or sea clutter
returns are detected in stormy weather. (Importance is attached to rain I
snow clutter and sea clutter suppression, and gain slightly lowers.)
Calm : Use this mode when only a few rain I snow clutter returns or sea clutter
returns are detected.
Rain : Use this mode when sea clutter is not strong but rain I snow clutter is
strong. (Importance is attached to rain I snow clutter suppression, and
Bird : Use this mode to detect flocks of sea birds.
Loog : Use this mode to monitor utmost distances in the broad ocean.
Buoy : Use this mode to detect small targets like radio buoys in areas outside
the sea clutter area. (This mode displays targets of which detection
probability is low.)
Userl : General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable.
User2 : General mode used when the nine modes above are not applicable.
3 - 115 [ ~Re i 8 apan.Radi.o Co.,.J'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
----------------------------------
page 1-[2] IR (Radar interference rejection)
• Same function as IR Setting described in Section 3 .4.1 "Interference Rejection
(IR)".
page 1-[3] Process (Video process)

• Same function as PROCESS Setting described in Section 3.4.4 "Use Video
Processing (PROC)"
page 1-[4] Target Enhance

• Same function as TARGET ENHANCE Setting described in Section 3.4.3
"Target Enhance (ENH)".
page 1-[5] Auto STC/FTC (Auto Sea/Rain)

• Detects unwanted waves such as rain/snow clutter and sea clutter and
automatically suppresses them.
• When the sea state or weather changes, this function automatically performs
suppression processing in accordance with the situation.
• Suppression processing is not full automatic, and requires the operator to adjust
the afterimages of unwanted waves.
• To adjust the afterimage of sea clutter, use the [SEA] dial.
• To adjust the afterimage of rain/snow clutter, use the [RAIN] dial.
• In areas where the density of unwanted waves is low, unwanted waves may
remain being judged as targets. Thus, use the automatic clutter suppression
mode together with the video process mode.
• Characteristics of the automatic clutter suppression function :
Off : Disables the automatic clutter suppression function . Select off
when rain I snow clutter and sea clutter are not strong or when the
ship is in a bay.
AUTO Sea : Automatically detects the strength of sea clutter, and performs the
most suitable sea clutter suppression processing.
Even when the strength of sea clutter varies depending on the wind
direction, AUTO Sea performs the most suitable suppression
processing . Land like islands can be displayed naturally.
Since rain clouds outside sea clutter areas are recognized as land,
there is no effect of suppressing rain I snow clutter.
~Sea/Rain : Along with AUTO Sea, AUTO Rain automatically detects the
strength of rain I snow clutter, and performs the most suitable rain I
snow clutter suppression processing.
When rain clouds are scattered about, AUTO Rain performs rain I
snow clutter suppression processing for only the rain-cloud areas.
Since land is recognized as rain clouds, land videos become

obscure.
[~Rc ] gapanRadi.o Co.,.lid. 3-116

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY [USER]
----------------------------------
page 2-[1]-[7] PL (Pulse Length)
• Sets the standard transmitter pulse length in each range.
• When the range is called, the pulse range is used.
page 3-[1]-[7] Video setting menu (Process Setting)

• Operation is the same as that of the Process Setting menu described in Section
3.8. 1 "Set Radar Signal Processing (Process Setting)".
page 4-[1]-[7] Radar trails settings (Trails Setting)

• Same functions as in the Trails Setting of the RADAR Menu described in
Section 3.8.2 "Set Radar Trails (RADAR Trails Setting)".
page 5-[1] Gain Offset

• Corrects gain while the function mode is called.
• Since the displayed noise level varies depending on the combination of the
video process mode and the interference rejection level, gain needs fine
adjustment for always obtaining the highest level.
• The gain correction function saves the correction value set by the gain adjust in
each function mode, so it can obtain the highest gain without the gain adjust
being operated when the function mode is changed.
• To set high gain, set a value on the "+" side.
• To set low gain, set a value on the "-" side.
• When the radar interference rej ection level is increased, the noise level is
lowered. Thus, set a gain correction value to the "+" side.
• When the video process mode 3Scan CORREL 4Scan CORREL , or
SScan CORREL is used, the noise level is lowered. Thus, set a gain correction
value to the "+" side.
• When the video process mode Remain or Peak Hold is used,
noise is hard to disappear. Thus, set a gain correction value to the "-" side.
page 5-[2] PRF

• Same function as in the TXRX Setting described in Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner
Unit (TXRX Setting)".
3 - 117 [.JRc l 8apan.Radio Co., ..ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.9 USE FUNCTION KEY (USER]
----------------------------------
page 5-[3] Small Buoy Detection
• Reduces the loss of signal processing during detection of small targets.
On :Activates the small buoy detection mode that reduces the loss
of signal processing.
page 5-[4] FishNet Detection

• Use this mode to detect small targets hidden by sea clutter returns.
• This function becomes more effective when the AUTO RAIN clutter
suppression function is used together.
On :Activates the fishnet detection mode.
page 5-[5] Antenna Height

• Set the height of radar antenna above sea level.
• The STC/FTC curve is changed.
Default : Set default
"'Sm : Set the antenna height under Sm.
Sm"'lOm : Set the antenna height Sm to 10m.
10m"'20m : Set the antenna height 10m to 20m.
20m"' : Set the antenna height over 20m.
[.JRC I 8apan Radio Co., .lid. 3 - 118

JMA-9 172-SA Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3 9 USE FUNCTION KEY (USER]
----------------------------------
3.9.4 Overview of saved Function Setting Data
The overview of saved function setting data is as follows:
Factory-set data: : Saved data that general operation cannot change
Default data: : Standard data of each function mode that users can change
Data that can be : Saved data that can be called by pressing the [USER] key
called :
Procedures
l) Open the User Function Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 3. RADAR Menu
FUNCTION SETTING FUNCTION SETTING FUNCTION SETTING

Factory-set data De fault data Data that can be called Current data
I
5-[9 1-[1 FUNCl
Coast Coast [
FUNC2 ER] Present
Deepsea
Rshnet
Storm
Calm
Rain
Deepsea
Rshnet
Storm
Calm
Rain
FUNC3
ruNC4
<-
8
Bird Bird
Long Long
Buoy Buoy
Userl Userl
User2 User2
page 1-[1] Mode

• Calls the default value of the mode, and saves it for the function number.
page 1-[6] Save Present State
• The currently operating state can be saved for the function number.
• Use this function to save the state of good setting that will be frequently used.
page 5-[8] Set Mode Default
• Saves the setting of the current function number, as the default setting of the
mode.
page 5-[9] Initialize
• Changes the memory contents of the mode, which is used with the current
function number, back to the factory setting.
3-119 ["RC I aopan. Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstruc!Jon Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 10 USE USER SETTING
----------------------------------
USE USER SETTING
The operation status of the radar is recorded. If the system is operated by more
than one operator, the operators can register operation status as suitable for them
and ca ll the status. Operation status for up to five operations can be registered, and
a name can be assigned to each status. (Up to 10 alphanumeric characters)
Data saved by the user setting
Display Color Setting
Buzzer Volume
Option Key Setting
Date Display Style
EBLNRM Control CURS
Cursor Length
3.1 0.1 Save Operating State (Save User Setting)

The system's current operating state can be saved in the system by performing the
operation below.
Procedures
I ) Open the Save User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
---+ 7. Sub Menu
---+ 3. User Setting
- 2. Save User Setting
The Save User Setting menu will appear.
2) Left-click the button for the file to be saved.
The file name input screen wi ll appear.
3) Enter a file name to be saved.
The input Fi le Name menu wi ll appear.
On the numeric value input screen, enter a fil e name.
Afl:er the fi le name has been entered, the operati ng conditions will be saved.
[.JRC] (Japan. RaclicJ Co.,.lid. 3-120

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.10 USE USER SETIING
----------------------------------
3.10.2 Load Operating State {Load User Setting)
The operating state saved in the system can be loaded by performing the operation
below.
When the operating state is loaded, the previous operating state data is discarded.
Therefore, if you do not want to discard the operating state data, save the
operating state by performing the operation described in Section 3.1 0.1 "Save
Operating State (Save User Setting)".
Procedures
1) Open the Load User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
~ 3. User Setting
The Load User Setting menu will appear.
To load the file, left-click the 1. Yes button.
3.10.3 Delete Operating State {Delete User Setting)

The operating state saved in the system can be deleted by performing the
operation below.
Use this function to delete unnecessary operating state data.
Procedures
1) Open the Delete User Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
~ 3. User Setting
The Delete User ening menu will appear.
2) Left-click the button for the fi le to be deleted.
To delete the file, left-click the 1. Yes button.
3-121 [.JRC I aopan Radk, Co., J'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3 11 USING CARD
----------------------------------
USING CARD
This radar has two card slots. Inserting a flash memory card (option) into a card
slot, you can save the following contents, saved in the processor, in the card or can
load data from the card to the processor.
Trails of own ship: 7000 points maximum
Track of other ship: 20 target X 500 points
Mark/Line: 20000 points maximum
WPT: 512 points maximum
Route: 1 route maximum
These pieces of information can be saved in a flash memory card as a file. The
internal capacity is as large as on ly a fi le. An internally created file can be saved
unti l the flash memory card is fu ll.
3.11.1 Operate File on the Card {File Manager)
Procedures
I) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot.
Flash memory card (opti on) is necessary.
2) Set the radar in the standby state.
While the radar is in the transmission state, the File Manager screen cannot be opened.
3) Open the File Manager window by performing the menu

operation below.
Main
2. Ale Manager
(JRC] 8apan.Radi.o Co., .lid. 3 - 122

r - -- - - - - - - -
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3 BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
----------------------------------
The File Manager window wi ll appear.
Copy file from

Device 1 selected device 1 to device 2 Device 2 format Device 2
Type of file selected
displayed
Device 1 Device2
device type device type
Device 1 format
B
Device 2 file list
Device 1 saved scroll
information
Device 1 Device 1 saved

select and information
cancel all files
Device 1 erase Device 2 erase

selected file selected file
Device2
Processor saved select and
information cancel all files
Exit Device 1 file list Copy file from Message
scroll device 2 to device 1
Information saved in the processor is displayed in the Memory Content.
Own Track : Number of data points for own ship's track (7000 points maximum )
Remain : Number of remaining data points of own ship's track that can be saved
Target Track : The number of other ships' trails (up to 20 targets)
Remain : The remain ing number of other ships' trails to be saved
Mark/Line : Number of mark and line points made with user map (up to 20000 items)
Remain : Number of remaining data points of marks and lines that can be saved
WPT : Number of data points of created waypoints (512 points maximum )
Remain : Remaining waypoints that can be saved
Route : Number of data points of created routes (1 route maximum)
Remain : Remaining routes that can be saved
Internal Total : Total number of data points
• The fi le name and data saved in the selected device will be displayed.
• Pressing the arrows located at the upper right and lower right of the fil e name
list wi ll scroll the list.
3 - 123 I~RC ] aapon Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
----------------------------------
3.11.1.1 Copy Internal Information to Card (Copy Internal -> Card)
Procedures
selection button.

be copied.
6) Left-click the ....

COPY button.
The character input screen for the Input File Name menu will appear.
Up to I 0 characters can be entered.For the input method on the character input screen, see
After the data has been entered, Confi rmation Window wi ll appear.
The entered name is wri tten into the selected device as a file name.
Up to the maximum number of items, described on the previous page, can be saved in the
device. With regard to the capacity for saving data, data can be saved on a flash memory card
as a file, and those files can be saved until the flash memory card is full.
[~Rc] 8apanRadi.oCo.,.fid. 3-124

----------------------------------
3.11 .1.2 Load Information from Card to Internal Portion (Copy Card ->
Internal)
Procedures
selection button.
Selected items for Device I wi ll be displayed.

loaded is saved.
5) Select the desired data.
6) Left-click the .....

COPY button.
Confim1ation Window will appear.
7) Left-click the 1. Overwrite button to overwrite data, or Left-click

the 2. Add button to add new data.
When Overwrite is selected, internally saved data is deleted and new data is loaded. When
Add is selected, new data is added to the saved data.
The selected file is loaded into the system from the card.
When adding data saved on the card to the data saved in the system, data can be copied from
multiple files. However, when the maximum number of units of data is reached, additional
data cannot be loaded. Even in the ADD mode, WPT data and Route data are overwri tten.
3 - 125 [..JRC I aapan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
3.11.1.3 Copy Information (Copy)
Procedures
selection button.
2) Left-click the button corresponding to the device from which data

is to be copied.

be copied.
6) Left-click the ....

COPY button.
The character input screen for the Input File Name menu wi ll appear. lfthere is a file having
the same name, the file selection window will appear.
7) When deleting saved data and copying new data, left-click

1. Overwrite to select Overwrite. When adding data to a
destination file, left-click 2. Add to select Add. Even in the Add
mode, WPT data and Route data are overwritten. When selection
has been made, Confirmation Window will appear.
Up to I 0 characters can be entered. For the input method on the character input screen, see
Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character"
The entered name is written into the selected device as a fi le name.
[.JRC] 8opanRadirJ Co., .lid. 3-126

-- ------- - - - -
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > J.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
----------------------------------
3.11.1.4 Erase File (Erase)
Procedures
selection button.
Selected items for Device I wi II be displayed.

erased is saved.
3) Select data to be erased.
Le ft-click button one more time wi ll cancel the selection.
4) Left-click Erase button.
The selected fi le wi ll be erased.
3.11.1.5 Initializing a card (Format)
Procedures
selection button or the device 2 selection button.
Selection items for Device ! or Device2 will appear.
2) Left-click the button which corresponds to the system (device)

where data to be displayed is saved.
The File Manager window will appear.
3) Put the cursor on Format for the device to be initialized, and

Left-click button.
Initiali zation will be executed.
3-127 IJRcl 8apanRadio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.11 USING CARD
----------------------------------
3.11.1.6 Showing data saved on the card (Show Card)
Procedures
selection button.
Selected items for Device I or Device2 wi ll be displayed.

displayed is saved.
Exit
1) Left-click the 1. Exit button.
The File Manager menu wil l close.
!.JRC I (Japan Radio Co., ..fid. 3 - 128

--- - - - - - - --
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.12 RECEIVE PORT SETIING
----------------------------------
RECEIVE PORT SETTING
The system can receive data from other system via the JRC-LAN. The purpose of
maker's system to JRC-LAN .
3.12.1 Receive Port Setting (RX Port)

Select ports for receiving signals from sensors.
T here are two methods for receiving signals: specifying a port for each sensor, or using
the automatic recognition function without specifying ports.
Procedures
1) Open the RX Port Setting menu by performing the menu
operation below.
Main
~ 6. NAV Equipment Setting
~ 6. RX Port

Heading, Speed, AIS, GPS, DLOG, Alarm, Depth, Temperature, Wind, Current, ROT, RSA, Time
Zone, Datemme
Selectable ports
When the automatic recognition AUTO
function is used :
When ports are specified: ONn LAN LAN (GPS) LAN (Ship' s Oock)
CN-m The system use data from sensor connected to the system directly.
LAN (GPS) The system uses GPS data from GPS (JRC-LAN connected).
LAN (Ship's Oock) The system uses ship's clock data from ship's clock (JRC-LAN
connected)
r::\ Setting of Section 7.2.10.2 "Reception Port Setting (RX Port)" is prior. If you want to set this
\!.I menu, Section 7.2.10.2 "Reception Port Setting (RX Port)" menu set to User Setting .
3-129 (.JRC] gapan. Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 3.BASIC OPERATION > 3.12 RECEIVE PORT SElTING
----------------------------------
[~RC ] gopan Radio Co.,.lid. 3 - 130

SECTION 4
BEARING
1
1111111 '' ·•tll llll l

4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS .................................... .. ........................4-1
4.1.1 Using Cursor (Cursor) ....................................................................4-2
4.1.2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings) ................................................4-2
4.1.3 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL1/EBL2) ................................ 4-3
4.1.4 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu) ............................................ .4-8
4.1 .6 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor ................................... 4-16
4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING ....................................4-19
4.2.1 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor) .............................. 4-20
Marker [EBL] [VRM] ..................................................................... 4-20
4.2.3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points ..................................... 4-21
I ~RC ] 8apan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
The system is equipped with the navigation tools below.
Cursor: Specifies an arbitrary point, and measures the range and bearing
from the own ship.
Range Rings: Displays concentric circles with own ship's position as the center at
specified intervals, and the rings are used as rough guides for range
measurement.
Electronic Bearing Line Displays a straight line for specifying an arbitrary bearing , and
(EBL 1/2): measures the bearing from the own ship. The process unit is
equipped with two electronic bearing lines.
Variable Range Marker Displays a circle for specifying an arbitrary range, and measures the
(VRM1/2): range from the own ship.The process unit is equipped with two
variable range markers.
Parallel Index Line (PI): Displays straight lines at even intervals, and the lines are used as
rough guides for complex measurement or ship courses.
EBL Maneuver: Displays the cou rse by steering the own ship, and it is used as a
rough guide for ship maneuvering .
Marker: Stores the latitude and longitude where the own ship was at the
point of storing the markers, and shows an anchor symbol on the
radar display. When the own ship has moved , the system displays
the range and bearing to the position.
EBLNRM/PI Operation with Operates EBL, VRM , or PI on the radar display by using the cursor.
Cursor (Cursor AUTO):
Cursor bearing Cursor mode Cursor latitude

true I relative
Cu rsor range
EBL1 starting point mode
VRM1 range
EBL1 On I Off
VRM1 On I Off
EBL2 On / Off VRI\!12 range
VRM2 On I Off
Parallel index line
starting point mode
EBL2
numeric value indication Consistent Common
4- 1 [..JRC ) aapanRodicJ Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
4.1.1 Using Cursor (Cursor)
Procedures
1) Move the cursor onto the PPI display by moving the trackball.
When the cursor is moved onto the PPI display, the arrow cursor turns into a cross cursor.
4.1.2 Using Range Rings (Range Rings)
Range rmgs display

Range rings interval
Procedures
1) Left-click the Rings button on upper left area on the display.
The range ring display switches disappear and appear between display and non-display each
time the Rmgs button is clicked. The range ring interval is shown in the Rings
button.
The range between the target and own ship can be determined by visually measuring the
target's position that lies between two range rings.
For change of the brilliance of range rings, refer to Section 3.8.5 "Set Radar Display (Display
Setting)".
[~RC ] gopon Radio Co.,.ltd. 4-2

----------------------------------
4.1.3 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL 1/EBL2)
Electronic bearing lines (EBL) are indispensable to the measurement ofbearings.
Operators must be familiar with the operation of EBL beforehand.
The system is equipped with two EBL. The bearing and starting point of an EBL
can be operated separately from the other EBL.
An intersection marker is displayed at the intersection point of the EBL and VRM
of the same number.
Intersection markers shown on EBL:
0 : EBL1 , VRM1
e : EBL2, VRM2
EBL2
\
-'--, \ VRM2
EBL1 ..···~""·····
(' \
·.
V RM1
..... ..... ' - - ~·;.,~.:::.~.~-···
EBL Bearing Display
The bearing value of the current EBLl or EBL2 on the PPI display is shown in the
The currently operable EBLl or EBL2 is highlighted in the upper right of the display.
Starting Point of EBL
The starting point of the currently operating EBL can be switched fro m the center of the
radar display to any offset position . The offset position of the EBL starting po int can be
fixed on U1e radar display or at the latitude and longitude. (The sett ing of the navigator is
necessary for fi xing the offset position at the latitude and longitude.)
4- 3 ["'RC I 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
4.1 .3.1 Operating EBL (EBL)
Procedures
1) Press the [EBL 1] or [EBL2] key.
The EBL button (located at the upper right of the display) will be high lighted, and the
selected EBL becomes operable.
2) Turn the [EBL] dial.
To turn the [EBL] dial to the right, turn the EBL control clockwise; to tum the [EBL] dial to
the left, tum the EBL control counterclockwise.
Cancel
1) Press the [EBL 1] or [EBL2] key again.
4.1.3.2 Moving the Starting Point of EBL
The system provides three types of EBL starting points. Select one of them in
accordance with purpose.
: The EBL starting point is defined as the own ship's position.
c : The EBL starting point is moved and fixed on the radar display.
o : The EBL starting point is moved and fixed at the latitude and
longitude. (The navigator needs to be connected.)
[1] To move the starting point of EBL
Procedures
1) Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable.
2) Press the [EBL] dial to set c or o for the EBL1 I EBL2

starting point mode switching located at the upper right of the
display.
The selected EBL starting point mode is switched as shown below each time the dial is
pressed.
3) Put the cursor on the EBL starting point is to be moved, and left-
click.
The selected EBL starting point wi ll be determined.
[.JRC ] f)opan Radio Co.,.lid. 4- 4

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARI NG > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
[2] To return the EBL starting point to own ship's position
Procedures
1) Make EBL 1 or EBL2 operable.
2) Press the [EBL] dial to set for the EBL 1 I EBL2 starting point
mode switching located at the upper right of the display.
The selected EBL starting point wi ll be set as the own ship's position .
4.1.3.3 Setting EBL Operation Mode
[1] To set the numeric value display mode of EBL (EBL Bearing REF)
Determine whether to displ ay EBL in true bearing mode or relative bearing mode.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the EBL 112 numeric value indication true I
relative switching (located at the upper right of the display), and
left-click.
T he selected mode is switched as shown below each time the left button is clicked.
r :EBL bearing is displayed in true bearing mode.
R :EBL bearing is displayed in relative bearing mode.
[2] To set a mode for fixing EBL display (EBL Bearing Fix)
When this function is set to Angle, an EBL is fixed to the preset bearing. For
example, if a true bearing of 020° is preset, the EBL is fixed to the true bearing
020° even when the own ship turns.
When the function is set to Screen , the EBL is fi xed on the radar display. In this
case, the EBL is always fixed to the same bearing on the display when the own
ship turns.
4- 5 [JRC] f)opon Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING> 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
Procedures
1) Open the EBL/Cursor Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
Main
~ 7. Sub Menu
~ 9. EBLjCursor Setting
2) Left-click at the item button

of 1. EBLl Bearing FIX or 2. EBL2 Bearing FIX
Angle :EBL bearing is fixed to the preset value.
Screen :EBL bearing is fixed on the radar display.
~ Course data is necessary for turning on this

\.!) function.
Variable range markers (VRM) are indispensable to the measurement of ranges.

Operators must be familiar with the operation of VRM beforehand.
The system is equipped with two VRM. The VRM can be operated separately
from each other.
An intersection marker is displayed at the intersection point of the VRM and EBL
of the same number.
When the starting point of an EBL is offset, the center of the VRM is defined as
the offset EBL starting point.
Intersection markers shown on VRM:
0 : EBL1 , VRM1
e : EBL2, VRM2
['-'RC] f)opon RadicJ Co., .lid. 4 -6

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING> 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
EBL2
\ VRM2
EBL1
/ ..····•\•••••······ · ., /
:~ '. / :
y
' \. ,"'./
VRM1 . . . . . . -- - ·:.::..<.:::.....···
VRM Operation
The range value of the current VRMl or VRM2 on the PPI display is shown in the
VRM 1/2 range located at the upper right of the display. T he currently operable VRM I or
VRM2 is highl ighted in the VRMl VRM2 button located at the upper right of the
display.
4.1 .3.4 To operate VRM (VRM)
Procedures
1) Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key.
T he VRMl and VRM2 buttons (located at the upper right of the display) will be
highlighted, and the selected VRM becomes operable.
2) Turn the [VRM] dial.
To turn the [VRM] dial to the right, the VRM contro l wide, to tum the [V RM] djal to the
left, the V RM contro l narrow.
Cancel
1) Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key again.
The selected EBL djsplay will disappear.
4- 7 (JRC l aopon RadiJJ Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
4.1.4 Using Parallel Index Lines (PI Menu)
Parallel index lines can be displayed .
Procedures
1) Press the [VRM] dial.
Parallel index lines and the PI Menu will appear.
To change the bearing of parallel index lines, turn the [EBL] dial, to change the line interval,
turn the [VRM] dial.
The bearing and interval of parallel index lines are displayed in the PI Menu.
Parallel index lines are operable only wh ile the PI Menu is

displayed. When the menu is closed, the parallel index line
display remains, but the settings of the bearing and interval
cannot be adjusted any more. To adjust the bearing and
interval after closing the menu, press the [VRM] dial twice to
open the PI Menu.
Cancel
The parallel index line display will disappear.
4.1 .4.2 Operation of Parallel Index Lines
• Parallel index lines rotate in the same direction as you turn the [EBL] dial. (CD,
@)
• The intervals of parallel index Jines narrow w hen you tum the [VRM] dial
counterclockwise (®), and widen when you turn the [VRM] dial clockwise
(®).
• When the [VRM] dial is pressed, the PI Menu closes and the parallel index
lines are fixed.
[JRC ] 8opan RadicJ Co., .lid. 4- 8

----------------------------------
HL
During the operation of parallel index I ines, pressing the [EBL 1] or [EBL2] key
disables operation for rotation directions. Pressing the (VRMl] or [VRM2] key
di sables operation for parallel index line interval s.
4 .1.4.3 Settings in PI Menu (PI Menu)
The operation of parallel index lines can be set in the PI Menu.
Procedures
1) Left-click the PI button to open the PI menu.
[1] Display for All Lines
Sets the parallel index line display to on or off.
On :Parallel index lines are displayed.
Off :Parallel index lines are not displayed .
4- 9 ['-'RC I 8apan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-$A Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
[2] Operation Mode
Sets an operation mode for parallel index lines.
All Individual
T~ck Equ~ngu~r
All :All the parallel lines are operated at the same time.
Individual :The bearing of each line is operated individually.
Track :Equally spaced lateral lines are displayed on both sides.
Equiangular :Two lines intersecting at the center of a circle are displayed.
a. Operation if Individual is selected

• A line perpendicular to the own ship and the intersection marker "----o " are
displayed on an operable line.
• Turning the [EBL] dial changes the direction.
• Pressing the [VRM] dial changes the range, end point I , or end point 2 to be
operated.
• An operable point is displayed with "• " and can be operated by turning the
[VRM] dial.
• If Sequential is selected for [3] Control, the parallel index lines of the next
number can be di splayed by pressing the [EBL] dial.
• To close the menu, left click O.Exit software button.
b. Operation if Equiangular is selected

• Select a group of lines to be operated according to the setting of [3] Control.
• Pressing the [EBL] dial switches between the direction change mode and
elevation-angle change mode. Turning the [EBL] dial changes the direction or
elevation angle.
[~RC ] 8opan Radio Co., .lid. 4-10

----------------------------------
[3] Control
Determines whether to operate all the lines at the same time. The setting items are
determined by the setting of Section [2] "Operation Mode".
All :All the lines are operated at the same time.
Detennine whether to set consecutive lines or indiv idual lines.
Sequential :Lines are operated sequentially.
Index linel to lineS :A specified line is operated.
c. If Track or Equiangular is selected
Select a group of lines to be operated.
Groupl to Group4 :A specified group is operated .
[4] Floating
Moves the center point of parallel index Iines.
Off :The starting point of parallel index lines is defined as

the own ship's position.
Screen Fix :The center of parallel index lines is moved and fixed on
the radar display.
l/L Fix :The center of parallel index lines is moved and fixed at
the latitude and longitude. (The navigator needs to be
connected .)
[5] Heading Link
Determines whether to operate parallel index lines following the heading bearing.
On :Parallel index lines are operated following the heading

bearing.
Off :Parallel index lines are not operated following the

heading bea ring.
4 - 11 [.JRC] aopan.Radi.o Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
[6] Next
Moves to the next page.
[7] Range Scale Link
Determines the operation of parallel index line intervals when the range is
changed.
On :The intervals are fixed with the actual range (nm). The
appearance of parallel index line intervals changes
when the range is changed.
Off :The intervals are fixed with the display range. The
parallel index line intervals (nm) change when the
range is changed.
[8] Reference Bearing
Sets a reference bearing for the numeric data display of parallel index lines. The
setting items are determined by the setting of Section [2] "Operation Mode"
True :Displayed with true bearing (with North as referen ce).
True :Displayed with true bearing (with North as

reference).
Index linel to Line8 :Displayed with a specified line as reference.
[JRC] 8opan.RadkJCo.,.lid. 4 - 12
JMA-9172-5A Instruction Manual > 4 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
c . If Track is selected
True : Displayed with true bearing (with North as

reference).
HL : Displayed with the heading line as reference.
Index Linel to LineS : Displayed with a specified line as reference.
Line1, Line3, LineS and ¢:)

Linel Groupl
Line7 correspond to
Group1 , Group2, Group3 Line3 ¢:) Group2
and Group4, respectively. LineS ¢:) Group3
Line7 ¢:) Group4
d. If Equiangular is selected
[9] Operation Area
If All is selected for Section [2] "Operation Mode", this function sets an area for
displaying parallel index lines.
One Side :Parallel index lines are displayed only on one side.
Both Side :Parallel index lines are displayed on both sides.
[1 O]Display for Individual Line
Determines whether to tum on I off the parallel index line display of a selected
number.
On :The line of the selected number is displayed.
Off :The line of the selected number is not displayed.
If All is selected for Section [2] "Operation Mode", the

line near the own ship is Index unel .
If Track or Equiangular is selected ¢:)

Line l Groupl
for Section [2] "Operation Mode",
Line1 , Line3, LineS and Line7 Line3 ¢:) Group2
LineS ¢:) Group3
correspond to Group1 , Group2,
Group3 and Group4 , respectively. Line7 ¢:) Group4
4-13 I.JRC ] gopan Rodi.o Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstructton Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
4.1.5 Operating EBL Maneuver Function (EBL Maneuver Setting)
Procedures
1) Open the EBL Maneuver Setting menu by performing the
Main
~ 1. EBL Maneuver Setting
2) Set the following parameters.
Reach :Set the range from when the rudder is steered to when
the ship beings to turn .
ITum Mode I :Select a turn mode.

Radius :Turning radius (NM)
Rate :Rate of turn (deg/min)
ITum Set :Select the setting for turning.
If Radius is selected :Turning radius (NM)
If Rate is selected :Rate of turn (deg/min)
A wrong initial setting affects the maneuver curve function

explained below.
[.JRC I aapan Radio Co., .ltd. 4- 14

----------------------------------
4.1.5.2 Creation of Maneuver Curve (EBL Maneuver)
Procedures
1) Left-click the item button of 1. EBL Maneuver while the EBL
Maneuver Setting menu is open.
The EBL maneuver function will be set to on or off.
A auxiliary line for maneuver curve creation, a maneuver curve, and a WOL will appear on
the radar display.
2) Put the cursor on the starting point of the auxiliary line, and set
the bearing of the auxiliary line by operating the [EBL] dial.
The bearing of the auxiliary line is the final bearing in which the own ship is to move.
The WOL position varies depending on the bearing of the auxi liary line.
If the WOL is behind the CCRP, the line color ofWOL will change.
3) Left-click.
The setting wi ll be determined. However, if the WOL is behind the CCRP position at this
point, left-clicking is rejected, and the setting is not determined.
WOL Steering point

Reach Range from when the rudder
Own ship' s position is steered to when the ship
begins to tum
Radius : Tum1ng radius
4 - 15 ['-'RC] 8apan.Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
4.1.6 Operating EBL, VRM, and PI with Cursor
When the cursor mode is set to AUTO (located at the upper right of the
display), EBL, VRM, and PI can be operated simply by using the trackball.
4.1.6.1 Operating Electronic Bearing Line (EBL)

- ------------- - ------ -- --------- -
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on EBL 1 or EBL2, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved to it, EBLl or EBL2 is shown at the upper right of the
cursor. The EBL becomes operable when left-clicking.
2) Move the cursor to the bearing to be set.
The EB L will move as the cursor moves.
3) Left-click.
The EBL will be fixed.
4.1.6.2 Operating Variable Range Marker (VRM)
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on VRM1 or VRM2, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved to it, VRMl or VRM2 is shown at the upper ri ght of
the cursor. The VRM becomes operable when left-clicking.
2) Move the cursor to the range to be set.
The YRM wi ll move as the cursor moves.
3) Left-click.
The YRM will be fixed.
[.JRC ] f)apon Radio Co., .li d. 4- 16

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4 1 USE OF NAVIGATION TOOLS
----------------------------------
4.1.6.3
Procedures
I ) Put the cursor on the intersection marker ( o or • ), and left-
click.
When the cursor is moved to it, EBLl VRMl or EBL2 VRM2 is
shown at the upper right of the cursor. The EBL and VRM become operable when !eA.-
clicking.
2) Move the cursor to the bearing I range to be set.
The EBL and VRM will move as the cursor moves.
3) Left-click.
The EBL and VRM will be fixed.
[1] To change the direction of parallel index lines
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on near the center of line, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved there, it will tum into .@ and PI wil l be displayed at
the upper right of the cursor. The parallel index lines become operable when lef1-clicking.
2) Move the cursor to the direction to be set.
The parallel index lines will change the direction as the cursor moves.
3) Left-click.
4-17 [JRC I aapan Radio Co.,l'Jd.

----------------------------------
[2] To change parallel index line intervals
Procedures
I ) Put the cursor on near the end of line, and left-click.
When the cursor is moved there, it wi ll tum into <==¢ and PI will be displayed at
2) Move the cursor to the interval to be set.
The parallel index lines interval wi ll change as the cursor moves.
If Individual is selected for Operation Mode, the parallel index lines move.
3) Left-click.
The para llel index lines wi ll be fixed.
[3] To change the end points of parallel index lines
Jflndividual is selected for Operation Mode, the length of paralle l index lines can
be changed.
Procedures
I ) Put the cursor on the end point of parallel index lines, and left-
click.
When the cursor is moved there, it will tum into <==¢ and PI will be displayed at
2) Move the cursor to the position to be set.
The position of the end point wi ll change as the cursor moves.
3) Left-click.
[.JRC] gapanRadio Co.,.lld. 4-18

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND
-----------------------------~~--

BEARING
Target position on the RADAR screen
RADAR antenna transmits pulses of radio waves. The object returns the wave
(radar echo) to the antenna. So on the RADAR screen the leading edge of echo is
the actual target position. The length of echo is dependent on the transmitted pulse
length.
Point the cursor to the leading edge of echo to measure the target range or to make
a mark on the target.
Pulse of radio wave
RADAR echo
Fig 4-1 : Transmitting-Receiving of RADAR
Pulse length
Target range
270~--------------------~--~~---------------L 90
Own ship's position
Fig 4-2: Relation of echo, target range and pulse length
4 - 19 [JRC) 8apanRadioCo.,.ltd.
JMA-9172-SA lnstrucbon Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND
.UE&il~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
4.2.1 Measurement with Cursor Position (Cursor)

Procedures
1) Make sure of the target echoes on the radar display.
2) Move the cursor to the target.
The bearing and range of the target will be shown in the Cursor bearing I range located at the
upper right of the display. The range is a distance from the own ship's position.
Cursor - ~ < ~UTO >c

,T 045.0 ° ~ 35°04.242'N
6.00 NM _139°05.172'E
Cursor
270 90

own ship' s position to target in this figure :
Range 6 .00 N M
180
4.2.1 .1 To set a cursor bearing numeric value mode
Determine whether to display a cursor bearing in true or relative bearing mode.
Procedures
I) Put the cursor on the Cursor bearing numeric value indication
true I relative switching (located at the upper right of the display),
and left-click.
The selected mode is switched as shown below each time left-clicking.
T =} R =} T
T :Cursor bearing is displayed in true bearing mode.
R :Cursor bearing is displayed in relative bearing mode.
4.2.2 Measurement with Electronic Bearing Line and Variable

Range Marker [EBL] [VRM]
[JRC] (japan RadicJ Co., .lid. 4 - 20

~~-----~~---------------------------------------------
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4 2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND
----------------------------- ~~~--
Procedures
1) Press the [EBL 1] key.
EBLl numeric value indication
The EBLl (located at the upper true 1 relative switching EBLl adjustment
right of the display) will be

highlighted, and EBLl will be
shown with a dotted line on the PPI
display.
2) Move the EBL1 to the

target by turning the [EBL]
dial. VRMl adjustment EBLl starting point
mode switching
The EBLI bearing will be shown in
the EB L I bearing (located at the
upper right of the display). The EBL I bearing is the bearing of the target.
The VRM l (located at the upper right of the display) wi ll be high lighted, and VRM I
will be shown with a dotted line on the PPI display.
4) Move the VRM1 to the target by turning the [VRM] dial.
The range of VRM I from the own ship's position will be shown in the VRM I range located
at the upper right of the display.
T 045.0 ~-G_
5.00 NM
EBI..2 :T .o
, "' vRM2 _ 'r:JM
P_I _ _ --
/
/ "
I
I
I
I
270 I 90
I
I
\
\
\ Own ship' s position
' ' .... ' ............ ___ _
own ship' s position to target in this figure :
Range 5.00 NM
180
4.2.3 Measurement with Two Arbitrary Points

Procedures
1) Press the [EBL2] key.
4 - 21 [.J RC ] dt:if.Xi" Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 4.MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND BEARING > 4.2 MEASUREMENT OF RANGE AND
~Eijl~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
The EBL2 ( located at the upper right of the display) will be highlighted, and EBL2
will be shown on the PPI display.
2) Press the [EBL] dial to select C for the EBL2 starting point mode
switching located at the upper right of the display.
3) Put the cursor on the point A of the two points between which
measurement is made, and left-click.
Refer to the figure below.
4) Move the EBL2 to the other point B by turning the [EBL] dial.
When YRM2 is selected, • (intersection marker) will appear on the dotted line of EBL2.
6) Move the intersection marker on the dotted line to point B by

The range and bearing between the two points will be shown in the VRM2 range and EBL2
bearing (located at the upper right of display).
EBL2
270 90
Bearing and range between points

A and 8 in this figure:
Range 6.00 NM
180
Similarly, EBL 1 can also be used for measuring the bearing and range between
two points. In this case, perform the above procedure reading EBL2 as EBL 1 and
VRM2 as VRM 1.
[.JRC) (Japan Radio Co.,i'Jd. 4 - 22

SECTION 5
OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING
AND AIS
llll l lt' ' 111111

5.1 PREPARATION ......................................................................................5·1
5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols ...................................................................5-5
5.1.3 Radar Display .................................................................................. 5·9
5.1 .5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria .............................................. 5-13
5.1.6 Setting Vectors (Vector Time) ......................................................5-14
5.2.1 Acquiring Target (ACQ] .................................. .............................. 5-15
5.3 AIS OPERATION .................................................................................. 5-27
!JRC l aapan Radio Co.,.ltd.

5.3.1 Restrictions .................................................................................... 5-27
Identical (Association Setting) ..................................................... 5-38
5.5 ALARM DISPLAY ................................................................................. 5-40
5.5.1 CPA I TCPA Alarm ......................................................................... 5-41
(New Target) ................................................................................... 5-42
5.5.4 Gyro Set Alarm .............................................................................. 5-43
5.6 TRACK FUNCTION .............................................................................. 5-44
5. 7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver) .......................... 5-54
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5 1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
PREPARATION
Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
• There are the following limitations on use of the target acquisition and target
tracking functions.
[I] Resolution between adjacent targets and swapping during automatic target
tracking
Depending on the particular distance and echo size, resolution between adjacent
targets during automatic target tracking usually ranges somewhere between 0.03 to
0.05 NM. If multiple targets approach each other, resolution will become about 0.05 NM
and this may cause the system to regard them as one target and thus to swap them or
lose part of them. Such swapping or less of targets may also occur if the picture of the
target being tracked is affected by rain/snow clutter returns or sea clutter returns or
moves very close to land.
(II] Intensity of echoes and the target tracking function
The intensity of echoes and the tracking function have a correlationship, and thus the
target will be lost if no echoes are detected during six scans in succession. If a lost
target exists, therefore, radar gain must be increased to support detection of the target.
If, however, radar gain is increased too significantly, sea clutter returns or other noise
may be erroneously detected and tracked as a target, and resultingly, a false alarm
may be issued.
(III]Adverse effects of error sources on automatic tracking
To execute accurate tracking , it becomes necessary first to appropriately
adjust the [GAIN), [SEA] and [RAIN] dials of the radar so that the target
to be acquired and tracked id clearly displayed on the radar display.
Inappropriate settings of these adjustments reduce the reliability I
accuracy of automatic tracking .
This section explains the features of the target tracking and AIS functions, and the
initial setting for using each function .
The target tracking function calculates the course and speed of a target by
automatically tracking the target's move.
The target tracking function enables the automatic acquisition of targets by using
the automatic acquisition zone function.
The target tracking function also enables the simulation of the ship maneuvering
method to avoid collisions by using the trial maneuver function .
5-1 [ ~RC ] 8apan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstruc!Jon Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
If the mode is ground stabilization, SOG/COG used for own ship's information in
target tracking. If the mode is sea stabi lization, SPD (speed through the water) I
HDG (heading) used for own ship's information in target tracking.
AIS (Automatic Identification System) function
The AJS function shows the target 's information on the radar di splay, using other
ship's information sent out from the AIS unit.
5.1.1 Collision Avoidance
5.1 .1.1 Problems of Collision Avoidance in Navigation

Marine collision avoidance is one of the problems that have been recognized from
of old. Now, it will be described briefly who the collision avoidance is positioned
among the navigational aid problems.
The navigation pattern of all mobile craft constitutes a system with some closed
loops regardless of the media through which the mobile craft travel s, whether air,
water, the boundary between air and water, or space. This pattern consists of two
closed loops in principle, one of which is a collision with another mobile craft and
the other is a loop of finding a right and safe way to reach a predetenninate
destination. Fig. 5-1 shows the conceptual diagram of navi gation pattern by MR.
E.W. Anderson. The closed loop of collision avoidance is shown on the left side
and the closed loop of finding a right course on the right side.
Collision avoidance Destination Decision of cource

Fixing by radio wave ,
+ visual and celestial
observation
Traffic rule Course Gu1de loop
Vessel ' s Spacing loop
Caluculati
Dead
+ reckoning
on
I
Visual and rad1o Cource and Compass
watch speed and log
Cllision
~
avoidance loop
lnsrument or
Judgement Maneuver
judgement -
Control
~
loop
t
Ship traveling in controlled condition
Fig 5-1 : Navigation Pattern
[.JRC] aopanRadio Co.,.lld. 5-2

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
5.1.1.2 Marine Accidents and Collisions
Among marine accidents, collision accidents have been highlighted as the
tonnages and speeds of ships become higher along with the increase in traffic at
sea. If a tanker carrying dangerous articles such as crude oi l collides with any
other vessel, then not only the vessels involved with the accident but other vessels
in the vicinity, port faci lities, inhabitants in the coastal area as well as marine
resources may also suffer immeasurable damages and troubles. Coll ision
accidents have a high percentage of the marine accidents that have occurred in
recent years. To cope with these problems, any effective measures are needed and
some equipment to achieve collision avoidance requ irements have been developed
at rapid strides.
5.1.1 .3 Basic Concept of Collision Avoidance

There are two aspects in collision avoidance: collision prediction and avoidance.
Collision prediction is to predict that two or more vessels will happen to occupy
the same point at the same time, while collision avoidance is to maneuver vessels
not to occupy the same point at the same time.
In practical operation of vessels, a spot of collision has to be deemed to be a single

point but a closed zone. This closed zone is conceptually defined as a CPA
(Closest Point of Approach). In collision prediction, the time to be taken until a
ship reaches the CPA is defined as a TCPA (Time to CPA).
Fig. 5-2 shows a diagram caked "Collision Triangle".

Target Vessel True Vector
Target vessel
Relative Vector
I
I
I
I
CPA ring I
, " ""
_ ,,.""
.....
-------
Fig 5-2: Collision Triangle
5-3 I~RC I aopan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
5.1.1 .4 Relative Vector and True Vector
From two points of view, collision prediction and avoidance, it is necessary to
obtain the relative vector of other ship for prediction and the true vector of other
ship for collision avoidance in order to grasp other ship 's aspect. The relationship
between the relative vector and true vector is shown in Fig. 5-3.
Both rough CPA and TCPA can be obtained easily from the relative speed vector
of other ship. This method has an advantage that the risks of coll ision with all
other ships within the radar range can be seen at a glance. On the other hand, the
course and speed of other ship can easily be obtained from its true speed vector,
enabling other ship ' s aspect to be seen at a glance. Thus, the aspects of other ships
(transverse, outsail, paraJlel run, reverse run, etc. ) as described in the act of
prevention of collision at sea can be readily grasped. If there is a risk of collision
with other ship, the operator can determine which rule to be applied and how to
operate own ship.
N
Target ship true vector

V0 : Own ship's speed
N
8 0 : Own ship's course
VT: Other ship's true speed
BT: Target ship's true course
VR: Target ship's relative speed
BR: Target ship's relative course
8,..: Aspect
Relative vector
CPA
Fig 5-3: Relative Vector and True vector
5.1.1.5 Radar and Collision Avoidance

Radar is still playing an important roll for colli sion prevention and positioning.
A plotter is used to further enhance the radar functionality. The plotter is capable
of plotting other positi ons of other ships in 3 to 6 minute intervals to monitor their
movement. The plots of other ships represent their tracks relative to own ship, and
it is shown whether there is a risk of collision, namely CPA and TCPA can be
obtained. This method using a plotter is fairly effective, but the number of target
ship, which is manually plotted, is limited and it takes several minutes to measure
those.
I ~Rc ] flopanRadkJ Co.,.lid. 5- 4

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 51 PREPARATION
--- ------------------------ ----- --

5.1.2 Definitions of Symbols
5.1 .2.1 Types and Definitions of Target Tracking Symbols

Symbol
Initial acquisition This symbol is displayed until the vector is
target displayed after target acquisition.
-, Target acquired in The alarm sounds.

I J automatic
- 12 acquisition zone The alarm message (New Target) turns red and
blinks.The symbol is red colored.
G---
12
Tracked target
Dangerous target The alarm sounds.

G--- 12 The alarm message (CPAITCPA) turns red and
blinks.The symbol turns red and enlarges.
r , Numeric When the numeric data is displayed, the target

G--- displayed target symbol is enclosed in a square.
L .J 12
Lost target The alarm sounds.
The alarm message (Lost) turns red and

blinks.The symbol turns red, and indicates with
X mark.
, Past position The past positions of an AIS target are displayed
I
0 as well as the target tracking symbol.
• 12
• • •
, Target track The track of another ship as an AIS target is
I
displayed as well as the target tracking symbol.
__/
0 12
5- 5 ! ~Re i 8opanRadi.o Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
5.1.2.2 Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols

Symbol
Sleeping target This symbol is displayed when received data is
<1 valid.The direction of the triangle's vertex
indicates the target's bow or course.
Activated target The heading direction is displayed with a solid
line, and the course vector is displayed with a
dotted line. The line perpendicular to the
heading direction indicates the direction to
which the course is to be changed . This line
may not be displayed.
Target acquired in The alarm sounds.
automatic
acquisition zone The alarm message (New Target) turns red
and blinks.
Outline display The outlines of ships are displayed scaled
~12
down.
Numeric displayed When the numeric data is displayed, the target
r/
L .J AIS12
target
Dangerous target
symbol is enclosed in a square.
The alarm sounds.
~2 Lost target
The alarm message (CPA/TCPA) turns red
and blinks.The symbol turns red and enlarges.
The alarm sounds.
The symbol turns red, and indicates with X

mark.
Sleeping AIS-SART The A IS-SART symbol is colored as well as
target AIS target symbol
Activated The target number displayed beside the

AIS-SART target symbol.
Numeric displayed When the numeric data is displayed, the target

AIS-SART target symbol is enclosed in a square.
Lost AIS-SART When the data of an AIS-SART target cannot

target be received for 6 minutes, the lost target is
displayed.
NOTE: For details about AIS-SART, refer to Section 6.5 "DISPLAY OF AIS-
SART".
AIS-SART function is available in the display software ver. 01 .01.

As for method of confirming software version, refer to Section 8.3. 1.6
[.JRC] 3opan Radicl Co., .lid. 5-6

----------------------------------
• Up to 300 targets can be displayed in total of activated and sleeping AJS
targets. Up to 100 activated AJS targets can be included in the total.
• If there are more AIS targets than the allowable maximum, they are di splayed
in the following priority order:
1. Numeric displayed target

2. Target of which CPA I TCPA is lower than the set
value(Target as a dangerous ship for which an alarm
has occurred)
3. Target in automatic activation zone
5. Target inside AIS filter
6. Target outside AIS filter
• If the number of targets at the same priority level exceeds the allowable
maximum, they are di splayed in the following priority order:
1 . Association target
3. Sleeping AIS target
The vector of an AIS target is to be displayed with a vector over ground or over
water, depending on the speed sensor setting and current offset setting. The type
of the currently di splayed vector can be confrrmed by viewing the setting of the
stable mode.
When GND is displayed for Vector over ground

When Sea is displayed for Vector over water

When the vector of an AlS target is displ ayed with a vector over water, the system
has converted the AIS target's vector over ground to the vector over water
according to the data received from the AfS and the own ship's information.
When the AIS target's symbol is activated but the vector is not
NOTE: displayed, the following are probable causes of the trouble:
• COG/SOG is not yet input from the GPS.

• The selected speed sensor is malfunctioning.
5- 7 (.JRC] gapan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AN D AIS > 51 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
5.1.2.3 Types and Definitions of Association Target Symbols
When a tracked target and an AJS target are decided as identical, it is displayed
with either of the following symbols:

Symbol
Priority for tracked target

@
Association target
Priority for AIS target

(}) Association target
a. Setting of Tracked Target Symbol Display

Thi s function switches the tracking target symbol display between on and
off. Even i f the tracking target symbol display is turned off, the data is retained.
Procedures
l ) Left-click the 0 button in the Target Information located at the
The tracking target symbol display will be set to on or off.
[.JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.lid. 5- 8

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - --------
----------------------------------
b. Setting of AIS Target Symbol Display
This function switches the AJS target symbol display between on and off.
Procedures
1) Left-click the <:/ button in the Target Information located at the
The AIS target symbol display wi ll be set to on or ofT.
5.1.3 Radar Display
5.1 .3.1 Vector Display

A vector to represent a target ' s predicted position can be presented in the True
vector or Relative vector mode. ln each mode, a vector length can be freely
changed for a time interval of I to 60 minutes.
To switch between the true vector mode and relative vector mode, press the [T/R
VECT] key.
5.1.3.2 Vector Mode Selection

[1] True Vector Mode
ln the true vector mode, the direction of a target vector indicates the true course of
the target and its vector length is proportional to its speed.
In thi s mode, own shi p's vector is displayed as shown Fig 5-4.
In this mode, the movements of other ships around own ship can be accurately and
easily monitored.
However, CPA Ring cannot appear in this mode.
Own ship' s position
True vector
The relative vector is

not displayed
Fig 5-4: True Vector
5-9 [JRC I 8opan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5 1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
[2] Relative Vector Mode
The relative vector does not represent the true motion of the target, but its relative
relation with own ship. This means that a target with its relative vector directed to
own ship (passing through the CPA Limit ring) will be a dangerous target. In the
Relative Vector mode, it can be seen at a glance where the CPA Limit of the
dangerous target is.
Therefore, the True I Relative mode shall optionally be used for the purpose of
observation: the True vector mode for grasping the true aspect of a target, and the
Relative vector mode for grasping a target' s closest point of approach (CPA).
The true vector is

not displayed
CPA ring
Relative vector
Fig 5-5: Relative Vector
5.1.3.3 Vector Length (Vector Time)

The vector length of a target is proportional to its speed, and the vector time can
be switched in a range of 1 to 60 minutes.
The diagram below illustrates a vector length of a target for 6 minutes, and the tip
of the vector represents the target's position expected to reach 6 minutes later.
Future predicted position

(6 min later in this example)
Current position
Fig 5-6: Vector Length
Refer to Section 5.1.6 "Setting Vectors (Vector Time)".
[JRC) dapan Radio Co.,Lid. 5 - 10

----------------------------------
5.1.4 Cursor Modes (Cursor)
5.1 .4.1 Types and Functions of Cursor Modes
The types of cursor modes are listed in the table below. To use the function of a
cursor mode, move the cursor onto the PPI object and left-click.
Mode Function
ACQ TT Enables the target tracking function to acquire a target in manual
mode.
ACT AIS Activates AIS targets, and sets a point filter.
TGT Data Displays the numeric data of a tracking target or AIS target.
CNCL TT Cancels a tracking target.
DEACT AIS Deactivates AIS target.
Data CNCL Hides the displayed numeric data of a tracked target or AIS target.
Mark Puts a temporary mark.
Property Displays the information of tracked targets, AIS targets, and marks.
AUTO Changes operation in accordance with the object at the cursor

position .
5.1 .4.2 Change of Cursor Mode
Procedures
I) Left-click the Cursor button located at the upper right of the
display. Alternatively, on the PPI, right-click and select a desired
cursor mode from the list.
The selected cursor mode will be shown at the cursor mode (Upper right of the display on
page 2-4).
17\ If the function of a selected cursor mode is not used for one
\ ! ) minute or more, the cursor mode is automatically changed to
AUTO .
5-11 [.JRC ] aopan.Radio Co., .ftd.

----------------------------------
5.1 .4.3 Operation of AUTO Mode
As shown below, the AUTO mode performs operation in accordance with the
object at the cursor posi tion when left-clicked.
The AUTO mode permits to access that you want by intuitive operation.
Object at Cursor Position Operation
None Acquires a target.
EBL EBL operation.
VRM VRM operation .
Intersection point of EBL Performs EBL operation and VRM operation at

and VRM the same time.
Parallel index line Operates the parallel index line.
Tracked target Displays the numeric data of the tracked target.
Tracked target with Hides the numeric data.

numeric data d isplayed
Sleeping AIS target Activates the AIS target.
Activated AIS target Displays the AIS target information.
AIS target with numeric Hides the AIS target information.

data d isplayed
Automatic acqu isition I Operates the automatic acquisition I activation

activation zone zone.
AIS filter Operates the AIS fi lter zone.
[JRC j gopan.RadicJ Co.,.lid. 5-12

JMA-9172-SA InstructiOn Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.1 PREPARATION
----------------------------------
5.1.5 Setting Collision Decision Criteria
.--- - - Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
• Set the optimum values of collision decision

conditions, depending upon vessel type, water area,
weather and oceanographic conditions. (For the
relations between those conditions and alarms, refer
to Section 5.5 "ALARM DISPLAY". )
5.1.5.1 Input of CPA Limit
Procedures
1) Left-click the CPA limit setting button in the Target Information
The CPA Limit value input screen will appear.
2) Enter the value to be set as a CPA limit.
Latitude I Longitude and C haracter Input menu".
5.1.5.2 Input of TCPA Limit
Procedures
1) Left-click the TCPA limit setting button in the Target Information
The TC PA Limit value input screen will appear.
2) Enter the value to be set as a TCPA limit.
For inputs to the va lue input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value,
Latitude I Longitude and Characte r Input menu".
5.1.5.3 Setting CPA Ring (CPA Ring)

While the distance of the specified CPA Limit value is used as the radius, the CPA
ring is displayed with a red circle.
Procedures
I) Left-click the CPA Ring button located at the lower right of the
display.
The C PA ring wi ll be displayed.
The CPA ring is not displayed when the true vector mode is
NOTE: selected.
5-13 [~RC l aopan Radio Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
5.1.6 Setting Vectors (Vector Time)
Vector time can be set in minutes in the range I to 60 min.
A true vector mode or relative vector mode can be selected.
5.1.6.1 Setting vector time on the display (Vector)
Procedures
I) Left-click the target vector time setting button in the Target
Information located at the lower right of the display.
2) Enter the value to be set as vector time.
For inputs to the va lue input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4 "Operation on Numeric Value,
5.1.6.2 Setting vector mode [T/R VECT]
Procedures
I) Press the [T/R VECT] key.
The current vector mode T (true vector) or R (relative vector) wi ll be displayed in the
target vector display true I relative switching in Target [nformation located at the upper right
of the display.
5.1.7 Setting the GPS antenna location

Set the GPS antenna location. Set offset ranges in longitudinal direction and
latitudinal direction from the own ship's reference position.
For the setting procedure, refer to Section 7. l.9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP
Setting)" .
. - - - - - Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
• If offset ranges are not set correctly, AIS symbols

and radar echoes may be displayed shifted.
• When offset ranges are set, latitude and longitude
data received from the GPS is offset, and the offset
data is displayed as the latitude and longitude of
own ship' s position.
[JRC) gopan.Radio Co.,.lld. 5-14

JMA-91 72-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARG ET TRACKING A ND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
This section explains how to use the target tracking function.
The target tracking function automatically tracks a target, and displays the target's
course and speed as vectors. The target tracking function calculates CPA and
TCPA, and issues an alarm as needed.
The tracking data is erased from memory when the power is turned off or during
transmission standby.
5.2.1 Acquiring Target [ACQ]

Target acquisition can be perfonned on two modes, Automatic and Manual, and
both modes can be used at the same time.
5.2.1.1 Automatic acquisition

If the number of targets being tracked has reached the
NOTE: allowable maximum and other targets (not being tracked) go
into the a cquisition/activation zone, automatically acquired
targets are canceled in ascending order of danger.
The position of the scanner shall be at the centre of the azimuth

or range in the acquisition/activation zone.
[1] Turning On I Off the automatic acquisition and AIS activation (AZ Menu)
Procedures
AZ
2) Left-click the item button of 1. AZl or 2. AZ2
The acquisition I activat ion zone I (AZ I) or acquisition I acti vation zone 2 (AZ2) will be set
to on or off.
:The acquisition I activation zone is turned on. The mark

On
0 .,and target 10 number are put to an acquired target and
move with the target. The vectors are displayed within 1
minute. AIS targets are activated.
:The acquisition/activation zone is turned off. The

Off
acquisition/activation zone will disappear from the radar
display, but the system continues to track the acquired
target. The activated AIS targets remain activate.
5 - 15 [.JRC l aapan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
[2] Creating the automatic acquisition and AIS activation Zone (Make AZ)
Procedures
AZ
2) Left-click the item button of 3 · Make AZl or 4 . Make AZ2
The range setting ofthe acquisition I activation zone I (AZI) or acquisition I activation zone
2 (AZ2) wi ll be started.
3) Set the starting azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
4) Set the ending azimuth and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
The acquisition I activation zone w ill be determined.
5.2.1.2 Manual Acquisition [ACQ MANUAL]

If more targets are acquired manually in the condition that the
NOTE: maximum number of targets are under tracking, the targets
cannot acquired.
Procedures
l) Move the cursor onto the target to be acquired, and press the
[ACQ MANUAL] key.
The target will be acquired and the initial acquisition symbol will be displayed.
The vector will be displayed within one minute.

::.~:.: ,.______ Target manually acquired .
The initial acquisrtion symbol is displayed .
n
0---~---
Target that has passed for 1 min.
The acquisition symbol and vector are displayed .
To perfonu operation only in the manual acqu isition mode without automatic acquisition/
activation, tum off the automatic acquisition/activation function.
[ JRC I aopon Radio Co.,.lid. 5 - 16

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
[1] Use of Automatic and Manual Acquisition Modes
Use the manual acquisition mode while the automatic acquisition mode is on.
Manually acquire the target to which particular attention should be paid, and get
the other targets automatically acquired. If a new target appears exceeding the
maximum number of targets, the manually acquired target is displayed even in the
background un til it gets out of the display. However, automatica lly acquired
targets are canceled starting far distance from own ship.
5.2.2 Canceling Unwanted Tracked Targets [ACQ CANCEL]

Unwanted tracked targets can be canceled one by one in the following cases:
• Tracking is no longer necessary for targets with which vectors/symbols are

displayed after being acquired and tracked.
• The number of vectors on the radar display needs to be reduced for easy
observation.
When targets are to be re-acquired from the beginning, all the current vectors can
also be canceled.
5.2.2.1 Canceling targets one by one [ACQ CANCEL]
Procedures
I) Put the cursor on the tracked target to the desired for canceling
target, and press the [ACQ CANCEL] key.
The vectors and symbols of the tracked targets will disappear, and only the radar video
rem ai n.
5.2.2.2 Canceling all targets collectively [ACQ CANCEL]
Procedures
I) Press the [ACQ CANCEL] key for 5 seconds.
The vectors and symbols of all the targets will disappear, and only the radar videos remain.
When all the targets have been canceled, the system stops
NOTE: tracking them. Thus, you need to re-acquire targets in manual
or automatic acquisition mode. Do not cancel all the targets
unless otherwise required.
5-1 7 (~RC ] 8apan Radio Co., ..tid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstruclton Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET T RACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.2.3 Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA]
Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
When a target or own ship changes its course, or

when a new target is acquired, its vector may not
reach a given level of accuracy until 3 minutes or
more has passed after such course change or target
acquisition.
Even if 3 minutes or more has passed, the vector
may include an error depending upon the tracking
conditions.
5.2.3.1 Type of Data Display (Target Information)
Target Data
Target identification {TT ID) ID number of the target
True bearing(BRG) 0.1 o unit
Range 0.01 NM unit
Cource 0.1o unit
Speed 0.1 knot unit
Closest point of approach 0.01NM unit
(CPA)
Time to CPA (TCPA) 0.1min unit
Bow crossing range (BCR) 0.01NM unit
Bow crossing time (BCT) 0.1min unit
The target for which its numeric data is displayed is marked with a symbol ~G}.,--
to distinguish from other targets.
If a target's data is displayed, but without the symbol G,; -- , such a target exists
outside the currently displayed radar display.
5.2.3.2 Method of Displaying Numeric Data [TGT DATA]
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target for which numeric data is to
be displayed, and press the [TGT DATA] key.
r ,
Then, the data of the designated target will appear, it will be marked with a symbol ~..G.J-,- -.
The target data will remain on the radar display until the target is lost and its vector
disappears, or until another target is designated.
!fa target with the mark , is designated, only its true bearing and range will appear until
its vector appears.
(~RC ] 8apan Radio Co., .ltd. 5-18

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET T RACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.2.3.3 Cancellation of Numeric Data Display (CNCL Data)
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target with which numeric data is
displayed, and right-cl ick.
2) Left-click 6. CNa. Data button.
The numeric va lue will disappear.
5.2.4 Displaying Target ID No.(Target Number Display)

A target ID number is a value displayed beside the acquisition symbol when a
target is acquired.
A target lD number I to I 00 is assigned to each target in acqui sition order. Once a

target 10 number is assigned, it identifies the target until the target is lost or the
target acquisition is canceled.
Procedures
I) Open the TT Menu by following menu operation.
TT
2) Left-click the item button of 4 · Target Number Display
Target um ber Display wi ll appear.
3) Press the [numeric] key corresponding to the display method to

be set.
On : Displays target 10 numbers.
Off : Hides target lD numbers.
Target Track : Displays target ID number with target track.
lf the re are many tracki ng targets and the ir symbo l display is confusi ng, set Target N umbe r
Display to off to v iew the rada r di splay easily.
17\ An ID number is always displayed for only targets with which

~ numeric data is displayed.
5-19 [ ~RC ] 8apan Radio Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
5.2.5 Adding Tracked Target ID Name (Name)
The system can enter a name for each of tracking targets that have been acquired.
Procedures
3) Left-click the item button of 1. Name •
The setting items for ship name (Name) will be displayed.
4) Select the input method.
Data Base :Selection of one of previously input ship

names.When this method is selected, a list of ship
names that have been input by selecting Input
will be displayed.
Input :Input of a new ship name. When this method is

selected, the ship name (Name) input window will
open.
5.2.5.1 Entering a new ship name (Input)
5) Input a new ship name.
Up to 8 characters can be input as a ship name.For the input method on the character input
screen, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".
The input name by selecting Input is saved in Data Base .
5.2.5.2 Selecting one of previously input ship names (Data Base)
5) Press the [numeric] key corresponding to the ship name to be

selected.
The selected ship name will be entered.
Q Data Base can contain 30 ship names.
! ~Rc ] (}opon.RadioCo.,.fld. 5-20

- - - - - -- - -- - - - - - - - -- --- - ----- -
----------------------------------
5.2.6 Reference Target (Reference)
The system can display the own ship's speed. To do so, it sets a reference target by
tracking a target for which ground fixed.
r-------- Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - .
• The reference target function is to be used if the own ship's

speed cannot be displayed normally due to trouble such as a
speed sensor malfunction. Do not use the reference target
function except in emergencies.
• If the speed or course of the own ship is changed or a new
reference target is set, the displayed speed may take 3 minutes or
more to reach the specified speed after the speed I course
change or the setting.
• Even after 3 minutes or more has passed, the speed may differ
from the specified speed depending on the tracking condition.
• If a large radar echo such as a land target is set as a reference
target, the vectors of the speed and other tracking targets will not
be displayed correctly and may cause an accident.
• If a sailing ship is set as a reference target, the vectors of the
speed and other tracking targets will not be displayed correctly
and may cause an accident.
• If the REF. is selected for the speed sensor, the AIS function
cannot be turned on.
• If the reference target is lost or the target tracking function is
stopped, the speed sensor is placed in manual mode MAN •
• The loss of a reference target may have a major impact on the
accuracy of the results for true speed and true course of the
target and that own speed will be degraded.
• The reference targets are only used for the calculation of true
speed.
Procedures
1) Tracking a target for which ground fixed.
2) Put the cursor on the tracked target, and right-click .
The cursor mode list wi ll appear.
5-21 [.JRC ] f)opon Radio Co., .l'td.

JMA-9172-$A Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
3) Left-click a. Property
4) Left-click the item button of 3. Reference
The reference target function will be set to on or off.
On :A reference target is set.
Off :The reference target is canceled .
5) Left-click the speed sensor switching button in the Own Ship

Information located at the upper right of the display, and select
REF . •
The speed of own ship calculated from the reference target wi ll be displayed.
When a reference target is set, the symbol display is changed to QR.

Only one target can be set as a reference target. When a new reference target is set, the
previously set reference target is canceled.
5.2.7 Operation Test (TT Test Menu)
&cAUTION
This function is provided to test if the target tracking
function is operating normally. Thus, do not use the
function except when you test the target tracking
function .
In particular, if the operation test mode is used during
navigation, pseudo targets appear on the radar display
and they are confused with actual targets.
Do not use the mode during navigation. Otherwise, an
accident may result.
The following function s are available for testing the target tracking function:
Test Video Makes an operation check on the target detection circuit.
TT Simulator Generates pseudo targets on the radar display in order to test

if the target tracking function is operating normally.
Status Displays the status of the target tracking function.
Gate Display Displays the gate size for acquiring I tracking a target.
[.JRC] gapan.Radio Co., .ltd. 5-22

----------------------------------
5.2.7.1 Test Video (Test Video)
Test Video is used to check whether the video signals under target acquisition and
tracking are inputted to and processed in the target detection circuit normally.
However, it is sufficient to check that VDH in Test Video is displayed.
Test Video may not be displayed for a target which is not yet
NOTE: acquired or tracked. Test Video may not be displayed either if
the [GAIN] dial or [SEA] dial is not properly adjusted.
Procedures
1) Open the TT test menu by following menu operation.
n
~ 9. n Test Menu
2) Left-click the item button of 1. Test Video
The setting items for Test Video wi ll be displayed.
3) Select the test video to be displayed.
In general, VDH is sufficient for target display checks in test video mode.
If any target displayed clearly in the radar display is not

displayed in the Test Video mode, the target detection circuit of
the Target Tracking unit may have a trouble.
Cancel
1) Left-click the item button of 1. Test Video while the TT Test Menu is
displayed.
2) Left-click Off button.
The test video display will be turned off.
5 - 23
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRAC KING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.2.7.2 Target Tracking Simulator (Target Tracking Simulator)
Pseudo targets can be generated in certain known positions to check whether the
target tracking uruts are operating normally. Since the pseudo targets move
depending on known parameters, the values for these p seudo targets can be
compared with the known value if the pseudo targets are acquired and tracked,
and displayed. Thus, it can be checked if the system is operating normally.
Procedures
The equipment wil l enter the transm ission standby state.

operation.
TT
~ 9. TT Test Menu
3) Left-click the item button of 2. TT Simulator
4) Select the scenario to be set.
The IT Simulator display will be turned on.
5) Press the [TX/STBY] key to transmit.
When the TT simulator is active, the character" X "will di splay at the bottom of the radar
display.
Target tracking simulator I scenario
Scenario Target start point Target end point Pseud o -target

speed
Distance Bearing Distance Bearing
1 3.2NM 20° 1NM goo 20kn
2 6NM oo ONM oo 10kn

3 6NM 18° every 1NM 18° every 10kn
4 6NM 45° 1NM 45° 105kn
5 6NM 45° 6NM 150° 20kn
6 6NM 45° 6NM 150° 20kn
When the simulator is operating, set ooas the heading bearing,

and 0 kn as the speed of own ship.When the range between
own ship and the pseudo target is 0, the target will disappear.
5-24
JMA-9172-5A Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
Exit
2) Left-click the item button of 2. n Simulator while the TT Test

Menu is displayed.
3) Left-click Off
The 1T Simulator display wi ll be turned off.
5.2.7.3 Status display (Status)

The current Target Tracking status will appear.
Procedures
operation.
~ 9. lT Test Menu
2) Left-click the item button of 3. Status
The setting items for Status will be displayed.
I* Constant : Vector response
I*VID Level TD : Threshold value used for automatic acquisition
I* VID Level HIGH : Threshold value used for tracking
I*VID Level LOW : Unused
I* Gate Size : Size of gate used for tracking
I * Tracking : Number of targets currently acquired
5 -25 j.JRC] 8opan-Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-5A Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.2 TARGET TRACKING OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.2.7.4 Gate Display
The gate displays an area monitoring a target using the Target Tracking function.
This radar equipment allows the gate size to change automatically according to
target range and size. User can check the gate size using the following function.
Procedures
operation.
TT
~ 9. TT Test Menu
2) Left-click the item button of 4. Gate Display .
The gate display mode is switched.
On : Gate is displayed
Off : Gate is not displayed
3) Display the numeric value of a target according to Section 5.2.3

"Tracked Target Data Display [TGT DATA]" .
The numeric value of the target will be displayed, and the tracked target symbol wi ll be
enclosed in a green gate.
The Target Tracking can display the gate of two targets

simultaneously.
Tracked Target symbol Vector
Echo Gate (displayed in green
[JRC] gopan Radio Co., .lt d. 5-26

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
AIS OPERATION
5.3.1 Restrictions
The following restrictions are placed on use of the AIS function.
The AIS function is unavailable in the following cases:

• MAN or REF . is selected for the speed sensor.
• The current offset (Set/Drift Setting) is set while LOG or 2AXW is selected
for the speed sensor.
• The GPS geodetic system is used except WGS-84.
LOG or 2AXW cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case:
• The AIS function is turned on and the current offset (Set/Drift Setting) is
selected.
MAN cannot be selected for the speed sensor in the following case:
• The AIS function is On.
Current offset (Set/Drift Setting) cannot be turned On in the fo llowing case:

• LOG or 2AXW is selected for the speed sensor while the AIS function is on.
5.3.2 Setting AIS Display Function (AIS Function)
. - - - - Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ,
• When the AIS function is set to Off, the AIS display

function is turned off and AIS symbols are no longer
displayed.
• Once the AIS display function is set to Off, it is not
automatically switched to On even if a dangerous
target exists.
Procedures
1) Press the [AISITT] key. Alternatively, left-click the AIS button
in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display.
The received AIS information will be shown on the radar display.
5-27 [.JRC ] 8opan Radio Co., .lid.

----------------------------------
5.3.3 Activate AIS Targets (Activate AIS)
Activate an AJS target, and display the target' s vector and make a collision
decision.
5.3.3.1 Manual activation (ACT AIS)

Activate an AlS target in manual mode to display the vector and heading line.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the AIS symbol to be activated, and right-click.
2) Left-click 2. ACT AIS
5.3.3.2 Automatic activation

Activate an AIS target in automatic mode to display the vector and heading line.
When the automatic activation function is used, AIS targets are automatically activated when
they go into the automatic activation zone. The automatic activation zone is identical to the
automatic acquisition zone (AZ) used for target tracking. For the zone setting, refer to
Section 5.2. 1 "Acq uiring Target [ACQ]"
The position of the scanner shall be at the centre of the azimuth or range in the acquisition/
acti vation zone.
If there are more AIS targets than the allowable max imum, they are deactivated in the low-
priority (See the Section 5.1 .2 "Definitions of Symbols").
17\ If an AIS target is activated but the vector is not displayed , refer
\!1 to Section 5.3.6 "Displaying Target 10 No. (Target Number
Display)".
5.3.4 Deactivate AIS Targets (Deactivate AIS)

Deactivate an AlS target and clear the display of the vector and heading line.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the AIS target to be deactivated, and right-cl ick.
The setting items for cursor modes will be d isplayed.
2) Left-click 5. DEACT AIS
The selected AIS target will be deactivated.
This operation is available only for an activated AIS target.
[ JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.ltd. 5-28

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.3.5 Displaying AIS Information [TGT DATA]
5.3.5.1 Types of information displayed

There are two modes (simple and detail) to display AJS target information. The
display items are determined by the selected mode.
Display ltemi Detail mode Simple mode

NAME (ship name) Up to 20 characters
Call Sign Up to 7 characters
MMSI Up to 9 characters
COG (course over ground) or CTW (course through water) 0.1o unit
SOG (speed over ground) or STW (speed through water) 0.1kn unit
CPA (closest point of approach)ii 0.01NM unit
TCPA (time to CPA) 0.1min unit
BRG (true bearing) 0.1o unit Not
displayed
Range 0.01NM unit
HOG (heading bearing) 0.1o unit
ROT (rate of turn)iii 0.01 ° /min
POSN (latitude I longitude) 0.0001' unit
Destination (waypoint) Up to 20
characters
NAV Status Status (number)
i. The detail mode displays the numeric data of only a single ship, the simple mode can display the
numeric data of up to two ships.
ii. If the numeric information of SOG or STW is 102.2kn, the target ship's speed is 102.2kn or over.
Then the system cannot calculate CPA and TCPA. Therefore, missing is indicated in the CPA and
TCPA information.
iii. If the numeric information of ROT is blank, the radar is receiving the A IS data which is cannot dis-
played. In this case, you can only trust the turning direction which is indicated by the turn indicator.
The tum indicator is displayed on the A IS symbol as the line perpendicular to the heading direc-
tion. (See the Section 5.1.2.2 ''Types and Definitions of AIS Target Symbols")
The detai l mode displays the numeri c data of on ly a s ingle ship, the si mple mode can di splay
the numeri c data of up to two ships.
For NAY Status, one of the following statuses is di splayed in accordance with
Navigation Status:
No. Status
0 Under Way Using Engine
at Anchor
2 Not Under Command
3 Restricted Manoeuvrability
4 Constrained by Her Draft
5 Moored
6 Aground
7 Engaged in Fishing
8 Under Way Sailing
5 - 29 [.JRC I aapan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-5A lnstrucbon Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
9 Reserved
10 Reserved
11-14 Reserved
15 Not Defined
5.3.5.2 Displaying AIS Target Information [TGT DATA]
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the AIS target of which information is to be
displayed , and press the [TGT DATA] key.
The information of the selected AIS target will be displayed.
When the numeric data of a target is displayed but the mark

r/.
'-
is not on the radar display, the target is outside the
..I otftU
display.
5.3.5.3 Canceling AIS Target Information Display (CNCL Data)
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the activated AIS target of which information
display is to be cancelled, and right-click.
2) Left-click 6. CNCL Data •
The information display of the selected AI S target will be cleared.
5.3.5.4 Selecting Detail/ Simple Mode for AIS Target Information Display
Procedures
I) Left-click the o or _ button in the Digital Information located
at the center right of the display.
The detail or simple mode display for AIS target information will be selected.
5.3.5.5 Message
Received AIS messages can be displayed.
Up to I 0 messages of addressed message and up to I 0 messages of broadcast message can be

displayed.
If the number of messages exceeds I 0, the oldest received messages are sequentially deleted.
[1] Displaying Message Selected from List (Message)
[JRC] 8opan. Radit:J Co., J.'Jd. 5 - 30

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
Procedures
1) Open the Message menu by performing the following menu
operation.
AIS
~ 9. TT Test Menu
2) Left-click Addressed Message or Broadcast Message
Addressed messages list or broadcast messages list are displayed.
Each list shows ship names and message-received time.
For an unread message, 0 is displayed to the left of the item number.
3) Left-click the item button to display the message.
[2] Displaying Specified Target's Message
Procedures
1) Display AIS target information.
If there are messages from the target, a message mark will be displayed in the Digital
2) Left-click the unread message display button in the Digital

[3] Deleting Message (Delete)
Procedures
1) Left-click 1. Delete while the message is displayed.
2) Left-click 1. Yes to delete the message.
The message will be deleted, and the ship name and message-received time will disappear
from the list.
5-31 [ .JRC l aopan Radio Co.,..tid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING A ND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.3.5.6 Displaying Data of Lost AIS Target (Display Lost TGT Data)
The data of the last-lost AlS target can be di splayed.
The data of on ly one target that has been lost most recently can be di splayed.
Procedures
I ) Open the Display Lost Target Data menu by performing the
AIS
---+ 8. Display Lost Target Data
The data of the last-lost A IS target will be displayed.
5.3.5.7 Displaying Own Ship's AIS Data (Own Ship's AIS Data)
The AIS data of own ship can be displayed.
Procedures
1) Open the Own Ship's AIS Data menu by performing the following
menu operation.
AIS
---+ 9. O.Vn Ship' s A1S Data
The own ship's A IS data wi ll be displayed.
5.3.6 Displaying Target ID No. (Target Number Display)

When an AIS target is acti vated, a target ID number is displayed next to the AIS
target symbol.
A target ID number 1 to 100 is assigned to each target in activation order. Once a

target ID number is assigned, it identifies the target until the target is lost or
deactivated.
Procedures
1) Open the Target Number Display menu by performing the
[.JRC] gapan Radicl Co., .ltd. 5 -32

--------------------------------- -
AIS
- 4. AIS Filter Setting
2) Left-click the item button corresponding to the display method to

be set.
Target Track : Displays target ID nu mber with AIS track.
Ship' 5 Name : Displays the ship's name.
If there are many tracking targets and their symbol display is con fusing, set Target Number
Display to off to view the radar display easily.
An ID number or ship's name is always displayed for only

targets with which numeric value is displayed.
5.3.7 Setting AIS Filter (AIS Filter Setting)
5.3.7.1 About an AIS filter

By setting an AJS filter, an AIS target in the area can be displayed by priority or
only the targets in the area can be displayed. An AIS filter is initially set in a circle
having a radius of20 [nm] from the CCRP. lf30 1 or more AIS targets exist in the
filter range, they are displayed in the priority order explained in Section 5.1.2
"Definitions of Symbols".
5.3.7.2 Types of AIS Filters (Filter Type)

There are the following 3 types of AIS filters:
Range : A filter is set in a ci rcle with a set range as the radius.
Sector : A filter is set in a sector formed by two bearings with the

bow as reference.
zone : A filter is set in a zone formed by two bearings and two

ranges with the bow as reference.
5-33 [~RC I aopan Radio Co., .l'Jd.

----------------------------------
Procedures
I) Left-click the AIS filter mode switching in Target Information
located at the upper right of the display, and select the filter to be
set.
The AIS filter will be selected.
5.3.7.3 Creation of AIS Filter (Make AIS Filter)
Procedures
I ) Open the AIS Filter Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
AIS
2) Left-click 2. Make AIS Filter
The mode to make an AIS fi lter wi ll be activated.
[1] Setting Range Filter
3) Set a filter range by turning the [VRM] dial, and left-click.
[2] Setting Sector Filter
3) Set a starting bearing by turning the [EBL] dial, and left-click.
4) Set an ending bearing by turning the [EBL) dial, and left-click.
[3] Setting Zone Filter
3) Set a starting bearing and range by turning the [EBL) dial and
[VRM) dial, and left-click.
[.JRC J 3opan Radio Co., .ltd. 5- 34

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
4) Set an ending bearing and range by turning the [EBL] dial and
When the automatic activation function is enabled , the filter

range is automatically changed for covering the automatic
activation zone. Thus, the automatic activation zone is always
within the filter range.
5.3.7.4 AIS Filter Display On/Off (Filter Display)
Procedures
menu operation.
AIS
2) Left-click the item button of 3. Filter Display
Filter Display will be set to on or off.
5.3.7.5 Display of Targets outside AIS Filter (Filter Mode)
Procedures
1) Open the Filter Mode menu by performing the following menu
operation.
AIS
2) Left-click the item button of 6. Filter Mode
Display : Displays only AIS targets in the AIS filter.
Priority : Displays AIS targets in the AIS filter by priority, and also
displays targets outside the AIS filter.
Activated AIS targets can be displayed even when they are

outside the AIS filter.
5-35 [.JRC l aopan Radio Co.,J'id.

JMA-91 72-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.3 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.3.7.6 Point Filter
AIS targets which are not displayed because they are outside the AIS filter or at
low priority levels can be activated by giving a higher priority to them.
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the position where a point filter is to be set,
and right-click to select the filter to be set.
2) The setting items for cursor modes will be displayed.Left-cl ick 2. ACT AIS
A point filter will be set at the cursor position.

If an AIS target is in the point filter, it will be activated.
When an AIS target is activated or an ATS target is not found within one minute, the point
filter will be cleared.
The point filter's range is 1 nm, and cannot be changed.
5.3.8 Conditions for Deciding AIS Target to be Lost

About a lost target
When the data of an AIS target cannot be received for a specified time, the target
is decided to be lost and the target data is deleted. As shown in the table below,
the time until target data is deleted varies depending on the class of receive data
and the target status.
Deciding AIS Target to be Lost

Target status Time until data deletion
SOLAS ship (Class A) SOLAS ship (Class B)
Vessel below 3 knots (Class A) or 2 knots 18 min 18 min

(Class B) and it is now at anchor or on the berth
Vessel of 3 knots or more and it is now at 60 sec 18 min
anchor or on the berth
Vessel of 0 to 14 knots (Class B: 0 to 14 knots) 60 sec 180 sec
Vessel of 14 to 23 knots 36 sec 180 sec
Vessel of 23 knots or more 30 sec 180 sec
SAR (Search and Rescue) 60 sec 60 sec
ATON (Aid to Navigation) 18 min 18 min
Base Station 60 sec 60 sec
17\ When a dangerous target ship is lost, a lost alarm is issued and the symbol
\!1 changes to a lost symbol. The lost symbol will display continuously on the
last-received position.
If the [ALARM ACK] key is pressed, the symbol is cleared.
[.JRC ] (japan RadicJ Co., .lid. 5-36

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET T RACKING AND AIS > 53 AIS OPERATION
----------------------------------
5.3.9 Setting Conditions for AIS Alarm (AIS Alarm Setting)
Conditions for issuing a Lost alarm and CPA!fCPA alarm for AIS targets can be
set.
5.3.9.1 Setting of Condition for Lost Alarm
Procedures
l) Open the AIS Alarm Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
AIS
2) Left-click the item button of 1. Lost Alarm
The setting items fo r Lost Alarm wi ll be displayed.
3) Left-click the item button corresponding to the condition to be

set.
Off : A lost alarm is not issued.i
Danger : A lost alarm is issued only for AIS targets for which a dangerous
target alarm has been issued .
ACT&Danger : A lost alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets and AIS
targets for which a dangerous target alarm has been issued .
ACT&Danger&Select : A lost alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets, data
indicated AIS targets and AIS targets for which a dangerous
target alarm has been issued .
i. A lost alarm is not issued for sleeping AIS targets.
5.3.9.2 Setting of Condition for CPA/TCPA Alarm
Procedures
I) Open the AIS Alarm Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
AIS
2) Left-click the item button of ICPA{fCPA Alarm 1.

The setting items for CPA!TC PA Alarm is switched.
Off : A CPA/TCPA alarm is not issued.i

ACT : A CPA/TCPA alarm is issued only for activated AIS targets.
ACT&Sieep : A CPA!TCPA alarm is issued for all AIS targets on the radar
display.
i. When the Lost Alarm menu set to Off, the CPA ring color changes to dark color.
5-37 [.JRC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstrucbon Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL
~~~------------------------------
DECISION OF TARGETS AS
IDENTICAL (Association)
5.4.1 Setting of Function to Decide Targets as Identical

(Association)
When an AlS target and a tracking target are decided to be identical, an
association symbol is displayed for the targets regarded as identical. In this case,
the AIS target symbol is automatically activated .
. - - - - - Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - . .
• Turn off Association in order not to make a decision

on if targets are identical, or in order to display
symbols that have disappeared.
Procedures
1) Left-click the Association in Target Information located at the
Association wi ll be set to on or ofT.
5.4.2 Setting of Conditions for Deciding AIS and Tracked Targets

as Identical (Association Setting)
Procedures
1) Open the Association Setting menu by performing the following
menu operation.
AIS
._ 1. Association Setting
The Association Setting menu wi ll appear.
2) Select and enter the item to be set.
Conditions for deciding targets as identical wi ll be set. When the di fTerences of all item
between AlS and tracked target are under the set conditions ..
(.JRC] 3opanl<adicJ Co.,.J.'Jd. 5 - 38

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.4 DECISION OF TARGETS AS IDENTICAL
- --------------------------- ~~·~ --
Once regard as identical, when one of the differences exceed 125% of the set condition, they
are regarded as dissidence.
The setting for this function is common to Association Setting in

the AIS Menu.
5.4.3 Types of Decision Conditions to be Set

Decision conditions
1. Association On I Off (Function to decide targets as

identical}
2. Priority AIS I TI (Symbol to be displayed)
3. Bearing 0 .0~9.9°
4. Range o~999m
5. Cource 0~99 0
6.Speed 0-99kn
?.Applicable AIS Target ACT or ACT&Sieep (activated AIS target or
all AIS target)
& cAUTION
If a great value is set as a condition for deciding
targets as identical, a tracking target near an AIS target
is regarded as identical to the AIS target and it may not
be displayed any more.
For example, when a pilot boat (which is a small target
not being tracked) equipped with an AIS function
approaches a cargo ship as a tracking target not
equipped with an AIS function , the tracking target
symbol of the cargo ship may not be displayed any
more.
5 -39 [.JRC] 8opan RadkJ Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-sA Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY
----------------------------------
ALARM DISPLAY
Critical alarm messages for Target Tracking (IT) and AIS functions:

CPAITCPA There is a dangerous target. See also Section 5.5.1.
Alarm messages for Target Tracking (TT) and AIS functions:

CPAITCPA There is a dangerous target.
New Target A new target is acquired in the automatic acquisition zone.
Lost There is a lost target.
REF Target The accuracy of the reference target may be decreased.
95% Capacity The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking
function has reached 95% of the maximum.
MAX Target The number of targets being tracked by the Target Tracking
function has reached the maximum.
AIS 95% Capacity The number of displayed AIS target symbols has reached 95%
of the maximum.
AIS MAX Target The number of received data items exceeds the maximum
number of AIS target symbols that can be displayed.
AIS ACT 95% Capacity The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has
reached 95% of the maximum.
AISACTMAX The number of activated AIS targets by the AIS function has
reached the maximum.
AIS Alarm *** Alarm information issued with the ALR sentence by the AIS .
...... is a 3-digit number which is Local Alarm No in the ALR
sentence. See below.
AIS Alarm 001 Tx malfunction
AIS Alarm 002 Antenna VSWR exceeds limit
AIS Alarm 006 general failure
AIS Alarm 008 MKD connection lost
AIS Alarm 025 external EPFS lost
AIS Alarm 026 no sensor position in use
AIS Alarm 029 no valid SOG information
AIS Alarm 030 no valid COG information
AIS Alarm 032 Heading lost/invalid
AIS Alarm 035 no valid ROT information
Error message and alann are displayed in the l ower right of the display.
See also Section 9.1.1 "List of Alarms and other Indications".
[.JRC] 8opan Radio Co., .lid. 5 - 40

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.5 ALARM DISPLAY
----------------------------------
5.5.1 CPA I TCPA Alarm
ffi cAUTION
Since these alarms may include some errors
depending on the target tracking conditions, the
navigation officer himself should make the final
decision for ship operations such as collision
avoidance.
alarm may cause accidents such as collisions.
In the system , targets are categori zed into two types: tracked I activate AIS targets
and dangerous targets.
The grade of danger can easily be recognized on the display at a glance. So the
officer can easi ly decide which target he should pay attention to.
It is not possible to switch off the tracked target visual alarm, unless tracking is
ceased, or the alarm condition no longer applies.
The types of target and alarm are shown below.
CPA I TCPA Alarm
Status Symbol on A I a r m A I arm Conditions

(Off)
Tracked target
G---
12
(Off) - CPA>CPA LIMIT
• O>TCPA
;:2
Activated AI S - TCPA>TCPA LIMIT
target The symbol is displayed
when one of the above
conditions is met.
Dangerous
target G--- 12
CPAITCPA Beep
sound
(pee-poh}
• CPA~ CPA LIMIT
• 0 ~ TCPA ~ TCPA LIMIT
An alarm is issued when all

Red blinking Alarm the conditions are met.
acknowle
~2
dgeable The AIS targets that issues
alarm refer to Section 5.3.9
Red blinking
CPA Limit and TCPA Limit: The Setting Values
5 -41 (JRC l aopan Radio Co.,.ltd.

----------------------------------
5.5.2 Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition
Zone (New Target)
l'L cAUTION
In setting an automatic acquisition zone, it is
necessary to adjust the gain, sea clutter suppression
and rain I snow clutter suppression to ensure that
target echoes are displayed in the optimum conditions.
No automatic acquisition zone alarms will be issued
for targets undetected
The automatic acquisition function sets a zone in a range and issues an alarm
when a new target (which is not yet acquired) goes into this zone.
For the setting of an automatic acquisition zone, refer to " Acquiring Target" in
Section 5.2.1.1 "Automatic acquisition".
Alarm for New Target Acquired in Automatic Acquisition Zone
Status Symbol on AI a r m Alarm sound Conditions

display characters
New target in
automatic I
-, New Target Beep sound The alarm is issued
when a new target is
(pipi-pipi)
I acquired in the
acquisition - 12 Alarm
zone automatic acquisition
Red Blinking acknowledge zone.
able
When an already acquired target goes into automatic

acquisition zone, the alarm message is not displayed and the
buzzer does not sound either.
5.5.3 Lost Target Alarm (Lost)
Attention - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - - . ,
• If the gain, sea clutter suppression, rain/snow clutter

suppression are not adjusted adequately, the lost
target alarm may be easily generated. So such
adjustments should be mad carefully.
[ JRC ] 8opan Radicl Co., .lt d. 5 - 42

----------------------------------
When it is impossible to continue tracking any acquired and tracked target, or the
data of AlS target cannot received for a specified time, the Lost Alarm I I
will be generated. The typical causes for alarm generation are shown below, but
not limited to the following:
• The target echo is very weak.

• The target is shadowed by a shore or a large ship and its echo is not received.
• The target echo is blurred by sea clutter returns.
If a target under tracking goes out of a range of 32 nm and can no longer be
tracked, it is canceled without a lost target alann.
Lost Target Alarm

Status Symbol on Alarm Alarm Conditions
Lost Target Lost Beep sound The a larm will sound
~:2-- (pee)
Alarm
once when a lost
ta rget symbol is
acknowledge displayed.
Red Blinking
able
~12
Red Blinking
5.5.4 Gyro Set Alarm

The GYRO IfF in this system receives signal s from a gyro. Even if the power is
turned off, the system will follow up the gyro. However, the system stops the
follow-up operation when the power of the master gyro is turned off or when any
trouble occurs to the line. When the power of the master gyro is recovered, the
I I
Set Gyro alarm will be generated.
If this alarm occurs, set the gyro.
Gyro Set Alarm

A I a r m Alarm sound Conditions
characters
Set Gyro Beep sound (pipi-pipi) The s igna ls from the gyro are stopped, but the
gyro is recovered.
5 - 43 !JRC ) dopanRadioCo.,.lid.
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
TRACK FUNCTION
5.6.1 Past Position (Past POSN)

Procedures
1) Left-click the past position display interval unit switching button
in the Target Information located at the upper right of the display,
and set a desired unit.
The past position display interval unit will be set to min or NM
2) Left-click the past position display interval switching button in

the Target Information located at the upper right of the display,
and set a desired track display interval.
The past position will be set.
Off : Tracks are not displayed.

Numeric : Tracks are displayed at intervals of a specified value.
The past position function

Past position Past position
display interval unit can display up to ten past
true I relati
positions of a target under
tracking. The past position
display interva l can be set to
specified time intervals of
0.5, l , 2, or 4 minutes, or
specified range intervals of
0.1, 0.2, 0.5, or 1 run.
The specified interval is displayed in the past position display interval switching
in Target Information located at the upper right of the display. When Off 1s
di splayed, the track display function is turned off.
The track mode operates in conjunction with the vector mode, and a true or
relative track is displayed. In relative vector mode, the relative tracks of the target
are displayed. In true vector mode, true tracks that are calculated from the relative
bearing, range, own ship's course, and speed are displayed.
The target is acquisition, past position of traced target is start plot. The AJS target
is displayed, past position of AIS target is start plot.
If the past position plotted time is short, the indicated past position duration may
not have achieved the specified time or range.
(.JRC] f)apan Radio Co., .lid. 5-44

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5 OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
5.6.2 Target Ship's Tracks {Target Track)
This function makes settings for the tracks of tracked targets and AIS targets.
The system can di splay the tracks of up to 20 target ships.
5.6.2.1 Track Color Setting (Target Track Color)
Procedures
1) Put the cursor on the tracked target or activated AIS target, and
right-click.
2) Left-click Property .
3) Left-click the item button of 2. Track Color .
T he setting items for Track Color wi ll be displayed.
Colors set by performing the procedure in Section 5.6.2.3 "Setting of Target Ship's Track
Colors (Target Track Colo r)" can be selected.
Individual colors can be set for up to 10 ships. The same color is set for 11 to 20 ships.
5.6.2.2 Target Ship's Track Function On/Off (Target Track Function)
Procedures
1) Open the T.TRK menu by performing the following menu
operation.
TT
.- 2. Target Track Setting
2) Left-click the item button of 1. Target Track Function
The Target Track Function will be set to on or off.
On : Target Track Function is turned on.
Off : Target Track Function is turned off.
Note that when this function is turned off, all the other ship's
track functions are turned off. In this case, the track data of
other ships is not saved , so they cannot be traced later.
5 - 45 [.JRC ] 8opan RaditJ Co., .!Jd.

----------------------------------
5.6.2.3 Setting of Target Ship's Track Colors (Target Track Color)
You can set either one track color for all targets under tracking, or individual
colors for the ships of track numbers 1 to 10. The tracks of ships 11 to 20 are
di splayed in the same color.
{;\ If the other ship's track function (Target Track Function) is
\ ! ) turned off, the track data of other ships is not saved.
Procedures
1) Open the Target Track Color menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
~ 2. Target Track Color
~ 1. All
The setting items for All will be displayed.
Individual : Track color is set individually for ships.

color name : One color is set for all ships.
Individual setting
The setting items for the selected track number wi ll be disp layed.
The track color of the selected track number will be set.
When Individual is selected, the track nwnbers 1 Target Track No.1 I to I No.10 I and
the individual setti ng for IOther I are valid. Select a color for each target.
The color list is displayed by left-clicking the button corresponding to the item
number to be set. Select a desired color. There are 8 color choices: Off
White Gray Blue Green Yellow , Pink , and Red
ITarget Track No.1 . . . . _ INo.lO I : Setting for 1 to 10 ships

is selected.
[.JRC) 8opanRadio Co., .lid. 5 - 46

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 56 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
5.6.2.4 Setting of Target Ship's Track Display (Target Track Display)
The target track di sp lay function can be turned on I off. Choices for track display
are displaying I hiding the tracks of all ships and Individual (displaying the tracks
of individual ships).
Procedures
1) Open the Target Track Display menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
~ 3. Target Track Display
~ 1. All
The setting items for All will be displayed.
Individual : Track display is set for individual ships.
Off : The tracks of all ships are hidden.
on : The tracks of all ships are displayed.
Even when Target Track Display is turned off, the track data of
other ships is saved if Track Memory Interval is set.
Individual setting
The selected track number display will be set to on or off.
on :The track number display is turned on.
Off :The track number display is turned off.
When Individual I
is selected, the track numbers Target Track No.1 I to INo.10 I and
the individual setting for Other I I are valid. Select on I off for each target.
ITarget Track No.1 I
"" No.10 I : Setting for 1 to 10 ships
Note that the individ ual setting is not enabled unless Individual
is selected.
5 - 47 (.JRC] 8oponRadio Co.,.fid.

JMA· 9172..SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.6 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
5.6.2.5 Setting of Target Ship's Track Saving Interval (Track Memory Interval)
An interval for saving target ship's track data can be set.
This function is not available when the Target Track Function is

turned off.
Procedures
1) Open the Track Memory Interval menu by performing the
TT
~ 4 . Track Memory Interval
2) Left-click the button corresponding to the interval to be set.
Select an interval from the following:
Off/
3sec/5sec/1 Osec/30sec/
1min/3min/5min/1Omin/30min/60min/
1NM/3NM/5NM/1 ONM
5.6.2.6 Clear of Target Ship's Track (Clear Track)

The target ship's track can be cleared by setting a color or a track number.
If Card T.TRK Display is used, target ship's tracks displayed
through the card cannot be cleared .
[1] Clea r of Tracks by Setting Color (Clear Track Color)
Procedures
1) Open the Clear Track Color menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
~ 5. Oear Track Color
The setting items for C lear Track Color will be displayed.
[~RC ] 3opon Radio Co., .lid. 5 - 48

----------------------------------
2) Left-click the button corresponding to the color of the target
tracks to be cleared.
The Confirmation Window wil l appear.
A ll the tracks of the selected color wil l be cleared.

[2] Clear of Tracks by Setting Track Number (Clear Track Number)
Procedures
1) Open the T.TRK menu by performing the following menu
operation.
TT
-t 2. Target Track Setting
~ 6. Oear Track Number
The setting items for Clear Track Number wi ll be displayed.
2) Left-click the button corresponding to the number of the tracks

to be cleared.
The tracks of the selected nu mber wi ll be cleared.
5.6.2.7 Operation of Target Ship's Track Data Saved on Card (File

Operations)
Target ship's track data can be saved on a fl ash memory card and read from the
card.
Data can be saved to a flash memory card unti l the card
becomes full, but the number of files that can be read and
displayed is limited to 64 in alphanumeric order. When the
number of files has reached 64, delete unnecessary files.
5 - 49 [..JRC] papon Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 56 TRACK FUNCTION
----------------------------------
[1] Loading File (Load)
Procedures
1) Insert a flash memory card into the card slot

menu operation.
TT
3) Left-click the item button of 11. Select Card Slot I to select a card slot.
4) left-click the item button of 2. Load Mode to select Add or

Overwrite.
The setting item for Load Mode is switched between ._I_ _ A_d_d_ _____.l and
I Overwrite 1.
When I Add is selected, new data is added to the current data on the
card. When I Overwrite I is selected, new data is saved over the current data
on the card.
5) left-click 3. Load
Current ly saved target ship's track data will be listed.
6) left-click the button corresponding to the file to be loaded.
7) left-click 1. Yes to load the file.
The selected target track data will be loaded and shown on the radar display.
[..JRC ] gopan Radio Co.,.ltd. 5 -50

----------------------------------------
----------------------------------
[2] Saving File (Save)
Procedures

menu operation.
TT
---7 2. Target Track Setting
---7 7. Rle Operations
3) Left-click the item button of j1. Select Card Slot to select a card
slot.
The setting item for Select Card S lot is switched between Slotl and Slot2.
4) Left-click 4. Save •
The ln put File Name menu will appear.
5) Input the file name to be saved.
Up to te n c haracters can be input as a fi le name.
For inputs to the characters input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.7 "Ente ring a character". After
the input, the Confirmation Window wi ll appear.
6) Left-click 1. Yes to save the file .
The c urrently di splayed target track data w ill be saved .
5 - 51 (.JRC l aopan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
[3] Erasing File (Erase)
Procedures
I ) Insert the flash memory card into the card slot.

menu operation.
TT
---7 2. Target Track Setting
---7 7. Rle Operations
3) Left-click the item button of 11. Select Card Slot to select a card
slot.
4) Left-click s. Erase •
6) Left-click 1. Yes to erase the file.
The selected target track data will be erased and the file name will disappear from the list.
(.JRC l aapan Radio Co.,.lid. 5-52

----------------------------------
[4] Displaying File (Card Target Track Display)
Procedures
1) Insert the flash memory card into the card slot.

menu operation.
TT
3) Left-click the item button of 11. Select Card Slot I to select a card
slot.
4) Left-click 6. Card T.TRK Display •
The Card T.TRK Display menu will appear.
5) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be displayed.
The Confirmati on Window will appear.
6) Left-click 1. Yes to display the T.TRK line.
T he selected file will be hi ghlighted, and the currently saved target track data will be
displayed.
Cancel
1) Open the Card T.TRK Display window.
T he displayed fi le is hjghl ighted.
2) Left-click the button corresponding to the displayed file.
The fi le wi ll be deselected and returned to normal display.
5- 53 [.JRC l aopan Radio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9 172-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
----------------------------------
TRIAL MANEUVERING
(Tr!al Maneuver)
r -- - - Attention - - - - - - - - - - - - - - _ _ _ ,
• Trial maneuvering is to simulate own ship' s course

and speed in the conditions that the course and
speed of a target ship are unchanged as they are.
As the situation is different from any actual ship
maneuvering, set values with large margins to CPA
Limit and TCPA Limit.
The trial maneuvering is the function of simulating own ship' s course and speed
for collision avoidance when a dangerous target appears. When the own ship's
course and speed are entered in manual mode, the trial maneuvering function
checks if pre-acquired or pre-activated targets are dangerous.
The ranges of course and speed to be entered manually:
Course: 360° (in 0.1 o intervals) ............................................... [EBL] dial
Speed: 0 to 1OOkn (in 0.1 kn step) .................................. ... ... [VRM] dial
[~RC ] f)opan Radle Co.,.lid. 5 -54

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
----------------------------------
5.7.1 Trial Maneuvering in the True Vector Mode
In the True Vector mode, calculations are performed according to the values set
by Trial Speed, Trial Course and other features, and the result is displayed as a
bold-line that represents the change of own ship's vector as shown in the Fig 5-7
below (an example of the course changed to the right).
In this Fig 5-7, the dangerous target forward left becomes safe as a result of
simulation.
The tracked target information indicates the current CPA and TCPA values
regardless of the result of simulation.
NORMAL
Own ship' s vector
Dangerous target
TRIAL
Route
Change of symbol
as a result of
trial maneuver
Fig 5-7: True Vector Mode
5-55 l.JRc j 3oponRadio Co.,.i'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > S.OPERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
----------------------------------
5.7.2 Trial Maneuvering in the Relative Vector Mode
The result of Trial maneuvering in the Relative Vector mode is shown by a
change in target vector. In the Fig 5-8 below (in the same conditions as in the True
Vector mode in the previous page), it is seen that the acquired target is a
dangerous one because its vector is crossing the CPA RING.
NORMAL
Dangerous target
C PA Ring
TRIAL
Change of symbol
as a result of
trial maneuver
CPA Ring
Fig 5-8: Relative Vector Mode

The above Fig 5-8 shows that the relative vector of the target has changed as
shown in the figure as a result of simulation (course and speed), so that the
symbol color is changed into "White" , a safe target.
Irrespective of the simulation results, the current CPA and TCPA values are shown
in the tracked target information just like when the true vector mode is active.
The course change of own ship is displayed as a dotted-line.
Better information is provided by using relative motion and sea stabilization.
I.JRC ] 3opon Radio Co.,.lid. 5-56

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION O F TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MA NEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
----------------------------------
5.7.3 Operation of Trial Maneuvering Function
Procedures
1) Open the Trial Maneuver menu by performing the following menu
operation.
TT
~ 3. Trial Maneuver
2) Left-click the item button of ......!:. Trial Function
On : The trial maneuvering function is turned on .
Off : The trial maneuvering function is turned off.
W hen the Tri al Function i s active, the char acter " T " will djsplay at the bottom of the radar
display.
3) Set values for Course by turning the [EBL] dial, and for Speed by
4) Set other characteristics.
Vector Time : Vector time ( 1 to 60 min)
Time to Maneuver : Time until trial maneuvering is started (0 to 30 min)
ONn Ship Dynamic Trait : Dynamic trait of the own ship
-+ Reach : Range from when steered to when the ship

beings to turn (0 to 2000 m)
-+ Tum Radius : Turning radius (0.10 to 2 .00 nm)
-+ Acceleration : Acceleration (0.0 to 100 knots/min)
-+ Decceleration : Deceleration (0.0 to 100 knots/min)
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Secti on 3.3 .4.2 "Directly entering a numeric
value".
D angerous target symbols are displayed in red and saf e tar get symbols in white.
Vector Time is valid only when Trial Function is set to on . If it is off, the vector time
before trial maneuvering is displayed.
Time until the start of trial maneuvering is counted down immediately after the input.
The acceleration and deceleration are influenced depending on the relationship
between the current speed and the input speed for trial maneuvering.
If 0.0 kn/min is set for Acceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is faster
than the current speed, or for Deceleration when the speed for trial maneuvering is
slower than the current speed, the system performs simulation on the assumption
that the speed is changed immediately after the time set for Time to Maneuver .
5-57 [.JRC ) aapan Radio Co.,.tid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 5.0PERATION OF TARGET TRACKING AND AIS > 5.7 TRIAL MANEUVERING (Trial Maneuver)
----------------------------------
Cancel
1) Open the Trial Maneuver menu by performing the following
menu operation.
TT
---7 3. Trial Maneuver
Off The Trial Function will be set to off.
I.JRC] 3opan Radio Co., .ltd. 5-58

SECTION 6
llll 11 11 l I 11 11111

6.4 FALSE ECHOES .................................................................................... 6-9
6.5.1 Display ...........................................................................................6-12
6.5.2 Numeric Display ............................................................................6-13
[ J RC ] dtifKi'l Radio Co., ..ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON
-- --------------------------------
The radar operator has a role of interpreting the radar displays to provide his best
aid in maneuvering the ship. For this purpose, the operator has to observe the
radar displays after fully understandjng the advantages and disadvantages that the
radar has. For better interpretation of radar display, it is important to gain more
experiences by operating the radar equipment in fair weathers and comparing the
target slllps watched with the naked eyes and their echoes on the radar display.
The radar is mainly used to monitor the courses of own ship and other ships in
open seas, to check buoys and other nautical marks when entering a port, to
measure own ship ' s position in the coastal waters relative to the bearings and
ranges of the shore or islands using a chart, and to monitor the position and
movement of a heavy rain if it appears on the radar display.
Various types of radar display will be explained below.
RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON
Radar beam radiation has the nature of propagating nearly along the curved
surface of the earth. The propagation varies with the property of the air layer
through which the radar beam propagates. In the normal propagation, the di stance
(D) of the radar wave to the horizon is approxjmately 10% longer than the
distance to the optical horizon. The distance (D) is given by the followjng
fonnula:
D = 2. 23( jh; + ,Jh;.) [NM]
h1 : Height (m) of radar scanner above sea level
h2 : Height (m) of a target above sea level
Fig 6-2 is a diagram for determining the maximum detection range of a target that
is limited by the curve of the earth surface in the normal propagation.
Earth
Radar Targets
Fig 6-1: RADAR wave with the horizon
6-1 [~RC l aapan Radi.o Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.1 RADAR WAVE WITH THE HORIZON
----------------------------------
h2( m )
700
660
/
/
600
,,
/
/
/
, / 500
/ "
"" 400
, ,.
/
h l (m ) D(NM)
/
/ " 300
/
10,;/
/
,
, /
60
200
/
/ "
,. /
50
/
/ " 100
/
/ " 40
, /
, ,.
/ 50
/
30
/
30 / 25
/
/
20 / 20
/
10 10
5 10
0 0
0
Height of Target
Height of RADAR Scanner DetectM!Range
Fig 6-2: Maximum detection range of a target
When the height of own ship ' s scanner is 10 m for instance,
i. A target that can be detected at the radar range of 64 nm on the radar display
is required to have a height of 660 m or more.
ii. If the height of a target is 10 m, the radar range has to be approx. 15 nm.
However, the maximum radar range at which a target can be detected on the
radar display depends upon the size of the target and the weather conditions,
that is, the radar range may increase or decrease depending upon those
conditions.
I.JRC] 8opan.Radio Co.,.lid. 6-2

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.2 STRENGT H OF REFLECTION FROM THE
• - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ~~E. . - •
STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM

THE TARGET
The signal intensity reflected from a target depends not only on the height and size
of the target but also on its material and shape. The echo intensity from a higher
and larger target is not always higher in general.
In particular, the echo from a coast line is affected by the geographic conditions of
the coast. If the coast has a very gentle slop, the echo from a mountain of the
inland appears on the radar display. (F ig 6-3) Therefore, the distance to the coast
line should be measured carefully.
Mountain displayed
on the radar display HL
Sea shore line not displayed
Fig 6-3: Sea shore line which is not displayed
Table 6-1 shows the graph indicating the relation between the target detection
distance and the radar reflection cross-sectional area (RCS) with regard to the type
and the height of the target in a situation in which the weather is good, the sea
state is calm and the radio wave propagation is normal. As revealed by this table,
even on the same sea shore line, detection distance greatly differs depending on
the height of the target from the surface of the sea. Furthermore, because the
target detection distance is greatly influenced by the shape and material of the
target and environmental conditions, such as the sea state, weather, and radio
wave propagation, caution should be taken when detecting distance of target.
6 -3 [.JRC ] 8opan. Radio Co.,..i'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.2 STRENGTH OF REFLECTION FROM TH E
~~~ -------------------------------
Table 6-1 : Relation between type and height of target and detection distance and RCS
Type of target Height from Detection distance RCS [m2]
sea surface (NM)
(m)
X band S band X band S band
Sea shore line 60 20 20 50,000 50,000
SOLAS target ship (>5000GT) 10 11 11 50,000 30,000
SOLAS target ship (>SOOGT) 5 8 8 1800 1000
Small boat with IMO standard 4 5.0 3.7 7,5 0,5
compatible radar reflector
Marine buoy with corner 3,5 4.9 3.6 10 1

reflector
Standard marine buoy 3,5 4.6 3.0 5 0,5

10-meter small boat without 2 3.4 3.0 2,5 1,4
radar reflector
Waterway location beacon 2.0 1.0 1 0,1
Detection distance shown in the above table may greatly

decrease depending on the shape of the target, sea state,
weather and radio wave propagation conditions.
[.JRC ] f)opan Radio Co., .lid. 6- 4

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.3 SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW
·----------------------------~W~ --
SEA CLUTTER AND RAIN AND SNOW

CLUTTER
In addition to the echo required for observing ships and land, radar video image
also includes unnecessary echo, such as reflection from waves on the sea surface
and reflection from rain and snow. Reflection from the sea surface is called "sea
clutter," and refl ection from rain and snow is called "rain and snow clutter," and
those spurious waves must be eliminated by the clutter rejection function.
a. Sea clutter
Sea clutter appears as an image radiating outwardly from the center of the radar
display and changing depending on the size and the shape of waves. Generally, as
waves become larger, image level of the sea clutter is intensified and the clutter
far away is also displayed. When waves are large and the sea clutter level is hjgh,
it is difficult to di stinguish sea clutter from a small boat whose reflection intensity
is weak. Accordingly, it is necessary to properly adjust the sea clutter rejection
function. Table 6-2 shows the relation between the sea state (SS) showing the size
of waves generated by wind and the radar's detection probability.
Table 6-2 : Sea state and probability of target detection

S band radar (probability to detect a target at a distance of 0.4 NM)
RCS 881- 2 SS2-3 883 -4 884- 5

0.1m2 \} V-Mii M-NViii
0.5 m2 V v V-M M-NV
1m2 V v v V-M
X band radar (probability to detect a target at a distance of 0.7 NM)
RC8 881-2 882 -3 883 -4 884-5

1m2 V-M M-NV
5m2 V V-M M - NV
10m2 V v v V-M
i. V: Detection probability of 80%

ii. M: Detection probability of 50%
iii. NV: Detection probability of less than 50%
6- 5 [ .JRC l aapan RadicJ Co.,.lid.

*Lu.T~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - •
As shown in Table 6-2, the number of SS increases as the wind speed becomes
high and the waves become large. Table 6.2 reveals that detection probability
decreases from V (80 %) to NV (less than 50%) as the number of SS increases.
Therefore, even if the sea state is calm and a target clearly appears on the radar
display, when the sea state becomes rough, target detection probability decreases
resulting in difficulty of target detection by the radar.
Table 6-3 : Relation between Douglas sea state and average wind speed and significant
wave height
Sea state Average wind Significant. wave

speed (kn) height (m)'
0 <4 <0,2
1 5-7 0,6
2 7-11 0,9
3 12-16 1,2
4 17-19 2,0
5 20-25 3,0
6 26-33 4,0
i. Significant wave height: an average of top N/3 higher waves when

the number of waves detected within a constant time duration is N
For example, in the case of a standard marine buoy, RCS of X band radar is 5m2
as shown in Table 6-1. When observing such a target in the sea state (SS3) in
which significant wave height exceeds 1.2 meters, detection probability is M-NV,
as shown in Table 6-2, which indicates 50 % or less.
b. Rain and snow clutter

Rain and snow clutter is a video image that appears in a location where rain or
snow is falling. The image changes according to the amount of rain (or the
amount of snowfall). As preci pilation increases, the image of rain and snow
clutter becomes intensified on the radar display, and in the case of localized heavy
rain, an image similar to the image indicating land is displayed in some cases.
Furthermore, because radio waves tend to attenuate due to rain and snow, the
ability to detect a target in the rain and snow clutter or a target beyond the rain and
snow clutter may decrease. The amount of attenuation depends on the
transmission frequency, antenna beam width, and the pulse length. Fig 6-4 and
Fig 6-5 show examples in which detection distance is reduced due to the influence
of precipitation. Because of this, a target, which clearly appeared up to 10 NM by
an X band radar (pulse width of0.81JS) when it was not raining, may become
dimly visible up to 5 NM when the amount of rain becomes 4 millimeters per
hour. Furthermore, when comparing the X band radar with the S band radar,
target detection distance decreases less when the S band radar is used, which
means it is influenced less by precipitation.
(.JRC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.lid. 6-6

JMA-9172-$A Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY> 6.3 SEA CLUTIER AND RAIN AND SNOW
----------------- -- ---- - ----- ~~~ --

16
-
.-+-- "'~... oU''"""" "'* """"-"' 0 Os.ot.
~~--·-trw,...w«NNOS...
_d!
/'
14
~
-
-e
· -
.............
,.,...,.. . . . .li"'""""I'Wcot'IIOf"-
~- -· -,..
~
12
,'
-~
/
v
c
"!!! 10
.!!!
.... ,,' ,I
I
I
.9l
E 8 ,
~ ,,j(
3:
I
I 6
1// ,, ,I
I
I
-o
c
.2 [7 j(
,,
,,
I
~ //v ,, '
,'
_,,/
'
, ~,, '
.
V, ___ ___ _.. .....
~ : .... --- -~
.. ---
"
0 6 8 10 12 14 IG
Detection distance while it is not ralnnnqNM]
Fig 6-4: Decreased target detection distance by S band radar due to

precipitation
14 - -
-·-
------~foot
~to~~llfli-lllr~•atliiOOSw
..
014 _....,,.. . . . . . , .
..........,.,,, _,..,........,.
2
-e-~.,._.... .........._..
v
/ ,,
, ll
/
10
v Jf '
/
v
/
/
v II
v - ~
v
/ / ,,
/ . v
. .-- ---.. --
Jt''
. ., .
,)I
,
... ... - ~ ~, ...
___ ..
0
0
? ~ ___ .._.. - ---·---
--- --- a-·-'
6 10 12 14 IG
Detection distance while it is not rainnn£(NM]
Fig 6-5: Decreased target detection distance by X band radar due to

precipitation
6-7 [ .JRC I aapan Radio Co.,..lid.

*LWT~ - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - •
c. Coping with sea clutter and rain and snow clutter
When the weather is bad and the ocean is rough, the use of the S band radar is
effective because the radar is not influenced by sea clutter so much and
attenuation due to rain drops is small. When an X band radar is used, reducing the
pulse width will reduce the influence by spurious waves, and also the spurious
wave rejection function effectively works; therefore, the use of short pulse is
effective when the weather is bad. By using image processing functions PROCl 1
to 3, it is expected that spurious waves are further suppressed. Since optimal
settings for those items can be automatically made by using the function mode, it
is recommended that STORM or RAIN be used by selecting the function mode
when the weather is bad. For detai ls of the function mode, see Section 3.9 "USE
FUNCTION KEY [USER]".
However, these functions may make some targets invisible, particularly targets
with higher speeds.
[.JRC] 8opan Radio Co., .lid. 6-8

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES
----------------------------------
FALSE ECHOES
The radar observer may be embarrassed with some echoes that do not exist
actually. These false echoes appear by the following causes that are well known:
a. Shadow
When the radar scanner is installed near a funnel or mast, the echo of a target that
exists in the direction of the funnel or mast cannot appear on the radar display
because the radar beam is reflected on the funnel or mast. Whether there are some
false echoes due to shadows can be checked monitoring the sea clutter returns, in
which there may be a part of weak or no returns.
Such shadows appear always in the same directions, which the operator should
have in mind in radar operation.
b. Side Lobe Effect

A broken-line circular arc may appear at the same range as the main lobe of the
radar beam on the radar display. This type of false echo can easily be
discriminated when a target echo appears isolated. (see Fig 6-6)
HL
Fig 6-6: False echo
6-9 !JRC] 8opanRadioCo.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES
----------------------------------
c. False Echo by Secondary Reflection
When a target exists near own ship, two echoes from the single target may appear
One of those echoes is the direct echo return from the target and the other is the
secondary reflection return from a mast or funnel that stands in the same direction
as shown in Fig 6-7.
Direct microwave
'/
HL
.I
Actual target
.I
.I
/
.I
Radar .I
/
scanner .I
/
/~
Secondary reflection
Funnel of microwave
False echo from funnel
Fig 6-7: False echo by secondary reflection

d. False Echo by Multiple Reflection
When there is a large structure or ship with a high vertical surface near own ship
as shown in Fig 6-8, multiple refection returns may appear on the radar display.
These echoes appear in the same intervals, of which the nearest echo is the true
echo of the target.
HL
.'...
Fig 6-8: False echo by multiple reflection
e. Second Time Echoes
The maximum radar detection range depends upon the height of the scanner and
the height of a target as described in the Section 6.1 "RADAR WAVE WITH THE
HORIZON". If a so-called "duct" occurs on the sea surface due to a certain
weather condition, however, the radar beam may propagate to a abnormally long
distance, at which a target may be detected by the radar.
[~Rc ] 8 apan. Rodio Co., .lid. 6 - 10

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.4 FALSE ECHOES
----------------------------------
For instance, assuming that the pulse length is MP2 (on the repetition frequency
of 2280Hz), the first pulse is refl ected from a target at about 35.5 NM or more
and received during the next pulse repetition time. In this case, a false echo
(second time echo) appears at a position that is about 35.5 NM shorter than the
actual distance. If the false echo appears at 5 NM on the radar display, the true
distance of the target is 5+35.5=40.5 NM. On the pulse length is LPl (on the
repetition frequency of 1280Hz), a false echo may appear at a position that is
about 63 NM shorter than the actual distance.
This type of fal se echo can be discriminated by changing over the range scale (the
repetition frequency), because the distance of the target changes accordingly.
If second time echo is appeared, the use of Economy mode in PRF menu is
effective. Otherwise, Stagger Trigger menu set to on. (See Section 3.8.3 "Set
Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)").
f. Radar Interference
When another radar equipment using the same frequency band as that on own ship
is near own ship, a radar interference pattern may appear on the radar display.
This interference pattern consists of a number of spots which appear in various
forms. In many cases, these spots do not always appear at the same places, so that
they can be discriminated from the target echoes. (See Fig 6-9)
HL HL
Fig 6-9: Radar interference
If radar equipment causing an interference pattern and this radar are of the same
model, their transmitting repetiti on frequency is nearly the same. As a result,
interference patterns may be displayed concentrically.
In thi s case, the interference patterns cannot be eliminated by using only the
interference reflector function, so ine-tune the transmitting repetition
frequency.(See Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)")
An interference suppressing effect can be heightened by applying a different

transmitting repetition frequency to the interference pattern source radar and this
radar.
6 - 11
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHO ES O N DISPLAY > 6 5 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART
----------------------------------
DISPLAY OF AIS-SART
AAJS-SART is an equipment to display the position of distress ship on the AIS

indicator in ship station or coast station when the distress occurs.
lt is usable as an alternate equipment of SART(Search And Rescue Transponder).
When connecting AIS indicator to RADAR, it is possible to display AJS-SART

symbol on the RADAR screen.
6.5.1 Display
When receiving AIS-SART signal, AIS-SART symbol is displayed on the
RADAR screen.
AIS-SART
Symbol
Fig 6-10: Example of AIS-SART Symbol display
For details of AJS-SART Symbol , refer to Section 5.1.2.2 "Types and Definitions
of AIS Target Symbols".
[JRC] 8opon Radio Co., .i'Jd. 6-12

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6.TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART
---------------- ---- ---- ----------

6.5.2 Numeric Display
When the sleeping AIS-SART symbol is clicked once, the symbol changes into
activated AIS-SART symbol. And then activated AIS-SART symbol is clicked
once more, the symbol changes into numeric displayed AIS-SART symbol and
their information is displayed.
Fig 6-11 : Example of numeric information display of AIS-SART
Depending on operation condition, NAY Status is displayed as follows.
Normal operation : SART ACTIVE(14)
Test operation : SART TEST(15)
Notice: A IS-SART function is available in the display software ver. 01.01 .
As for method of confirming software version , refer to Section 8.3.1.6

6 - 13 !.JRC) 8opan Radio Co., .tid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 6 .TRUE AND FALSE ECHOES ON DISPLAY > 6.5 DISPLAY OF AIS-SART
----------------------------------
[.JRC I aopan Radio Co., .lid. 6-14

SECTION 7
11
111111 ' ·•11111111

7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALI..ATION ............................................................. 7-1
7.1 .1 How to Open the Serviceman Menu (Service Man Menu) ......... 7-1
7 .1 .2 GYRO 1/F Setting .... ......................................................................... 7-2
7.1 .3 Tuning (Tune Adjustment) ............................................................. 7-5
7 .1.4 Bearing Adjustment ........................................................................ 7-5
7.1 .5 Range Adjustment ........................................................................... 7-5
7 .1.6 Navigator Setting (Device) ............................................................. 7-6
7.1 .7 Setting of True Bearing Value ........................................................ 7-7
7.1.8 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height) ..................................... 7-7
7.1 .9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting) .................................................... 7-8
7.2 SETTINGS ............................................................................................7-11
7 .2.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting) ....................... 7-11
7.2.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank) ............................................7-15
7.2.3 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scanner Unit (Output Pulse) ...7-16
7.2.5 Language Setting (language) ............................................ .......... 7-17
7.2.6 Date Time Setting ..........................................................................7-18
[JRC] dapanRadioCo.,.lid.
7 .2. 7 Input Installation Information ....................................................... 7-19
7.2.8 Setting the Alarm System .............................................................7-19
7.2.9 Network Setting (Network) ...................... ..................................... 7-24
7.2.10 LAN Port Setting) .......................................................................... 7-27
7.3 ADJUSTMENT ...................................................................................... 7-30
7.3.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level) ........................................ 7-30
7.3.3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS) ..................... 7-33
7 .3.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor (SSR MON) .... ...................7-35
7.4.1 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch) ....................................... 7-38
7.4.5 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update) .............7-43
JMA·9172-$A Instruction Manual > 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION

The bearing adjustment value is saved to non-volatile memory in the scanner.

Other settings are saviedto non-volatile memory in the radar process unit.
& cAUTION
carried out, th is may cause unstable operation.
resu_lting in an accident or trouble.
7.1.1 How to Open the Serviceman Menu (Service Man Menu)

Procedures
1) Hold down the Main button at the
lower right of the display together
with the left key.
The Code Input menu wi ll appear.
2) Left-click the o button.
The Serviceman Menu wi ll appear.
Fig 7-1 : Code Input
7-1 I~Rc ] [japan Radio Co.,.J.'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
7.1.2 GYRO 1/F Setting
a. Gyro Settings (STEP or SYNC)

The GYRO IfF circuit of the system is designed to be compatible with most types
of gyro compasses by simply setting the switches.
Step motor type: DC24V to DC100V
Synchro-motor type: Primary excitation voltage 50 to 115 VAG
Before power-on operation can be performed, the switches Sl, S2, S5, S6, S7 and
jumper TB 105 on the gyro interface circuit (PC4201) must be set in accordance
with the type of your gyro compass by performing the procedure below.
The switches are factory-set for a gyration ratio of 180X and the step motor type.
Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own ship before
starting the procedure below.
Procedures
1) Set 55 to "OFF".
The gyro compass and GYRO 1/F are cut off.
2) Set 56 and 57 in accordance with the type of your gyro compass.
There are two types of gyro compasses: one type outputs a step signal, and the other type
outputs a synchro signal. Make sure of the type of the gyro compass installed on the own
ship before setting the switches S6 and S7.
Synchro signal : Set the switches to [SYNC].
Step signal : Set the switches to [STEP] .
3) Set the DIP switch 5 1 in accordance with the type of the

compass.
The items to be set are listed below. For the settings, refer to Table 7- 1 : Gyro and Log
Select Switches (S I DIP Switch).
S1-1 : Type of gyro signal (step/synchro)
S 1-2/3: Gyration ratio of gyro compass
S1-4: Gyration direction of gyro compass
S1-5: Type of log signal (pulse/synchro)
S1-7/8: Ratio of log signal
['-'RC I gopon Radio Co.,J'id. 7-2

JMA-9172-5A Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETIINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
4) Set the DIP switch S2.
The items to be set are listed below. For the setting, refer to Table 7-2: Gyro and Log Select
Switches (S2 DIP Switch).
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF ON OFF
5) Confirm the settings of the DIP switch S1 0.
The DIP switch must be set as shown below. Do not change any of tJ1e settings.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
6) Set the jumper TB105.
The TB I 05 is set for using a low-voltage step s ignal.
1-2 connected : Setting for normal use
2-3 connected : Setting for a step signal of 22 V or less
7) Connect the gyro signal and log signal cables to the terminal
block.
8) Set S5 to "ON".
The gy ro compass and GYRO 1/F are connected.
9) After power-on operation, make sure of the radar video and the
operation with the true bearing value.
See the Section 7. I. 7 "Setting of True Bearing VaJue".
10) If the true bearing value of the radar equipment is reversed,

change the setting of the switch S1-4.
7- 3 [..JRC] 8opanRadkJ Co.,.l'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETIINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
ST EP ON
SYNC OFF
360X OFF OFF
<..9
(/) 180X ON OFF
0
0::: 90X OFF ON
>-
<..9 36X ON ON
DIRECTION REV ON
NOR OFF
TYPE SYNC ON
PULSE OFF
<..9 PULSE / Don't care OFF

(/) NM
100P / 30X ON ON
<..9
0 OFF ON
....J 200P / 90X
400P / 180X ON OFF
800P / 360X OFF OFF
S2 SETTING TABLE 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LOG ALARM ON
OFF
GYRO SIMULATOR ON
OFF
LOG SIMULATOR ON
<..9 OFF
z
~
w
N.A. Don't care any
(/) GYRO ALARM TIME Ss ON
0:::
w 0.2s OFF
I
~
0 HEADING SENSOR SOURCE NMEA(HDT/THS) ON
GYRO SIGNAL OFF
NMEA BAUDRATE SETTING 4800 OFF OFF
9600 ON OFF
19200 OFF ON
38400 ON ON
[ ~RC ] 8opan RadicJ Co., .lid. 7- 4

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION> 7.1 SETIINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
7.1.3 Tuning (Tune Adjustment)
JMA-91 72-SA radar is full y automatic. There is no necessary for a tuning
function.
7.1.4 Bearing Adjustment

Make adjustment so that the bearing of the target measured with the ship ' s
compass matches the bearing of the target echo on the radar dj splay.
Procedures
1) Select H Up for the bearing presentation. Set video processing
(PROC) to PROC Off
2) Measure the bearing of an adequate target (e.g., a ship at anchor,

a breakwater, or a buoy) relative to own ship's heading.
4) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Bearing

Adjustment menu.
1. Adj ust Menu
~ 2. Bearing Adjustment
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "Increasing or decreasing a
numeric value".
Make adjustment by the 0. 1o.
5) Adjust the bearing adjustment value by operating the + I

button so that the target measured in step 2) is adjusted to
the correct bearing.
7.1.5 Range Adjustment

Make adjustment so that the range of a target on the radar display is shown
correctly.
Procedures
1) Search the radar display for a target of which range is already
known.
7- 5 ["'Rc] f}apan. ~Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Range

Adjustment menu.
1. Adjust Menu
~ 3. Range Adjustment
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "increasing or decreasing a
numeric value".
4) Adjust the range adjustment value by operating the + I

button so that the target measured in step 1) falls in the correct
range_
7.1.6 Navigator Setting (Device)

Determine whether to connect navigators to the radar equipment.
Only the navigators set to ON here can be used.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Device

Installation menu.
~ 9. Next
~ 3. Device Installation
3) Select On for navigators connected to the radar equipment,

and Off for navigators not connected.
Gyro : Gyro (via GYRO 1/F}
Compass : Compass (Compl iant with 1EC61162)
GPS Compass : GPS Compass (JRC)
LOG : Log (via GYRO 1/F}
2AXW : 2-axis log (Speed over water: Compliant with 1EC61162)
2AXG : 2-axis log (Speed over ground: Compliant with 1EC61162)
7- 6
JMA-9172-8A Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
GPS : GPS (Compliant with IEC61162 )
7.1.7 Setting of True Bearing Value

If GYRO IfF is used to input a gyro signal, the true bearing value indicated by the
master gyro does not match the value indicated by the radar equipment only in a
rare case. In this case, perform the following procedure to adjust the true bearing
value of the radar equipment to the value of the master gyro.
Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the true
bearing value setting menu.
Main
---7 6. NAV Equipment Setting
---7 1. Gyro Setting
2) Input the master gyro value to the value input screen.
For inputs to the value input screen, refer to Section 3.3.4.3 "lncreasing or decreasing a
numeric value".
7.1 .8 Antenna Height Setting (Antenna Height)

Set the height of radar antenna above sea level. Do not change this setting
carelessly.
Procedures
1) Measure the height of radar antenna above sea level in advance.
3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Antenna

Height setting menu.
1. Adj ust Menu
---7 1. Antenna Height
The Antenna Height menu wi ll open.
7-7 I.JRC] dOfXi'l Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-5A Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETTINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
4) Select the setting that matches the antenna height measured in
step 1).
7.1.9 Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting)

Set the own ship's CCRP location, radar antenna installation location, and GPS
installation location.
CCRP : Up to four locations can be input. (One location selected when used)
Radar antenna: Up to eight radar antennas can be input. (Automatically selected in

response to ISW operation)
GPS : Up to four locations can be input. (One location selected when used)
Procedures
1) Measure the CCRP location, radar antenna location, and GPS
antenna location in advance.
3) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the CCRP

Setting menu.
-t 4. CCRP Setting
4) Specify the ship length for Length at the upper right of the CCRP
Setting Menu, and the ship width for Beam.
5) Move the cursor onto the CCRPl X, Y value, and left-click to

input the CCRP1 location.
When X > 0, the CCRP is on the starboard side oF the ship.
When X < 0, it is on the port side.
6) To input the second CCRP, click the CCRP2 button to display the
CCRP2 X,Y value, and input the value in the same manner for
step 5).
Similarly, input the th ird and subsequent CCRPs.
7) Repeat the above steps to input the GPS location(s) and radar
antenna location(s).
[.JRC) gopan Radio Co.,.lid. 7-8

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.1 SETIINGS AT INSTALLATION
----------------------------------
8) If multiple CCRP locations and GPS locations are input, select
the CCRP location and GPS location to be used by pressing the
buttons at the upper left of the menu.
9) Click the o.Exit to close the CCRP Setting menu.
7-9 [ .JRC I aapan Radio Co.,..lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 1 SETTINGS AT INSTA LLATIO N
----------------------------------
5m
Example : ...__
I
RADAR Antenna2
X 5m , Y 250m
Length 300m
GPS1
250m X -10m, Y 30m CCR P1
--r:~~------
___ ------
RADAR Antenna1
X Om, Y 15m
Beam 30m
CCRP Setting
[~RC I gapan. Raci.UJ Co.,.lid. 7 - 10

JMA-9172-SA lnstructton Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETIINGS
----------------------------------
SETTINGS
This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be perfom1ed by

&cAUTION
7.2.1 Communication Port Setting (COM Port Setting)

External sensor signals are input to the radar equipment through a communication
port. The radar equipment has ten communication ports. For signals to be input
from sensors or to be output to the sensors, communication ports need to be set in
accordance with the sensors.
7.2.1 .1 Baud Rate Setting (Baud Rate)

Set the baud rate of the signal to be input to the COM port.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Baud

Rate setting menu.
~ 1. Baud Rate
7 - 11 [~RC ] aapan.Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
3) Set the baud rate of the port to be set.
1. COM PASSi : 4800(NMEA)/9600(NSK)/38400(fast NMEA)ii bps
2. MAINTENANCE/LOG : 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps
3. NAV1 : 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps
4. NAV2 : 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps
5. ALARM : 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps
6. JARPAiii: 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps
7. AI S : 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps
8. ARPAiv : 1200/4800/9600/38400 bps
9. COMV : 1200/4800/9600/38400/115200 bps
i. The compass port is a receive-only port that is dedicated to COMPASS signals.

ii. The bold values are factory-set.
iii. The JARPA port is a transmit-only port that is dedicated to JRC ARPA signals.
iv. The ARPA port is a transmit-only port.
v. The COM port connector is 0-sub 9pin.
7.2.1.2 Reception Port Setting(RX Port)

There are two methods for receiving signals: specify ing a port for each sensor, or
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the RX Port

setting menu.
- 5. COM Port Setting
2. RX Port
Settable sensor GPS, DLOG,Aiarm , Depth, Temperature , Wind , Curre nt,

signals ROT, RSA
Selectable ports When the automatic recognition AUTO

function is used:
When ports are specified: L 0 G , N A V 1 , N A V 2 ,

ALARM , COM
(JRC I 8opan Radio Co., .ltd. 7 - 12

, . . . . . - - - - - -- -- -- - - - ---- -
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETIINGS
----------------------------------
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the RX

~ 3. RX Sentence
Selection va lue: Use or No Use can be set for each sentence.
1. GPS(LUCOG/SOG) : GGA/RMC/RMA/GNS/GLLNTG
2. GPS(WPTfTime) : GGA/RMC/RM8/8WC/8WR/ZDA
3. Depth : DPT/D8K/D8T/D8S
4 . Wind : MWV/MWD
5. Current :
-+ Data Set Number : 0-9. Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data
-+ Layer A : Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer A

-+ Layer 8 : Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer 8


6 . Autopilot : AP8
7-13 [.JRC I 8apan. Radio Co.,.tid.

----------------------------------
7.2.1.4 Transmission Port Setting (TX Port)
For each sentence, set a communication port through wh ich signals are
transmitted to sensors.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TX Port

setting menu
--) 5. COM Port Setting
4. TX Port
3) Select the communication port through which the sentence to be

set is output.
Settable sentences TTM(TT), TLL(TT), TTD(TT) , TLB(TT), OSD, RSD, ALR,

ACK , TTM(A I S), TLL(AIS) , TTD(AIS ), TLB (A I S),
RemoteMaintenance, JRC-ARPA, APB, BOD, GGA, GLL
RMC , RMB, VTG , XTE, BWC , HOT, T HS
Selectable ports MAINTENANCE, NAV1 , NAV2, ALARM , JARPA, ARPA,

COM
4) Select the output format, talker, and transmission interval.
Signals for which U1e above items can be set:
Item Name Option

NMEA0183 APB, BOD, GGA, V1 .5
Output Format GLL, RMC, RMB,
V2.0
VTG, XTE, BWC,
HOT V2.3i
NMEA0183 APB, BOD,RMB, STANDARD : The talker is RA .
Talkerii XTE, BWC, HOT, GP : The talker is GP.
THS
NMEA0183 TX APB, BOD, GGA, Set an interval in the range 1 to 9 seconds.
Interval GLL, RMC , RMB,
VTG, XTE, BWC ,
HOT, THS
i. The bold values are factory-set.
ii. For TTM , TLL, OSD, RSD, and ALR, the talker is always RA .
For GGA, GLL, RMC , and VTG, the talker is always GP.
[ ~Rc) 8opanRadio Co.,.lid. 7 - 14

----------------------------------
7.2.2 Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank)
In order not to display radar echoes, set a sector range and stop transmission in the
bearing range. Three types of sectors can be created.
The sector blank function operates in the relative bearing with the bow as the
benchmark.
7.2.2.1 Sector Blank Function On/Off (Sector1 ,2 and 3)
Procedures

Blank setting menu.
--? 3. Sector Blank
3) Set the sector blank number Sectorl , Sector2 , or Sector3 with

which the sector blank function operates.
The system allows the use of up to three sector blank areas.
Set each sector blank area to on or off.
On The sector blank function of the number is operated.
Off The sector blank function of the number is stopped .
7.2.2.2 Sector Blank Area Creation (Make Sector 1,2,3)
Procedures

Blank setting menu.
--? 3. Sector Blank
3) Select the sector blank number ( Make Sector 1 to Make Sector 3 ) for
sector creation, and click the Make Sector button in the menu.
The selected sector blank will be made.
7-15 [ ~RC ) (japan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
4) Set the starting azimuth of the sector blank by operating the
[EBL] dial, and left-click the ENT button.
The start angle of the sector blank wiII be set.
5) Set the ending azimuth of the sector blank by operating the [EBL]
The end angle of the sector blank will be set.
7.2.3 Setting of Bearing Pulses from Scariner Unit (Output Pulse)

Set the output value of bearing pulses from the scanner unit. The system can set
2048 pulses or 4096 pu lses. This setting is enabled only when the scanner unit of
25 or 30 kW is used.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Output

Pulse setting menu.
1. Adjust Menu
~ 6. OUtput Pulse
3) Set the number of pulses to be output by the scanner unit.
2048 :2048 pulses per antenna rotation (Recommended value)
4096 :4096 pulses per antenna rotation
i. If a 10 kW antenna or S-band Solid State antenna is used, 2048 is

always set.
7.2.4 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave)

Place the system in the Slave mode when it is to be operated as the sub-display
that di splays radar echoes by using radar signals from other radar equipment.
The input value of externally input bearing pulses can be set. The system can set
2048 pulses or 4096 pulses.
(..JRC] f)opanRadi.o Co.,.fld. 7-16

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYST EM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
7.2.4.1 Slave Mode Setting (Master/Slave)
Procedures

installation setting menu.
3) Select Slave for the item j2. Master Slave in the menu.
Master :The system operates as radar equipment while the own

antenna is connected.
Slave :The system operates as a sub-display while the signal

cable of other radar equipment is connected.
7.2.4.2 Setting of Input Bearing Pulse (Input BP Pulse)
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the second

page of the installation setting menu.
~ 9. Next
3) Set the number of pulses for the item j1. Input BP Count in the
menu.

7.2.5 Language Setting (Language)

The system is designed to switch between display languages, Japanese and
English.
Procedures
7-17 [ .JRC] 8opan RodkJ Co.,.l'id.

JMA-9172-5A Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETIINGS
----------------------------------
language setting menu.
--+ 8. Language
3) Select the language to be used.
1. English
2. Japanese
3. Other
i. Other is an option to display character strings created by our overseas agents.

Ask the overseas agent or our sales department if your language is supported. To
determine the selected language, turn the power off, and then turn it on.
7.2.6 Date Time Setting

To display time, the local time, local date, and time-zone difference must be set.
However, if the "ZDA" sentence ofNMEA0183 is received, time can be

automatically di splayed.
Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Date
Time setting menu.
Main
--+ 7. Sub Menu
--+ 6. Date Time Setting
The Date Time Setting menu w ill open.
2) Set information about date and time

2)-1. UTC/LMT (Time display system)
urc : Universal Time Coordinate

urc <s> : UTC (System Time)

LMT <SJ : LMT (System Time)
2)-2. LMT Date

2)-3. LMT Time
2)-4. Time Zone
Input the time-zone difference between the universal time and local time.
!JRC I gapan Radki Co., .tid. 7-18

----------------------------------
2)-5. Display Style
Set one of the following date display formats.
YYYY.MM~ ex) 2007-12-31
Mr+l oo, mv ex) DEC 31 , 2007
oo Mr+~, YYYY ex) 31 DEC , 2007
2)-6. Synchronize with GPS
A ZDA sentence sent by the GPS is used, thereby displaying time

synchronized with the GPS time.
On i · Time synchronized with the GPS time
Off Time not synchronized with the GPS time
i. If On is selected for this item but a ZDA sentence is not input, the system
internal clock function is used to display the date and time.
7.2.7 Input Installation Information

The system can input installation information.
Procedures

Installation Information setting menu.
Main
---+ 1. Installation Information
3) Input the installation information.
For the input method on the numeric value and character input screens, see Section 3.3.4
"Operation on wneric Value, Latitude I Longi tude and Character In put menu".
Date Input the date of installed system.
Name Input the name of installation personel.
Company Input the name of radar installer.
7.2.8 Setting the Alarm System
7.2.8.1 Setting the reset interval (Reset Interval)

This function enables the control ofWMRST terminal (on the terminal board
circuit).The reset signal is turned on when operation in a set period of time.
7-19 ["'RC] aopanRadio Co., .f'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETIINGS
----------------------------------
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Reset

Interval menu.
~ 6. Alann System
~ 1. Watch Alann
~ 1. Reset Interval
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see ection 3.3.4
7.2.8.2 Setting the Trackball Threshold

This function enables the control of WMRST terminal (on the terminal board
circuit).
The reset signal is turned off when trackball is moved, that caused by vibration.lf
trackball move distance go over the threshold (dot unit) when reset signa l is
turned on.
Procedures

Trackball Threshold menu.
~ 6. Alann System
~ 1. Watch Alann
~ 2. Trackball Threshold
"Operation on urneric Value, Latitude I Longitude and Character Input menu".
7.2.8.3 Setting the relay output (Relay Output)

This function enables the control of ARPAALM terminal (on the terminal board
circuit).
Procedures
[JRC] 8opan.Radio Co.,.lld. 7 - 20

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > ?.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Relay
Output menu.
2:_Installation Menu J
~ 6. Alarm System
~ ,2. Relay Output !

3) Left-click the ~elay Output Mode I button in the menu.
The Relay Output mode is switched.
Continuous : The output is continuously controlled.
Intermittent : The output is intermittenly controlled.
The item can be turned on I off.
On : The relay output is turned on when alarm have issued.
Off : The relay output is not turned on when alarm have issued.
2. TI CPA/TCPA : There is a dangerous target. (tracked target)
3. AJS CPA/TCPA : There is a dangerous target. (AIS target)
: A new target is acquired in the automatic acquisition zone.
5. Lost : There is a lost target. (Target Tracking I AIS).
7.2.8.4 Setting the ALR output (ALR Output)

This function enables the control of ALR port (See Section 7.2.1 "Communication
Port Setting (COM Port Setting)").
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the ALR

Output menu.
~ 6. Alarm System
~ 2. Relay Output J
7-21 [ .JRC I 3apan Radio Co.,.lid.

----------------------------------
The item is turned on I off.
On : The ALR sentence is output w hen alarm have issued .
Off : The ALR sentence is not output when alarm have issued.
1. System Alarm : The internal alarm.
2. TT/AIS Alarm : Target Tracking Alarms and AIS Function Alarms.
7.2.8.5 Setting the External Acknowledgement (External ACK Setting)

This function enables the control of system when ACK sentence have received.
Procedures

ACK Setting menu.
~ 6. Alarm System
~ 5. External ACK Setting
3) Click the item button corresponding to the menu to be changed.
Critical Alarm : CPAJTCPA alarm .
Normal Alarm : Exept Critical Alarm.
[.JRC ] (Japan Rodit:J Co.,.lid. 7-22

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7 SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
The item is swi tched.
IAudio : Setting of alarm sound.
- On : The alarm sound is not stopped

when
IIndication
-I : Off The alarm sound is stopped
Setting of alarm indication.
when
-+ Ughtning : The alarm indication brinking is stopped when

- Brlnking : The alarm indication brinking is not stopped

when acknowridgement have received. 0
IAcknowledge State I : Setting of ALR sentence.
-- A;ACK
V;UNACK
: Add acknowridgement to ALR sentence.
: Add no acknowridgement (unrecognized) to ALR

sentence.
7.2.8.6 Setting the Alarm Buzzer (Sound Output Mode)

This function enables the control of alann buzzer.
Procedures

ACK Setting menu.
---7 6. Alarm System
---7 4. Sound Output Mode
On Offl and Off2
Setting and Arann Function
Alarm Setting Operation Operation C PA/ New Lost NAV System ISW
Miss TCPA Target
On
Offl CD
Off2 CD CD CD
<D: Followed by Buzzer Volume menu setting.
®: Alarm Buzzer is turned off.
@: If Relay Output menu is turned on when Alam Buzzer is turned off. If Relay Output menu is turned off when Alam
Buzzer is turned on.
For how to setting Buzzer Volume menu, see Section 3.8.6 "Adjust Sound Volume (Buzzer Volume)".
7-23 [ .JRC l aopan Radio Co., .J.'id.

----------------------------------
7.2.9 Network Setting (Network)
• Accepted Devices
RADAR : JMA-7100/9100/5300MK2 Series
ECDIS : JMA-901 B/701 B
Chart RADAR : JMA-9008 Series
Conning Display : JMA-901 B-CON/701 8-CON
Route planning system : JAN-1186
Navigation workstation : NDC-1186
GPS/DGPS : JLR-7500/7800
• Receivable Data
[1] Route Data
The system can display the route created by other JRC navigation equipements. Refer to
Section 3.7 "USE ROUTE FUNCTION".
When the system display Route which are created in the ECDIS,
following items are not displayed .
• XTL
• Arrival Radius
• ROT
• Turn Radius
• Time Zone
• Sail
[2] Sensor Data

The system can rece ive sensor data (Headi ng, Speed etc ... ) fro m other system (ECDIS,
Chart RADAR etc...).
[3] AIS Data
The system can receive AJS data from AIS.
[4] Selected GPS number
Selected GPS number can be synchroni zed.
[5] Day/Night mode, operation panel brilliance.
["'Rc] 8opanRadicJ Co.,.fid. 7-24

----------------------------------
7.2.9.1 Network Function Setting (Network Function)
Turning on/off the network function .
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Network

Function setting menu.
~ 9. Next
~ 4. Network
3) Select the item 11. Network Function I in the menu, and turn on or off
the Network Function.
: The Network Function is operated.
: The Network Function is stopped.
7.2.9.2 Sensor Priority Setting

The system can receive data from 2 sensors. If the same sentences are received
from 2 sensors, the system use primary system's data .
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Sensor

Priority setting menu.
~ 9. Next
~ 4. Network
~ 3. Sensor Prio rity
3) Select the data source sensor for each priority.
11. Primary : High priority sensor (Factory-set: No.1 ECDIS
12. secondary I : Low priority sensor (Factory-set: No.2 ECDIS
Settable sensors
No.1 ECDIS No.1 FFD Conning Display No.2 Data Server No.3 Remote GPS
No.2 ECDIS No.2 FFD No.1 Converter Unit Console Conning None1
No.3 ECDIS No.3 FFD No.2 Converter Unit NAVW/S
No.4 ECDIS No.4 FFD No.1 Alart 1/F No.1 GPS
No.1 MFD No.1 Chart RADAR No.2 Alart IfF No.2 GPS
No.2 MFD No.2 Chart RADAR Port Conning No.3 GPS
No.3 MFD No.3 Chart RADAR STAB Conning No.1 Remote GPS
No.4 MFD No.4 Chart RADAR No.1 Data Server No.2 Remote GPS
i. if you selected "None", the system does not receive data.
7-25 [ .JRC] 8apan. Radio Co.,.J.'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > ?.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
7.2.9.3 Synchronization Setting
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the

Synchronization setting menu.
-+ 9. Next
-+ 4. Networ1<
-+ 4. Synchronization
3) Select the 11. Day/Night 1 or 12. Keyboard 1 to be synchronized.
On : Day/Night and operation panel brilliance are sinchronized.
Off : Day/Night and operation panel brilliance are not sinchronized.
[JRC] 8 opan l<aclkJ Co., .lid. 7 -26

JMA-9172-SA lnslructlon Manual > 7 SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.2 SETIINGS
----------------------------------
7.2.10 LAN Port Setting)
synchronized with datum in JRC-LAN network

7 .2.1 0.1 Transmission Setting (TX Setting)

For each sentence, tum on/off transmission.
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the TX

Setting menu.
~ 9. Next
~ 5. LAN Port Setting
~ 1. TX Setting
3) Set on/off for each sensor.
On : The sentence is transmitted.
Off : The sentence is not transmitted.
These sentences can be lumed on/o ff.
Settable sentences
TIM(TI), TLL(TI), TID(TI), TLB(TI), OSD, RSD, ALR, ACK, TIM(AIS}, TLL(AIS),
TID(AIS), TLB(AIS)
7 -27 [~RC ) dopanRadicCo.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 2 SETTINGS
----------------------------------
7.2.1 0.2 Reception Port Setting (RX Port)
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the RX Port

setting menu.
- 9. Next
- 5. LAN Port Setting
- 2. RX Port

Heading, Speed , AIS, GPS, DLOG, Alarm, Depth, Temperature, Wind, Current, ROT, RSA,
Time Zone, Dateflime
Selectable ports
When the automatic AUTO

recognition function is used:
When the ports are specified: o.vn LAN LAN {GPS) LAN (Ship's Oock)
User Setting The system use the port selected by Section 3.12.1 "Receive
Port Setting (RX Port)". The _system use data from JRC-LAN
or sensor connected directly.'
ONn The system use data from sensor connected to the system
directly.
LAN (GPS) The system uses GPS data from GPS (JRC-LAN connected)il
LAN (Ship' s Oock) The system uses ship's clock data from ship's clock (JRC-LAN
connected)"
i. In order to set Section 3.12.1 "Receive Port Setting (RX Port)", select UserSetbng in
advance.
ii. LAN (GPS) and LAN (Ship" s Oock) are selectable signals for Time Zone and Datemme.
IJRC ] Japan RadkJ Co.,.lid. 7 - 28

----------------------------------
7.2.10.3 Reception Sentence Setting (RX Sentence)
sentences, select No useJ for sentences which are not necessary.
Procedures
2) Perfome the following menu open procedure to open the Rx

~ 9. Next
~ 5. LAN Port Setting j
~ 3. RX Sentence
Selection value: Use I or No Use can be set for each sentence.
1. GPS(LL/COG/SOG) : GGAIRMC/RMAIGNS/GLLNTG
2. GPS(WPT/Time) : GGAIRMC/RMB/BWC/BWRIZDA
3. Depth : DPT/DBKIDBT/DBS
4 . Wind : MWV/MWD
5 . Current :
- Data Set Number : 0-9. Set the number of the sentence to be used by Data
Set Number. {Initial value 0)
- Layer A : Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer A

by Layer Number. {Initial value 3)
-+Layer B : Set the number of the sentence to be used with layer B


by Layer Number. {Initial value 5)
6. Autopilot : APB
7 - 29 ['-'RC] 8opan. Radio Co., .tid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
ADJUSTMENT
This section describes the electrical adjustment procedures to be performed by

&cAUTION
Do not carry out the adjustments of the equipment
Do not carry out the adjustments during navigation.
7.3.1 Noise Level Adjustment (Noise Level)
7.3.1.1 Noise Level Adjustment for Signal Processing
Procedures

~ 1. Echo Noise Level
3) Increase/decrease the noise level adjustment value.
The noise level is factory-set. ( Initial value: 140)
After system installation, a great change in the noise level adjustment value should be
avoided; it should be fine adjusted within ±5.
[.JRC ] gapan Radio Co.,.li d. 7-30

r-----------------------------------------· ------ -
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > ?.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
7.3.1.2 Noise Level Adjustment Mode (Setting Mode)
A noise level is factory-adjusted while thj s mode is turned on.
Procedures

~ 2. Setting Mode
The noise level adj ustment mode is switched between on and off.
Factory-adjustment method
The noise level adjustment value is once decreased to about 130.
While the noise level adjustment value is gradually increased, the value
with which radar echoes start turning yellow is determined as the set
value.
The noise level adjustment mode is turned off when the adjustment is
finished.
7.3.2 Adjustment of Target Tracking Function {TT)
7.3.2.1 Vector Constant Adjustment (Vector Constant)

Adjust the vector follow-up perfonnance of the target tracking function.
The vector constant is adjusted to an optimal value, so do not change it carelessly.
Attention - --------------------------------.
Do not change the set value carelessly.

The vector constant shall be set to 5 normally. If the vector
constant value is higher, a target' s vector will be better followed
up when the target and own ship change their course or speed,
but the vector accuracy will be lower on the contrary.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Vector

Constant adjustment menu.
7 - 31 [.JRC] f)opanRaditJCo.,.lid.
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETII NGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
~ 2. TT
~ 1. Vector Constant
The window for setting vector constants will appear.
For how to input numeric data on the numeric value input screen, see Secti on 3.3.4
"Operation on Numeric Value, Latitude / Longitude and Character Input menu".
7.3.2.2 Quantization Level Adjustment (Video TO Level)

Use the target tracking function (IT) to adjust the level of the signal to be
recogni zed as a target. If a small va lue is set, even weak target signals will be
input to the target detection circuit of the target tracking function . However, many
unnecessary signals are also input, which may cause unstable target acquisition or
tracking. It is important to set a value four or five greater than the value with
which unnecessary signals are detected.
The quantization level is adjusted to an optimal value, so do not change it

carelessly.
&cAUTION
Do not change the set quantization level carelessly. If
the level deviates from the proper value, the target
acquisition and tracking functions will deteriorate.
Otherwise, this may cause accidents.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the target

tracking setting menu.
~ 2. TT
3) To change the quantization level of the automatic acquisition

area, specify the item 2. Video TD Level in the menu. To change
the quantization level of tracking and manual acquisition, specify
the item 3. Video High Level
[JRC] (Japan. Radio Co.,.fld. 7 - 32

JMA-9 172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
7.3.3 Main Bang Suppression Level Adjustment (MBS)
Main Bang Suppression is adjusted to suppress main bang, a reflection signal
from 3D circuit including wave guide tube, that generally appears as a circular
image focusing on the center of the radar display. Optimum adjustment all ows
main bang image to remain lightly on the display.
&cAUTION
Do not change this adjusted level carelessly.
Incorrect adjustment may erase targets in point-blank
range and cause collision, resulting in death or serious
injury.
7.3.3.1 Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression Level (MBS Level)
Procedures

9. RADAR/IT Initial Setup
-+ 3. MBS
-+ 1. MBS Level
3) Set the radar as follows :

• Set the radar range to 0. I 25 NM .
• Tum the [RAIN] control to the minimum position (fully to the left).
• Tum the [GAIN) control to the max imum position (fully to the right).
• Tum the [SEA] control to achieve the strength with which mai n bang can be judged.
7-33 [..JRC I aopan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
7.3.3.2 Adjustment of Main Bang Suppression Area (MBS Area)
Procedures

Area adjustment menu.
9. RADAR/TT Initial Setup
~ 3. MBS
2. MBS Area

• Set the radar range to 0.125 N M.
• Set the radar v ideo e nhance function (EN I-I) to OFF.
• Set the image processing (PRO ) to OFF.
• T urn the [RA IN] control to the min imum position (fu lly to the left).
• T um the [GAIN] control to the maximum position (full y to the right).
• Tum the [SEA] control to ach ieve the strength with which main bang can be judged.
[~Rc ) 8opanRadicJ Co.,.lid. 7-34

-------------------------------- --
7.3.4 Adjustment of Performance Monitor (SSR MON)
Attension
Replace the Antenna unit, TRX Module(CMN-750), performance monitor circuit

(CAY-71), and radar process circuits (CHA-396, CDC- 1349, CMH-2246), adjust
the perfomance monitor according to the procedures in this section :
[i] Transmission Monitor Adjustment (Tx MON Adjustment)
The radar system is equ ipped with an interswitch.
0 For adjusting the performance unit, set the interswitch connection to

Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the "Tx

Monitor Adjustment" menu.
l.Adj ust Menu
-+ 4.TXRX Adjustment
-+ 7.SSR M ON Setting
-+2. Tx MON Adj ustment
3) Adj ust the " Tx MON Adjustment" value to " 0.0 + 1.0dB" by
operating the "+" I "-" button.
4) Left-click the "ENT" button.
SSR MON Setting Adiust to "0.0± l.OdB"

3 4
2. Tx MON AdJUStment
~
4. Rx MON AdJUStment
0
5. Mon•tor· Sector
15
6 Mo.-.tor Range
73
7. Rx MON Garn 5
0
0.
7-35 I..JRC ] 3opan Radio Co., .ltd.

----------------------------------
[ii] Receiver Monitor Adjustment (Rx MON Adjustment)
Attension
Do not change the parameters of "6. Monitor Range" and "7.Rx MON Gain"

Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the "Tx

Monitor Adjustment" menu.
l.Adjust Menu
~4.TXRX Adjustment
~ 7.SSR MON Setting
~ 5. Monitor Sector
3) The +/- button is operated so that "Rx A TT Value" may become
the maximum.
*The PM Rx area(22.5 ° ) displayed on the PPI screen moves to
operate "+/-" button.
4) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the "Rx

MON Adjustment" menu.
5) Adjust the "Rx MON Adjustment" value to "0.0 + 1.0d8" by

operating the "+" I "-" button.
6) Left-click the "ENT" button.
[~RC ] 8opan Radio Co., .lid. 7 - 36

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.3 ADJUSTMENT
----------------------------------
Adiust to "O.OdB± l .OdB"
7 -37 [~Rc I doptiiJ Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > ?.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
----------------------------------
MAINTENANCE MENU
This item is provided for equipment maintenance, including settings of antenna

safety switch, master reset, etc.
&cAUTION
Only our service engineers are to make the
adjustment. Neglecting this caution may cause
accidents and failures.
Do not make the adjustments during navigation.

Otherwise, adjustments may affect the radar functions,
causing accidents and failures .
7.4.1 Antenna Safety Switch (Safety Switch)

Use this swi tch to measure the transmission/reception performance while the
antenna is in stopped state.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Safety

Switch setting menu.
3. Maintenance Menu
~ 1. Safety Switch
3) Select the item to be set.
Set operati on when the antenna safety switch is turned off.
1. TX-oFF The transmitter stops transmission. The screen on the

display unit remains in transmission state.
2. Standy (Normal setting) The transmitter stops transmission. The
screen on the display unit is placed in standby state.
3. TX-QN The transmitter continues transmission. The screen on the
display unit remains in transmission state. In this case,
however, an error such as a bearing signal failure occurs
because the safety switch is turned off.
4) Change the setting back to 2. standy when the work is finished .
[JRC ] 8opan Radio Co., .lid. 7 -38

- - - - - - - - - - - - - - -- -
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 7.SETTI NGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE M ENU
----------------------------------
7.4.2 Initialization of Memory Area(Area Initial)
If system operation is unstable , it may be stabilized by initializing the memory
area. To initialize the memory area, fo llow the procedure in this section. The
memory area is reset to the factory setting when initialized.
7.4.2.1 Partial Master Reset
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Partial

3. Maintenance Menu
~ 2. Area Initial
~ 1. Partial Master Reset
3) Select the items to be initialized.
1. Serviceman Menu The set values in the Serviceman menu are initialized.
2. Except Serviceman Menu The set values not in the Serviceman menu are initialized.
3. User Setting : The user-set values are initialized.
4. TT Setting The set values for the target tracking function are initialized.
5. AIS Setting The set values for the AIS display function are initialized.
6. Day/Night The color scheme and brilliance setting for the day/night
mode are initialized.
The memory areas of specified items are initialized, and the system is restarted.
7.4.2.2 All Master Reset
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the All

3. Maintenance Menu
~ 2. Area In itial
- 2. All Master Reset
The whole memory area is initialized, and the system is restarted.
7-39 I..JRC l aopan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-sA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
----------------------------------
7.4.3 Save of Internal Memory Data (Card1/2)
The system can save internal memory data such as item settings in all menus onto
a flash memory card. If the radar processing circuit in the system has been
replaced, the set values before the circuit replacement can be restored by reading
the set values you saved before the replacement.
To save the internal memory data onto a flash memory card (option), the card
must be inserted in card slot beforehand.
7.4.3.1 Copying of Internal Settings onto Card (Internal To Card1/2)

Save the internal memory data, such as item settings in menus, onto a flash memory card.
The internal memory data should be saved at completion of system setting, and the operation
condition should be saved periodically.
Procedures
1) Open the Serviceman Menu .
3) Select Slot2 in the 13. Internal To Cardl/2 1.
The internal memory data is saved on the flash memory card.
7.4.3.2 Reading of Internal Settings from Card (Card1/2 To Internal)

Read the saved memory data from the flash memory card into U1e system memory.
Perform the read operation in order to return the system to the previous operation condition
after replacement of the radar processing circuit in the system.
Procedures
3) Select Slot 2 inthe 14.Cardl/2To lnternall.
The memory data is read from the flash memory card into the system memory.
After the internal memory area is updated, the system is restarted.
[.JRC) f}apanRodio Co.,.ftd. 7-40

,------ - - - -- - - - - - - -- - - --
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAI NTENANCE MENU
----------------------------------
7.4.4 Restoration of Scanner Unit Operation Time (TXRX Time)
The system adds up the following operation time and contains it in the scanner
unit:
• Transmission time
• Motor run time
Clear the above total time when scanner unit motor is replaced.
7.4.4.1 Clear of Motor Run Time (Clear TX Time)

Clear the scanner's motor run time.
Perform the following procedure to clear the motor run time when the scanner motor is
replaced.
Procedures

Motor Time menu.
3. Maintenance Menu
- 5. TXRX Time
- 1. Clear TX Time
7.4.4.2 Save of Antenna Time (Clear Motor Time)

Perform the following procedure to inherit the scanner unit time data when the TXRX's
Procedures

Motor Time menu.
3. Maintenance Men u
- 5. TXRX Time
- 2. Clear Motor Time
7-41 [ ~RC I 8opan. Radio Co., .li d.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > ?.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7 4 MAINTENA NCE MENU
----------------------------------
7.4.4.3 Save of Scanner Unit Time (TXRX To Display Unit)
Perform the following procedure of 7.4.4.4 to inherit the scanner unit time data when the
TXRX's internal control circuit is rep laced.
During performance monitor adjustment, all acquisitions by the
0 target tracking function are released .

The released target acquisitions are not recovered.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the TXRX to

Display Unit menu.
3. Maintenance Menu
~ 5. TXRX Time
~ 3. TXRX To Display Unit
The scanner un it time data in the TXR.X's internal control circuit is saved trans ferred to the
display unit.
7.4.4.4 Restoration of Antenna Time (Display Unit To TXRX)

Restore the antenna time data from the display unit into the antenna's internal contro l circuit.
Perform the above procedure of 7.4.4.3 to inherit the antenna time data w hen the antenna's
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Display

Unit to TXRX menu.
3. Maintenance Menu
~ 5. TXRX Time
~ 4. Display Unit To TXRX
The scanner unit time data in the display unit is restored transferred to the antenna's internal
control circuit.
[JRC] 8opanRadioCo.,.lid. 7 - 42
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETTINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
----------------------------------
7.4.5 Update of Character String Data (String Data Update)

The system is designed to transfer and display external character strings as the
second language display. The second language is factory-set to "Japanese."
Ask our agent or sales department for the supply of character strings to be
updated.
To update character strings, the flash memory card (option) containing the
character string file must be inserted in card slot 2.
Procedures
2) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the String

Data Update menu.
3. Maintenance Menu
- 6. String Data Uj:!date
The character string file on the flash memory card is read into the system, and the second
language area is updated.
To display the read character strings in the second language, select Other in the menu
shown in Section 7.2.5 "Language Setting (Language)".
7-43 (.JRC] aopan.Rodio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 7.SETIINGS FOR SYSTEM OPERATION > 7.4 MAINTENANCE MENU
----------------------------------
[.JRC I aopon Radio Co., .lid. 7-44

SECTION 8
COUNTERMEASURES FOR TROUBLE
AND ADJUSTMENT
l ll lllt• •II 111111
II
II

8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT ........................................................... 8-2
8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1532 ................................................................. 8-2
8.2.2 Display Unit (NCD-9170) ................................................................ 8-4
8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK ...................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1 .1 Self-diagnosis function (Self Test) ............................................ 8-6
8.3.1.2 Monitor Test ................................................................................ 8-8
8.3.1.3 Operation Unit Test (Keyboard Test) ....................................... 8-8
8.3.1.4 Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display) ................. 8-9
8.3.1.5 System Alarm Log display ....................................................... 8-1 0
8.3.1.6 System Information .................................................................. 8-1 0
8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS ..................................................8-11
8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement ........................ .......... 8-12
8.4.2 Replacement of Motor ...................................................................8-12
8.4.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1532 .........................................................8-12
8.4.3 Replacement of 23inch LCD ........................................................ 8-17
(.JRC ] f)opan Radio Co.,.lid.

8.4.4 Replacement of Backup Battery .................................................. 8-20
8.4.4.1 About the Battery Alarm ........................................................... 8-20
8.4.4.2 How to Replacement of Backup Battery ................................. 8-20
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual> 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE .. . > 8.1 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
----------------------------------
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
& wARNING
• Never carry out internal inspection or repair work of the
equipment by users. Inspection or repa ir work by
unauthorized personnel may result in fire hazard or
electric shock. Ask the nearest branch, business office or
a dealer for inspection and repair.
• Turn off the main power before maintenance work.
Otherwise, an electric shock may result.
• Turn off the main power before cleaning the equipment.

Especially, make sure to turn off the indicator if a rectifier
is used. Otherwise, equipment failure, or death or serious
injury due to electric shock may result, because voltage is
outputted from the rectifier even when the radar is not
operating.
For operating the radar equipment in the good conditions, it is necessary to make
the maintenance work as described below. If maintenance is made properly,
troubles will reduce. It is recommended to make regular maintenance work.
Common points of maintenance for each unit are as follow:
• Clean the equipment.
Remove the dust, dirt, and sea water rest on the equipment cabinet with a piece of
dry cloth.
Especially, clean the air vents with a brush for good ventilation.
8- 1 [.JRC ] 8opan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstructlon Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
----------------------------------
MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
8.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1532
&wARNING
• Turn off the main power source before starting
maintenance. Otherwise, an electric shock or injury
may be caused.
• Turn "OFFi" the safety switch to stop the scanner unit.

(Refer to Section 1.4 "EXTERIOR DRAWINGS".)
Otherwise, you may be injured if touching the rotating
scanner unit by accident.
• Do not touch the radiator. Even if the power is turned
off, the radiator may be rotated by the wind.
i. After the work, turn "ON" the scanner unit safety switch.
a. Precautions in Mounting the Cover

When the cover is removed for regular checkup and replacement of parts and
refitted after such work, the procedures of fastening bolts shall be taken with the
following precautions:
1) The proper fastening torque of the fitting bolts (M8) is 1176 to 1470 N/
em (120 to 150kgf/cm) (which makes the inside water-tight and protects
the packings against permanent compressive strain).The packings
start producing from the cover at a torque of approximately 1470N/cm
(150kgf/cm). Do not fasten the bolts with a torque exceeding the
specified value. Otherwise, the screws may be broken.
2) Use an offset wrench of 11 mm X 13 mm or a double-ended wrench of

13 mm X 17 mm (not longer than 200 mm).
3) Screw all the bolts by hand first to prevent them playing, then fasten
them evenly in order not to cause one-sided fastening. (Fasten the
bolts with 25% of the required torque at the first step.)
*Fasten the bolts in the diagonal order.
[.JRC I gopan Radic Co., .lid. 8 -2

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
----------------------------------
8-M8 (stainless steel) bolt

Tightening torque: 120 to 150 kgf/cm
Bolt Tightening Procedure of

N KE- 1532 Cover
b. Radiator
Attention - - - - - - - - - - -- - - - - - - ,
• If the radiator front face (radiation plane) is soiled with smoke,

salt, dust, paint or birds' droppings, wipe it with a piece of soft
cloth wetted with alcohol or water and try to keep it clean at all
times. Otherwise, radar beam radiation may attenuate or reflect
on it, resulting in deterioration of radar performance.
• Never use solvents of gasoline, benzine, trichloroethylene and
ketone for cleaning. Otherwise, the radiation plane may
deteriorate.
Check up and clean the radiator.
8 -3 [.JRC ) (japan Radicl Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE .. > 8.2 MAINTENANCE ON EACH UNIT
----------------------------------
c. Rotating section
c-1 Supply Oil Seal
An scanner unit with a grease nipple needs grease supply. Remove the cap on the
grease nipple located on the front of JMA-9 172-SA radar at which the radiator is
supported, and grease with a grease gun.Make the oiling every six months. The
oil quantity shall be approximately 100 g, which is as much as the grease comes
out of the oil seal. Use the grease ofMobilux 2 ofMobil Oil.
c-2 Oiling gears

Apply grease evenly to the tooth surfaces of the main shaft drive gear and the
encoder drive gear with a spreader or brush. Oiling in short intervals is more
effective to prevent the gears from wear and tear and extend their service life, but
oil at least every six months.
Use Mobilux2 of Mobile Oil.
c-3 Mounting legs

Check the mounting legs and mounting bolts of the antenna unit case for corrosion
at intervals and maintain them to prevent danger. Apply paint to them once a half
year because painting is the best measure against corrosion.
8.2.2 Display Unit (NCD-9170)
& wARNING
• When cleaning the screen, do not wipe it too strongly
with a dry cloth. Also , do not use gasoline or thinner to
clean the screen. Otherwise the screen surface may be
damaged
Dust accumulated on the screen will reduce clarity and darken the video. For
cleaning it, wipe it with a piece of soft cloth (flannel or cotton).
Do not wipe it strongly with a piece of dry cloth nor use gasoline or thinner.
["'RCI 8apan Radio Co.,.ltd. 8-4

JMA-9172-SA lnstructJon Manual > 8 COUNTERMEASURE FOR T ROUBLE .. > 8 3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
----------------------------------
PERFORMANCE CHECK
Make operational check on the radar equipment regularly and if any problem is
found, investigate it immediately. Pay special attention to the high voltage
sections in checking and take full care that no trouble is caused by any error or
carelessness in measurement Take note of the results of checking, whjch can be
used effectively in the next check work.
Operational check shall be made in accordance with Table 8-1 Function Check
List in the order as specified in it.
Table8-1 : Performance Check List
Equipment Item to be checked Criteria Remarks
Display Unit Video and echoes on the screen Sensitivity Can be correctly controlled
LCD bnlhance can be controlled correctly
Various markers
Var10us numerical ind1cations
Lighting
Memory See the Section [1] "Memory Test"
Communications Lines See the Section [3] "Check of

Communication Lines (line Test)"
Power Supply, Backup Battery See the Section [4] "Supply Voltage"
Monitor See the Section 8.3.1.2 "Monitor Test"
Operation Unit See the Section 8.3.1.3 "Operation Unit

Test (Keyboard Test)"
System Alarm Log Display See the Section 8.3.1.5 "System Alarm
Log display"
System Information Display See the Section 8.3.1 .6 "System

Information"
Target Tracking See the Section 5.2.7 "Operation Test

(TT Test Menu)"
Scanner Unit Signals from the Scanner Unit See the Section [2] ''TXRX Test"
Performance Monitor See the Section 8.3.1.4 "Check of the

Performance Monitor (MON Display)"
8.3.1 Check Performance on Test Menu

The radar operating state can be checked by opening the Test Menu.
8-5 [.JRC] (japan RadkJ Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
----------------------------------
Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the Test
Menu.
Main
- 9. Test Menu
2) Select the items to be checked.
1. Self Test 8.3.1.1Self-diagnosis function (Self Test)
2. Monitor Test 8.3.1.2Monitor Test
3. Keyboard Test 8.3.1.30peration Unit Test (Keyboard Test)
4. MON Display 8.3. 1.4Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display)
s. System Alarm Log 8.3.1.5System Alarm Log display
6. System Information 8.3. 1.6System Information
The list of check items will appear.
8.3.1.1 Self-diagnosis function (Self Test)

Check of memory, scanner unit, and communjcations Lines
1. Memory Test [1]Memory Test

2. TXRX Test [2]TXRX Test
3. Line Test [3)Check of Communication Lines (Line Test)
4. Supply Voltage [4]Supply Voltage
[1 ] Memory Test
Checks for the performan ce of built-in memory.
1. SDRAM SDRAM Check
2. SRAM SRAM Check
3. FLASH ROM FLASH ROM Check
4. GRAPHIC GRAPHIC Check
When no abnonnality is found, OK is displayed. When an abnormality is found, NG is

displ ayed.
[2] TXRX Test
Checks for signals from the scanner.
ISafety Switch I Scanner's safety switch check
(.JRC l aopan Rt:idkJ Co., .ltd. 8- 6

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8 .COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE > 8 3 PERFORMANC E C HECK
----------------------------------
IAZI Pulse Scanner rotation signal check
IHL Pulse Heading line signal check
IMH Current Check on the load current of high voltage in
the modulator
ITrigger Radar trigger signal check
IVideo Radar video check
When no abnormality is found, OK is di splayed. When an abnormality is found, N G is

di splayed.
In standby, ** will appear.
[3] Check of Communication Lines (Line Test)
Check the status of communications with options.
TXRX Check on connection with the transmitter-receiver
SIG. PROC Check on connection with the signal processing circuit
TT Check on connection with the target tracking unit
GYRO I/F Check on connection with the GYRO 1/F unit
ISW Check on connection with the interswitch
When no abnormality is found, OK is di splayed. When an abnormality is found, NG is

displayed.
The status display field of equipment not connected is left blank.
[4] Supply Voltage
Check the voltage of internal power supply.
Item Normal operating range
12V 11.4 to 12.6V
5V 4.75 to 5.25V
3.3V 3.14 to 3.46V
Battery 2.5V or more
8- 7 [.JRC ) dOfXi" Ra.ditJ Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
----------------------------------
8.3.1.2 Monitor Test
Checks for the display.
The test pattern will be shown on the display.
1. Pattern! All colors are filled with white.

2. Pattern2 A white box is displayed on the black background of
1280 x 1024dot.
3. Pattern3 Displays rectangle X 2, circle X 2, and cross-shape X13
(white lines on the black background).
4. Pattern4 Displays " H" of 9 dots X 9 dots on the entire screen (white
character on the black background).
s. PatternS Gray scale display (16 levels)
6. Pattem6 Displays a color bar.
7. Pattern? Displays the VDR test pattern.
8. PatternS Displays the specified color.
To return to the normal display, press any key.
If errors occur in the monitor, no test pattern will appear.
8.3.1.3 Operation Unit Test (Keyboard Test)

]· Key Test [1]Key Test
2.. Buzzer Test [2]Buzzer Test
3. Light Test [3]Light Test
[1] Key Test
Each key on the operation panel on the display is shown in reverse video at the
same time the key is pressed, and the name of the pressed key is displayed.
[2] Buzzer Test
Checks for the operation panel buzzer.
The buzzer will sound. The buzzer automatically stops after it sounds for a
specified length of time.
[3] Light Test
Checks for the control panel light.
The brightness of the operation panel is gradually intensified at four levels.
[..JRC ) gopan Radio Co.,.ltd. 8- 8

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
----------------------------------
8.3.1 .4 Check of the Performance Monitor (MON Display)
0 For checking the performance unit, set the interswitch connection to

Procedures
1) Perform the following menu open procedure to open the "4.
MON Display menu" .
Main ~ 9. Test Menu ~ 4. MON Display
Blind sector appears on stern d irection of s hip to check receiver performance.
CD Ran ge sea le wi ll be automatically changed to 24nm.

Sea and Ra in di al will be autom ati cally changed to minimu m, and lR , EN H, PROC and FUNC
wi ll be automat ically c han ged to off. Pus h "EXlT" button, it w ill be returned to fo rmer state.
2) Check the Transmitter System ATT Value and Receiver System

ATT Value.
lfTransmitter System ATT Value down > 7.0d8 or Receiver System AIT Value down > 3.0d8,
Please consult the purchase d d is trib utor or nearest branch office (o r o ur sales de partme nt).
Note: Features of Performance monitor of JMA-9 172-SA radar
-The performance of the receiver and the transmitter is automatically calculated and indicated on
the radar screen like XX.X d B in two or three-d igit vaJue.
-Receiver check is performed wi thin the PM sector in direction of stem of ship.

Therefore, even if the performance monitor is activated, the performance monitor pattern echo like
the performance monitor ofthe magnetron radar is not displayed at all.
As a result, the radar operator can clearly observe the echo around ships other than the direction of
the stem.
8-9 [.JRC] 8opanRadioCo.,.fid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8 .COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8 3 PERFORMANCE CHECK
----------------------------------
8.3.1.5 System Alarm Log display
Displays previously occurred system alann s with the dates and times when they
occurred.
The current alarm is displayed at the lower right of the radar display. For details,
refer to Section 9.1. 1 "List of Alarms and other Indications".
The Alarm log display button (page2-31 Alarm) is clicked, in the same way as
that one.
To erase the alarm logs, press the All Clear button in the log display window.
8.3.1.6 System Information

Displays the current system information.
Indicator Processor software version information

TXRX Scanner software version information
System No. System number
TX Time Total transmitting time
-+ I S-Band
'IM-o-to_r_Ti_1m-e- - - , Total operating time (Total power-on time)
ITXRX Total Time I Total operating (power-on) time of the scanner unit
ITotal Time Total operating (power-on) time of the display unit
(JRC ] 8apan Radio Co.,.lid. 8-10

8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
The system includes parts that need periodic replacement. The parts should be
replaced as scheduled. Use of parts over their service life can cause a system
failure.
it cAUTION
• Turn off the main power source before replacing parts.
Otherwise, an electric shock or trouble may be caused.
• Two or more persons shall replace the liquid crystal

monitor. If only one person does this work, he may
drop the LCD, resulting in injury.
• Even after the main power source is turned off, some

high voltages remain for a while. Do not contact the
inverter circuit in the LCD with bare hands. Otherwise,
an electric shock may be caused.
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
8.4.1 Parts Required for Periodic Replacement
Here are parts required for periodic replacement
Part name Interval Part type Part code

1. Motor 10,000 hours MDBW108885*i MDBW1 0885*i
2. Fan (Scanner Unit) NZF-1532 NZF-1532
¢ 120mm (Radar process Unit) 90,000 hours
¢ 92mm*ii (Radar process Unit) 45,000 hours
¢ 60mm (Motor Driver) 45,000 hours
¢ 60mm (Power Supply Unit) 45,000 hours

3. LCD PANEL 50,000 hours CML-1799 CML-1799
4. Fan (Display Unit)
(Radar Process Circuit) 20,000 hours 109R0612S4013 5BFAB00588
(Power Supply) 20,000 hours CBP-220 CBP-220
5. Backup battery 5 years CR2032 5ZBCJ00012
i. "•" means revision, such as A , B and so on.
ii. The l/>92mm Fan is auxiliary use of the 1/> 120mm Fan.
8.4.2 Replacement of Motor

~ Replacement of motor must be made by specialized service
~ personnel.
8.4.2.1 Scanner Unit NKE-1532

[Required tools]
• Wrenches (M5, M8, and M10)
• A Phillips screwdriver (M2)
[Required procedure]
Removal o.[ the pedestal cover

1) Turn off the safety switch of the scanner before
replacing the mot01:
8 - 12
JMA-9172-SA lnslructlon Manual> S.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE .. > 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
2) Remove the pedestal cover of the
port side and the starboard side.
Make sure that there is no foreign

matter or dust adhered to the gasket
when you put the cover on.
Work of
•
Port side
3) Loosen the hexagonal bolts. (four M5 bolts)
And, remove the motor driver unit.
Loose n the four M5
Ports ide
4) Remove the relay connector

(P /901) connected to the motor
driver unit.
P1901
' LJ...,--1
J190l "" rr
Remove the relay connector I
I Back of the motor driver unit I
8 - 13 I~Rc ] gapanRadioCo.,.lJd.
JMA-9172-SA lnstrucbon Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE > 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
Work of
•
Starboard side
5) Remove the screws (two M4

screws) and the bolts (six M5
bolts) of the radar p rocess unit.
Bow
I .I
Starboard ooclo
6) Pull the radar process unit to the

open-position.
lnseruon hole
7) Loosen the M4 screw. Loosen the 1\14
8) Hook the stopper in the insertion

hole.
[J RC] 8apan Radio Co.,.lid. 8-14

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
4.Replacement ofMotor
9) Remove the bolts (two MIO bolts) on

the portside of the motor.
I 0) Remove the bolts (two Ml 0 bolts) on 0 0

the starboard side of the motor
n -1
Starboard side I
II) Remove the motor.
))~
Starboard side
Remove the motor
8 - 15 [.JRC l aopan Radio Co., .i'Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 8.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
12) Grease the gear wheel of the new motor.
13) Install the new motor in the scanner

unit and secure it using the
hexagonal bolts.
Tighten the bolts with the specified
torque (380 kgf-cm).
Grease the motor gear wheel
14) After replacing the motor, and

assemble the unit in the reverse order
of the disassembly procedure.
& cAUTION
Do not forget to tighten the screws and bolts .
& cAUTION
Do not forget to connect the cables.
[Operation check]
Follow the procedure below to check the operation after you have replaced the
motor.
1) Turn on the radar power supply. When the Countdown is completed, push the 'TX I
STBY "button and check that the radar image appears without error. Check that you do
not listen any unusual sound starting, rotating, and stopping the motor.
2) Open the service engineer menu, and initialize the motor rotation time.
[.JRC] 8opanRadio Co.,.ltd. 8-16

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE .. > 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
8.4.3 Replacement of 23inch LCD
~ Replacement of LCD monitor must be made by specialized
~ service personnel.
it cAUTION
Do not touch the LCD screen directly with your fingers.
it cAUTION
Do not touch the AR filter directly with your fingers.
it cAUTION
Perform the replacement work on a soft cloth to avoid damage to the LCD screen and
other parts.
[Required tools]
[Disassembly]
1) Remo ve the tilt faing handle (standalone type

only).
2) Tilt up the screen as much as you can

(standalone type only).
El
3) Remove the screws (M6) from the four
corners and displace the face cover.
8-17 [~RC ) 8opan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8 4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
4) LRemove the LCD operation circuit cables
and remove the face cover.
5) Remove six M4 screws.
6) Displace the module and remove the three

cables.
7) Remove the LCD module.
[.JRC] 8opan.Radi.o Co.,.J'id. 8-18

----------------------------------
[Assembly]
l) Tighten the lower three M4 screws halfway.
2) Connect the cables to the LCD module.
3) Align the module to the lower three screws

and insert it downward.
4) Check the positions of the two bosses and

ensure that appropriate space is maintained
under the LCD module. Tighten the six
screws evenly.
5) Connect the LCD operation circuit cables

and attach the face cover.
6) Tighten the screws at the four corners.
7) Attach the tilt fixing handle.
[Operation Check]
1) After completing the replacement

procedures, start the system to make sure that images are displayed properly.
2) Turn the brightness knob to make sure the brightness can be changed between the
minimum and the ma..x.imum levels.
8 - 19 (~RC ] 8opan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > S.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
8.4.4 Replacement of Backup Battery
~ Replacement of backup battery must be made by specialized
~ service personnel.
A coin-cell battery maintains radar system configuration, date, and time

information while power off condition. Radar system configuration is saving to
non-volatile memory at fixed intervals.
8.4.4.1 About the Battery Alarm

If IBattery Low I is appeared at the lower-right of the display when start up the
radar system, the battery has not enough time left to li ve. We recommend to
replace the battery.
If IBattery Dead I is appeared at the lower-right of the display w hen start up the
radar system, the battery has no time left to live. There is a necessary to replace
the battery. In This condition, thi s radar system is restored configuration
information from flash memory and normal operation is available. However, you
turned of the radar system before saving to fl ash memory, the configuration
information is maybe lost. In this case, you must setup the configuration again.
About disposal of used battery, refer to Section 10.2.
8
8.4.4.2 How to Replacement of Backup Battery
[Required tools]
• A flat tip screwdriver for 6 mm screws
• A flat tip nonconductive screwdriver for 3 mm screws
( ~Rc ] 3apan.Radi.o Co.,J'Jd. 8 - 20

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
(Disassembly]
1) Remove the four fixing screws to remove

the cover from the display unit (NCD-
91 70).
(A flat tip screwdriver for 6 mm screws)
For standalone type NCD-9170
For desktop type: NDC-1478
2) Remove the cable connected to the radar

process circuit board.
The radar process circuit is the first board from

the left.
3) Remove the two fixing screws (M4).
4) Pull out the board to thefront.
5) Insert the flat tip nonconductive screwdriver

for adjustment or some stick between the battery
and the battery holder and lift the battery up.
8-21 [JRC] dopanRadioCo.,J'Jd.

----------------------------------
6) Insert the flat tip nonconductive screwdriver for
adjustment or some stick to the location shown
in the figure below and slide the battery
sideways to remove the batte1y .
[Assembly]
1) Check the polarity of the batte1y. Make sure that

the battery 's positive(+) side is facing up.
2) Slide the battery sideways into the batte1y
holder.
3) Make sure that the battery is inserted fully.
[Check Item]
1) Check that no error message comes up.

2) Check that the system starts up normally.
[Notes]
[ ~Rc ] 8opan-Radio Co.,.lid. 8 -22

--------------------- ------- ----- -

& cAUTION
If you installed the battery with the wrong polarity, remove the battery immediately and
do not use the same battery again.
& cAUTION
During the procedures, do not put the battery on any circuit board or conductive item.
& cAUTION
To dispose of a used battery, follow the instructions provided in Section 10.2 "DISPOSAL
OF USED BATTERIES".
& cAUTION
To disassemble of a used battery, have to use non-conductive tool.
8-23 [..JRC l aopan RcuikJ Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.COUNTERMEASURE FOR TROUBLE ... > 8.4 REPLACEMENT OF MAJOR PARTS
----------------------------------
[JRC ] (japan RadicJ Co.,.ltd. 8-24

SECTION 9
TROUBLE SHOOTING AND
AFTER-SALES SERVICE
1
1111111 '' ·•IllIIIII

9.1 FAULT FINDING ..................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 list of Alarms and other Indications .............................................9-1
9.1 .2 Operation Checking .. ...................................................................... 9-6
9.1 .3 Fuse Checking .................................................................................9-6
9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING ........................................................................... 9-7
9.2.1 Circuit Block to be Repaired .......................................................... 9-7
9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE ...................................................................... 9-9
9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts ........................................... 9-9
9.3.2 When you Request for Repair ........................................................ 9-9
9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance ..........................................................9-9
[~RC ] 8apan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9 1 FAULT FINDING
----------------------------------
FAULT FINDING
In case of semiconductor circuits, it is deemed that there are few cases in which
the used semiconductor devices ha ve inferior quality or performance deterioration
except due to insufficient design or inspection or by other external and artificial
causes. In general, the relatively many causes are disconnection in a high-value
resistor due to moisture, a defective variable resistor and poor contact of a switch
or relay.
Some troubles are caused by defective parts, imperfect adjustment (such as tuning
adjustment) or insufficient service (such as poor cable contact). It will also be
effective to check and readjust these points.
9.1.1 List of Alarms and other Indications

If any of the following alarm occurs, the system displ ays the alarm message in red
in order to attract the attention of operator. Other messages are displayed with the
suitabl e color which is yell ow or blue depending on the level of message
importance.
Alarm: Red • Collision-related Alarm

• Navigation Alarm
• System Alarm
Warning: Yellow • System Warning
lnfomation: B lue • Operation Information
Alarm message is di splayed in the lower ri ght ofthe display. For more details
refer to page2-3 1 Alarm.
This section gives the list of alarms di splayed by the system and other display
lists.
Table9-1 : Critical Alarm

Message Class Description ALR No .1
CPAITCPA Alarm There is a dangerous target. 301
9- 1
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FA ULT FINDING
----------------------------------
Autopi lot (Data) Alarm Autopilot: No communication or data error. 101
Current (Data) Alarm Tidal current: No communication or data error. 119
Date (Data) Alarm Date data: No communication or data error. 112
Datum (Data) Alarm DTM : No communication or data error. 122
Depth (Data) Alarm Water depth: No communication or data error. 115
Fan (LCD) Alarm LCD monitor: Fan error. 955
Fan (Power) Alarm Power Supply: Fan error. 953
Fan (PROC) Alarm RADAR Process Unit Interconnection: Fan error. 951
GPS (Status) Alarm GPS status error. 103
GYRO 1/F (Data) Alarm GYRO 1/F: No communication or checksum error. 324
GYRO 1/F (GYRO) Alarm GYRO 1/F: GYRO error detected. 110
GYRO 1/F (Log) Alarm GYRO 1/F: Log error detected. 111
Heading (Data) Alarm Heading data: No communication or data error. 113
Keyboard (Data) Alarm Operation unit: Communication error or checksum 325
error.
Keyboard2 (Data) Alarm Second operation unit: Communication error or 325
checksum error.
Out of Bounds Alarm Own ship's latitude is over 85° N or 85° S. 123
Position (Data) Alarm Latitude I longitude data: No communication or data 102
error.
PROC (AZI) Alarm Process unit: AZI error. 305
PROC (HL) Alarm Process unit: HL error. 306
PROC (Interrupt) Alarm Process unit: Interrupt error. 962
PROC (Trigger) Alarm Process unit: Trigger error. 304
PROC (Video) Alarm Process unit: VIDEO error. 303
ROT(Data) Alarm Rate of Turn : No communication or data error. 120
RSA(Data) Alarm Rudder Sensor Angle: No communication or data 121
error.
Speed (2AXG) Alarm 2-axis log (speed over ground): No communication 114
or data error.
Speed (2AXW) Alarm 2-axis log (speed over water): No communication or 114
data error.
Speed (GPS) Alarm GPS speed: No communication or data error. 114
Speed (Log) Alarm 1-axis log : No communication or data error. 114
SRB (Data) Alarm SRB: No communication or data error. 960
TEMP. (Data) Alarm Water temperature: No communication or data error. 117
TXRX (AZI) Alarm Scanner: BP error. 311
TXRX (Data) Alarm Scanner: No communication, communication 326
mismatched, checksum error, or collision.
TXRX (Fan 1) Alarm Scanner: FAN 1 error. Fan_B103 is stopped.
TXRX (Fan 2) Alarm Scanner: FAN 2 error. Fan_B105 is stopped.
TXRX (Fan 3) Alarm Scanner: FAN 3 error. Fan_B106 is stopped .
TXRX (HL) Alarm Scanner: HL error.
TXRX (Lo PLL) Alarm Scanner: Local PLL error.
TXRX (PROC) Alarm Radar Processor error
TXRX (PS) Alarm Power Supply error
(~Rc ] 8apanRadioCo.,.fid. 9 -2
J MA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER...SALES SERVICE > 9 1 FAULT FINDING
----------------------------------
TXRX (Reverse) Alarm Scanner: Reverse rotation.
TXRX (SSW Off) Alarm Scanner: Safety switch OFF.
TXRX (Trigger) Alarm Scanner: TRIGGER error..
TXRX (Video) Alarm Scanner: VIDEO error.
Wind (Data) Alarm Wind direction/velocity: No communication or data 118
error.
Table9-3 : List of Notification

CCRP Changed INFO CCRP is automatically changed .
Copying INFO Displayed-image is capturing to file.
POSN Reset INFO Change the latitude and longitude sentence.
Set GYRO INFO Requires setting of true bearing.
TM Reset INFO Resetting TM in a short time.
Table9-4 : List of Target Tracking Alarms and AIS Function Alarms

AIS (Data) Alarm AIS: No communication or communication error. 116
AIS 95% Capacity INFO Over 95% of the maximum number of AIS targets.
AIS ACT 95% INFO Over 95% of the maximum number of AIS targets to
Capacity be activated.
AIS ACT MAX INFO Maximum number of AIS targets to be activated.
AIS Alarm ***;; Alarm AIS alarm (Up to 10 alarm messages can be
displayed.).
AIS Max Target INFO Maximum number of AIS targets.
AIS PROC (Data) Alarm AIS processing circuit: No communication or 328
communication error.
CPA/TCPA Alarm There is a dangerous target. 301
Lost Alarm Failure in tracking the target that has been under
tracking.
Failure in receiving AIS target data for a specified
time.
New Target Alarm Acquisition or activation of a target in the automatic 302
acquisition I activation zone.
REF Target Alarm Decrease in the reference target accuracy.
Trial Warning There is a dangerous target, when trial maneuver is
active.
TT (Boot) Alarm Target tracking unit start failure. 344
TT{Data) Alarm The target tracking unit is malfunctioning. 323
TT 95% Capacity INFO Over 95% of the maximum number of targets to be
tracked.
TT MAX Target INFO The maximum number of targets is under acquisition.
9- 3 [~RC ] 3opan. Radio Co., .J.'id.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.1 FAULT FINDING
----------------------------------
ii. ••• is a 3-digit number which is Local Alarm No in the ALR sentence.
Table9-5 : List of Route Messages and Warnings

Approach A larm Approach the route.
Arrival A larm Arrive at way point.
Break Off(WPT) A larm Out of the way point.
Cross Track Error Alarm Go off the route.
Table9-6 : List of Operational Alarm Messages and Warnings

Can't Transmit INFO Tried to transmit within 5 second after standby or
when the transmitter-receiver has any trouble.
Card Full INFO Card : Run out of free space.
Copy Failed INFO Card : Copy failure.
Delete Failed INFO Card : Deletion failure.
Format Card INFO Card : Unformatted card.
Format Failed INFO Card : Format fai lure.
Invalid Card INFO Card : Invalid card.
Invalid Connection INFO The operator set perform ance monitor to on without
selecting straig ht.
Invalid Data INFO Tried to enter any data beyond its range.
Invalid Range INFO TM selection due to TM-disabled range (96 nm).
Zooming in a ZOOM-disabled range (0.125 nm ).
MAX Point INFO Tried to enter navigation information beyond the
specified.
No Card INFO Card not detected yet.
No Heading Data INFO Target tracking operation or TM selection when
bearing data is invalid.
No Object INFO No object at the cursor-specified position.
No Position Data INFO Mark or line input when the latitude and longitude is
invalid .
Not Allowed INFO General operation error.
Out of Range INFO Out of target acquisition range.
Read Failed INFO Card: Read failure.
Slave Mode INFO Operation of a menu for the scanner unit when the
slave mode is active.
Write Failed INFO Card: Write failure.
(.JRC J 8apan Radio Co., .lid. 9-4

----------------------------------
Table9-7 : List of Conditions Messages
Battery Dead Warning The battery is dead.
Battery Low Warning battery is weakening.
GPS (HOOP) Warning The HOOP level is increased (Decrease in the GPS
accuracy.).
MON Test Warning Performance monitor is active.
Scanner Rotating Warning The scanner is rotating (When transmitter is standby
state.).
Table9-8 : List of lnterswitch Alarms and Messages

Connection INFO Inhibition of control/ connection is set.
Masked
ISW (Data) Alarm No communication, data mismatched, or checksum error. 327
ISW Busy INFO Access to the ISW menu was made during interswitching.
ISW Complete INFO The switchover of the lnterswitch ended normally.
ISW Error INFO The interswitch is disabled.
ISW Standby INFO The lnterswitch recovered normally.
ISW Straight INFO The interswitch is forced to change the connection
into straight.
ISWTime Out INFO Failed in switching.
Master Range CHG INFO The range of the own display unit has changed due
to change in the range of the master display unit.
Master Standby INFO The master display unit does not transmit any
signals.
Pattern CHG Failed INFO Connection change failed.
TXRX Standby INFO The scanner unit is in the standby mode.
Update ISW INFO Tried to enter new TXRX function, when interswitch
Software software used old version .
Note: lnterswitch is un-available for evaluation model.
9 -5 [.JRC] 8opan.RadioCo.,..fid.
----------------------------------
9.1.2 Operation Checking
When the system is operating, the operation status (located at the upper right of
the screen) is changing pictures.
If picture freeze occurred, tum off the system and restart the system.
Operation Status
~~~n
~ ~--~
9.1 .3 Fuse Checking
Melted fuses are caused by any clear cause. When a fuse is replaced, it is
necessary to check the related circuits even if there is no trouble. ln checking, note
that there is some dispersion in the fusing characteristics. Table 9-8 shows a list of
fuses used in the equipment.
Table9-9 : Fuse List
Location Parts# Current Prote c tion Type
Rating Circuit
AC/DC Converter F501 10A Motor ST6-10AN1
GYRO Interface F1-F4 0.5A GYRO MF60NR250V0.5

circuit Interface
circuit
[ ~RC ] (Japan Radio Co.. .ltd. 9-6

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9 2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
----------------------------------
TROUBLE SHOOTING
As this radar equipment includes complicated circuits, it is necessary to request a

specia list engineer for repair or instructions for remedy if any circuit is defective.
There are also troubles by the following causes, which should be referred to in
checking or repair work.
1 Poor Contact in Terminal Board of Inter-Unit Cables

a . Poor contact in terminal board
b. The c able end is not fully connected, that it, contacted w ith earthed another
t erminal.
c. Disconnected cable wire
2 Poor Contact of Connector within Unit

This radar equipment is provided with Table 9-10 standard
spares.
Table9-1 0 : 7ZXRD0025
Name Type/Code Shape (mm) In Spare Parts# Location
use
Fuse MF60NR250V0.5 4 12 F1-F4 GYRO Interface
Circuit
_l_
(5ZFGD00006)
o==o <1>6.4 CMJ-462E
1.. 30 t
.. 1
Fuse ST6-10AN1 1 3 F501 AC/DC Converter

_l_
(5ZFCA00053)
o==o <1>6.35
NBA-5135
1.. 31.8 ..1t
9-7 [JRcl 8opanRadioCo.,.ftd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
----------------------------------
9.2.1 Circuit Block to be Repaired
Table9-11 : Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-9 172-SA)
Location I Circuit Block Type Remarks

SCANNER UNIT MOTOR MDBW10885 DC brushless motor
SCANNER UNIT TRX MODULE CMN-750
SCANNER UNIT AC220V MOTOR DRIVER CBD-2010
SCANNER UNIT AC100V MOTOR DRIVER CBD-2011
SCANNER UNIT BRAKE CIRCUIT CFA- 1255
SCANNER UNIT BRAKE UNIT NZR-1017 Including CFA-1261 and
CFA-1262
SCANNER UNIT SIGNAL PROCESS UNIT NDC-1493 Including CHA-396,
CDC-1349 and CMH-2246
SCANNER UNIT IF INPUT/OUTPUT CIRCUIT CHA-396
SCANNER UNIT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT CBD-1798
SCANNER UNIT RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1349
SCANNER UNIT INTERFACE CIRCUIT CMH-2246
SCANNER UNIT RELAY FILTER CIRCUIT CSC-1656
SCANNER UNIT FAN MOTOR KIT NZF-1532 All four of fans in the scanner are
included within this kit.
RADAR RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MPBC45622* CDC- 1362 with mounting bracket,
PROCESS UNIT CDC-1363 and CDC-1364
RADAR RADAR PROCESS CIRCUIT MDLW12056* CDC-1362 with mounting bracket
PROCESS UNIT
RADAR AIS PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1363

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR ARPA PROCESS CIRCUIT CDC-1364
PROCESS UNIT
RADAR GYRO INTERFACE CIRCUIT CMJ-523

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR TERMINAL BOARD CQD-2176

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR MOTHER BOARD CQC-1230

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR FAN {RPU) 109R0612S4013

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR POWER SUPPLY CBD-1861

PROCESS UNIT
RADAR FAN (PSU) CBP-220

PROCESS UNIT
OPERATION OPERATION CIRCUIT A CCK-1005

UNIT
OPERATION OPERATION CIRCUIT B CCK-1006

UNIT
OPERATION OPERATION CIRCUIT D CCK-1007
UNIT
OPERATION TRACKBALL CCK-2013

UNIT
MONITOR UNIT BEZEL KIT MPXP34743 Radar bezel kit
MONITOR UNIT 23 inch LCD CML-1799 23.1-inch LCD PANEL
[.JRC ] 8opon Radio Co.,.ltd. 9-8

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
----------------------------------
Table9-11 Circuit Block to be Repaired (JMA-9 172-SA )
9 -9 [ ~RC l aopan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE
----------------------------------
AFTER-SALES SERVICE
9.3.1 Keeping period of maintenance parts

Keeping period of maintenance parts is ten years from the production is
discontinued.
9.3.2 When you Request for Repair

If you suppose the product may be out of order, read the description in Section 9
carefully and check the suspected point again.
If it is still out of order, you are recommended to stop operation of the equipment
and consult with the dealer from whom you purchased the product, or our branch
office in your country or district, the sales department in our main office in Tokyo.
Repair within the Warranty Period
If any failure occurs in the product during its normal operation in accordance with
the instruction manual, the dealer or JRC will repair free of charge. In case that
any failure is caused due to misuse, faulty operation, negligence or force major
such as natural disaster and fire, the product wil l be repaired with charges.
Repair after the Warranty Period
If any defective function of the product is recoverable by repair, the repair of it

will be made at your own charge upon your request.
Necessary Information for Repair
• Product name, model, manufacturing date and serial number

• Trouble conditions (as detailed as possible. Refer to "Radar Failure Check List"
on page 9-10
• Name of company/organization, address and telephone number
9.3.3 Recommended Maintenance

The performance of the product may deteriorate due to the secular change of the
parts used in it, though such deterioration depends upon the conditions of
operation. So checkup and maintenance is recommendable for the product in
addition to your daily care.
For maintenance, consult with the near-by dealer or our sales department.Such
maintenance will be made with charges.
For further detai ls of after-sale service, contact the JRC Offices.
[JRC ) (japan Radio Co., .ltd. 9-10

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9 TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE > 9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE
--------------------------------- -
Radar Failure Check List
When placing an order for repair of the product, it is requested that you could
confirm the check items and fill the results and sent the sheet to our contact.
If there is any unclear items, contact the ship on which the product is
installed , and give the correct information on the product.
Ship name: Phone: Fax:

i Radar general model name:JMA- iserial No. :
i. Write the full model name correctly
Check the following items in the order of the number, and check the applicable
answer between YES or NO.
If the item cannot be determined as YES or NO, explain in detail in the item (16),
others.
No. Check Item Result

(1) Power can be turned on. (The lamp on the Operation unit is lit) YES NO
(2)i A few minutes after powering-on, it will become standby status. YES NO
(3)' When powering-on (or TX ON), LCD monitor something is lit. YES NO
(4)i,ii YES NO
(S)ii Fixed marker is displayed. YES NO
(6)11 VRM is displayed. YES NO
(7)11 While noise is displayed while set at SEA and RAIN minimum, GAIN YES NO
maximum , IR-OFF and range 48 NM.
(8)11 Target reflection echo is displayed. YES NO
(9)ii Sensitivity of reflection echo is normal. YES NO
(1 0}11 EBL is displayed. YES NO
(11 )11 Cursor mark moves. YES NO
(12)ti,ii GYRO course can be set and normally displayed. YES NO
(13)11 ·iii LOG speed can be normally displayed. YES NO
11
(14} Target tracking function works normally. YES NO
(15)il,iii If equipped with an interswitch, when switching from the straight mode (II} to YES NO
(X), the failures (items marked NO) in the above (1) to (14 ), are switched over
to the other unit.
(16) Others (Error message , etc. )
i. If result is NO, then check the fuse. (Refer to Section 9.1.2 "Operation Checking" and Section 9.2 '"TROUBLE
SHOOTING")
ii. Check these items at transmission.
iii. Functions mentioned in the items (12), (13) and (15) may be optional , answer is not necessary.
9-11
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 9.TROUBLE SHOOTING AND AFTER-SALES SERVICE> 9.3 AFTER-SALES SERVICE
----------------------------------
9-12
SECTION 10
DISPOSAL
I'
DISPOSAL
10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT ........................... ......................................... 10-1
[ ~RC ] gopan Radicl Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 10 DISPOSAL > 10.1 DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT
----------------------------------
DISPOSAL OF THE UNIT
When disposing of this unit, be sure to follow the local Jaws and regulations for
the place of disposal.
-=~
- -- - -
~ -
-- ----=
:.a_
-- DISPOSAL OF USED BATTERIES
& wARNING
insulate the batteries by taping the ee terminals.
Otherwise, heat generation, explosion or a fire may
occur.
In this unit, Lithium batteries are used for the following parts:
Radar Processing circuit (CDC- 1362): BT300 (Maxell: CR2032)
• Do not store used lithium batteries. Dispose ofthem in accordance with

regulations of loca l government.
• When disposing of used lithium batteries be sure to insulate the batteries by
taping the <±>e terminals. For disposal of batteries, be sure to follow the local
laws and regulations. For detail, consult with the dealer you purchased the
product our business office, or local government.
10-1 [.JRC) 8opan.RadioCo.,bd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstructJon Manual > 10.DISPOSAL > 10 3 ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS
----------------------------------
ABOUT THE CHINA ROHS
(Nan"W!s & Content of toxic and hazardous subs tances or e len"W!nts )
Jfh\~ (fype): JMA-9100 Series , JMA -7100Series ~#1\ (Nan-w!): RADAR
{jrlt{j',t, ~$!\lt.JGJ;
;Till'! ~.M; (Toxic and II azardous ubstances and Elements)

(Part name)
ill A~ iNi ;\ {ft~ ti~JlXJt.; t~ . Jt~M
(Pb) (fi g) (Cd) (Cr6+) (PBB) (PBDE)
,lt,ib }(~r'(t.;L
(Scanner Unit) X X 0 X X X
til{ l,(:f,'j r'(t JL

(Transmitter-receiver Unit) X X X X X X
Ui}rAJ~'tt' (Inboard Unit )

· /J.if-~ J'l ( Display Unit)
· tllt.l::t& 'n (OperationUnit ) X X X X X X
· (,'; I}~JII'"& 'n
( RADAR Process Unit )
~~iTilifit~ (Peripherals)
· ~ff (Options)
• t[!~ ?K:;
(Cables)
X X X X X X
• T-JDr (Documennt s)
0 : .«tJ~~{I ,:dO?t~!Yi 1'1· ~$f'l lfr 11 ~J!Yi.f-HlrJrf(.J :rfli.l$J{I S.lffl 1306-2006 t;Fiit.I!A!:,.ii((.J~ 1t 'l::.:l< t;.J. F.
(Indicates that this toxic, or hazardous substance contained in all o f the ho mo~eous materials for this
pan is below the requirement in SJff 11363-2006.)
x , .&n~i~1J ,:, (f',l:1frJJJiif~1'1:~ iTili'l ((.J.!t~ -~JJJi.f--:l H<t'((.r;"\f,l,lflii\ SJrrt 1363-2006 +,,,111 ~ll!:..ii((.Jil!Htt.<.:R .
(Indicates that this toxic or hazardous substance contained in at least one of the homogeneous materials
us ed for this pan is above the limit requirement in SJ!f 11363-2006.)
I.JRC I aopan Radio Co., .lid. 10 -2

SECTION 11
SPECIFICATION
I'
I
II
SPECIFICATION
11.1 JMA-9172-SA TYPE RADAR .................. ............................................. 11-1
11.2 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1532) ...............................................................11-2
11.3 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-9170) .................................................................11-3
11.4 Target Tracking Function ................................................................... 11-6
11.5 AIS FUNCTION .....................................................................................11 -7
[~RC ] 8apan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11 .1 JMA-9172-SA TYPE RADAR
----------------------------------
Class of emission PON , QON
Range Scale 0.125, 0.25 , 0.5, 0. 75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48 , 96NM
Relative humidity 93% at +40 oc
AC220 to 240V, 50/60Hz, 1q>
Pre Heating Time Within1 0 sec
See 11.2
See 11.3
OPTION
Scanner with Deicing Heater NKE-1532-D (Only heater collar)

NQE-314 1-4A (Maximum 4 Radars)
DISPLAY UNIT (Desktop type) NCD-91 70T
SCANNER UNIT to 65m

TRANSMITIER RECEIVER UNIT
SCANNER UNIT 5.1m

DISPLAY UNIT 4.0m
Ill
11 -1 [~RC ] 8apan.RadicJ Co., .lid.
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11 2 SCANNER UNIT (NKE-1532)
----------------------------------
SCANNER UNIT NKE-1130

Mass Approx.170kg
: below -30dB (outside +/-1 0°)
Power Supply for Motor AC100- 115V, 50/60Hz, 1q> or
AC220 - 240V , 50/60Hz, 1q>
Transmitting Frequency PON(3040MHz), QON(3060MHz ± 4MHz)
Transmitting Power 250W (+25/-50%)
Transmitter Solid State Power Amplifier
TX Pulse width (1st) I SP1 : 0.07/1 s / 4.6.U s, 8MHz / 1860Hz or 2280Hz •1
TX Pulse width, MP1 : 0.14/1 s I 9.1 /.1. s, 8MHz / 1860Hz or 2280Hz •1
Frequency Deviation Width (2nd) MP2 : 0.29/1 s I 9.1 .U s, 8MHz I 1860Hz or 2280Hz •1
I Repetition Frequency LP1 : 0.57/1 s /9.1.U s, 8MHz /1 280Hz
LP2 : 1.14 /1 s / 18.3/1 s, 8MHz /640Hz
0.125, 0.25, 0.5NM : SP1
0.75NM : SP1 /MP1
1.5NM : SP1 /M P1 /MP2
3NM : SP1 /MP1/MP2/LP1/LP2
6NM : MP1/MP2/LP1 /LP2
12NM : MP2/LP1 /LP2
24NM : LP1 /LP2
48NM : LP2
96NM : LP2
Band Width : 30MHz
Amplifying Characteristics : Linear Amplifier
Overall Noise Figure within 4.0dB ( Typical}
*i: PRF setting is "Normal" : 1860Hz

PRF setting is "High Power" : 2280Hz Refer to Appendix 3.8.3.2
!.JRC) 8opanRadioCo.,.lid. 11-2

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11.3 DISPLAY UNIT (NC D-9170)
----------------------------------

Structure Self-Standing, Drip Proof
Mass Approx.130kg
Screen 23.1 inch Color LCD (Effective Diameter, more than 320mm)
Viewing Distance 1m from the center of Display
Range Scale 0 .125, 0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, 96NM
Range Marker 0.025, 0.05, 0.1, 0 .25, 0 .25 , 0.5, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16NM
Range Accura cyr Less than 1% of the Range Scale in use, or 30m whichever is larger
Variable Range Marker 2 (VRM1NRM2)
VRM Scale 0.000 to 100.0nm , Numerical Indication in 4 digits
Bearing Scale 360° in 1o step
Off Center Within 66% of Radius, except 96nm range
Trackball Cursor Built-in (Target Range , Relative/True bearing Presentation)
Electronic Bearing Lines 2 (EBL1/EBL2) (on Center/Floating)
EBLBearing Indication 000.0° to 359.9° Numerical Indication in 4 digits
Marking Function Electronic Mark (Maximum 20 points)
Heading Line Indication Electronic
True Motion Unit Built in (0.25, 0.5, 0.75, 1.5, 3, 6, 12, 24 and 48nm)
Anti Sea Clutter (SEA) Manual/AUTO
Anti Rain Clutter (SEA) Manual/AUTO
Display mode North-up I Head-up I Course-up
Trails Indication Off/0.25/0.5/1/3/6/ 10/ 15/30/60min
Video Process (PROC) Built in (Scan correlation I Remain)
Interference Rejection (IR) Built in ( Off I Low I Middle I High )
Auto-acquisition Zone (AZ) Sector (2)
User Mapi Built in , Mark and Line (20,000 points)
Self diagnostic function Built in
Own Ship's Track lndicationi Built in
Parallel Index Line (PI ) Built in
AIS Indication Built in Display 300
Activate 100
Association function :Built in
Interfacing Slave Display (TRG, VD, BP, BZ)
GPS IEC61162-1(NMEA0183)
LOG
GYRO
AIS IEC61162-2
Inter Switch (OPTION)
Radar Buoy
External Alarm output
11-3 ['-'RC I gapan. Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11 .3 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-9170)
--------------------------- -------
Receivable Signalii
Receive capability NAV1 /NAV2/LOG/ALM/AIS/HDG at TB4501
Port: COM DSub-9pin
Navigation equipment Longitude/Latitude GGA>RMC>RMA>GNS>GLL
IEC61162- 1/2
Waypoint RMB>BWC(BWR)
COG/SOG RMC > RMA > VTG
SPEED VBW
Day/Time information ZDA
Alarm acknowledge ACK
Rate of Turn ROT
Rudder RSA
Bearing signal GYRO-SYNC 360x, 180x, 90x, 36x(GYRO 1/F)
GYRO-STEP 360x, 180x, 90x, 36X(GYRO 1/F)
IEC61162-2 THS>HDT over 40Hz
38400bps
(HOG port at terminal board TB4501 )
IEC61162-1iii HDT>HDG>H DM>VHW
(HOG port at terminal board TB4501 )
Speed signal LOG-SYNC 360x, 180x, 90x, 30x(GYRO 1/F)
LOG-PULSE 800, 400, 200, 100(GYRO 1/F)
External event mark Contact input (EVENT port at terminal board TB4601)
Radar buoy Negative input (RBVD port at terminal board TB4401 )
Depth IEC61162-1 /JRC DPT>DBS>DBT>DBK,
JRC format
Water temperature IEC61162-1/JRC MTW, JRC format
Tendency IEC61162-1 /JRC CUR, JRC format
Wind IEC61162-1 MWV>MWD
AIS IEC61162-2 VDM,VDO (AIS port at terminal
board TB4601 )
Acknowledge Contact input (SYSACK, ARPAACK, PWRACK port
at terminal board TB4601 )
Sendable Signal
Slave video Radar video: TIY, VD, BP(2048p), BZ
(Terminal board TB4401)
Send capability NAV1/NAV2/ALM/ARPAIJARPA port at TB4501
Port MNT port at TB4601
COM at DSub-9pin
Navigation information Radar system data RSD
IEC61162-1 /2
Own ship data OSD
Tracking target data TTM ,TLL,TTD,TLB ,JRC-ARPA
AIS target data TTM ,TLL,TTD,TLB
Alarm ALR
Auto pilot APB
Bearing of destination BOD
Latitude/Longitude data GGA,GLL,RMC
Waypoint RMB,BWC
COG/SOG VTG
Cross track error XTE
11-4
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11.3 DISPLAY UNIT (NCD-9170)
----------------------------------
Heading data HDT,THS
External alarm Default setting normally closed contact
Maximum current 200mA (SYSALM, ALPAALM, PWRALM
port at terminal board TB4601 )
Acknowledge Contact output (ACKOUT port at terminal board TB4401)

Watchman reset Contact output (WMRST port at terminal board TB4401 )
Remote maintenance JRC format (MNT port at terminal board TB4601)
AIS alarm acknowledge ACK (AIS port at terminal board TB4601)
External monitor Multi scan monitor Analog RGB, HD15pin Connector 2 port
i. Only with Navigation Equipment is connected.
ii. The Speed measuring accuracy of speed sensor shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC.96(72).
The measuring accuracy of GPS shall confirm to IMO Resolution MSC.112(73).
iii. Can't be use for target tracking.
11-5 [JRC] 8opan Radio Co., J'J.d.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11 .4 Target Tracking Function
----------------------------------
Target Tracking
Function
Acquisition Acquisition mode Manual/AUTO (AUTO mode uses Auto-acquisition Zone)
Manual Cancellation Any one Target or All targets at once

Acquisition Range 0.1 nm - 24nm/32nm*i (Available all range scale)
Tracking Number of Target 100 Targets (AUTO Tracking)
Tracking range 0.1nm - 24nm/32nm*i (Available all range scale}
Presentation Display mode TM (True Motion) I RM (Relative Motion)
Number of Dots .. ·10 points
Display Interval Time·· ·0.5 I 1 I 2/ 4 min
Time to Display Vector Within 1min
Time to Stabilize Vector Within 3min
Alarm Auto-acquisition Zone 2 (sector)
Setting Range AZ1 (0 .5- 32nm),AZ2 (0.5- 32nm)
(CPA / TCPA) TCPA LIMIT 1 to 99 minute
Setting Condition Safe Target CPA > CPA LIMIT
O> TCPA
TCPA > TCPA LIMIT
Danger Target CPA ;:;:; CPA LIMIT
0 ;:;:; TCPA ;:;:; TCPA LIMIT
Alarm Indication Status Symbol -Alarm ·Audtble
Safe Target O(wht) OFF OFF
Danger Target 0 (red} CPA!TCPA ON
Lost Target Symbol on Dtsplay
Data Indication Target Data Simultaneous and Continuous Display for 4 Ta rgets
True Bearing, Range, True Course, True Speed,CPA,TCPA,BC R ,BCT
Own Ship's Data Course and Speed

Trial Course o· to 359.9"
Speed Input Manual/AUTO (LOG)
*i: PRF setting is "Normal" : 32 run.
PRF setting is "High Power" : 24 nrn. Refer to Appendix 3.8.3 .2
IJRC) f)opanRadio Co.,.li d. 11 - 6

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11 .SPECIFICATION > 11 .5 AIS FUNCTION
--------------------------------- -
AIS FUNCTION
AIS Function
Activation Activation mode Manual/AUTO (AUTO mode uses Auto-activation Zone)
Manual Cancellation Any one Target
Presentation Number of Activated Target 100 Targets
Number of Target 300 Targets (sleeping target and activated target)
Number of Dots ··· 10 points
Display Interval distance·· ·0.1 I 0.2 I 0.5/ 1 NM
Message Broadcast Message, Addressed Message
Display mode TM (True Motion) I RM (Relative Motion)
Alarm Auto-activation Zone 2 (Sector)
Setting Range AZ1(0.5 to 32nm), AZ2(0.5 to 32nm)
* 3.8.3.3 PRF setting "Normar
AZ1 (0.5 to 32nm), AZ2(0.5 to 32nm)
* 3.8.3.3 PRF setting "High Power"
(CPA / TCPA) TCPA LIMIT 1 to 99min
Alarm Condition Safe Target CPA > CPA LIMIT
O>TCPA
TCPA > TCPA LIMIT
O ~ TCPA ~ TCPA LIMIT
Alarm Indication Status symbol Alarm AUOIDie
Safe Target ~(wht) OFF OFF
Danger Target ~ (red) CPAITCPA ON
Lost Target Symbol on D1splay
Data Indication Target Data Simultaneous and Continuous Display for 2 Targ ets
simple display Ship's Name, Call Sig n, MMSI, Course, Speed,
CPA and TCPA
detail display Ship's Name, Ca ll Sign , MMSI, Course, Speed, CPA,
TCPA, Bearing , Range, Ship's Heading Bearing ,
Rate of Turn, Latitude, Longitude, Destination
and Navigation Status
Own Ship's Data The ship's name, call sign, MMSI, course, speed,
ship's heading bearing, rate of turn, latitude,
longitude, destination and navigation status of own ship
11 -7 I,JRC I aopan Radio Co., J'id.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > 11.SPECIFICATION > 11 .5 AIS FUNCTION
----------------------------------
Trial Course 0° to 360°
Speed Input Auto (LOG)
[.JRC I aopan RaditJ Co., .lid. 11 -8

Appendix A
11 1
1111111 • ·• 1111111

A.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................ A-1
A.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................... A-1
A.1.2 lnterswitch Setup ........................................................................... A-1
A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION ................................................................ A-3
A.2.3 Change of Connection Pattern (with 2 Display Units) ............ .... A-6
A .2.5 Operating Connection Pattern Files (File Operations) ............... A-8
A.3 REFERENCE ....................................................................................... A-1 0
A.3.1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern ................... A-1 0
A.3.3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit ................................... A-1 0
[.JRC) gapanRadio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-314 1 lnterswitch Unit > A.1 OVERVIEW
-------------------------- --- ---- -

OVERVIEW
A.1 .1 Overview
lnterswitch NQE-3141 is equipment that enables free changeover between radar
display units installed on the bridge and antenna units having different
characteristics.
If display unit is turned off or malfunctioned, the scanner unit can be controlled by
other display unit.
If interswitch unit had malfunctioned, the radar system is switched to standalone

mode.
Up to 8 units can be changed over.
When the connected scanner is changed, following setting values are

automatically loaded.
Tune Adjustment Section 7.1.3 "Tuning (Tune Adjustment)"
Bearing Adjustment Section 7 .1.4 "Bearing Adjustment"
Range Adjustment Section 7.1.5 "Range Adjustment"
Antenna Height Section 7.1.8 "Antenna Height Setting (Antenna

Height)"
Antenna installation location Section 7 .1. 9 "Setting of CCRP (CCRP Setting)"
Sector Blank Section 7.2.2 "Sector Blank Setting (Sector Blank)"
Performance monitor Section 7.3.4 "Adjustment of Performance Mon itor

adjustment (SSR MON)"
PRF Fine Tuning Section 3.8.3 "Set Scanner Unit (TXRX Setting)"
A.1.2 lnterswitch Setup

Connection modes can be changed simply by changing the interswitch connection
(upper left of the display).
A master display unit is always necessary for establishing a slave

connection .
Before a slave display unit can be placed in transmission state, the

master display unit must be placed in transmission state.
A-1 [.JRC] 8opan RadicJ Co., .li d.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit > A.1 OVERVIEW
----------------------------------
upper left of the di splay
Connected
Scanner
Unit
Con nection
~~---------- Mode
Connection Switch
The upper stand indicates the number of the connected scanner unit.
The lower stand indicates the connecti on mode.
Master :Mode in which the scanner unit can be controlled by the

display unit
Slave :Mode in which the scanner unit cannot be controlledi
i. When Slave is selected , transmission I standby and pulse length cannot be changed.
The available range is also limited.
(..JRC] gopan.RoditJ Co., .ltd. A-2

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATIO N
----------------------------------
INTERSWITCH OPERATION
Fo ll ow the flowchart below to change th e current interswitch connection pattern.
A.2.1 Operation Flow
Place the transmission standby state .
,~
Open the Inter Switch Menu .
,,
Change the connection pattern
lr
Close the Inter Switch Menu
A-3 [~RC ] gopan Radio Co., .lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Umt > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
----------------------------------
A.2.2 Inter Switch Menu
The Inter Switch Menu can be opened only when the transmission standby state.
Procedures
I) Press the [TX/STBY] key to stop transmitting.
The transmission standby state wil l be placed.
2) Move the cursor onto the lnterswitch connection change (upper

left of the display), and left-click.
The Inter Switch Menu will appea r.
Exit
I) Left-click the o. Exit button.
The Inter Switch Menu will close.
Inter Switch Menu (with 2 Display Units)
Current
connection
status
a. Connection
pattern
b. Set c.Exit
[.JRC] f)opan RodicJ Co., .lid. A-4

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
----------------------------------
a. Connection pattern
If this button is clicked, the connection pattern is selected.
T he display unit in operation is enclosed in a square 0 .

The background of the current connection pattern display is highlighted.
b. Set
If this button is clicked, the change of connection is determined.
c. Exit
If this button is clicked, the Inter Switch Menu is closed.
If only 2 display units are installed but the interswitch is set for 3
or more display units, the Inter Switch Menu for 3 or more
display units will appear.
Inter Switch Menu (with 3 or More Display Units)
a. Connected
scanner unit
b. Display unit
connected as
master
c. Display unit
connected as
slave
f. Set
d. Name
e. File g . Exit
Operations
a. Connected scanner unit

In mode for naming a display unit or antenna unit, clicking on a unit opens the name input
window.
A-5 (JRC ] 8apan Radio Co.,.ltd.

JMA-9172-SA lnstruct1on Manual > A.NQE-3141 lntersWitch Untt >A2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
----------------------------------
b. Display unit connected as master
c. Display unit connected as slave
If this button is clicked, select I cancel the display unit.
If this button is clicked in the naming a display unit or scanner unit mode , the name input
window is opened .
d. Name
If this button is clicked, set to the display or scanner unit rename mode.
e. File Operations
If this button is clicked, the File Operations menu is opened.
f. Set
If this button is clicked, the change of connection is determined.
g. Exit
If this button is clicked, the Inter Switch Menu is closed .
A.2.3 Change of Connection Pattern (with 2 Display Units)

If two display units are installed, a connection pattern needs to be selected.
Procedures
I ) Open the Inter Switch menu (with 2 Display Units).
2) Move the cursor onto the Connection pattern (see Section A.2.2 "Inter
Switch Menu" and Section a. "Connection pattern") to be changed , and left-click.
The connection pattern will be selected, and 3. Set (Section b. "Set") will blink.
['-'RC] gapanRadio Co.,.lid. A-6

------------------------------ ----
A.2.4 Change of Connection Pattern (with 3 or More Display
Units)
If three or more display units are installed, the layout of connection patterns needs
to be set.
Procedures
2) Move the cursor onto the display unit (Section b. "Display unit connected as
master" or Section c. "Display unit connected as slave") to be changed , and left-
click.
The selected display unit will be highlighted.
To deselect the display unit, left-click key again.
3) Move the cursor to the change-destination display unit, and left-

click.
he selected disolay unit in step 2 will be switched to the change-destination display unit, and
3. Set (Section f. "Set") will blink .
If the change destination is empty, control wi ll move and 3. Set will blink.

A master display unit is always necessary for establishing a

slave connection.
A- 7 [~RC ] (japan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NOE-3141 lnterswitch Unit > A.2 INTERSWITCH OPERATION
----------------------------------
A.2.5 Operating Connection Pattern Files (File Operations)
Frequently used connection patterns can be read easily by saving interswitch
connection pattern s.
[1] Loading connection patterns (Load)
Procedures
2) Left-click the 2. Rle Operation button.
The File Operations menu will appear.
C urrently saved connecti on patterns in memory will be listed.
Con fi rmation Window wi ll appear.
[2] Saving connection patterns (Save)
Procedures

3) Left-click the 2. save button.

The Save menu will appear.
C urrently saved connection patterns in memory wi ll be listed.
4) Left-click the button corresponding to the file to be saved.
The Lnput File Name w indow will appear.
Up to 8 characters can be entered.For the input method on the character input screen, see
Secti on 3.3.4. 7 "Entering a character".
The connection pattern wi ll be saved when the name is input.
[JRC ) f}apanRadioCo.,.lJd. A- 8
----------------------------------
[3] Erasing a connection pattern (Erase)
Procedures
The list of connection patterns stored in the memory will be displayed.
The selected connection pattern is erased and the file name is deleted from the list.
A.2.6 Names of Display Units and Scanner Units

The display units and antenna units can be named.
Procedures
2) Left-click the 1. Name button.
"Name" wi ll be highlighted, indicating that the rename mode is activated.
3) Move the cursor to the display unit (Section b. "Display unit connected as
or scanner unit
master" or Section c. "Display unit connected as slave") (Section a.
"Connected scanner unit") to be renamed , and left-click.
he tnput fND Name or the Input TXRX Name window will appear.
4) Input a new unit name.
Up to 8 characters can be input as a unit name. For the input method on the character input
menu, see Section 3.3.4.7 "Entering a character".
The selected display unit or antenna unit will be renamed when the new name is input.
A- 9 [~Rc ] 8apanRadio Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Umt > A.3 REFERENCE
----------------------------------
REFERENCE
A.3.1 Preheat Time after Change of Connection Pattern

After the current interswitch connection pattern has been changed, operation
needs to wait until the system is ready. This is because the preheat time varies
depending on the previous connection of the scanner unit and display unit.
The wait time is necessary for protecting the electronic tubes that emit radio
waves.
a) When not changed to a new connection pattern Preheating not

required
b) When changed to a new connection pattern and an Preheating not
scanner unit had been used before the change required
c) When changed to a new connection pattern and an Preheating
scanner unit had not been used before the change required
A.3.2 Notes on Changing Connection Pattern

An attempt to change to another connection pattern immediately after the
completion of connecti on pattern change may fail.
This is because internal processing still needs some preparation time upon
completion of connection pattern change. Let several seconds pass between
connection pattern change operations.
A.3.3 Notes on Connecting Slave Display Unit

Before a slave disp lay unit can be placed in transmiss ion state, the master display
unit must be placed in transmission state. If the master display unit is moved from
the transmission state to the transm ission standby state, the slave display unit is
forcibly placed in transmi ssion standby state. When they are in transmission
standby state, IMaster Standby I is shown in the alann indi cation (lower right of the
A slave display unit cannot control tune. Tune is controlled by the master display
unit. Slave is shown in the transmitter pulse length (upper left of the di splay).
Range change for a slave display unit is limited by the range and pulse length I
repetition frequency of the master display unit. As a rule, a greater range than the
range of the master display unit cannot be set for a slave display unit. However, if
the transmitter pulse length of a slave display unit is identical to the master
display unit's and the repetition frequency is within the master display unit's, a
greater range than the master display unit's can be selected for the slave display
unit. When the master display unit narrows the range or changes the transmitter
A - 10
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit > A.3 REFERENCE
----------------------------------
pulse length, the range of the slave display unit may be forcibly changed. In this
case, IMaster Range CHG I is shown in the alarm indication (lower right of the
A.3.4 Setting at Installation

Setting of the interswjtcb circuit (CCL-304*)
The settings of the DIP switches SWll to SW13 are shown below.
SN 11 SN 13 SN 12
CJ CJ c:::::=J
lnterswitch circuit PCB

CCL-304*
1) SW11 setting (extension mode and master/slave settings)

2 3 4
~~
ON
OFF
Unused
Description 1' 2
y
Set the switch to OFF in
Unused ON
normal state .
Unused OFF
Master/slave setting
Description 3
Set the switch to ON if the
slave ISW PCB is selected in Slave ON
extension mode.
Master OFF
Extension mode setting
Description 4
Set the switch to OFF if the
number of connected display Extension mode ON
units is four or less.
Normal mode OFF
A-11 [.JRC] aopan Radio Co.,J'id.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > A.NQE-3141 lnterswitch Unit > A.3 REFERENCE
----------------------------------
2) SW12 setting (radar connection settings)
2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ON
OFF
Radar connection setting s
No. 1 display unit connected ON

1

2

3

4

5

6
No.4 d isplay unit connected ON

7

8
3) SW13 (unused)
2 3 4
Unused (All OFF) 1,2,3,4
Before the DIP switches of the interswitch circuit can be set, the
interswitch brea ker must be turned off in order to ensure safety
operation.
[~RC ] gapan Radio Co., ..tid. A- 12

Appendix B
DRAWINGS
llllllll l• ·•11111 111
DRAWINGS
8 .1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit ........................................... 8-1
8 .1.1 NCD-9170 ........................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.2 NCD-91701 ................................... ................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 NWZ-178-R ...................................................................................... 8-4
B.1.4 NWZ-178-RT ............................... ..................................................... 8-5
B.1.5 NCE-5322-R ..................................................................................... B-6
8.1 .6 NCE-5322-RT ................................................................................... B-7
8 .2 Power System Diagram of Display Unit ................. ............................ B-8
8 .3 Signal Flow Diagram of Display Unit .................................................. 8-9
B.4 Primary Power System Diagram ....................................................... B-1 0
B.5 Block Diagram of Scanner Unit ........................................................ 8-11
B .5.1 NKE-1532 ...................................................................................... 8-12
B.6.1 NKE-1532 (AC110V) ...................................................................... B-14
B.6.2 NKE-1532 (AC220V) ...................................................................... 8-15
8.7 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ............................................... B-16
B. 7.1 JMA-9172-SA ................................................................................ 8 -17
[.JRC] ac;pan.Radio Co.,.fld.

8.7.2 NCD-9170T .................................................................................... B-18
8.8 GYRO 1/F ............................................................................................. B-19
8.9 Inter Switch Unit ................................................................................. B-21
8.9.1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram ......................................... B-21
8 .9.2 Interconnection Diagram ............................................................. B-23
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B DRAWINGS > 8 .1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
----------------------------------
Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
B-1 [.JRC ] (japan Radio Co., .lid.

MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-178-R
OPUA!ION OPEIIATION
LCD PANEL CIRCUn a CIRCOO A
H-7WSRD0002* CCC·I006 CC<·IOOS
PC620 PC"O
(· .__ ,._.,.,. ......_..._.. )
0
,...._
.......
•*"'.""' 0>
I
'E a(.)
:::>
.,>-
.,
Q.
0 ~ ; ....~0
0 RADAR PROCESS UNIT i i E
E
e
.,"'
NDC-1478
I I. r ~
0>
-~
0 I1
I
15 a C'l
i8 ~
.....,.....
c:
2(.,)
Q)
c:
I
co
l6 c:
.£ RADAR PROCESS
0
CIRCUIT
GYRO INTERFACE
CIRCUIT f:
ID .....Q)
II CDC-1362
CMJ-523
PC•20
.s
Vl OCC>I!l PC440 ......I
(!)
z ........
.. Ill
!
c u "'""'
TERMINAL BOARD
CQD-2176
PC430 ,._..,..,.
..,..
0>
u:
a:i 0
II
;;;
:l
.,c
"
~
0')
I
MOTHERBOARD
~
c
c CQC-1 230
0 (.) PC410
~., z
..s:
<l:
Ill NC D-9170 ( 13t!~D tlll"'tif.ljgj
,._
N ~
c;; ~ JMA-9172-SA
cl: Interconnec tion diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-9170 (self standing)
~
...., m
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-178-RT
OPERATION UNIT
·c: NCE-5322-RT
:l
>. .-----..
OPERATION OPE~ATION
.,'"
a. LCD PANEL
H-7WSRD0002*
CIRCUIT 8
CC~·I006
CI~UIT A
CCK-1005
Ci PC620 PC610
0
E
e
"''"
Ci
c
0
~
Q)
c
1-
c 0
0
~
~
"
~
0)
.!:
a'
(.)
ai
; ~
...._
"z
(/)
RADAR PROCESS UNIT
! i 0
(!) !l ! A~ PROCESS
CIRCUIT E:
NDC-1478 l
•j
~
~
~ CDC-1363
PCol60
S..tt-JlCIWUM(NCI-Sl.UU'/
*"""'
Ol
i -~
0
ai i ~ a ("')
l
~
ARPA PROCESS
c:: I
"
(ij
::1
CIRCUIT
COC·136"' :2u co
c PC<50
<1>
'"
:::E c::
c c::
0 RADAR PROCESS GYRO t<TERFACE
0
~ CIRCUIT CIRCUIT (2
~ CMJ-523
<1>
.._
.!: COC-1362 PC420 ~
<
(/) PC440
N
r:.
.... '
a:l
;;:; TERMINAL SOARD
..{
:::E
-,
....0 CQD-2176
PC430 .,...
5CNM'""""'
0>
u:::
.....
or-
enI MOTHERBOARD
c CQC-1230
() PC410
z
N
or-
. NCD-9170T(_...t~D tJip;Jti*l(g]
JMA-9172-SA
Interconnection diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-9 170T (desktop)
al
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B. DRAWINGS > 8 .1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
-------------------- --- ----- ------

8 .1.3 NWZ-178-R
CML- 1799
(H-7WSRD0002:i.<:)
{ ..... I'I"'MM r~M&~Gn of the ..,.c:dlG.lkwl document.-)
LCD
CCK-100
PC710
0
Ll"l <( CJ
'¢" 0'\ ~
M
...... N ~
M N
0 ...... co
ex: 0 M
u ex: 0
N
,...... u M
I
N
,...... 0
I I ~
I >
E .-4
I
N E 0
...... N M
>
0
c... 0
~
0'\
>
N
E
u
<(
N
D D D co
co r-- co I-
(") co ?-- en CX) w
?-- 0 N 0 ?-_j
I '<t' I (")
I I-
0 '<t' ov 0:::::>
0 J c-:> roo
0 0 0
CML-790-R (NWZ- 178- R)
Fig B-3: Interconnection Diagram of NWZ-178-R
I..JRC ] 8apan Radio Co.,.ltd. B- 4

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B. DRAWINGS > 9 .1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
----------------------------------
8 .1.4 NWZ-178-RT
CML- 1799
(H-7WSRD0002*l
LCD
CCK-100
PC710
0
\0 ~ c
v 0 ~
....
M M
....
M
~
Lfl
0 co
ex: 0 M
u
N
ex:
u M
0
,..... N 0
I ,..... ~
:r: I
:r: >
E
Ll'l E
....
0
I
..... Ll'l M
>
0
a. 0
~
0"1
>
E
Lfl
u
~
D D D
<'I c.o
c.o ...... ~I-
,.... c.o OOUJ
M ,.... 0)
0 <'I 0 ...-__J
I "<t" I M It-
0 "<t" O"<t" O::J
~ c~
0 cno
0 0 0
CML- 79D-RT (NWZ-178- RT)
Fig B-4: Interconnection Diagram of NWZ-178-RT
B-5 [.JRC] aapan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA lnstrucbon Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 6 .1 Interconnection D1agram of D1splay Unit
----------------------------------
8.1.5 NCE-5322-R
OPERATION UNIT
NCE-5322-R
OPERATION OPERATION
CIRCUIT B CIRCUIT A
CCK- 1006 CCK- 1005
PC620 PC610
~
LJ"'I M v
M M M
M M M
~ ~
~
0 0 0
rx rx rx
u u u
N N N
r;-
" I
::r: "::r:
I
::r:
N LJ"'I M v
ID
ID ID ID
~ ~ ~ ~
6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P lSP

)6411 J6408 J6406 J6405 J6404 J6403 J6402
OPERATION CIRCUIT D
CCK-1 007
PC640
6P 6P 2P
J6410 J6409 J6407
W67 2m H-7ZCRD1337
CMD-1 031-R (NCE-5322-R)
Fig B-5: Interconnection Diagram of NCE-5322-R
[.JRC] 8opan.Radio Co.,.f'Jd. B- 6

--- - - - - - - - -- -- -- -- - -
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 8 .1 Interconnection Diagram of Display Unit
----------------------------------
8.1.6 NCE-5322-RT
OPERATION UNIT
NCE-5322-RT
OPERATION OPERATION
C IRC UIT B C IRC UIT A
CCK- 1006 CCK- 1005
PC620 PC610
<(
IJ') M "3'"
M M M
M
.....
M ..... M
.....
0 Cl Cl
0::: 0::: 0:::
u u u
N N N
.......I .......
N
" I
:r: :r:
M
±
"3'"
IJ')
ID ID ID ID
3 3 3 3
6P 6P 2P 7P 14P 14P lSP

J6411 J6408 J6406 J6405 J6404 J6403 J6402
OPERATION C IRCUIT D
CCK-1 007
PC640
6P 6P 2P 30P
J6410 J6409 J6407 J6401
W68 2m H-7ZCRD1338
CMD- 1031- RT (NCE-5322- RT)
Fig B-6: Interconnection Diagram of NCE-5322-RT
B- 7 [.JRC I aopan Radio Co., .lid.

I
I ·-c
+oJ
---..
I MONITOR UNIT
I :::> NWZ 178-R/RT

OPERATION UNIT
I >- NCE-5322-R/RT
I ro LCD PANEL
CML-1799
~~
I a.
(/)
I
I 0
I '+-
0 ~,.....
I ......
0)
·'g I
:::>
1;' I
E
ro
a
(..)
Ci
L..
l~~=-~
"' ·-~"~·~·~~~
~,·::·~::··====~::::::::::::::::::::::::~~
:::::::,.,__ --- <:
6 I 0')
"-
0
oE I ro RADAR PROCESS UNIT .... >PtPOCm
E
. .•
NDC-1 478 10.1
....... ~
~ I - ., ..... Ol
<II
oE I 0 .... ,,.lllkl.a
....,_,.
.~ co
Q I
.!! I
!:!.
1/) I
E
Q) ~
E co
!
a. I
+oJ
(/) ~....
<'!
ID
I >--
(/)
RADAR PROCESS
CIRCUIT
• I I ,. =-r" INTI
~
1\ I &
~z I L.. ,...._
Q) I
!
o
I
I ~
TERMINAL SOARD
COD·2176
co
Ol
u::
~
9
J ~ r~===trMv PC430
~ I
0
a.. ~
~
~c I MOTHERBOARD
~ I CQC-1230
c ~
~ I ll PC410
~
!
I 3.3V,5V,12V,-12V
~c I
w «48V.OC+24V
;,;: I r
1/)
NCD-9170{T ··~t!t~
~ I ---- Power Supply system diagram of DISPLAY UNIT type NCD-9170/T
~
~ I
I 00
lllllil
I
El ~
::c
I
I r MONITOR UNIT
NWZ-1 78-R/RT
l ~
d
~
;_ I ·-
+-'
c:
i
~
I
I ::::> LCD PANEL
CML-1799
i
~
~
~
0>
5
~
~c
I
I
I
I
ro
a.
en
·-
l
~ I 0
~
~
r-...
....
00
:ri I 0)
A I 0 6
~
({)
~ I E ~~
ii .._
! I ro
'-
RADAR PROCESS UNIT
NDC-1478
!!n
·~PRoem
CII!CUII 0
E
~
COC-1363
I 0> if PC•60 ~
A I ro
·- ,..---./ :! AltPA PROCESS
0>
.!!;!
0>
I
~ a
Cll<fCUil
I 0 COC·IW 3:: en
"'
~ I PC•.IO
0
it
~::> I ~ RADAR PROCESS GYRO INIEJifACE (i)
~ I 0 CIRCUIT C~CUt1 t::
.5
~ I u.. CMJ.523
PC.t:.., ~
c:o
~ I
~~ I ro · ~!:nro
cil
.., I c: U J ~(IUT) 0>
u::
0>
I ·-
(/)
I CQC-1230
I PC410
I
I
I
Signal flow diagram of DISPLAY UNIT typ e NCD-9170/T
I
I
I
OVER VOLTAGE
PROTECTION
I
AC1()(). 115V
IC220-24CW t
50160Hz,1 ¢
CIRCUIT I J I INTERSIMTCH=1A
E BREAKER
UNE FILTER
l
P+12V
J
OPERATION LNIT=O 5A(typ)
GYRO 1/F ORCI.AT=O 1A(typ)
ro
'-
)
0>
ro I
·-
0
VOLTAGE SELCT
SWITCH
~1 +48V±3V J ' SCANNER
X BAto0_2.5A S BAND_3 Oo\
E
E
E l ~
Ol
.!!!
Q
!:'
Q) AC1 ()().115V
g>
c5
E
~
(J)
>.
AC220-::!40V
50J60H z,1 ¢
MONITOR \NT
POWER ~ 1-
H +50\1 I
I '
RADAR PROCESS ORCUTT = 1 2A(typ)
ARPA PROCESS CIRCI.AT = 0 15A(typ)
AIS PR:ICES S ORCI.AT = 0 15(typ)
E
~
~....
Q
;;;
,.,
(/)
C/) j TERMNAL BOARD= 1 OA(typ)
0
SCAN NER
t
Q) ......
~
I '-
Q)
MOTO R
PO V\£R 0
~1
Q. I RADAR PROCESS ORCUTT • 2 2A(typ) a.. co
~
AC1 00123111/ ~33V
J ' ARPA PROCESS CIRCI.AT = 0 1A(Iyp)

cco
~]]J
~
e
c
0
1</l
I-
j
AIS PROCESS ORCUT • 0 1(typ)
TERMNAL BOARD= 0 2A(typ)
·~
POWER CONTROL
Q.
'Of
aJ
a.. CIRCUIT
a..
A
~
f I 0'>
(/)
C)
z ro H +12V
J
RAG".R PROCESS CIRCUIT • Q 1A(typ)
TERMINAL BOARD = 0 4A(typ)
I
co
C>
!
0
a:i ·-E J u::
9~ ~
'-
A
iii a.. y - 12V I RAG".R PROCESS CIRCUIT = 0 1A( typ) ~
~
:l
c J TERMINAL BOARD= 0 1A(typ)
'"
:E
c ~t ~
~ II IIIII a:
l
2 ~
0
;;; Q.
~
£ BATTRY
<( DC24V 3<
11 OPERATION UNIT= Q 1A
I
N
.....
Cii
<
:E
-, 00
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B.S Block Diagram of Scanner Umt
----------------------------------
Block Diagram of Scanner Unit
B - 11 [ .JRC l aopan. Radio Co.,.ltd.

Slot Antenna I
DC
Mot or
NKE-1532 (Scanner)
-- ------ - - ----------
r~I
X
Rot•,-,
J oint
&:
1-
X
I
--- Encoder
TXJF_Analot_ + r-: C\J

(\')
10
>
0
IF Input/ Output TRX P M OUT * 1 PM Antenna ,_
Q)
N CHA- 396 CMN-750 (External) t.U
·c: (.)
Cl RX_IF_Analog ~
:::>
Iii Iii
N
m > <:
.._
C; > a: N
c
c
..>C
u
..2
:~
Cl,
·&,
0
+5V. +3.3V. e
.....
CX)
N m + 0
~ Motor Driver (.) lJ..I -2.5V ~
+ E
(/)
CBD- 2010 (AC220V)/
.....,
lJ..
-, 0 e? N
0 ,--- CBD- 20 11 (AC100V)
X
cr X
1-
Control, 01 ..-
E
~
+3.3V ,.._ - .!!:!
a I
0
m
~
.><
~
c:..
6
t:
..
~
>
cr
cr
w
>
Radar Processor
CDC- 1349
AC100V/ 220V
Contr ol,
±12V. +SV > =0...
"'
Interface
CMH- 2246
+15V. ±12V.
0...
..,
c
-- ~
0
..2
co
0
co
"'m ..
0 + c0+'
+5V, - 2.5V 0
....-
..."
(.)
cr : 15V (.) 14 cores en
I
"
(/)
(!)
:0 Brake Control Circuit VERR
1
Relay and Filter
lJ..
lJ.. Power Supply
-
composite Ol
z -e CCB- 1655 ~ CSC-1656
0
'z CBD- 1798 -t-28V ( \cable u:
9~
0
~ ~ 0
>
tp u~ ~l
N
BP. B Z. TRIG. MTR. V~
Cl ACIOOV/ 220Vt Display Unit
ai N
~ ~
"
iii
::>
c
10
M
&t)
-.r-
I
Brake Circuit
-:a:
Broke Corcu1t A
C FA.-1261
Broke Orc..t 8
C FA.- 1262
Safet y Switch
CSD- 1656 AC100V/220V
Terminal Board
TB102
~
u DC48V,
AC100V/ AC220V
NCD-9170
~
~
c
w CFA- 1255
~
0 ~
~..
.E
<
Ill
N
....
c;;
z
-.r- .
Note *1 PM (P erformance Monit or)
!
J:
~
....,
&t)
al 00
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 8.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Un1t
----------------------------------
Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
B - 13 [JRC) aopanRodit:J Co.,.!Jd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B 6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
----------------------------------
8.6.1 NKE-1532 (AC110V)
s!
( l
!I
j j• i' iii i i I I j i ;
Ia _____ """- ;- ;~ !I "'::;!~ . • •' •
..:' I
: ~~ ' •
.
!- :1 :1
~
::
..:.
:•.::·-
...:
:: .
:::·;:
f
I ! il
I
II
·-
·-
-
"'""'
•
~
~ :~
I
I :: . ... !It
~u
·a I ~~~i !D~ :•
'I
t
f :::
I
I
-c::;::>
~! ... ... I
- .. -- h .• !-
J~~
!!pi' •• .
jl ;~ ~ I &
+t+t-1+.-1- I - I •~:
•w
fl ' \
II ~
!I .... .-~ I /f /f
I'
!I I p
I
1 n______ • I
_j
II
·~ dil, I
~
• <t } l' i
! If ill[li
. '!i ...............
•I'f · I l • ':' ; ~ • ~ ; ! a ' • ~ I I ~
-·
J'
~
iI I. !r 1,~ ,~~ . ,i
I
I
.._ __
I
:•
··i_Il ~ il-
'..
'I
i
I !U
'Jo , . , ..
·~ i L________________ .
I ~r J
.
i ~ . .,
;
______________ .J
I
fl !~:=i~
'
!I~ II ~
,, 7.1Iffi
I
IOi~'I'
il r •I
Ill -~ ·'.!li~
II
h~
2g
:. ~··· -e:~1 ~
!iie ll : il
i
i •
~
~\
o•
z
Fig 8~11 : Interconnection Diagram of NKE-1532 (AC11 0V)

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 8.6 Interconnection Diagram of Scanner Unit
----------------------------------
8.6.2 NKE-1532 (AC220V)
B!
Fig B-12 : Interconnection Diagram of NKE-1532 (AC220V)
B - 15 [ JRC I (Japan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-5A lnstruc!Jon Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B 7 Term1nal Board Connect1on Diagram
----------------------------------
Terminal Board Connection Diagram
1.JRC 1 aopon RadU:J eo.. J'Jd. B -1 6

~
DISPLAY UNIT NCD-9 170 9
E IHXIIIS~CMU!VI'( SlJIIflll') SCANNER UNIT d
~ RADAR rt-IMUU.Q H-2695110056 G
"' ~ (.JI(Uft.'f') ~ c;,o.21"1"W4DDII.IC)IoM) - -- -·-
~r
--
.!!!
'''dr
~
~~
......-.
0
... 1 _,.,../
I
~ __ rna.
1 ..
,..,.,_....,
I
,.....-I
................
I
_..
'"rl,. ~
. ..... -
c l .....I
. ..........,.,..
c
!
VDR JC·l:'ld£'N' . .
8 Trlr ....
• -1 ll
II
111101
:: ~~
'E
~
.
--- ........
1 ....I
..,_..
:,~
..~~ ..... .
.JI • I
I I· - !~
~
. ."""
.I Ul ~
C'l
I
en
-
-.. -J I'-
u ........
~
u
iii U "*'UNI ~
ll _,. -I
.....
Hlll- I v
c
§ - .... •• PWIItllfl
.. ... 0>
[G)= ...
00
I
- . ....,., ~
I II~
I
~ 17 WJQJ'Ilt
,__ II
~
r- -----.-.---: """"""' "'rl,. ......
-
~
en : C*ti.Wl') : I ........
0
"z ~ :\ ~
II I
-- """"""' E
II ...,...
en --" I•
I
' ~~ ~
C)
-
OO.U.I.talln
I
...n-..
..
.. H!IIO>Ifll
~ _A rr ... Ol
d
~ ~ .~
u
0 C::DIS
"':!Mel-
CJIIIC~'f')
-
..•
'-·-··-···-!
coon~~
u..---..,
·o HEAmt Of>'TJON a
c:
ai
"
iii
::>
c
c I<NING _,.,.._,
iPLAY
~
r~ ~
liii'IWITl•
--
l...ol(.t...Wt_L
I
.........
r.MliiMRAOAo\)
I~
u;u~• ·'
AC~ . I• .iiiOW
C,.=.
..-w-,~u
•~,..__....,. SHIP' S MAINS

-
.Q
u
<!>
c:
1'-
...-
I
"'
::E GPS ""'rna. ...'Jr
J IIWill·
•J NMI'ID•
_,Ita ........ I~
ACZ1IN ,. . ....,."-"
c:
0 co
~.I~
l Et
~
5
't l
"'
.E
CHO
UNOEJt
OG
........
--=: l.'rl,.
,_,...,
'"rl,.
'
:~:
..·-·
t
Hi'=·
NAII'tl.l:•
1-
.
rll101=
,_.·
""""'
...........
_,.,..
......... t I D•Al
:il ~::!r
~I ::~If
()
-e
(0
0
co
<(
:!1:::· ffi~ <n
:z,__ IS~•
.... ~~
,. I o.zu:
..
0 I
.s
....-·
It WAn:•
E
~
~ I <( "
"lo!IPAb.· """'
II"""
:::E
...., . en I
~!=::
"1-·
~~~
I
""''
21 """"'"•
'"'"'-'-
- ·*IJ
~
~ ~::~
D'IJE
~
(.')
""'"""" -
N AIS
D •ll
...-
....... ~ li"'
OG ,...,......,.,. 1~
I
co
"r' .... ;~
en ..... 1--·
~~
J~ .Q>
<(
I
...,
:E
·YRO _,.,.._,.' ...
'"rl,.
\ ~
l ...
·~ u..
~~~
I
~ q:J~
~
OMU-....orwao4 SHIP'S MAINS
m 1.
-- I:IJ:Ii5E:J : ·~
~r (S-BAND 300W RADAR)
""CI(l0.1 1$YIAC12).~ ~~
\.~ MOrfl'C>Rt4C
SYSTEM
"r' ll&l llY~· JMA-9172-SA v - 11'- MroMifJt@
~ ·~~ I OF RADAR TYPE JMA-9172-SA
m
JMA-9172-SA lnstructJon Manual > B.DRAWINGS > B 7 Terminal Board Connec:tJon D1agram
----------------------------------
8.7.2 NCD-9170T
MONITOR UNIT
NWZ- 178
OPERATION UNIT
Qj
NCE-5322
oooooo
000000 0 0
OOODDD DO
O O DDD O
lERMI'-IAl BOARD
COD-2176
()pUlo SUB OPERATION UNIT
Qj
NCE-5322
POWER SUPPLY
Haln oooooo
CBD-1861 OOOODO 0 0
OOOODO DO
O ODDD O
RADAR PROCESS UNIT

NDC-1 478
JMA-91 72-SA RADAR

NCD-9170T ~J: ~v-1'-lli~ ll .::L=-·:.11-M!Ul!Zl
INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAM OF DISPLAY UNIT TYPE N C D-9170T(desldop)
Fig B-14: Inter-Unit Connection Diagram of NCD-9170T
B - 18
JMA-9172-SA lnstructJon Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 8 .8 GYRO 1/F
----------------------------------
GYRO 1/F
' ~~~~
7MII-;jtlf0
KEEP OffA Lilt

a::r'~<a
I
~
~ L.:J'1.!1'"
. ..o c::::J "'"
Lt:;,... ,
PROC~\~
GYRO LOW VOltAGE
ALERl i.ED
-:;.,.(a&• IEW&l£0
fRRORINOtCA TOR LEO GYROSIGNAL

:<~-llll'lED NOICATORLfO
;;.,.1'otlti11Wa"'LID
e. SA
LOG PUlSE
NOICAIORLEO
O'fJ<JL.~ft4llf0
1----::-----. i
D LOW VOltAGE G YRO
srnJNG
!,l.,..(c&• II.. I:R~
---~~r-Ig~
~
1-__:=.;.._..J~
Fig B-15: Parts Location of CMJ-523
TableB-1 : Setting Table of CMJ-523 S1/S2

Sf SETTING I , 2 3 • 5 6 7 8 S2 SETTING 1 2 3 • 5 6 7 8
I ON
~
STEP
BSHLOGALM
I OFF
.,. "z SYNC
36X ON ON
F
~
~~
GYRO SIMULATOR
...... ~
90X OFF ON OfF
180X ON OFF ON
~~ LOG SIMULATOR
:;\ >- 360X OFF OFF Off
" l!!lli:IJ,.. I j£/ REV ON N C (No ~) OFF
OIRECTION I ii/ NOR OFF I 5SEC ON
GYRO ALM TIME
~:,")a / SYNC ON I 02SEC OfF
,(Ji;A/ PULSE Of F GYROSRC HOT ( NMEA( HDT/THS)) ON
!f ( . - n g - SourCAI) GYRO OFF
:~
*1111/ NC OFF
~.,
100P/ 30X ON ON 4800BPS OFF OFF
0§ ,(/L-A
PULSEINM
200P/ 90X
.400P/ 180X
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
NMEA BAU DAATE
9600 BPS
19200 BPS
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
IIOOP/ 360X OFF OFF J8.<00 BPS ON ON
B - 19 [JRC] aopan.Radi.o Co.,.J'Jd.

t..
s:::
1"
~
....
...,
Item CMJ-523 0Yf0 se'ect SW'ches IS I S6. S7 ocated on the CM.l-523) (n
Oyro comp,jSSCS Repeater motors Sl •etbn& ss, $ 7 )>
Manufactuer
!:S- 2/11,
(f or re!e mce on!y)
Sy~chro motor
E;.c tta t on voltatc I 2 3
• 5 I 6 I 7 I 8 ••rt•nz 5'
~
OLT- IOO- t03/ 105/ 10GK/107/ 11 04, INMS 115 VAC
OFF ON OH I\. "V
.J SYNC
!l
a·
HJZ-50 1 (R501) tTS63N7Et 3) 60Hl :::1
t3GX) Saeed lojJ se ecbon s:::
ES- IIA. OM- 111II N 2 1111 0 120.
MS-2000/ 3000
S ynchro motor
TSAH60EII II OVAC
"'c:
:::1
'!!.
PR- 222R/ 226/ 237/ 237-l (90X) 6CH~ OFF OFF OH SYNC v
, , . ..., 2022/2023 ' 22*',
~
f- -\'-;.1 ·;~? T0- 200 0
~
T OKI~EC OL T- 20 1/ 202/203. Step motor
(J.6PAH) ~IK- 14 ' IH, OA- 20010
A--:•) -
MKE- 1 ' IH, 0 n.Jwmgl:1 035908 10 z
Gl
MOD-1/ 2/T, 600 e~c<tat•on
Sperry PR-500 1 2502/ 2503 1 2507 '2507L II BOX)
70VOC ON ON OFF STEP en
tU S.A) / 3507 '4507/ 5507, rul
0"
v
tD
SfH J 0/ 140,
TQ-100 15000 ro
OJ
0.
ES- 16 Step rrctor Gl
35 VOC N
I
-<
;o
SR- 120/ 220 GA- 200 10
CMZ- 1000 Or.Jwo nrf' I 03590820 0
CD ES 140 / 160 150 e~c tat on OH ON OFF STEP G> 'ii
I PR- 26*"/ 6•6• 16•7t, (1 80.'() 24 VOC ...,
'<
N SfH 40 / 160 _o
0 TQ-6000/ 8000 OF\ r
C- 1AI2/3f E, S ynehro motor 0
HOKUSIIIN PLATH- 55/ C,
PLATH HKRK-cJ
YM- 14
TS- 19
60VAC
60Hz
OFF OFF OFF ~
m v - 1f- J;l& t-'
S YNC
!0
en
(l)
f360X) CO URSEO)}\i ~f! :::::
llliHl811 C1JR. C- 1JUHIOR. Synchro motor .¥i!tii1' ~Jirs ro~: ::;·
YOKOOAWA CMZ-200AI300. fY 76-H2 CHI:: ii.lt T i> !0
(J.6PAH) D-1, f360X)
en
PS. IPS- 2- H212B/ 2B- H2C '5, IOO VAC OFF OFF OFF S YNC
IQ.IOOS. KR~53 50/ 60tlz
PLATH HAVIOAT- 1,
PTI Ht2/2 1 '21 - tt2
1 3~1 . S teo rrctcr
7 - 7( - 'J5 r'J'J MK 1- 7110120. MKL- 1, BZ- 2 191
50VOC OH ON OFF S TEP
ARMA BROWN H0 0-4, HB- 23- 88, !I BOX)
!France) SERlE, SOB- 1000
11o-;m 1, IJ9- JI , tSyrehro motor
7 '../'./ •')':J AHSCHUTZ- t -6 ' 12/ 14 ·z. NB23- 9 1 50VAC
OFF OFF OFF SYNC
ANSCHUT Z OM- BH. KS05 I. (360.'() sou~
IOcrmlW')') HB23- 126, Z06SoU
77 -1-.11 HAVIOAT 763--331 [, Syne.,ro ~ otor
C PLATH PLATH HAVIOAT- U ' II !YMHA 50 VAC OFF OFF OFF SYNC
IOermany) 1360X) GOH!
• Humene number
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > B.DRAWINGS > 8 .9 Inter Switch Unit
---------------------------------- ...
8.9 Inter Switch Unit
8.9.1 Terminal Board Connection Diagram

DISPLAY! DISPLAY2
NC0-9170 NCD-'1990
r---------15-~-~-;~~
I l (\ I I
.:~~
VDIN I
VD!N I I
J II II 1:_
VDlN IE
TRJG IN I
2
3
...... I: BLUE I: ......
2
3
VDIN IE
TR!GIN I
TRJG!N IE 4 ~r I I II II --L 4 TRIGJN IE
I I YEUOW
-···· ··- OPIN I
BPIN I
BPIN IE
5
6 _::r I I
I
I I
I
--L 5
6 BPIN IE
BZlNI 7 ······· I GREEN I ...... 7 BZIN I
BZlN IE 8 ~-- : I I
I
I -·L 8 BZIN IE
.,.,..... I I I
MTR!N I+ 9 :~
WHITE-BLUE I --- ...-: 9 MTRIN I+
: ! I I WHITE-WHITE I : t
!:
MTRIN I· 10 I 10 MTRIN 1-
_j·· I I I I --t_
MTRIN IE
PWRJN I+
II
12
I I ORANGE
BLACK
I
: II
12
MTRIN IE
PWRIN I+
I I I I
PWRIN IE J3 13 PWRIN IE
I I I
I PINK
PWROUT I 14 l
14 PWROUT I
I BROWN I
PWROUT IE 15 15 PWROUT IE
I
VOOUT I 16
"'
_y: I
2 I
I '"
,I{_
16 VOOUT I
VOOUT IE 17 I 17 VOOUTIE
I I RED I I
······· 18 TRJGOUT I
TRIGOUT I 18
-=r· I I
T:....
TRIGOUT IE
BPOUT I
19
20
I
---··- I
~-- I
I
I PURPLE :I
I
I ......
--L
19
20
TRIGOUT IE
BPOUT I
BPOUT IE 21 I I I I 21 SPOUT IE
BZOUT I 22 ······ I
I CLEAR I ...... 22 BZOUT 1
I I
BZOUT IE 23
~-- I
I I
I
I I T:.... 23 BZOUT IE
MTROUT I+ 24
-.-.---- I WHITE·YELLOW I ---...~
24 MTROUT 1+
:i I I WHITE-WHITE I I ii
MTROUT I · 25 25 MTROUT 1-
MTORUT IE 26
~-- 'II 'II '·t_ 26 MTORUT IE
I I
H-269511 1153
(JRC SUPPLY)
Fig B-16: Terminal Board Connetion Diagram of NQE-3141-2A
B-21 [.JRC] 3opan Radio Co., .lid.

~
DISI'\AYI DISI'\AY2 DISPlAY3 DIS'lAY4
Na>-8170 NCIH1190 NID-4990 NCD-4990
00 I
T84201
-A. I VOIH I
I
..A
y
T84201
I VOIN I
I
--A
T84201
I VOIN I
/
I
-A-
T84201
I VOIN I
~
...,
1\)
/ "(_ 2 VOIN IE 'L 'L z

~
i
2 VOIN IE 2 VOIN IE VOIN IE
BW ..... BW ..... BW .....
/
BW •••••
··c:_
3
4
TRIGIN I
TRIGIN IE iv ""[_
3
4
TRIGIN I
TRIGIN IE / ""[_
3
4
TRIGIN I
TRIGIN IE v ·c. 3
•
TRIGIN I
TRIGIN IE
:;-
YEl __
"'
~
va ••••• BPIN 1 YEL ••••• YEL •••••
/ ..[_
5
I BPINIE v 'L..
GRIN .....
5
I
BPIN I
BPIN IE v GRIN .....
L
5
I
BPIN I
BPIN IE v L
5
I
BPINI
8P1N IE
g
:c.
GRIN ••••• 7 BZIN I GRN •••••
r. v v
7 BZIN I 7 BZIN I 7 BZIN I
11
/ ""[_
WHHIW ..~
8 BZIN IE · c:_ 8 BZIN IE 8 BZIN I E v ""C. 8 BZIN IE .,s::
ca· WHT-WtfT W.
e
IO
MTRIN I•
MTRIN 1- /
WHT- au ••.:j;.
WtfT-WtfT ..iJ_
I
10
MTRIN 1+
MTRIN 1- v.v
WHHIW••.:j;.
WtfT-WKT ~
I MTRJN 1+
MTRIN 1-
/
WHT-au =-
WtfT- WtfT : :
I MTRIN I • :I
~
(l) v 10
I'
10 MTRINI
~ v
I
,/' ..[_ II MTRIN IE OOG ..[_ II MTRIN IE ORO ..L II MTRIN IE ORO .. L II MTRIN IE
-" ORO 12 PWRIN I•
~
-...J I'_ fl.K 13 PWRIN IE v flJ(
12 PWRIN 1•
v BLK
12 PWRIN I'
,/ BLK
IZ PWRIN 1 t CD
0
~
13 PWRIN IE 13 PWRIN IE
vv PNK
~
PNI< I' PNK
13 PWRIN IE
~
3s·
/
V_
/
PNI<
BRN
2 ..A
,_
15
II
PWROUT I
PWROJT IE
VOCI.JT I v
BRN
2
..A
14
15
II
PWRCI.JT I
PWROJT IE
VDCI.JT I I'
8RN
2
-A
14
15
PWRCI.JT I
PWRCI.JT IE
/
v
!JlN
2
-A
14
15
PWROJT I
PWRQUT IE i
z
/ 't_ l7 VOOUT IE v RED •••••
'L 17 VOOUT IE
v
REO . . ...
'L
II
17
VOCI.JT I
VOOUT IE
I'
RED .....
'L
II
17
VOOUT I
VOOUT IE
G)
(/)
~ REO ..... II TRIGCI.JT I II TRIGCI.JT I 18 TRIOOUT I v

Ol / -c_ II TRIOOUT IE I'
PUR .....
""C. II TRIOOUT IE v ·c:_ It TRIOOUT IE v PUR .. L
18
II
TRIOOUT I
TRIOOUT IE CD
0 PUR ..... 20 !POUT I !POUT I PUR ·· - !POUT I
Q) / ..L 21 !POUT IE v T
20
v "L
20
v "L
20 !POUT I U)
:;-
a.
() /
a.R .....
""C.
22
2l
BZGUT I
IIZOUT IE v
a.R .....
""[_
21
22
23
!POUT IE
BZOUT I
BZOUT IE v WHT-~
a.R .....
ZI
22
BPCI.JT IE
BZOUT I
v a.R .....
. ..
21
22
BPCI.JT IE
BZOUT I ~
23 BZCI.JT IE 23
WKT-YEL-_; BZCI.JT IE
CD
I
1\.)
0
:::3
:::3
(b
C)
v
WKT -Y ~
~- WHT· WHT 1
..L
:
24
l5
21
MTROJT I•
MTROUT 1
MTORUT IE
V.
v
WtfT~
WKT- WKT 1 1
-c.
24
25
21
MTRCI.JT I•
MTROUT 1-
MTORUT IE
V
v
U
WHT-wtfT
T:.
24
25
Zl
MTROUT I•
MTROUT I
MTORUT IE
v.
V
WtfT- WtfT.• :!
L
2•
25
21
MTROUT I•
MTRCI.JT I·
MTORUT IE
I
c
1\.) ~ ~
ll ~ !~ .~
0
:::3
CJ 1:r
-
iii" Nl<l 3141--<A
<Q ex -304R
Ql 1''1 - -
!~ --- = li ~ -- ---- !~ -
3 ~ CH-I Cl+-2 CH-3 Cf!-4
0 T8911 TB912
~3 TB914 m11s T8911 m115
....., r--4H'l
r ... ~ 1 .,~
~ !.9- • ,........!..G.I .!.Q..f'"i'"" ~ r-;"1 r-j:,..
--.- !..Q-1 •~·
< ..~ :a:. . 0H"
.,"t....rl
~M-
. ~.
~tl
. L rT
~~
• 'C.. ,.,
~ r-;- ··~r+
0
rn
f
L r+ "I"··· r-;- ..
:t:
t--;- L ' r.- "Li7
··~+
'f
br+r-7- "Lr;
··~r+
--
~t- ~ t-
w
I
~ I~r.-
l
MH..~r ,
·~ r-;-.
Q. • ••• ~ ~ L r;
...~~--;- . L
""'··· ~-'""
' r3t:f
"'!!;;;- H -~:~R= ~ M IL ••
r-;- _,_:p.
Ar+ ::-ro
,.-~r+ ~::]r+
Lr;- .'- '
~
~p: ;: ~J-t
,L io
e ..~;+
~"'
•• ""'ftr-;-
'"
~r-
w
=:;,r ~ r- ~"-"' ~r- hi
V'-"'
"''~
LF.~
. ~ ~·
I
~
)::,.
~r.i
I l.:..C:: ~
~ ~r.
..1:.1=- L..__ r-
r-7.--h
-:;.-H
-c.r-
- "'
.,.,1:.r;;
-::;
r- Lc__
~ ~
r;;
r c-:-r;; ~
~2
:---r-.
~
--=-- -
.....!!!..,__
It
•S
'L ~
'
JMA-9172-sA Instruction Manual > B. DRAWINGS > B 9 Inter Switch Un1t
----------------------------------
8.9.2 Interconnection Diagram
T B918 I
±[ I
0
:=1 :::T:s:g=:n====l
I TB916 I
~
±[
.-_ -T=B=9=15====~
0
0
C'? L..l
~
()
()
I ~r-+--+--+-+--+-hJ
!;!
:i:
f -NM ~ U") <O
-,_
0)
0
fik-r-IJ
()
,_
N
I
I
Fig B-18: Interconnection Diagram of NQE-3141-2A
8 -23 [.JRC] 8opanRadio Co.,.lid.

I c...
s::
00 CBA-357 CN2 P902 H-7ZCRD0920
r
P903 J903
I
I
1>
~
._,
"'
(n
i
C8901
P901 CNI - 15V
1 .!,., - 1!5'1 I >
H-7ZCROOI)9 2 '5'
1 ?....
lJNE LOAD
AOI).)
ONO
3 !.
ONO
I "'2
3
r-
j_ ~
Cc=:- 5
AC(}I)
ONO
•t5V
4 4
ONO
• 1!5'1
g.,
0
:>
f.
FG
5 ~
C901 C902 C903 D ' ONO ONO
.,s::
)-1~ 5V
6 6
sv :>
c
LF90 I ' ~
v
~ :::!1
. Ill
~
(Q
i::J
E
~
(P
~
I
...... H- 7ZCR00921
r
1'904 J904
<D !,., AC zG'l
s-
(i)
I I FG
2
!.
0 (L)
AC CCL-304
(/)
v
1 2 Ill
~ T890 I
v 40 (N)
0 bu 6~ 5 "'
~
::3 TE901 6
TRT
::3 0 P+
(!) AC100V-t40V
("') 7 (/)
TRT
OJ 0
~
80 P-
!,
I
N
~
::3
tJ
Qi' CD~LJ
0~
~
10 _..
E
~
c
~
<a ' CH-I CH-2 CH-3 CtH
iil r-- - - - - - - - - -
=o ~D
3 8901
TB Itt T8112 re 113 rett• T8 917 TB 111
r=~
~D
0
..... I
6\s
P905 J905
~~
~
1
~
I
·-·-..
2
FN<Y
~~
0 ~ ~ u.a.~
r;n I \( ~I 3 I::, I ;:::~
w I IVfllllh I ·"~~·
-4
~ I ~~
,:;.' :::
-4 l ___________ I
~
t R90t
PI09 JI09
UJIWIH;
1w..:..::,..:.:.
·:-:· ~ '--:--
...___
It
- 2 v- 1-- ~ v
I
--· --
TO TO TO
DISPLAY! OISPLAY2 OISPLAY3
NC0- 4990 NCD- 4990 NCD--4990
TB4201 TB4201 TB420 1
Appendix C
Menu Index
IJ
11
11111 11 ' ·•11111 111
Menu Index
C.1 Main ....................................................................................................... C-1
C.2 PI ............................................................................................................ C-5
C.3 TT ........................................................................................................... C-7
C.4 AIS ......................................................................................................... C-8
C.5 AZ .......................................................................................................... C-9
C.6 Track .................................................................................................... C-1 0
C.7 Route ................................................................................................... C-11
C.8 U.Map .................................................................................................. C-12
[.JRC l aapan Radio Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.1 Main
----------------------------------
Main
f- -1 . EBLManeuverSetting-- -- --- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section4. 1.5onpage4-14

I f- 1. EBL Maneuver
I f- 2. Reach
I f- 3. Turn Mode
I L 4. Turn Set
f- 2. File Manager - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 11.1 on page 3-122
1- - 3. RADAR Menu
1- - 1. Process Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3.8. 1 on page 3-93
1- 1. Video Latitude - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3.8. 1. 1 on page 3-93
1- 2. Video Noise Rejection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3 8 1.2 on page 3-94
1- 3. AUTO Dynamic Range - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.1.3 on page 3-94
1- 4. Process Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8.1.4 on page 3-95
1- 5. 2nd Process Mode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3 8 1.5 on poge 3-95
1- 6. Process Switch Range- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3 8 1.6 on page 3-95
1- 7. Fast Target Detection - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.1.7 on page 3-96
1- -8. User Function Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3.9.3 on page 3-115
I 1- - 1. Function1 Setting
I 1- 1. Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3-115
I 1- 2. IR
I 1- 3. Process
I 1- 4. Target Enhance
1- 5. AUTO Sea/Rain
1- 6. Save Present State
1- -9. Next
1- 1. Pulse Length 0.75nm - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page3-117
1- 2. Pulse Length 1.5nm
1- 3. Pulse Length 3/4nm
1- 4. Pulse Length 6/8nm
f- 5. Pulse Length 12nm
1- 6. Pulse Length 16nm
1- -9. Next
1- 1. Video Latitude - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3-117
1- 2. Video Noise Rejection
1- 3. AUTO Dynamic Range
1- 4. Process Switch
1- 5. 2nd Process Mode
1- 6. Process Switch Range
1- 7. Fast Target Detection
1- - 9. Next
1- 1. Trails Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3-117
1- 2. Trails Mode
1- 3. Trails Reference Level
1- 4. Trails Reduction
1- 6. Trails Process
1- 7. Max Interval
1- -9. Next
1- 1. Gain Offset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - page 3-117
~ 2. PRF
1- 3. Small Buoy Detection
1- 4. Fishnet Detectton
1- 5. Antenna Height
1- 8. Set Mode Default
L 9. Initialize
+ 2. Function2 Setting
1- + 3. Function3 Setting
L + 4. Function4 Setting
f- - 2. RADAR Trails Setting
I 1- 1. Trails Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.2. 1 on page 3-97
I 1- 2. Trails Reference Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8.2.2 on page 3-97
I 1- 3. Trails Reduction - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8 2.3 on page 3-98
I 1- 5. Trails Process - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8.2.4 on page 3-98
I L 6. Max Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8.2.5 on page 3-98
C-1 [..JRC) gopanRadi.o Co., .ltd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C 1 Main
----------------------------------
L - 3. TXRX Setting
I ~ 1. PRF Fine Tuning - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 8.3. 1 on page 3-99
I ~ 4. PRF- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1011 3 8 3 2 on page 3-99
I I L 5 . Ice Class Standby Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1011 3 8 3 3 on page 3-99
~ - 4 . Multi Window Setting
~ 1. DIRIDIST EXP Display- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3.8 .8. 1 on page 3-107
~ 2. Numeric NAV INFO - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3 8 .8.2 on page 3-107
~ - 3. Depth Graph Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3 8 8.3 on page 3-107
I ~ 1. Depth Graph Display
I ~ 2. Depth Range
I ~ 3. Time Range
I L 4 . Depth Unit
~ - 4. Wind Graph Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.8.8.4 on page 3-109
I ~ 1. Wind Graph Display
I L 2. Wind Speed Unit
~ - 5 . TEMP Graph Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectJon 3 8 8.5 on page 3 -109
I ~ 1. TEMP Graph Display
I ~ 2 . TEMP Graph Color
I ~ - 3 . TEMP Range
I I ~ 1. Temperature setting (MIN)
I I ~ 2. Temperature setting
I I ~ 4 . Temperature setting
I I L 6. Temperature setting (MAX)
I L 4 . Time Range
L - 6 . Course Bar Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect10n 3.8 8 .6 on page 3-110
I ~ 1. Course Bar Display
I ~ 2. Autopilot Course
I L 3. ROT Scale
~ - 5 . Map Setting
~ - 3. JRC/ERC Setting
~ 1. Day/Night
~ 2. Color of Land
~ 3. Bright of land
~ 4. Color of Sea
~ 5. Bright of Sea
~ 6. Color of Name
~ 7. Bright of Name
~ 8. Bright of Track/Markll1ne
~ - 9. Next
~ 1. LATILON Line
~ 2. Color of UL Line
L 3. Bright of UL Line
~ - 5. Map Display Setting
I L 3. LAT/LON Correction
L 7. Map Draw AZI Mode
~ - 6. NAV Equipment Setting
~ 1 . GYRO Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3 4 14 on page 3-37, section 7.1 2 on page 7-2
~ - 2 . MAG Compass Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3 4. 16 on page 3-38
I ~ 1. Heading Correction
I L 2. Correct Value
L - 3 . Set/Drift Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1o n 3 4. 16. 1 on page 3-39
~ 1. Correction
~ 2. Set
L 3 . Drift
~ - 6. Rx Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.12.1 on page 3-129
~ 1. Heading
~ 2. Speed
~ 3. AIS
~ 4. GPS
~ 5. DLOG
~ 6. Alarm
~ 7. Depth
~ 8. Temperature
~ - 9. Next
~ 1. Wind
~ 2. Current
~ 3. ROT
~ 4. RSA
[~RC ] f)apan Radio Co., .ltd. C-2

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C Menu Index > C 1 Main
----------------------------------
I f- 5. Time Zone
I L 6. Datemme
f- - 7. Sub Menu
f- - 1. Display Color Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -sec/JOn 3 8.5 1 on page 3-101
f- 1. Day/Night - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3.8.5.2 on page 3-101
f- 2. Outer PPI
f- 3. Inner PPI
f- 4 . Character
f- 5. RADAR Video
f- 6. RADAR Trails(Time)
f- 8. Target Symbol
f- - 9. Next
f- 1. Cursor
f- 2. Range Rings
f- 3. EBLNRM/PI
L 4. Own SymboVHLNector
f- - 2. Brilliance Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3.8.5.3 on page 3-102
I f- 1. RADAR Video - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3 8.5 4 on page 3-103
I f- 2. RADAR Trails
I f- 3. Target Symbol - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3.8.5.5 on page 3-103
I f- 4. Range Rings
I f- 5. EBLNRMIPI
I f- 6. Character
I f- 7. Own SymboiiHLNector
I L 8. Keyboard
f- - 3. User Setting
I f- 1. Load User Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.10.2 on page 3- 121
I f- 2. Save User Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.10.1 on page 3-120
I L 3. Delete User Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.10.3 on page 3- 121
f- - 4. Option Key Setting
I f- 1. Option1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3.8 7 on page 3-104
I L 2. Option2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -sec/1on 3.8. 7 on page 3-104
f- - 5. Buzzer Volume - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 3.8.6 on page 3-104
I f- 1. Key ACK
I f- 2. OPE Miss
I f- 3. CPAITCPA Alarm
I f- 4. New Target Alarm
I f- 5. Lost Alarm
I f- 6. Navigation Alarm
I f- 7. System Alarm
I L 8. Inter Switch
f- - 6. Datemme Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2 6 on page 7-18
I f- 1. UTC/LMT
I f- 2. LMT Date
I f- 3. LMT Time
I f- 4. Time Zone
I f- 5. Display Style
I L 6. Synchronize with GPS
f- - 7. Screen Capture Setting
I f- - 1. Select Item
I I f- 1. Graphic
I I f- 2. RADAR Video
I I f- 3. RADAR Trails
I I L 4. Map
I f- 3. File Erase
I f- 4. AUTO Capture Interval
I f- 5. AUTO File Erase
I L 6. File Format
f- - 9. EBUCursor Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 4.1.3 on pege 4-3
I f- 1. EBL 1 Bearing Fix
I f- 2. EBL2 Bearing Fix
I L - 3. Cursor Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -sec/ion 3.8.4 on page 3-100
I I f- 1. EBLNRM Control Cursor
I I f- 2. Cursor Length
I I I L 4. Cursor Pattern
f- - 8. Plot Setting
I L 6. AUTO Backup - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec/1on 3.8.9 on page 3-111
f- - 9. Test Menu- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3. 1 on pege 8-5
I f- - 1. Self Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3. 1 1 on pege 8-6
C- 3 [ .JRC l aopan Ra.dkJ Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index> C.1 Main
----------------------------------
f- - 1. Memory Test
I f- 1. SDRAM
I f- 2. SRAM
I f- 3. FLASH ROM
I L 4 . GRAPHIC
f- 2. TXRX Test
f- 3. Line Test
L 4 . Supply Voltage
f- - 2. Monitor Test - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8 3.1 2 on page 8-8
I f- 1. Pattern 1
I f- 2. Pattern 2
I f- 3. Pattern 3
I f- 4. Pattern 4
I f- 5. Pattern 5
I f- 6. Pattern 6
I f- 7. Pattern 7
I L 8. Pattern 8
f- - 3 . Keyboard Test- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect10n 8.3. 1.3 on page 8-8
I f- 1. Key Test
I f- 2. Buzzer Test
I L 3. Light Test
f- 4 . MON Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - secttOn 8 3 1 4 on page 8-9
f- 5. System Alarm Log - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3.1 5 on page 8-10
L 6. System Information - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 8.3.1.6 on page 8-10
L 0. EXIT
[JRC ] f)opan Radio Co., .ltd. C- 4

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C Menu Index > C 2 PI
----------------------------------
PI
1- 1. Display for All Lines - - - - sect10n 4 1 4 on page 4-8

1- - 2. Operation Mode - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-10
I I- All
I 1- Individual
I 1- Track
I L Equiangular
1- - 3. Control 1 - - - - - - - - - • - - • - - - · • • - • • • - - - - - - • • - - - - - · - - - - - - - - - • - - page 4- 11
1- Ali:All2
1- lndividuai:Sequential
1- lndividual:lndex Line 1
1- Track:Group 1
1- Track:Group 2
1- Track:Group 3
1- Track:Group 4
1- Equiangular:Group 1
L Equiangular:Group 4
1- 4. Floating - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-11
1- 5. Heading Link - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-11
1- 6. Next
1- 8. Press EBL Dial to Control PI~
1- 9. Press VRM Dial to Move End Point#''
1- 1. Range Scale Link - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 4-12
1- - 2. Reference Bearingi· - - · · · - - • • • • - • - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - · page 4-12
1- AII:True4
f- AII:HL
1- lndividuai:True
1- lndividuai:HL
I- lndividual:lndex Line 8
I- Track:True
I- Track:HL
I- Track:lndex Line 1
I 1- Track:lndex Line 2
I L Track:lndex Line 8
1- 3. Operation Area - - - - - - - - - -page 4-13
1- - 4. Display for Individual Line - - - - -page4-13
1.The setting items are determined by the setting of Operation Mode.

2. Operating Mode: Control
3.Displayed only when "3. Control" is Individual.
4.0perating Mode: Reference Bearing
C-5 [ ~RC ] [japan Radio Co., ..tid.

JMA-9172-SA InstruCtion Manual > C.Menu Index > C.2 PI
----------------------------------
I f-- 1. Index Line 1
L
I 8. Index Line 8
f-- 8. Press EBL Dial to Control PI#';
L 9. Press VRM Dial to Move End Point#;;
[JRC] 3opanRadkJCo.,..fid. C -6
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.3 TI
----------------------------------
TT
f- - 1. A ssociation Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.4. 1 on pege 5-38
I f- 1. Association
I f- 2. Proprity
I f- 3. Bearing
I f- 4 . Range
I f- 5. Course
I 1- 6. Speed
1- - 2. Target Track Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2 on pege 5-45
1- 1. Target Track Function - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.2 on pege 5-45
1- -2. Target Track Color- - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2.1 on pege 5-45
1- 1. All
f- 9. Next
L 4. Other
1- - 3. Target Track Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2. 4 on page 5-47
1- 1. All
f- 4 . Target Track No.3
I- 9. Next
L 4. Other
4. Track Memory Interval - - - - section 5.6.2.5 on pege 5-48
1- 5. C lear Track Color - - section 5.6.2.6 on pege 5-48
L - 7. File Operations - - - section 5.6.2. 7 on pege 5-49
I 1- 2. Load Mode
I 1- 3. Load - - - - - - - - - - - -pege 5-50
I 1- 4. Save - - - - - - - - - - - -pege 5-51
I 1- 5. Erase - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -pege 5-52
I L 6. Card T.TRK Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page 5-53
1- - 3. Trial Maneuver - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5. 7 on page 5-54
I 1- 2. Course(EBL)
I 1- 3. Speed(VRM)
I 1- 4. Vector Time
I I 1- 1. Reach
I I f- 3. Turn Radius
1- 4. Target Number Display - - - - - - section 5.2.4 on pege 5-19
L - 9. TT Test Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.2.7 on pege 5-22
1- 1. Test Video - - - - - - section 5.2. 7. 1 on pege 5-23
1- 2. TT Simulator - - - - section 5.2. 7.2 on page 5-24
1- 3. Status - - - - - - - - section 5.2.7.3 on pege 5-25
L 4. Gate Display - - - - section 5.2. 7.4 on pege 5-26
C- 7 (.JRC] dopanRadioCo.,.fid.
JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C 4 AIS
----------------------------------
AIS
1- - 1. Association Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5 4 2 on page ~38

I 1- 1 . Association
I 1- 2. Proprity
I 1- 3. Bearing
I 1- 4. Range
I 1- 5. Course
I 1- 6. Speed
1- - 2. Target Track Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6.2 on page ~5
I 1- 1. Target Track Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 56 2.2 on page ~5
I 1- - 2. Target Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 56 2.1 on page ~5
I 1- 1. All
I 1- 9. Next
L 4. Other
1- - 3. Target Track Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 56 2.4 on page ~4 7
f-1. All
1- 4. Target Track No 3
1- 9. Next
L 4. Other
4. Track Memory Interval - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5 6 2.5 on page ~48
1- 5. Clear Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5.6 2.6 on page ~48
L - 7. File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5 6 2 7 on page ~49
I 1- 2. Load Mode
I 1- 3. Load - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page ~so
-
I 1- 4. Save - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page ~ 1
-
I 1- 5. Erase - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page ~52
-
I L 6. Card T.TRK Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -page ~53
-
f- - 3. Trial Maneuver - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 57 on page ~54
I 1- 2. Course(EBL)
I 1- 3. Speed(VRM)
I 1- 4. Vector lime
I 1- 5. lime to Maneuver
I I 1- 1. Reach
I I 1- 2. Tum Radius
1- - 4. AIS Filter Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 53 7 on page ~33
I 1- 1. Filter Type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 5 3 7 2 on page ~3
I 1- 2. Make AIS Filter - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 53 7 .3 on page ~34
[.JRC] aopanRadio Co.,.ltd. C-8

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C 5 AZ.
----------------------------------
I 1- 3. Filter Display sect1on 5 3 7 4 on page >35
I 1- 4. ENT
I L 6. Filter Mode - - section 53. 7.5 on page >35
1- 5. Target Number Display - secllon 5 3 6 on page >32
1- - 6. AIS Alarm Setting - - - - - sect1on 5.3.9 on pege >37
I 1- 1. Lost Alarm- - - - - section 5.3.9. 1 on page >37
I L 2. CPNTCPA Alarm - - - - - section 5 3.9.2 on page >37
1- - 7. Message - - - - - - - - section 53 5.5 on page >30
I 1- 1. Addressed Message
I L 2. Broadcast Message
1- 8. Display Lost TGT Data section 5.3.5.6 on page >32
L 9. Own Ship's AIS Data - - - - - section 5.3.5. 7 on page >32
AZ
1- 1. AZ1------ section 5.2.1. 1 on page >15

I- 2. AZ 2- - - - - section 5.2.1.1 on pege >15
I- 3. Make AZ 1 section 5 2.1.2 on page > 16
I- 4. Make AZ 2 section 52 1.2 on pege >16
L 5. ENT
C-9 !JRC] aopanRadit:J Co.,.i'Jd.

JMA-91 72-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C 6 Track
----------------------------------
-~m-
--
- ---
- -
==- • ---
-= Track
f- - 1. DISP Own Track Color- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 52 on page 3-41

I f- 1. All
I f- 2. White
I f- 3. Cyan
I f- 4. Blue
I f- 5. Green
I f- 6. Yellow
I f- 7. Pink
I L 8 . Red
f- 2. Clear Own Track Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 55 on page 3-43
f- 3. Track Type - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect/Oil 3 5 6 on page 3-43
f- 4. Num/Vector Display - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 3 5 6 on page 3-43
f- - 5. File Operations
I f- 2. Load Mode
I f- 3. Load
I f- 4. Save
I f- 5. Erase
I L 6. Card Own Track Display
f- - 6. Water Depth Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 5 7 on page 3-45
I f- 1. Depth setting (M IN)
I f- 2. Depth setting
I L 6. Depth setting (MAX)
f-- 7. Water TEMP Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3 5.8 on page 3-46
I f- 1. Temperature setting (MIN)
I f- 2. Temperature setting
I L 6. Temperature setting (MAX)
f- - 8. Current Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1011 3 59 on page 3-4 7
I f- 1. Current Size
I f- 2. Layer A
I f- 3. Layer B
I L 4. Layer C
[JRC] 8opan Radio Co., .lid. C - 10

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.7 Route
----------------------------------
Route
r 1. Select Route - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7. 1 on page 3-68

r- 2. WPT/Route Settig
r 1. Waypoint Alarm - section 3. 7.4. 1 on page 3-80
r 2. Route Alarm- - - section 3. 7.4.2 on page 3-81
r 3. Set Route Sequence- - - - - - - - section 3. 7.2 on page 3-69
r 6. Waypoint Input - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.3 on page 3-76
r 7. Save Temporary Route
r 8. Cross-Track Limit Line- - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.7.6.1 on page 3-84
r- 9 . Next
r 1. SEL. NUM/Comment Size - - section 3. 7.6.2 on page 3-85
r 2. Waypoint Vector- - - - - section 3. 7.6.3 on page 3-85
r 3. Status of Origin/DEST - - - - section 3 . 7. 6.4 on page 3-86
r 4 . WPT Number Display - - - - section 3 7 6.5 on page 3-86
r 6. Route Information Display - - - - - - - section 3 . 7.6.6 on page 3-87
L 7. Map Draw All Mode- section 3 . 7. 6. 7 on page 3-87
r- 3. WPT/Route Operations - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 7.5 on page 3-82
I r 1. Route Sequence- - - - - - - - - - - section 3 . 7. 5. 1 on page 3-82
I r 2. Waypoint Switch Mode- - section 3. 7.6.6 on page 3-87
I r 3. Waypoint Skip- - - - section 3.7.5.2 on page 3-83
I r 4. Waypoint Back Skip - - - section 3. 7.5 .2 on page 3-83
I r 5. Set/Cancel Waypoint
I L 6. Clear WPT/Route Data
r- 4. File Operations - - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 7.8 on page 3-89
I r 1. Select Card Slot- - - - - - - section 3. 7. 8 .1 on page 3-89
I r 2. Load - - - - - - - section 3. 7.8 .3 on page 3-90
I r 3. Save - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 7.8.2 on page 3-89
I L 4. Erase - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 7.8.4 on page 3-91
C-11 [ JRC I aopon RadicJ Co.,.lid.

JMA-9172..SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.8 U.Map
----------------------------------
U.Map
f- 1. Own Ship Position- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3.1 on page 3-53

f- - 2. Edit User Map- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3 on page 3-53
f- - 1. Make with Cursor - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 6. 1.1 on page 3-48
I f- 1. Type
I L 2. Color
f- - 2. Make with UL - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 6. 1.3 on page 3-50
I f- 1. Type
I f- 2. Color
I f- 3. UL
I f- 4. Comment
I f- 5. Enter
I L 9. New Line lnput/9.New Mark Input
f- 3. Move - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3.2 on page 3-54
f- 4. Delete - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3.3 on page 3-56
f- 5. Insert/Move Vertex- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 6.3.4 on page 3-57
f- 6. Delete Vertex - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3.6 on page 3-59
L 7. Delete by Type by Color - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.3.7 on page 3-60
f- 3. Shift- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 3. 6.4. 1 on page 3-61
f- 4. Shift Clear- - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.4.2 on page 3-62
f-- 5. Mark Display Setting- - - - - - • section 3.6.2 on page 3-51
f- - 1. Display Mark Type - - - section 3.6.2.1 on page 3-51
f- 1. All
f- 2. 0
f- 3. ,t,.
f- 4. \1
f- 5. 0
f- 6. 0
f- 7. Wreck (mark)
f- 8. ,t,.,t,.
f- - 9. Next
f- 1. \1\1
f- 2. ,t,. \1
f- 3. \1 ,t,.
f- 4. +
f- 5. X
f- 6. y
f- 7. Hand drum (mark)
f- 8. Light house (mark)
f-- 9. Next
f- 1. Trapezoid (mark)
f- 2. filled Trapezoid (mark)
f- 3. Hat(mark)
f- 4 . • •
f- 5 . •
f- 6. Filled Triangle(mark)
f- 7. !
f- 8. anchor(mark)
f- - 9. Next
f- 1. slash-anchor(mark)
f- 2. circle-dotted line(mark)
f- 3. non-dangerous wreck(mark)
f- 4 .@
f- 5. mariner's event mark(mark)
f- 6 . .
f- 7. Wavy line (mark)
f- 8. Solid line (mark)
L -9. Next
L 1. Dashed-dotted line (mark)
f- - 2. Display Mark Color - - - - - • - - - - - - - - - • • - - - - section 3.6.2.2 on page 3-52
I f- 1. All
I f- 2. White
I f- 3. Cyan
[.JRC I 3opan Radio Co., .ltd. C - 12

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C .8 U.Map
----------------------------------
I I f- 4. Blue
I I f- 5. Green
I I f- 6. Yellow
I I f- 7. Pink
I I L 8 . Red
I f- 3. Select Mark Size section 3.6.2.3 on page 3-52
L 4. Comment Font Size - -
I - - - - - section 3.6.2.4 on page 3-53
f- 6. Geodetic - - - - - - - - section 3.6.6 on page 3-66
L - 7. File Operations - - - - - - - - - - section 3.6.5 on page 3-62
f- 1. Select Card Slot
f- 2. Load Mode section 3.6.5. 1 on page 3-62
f- 3. Load - section 3.6.5. 1 on page 3-62
f- 4. Unload section 3.6.5.2 on page 3-63
f- 5. Save - - - - - - section 3.6.5.3 on page 3-63
f- 6. Erase - section 3.6.5.4 on page 3-64
L 7. Card Mark Display - - - - - - - section 3.6.5.5 on page 3-65
C-13 [.JRC l aapan RtzdicJ Co.,.lid.

JMA-91 72-SA lnstruellon Manual > C .Menu Index > C 9 Sei"VIceman Menu
----------------------------------
Serviceman Menu
!-Serviceman Menu - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 7. 1.1 on page 7- 1

f- - 1. Adjust Menu
I f- 2. Bearing Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7. 1.4 on page 7-5
I f- 3. Range Adjustment - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7. 1.5 on page 7-5
I L - 4. TXRX Adjustment
I I f- 1 . Antenna Height - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
I I L 6 . Output Pulse - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec/ton 7.2.3 on page 7-16
I I L 7 . SSR Mon Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec/ton 7 3.4 on page 7-35
I I f- 2. Tx2 Mon AdJustment
I I f- 4. Rx2 Mon Adjustment
I I f- 5 . Monitor Secter
I I f- 6. monitor Range
I I f- 7. Rx Mon Gain
f- - 2. Installation Menu
I f- - 1. Installation Information- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectton 7 2. 7 on page 7-19
I I f- 1. Date
I I f- 2. Name
I I L 3. Company
I f- 2. Master/Slave - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectton 7 2 4. 1 on page 7-17
I f- - 3. Sector Blank- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2 on page 7-15
I I f- 1. Sector1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.2.1 on page 7-15
I I f- 2. Sector2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.2. 1 on page 7-15
I I f- 3. Sector3 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.2.1 on page 7-15
I I f- 4 . Make Sector1 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.2.2 on page 7-15
I I f- 5. Make Sector2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.2.2 on page 7-15
I I f- 6 . Make Sector3--- -- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec/ton 72.2.2onpage 7-15
I I L 7. ENT- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec/ton 7 2 2.2 on page 7-15
I f- 4. CCRPSetting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - seclton7. 1.9 onpage7-8
I f- - 5. COM Port Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectiOn 7 2. 1 on page 7-11
I f- - 1. Baud Rate - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectton 7 2 1 1 on page 7-11
I I f- 1. COMPASS
I I f- 2. MAINTENANCE/LOG
I I f- 3. NAV1
I I f- 4. NAV2
I I f- 5. ALARM
I f- 6. JARPA
I f- 7. AIS
I f- - 9. Next
I f- 1. ARPA
I L 2. COM
f- - 2. RX Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec/ton 7 2.1.2 on page 7-12
I f- 1. GPS
I f- 2. DLOG
I f- 3. Alarm
I f- 4. Depth
I f- 5. Temperature
I f- 6 . VVtnd
I f- 7. Current
I f- 8. ROT
I f- - 9. Next
I 1- 1. RSA
I L 2. Time Zone
f- - 3. RX Sentence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.1.3 on page 7-13
I f- 1. GPS(LUCOG/SOG)
I f- 2. GPS(WPTITIME)
I f- 3. Depth
I f- 4. VVtnd
I L - 5. Current
I I f- 1. Data Set Number
I I f- 2. Layer A
I I f- 3. Layer B
I I f- 4. Layer C
I I L 6. Autopilot
[JRC] (Japan Radio Co., .lid. C-14

JMA-9172-SA lnstructJon Manual > C .Menu Index > C 9 Serviceman Menu
----------------------------------
f-- - 4. TX Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 7.2 1.4 on page 7-14
f-- 1. TIM(TI)
f-- 2. TLL(TI)
f-- 3. TIO(TI)
f-- 4 . T LB(TI)
f-- 5. oso
f-- 6 . RSD
f-- 7. ALR
f-- 8. ACK
f-- - 9. Next
f-- 1. TIM(AIS)
f-- 2. TLL(AIS)
f-- 3. TID(AIS)
f-- 4 . TLB(AIS)
f-- 5. Remote Maintenance
f-- 6 . JRC-ARPA
f-- 7 . NMEA0183 Output Format
f-- 8. NMEA0183 Talker
f-- - 9. Next
f-- 1. NMEA0183 TX Interval
f-- 2. APB
f-- 3. BOD
f-- 4. GGA
f-- 5. GLL
f-- 6. RMC
f-- 7. RMB
f-- 8. VTG
f-- - 9. Next
f-- 1. XTE
f-- 2. BWC
f-- 3. HOT
L 4. THS
f-- - 7. Line Monitor
I f-- 1. COMPASS
I f-- 2. MAINTENANCE/LOG
I f-- 3. NAV1
I f-- 4. NAV2
I f-- 5. ALARM
I f-- 6. JARPA
I f-- 7. AIS
I f-- - 9. Next
I f-- 1. ARPA
I f-- 2. COM
I f-- 3. TXRX/ISW
I f-- 4. KEYBOARD1
I L 5. KEYBOARD2
f-- - 6. Alarm System - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.8 on page 7-19
f-- - 1. Watch Alarm
I f-- 1. Reset Interval- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec/lon 7 2.8.1 on page 7-19
I L 2. Trackball Threshold - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.8 2 on page 7-20
f-- - 2. Relay Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sec/100 7 2 8 3 on page 7-20
I f-- 1. Relay Output Mode
I f-- 2. TI CPNTCPA
I f-- 3. AIS CPNTCPA
I f-- 4. New Target
I f-- 5. Lost
f--- 3. ALR Output - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.8.4 on page 7-21
I f-- 1. System Alarm
I L 2. TI/AIS Alarm
f-- 4. Sound Output Mode- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 7 2.8.6 on page 7-23
f-- - 5. External ACK Setting - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.8.5 on page 7-22
I f-- - 1. Critical Alarm
I I f-- 1. Audio
I I f-- 21ndication
I f-- - 2. Normal Alarm
I I f-- 1. Audio
I I f-- 2. Indication
- 7. Inter Switch
C-15 [ .JRC] gapan. Radio Co.,.tfd.

JMA-9172-SA Instruction Manual > C.Menu Index > C.9 Serv1ceman Menu
----------------------------------
I I- 1. ISW Install
I I- - 2. Mask Setting
I I I- 1. No.1 Connection/No.1 Master
I I I- 5. No.5 Connection/No.S Master1
I I I- 6. No.6 Connection/No.6 Maste~
I I I- 7. No.7 Connection/No.? Maste~
I I L 8. No.8 Connection/No.8 Master'
I L 3. S-ISW TXRX Power Supply
I- 8. Language - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.5 on page 7-17
1- -9. Next
1- 1. Input BP Count - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2 4 2 on page 7-17
1- - 3. Device Installation - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 7 1 6 on page 7-6
I 1- 1. Gyro
I 1- 2. Compass
I 1- 4 . LOG
I I- 5. 2AXW
I I- 6. 2AXG
I L 7. GPS
1- - 4 . Network
I 1- 1. Network Function - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2 9 1 on page 7-25
I 1- 2. IP Address
I 1- 3. Sensor Priority- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.2.9 2 on page 7-25
I L 4. Synchronization - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2.9 3 on page 7-26
1- - 5. LAN Port Setting
I 1- 1. TX Setting- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 2 10 1 on page 7-27
I 1- 2. RX Port - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 7.2.10.2 on page 7-28
I I- 3. RX Sentence - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -section 7.2. 10.3 on page 7-29
I L 7. Line Monitor
1- - 3. Maintenance Menu
I 1- 1. Safety Switch - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 7 4 1 on page 7-38
I 1- -2. Area Initial- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 4 2 on page 7-39
I I L - 1. Partial Master Reset - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 4 2. 1 on page 7-39
I I I 1- 1. Serviceman Menu
I I I 1- 2. Except Serviceman Menu
I I I 1- 3. User Setting
I I I 1- 4 . TT Setting
I I I I- 5. AIS Setting
I I I 1- 6. Day/Night
I I I L 7. JRC Card Copy Record
I I L 2. All Master Reset- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 7 4 2 2 on page 7-39
I I- 3. Internal To Card1/2 - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 4 3 1 on page 7-40
I 1- 4. Card1/2 To Internal - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 7 4 3 2 on page 7-40
I 1- - 5. TXRX Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sectiOfl 7 4 4 on page 7-41
I I 1- 1. Clear TX Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4 1 on page 7-41
I I I- 2. Clear Motor Time - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4.2 on page 7-41
I I 1- 3. TXRX to Display Unit - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.4.4 3 on page 7-42
I I L 4. Display Unit to TXRX - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect10n 7 4 4 4 on page 7-42
I L 6. String Data Update - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 7 4 5 on page 7-43
L - 9 . RADARITT Initial Setup
1- -1 . Signal Processing - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.31 on page 7-30
I 1- 1. Echo Noise Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 7.3 1 1 on page 7-30
I L 2. Setting Mode - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3 1 2 on page 7-31
1- - 2. TT- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 3 2 on page 7-31
I 1- 1. Vector Constant - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7.3 2 1 on page 7-31
I 1- 2. Video TO Level - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 3 2 2 on page 7-32
I I- 3. Video High Level
I 1- 4. Video Low Level
I 1- 5. Gate Size
I L 6. Limit Ring
L - 3. MBS- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 7 3 3 on page 7-33
I 1- 1. MBS Level- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - sect1on 7. 3 3 1 on page 7-33
I L 2. MBS Area - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - section 7 3 3 2 on page 7-34
1.Only for ISW Extended Mode
[~RC I 8opan Radio Co., .i'Jd. C - 16

Hyundai

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hyundai

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Hyundai

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

JMA-9133-SA

1 INTRODUCTION ......... ................................................................................. ..... 1

IMO NO. : 9683415

3980 2419 SILVER LINDA

APPROVED : P.W . LEE

About r ad a r equipm ent

A bo ut sea clutter uppression

About rain/snow clutter suppression

About ta rget tra cking (TT) function

1 Check that the ship's mains are turned on.

2 Press the [POWER] key.

3 Wait until the preheating time is over.

4 Press the [TX I STBY] key.

2 Press the [POWER] key.

2.3 Adjust Monitor Brilliance [BRILL]

1 Obtain the best-to-see display with optimum brilliance by turning the

1 When increasing the observation range, press the [RANGE+] key.

2 When decreasing the observation range, press the [RANGE-] key.

2.5 Adjust Gain [GAIN]

1 Turning the [GAIN] dial.

2.6 Suppress Sea Clutter [SEA]

Using the manual sea clutter suppression mode

1 Turning the [SEA] dial.

1 Press the [SEA] dial.

2 Make adjustments by turning the [SEA] dial.

1 Press the [SEA] dial.

Using the manual rain I snow clutter suppression mode

1 Turning the [RAIN] dial.

Using the automatic rain I snow clutter suppression mode

1 Press the [RAIN] dial.

1 Press the [RAIN] dial.

2.8 Using Electronic Bearing Line (EBL 1 I EBL2)

[I] Operating EBL {EBL)

1 Press the [EBL 1] or [EBL2] key.

2 Turn the [EBL] dial.

1 Press the [EBL 1] or [EBL2] key again.

[111 Moving the Starting Point of EBL

To move the starting point of EBL

1 Make EBL 1 or EBL2 operable.

3 Put t he cursor on the EBL starting point is to be moved, and left-click.

1 Make EBL1 or EBL2 operable.

2.9 Using Variable Range Marker (VRM1 I VRM2)

1 Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key.

1 Press the [VRM1] or [VRM2] key again.

2.10 Switch Transmitter Pulse Length [GAIN]

1 Press the [GAIN] dial.

2.11 Switch Azimuth Display Mode (AZI Mode)

The azimuth display modes are switched.

Switching Motion Display Mode

1 Put the cursor on the motion mode true I TM II relative I RM I

The motion display mode are switched.

1 Hold down the motion mode true I relative switching I TM I for

Changing the length of the trail

Values of the length of the radar trai I are switched.

Erasing Trails Data

Changing Motion Mode of Trails (Trails mode)

The trails motion modes are switched.

1 Put the cursor on the target to be acquired, and press the

3.2 Display Tracked Target Data [TGT DATA]